5MB

The following document contains information on Cypress products.
FUJITSU SEMICONDUCTOR
CONTROLLER MANUAL
CM71-10114-4E
FR60
32-BIT MICROCONTROLLER
MB91301 Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
FR60
32-BIT MICROCONTROLLER
MB91301 Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
Be sure to refer to the “Check Sheet” for the latest cautions on development.
“Check Sheet” is seen at the following support page
URL : http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/microelectronics/product/micom/support/index.html
“Check Sheet” lists the minimal requirement items to be checked to prevent problems beforehand in system development.
FUJITSU LIMITED
PREFACE
■ Objectives and Intended Reader
Thank you for using Fujitsu semiconductor products.
The MB91301 series is a standard microcontroller that has a 32-bit high-performance RISC
CPU as well as built-in I/O resources and bus control mechanisms for embedded controller that
requires high-performance and high-speed CPU processing. Although the MB91301 series
basically uses external bus access to support a vast address space accessed by a 32-bit CPU,
it has a 4 Kbytes instruction cache memory and 4 Kbytes RAM (for data) to increase the speed
at which the CPU executes instructions.
The MB91301 series is most suitable for embedded applications, such as digital video cameras,
navigation systems, and DVD players, that require a high level of CPU processing power.
The MB91301 series is one of the FR60 of microcontrollers, which are based on the FR30/40 of
CPUs. It has enhanced bus access and is optimized for high-speed use.
This manual is intended for engineers who will develop products using the MB91301 series and
describes the functions and operations of the MB91301 series. Read this manual thoroughly.
For more information on instructions, see the "Instructions Manual".
Note: FR, which is an abbreviation of FUJITSU RISC controller, is a product of FUJITSU
LIMITED.
■ Trademarks
The company names and brand names herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
■ License
Purchase of Fujitsu I2C components conveys a license under the Philips I2C Patent Rights to
use, these components in an I2C system provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard
Specification as defined by Philips.
i
■ Structure of This Manual
This manual consists of the following 20 chapters and an appendix.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
This chapter provides basic information required to understand the MB91301 series, and
covers features, a block diagram, and functions.
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
This chapter provides precautions on handling the MB91301 series.
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
This chapter provides basic information required to understand the functions of the MB91301
series. It covers architecture, specifications, and instructions.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
The external bus interface controller controls the interfaces with the internal bus for chips
and with external memory and I/O devices.
This chapter explains each function of the external bus interface and its operation.
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
This chapter describes the I/O ports and the configuration and functions of registers.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
This chapter describes the 16-bit reload timer, the configuration and functions of registers,
and 16-bit reload timer operation.
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
This chapter describes the U-TIMER, the configuration and functions of registers, and UTIMER operation.
CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER
This chapter describes the external interrupt and NMI controller, the configuration and
functions of registers, and operation of the external interrupt and NMI controller.
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
This chapter describes the functions and operation of the delayed interrupt module.
CHAPTER 10 DELAYED INTERUPT MODULE
This chapter describes the interrupt controller, the configuration and functions of registers,
and interrupt controller operation. It also presents an example of using the hold request
cancellation request function.
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
This chapter describes the A/D converter, the configuration and functions of registers, and A/
D converter operation.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
This chapter describes the UART, the configuration and functions of registers, and UART
operation.
CHAPTER 13 UART
This chapter describes the I2C interface, the configuration and functions of registers, and I2C
interface operation.
ii
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
This chapter describes the DMA controller (DMAC), the configuration and functions of
registers, and DMAC operation.
CHAPTER 15 BIT SEARCH MODULE
This chapter describes the bit search module, the configuration and functions of registers,
and bit search module operation.
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
This chapter describes the bit search module, the configuration and functions of registers,
and bit search module operation.
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
This chapter describes the bit search module, the configuration and functions of registers,
and bit search module operation.
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE
This chapter describes the bit search module, the configuration and functions of registers,
and bit search module operation.
CHAPTER 19
PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL
INTEGRATED MODEL))
This chapter describes the bit search module, the configuration and functions of registers,
and bit search module operation.
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
This chapter describes the bit search module, the configuration and functions of registers,
and bit search module operation.
APPENDIX
This appendix consists of the following parts: I/O map, interrupt vector, pin states in the CPU
state, notes on using a little endian area, and instruction lists. The appendix contains
detailed information that could not be included in the main text and reference material for
programming.
iii
•
•
•
•
•
•
The contents of this document are subject to change without notice.
Customers are advised to consult with FUJITSU sales representatives before ordering.
The information, such as descriptions of function and application circuit examples, in this document are presented
solely for the purpose of reference to show examples of operations and uses of Fujitsu semiconductor device;
Fujitsu does not warrant proper operation of the device with respect to use based on such information. When you
develop equipment incorporating the device based on such information, you must assume any responsibility arising
out of such use of the information. Fujitsu assumes no liability for any damages whatsoever arising out of the use of
the information.
Any information in this document, including descriptions of function and schematic diagrams, shall not be construed
as license of the use or exercise of any intellectual property right, such as patent right or copyright, or any other
right of Fujitsu or any third party or does Fujitsu warrant non-infringement of any third-party' s intellectual property
right or other right by using such information. Fujitsu assumes no liability for any infringement of the intellectual
property rights or other rights of third parties which would result from the use of information contained herein.
The products described in this document are designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated for general
use, including without limitation, ordinary industrial use, general office use, personal use, and household use, but
are not designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated (1) for use accompanying fatal risks or dangers
that, unless extremely high safety is secured, could have a serious effect to the public, and could lead directly to
death, personal injury, severe physical damage or other loss (i.e., nuclear reaction control in nuclear facility, aircraft
flight control, air traffic control, mass transport control, medical life support system, missile launch control in weapon
system), or (2) for use requiring extremely high reliability (i.e., submersible repeater and artificial satellite).
Please note that Fujitsu will not be liable against you and/or any third party for any claims or damages arising in
connection with above-mentioned uses of the products.
Any semiconductor devices have an inherent chance of failure. You must protect against injury, damage or loss
from such failures by incorporating safety design measures into your facility and equipment such as redundancy,
fire protection, and prevention of over-current levels and other abnormal operating conditions.
If any products described in this document represent goods or technologies subject to certain restrictions on export
under the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan, the prior authorization by Japanese government will
be required for export of those products from Japan.
Copyright ©2004-2007 FUJITSU LIMITED All rights reserved.
iv
How to Read This Manual
■ Terms Used in This Manual
The following defines principal terms used in this manual.
Term
Meaning
I-bus
32 bit bus for internal instructions. In the FR family, which is based on an internal
Harvard architecture, independent buses are used for instructions and data. A
bus converter is connected to the I-bus.
D-bus
Internal 32-bit data bus. An internal resource is connected to the D-bus.
F-bus
Internal instructions and data are multiplexed on a Princeton bus.
The F-bus is connected to the I-bus and D-bus via a switch. The F-bus is
connected to built-in resources such as ROM and RAM.
X-bus
External interface bus.
The X-bus is connected to the external interface module.
Data and instructions are multiplexed on an external bus.
R-bus
Internal 16-bit data bus. The R-bus is connected to the F-bus via an adapter. An
I-O, clock generator, and interrupt controller are connected to the R-bus.
Since addresses and data are multiplexed on an R-bus that is 16 bits wide, more
than one cycle is required for the CPU to access these resources.
E-unit
Execution unit for operations.
CLKP
System clock. Clock generated by the clock generator for each of the internal
resources connected to the R-bus. This clock has the same frequency as the
source oscillation at its maximum, but becomes a 1, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/7,
...1/16 (or 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, ...1/32) frequency clock as determined by the divide-by
rate specified by the B3 to B0 bits in the clock generator DIVR0 register.
CLKB
System clock. Operating clock for the CPU and each of the other resources
connected to a bus other than the R-bus and X-bus.
This clock has the same frequency as the source oscillation at its maximum, but
becomes a 1, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/7, ..., 1/16 (or 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, ..., 1/32)
frequency clock as determined by the divided-by rate specified by the P3 to P0
bits in the clock generator DIVR0 register.
CLKT
System clock. Operating clock for the external resources connected to the X-bus.
This clock has the same frequency as the source oscillation at its maximum, but
becomes a 1, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/7, ..., 1/16 (or 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, ..., 1/32)
frequency clock as determined by the divided-by rate specified by the T3 to T0
bits in the clock generator DIVR1 register.
v
vi
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
CHAPTER 2
2.1
2.2
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 1
Features of the MB91301 Series ........................................................................................................ 2
Block Diagram .................................................................................................................................... 7
Package Dimensions .......................................................................................................................... 8
Pin Layout ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Pin No. Table .................................................................................................................................... 13
List of Pin Functions ......................................................................................................................... 15
I/O Circuit Types ............................................................................................................................... 26
HANDLING THE DEVICE .......................................................................... 31
Precautions on Handling the Device ................................................................................................. 32
Precautions on Handling Power Supplies ......................................................................................... 39
CHAPTER 3
CPU AND CONTROL UNITS ..................................................................... 41
3.1
Memory Space .................................................................................................................................. 42
3.2
Internal Architecture .......................................................................................................................... 45
3.3
Instruction Cache .............................................................................................................................. 50
3.3.1
Configuration of the Instruction Cache ........................................................................................ 51
3.3.2
Configuration of the Control Registers ........................................................................................ 54
3.3.3
Instruction Cache Statuses and Settings ..................................................................................... 58
3.3.4
Setting up the Instruction Cache before Use ............................................................................... 60
3.4
Dedicated Registers ......................................................................................................................... 63
3.4.1
Program Status (PS) Register ..................................................................................................... 66
3.5
General-Purpose Registers .............................................................................................................. 70
3.6
Data Structure ................................................................................................................................... 71
3.7
Word Alignment ................................................................................................................................ 72
3.8
Memory Map ..................................................................................................................................... 73
3.9
Branch Instructions ........................................................................................................................... 74
3.9.1
Operation of Branch Instructions with Delay Slot ........................................................................ 75
3.9.2
Operation of Branch Instruction without Delay Slot ..................................................................... 78
3.10 EIT (Exception, Interrupt, and Trap) ................................................................................................. 79
3.10.1 EIT Interrupt Levels ..................................................................................................................... 80
3.10.2 Interrupt Control Register (ICR) ................................................................................................... 82
3.10.3 System Stack Pointer (SSP) ........................................................................................................ 83
3.10.4 Table Base Register (TBR) ......................................................................................................... 84
3.10.5 Multiple EIT Processing ............................................................................................................... 88
3.10.6 EIT Operations ............................................................................................................................ 90
3.11 Reset (Device Initialization) .............................................................................................................. 94
3.11.1 Reset Levels ................................................................................................................................ 95
3.11.2 Reset Sources ............................................................................................................................. 96
3.11.3 Reset Sequence .......................................................................................................................... 98
3.11.4 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time .............................................................................................. 99
3.11.5 Reset Operation Modes ............................................................................................................. 101
vii
3.12 Clock Generation Control ...............................................................................................................
3.12.1 PLL Controls ..............................................................................................................................
3.12.2 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time and PLL Lock Wait Time ....................................................
3.12.3 Clock Distribution .......................................................................................................................
3.12.4 Clock Division ............................................................................................................................
3.12.5 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Controller ..........................................................................
3.12.6 Register of Clock Generation Controller ....................................................................................
3.12.7 Peripheral Circuits of Clock Controller .......................................................................................
3.12.8 Smooth Startup and Stop of Clock ............................................................................................
3.13 Device State Control .......................................................................................................................
3.13.1 Device States and State Transitions .........................................................................................
3.13.2 Low-power Modes .....................................................................................................................
3.14 Operating Modes ............................................................................................................................
CHAPTER 4
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
125
128
131
133
136
140
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE ................................................................ 143
4.1
Overview of the External Bus Interface ..........................................................................................
4.2
External Bus Interface Registers ....................................................................................................
4.2.1
Area Select Registers 0 to 7(ASR0 to ASR7) ............................................................................
4.2.2
Area Configuration Registers 0 to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7) ...............................................................
4.2.3
Area Wait Register (AWR0 to AWR7) .......................................................................................
4.2.4
Memory setting register (MCRA for SDRAM/FCRAM auto-precharge OFF mode) ...................
4.2.5
Memory setting register (MCRB for FCRAM auto-precharge ON mode) ..................................
4.2.6
I/O Wait Registers for DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1) ........................................................................
4.2.7
Chip Select Enable Register (CSER) ........................................................................................
4.2.8
Cache Enable Register (CHER) ................................................................................................
4.2.9
Pin/Timing Control Register (TCR) ............................................................................................
4.2.10 Refresh Control Register (RCR) ................................................................................................
4.3
Setting Example of the Chip Select Area ........................................................................................
4.4
Endian and Bus Access ..................................................................................................................
4.4.1
Big Endian Bus Access .............................................................................................................
4.4.2
Little Endian Bus Access ...........................................................................................................
4.4.3
Comparison of Big Endian and Little Endian External Access ..................................................
4.5
Operation of the Ordinary Bus Interface .........................................................................................
4.5.1
Basic Timing ..............................................................................................................................
4.5.2
Operation of WRn + Byte Control Type .....................................................................................
4.5.3
Read -> Write Operation ............................................................................................................
4.5.4
Write -> Write Operation ............................................................................................................
4.5.5
Auto-Wait Cycle .........................................................................................................................
4.5.6
External Wait Cycle ...................................................................................................................
4.5.7
Synchronous Write Enable Output ............................................................................................
4.5.8
CSn Delay Setting .....................................................................................................................
4.5.9
CSn -> RD/WRn Setup and RD/WRn -> CSn Hold Setting .......................................................
4.5.10 DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> Memory) .......................................................................................
4.5.11 DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory -> I/O) .......................................................................................
4.6
Burst Access Operation ..................................................................................................................
4.7
Address/data Multiplex Interface ....................................................................................................
4.8
Prefetch Operation ..........................................................................................................................
viii
144
149
150
152
158
167
169
170
172
174
175
177
181
182
184
191
196
202
203
204
206
207
208
209
210
212
213
214
215
216
218
221
4.9
SDRAM/FCRAM Interface Operation .............................................................................................
4.9.1
Self Refresh ...............................................................................................................................
4.9.2
Power-on Sequence ..................................................................................................................
4.9.3
Connecting SDRAM/FCRAM to Many Areas ............................................................................
4.9.4
Address Multiplexing Format .....................................................................................................
4.9.5
Memory Connection Example ...................................................................................................
4.10 DMA Access Operation ..................................................................................................................
4.10.1 DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> Memory) .......................................................................................
4.10.2 DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory -> I/O) .......................................................................................
4.10.3 DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> SDRAM/FCRAM) .........................................................................
4.10.4 DMA Fly-By Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM -> I/O) .........................................................................
4.10.5 2-Cycle Transfer (Internal RAM -> External I/O, RAM) .............................................................
4.10.6 2-Cycle Transfer (External -> I/O) .............................................................................................
4.10.7 2-Cycle Transfer (I/O -> External) .............................................................................................
4.10.8 2-Cycle Transfer (I/O -> SDRAM/FCRAM) ................................................................................
4.10.9 2-Cycle Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM -> I/O) ................................................................................
4.11 Bus Arbitration ................................................................................................................................
4.12 Procedure for Setting a Register ....................................................................................................
4.13 Notes on Using the External Bus Interface .....................................................................................
CHAPTER 5
5.1
5.2
16-BIT RELOAD TIMER ........................................................................... 269
Overview of the 16-bit Reload Timer ..............................................................................................
16-bit Reload Timer Registers ........................................................................................................
Control Status Register (TMCSR) .............................................................................................
16-bit Timer Register (TMR:TMR2 to TMR0) ............................................................................
16-bit Reload Register (TMRLR:TMRLR2 to TMRLR0) ............................................................
16-bit Reload Timer Operation .......................................................................................................
Operating States of the Counter .....................................................................................................
Precautions on Using the 16-bit Reload Timer ...............................................................................
CHAPTER 7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.4
7.5
7.6
I/O PORT .................................................................................................. 257
Overview of the I/O Port ................................................................................................................. 258
I/O Port Registers ........................................................................................................................... 260
CHAPTER 6
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.3
6.4
6.5
224
228
229
230
231
232
236
237
239
241
243
247
248
249
250
251
252
254
255
270
271
272
275
276
277
279
280
PPG TIMER .............................................................................................. 281
Overview of PPG Timer ..................................................................................................................
Block Diagram of PPG Timer ..........................................................................................................
Registers of PPG Timer ..................................................................................................................
Control Status Registers (PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0, PCNL:PCNL3 to PCNL0) .......................
PPG Cycle Set Register (PCSR:PCSR3 to PCSR0) .................................................................
PPG Duty Set Register (PDUT:PDUT3 to PDUT0) ...................................................................
PPG Timer Register (PTMR:PTMR3 to PTMR0) .......................................................................
General Control Register 10 (GCN10) ......................................................................................
General Control Register 20 (GCN20) ......................................................................................
PPG Operation ...............................................................................................................................
One-shot Operation ........................................................................................................................
PPG Timer Interrupt Source and Timing Chart ...............................................................................
ix
282
283
285
286
290
291
292
293
296
297
299
301
7.7
7.8
Activating Multiple Channels by Using the General Control Register ............................................. 303
Notes on Use of the PPG Timer ..................................................................................................... 305
CHAPTER 8
8.1
8.2
8.3
U-TIMER ................................................................................................... 307
Overview of the U-TIMER ............................................................................................................... 308
U-TIMER Registers ......................................................................................................................... 309
U-TIMER Operation ........................................................................................................................ 313
CHAPTER 9
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER ............................... 315
9.1
Overview of the External Interrupt and NMI Controller ...................................................................
9.2
External Interrupt and NMI Controller Registers .............................................................................
9.2.1
Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR) ...............................................................................................
9.2.2
External Interrupt Request Register (EIRR) ..............................................................................
9.2.3
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register (ELVR) ........................................................
9.3
Operation of the External Interrupt and NMI Controller ..................................................................
316
317
318
319
320
321
CHAPTER 10 DELAYED INTERUPT MODULE ............................................................. 325
10.1
10.2
10.3
Overview of the Delayed Interrupt Module ..................................................................................... 326
Delayed Interrupt Module Registers ............................................................................................... 327
Operation of the Delayed Interrupt Module ..................................................................................... 328
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER ................................................................... 329
11.1 Overview of the Interrupt Controller ................................................................................................
11.2 Interrupt Controller Registers ..........................................................................................................
11.2.1 Interrupt Control Register (ICR) .................................................................................................
11.2.2 Hold Request Cancellation Request Level Setting Register (HRCL) ........................................
11.3 Interrupt Controller Operation .........................................................................................................
11.4 Example of Using the Hold Request Cancellation Request Function (HRCR) ...............................
330
332
334
336
337
343
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER .................................................................................... 345
12.1 Overview of the A/D Converter .......................................................................................................
12.2 A/D Converter Registers .................................................................................................................
12.2.1 Control Status Register (ADCS) ................................................................................................
12.2.2 Data Register (ADCR) ...............................................................................................................
12.2.3 Conversion result register (ADCR0 to ADCR3) .........................................................................
12.3 A/D Converter Operation ................................................................................................................
12.4 Precautions on the Using A/D Converter ........................................................................................
346
348
349
354
355
356
358
CHAPTER 13 UART ........................................................................................................ 359
13.1 Overview of the UART ....................................................................................................................
13.2 UART Registers ..............................................................................................................................
13.2.1 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ......................................................................................................
13.2.2 Serial Control Register (SCR) ...................................................................................................
13.2.3 Serial Input Data Register (SIDR)/Serial Output Data Register (SODR) ...................................
13.2.4 Serial Status Register (SSR) .....................................................................................................
13.3 UART Operation .............................................................................................................................
13.3.1 Asynchronous (Start-stop Synchronization) Mode ....................................................................
x
360
362
363
365
368
369
373
374
13.3.2 CLK Synchronous Mode ............................................................................................................
13.3.3 Occurrence of Interrupts and Timing for Setting Flags ..............................................................
13.4 Example of Using the UART ...........................................................................................................
13.5 Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload Values ......................................................
375
377
380
382
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC) .................................................................. 383
14.1 Overview of the DMA Controller (DMAC) .......................................................................................
14.2 DMA Controller (DMAC) Registers .................................................................................................
14.2.1 Control/Status Registers A (DMACA0 to DMACA4) ..................................................................
14.2.2 Control/Status Registers B (DMACB0 to DMACB4) ..................................................................
14.2.3 Transfer Source/Transfer Destination Address Setting Registers
(DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4) ..........................................................................
14.2.4 DMAC All-Channel Control Register (DMACR) .........................................................................
14.2.5 Other Functions .........................................................................................................................
14.3 DMA Controller (DMAC) Operation ................................................................................................
14.3.1 Setting a Transfer Request ........................................................................................................
14.3.2 Transfer Sequence ....................................................................................................................
14.3.3 General Aspects of DMA Transfer .............................................................................................
14.3.4 Addressing Mode .......................................................................................................................
14.3.5 Data Types ................................................................................................................................
14.3.6 Transfer Count Control ..............................................................................................................
14.3.7 CPU Control ..............................................................................................................................
14.3.8 Hold Arbitration ..........................................................................................................................
14.3.9 Operation from Starting to End/Stopping ...................................................................................
14.3.10 DMAC Interrupt Control .............................................................................................................
14.3.11 Channel Selection and Control ..................................................................................................
14.3.12 Supplement on External Pin and Internal Operation Timing .....................................................
14.4 Operation Flowcharts ......................................................................................................................
14.5 Data Bus .........................................................................................................................................
14.6 DMA External Interface ...................................................................................................................
14.6.1 Input Timing of the DREQx Pin .................................................................................................
14.6.2 FR30 Compatible Mode of DACK ..............................................................................................
384
386
388
393
400
402
404
405
408
410
414
416
417
418
419
420
421
425
426
428
432
435
438
439
441
CHAPTER 15 BIT SEARCH MODULE ........................................................................... 443
15.1
15.2
15.3
Overview of the Bit Search Module ................................................................................................ 444
Bit Search Module Registers .......................................................................................................... 445
Bit Search Module Operation .......................................................................................................... 447
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 449
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
Overview of the I2C Interface ..........................................................................................................
I2C Interface Registers ...................................................................................................................
Block Diagram of I2C Interface .......................................................................................................
Detailed on Registers of the I2C Interface ......................................................................................
I2C Interface Operation ...................................................................................................................
Operation Flowcharts ......................................................................................................................
xi
450
451
453
454
468
473
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER ....................................................................... 477
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
Overview of 16-bit Free Run Timer .................................................................................................
Registers of the 16-bit Free Run Timer ..........................................................................................
Block Diagram of the 16-bit Free Run Timer ..................................................................................
Details on Registers of the 16-bit Free Run Timer .........................................................................
Operation of the 16-bit Free Run Timer ..........................................................................................
Precautions on Using the 16-bit Free Run Timer ...........................................................................
478
479
480
481
485
487
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE ..................................................................................... 489
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
Overview of Input Capture ..............................................................................................................
Input Capture Registers ..................................................................................................................
Block Diagram of Input Capture ......................................................................................................
Details on Registers of Input Capture .............................................................................................
Operation of Input Capture .............................................................................................................
490
491
492
493
495
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A
(IPL INTEGRATED MODEL)) .................................................................. 497
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
Overview of the Program Loader Mode ..........................................................................................
Setting the Program Loader ............................................................................................................
Operations in the Program Loader Mode .......................................................................................
Example of Using the Program Loader Mode to Write to Flash Memory .......................................
498
499
500
511
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE .............. 515
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
Overview .........................................................................................................................................
Memory Map ...................................................................................................................................
Specifications for REALOS/FR Embedded in MB91302A-010 .......................................................
Section Allocation ...........................................................................................................................
Startup Routine ...............................................................................................................................
Initial Settings for SOFTUNE Workbench and REALOS/FR ..........................................................
Mode Pins, Mode Vectors, and Reset Vectors ...............................................................................
Chip Evaluation System ..................................................................................................................
516
517
518
520
521
522
530
534
APPENDIX ......................................................................................................................... 535
APPENDIX A I/O MAP ...............................................................................................................................
APPENDIX B INTERRUPT VECTOR ........................................................................................................
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE ......................................................................................
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA ....................................................................
D.1 C Compiler (fcc911) .......................................................................................................................
D.2 Assembler (fasm911) .....................................................................................................................
D.3 Linker (flnk911) ..............................................................................................................................
D.4 Debugger (sim911, eml911, mon911) ............................................................................................
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS .........................................................................................................
E.1 How to Read the Instruction Lists ..................................................................................................
E.2 FR Family Instruction Lists .............................................................................................................
536
548
552
564
565
568
570
571
572
573
578
INDEX................................................................................................................................... 597
xii
Main changes in this edition
Page
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
-
Part number is deleted.
(MB91301, MB91V301)
2
Table is changed in ■ Features of the MB91301 Series.
(MB91301 is changed.)
6
MB91301 and MB91V301are deleted in ■ Product Line-up is changed.
7
Figure 1.2-1 Block Diagram is changed.
8
Summary is changed in 1.3 Package Dimensions.
(The MB91301 series is available in one type of package. → The MB91301 series is available in three
types of package.)
12
Figure 1.4-2 Pin Layout of the MB91302A is changed.
(FPT-144P-M08 is added.)
13
Pin Name is changed in Table 1.5-1 MB91V301A Pin No. Table (Package: PGA-179C-A03) (1 / 2).
No.49(LABA → LBA)
17
Pin name and Function are changed in the Pin No. 42 of Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power
Supply, and GND Pins) (3 / 10).
(SWR → SWE)
32
■ Quartz Oscillation Circuit is changed.
(Added the description; Please ask the crystal maker to evaluate the oscillational characteristics of the
crystal and this device.)
33
❍ Notes on during operation of PLL clock mode is changed.
34
❍ Low-power consumption mode is changed.
(Deleted the description; In addition, please set I flag, ILM, and ICR to diverge to the interruption handler
that is the return factor after the standby returns.)
(1) is changed in ❍ Low-power consumption mode.
43
Figure 3.1-1 Memory Map is changed.
(Figure is renewed.)
60
❍ Initialization is changed.
(ldi #0x000003C7, r0 → ldi #0x000003E7, r0)
85, 87
97
Table 3.10-4 Vector Table is changed.
(Instruction break exception → Reserved for system)
(Operand break trap → Reserved for system)
(Deleted the description; * : Reserved for system (MB91301, MB91V301))
■ Watchdog Reset is changed.
(Unless A5H/5AH is written to the watchdog reset postpone register (WPR) → Unless A5H/5AH is written to the timebase counter clear register (CTBR))
xiii
Page
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
103
■ Clock Generation Control is changed.
(The followings sentences are added. The following section describes the generation and control of each
clock. For detailed information about the registers and flags described below, see "3.12.5 Block Diagram
of Clock Generation Controller" and "3.12.6 Register of Clock Generation Controller".
The symbol "φ", which is shown in Table 3.12-4, Table 3.12-9, Table 3.12-13, Table 3.12-16, Table 3.1220, Table 3.12-21 and Table 3.12-22, indicates the basic clock that is achieved by dividing the source clock
by two or performing PLL oscillation. Therefore, the system base clock is the clock which is generated
where the above base clock is generated.)
109
Figure 3.12-1 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Controller is changed.
( [Watchdog controller] is changed.)
112
Note is added.
114
Table 3.12-9 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Settings is changed.
(CS1 → OS1)
(CS0 → OS0)
116
[bit9] SYNCR (SYNChronous Reset enable) is changed.
117
■ Time Base Counter Clear Register (CTBR) is changed.
(The followings sentences are added. The bits are automatically cleared when the CPU is not in operation
in such cases as stop/sleep mode and DMA transfer. Therefore, if the above conditions occur, the watchdog
reset is delayed automatically. However, it will not be delayed, if a request to hold an external bus (BRQ)
has been accepted. For this reason, select the sleep mode before entering a hold request (BRQ), when
intending to hold the external bus for a long period.)
(119)
■ Watchdog Reset Postpone Register (WPR) is deleted.
125
[Postponing a watchdog reset] is changed.
(Once the watchdog timer is started, the program must write {A5H} and {5AH} in this order to the watchdog reset postpone register (WPR). → Once the watchdog timer is started, the program must write "A5H"
and "5AH" in this order to the time base counter clear register (CTBR).)
136
[Sleep mode transition] is added.
137
❍ Synchronous standby operations is changed.
(❍ Normal and synchronous standby operations → ❍ Synchronous standby operations)
138
■ Stop Mode is changed.
([Stop mode transition] is added.)
141
Table 3.14-1 Mode Settings is changed.
(The description in * is deleted.)
142
Table 3.14-2 Function of internal ROM enable is changed.
(The description in *1 is deleted.)
Table 3.14-3 Settings of the Initial Bus Width is changed.
(Only for MB91302A and MB91V301A is deleted.)
151
■ Functions of Bits in the Area Select Registers (ASR0 to ASR7) is changed.
(The area select registers (ASR0 to ASR7) specify the start address of each chip select area (CS0 to CS7).
is added.)
(ASR0 to 7 registers. → ACR0 to ACR7 registers.)
153
Figure 4.2-2 Configuration of Area Configuration Registers 0 to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7) is changed.
(Note is added.)
181
❍ Example of setting ASRs and ASZ3 to ASZ0 is changed.
(10000000H → 0FFFFFFFH)
(00200000H → 001FFFFFH)
xiv
Page
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
205
■ Operation Timing of the WRn + Byte Control Type is changed.
(• For write access, data output to D31-16 starts at the timing at which WRn is asserted. → • For write
access, data output to D31 to D00 starts at the timing at which WR0 is asserted.)
254
■ Procedure for Setting a Register is changed.
(Added the description; Set ACR after setting ASR if ASR and ACR are accessed by halfword.)
260
■ Configuration of the Port Data Registers (PDR) is changed.
(Note:MB91301 and MB91V301 do not have PFR61 register. is deleted.)
262
Figure 5.2-3 Configuration of the Pull-up Resistor Control Registers (PCR) is changed.
(PCRG and PCRJ are deleted.)
■ Configuration of the Pull-up Resistor Control Registers (PCR) is changed.
(PCR0-PCR2, PCR6, PCR8-PCRB, PCRG, PCRH and PCRJ control the pull-up resistor of the corresponding I/O port. → PCR0 to PCR2, PCR6, PCR8 to PCRB, and PCRH control the pull-up resistor of the
corresponding I/O port.)
(Note:MB91302A and MB91V301A do not have PCRG register and PCRJ register. is deleted.)
270
Figure 6.1-1 Block Diagram of the 16-bit Reload Timer is changed.
(16-bit down counter(TMR) UF → 16-bit timer register (TMR) UF)
309
Note is added.
313
Note is added.
321
■ Operating Procedure for an External Interrupt is changed.
(Added the description; 1) Set the general-purpose I/O port served dual use as the pin for the external interrupt input to input port.)
322
■ External Interrupt Request Level is changed.
(Added the description; If the request input level is a level setting, the pulse width must be at least 3
machine cycles. Also, as long as the interrupt input pin retains the active level, the interrupt request is continuously made to the interrupt controller, even if the source register is cleared.)
323
■ Notes on Returning from STOP State Using External Interrupt is added.
324
■ Return Operation from STOP State is added.
352
Notes is changed in the [bit7, bit6] MD1, MD0 (A/D converter MoDe set).
353
Notes are changed in the [bit2, bit1, bit0]ANE2, ANE1, ANE0 (ANalog End channel set) Setting of A/D
conversion end channel.
(The followings sentences are added. After setting the start channel to the A/D conversion start channel
selection bit (ANS2, ANS1, ANS0), please set neither the A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1,
MD0) nor the A/D conversion end channel selection bit (ANE2, ANE1, ANE0) by the read-modify-write
type instruction.
The last conversion channel is read from the ANS2, ANS1, ANS0 bits until the A/D conversion operating
starts. Therefore, when the MD1, MD0 bits and ANE2, ANE1, ANE0 bits are set by the read-modify-write
type instruction after setting the start channel to the ANS2, ANS1, ANS0 bits, the value of ANE2, ANE1,
ANE0 bits may be re-written.)
356
■ Single-shot Conversion Mode is changed.
(Note is added.)
358
■ Precautions on Using the A/D Converter is changed.
(If STS1 and STS0 are set, set ATG=1 input and reload timer (channel 2)=0 output. → If STS1 and STS0
are set, set ATG=1 input and reload timer (channel 1)=0 output.)
(❍ Restart of the A/D conversion is added.)
360
■ Features of the UART is changed.
(Deleted the description; • The DMAC interrupt source is cleared if the DRCL register is written to.)
xv
Page
362
(372)
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
"Figure 13.2-1 Configuration of UART Registers" and "Figure 13.2-2 UART Registers" are changed.
(DRCL is deleted.)
13.2.5 DRCL Register is deleted.
385
Figure 14.1-1 Block Diagram of the DMA Controller (DMAC) is changed.
(DSAD 2-stage register → DMASA 2-stage register)
(DDAD 2-stage register → DMADA 2-stage register)
386
Figure 14.2-1 DMA Controller (DMAC) Registers is changed.
(All-channel control register (DMACR) → DMAC all-channel control register (DMACR))
388
[bit31] DENB (Dma ENaBle): DMA operation enable bit is changed.
(PUAS bit → PAUS bit)
391
Notes is changed in the [bit28 to bit24] IS4 to IS0 (Input Select): Transfer source selection.
394
[bit25] SADM (Source-ADdr. count-Mode select) : Transfer source address count mode specification is
changed.
(make the address count width (SAAZ and DASZ) equal to 0. → make the address count width (SASZ and
DASZ) equal to "0".)
411
■ Demand Transfer 2-Cycle Transfer is changed.
(Select the level with IS[3:0] of DMACA. → Select the level with IS[4:0] of DMACA.)
428 to 430
■ Negate Timing of the DREQ Pin Input when a Demand Transfer Request is Stopped is changed.
453
Figure 16.3-1 Block Diagram of the I2C Interface is changed.
(FNSB → ENSB)
457
[bit12] MSS (Master Slave Select) is changed.
(Note is added.)
468
❍ START Condition is changed.
(not (IBCR MSS=1) is deleted.)
Notes is changed.
((DBL=1:IDAR or EN=0:ICCR) → (DBL=1: IDBL or EN=0: ICCR))
503
❍ Main program flowchart is changed.
(* About setting UART0 → * About setting UART1)
511
19.4 Example of Using the Program Loader Mode to Write to Flash Memory is changed.
(■ Allocation of Flash Memory is added.)
537, 538, 543
Register DRCL0, DRCL1, DRCL2, WPR in Table A-1 I/O Map is renewed.
547
Table A-1 I/O Map is changed.
(The followings sentence is added. *2: No register in 000420H and 000423H in MB91302A and
MB91V301A.)
(The followings sentence is added. *4: Reserved register. Access is disabled.)
548
Table B-1 Interrupt Vectors (1 / 4) is changed.
(Instruction break exception → Reserved for system)
(Operand break trap → Reserved for system)
553 to 555
Table C-1 Pin States in External Bus 32-Bit Mode is changed.
The vertical lines marked in the left side of the page show the changes.
xvi
CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW
This chapter provides basic information required to understand the MB91301 series,
and covers features, a block diagram, and functions.
1.1 Features of the MB91301 Series
1.2 Block Diagram
1.3 Package Dimensions
1.4 Pin Layout
1.5 Pin No. Table
1.6 List of Pin Functions
1.7 I/O Circuit Types
1
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1
Features of the MB91301 Series
The MB91301 series is a standard single-chip microcontroller that has a 32-bit highperformance RISC CPU (FR family) as well as built-in I/O resources and bus control
mechanisms for embedded controller requiring high-performance and high-speed CPU
processing. Although the MB91301 series basically uses external bus access to
support a vast address space accessed by a 32-bit CPU, it has a 4-Kbyte instruction
cache memory and 4-Kbyte RAM to increase the speed at which the CPU executes
instructions.
This model is an FR60 model that is based on the FR30/40 of CPUs. It has enhanced
bus access and is optimized for high-speed use.
The MB91301 series is most suitable for embedded applications, such as digital video
cameras, navigation systems, and DVD players, that require a high level of CPU
processing power.
■ Features of the MB91301 Series
The MB91301 series has the line-up of series embedded the each of program in built-in ROM.
ROM variation
IPL (internal
program loader)
internal version
User ROM
version
No ROM version
Products
Real time OS
internal ROM
version
MB91302A
O
O
O
O
■ FR CPU
•
32-bit RISC, load/store architecture, five pipelines
•
Operating frequency of 68 MHz (Internal maximum value), 68 MHz (External maximum
value) [PLL used, original oscillation at 17 MHz]
•
32-bit general-purpose register x 16
•
16-bit fixed-length instructions (basic instructions), one instruction per cycle
•
Memory-to-memory transfer, bit processing, instructions, including barrel shift, etc.;
instructions appropriate for embedded applications
•
Function entry and exit instructions, multi load/store instructions--instructions compatible with
high-level languages
•
Register interlock function to facilitate assembly-language coding
•
Branch instruction with a delay slot allowing a decrease in overhead for branch processing
•
Built-in multiplier/instruction-level support
•
2
-
Signed 32-bit multiplication: 5 cycles
-
Signed 16-bit multiplication: 3 cycles
Interrupts (saving of PC and PS): 6 cycles, 16 priority levels
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
■ Bus Interface
•
Maximum operating frequency of 68 MHz (at using SDRAM)
•
24-bit address can be fully output (16-Mbyte space)
•
8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit data I/O
•
Prefetch buffer installed
•
Unused data and address pins can be used as general-purpose I/O ports.
•
Totally independent 8-area chip select output that can be defined at a minimum of 64K bytes
•
Support of interfaces for various memory modules
-
Asynchronous SRAM, asynchronous ROM/FLASH
-
Page-mode ROM/FLASHROM (a page-size of 1, 2, 4, or 8 can be selected)
-
Burst-mode ROM/FLASH (MBM29BL160D/161D/162D, etc.)
-
SDRAM (or FCRAM type, CAS Latency1 to 8, 2/4 bank product)
-
Address/data multiplexed bus (8-bit/16-bit width only)
•
Basic bus cycle: 2 cycles
•
Automatic wait cycle generator (Max 15 cycles) that can be programmed for each area and
can insert waits
•
External wait cycles due to RDY input
•
Endian setting of byte ordering (big/little) CS0 are, however, is only big endian
•
Write disable setting (read only data)
•
Enable/disable set of capturing to the built-in cache
•
Enable/disable set of prefetch function
•
Supports fly-by DMA transfer that enables independent I/O wait control
•
External bus arbitration using BRQ and BGRNT is enabled
■ Built-in Memory
•
DATA RAM: 4K bytes
•
ROM: 4K bytes (MB91302A)
Built-in 8-Kbyte DATA RAM, 8-Kbyte DATA/instruction RAM and 8-Kbyte emulation RAM in
MB91V301A
■ Instruction Cache
•
Capacity of 4K bytes
•
2 way set associative
•
128 block/way, 4 entry (4 words)/block
•
Lock function allows specific program codes to stay resident in cache
•
Instruction RAM function: A part of the instruction cache not in use can be used as RAM
■ DMAC (DMA Controller)
•
5 channels (2 channels for external to request)
•
3 transfer sources (external pins, internal peripherals, software)
3
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
•
Internal peripheral can be selected at each channel as the transfer factor
•
Addressing mode with 32-bit full address specifications (increase, decrease, fixed)
•
Transfer modes (demand transfer, burst transfer, step transfer, block transfer)
•
Fly-by transfer supported (three channels between external I/O and external memory)
•
Transfer data size that can be selected from 8, 16, and 32 bits
■ Bit Search Module
Searches for the position of the first bit varying between 1 and 0 in the MSB of a word
■ Reload Timer
•
16-bit timer: 3 channels
•
Internal clock: 2-clock cycle resolution, selectable from 2, 8 or 32 divided frequency
•
UART full-duplex double buffer
•
Independent 3 channels
•
Data length: 7 to 9 bits (no parity), 8 to 8 bits (parity)
•
Either asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) or CLK synchronous communication can be
selected.
•
Multi processor mode
•
Built-in 16-bit timer (U-TIMER) as baud rate generator: generating arbitrary baud rates
•
An external clock can be used as the transfer clock.
•
Error detection functions (parity, frame, overrun)
■ UART
■ Interrupt Controller
•
Total of 9 external interrupts (one unmaskable pin (NMI) and eight regular interrupt pins
(INT7 to INT0))
•
Internal interrupt source: UART, DMAC, A/D, UTIMER, delay interrupt, I2C, free run timer
and ICU
•
The I2C, free run timer, and ICU are sources unique to the MB91302A and MB91V301A.
•
Priority level can be defined as programmable (16 levels) except for the unmaskable pin.
■ A/D Converter (Sequential Conversion Type)
4
•
10-bit resolution, 4 channels
•
Sequential comparison and conversion type: peripheral clock (CLKP) 140 clock cycle
conversion time (about 4.1 µs/ch at 34MHz operating)
•
Built-in sample and hold circuit
•
Conversion modes (single-shot conversion mode, scan conversion mode, and repeat
conversion mode)
•
Causes of startup (select from software, external triggers, and internal timer)
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
■ I2C Bus Interface
•
2-channel master/slave transmission and reception of I2C bus interface
•
Arbitration function and clock synchronization function of I2C bus interface
■ Free Run Timer
•
16-bit 1channel
•
Input capture 4 channels
■ Other Interval Timers
•
16-bit timer: 3 channels (U-TIMER)
•
PPG timer: 4 channels
•
Watchdog timer: 1 channel
■ Other Features
•
Reset factor: Watchdog timer/software reset/external reset (INIT pin)
•
Low-power consumption mode: sleep/stop mode
•
Clock control
•
Gear function
Allows arbitrary different operating clock frequencies to be set for the CPU and peripherals.
The gear clock factor can be selected from among 16 options: 1/1, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/7,
1/8,....., 1/16. Also, PLL multiplication can be selected. Note that the maximum operating
frequency of peripherals is 34 MHz.
•
Packages: MB91302A FPT-144P-M12, FPT-144P-M08,
MB91V301A PGA-179C-A03
•
CMOS technology
•
•
Power voltages
•
•
0.25 µm
Power supply (analog power supply): 3.3 V ± 0.3 V (at using internal regulator)
On chip Device Support Unit (DSU4) is installed in MB91V301A.
5
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
■ Product Line-up
MB91302A
MB91V301A
Type
Mask ROM product
(for volume production)
Evaluation version
(For evaluation and
development)
RAM
4K bytes
(only for data)
16K bytes
(data 8 Kbyte+8 Kbyte)
ROM
4K bytes
ROM has non-ROM model, the optimal real
time OS internal model*1, and the IPL (Internal
Program Loader) internal model*2 by adding
8K bytes (RAM)
the user ROM model.
DSU
-
DSU4
Package
LQFP-144
(0.4 mm pitch, 0.5 mm pitch)
PGA-179
Other
Currently in production
Currently available
*1: The Fujitsu product of real time OS REALOS/FR by conforming to the µITRON 3.0 is stored
and optimized with the MB91302A. For details of built-in service call type and the specification
of user task, see "CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S
GUIDE" and following manuals;
• FR FAMILY CONFORMING to µITRON3.0 SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE REALOS/ FR
USER'S GUIDE
• FR FAMILY CONFORMING to µITRON3.0 SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE REALOS/ FR
KERNEL MANUAL
• FR/ F2MC FAMILY CONFORMING to µITRON SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE REALOS/
FR/907/896 CONFIGURATOR MANUAL
• FR-V/ FR/ F2MC FAMILY CONFORMING to µITRON3.0 SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE
REALOS ANALYZER MANUAL
*2: The ROM stores the IPL (Internal Program Loader). Loading various programs can be
executed from the external system by the internal UART/SIO.
Using this function, for example, writing on board to the Flash memory connected to the
external can be executed.
6
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 1.2-1 are the block diagram of the MB91301 series.
■
Block Diagram
Figure 1.2-1 Block Diagram
FR CPU
Core
32
32
DMAC 5 ch
Bit search
MB91302A
MB91V301A
I-Cache 4K bytes
: RAM 4K bytes
: RAM 8K bytes (stack)
Bus
Converter
MB91302A
: ROM 4K bytes*
MB91V301A : RAM 8K bytes
32
X0, X1
MD0 to MD2
INIT
32 ↔ 16
Adapter
32
External
memory I/F
Clock
control
16
SDRAM I/F
SIN0 to SIN2
SOT0 to SOT2
SCK0 to SCK2
8 ch
External interrupts
3 ch
UART
A23 to A00
D31 to D16
D15 to D00
RD, WR
WR0 to WR3
CS0 to CS7
RDY
BRQ
BGRNT
SYSCLK
MCLK
AS
MCLKE
Interrupt
controller
INT0 to INT7
NMI
DREQ0,DREQ1
DACK0, DACK1
DEOP0, DEOP1
IOWR
IORD
4 ch
PPG timer
SRAS
SCAS
SWE
DQMUU, DQMUL
DQMLU, DQMLL
LBA
BAA
PPG0 to PPG3
TRG0 to TRG3
3 ch
U-TIMER
Port I/F
AN0 to AN3
ATG
AVRH, AVCC
AVSS/AVRL
4 ch
A/D
TIN0 to TIN2
3 ch
Reload timer
2 ch
I2C I/F
Free run timer
4 ch
ICU
PORT
SDA0, SDA1
SCL0, SCL1
FRCK
ICU0 to ICU3
* : ROM has non-ROM model, the optimum real time OS internal model, and the IPL (Internal Program
Loader) internal model by adding the user ROM model.
7
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.3
Package Dimensions
The MB91301 series is available in three types of package.
■ Package Dimension of PGA-179C-A03
Figure 1.3-1 PGA-179C-A03
179-pin ceramic PGA
Lead pitch
2.54mm(100mil)
Pin matrix
15
Sealing method
Metal seal
(PGA-179C-A03)
179-pin ceramic PGA
(PGA-179C-A03)
2.54±0.25
(.100±.010)
35.56(1.400)
REF
1.27(.050)TYP DIA
INDEX
INDEX AREA
+0.18
0.46 –0.05 DIA
+.007
.018 –.002
1.27±0.25
(.050±.010)
38.10±0.51 SQ
(1.500±.020)
6.10(.240)
MAX
C
+0.41
3.40 –0.36
1994 FUJITSU LIMITED R179004SC-3-2
Please confirm the latest Package dimension by following URL.
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/fj/DATASHEET/ef-ovpklv.html
8
+.016
.134 –.014
Dimensions in mm (inches).
Note: The values in parentheses are reference values.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
■ Package Dimension of FPT-144P-M12
Figure 1.3-2 FPT-144P-M12
144-pin plastic LQFP
Lead pitch
0.40 mm
Package width ×
package length
16.0 × 16.0 mm
Lead shape
Gullwing
Sealing method
Plastic mold
Mounting height
1.70 mm MAX
Weight
0.88 g
Code
(Reference)
P-LFQFP144-16×16-0.40
(FPT-144P-M12)
144-pin plastic LQFP
(FPT-144P-M12)
Note 1) * : These dimensions include resin protrusion.
Resin protrusion is +0.25(.010)Max(each side).
Note 2) Pins width and pins thickness include plating thickness.
Note 3) Pins width do not include tie bar cutting remainder.
18.00±0.20(.709±.008)SQ
+0.40
+.016
*16.00 –0.10 .630 –.004 SQ
73
108
72
109
0.08(.003)
Details of "A" part
+0.20
1.50 –0.10
+.008
(Mounting height)
.059 –.004
INDEX
0~8˚
37
144
LEAD No.
1
0.60±0.15
(.024±.006)
36
0.40(.016)
C
"A"
0.18±0.035
.007±.001
+0.05
0.07(.003)
M
2003 FUJITSU LIMITED F144024S-c-3-3
0.145 –0.03
.006
0.10±0.05
(.004±.002)
(Stand off)
0.25(.010)
+.002
–.001
Dimensions in mm (inches).
Note: The values in parentheses are reference values.
Please confirm the latest Package dimension by following URL.
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/fj/DATASHEET/ef-ovpklv.html
9
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
■ Package Dimension of FPT-144P-M08
Figure 1.3-3 FPT-144P-M08
144-pin plastic LQFP
Lead pitch
0.50 mm
Package width ×
package length
20.0 × 20.0 mm
Lead shape
Gullwing
Sealing method
Plastic mold
Mounting height
1.70 mm MAX
Weight
1.20g
Code
(Reference)
P-LFQFP144-20×20-0.50
(FPT-144P-M08)
144-pin plastic LQFP
(FPT-144P-M08)
Note 1) * :Values do not include resin protrusion.
Resin protrusion is +0.25(.010)Max(each side).
Note 2) Pins width and pins thickness include plating thickness.
Note 3) Pins width do not include tie bar cutting remainder.
22.00±0.20(.866±.008)SQ
* 20.00±0.10(.787±.004)SQ
108
0.145±0.055
(.006±.002)
73
109
72
0.08(.003)
Details of "A" part
+0.20
1.50 –0.10
+.008
.059 –.004
0˚~8˚
INDEX
144
37
"A"
LEAD No.
1
36
0.50(.020)
C
0.22±0.05
(.009±.002)
0.08(.003)
0.10±0.10
(.004±.004)
(Stand off)
0.25(.010)
M
2003 FUJITSU LIMITED F144019S-c-4-6
Please confirm the latest Package dimension by following URL.
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/fj/DATASHEET/ef-ovpklv.html
10
0.50±0.20
(.020±.008)
0.60±0.15
(.024±.006)
(Mounting height)
Dimensions in mm (inches).
Note: The values in parentheses are reference values.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.4
Pin Layout
This section shows the pin layout of the MB91V301A, MB91302A.
■ Pin Layout of the MB91V301A
Figure 1.4-1 is a diagram of the pin layout of the MB91V301A.
Figure 1.4-1 Pin Layout of the MB91V301A
INDEX
1
5
178 174 172 168
165 161 160 156 155 151 150 145 142 140
2
7
179 177 173 169
166 162 157 154 149 148 144 139 134 133
3
10
4
2
176 171
167 163 159 153 147 143
138 137 132 129
4
15
9
3
180 175
170 164 158 152 146 141
135 131 128 127
5
16
13
8
6
6
20
14
12
11
125 122 121 120
7
21
19
18
17
119 118 117 116
8
25
22
24
23
9
26
27
28
29
107 108 109 111
10
30
31
32
35
101 102 104 110
11
33
34
36
40
46
12
37
38
41
45
51
56
62
68
74
13
39
42
47
48
53
57
63
69
14
43
44
49
54
58
59
64
15
50
52
55
60
61
65
A B
136 130 126 124 123
1
Top View
PGA-179C-A03
C D E
113 114 112 115
91
96
98
80
85
90
93
99
105
73
77
81
86
92
94
100
67
72
76
79
83
87
89
97
66
70
71
75
78
82
84
88
95
F G
H
J
K
L
M N P R
103 106
11
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
■ Pin Layout of the MB91302A
Figure 1.4-2 is a diagram of the pin layout of the MB91302A.
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
D10/P12
D09/P11
D08/P10
Vcc
Vss
D07/P07
D06/P06
D05/P05
D04/P04
D03/P03
D02/P02
D01/P01
D00/P00
Vcc
Vss
CS7/PA7
CS6/PA6
CS5/PPG2/PA5
CS4/TRG2/PA4
CS3/PA3
CS2/PA2
CS1/PA1
CS0/PA0
Vcc
NMI
INIT
MD2
MD1
MD0
Vcc
Vss
X1
X0
Vcc
IORD/PB7
IOWR/PB6
Figure 1.4-2 Pin Layout of the MB91302A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
MB91302A
(Top View)
FPT-144P-M12
FPT-144P-M08
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
P91/MCLKE
P92/MCLK
P93
P94/SRAS/LBA/AS
P95/SCAS/BAA
P96/SWE/WR
Vss
Vcc
A00
A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
Vss
Vcc
A08
A09
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
Vss
P60/A16
P61/A17
P62/A18
P63/A19
P64/A20/SDA0
P65/A21/SCL0
P66/A22/SDA1
P67/A23/SCL1
Vcc
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
P13/D11
P14/D12
P15/D13
P16/D14
P17/D15
Vss
Vcc
P20/D16
P21/D17
P22/D18
P23/D19
P24/D20
P25/D21
P26/D22
P27/D23
Vss
Vcc
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
Vss
Vcc
P80/RDY
P81/BGRNT
P82/BRQ
RD
DQMUU/WR0
P85/DQMUL/WR1
P86/DQMLU/WR2
P87/DQMLL/WR3
P90/SYSCLK
12
DEOP1/PPG1/PB5
DACK1/TRG1/PB4
DREQ1/PB3
DEOP0/PB2
DACK0/PB1
DREQ0/PB0
C
Vss
TIN2/TRG3/PH2
TIN1/PPG3/PH1
TIN0/PH0
TRG0/PJ7
PPG0/PJ6
SCK1/PJ5
SOT1/PJ4
SIN1/PJ3
SCK0/PJ2
SOT0/PJ1
SIN0/PJ0
Vcc
INT7/SCK2/PG7
INT6/SOT2/PG6
INT5/SIN2/PG5
INT4/ATG/PG4/FRCK
INT3/PG3/ICU3
INT2/PG2/ICU2
INT1/PG1/ICU1
INT0/PG0/ICU0
AVss/AVRL
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AVR
ANRH
AVcc
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.5
Pin No. Table
The pin No. table of the MB91V301A is shown.
■ Pin No. Table
Table 1.5-1 MB91V301A Pin No. Table (Package: PGA-179C-A03) (1 / 2)
No.
PIN
1
E5
2
Pin Name
No.
PIN
N.C.
31
B10
C3
P13/D11
32
3
C4
VSS
4
B3
5
Pin Name
No.
PIN
Pin Name
VSS
61
E15
A07
C10
VCC
62
G12
VSS
33
A11
P80/RDY
63
G13
VCC
VCC
34
B11
P81/BGRNT
64
G14
A08
A1
P14/D12
35
D10
P82/BRQ
65
F15
A09
6
D5
P15/D13
36
C11
RD
66
G15
A10
7
A2
P16/D14
37
A12
DQMUU/WR0
67
H14
A11
8
C5
P17/D15
38
B12
P85/DQMUL/WR1
68
H12
A12
9
B4
VSS
39
A13
P86/DQMLU/WR2
69
H13
A13
10
A3
VCC
40
D11
P87/DQMLL/WR3
70
H15
A14
11
D6
P20/D16
41
C12
VSS
71
J15
A15
12
C6
P21/D17
42
B13
VCC
72
J14
VSS
13
B5
P22/D18
43
A14
P90/SYSCLK
73
J13
VCC
14
B6
P23/D19
44
B14
P91/MCLKE
74
J12
P60/A16
15
A4
P24/D20
45
D12
P92/MCLK
75
K15
P61/A17
16
A5
P25/D21
46
E11
P93
76
K14
P62/A18
17
D7
P26/D22
47
C13
VSS
77
K13
P63/A19
18
C7
P27/D23
48
D13
VCC
78
L15
SDA0/P64/A20
19
B7
VSS
49
C14
P94/SRAS/LBA/AS
79
L14
SCL0/P65/A21
20
A6
VCC
50
A15
P95/SCAS/BAA
80
K12
SDA1/P66/A22
21
A7
D24
51
E12
P96/SWE/WR
81
L13
SCL1/P67/A23
22
B8
D25
52
B15
VSS
82
M15
VCC
23
D8
D26
53
E13
VCC
83
M14
VCC
24
C8
D27
54
D14
A00
84
N15
EWR3
25
A8
VSS
55
C15
A01
85
L12
EWR2
26
A9
VCC
56
F12
A02
86
M13
EWR1
27
B9
D28
57
F13
A03
87
N14
EWR0
28
C9
D29
58
E14
A04
88
P15
ECS
29
D9
D30
59
F14
A05
89
P14
EMRAM
30
A10
D31
60
D15
A06
90
M12
ICD3
13
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 MB91V301A Pin No. Table (Package: PGA-179C-A03) (2 / 2)
No.
PIN
91
L11
92
No.
PIN
No.
PIN
ICD2
121
P6
SOT0/PJ1
151
L1
VCC
N13
ICD1
122
N6
SCK0/PJ2
152
J4
INIT
93
N12
ICD0
123
R5
SIN1/PJ3
153
J3
NMI
94
P13
VSS
124
P5
SOT1/PJ4
154
J2
VSS
95
R15
VCC
125
M6
SCK1/PJ5
155
K1
VCC
96
M11
BREAK
126
N5
PPG0/PJ6
156
J1
CS0/PA0
97
R14
ICLK
127
R4
TRG0/PJ7
157
H2
CS1/PA1
98
N11
ICS2
128
P4
TIN0/PH0
158
H4
CS2/PA2
99
P12
ICS1
129
R3
TIN1/PPG3/PH1
159
H3
CS3/PA3
100
R13
ICS0
130
M5
TIN2/TRG3/PH2
160
H1
CS4/TRG2/PA4
101
M10
TRST
131
N4
VSS
161
G1
CS5/PPG2/PA5
102
N10
C
132
P3
C
162
G2
CS6/PA6
103
P11
AVCC
133
R2
DREQ0/PB0
163
G3
CS7/PA7
104
P10
AVRH
134
P2
DACK0/PB1
164
G4
VSS
105
R12
AVR
135
M4
DEOP0/PB2
165
F1
VCC
106
R11
AN3
136
L5
DREQ1/PB3
166
F2
D00/P00
107
M9
AN2
137
N3
DACK1/TRG1/PB4
167
F3
D01/P01
108
N9
AN1
138
M3
DEOP1/PPG1/PB5
168
E1
D02/P02
109
P9
AN0
139
N2
IOWR/PB6
169
E2
D03/P03
110
R10
AVSS/AVRL
140
R1
IORD/PB7
170
F4
VSS
111
R9
INT0/PG0/ICU0
141
L4
VCC
171
E3
VCC
112
P8
INT1/PG1/ICU1
142
P1
VSS
172
D1
D04/P04
113
M8
INT2/PG2/ICU2
143
L3
X0
173
D2
D05/P05
114
N8
INT3/PG3/ICU3
144
M2
X1
174
C1
D06/P06
115
R8
INT4/ATG/PG4/FRCK
145
N1
VSS
175
E4
D07/P07
116
R7
INT5/SIN2/PG5
146
K4
VCC
176
D3
VSS
117
P7
INT6/SOT2/PG6
147
K3
MD0
177
C2
VCC
118
N7
INT7/SCK2/PG7
148
L2
MD1
178
B1
D08/P10
119
M7
VCC
149
K2
MD2
179
B2
D09/P11
120
R6
SIN0/PJ0
150
M1
VCC
180
D4
D10/P12
14
Pin Name
Pin Name
Pin Name
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.6
List of Pin Functions
This section describes the pin functions of the MB91V301A, MB91302A.
■ Description of Pin Functions
Table 1.6-1 lists the pin of the MB91V301A, MB91302A and their functions.
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (1 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
MB91V301A
166 to 169,
132 to 139
172 to 175
142 to 144, 178 to 180,
1 to 5
2, 5 to 8
8 to 15
11 to 18
Pin name
I/O circuit type
D00 to D07
J
21 to 24,
27 to 30
Can be used as ports in 8-bit or 16-bit external bus
mode.
D08 to D15
External data bus bits 8 to 15.
It is available in the external bus mode.
J
P10 to P17
D16 to D23
J
D24 to D31
29
30
33
C
J
32
External data bus bits 16 to 23.
It is available in the external bus mode.
External data bus bits 24 to 31.
It is available in the external bus mode.
External ready input. The pin has this function
when external ready input is enabled. Active level
is "H".
P80
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when external ready input is disabled.
BGRNT
Acknowledge output for external bus release.
Outputs "L" when the external bus is released. The
pin has this function when output is enabled.
J
34
P81
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when output is disabled for external
bus release acknowledge.
BRQ
External bus release request input. Input "1" to
request release of the external bus. The pin has
this function when input is enabled. The active
level is "H".
35
J
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when the external bus release
request input is disabled.
P82
31
Can be used as ports in 8-bit or 16-bit external bus
mode.
Can be used as ports in 8-bit external bus mode.
RDY
28
External data bus bits 0 to 7. It is available in the
external bus mode.
P00 to P07
P20 to P27
18 to 25
Function
36
RD
37
WR0/
DQMUU
C
External bus read strobe output. This pin is
enabled at external bus mode.
C
External bus write strobe output. This pin is
enabled at external bus mode. When WR0 is used
as the write strobe, this becomes the byte-enable
pin (UUB).
15
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (2 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
MB91V301A
Pin name
I/O circuit type
Function
J
External bus write strobe output. The pin has this
function when WR1 output is enabled. When WR1
is used as the write strobe, this becomes the byteenable pin (ULB).
WR1/
DQMUL
33
38
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when the external bus write-enable
output is disabled.
P85
WR2/
DQMLU
34
39
J
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when the external bus write-enable
output is disabled.
P86
WR3/
DQMLL
35
40
J
SYSCLK
43
C
MCLKE
44
P91
Clock enable signal for memory.
J
MCLK
38
45
C
16
46
P93
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when clock enable output is disabled.
Memory clock output. The pin has this function
when memory clock output is enabled. This
outputs the same clock as the external bus
operating frequency.
(Output halts in stop and sleep mode.)
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when memory clock output is
disabled.
P92
39
System clock output. The pin has this function
when system clock output is enabled. This outputs
the same clock as the external bus operating
frequency. (Output halts in stop mode.)
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when system clock output is disabled.
P90
37
External bus write strobe output. The pin has this
function when WR3 output is enabled. When WR3
is used as the write strobe, this becomes the byteenable pin (LLB).
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this functions when the external bus write-enable
output is disabled.
P87
36
External bus write strobe output. The pin has this
function when WR2 output is enabled. When WR2
is used as the write strobe, this becomes the byteenable pin (LUB).
C
General purpose input/output port.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (3 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
40
MB91V301A
Pin name
I/O circuit type
AS
Address strobe output. The pin has this function
without EDRAM area, when ASXE bit of port
function register 9 is enabled.
LBA
Address strobe output for burst flash ROM. The
pin has this function in normal accessed area that
is set over "1", when ASXE bit of port function
register 9 is enabled.
J
49
RAS signal for SDRAM. This pin has this function
for accessing to SDRAM area, when ASXE bit of
port function register 9 is enabled.
SRAS
41
42
50
51
Function
P94
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function, when ASXE bit of port function
register 9 is set as the general purpose port.
BAA
Address advance output for burst Flash ROM. The
pin has this function when BAAE bit of port
function register is enabled.
SCAS
J
CAS signal for SDRAM. This pin has this function
in SDRAM area, when BAAE bit of port function
register is enabled.
P95
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when BAAE bit of port function
register is general purpose port.
WR
Memory write strobe output. This pin has this
function when WEXE bit of port function register is
enabled.
SWE
J
Write output for SDRAM. This pin has this function
when WEXE bit of port function register is
enabled.
General purpose input/output port. This pin has
this function when WEXE bit of port function
register is general purpose port.
P96
45 to 52
54 to 61
A00 to A07
C
External address bit 0 to 7.
55 to 62
64 to 71
A08 to A15
C
External address bit 8 to 15.
A16 to A19
64 to 67
74 to 77
J
P60 to P63
External address bit 16 to 19. It can be used as
ports when external address bus is unused.
Can be used as ports when external bus is 8-bit
mode.
17
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (4 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
MB91V301A
Pin name
I/O circuit type
Data I/O pin for I2C bus. This function is enable
when typical operation of I2C is enable. The port
output must remain off unless intentionally turned
on. (Open drain output) (This function is only for
MB91302A, MB91V301A.)
SDA0
68
69
78
J, T
A20
External address bus bit 20.
This function is enable during prohibited I2C
operation and using external bus.
P64
General-purpose I/O port.
This function is enable during prohibited I2C and
nonused external address bus.
SCL0
CLK I/O pin for I2C bus. This function is enable
when typical operation of I2C is enable. The port
output must remain off unless intentionally turned
on. (open drain output) (This function is only for
MB91302A, MB91V301A.)
79
J, T
A21
External address bit 21.
This function is enable during prohibited I2C
operation and using external bus.
P65
General-purpose I/O port.
This function is enable during prohibited I2C and
unused external address bus.
DATA I/O pin for I2C bus. This function is enable
when typical operation of I2C is enable. The output
must remains off unless intentionally turned on.
(open drain output) (This function is only for
MB91302A, MB91V301A.)
SDA1
70
80
J, T
A22
External address bit 20.
This function is enable during prohibited I2C
operation and using external bus.
P66
General-purpose I/O port.
This function is enable during prohibited I2C and
unused external address bus.
CLK I/O pin for I2C bus. This function is enable
when typical operation of I2C is enable. The port
output must remains off unless intentionally turned
on. (open drain output) (This function is only for
MB91302A, MB91V301A.)
SCL1
71
76 to 79
18
81
106 to 109
Function
J, T
A23
External address bit 21.
This function is enable during prohibited I2C
operation and unusing external address bus.
P67
General-purpose I/O port.
This function is enable during prohibited I2C
operation and nonused external address bus.
AN3 to AN0
D
Analog input pin.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (5 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
MB91V301A
Pin name
I/O circuit type
External interrupt inputs. These inputs are used
continuously when the corresponding external
interrupt is enabled. In this case, do not output to
these ports unless doing so intentionally. Refer to
"9.2.3 External Interrupt Request Level Setting
Register (ELVR)" for active level setting.
INT0 to
INT3
81 to 84
85
111 to 114
115
PG0 to PG3
L
General purpose input/output ports.
ICU0 to
ICU3
Input capture input pins. These inputs are used
continuously when selected as input capture
inputs. In this case, do not output to these ports
unless doing so intentionally. (This function is only
for MB91302A and MB91V301A.)
INT4
External interrupt input. These inputs are used
continuously when the corresponding external
interrupt is enabled. In this case, do not output to
these ports unless doing so intentionally. Refer to
"9.2.3 External Interrupt Request Level Setting
Register (ELVR)" for active level setting.
ATG
External trigger input for A/D converter. This input
is used continuously when selected as the A/D
converter start trigger. In this case, do not output
to this port unless doing so intentionally.
L, V
PG4
86
Function
General purpose input/output ports.
FRCK
[FRCK] External clock input pin of free run timer.
These inputs are used continuously when using as
external clock input pin of free run timer. In this
case, do not output to these ports unless doing so
intentionally (This function is only for MB91302A
and MB90V301A).
INT5
External interrupt input. These inputs are used
continuously when the corresponding external
interrupt is enabled. In this case, do not output to
these ports unless doing so intentionally. Refer to
"9.2.3 External Interrupt Request Level Setting
Register (ELVR)" for active level setting.
116
L, V
SIN2
Input pin for UART2 data. This pin is used
continuously when UART2 is performing input. In
this case, do not output to this port unless doing so
intentionally.
PG5
General purpose input/output port.
19
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (6 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
MB91V301A
Pin name
I/O circuit type
INT6
87
117
L, V
PG6
General purpose input/output port.
INT7
External interrupt input. This input is used
continuously when the corresponding external
interrupt is enabled. In this case, do not output to
these ports unless doing so intentionally. Refer to
"9.2.3 External Interrupt Request Level Setting
Register (ELVR)" for active level setting.
118
L, V
Input/output pin for UART2 clock. The pin has this
function when UART2 clock output is enabled.
SCK2
90
120
PG7
General purpose input/output port.
SIN0
Input pin for UART0 data. This input is used
continuously when UART0 is performing input. In
this case, do not output to this port unless doing so
intentionally.
K, U
PJ0
91
121
SOT0
General purpose input/output port.
J, U
PJ1
92
93
122
123
SCK0
124
K, U
125
General purpose input/output port.
SIN1
Input pin for UART1 data. This input is used
continuously when UART1 is performing input. In
this case, do not output to this port unless doing so
intentionally.
K, U
SOT1
General purpose input/output port.
J, U
SCK1
126
PPG0
PJ6
20
Output pin for UART1 data. The pin has this
function when UART1 data output is enabled.
General purpose input/output port.
K, U
PJ5
96
Input/output pin for UART0 clock. The pin has this
function when UART0 clock output is enabled.
PJ2
PJ4
95
Output pin for UART0 data. The pin has this
function when UART0 data output is enabled.
General purpose input/output port.
PJ3
94
External interrupt input. This input is used
continuously when the corresponding external
interrupt is enabled. In this case, do not output to
these ports unless doing so intentionally. Refer to
"9.2.3 External Interrupt Request Level Setting
Register (ELVR)" for active level setting.
Output pin for UART2 data. The pin has this
function when UART2 data output is enabled.
SOT2
88
Function
Input/output pin for UART1 clock. The pin has this
function when UART1 clock output is enabled.
General purpose input/output port.
J, U
PPG timer output. This pin has this function when
PPG0 output is enabled.
General purpose input/output port.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (7 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
97
98
99
MB91V301A
127
128
Pin name
TRG0
I/O circuit type
J, U
General purpose input/output port.
TIN0
Reload timer input. This input is used continuously
when the corresponding timer input is enabled. In
this case, do not output to this port unless doing so
intentionally. *2
J
PH0
General purpose input/output port.
TIN1
Reload timer input. This input is used continuously
when the corresponding timer input is enabled. In
this case, do not output to this port unless doing so
intentionally. *2
129
J
PPG timer output. The pin has this function when
PPG3 output is enabled.
PH1
General purpose input/output port.
TIN2
Reload timer input. This input is used continuously
when the corresponding timer input is enabled. In
this case, do not output to this port unless doing so
intentionally. *2
130
J
TRG3
PH2
103
133
DREQ0
134
DACK0
J
105
135
PB2
External input for DMA transfer requests. This
input is used continuously when the corresponding
external input for DMA transfer requests are
enabled. In this case, do not output to this port
unless doing so intentionally. Refer to "14.3.1
Setting a Transfer Request" for active level setting.
General purpose input/output port.
J
PB1
DEOP0
External trigger input for PPG timer. This input is
used continuously when the corresponding timer
input is enabled. In this case, do not output to this
port unless doing so intentionally. *1
General purpose input/output port.
PB0
104
External trigger input for PPG timer. This input is
used continuously when the corresponding timer
input is enabled. In this case, do not output to this
port unless doing so intentionally. *1
PJ7
PPG3
100
Function
External acknowledge output for DMA transfer
requests. The pin has this function when external
acknowledge output for DMA transfer requests is
enabled.
General purpose input/output port.
J
Completion output for DMA external transfer. The
pin has this function when completion output for
DMA external transfer is enabled.
General purpose input/output port.
21
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (8 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
106
MB91V301A
136
Pin name
DREQ1
I/O circuit type
J
PB3
137
External acknowledge output for DMA transfer
requests. The pin has this function when external
acknowledge output for DMA transfer requests is
enabled.
J
TRG1
PB4
138
Completion output for DMA external transfer. The
pin has this function when completion output for
DMA external transfer is enabled.
J
PPG1
PB5
139
J
PB6
IORD
110
140
J
PB7
Write strobe output for DMA fly-by transfer. The
pin has this function when outputting a write strobe
for DMA fly-by transfer is enabled.
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when outputting a write strobe for
DMA fly-by transfer is disabled.
Read strobe output for DMA fly-by transfer. The
pin has this function when outputting a read strobe
for DMA fly-by transfer is enabled.
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when outputting a read strobe for
DMA fly-by transfer is disabled.
112
143
X0
A
Clock (oscillation) input.
113
144
X1
A
Clock (oscillation) output.
G
Mode pins to 0 to 2. The levels applied to these
pins set the basic operating mode. Connect VCC or
VSS.
116 to 118 147 to 149 MD0 to MD2
22
PPG timer output. The pin has this function when
PPE1 bit is enabled.
General purpose input/output port.
IOWR
109
External trigger input for PPG timer. This input is
used continuously when the corresponding timer
input is enabled. In this case, do not output to this
port and external acknowledge output for DMA
transfer request unless doing so intentionally.*1
General purpose input/output port.
DEOP1
108
External input for DMA transfer requests. This
input is used continuously when external input for
DMA transfer request is enabled. In this case, do
not output to this port unless doing so intentionally.
Refer to "14.3.1 Setting a Transfer Request" for
active level.
General purpose input/output port.
DACK1
107
Function
119
152
INIT
B
External reset input (Reset to initialize settings)
(“L” active)
120
053
NMI
M
NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) input (“L” active)
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (9 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
MB91V301A
Pin name
I/O circuit type
CS0
122
123
124
125
126
127
J
156
Chip select 0 output. The pin has this function
when CS0 area of CSER (Chip Select Enable
Register) is enabled and the specified CS0XE bit
of port function register is enabled.
PA0
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when CS0XE bit of port function
register is general purpose port.
CS1
Chip select 1 output. The pin has this function
when CS1 area of CSER is enabled and the
specified CS1XE bit of port function register is
enabled.
J
157
PA1
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when chip select 1 output is disabled.
CS2
Chip select 2 output. The pin has this function
when CS2 area of CSER is enabled and the
specified CS2XE bit of port function register is
enabled.
J
158
PA2
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when chip select 2 output is disabled.
CS3
Chip select 3 output. The pin has this function
when CS3 area of CSER is enabled and the
specified CS3XE bit of port function register is
enabled.
J
159
PA3
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when chip select 3 output is disabled.
CS4
Chip select 4 output. The pin has this function
when CS4 area of CSER is enabled and the
specified CS4XE bit of port function register is
enabled.
TRG2
External trigger input for PPG timer. This input is
used continuously when the corresponding timer
input is enabled. In this case, do not output to chip
select and this port unless doing so intentionally. *1
PA4
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when chip select 4 output is disabled.
CS5
Chip select 5 output. The pin has this function
when CS5 area of CSER is enabled and the
specified CS5XE bit of port function register is
enabled.
J
160
161
Function
PPG2
PA5
J
PPG timer output. The pin has this function when
PPE2 bit is enabled.
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when chip select 5 output and PPG
timer output are disabled.
23
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 List of Pin Function (except for Power Supply, and GND Pins) (10 / 10)
Pin no.
MB91302A
MB91V301A
Pin name
I/O circuit type
Chip select 6 output. The pin has this function
when CS6 area of CSER is enabled and the
specified CS6XE bit of port function register is
enabled.
CS6
128
J
162
129
Function
PA6
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when chip select 6 output are
disabled.
CS7
Chip select 7 output. The pin has this function
when CS7 area of CSER is enabled and the
specified CS7XE bit of port function register is
enabled.
J
163
General purpose input/output port. The pin has
this function when chip select 7 output is disabled.
PA7
*1 : Refer to "[bit7, bit6] EGS1, EGS0: Trigger input edge selection bit" in "CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER" for active
level setting.
*2 : Refer to "[bit9, bit8, bit7] MOD2, MOD1, MOD0 (MODe): Setting of operation mode" in "CHAPTER 6 16-BIT
RELOAD TIMER" for active level.
Table 1.6-2 Power Supply and GND Pins
MB91302A
6, 16, 26, 43,
53, 63, 101,
114, 130, 140
7, 17, 27, 44,
54, 72, 89, 111,
121, 115, 131,
141
73
74
Pin no.
MB91V301A
3, 9, 19, 25, 31, 41, 47,
52, 62, 72, 94, 131, 142,
145, 154, 164, 170, 176
4, 10, 20, 26, 32, 42, 48,
53, 63, 73, 82, 83, 95,
119, 141, 146, 150, 151,
155, 165, 171, 177
103
104
75
105
AVR
110
1
102, 132
AVSS/AVRL
N.C.
C
80
102
24
Pin name
Function
VSS
GND pins.
Connect all pins at the same potential.
VCC
3 V power supply pins.
Connect all pins at the same potential.
AVCC
AVRH
Analog power supply pin for A/D converter
Reference power supply pin for A/D
converter
Capacitor coupling pin for the A/D
converter
Analog GND pin for A/D converter
N.C. pin. Use at open
Capacitor coupling pin for the internal
regulator
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-3 Tool Pins
Pin no.
Pin name
MB91302A
I/O circuit type
Function
MB91V301A
-
97
ICLK
S
Clock output
-
101
TRST
Q
Tool reset
98 to 100
ICS2 to ICS0
N
Device status output (during TRC)
DSU4 operation status output
(during EML)
90 to 93
ICD3 to ICD0
R
Trace information output (during
TRC)
Program/data I/O (during EML)
-
96
BREAK
P
DSU4 break request input
-
89
EMRAM
O
Emulation memory detection
-
88
ECS
N
Chip select for emulation memory
-
84 to 87
EWR3 to EWR0
N
Write strobe for emulation memory
-
-
25
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.7
I/O Circuit Types
This section describes the I/O circuit types.
■ I/O Circuit Types
Table 1.7-1 I/O Circuit Types (1 / 4)
Type
Circuit
Remarks
Oscillation feedback resistance
approx. 1 MΩ
X1
Clock input
P-ch
A
N-ch
X0
Standby control
P-ch
CMOS hysteresis input with pull-up
resistor
Pull-up resistor value = approx. 25 kΩ
(Typ)
P-ch
N-ch
B
Digital input
CMOS level I/O with standby control
IOL = 4 mA
P-ch
Digital output
N-ch
Digital output
C
Digital input
Standby control
26
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.7-1 I/O Circuit Types (2 / 4)
Type
Circuit
Remarks
Analog input with switch
P-ch
N-ch
D
P-ch
Analog input
N-ch
Channel control
CMOS level output without standby
control
P-ch
G
N-ch
Digital input
Pull-up control
P-ch
J
P-ch
Digital output
N-ch
Digital output
CMOS level I/O with standby control
and Pull-up control
Pull-up resistor value = approx. 25 kΩ
(Typ)
IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
Standby control
Pull-up control
P-ch
K
P-ch
Digital output
N-ch
Digital output
CMOS level output
CMOS level hysteresis input with
standby control and Pull-up control
Pull-up resistor value = approx. 25 kΩ
(Typ)
IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
Standby control
27
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.7-1 I/O Circuit Types (3 / 4)
Type
Circuit
Remarks
Pull-up control
P-ch
L
P-ch
Digital output
N-ch
Digital output
CMOS level output
CMOS level hysteresis input with
Pull-up control
no standby control
Pull-up resistor value = approx. 25 kΩ
(Typ)
IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
CMOS level hysteresis input
no standby control
P-ch
M
N-ch
Digital input
P-ch
Digital output
N-ch
Digital output
Output buffer
CMOS level output
IOL = 4 mA
N
O
Digital input
Digital input
P
Input buffer
CMOS level input
Input buffer with pull-down
Pull-down resistor value =
approx. 25 kΩ (Typ)
N-ch
Input buffer with Pull-up
Pull-up resistor value = approx. 25 kΩ
(Typ)
P-ch
Q
28
Digital input
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.7-1 I/O Circuit Types (4 / 4)
Type
Circuit
P-ch
N-ch
R
Remarks
Digital output
Digital output
I/O buffer with pull-down
CMOS level output
IOL = 4 mA
Pull-up resistor value = approx. 25 kΩ
(Typ)
N-ch
Digital input
S
P-ch
Digital output
N-ch
Digital output
I/O buffer
CMOS level output
IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
Pull-up control
P-ch
T
P-ch
N-ch
Digital output with
open-drain control
Digital output
N-ch open-drain output
CMOS level I/O with standby control
and Pull-up control
Pull-up register value = approx. 25 kΩ
(Typ)
IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
Standby Control
U
P-ch
Digital output
N-ch
Digital output
CMOS level output
CMOS level hysteresis input with
standby control
5 V tolerant
IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
Standby Control
V
P-ch
Digital output
N-ch
Digital output
CMOS level output
CMOS level hysteresis input without
standby control
5 V tolerant
IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
29
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
30
CHAPTER 2
HANDLING THE DEVICE
This chapter provides precautions on handling the MB91301 series.
2.1 Precautions on Handling the Device
2.2 Precautions on Handling Power Supplies
31
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
2.1
Precautions on Handling the Device
This section contains information on preventing a latch up and on the handling of
pins.
■ Preventing a Latch Up
A latch up can occur if, on a CMOS IC, a voltage higher than VCC or a voltage lower than VSS is
applied to an input or output pin or a voltage higher than the rating is applied between VCC pin
and VSS pin. A latch up, if it occurs, significantly increases the power supply current and may
cause thermal destruction of an element. When you use a CMOS IC, be very careful not to
exceed the maximum rating.
■ Unused Input Pins
Do not leave an unused input pin open, since it may cause a malfunction. Handle by using a
pull-up or pull-down resistor.
■ Power Supply Pins
If more than one VCC or VSS pin exist, those that must be kept at the same potential are
designed to be connected to one other inside the device to prevent malfunctions such as latch
up. Be sure to connect the pins to a power supply and ground external to the device to minimize
undesired electromagnetic radiation, prevent strobe signal malfunctions due to an increase in
ground level, and conform to the total output current rating. Given consideration to connecting
the current supply source to VCC or VSS of the device at the lowest impedance possible.
It is also recommended that a ceramic capacitor of around 0.1 µF be connected between VCC
and VSS at circuit points close to the device as a bypass capacitor.
■ Quartz Oscillation Circuit
Noise near the X0 or X1 pin may cause the device to malfunction. Design printed circuit boards
so that X0, X1, the quartz oscillator (or ceramic oscillator), and the bypass capacitor to ground
are located as near to one another as possible.
It is strongly recommended that printed circuit board artwork that surrounds the X0 and X1 pins
with ground be used to increase the expectation of stable operation.
Please ask the crystal maker to evaluate the oscillational characteristics of the crystal and this
device.
■ External Clock
When using an external clock, in general supply it to the X0 pin while also supplying a reversephase clock to the X1 pin simultaneously. In this case, do not use the STOP mode (oscillation
stop mode), since the X1 pin stops with "H" level output in STOP mode.
Additionally, the X0 pin can be used only if an external clock is supplied at 12.5 MHz.
Figure 2.1-1 and Figure 2.1-2 show examples of using an external clock.
32
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
Figure 2.1-1 Using an External Clock (Normal)
X0
X1
MB91301 series
Note: Stop mode (oscillation stop mode) cannot be used.
Figure 2.1-2 Using an External Clock (Less than 12.5 MHz)
X0
Open
X1
MB91301 series
■ Treatment of NC and OPEN Pins
Pins marked as "NC" or "OPEN" must be left open-circuit.
■ Mode Pins (MD0 to MD2)
These pins must be directly connected to VCC or VSS when they are used. Keep the pattern
length between a mode pin on a printed circuit board and VCC or VSS as short as possible so
that they can be connected at a low impedance.
■ Precautions on Use
❍ MB91301 series
❍ Clock controller
Reserve a regulator wait time or an oscillation stabilization wait time when an "L" level signal is
input to INIT.
❍ Notes on during operation of PLL clock mode
On this microcontroller, if in case the crystal oscillator breaks off or an external reference clock
input stops while the PLL clock mode is selected, a self-oscillator circuit contained in the PLL
may continue its operation at its self-running frequency. However, Fujitsu will not guarantee
results of operations if such failure occurs.
❍ MCLK and SYSCLK
MCLK is stopped in sleep and stop modes, and SYSCLK is stopped only in stop mode. Use
MCLK and SYSCLK appropriately according to the purpose of use.
❍ Pull-up control
If a pull-up resistor is connected to a pin to be used as an external bus pin, the AC ratings
cannot be guaranteed.
Even a port that already has a pull-up resistor is invalid in stop mode (HIZ = 1) and hardware
standby mode.
❍ Bit search module
Only word access is allowed for the BSD0, BSD1, and BSDC registers.
33
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
❍ Low-power consumption mode
(1) Be sure to use the following sequences after using the synchronous standby mode (TBCR:
Set by time base counter control register bit8 SYNCS bit) when putting in the standby mode.
/* Write to STCR */
ldi
#_STCR, r0
; STCR register (481H)
ldi
#Val_of_Stby, rl ; “Val_of_Stby” is the data to be written to STCR.
stb
rl, @r0
; Write to STCR.
/* Write to CTBR */
ldi
#_CTBR, r2
; CTBR register (483H)
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (1)
stb
rl, @r2
; Write A5 to CTBR.
ldi
#0x5A, rl
; Clear command (2)
stb
rl, @r2
; Write 5A to CTBR.
/* Clear the time base counter at this point */
ldub
@r0, rl
; Read from STCR.
/* Start moving to synchronous standby mode */
ldub
@r0, rl
nop
; Dummy read from STCR.
; NOP for timing adjustment x 5
nop
nop
nop
nop
(2) Do not do the following when the monitor debugger is used.
- Set the break point to the above-mentioned instruction row.
- Execute the step for the above-mentioned instruction row.
❍ Prefetch
When allowing prefetch from an area that has been set as a little endian area, limit access to
the area to word access (i.e., access in units of 32 bits).
The area cannot be accessed correctly by byte or half-word accesses.
❍ I/O port access
Only byte accesses are allowed to I/O ports.
❍ Switching the function of a common port
Use the port function register (PFR) to switch the function of a pin which also serves as a port.
However, use an external bus setting to switch the function of a bus pin.
34
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
❍ D-bus memory
Do not set a code area in D-bus memory.
No instruction fetch is performed to the D-bus.
Instruction fetches to the D-bus area result in incorrect data interpreted as code, which can
cause the microcontroller to lose control.
Do not set a data area in I-bus memory.
❍ I-bus memory
Do not set a stack area or vector table in I-bus memory.
It may cause a hang during EIT processing (including RETI).
Recovery from the hang requires a reset.
Do not perform DMA transfer to I-bus memory.
❍ Notes on the PS register
Since some instructions manipulate the PS register earlier, the following exceptions may cause
the interrupt handler to break or the PS flag to update its display setting when the debugger is
being used. As the microcontroller is designed to carry out reprocessing correctly upon
returning from such an EIT event, it performs operations before and after the EIT as specified in
either case.
•
The following operations may be performed when the instruction immediately followed by a
DIV0U/DIV0S instruction is (a) halted by a user interrupt or NMI, (b) single-stepped, or (c)
breaks in response to a data event or emulator menu:
1. D0 and D1 flags are updated earlier.
2. The EIT handler (user interrupt/NMI or emulator) is executed.
3. Upon returning from the EIT, the DIV0U/DIV0S instruction is executed and the D0 and D1
flags are updated to the same values as those in (1) above.
•
The following operations are performed when the OR CCR/ST ILM/MOV Ri and PS instructions
are executed to enable interruptions when a user interrupt or NMI trigger event has occurred.
1. The PS register is updated earlier.
2. The EIT handler (user interrupt/NMI) is executed.
3. Upon returning from the EIT, the above instructions are executed and the PS register is
updated to the same value as that in (1) above.
❍ R15 (General purpose register)
When any of the following instructions is executed, the SSP* or USP* value is not used as R15,
resulting in an incorrect value written to memory.
AND
OR
EOR
XCHB
R15, @Ri
R15, @Ri
R15, @Ri
@Rj, R15
ANDH
ORH
EORH
R15, @Ri
R15, @Ri
R15, @Ri
ANDB
ORB
EORB
R15, @Ri
R15, @Ri
R15, @Ri
* : R15 is a virtual register. When a program attempts to access R15, the SSP or USP is
accessed depending on the status of the “S” flag as an SP flag. When coding the above ten
instructions using an assembler, specify a general-purpose register other than R15.
35
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
❍ RETI instruction
Do not neither control register of the instruction cache nor the data access to RAM of the
instruction cache immediately before the instruction of RETI.
❍ Watchdog timer function
The watchdog timer function of this model monitors whether a program holds over a reset within
a specified time. It also resets the CPU if the reset is not held over because of uncontrollable
program operation. After the watchdog timer function is enabled, it keeps operating until a reset
occurs.
The watchdog timer function usually holds over CPU reset automatically when program
execution by the CPU stops. For the relevant exception conditions, see "3.12.7 Peripheral
Circuits of Clock Controller".
The reset by the watchdog timer function might not occur if the above status is caused by
uncontrollable system operation. If it might occur, a reset (INIT) request must be input from the
external INIT pin.
❍ A/D converter
When the device is turned on or returns from a reset or stop, it takes time for the external
capacitor to be charged, requiring the A/D converter to wait for at least 10 ms.
■ Unique to the Evaluation Chip MB91V301A
❍ Tool reset
On an evaluation board, use the chip with INIT and TRST connected together.
❍ Single-stepping the RETI instruction
If an interrupt occurs frequently during single stepping, execute only the relevant processing
routine repeatedly after single-stepping RETI. This will prevent the main routine and lowinterrupt-level programs from being executed. Do not single-step the RETI instruction for
avoidance purposes.
When the debugging of the relevant interrupt routine becomes
unnecessary, perform debugging with that interrupt disabled.
❍ Simultaneous occurrences of a software break and a user interrupt/NMI
When a software break and a user interrupt /NMI take place at the same time, the emulator
debugger can cause the following phenomena:
•
The debugger stops pointing to a location other than the programmed breakpoints.
•
The halted program is not re-executed correctly.
If these phenomena occur, use a hardware break instead of the software break. If the monitor
debugger has been used, avoid setting any break at the relevant location.
❍ Operand break
A stack pointer placed in an area set for a DSU operand break can cause a malfunction. Do not
apply a data event break to access to the area containing the address of a system stack pointer.
36
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
❍ ICE startup sequence
When using the ICE, when you start debugging, ensure that the bus configuration is set
correctly for the area being used before downloading. After turning on the power to the target,
the states of the RD and WR0 to WR3 pins are undefined until you perform the above setting.
Accordingly, include enabling pull-up as part of the startup sequence. If using these pins as
general-purpose ports, set as output ports to prevent conflict with the output signals during the
time the pin states are undefined.
Table 2.1-1 Pins which require handling when using the ICE
External bus width
Pin name
32 bit
16 bit
8 bit
RD
Pull-up
Pull-up
Pull-up
WR0
Pull-up
Pull-up
Pull-up
WR1 (P85)
Pull-up
Pull-up
*
WR2 (P86)
Pull-up
*
*
WR3 (P87)
Pull-up
*
*
* : Use as output ports.
37
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
❍ Configuration batch file
The example batch file below sets the mode vector and sets up the CS0 configuration register
for the download area. Use values appropriate to the hardware in the wait, timing, and other
settings.
#--------------------------------------------------------# Set MODR (0x7fd) =Enable In memory+16 bit External Bus
set mem/byte 0x7fd=0x5
#--------------------------------------------------------# Set ASR0 (0x640) ; 0x0010_0000-0x002f_ffff
set mem/halfword 0x640=0x0010
#--------------------------------------------------------# Set ACR0 (0x642)
#
; ASZ [3:0]=0101:2M bytes
#
; DBW [1:0]=01:16 bit width, automatically set from MODR
#
; BST [1:0]=00:1 burst (16 bit x 2)
#
; SREN=0:Disable BRQ
#
; PFEN=1:Enable Pre fetch buffer
#
; WREN=1:Enable Write operation
#
; LEND=0: Big endian
#
; TYPE [3:0]=0010:WEX: Disable RDY
set mem/halfword 0x642=0x5462
#--------------------------------------------------------# Set AWR0 (0x660)
#
; W15 to W12=0010:auto wait=2
#
; WR07, WR06=01:RD, WR delay=1cycle
#
; W05, W04=01:WR->WR delay=1cycle (for WEX)
#
; W03 =1:MCLK->RD/WR delay=0.5cycle
#
;
:for async Memory
#
; W02 =0:ADR->CS delay=0
#
; W01 =0:ADR->RD/WR setup 0cycle
#
; W00 =RD/WR->ADR hold 0cycle
set mem/halfword 0x660=0x2058
#--------------------------------------------------------❍ Emulation memory
If SRAM as the emulation memory is built on target board, SRAM accessed by RD, WR signal,
and +BYTE control signal can not be used. (The external bus is initialized to the bus mode for
accessing RD, WRn after reset.)
38
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
2.2
Precautions on Handling Power Supplies
This section provides precautions on power supplies with regard to pin handling and
processing when power is turned on.
■ Processing after Power-on
Immediately after power-on, be sure to apply a reset that initializes settings (INIT) from the INIT
pin.
To provide for an oscillation stabilization wait time and regulator stabilization wait time
immediately after power-on, continue to input the "L" level to the INIT pin as long as the
oscillation stabilization wait time required by the oscillating circuit. (Initialization by INIT from the
INIT pin sets the oscillation stabilization wait time to the minimum value.)
■ External Clock Input after Power-on
After power-on, be sure to input an external clock until the oscillation stabilization wait is
canceled.
■ Indeterminate Output when the Power Is Turned On
When the power is turned on, the output pin may remain unstable until the internal power supply
becomes stable.
■ Notes on Using the Internal DC-DC Regulator and A/D Converter
The MB91301 series contains a regulator. Be sure to supply power to the VCC pin at 3.3 V and
add a bypass capacitor of about 4.7 µF for the regulator to the C pin.
The regulator contains an A/D converter and supplies power to AVCC at 3.3 V. Be sure to insert
a capacitor of at least 0.05 µF between the AVR and AVSS/AVRL pins.
Figure 2.2-1 Notes on Using the Internal DC-DC Regulator and A/D Converter
3.3V
Vcc
3.3V
AVcc
C
AVRH
AVR
Vss
AVss/AVRL
Vss
MB91301
GND
39
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING THE DEVICE
40
CHAPTER 3
CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
This chapter provides basic information required to understand the functions of the FR
family. It covers architecture, specifications, and instructions.
3.1 Memory Space
3.2 Internal Architecture
3.3 Instruction Cache
3.4 Dedicated Registers
3.5 General-Purpose Registers
3.6 Data Structure
3.7 Word Alignment
3.8 Memory Map
3.9 Branch Instructions
3.10 EIT (Exception, Interrupt, and Trap)
3.11 Reset (Device Initialization)
3.12 Clock Generation Control
3.13 Device State Control
3.14 Operating Modes
41
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.1
Memory Space
The FR family has a logical address space of 4 G bytes (232 addresses), which the CPU
accesses linearly.
■ Direct Addressing Area
The areas in the address space listed below are used for input-output.
These areas are called the direct addressing area. The address of an operand can be directly
specified in an instruction.
The size of the direct addressing area varies according to the size of data to be accessed:
42
•
Byte data access:
000H to 0FFH
•
Halfword data access: 000H to 1FFH
•
Word data access:
000H to 3FFH
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Memory Map
Figure 3.1-1 shows the memory map of the MB91301 series.
Figure 3.1-1 Memory Map
(MB91302A)
Internal ROM
External bus
mode
(MB91302A)
(Single chip
mode)
(MB91302A)
External ROM
External bus
mode
(MB91 V301A)
External ROM
External bus mode
(MB91V301A)
Internal ROM
External bus mode
(MODR register at
ROM=1)
0000 0000H
I/O
Direct
addre
ssing
area
I/O
Direct
addre
ssing
area
I/O
Direct
addre
ssing
area
I/O
Direct
addre
ssing
area
I/O
Direct
addre
ssing
area
I/O
see
“■I/O
MAP”
I/O
0000 0400H
I/O
see
“■I/O
MAP”
I/O
I/O
see
“■I/O
MAP”
I/O
I/O
see
“■I/O
MAP”
I/O
I/O
see
“■I/O
MAP”
I/O
0001 0000H
0002 0000H
0003 E000H
0003 F000H
Access
prohibited
Access
prohibited
Access
prohibited
Internal
RAM
4K bytes
Internal
RAM
4K bytes
Internal
RAM
4K bytes
Access
prohibited
Access
prohibited
Internal
RAM
8K bytes
Internal
RAM
8K bytes
0004 0000H
Internal
RAM
8K bytes
External
area
0004 2000H
0006 0000H
000E 0000H
Access
prohibited
Access
prohibited
External
area
External
area
External
area
Access
prohibited
000F E000H
Internal
RAM
(8K bytes)
ROM
emulation
000F F000H
Internal
ROM
4K bytes*2
0010 0000H
Access
prohibited
External
area
External
area
External
area
External
area
FFFF FFFFH
In addition to user ROM model, MB91302A has model without ROM, optimum real time OS internal model,
and IPL (Internal Program Loader) model.
*1 : On specific area between 10000H and 20000H, 4-Kbyte RAM can be used. Refer to “■INSTRUCTION
CACHE”.
When cache function is ON, all access areas including internal ROM/RAM are object of cache.
*2 : The real time OS internal model stores the real time OS kernel. The program loader internal model stores
the program loader.
Note: Internal ROM emulation: only MB91V301A
43
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Note:
Each mode is set depending on the mode vector fetch after INIT is negated. (For mode setting, see
“■MODE SETTINGS”.)
44
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.2
Internal Architecture
The FR family CPU is a high-performance core based on RISC architecture and
advanced instructions for embedded applications.
■ Features
❍ RISC architecture used
Basic instruction: One instruction per cycle
❍ 32-bit architecture
General-purpose register: 32 bits x 16
❍ 4 G bytes linear memory space
❍ Multiplier installed
•
32-bit by 32-bit multiplication: 5 cycles
•
16-bit by 16-bit multiplication: 3 cycles
❍ Enhanced interrupt processing function
•
Quick response speed: 6 cycles
•
Support of multiple interrupts
•
Level mask function: 16 levels
❍ Enhanced instructions for I/O operations
•
Memory-to-memory transfer instruction
•
Bit-processing instructions
❍ Efficient code
Basic instruction word length: 16 bits
❍ Low-power consumption
Sleep and stop modes
❍ Gear function
45
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Internal Architecture
The FR family CPU uses the Harvard architecture, which has separate buses for instructions
and data. A 32-bit/16-bit bus converter is connected to the 32-bit bus (F-bus), providing an
interface between the CPU and peripheral resources. A Harvard/Princeton bus converter is
connected to both the I-bus and D-bus, providing an interface between the CUP and bus
controllers.
Figure 3.2-1 shows connections in the internal architecture.
Figure 3.2-1 Internal Architecture
FR60 CPU
D-bus
I-bus
32
I address
External address
32
D address
Harvard
I data
24
32
Data RAM
D data
32
Princeton
Bus converter
32-bit
Address
32
16-bit
Data
32
Bus converter
16
R-bus
F-bus
Peripheral resources
46
Internal I/O
Bus controller
External data
32
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
❍ CPU
The CPU is a compact implementation of the 32-bit RISC FR family architecture.
Five instruction pipe lines are used to execute one instruction per cycle. A pipeline consists of
the following stages:
•
Instruction fetch (IF): Outputs an instruction address to fetch an instruction.
•
Instruction decode (ID): Decodes a fetched instruction. Also reads a register.
•
Execution (EX): Executes an arithmetic operation.
•
Memory access (MA): Performs a load or store access to memory.
•
Write-back (WB): Writes an operation result (or loaded memory data) to a register
Figure 3.2-2 Instruction Pipelines
CLK
Instruction 1
WB
Instruction 2
MA
WB
Instruction 3
EX
MA
WB
Instruction 4
ID
EX
MA
WB
Instruction 5
IF
ID
EX
MA
WB
IF
ID
EX
MA
Instruction 6
WB
Instructions are never executed randomly. If Instruction A enters a pipeline before Instruction B,
it always reaches the write-back stage before Instruction B.
In general, one instruction is executed per cycle. However, multiple cycles are required to
execute a load/store instruction with a memory wait, a branch instruction without a delay slot, or
a multiple-cycle instruction. The execution of instructions slows down if the instructions are not
supplied fast enough.
❍ 32-bit/16-bit bus converter
The 32-bit/16-bit bus converter provides an interface between the F-bus accessed with 32-bit
width and the R-bus accessed with 16-bit width and enables data access from the CPU to builtin peripheral circuits.
If the CPU performs one 32-bit access to the R-bus, the 32-bit/16-bit bus converter translates
the access into two 16-bit accesses. Some of the built-in peripheral circuits have limitations on
the access width.
❍ Harvard/Princeton bus converter
The Harvard/Princeton bus converter coordinates instruction and data accesses of the CPU to
provide a smooth interface between it and external buses.
The CPU has a Harvard architecture with separate buses for instructions and data. On the other
hand, the bus controller that performs control of external buses has a Princeton architecture
with a single bus. The Harvard/Princeton bus converter assigns priorities to instruction and data
accesses from the CPU to control accesses to the bus controller. This function allows the order
of external bus accesses to be permanently optimized.
47
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Overview of Instructions
The FR family supports the general RISC instructions as well as logical operation, bit
manipulation, and direct addressing instructions optimized for embedded applications. Each
instruction is 16 bits long (some instructions 32 and 48 bits long), resulting in superior efficiency
of memory use. For a list of instruction sets, see the appendix E.
An instruction set is classified into the following function groups:
•
Arithmetic operation
•
Load and store
•
Branch
•
Logical operation and bit manipulation
•
Direct addressing
•
Other
❍ Arithmetic operation
Arithmetic operation instructions include standard arithmetic operation instructions (addition,
subtraction, and comparison) and shift instructions (logical shift and arithmetic shift). The
addition and subtraction instructions include an operation with carries for use with multiple-wordlength operations and an operation that does not change flag values, a convenience in address
calculations.
Furthermore, 32-bit-by-32-bit and 16-bit-by-16-bit multiplication instructions and a 32-bit-by-32bit step division instruction are provided.
Additionally, an immediate data transfer instruction that sets immediate data in a register and a
register-to-register transfer instruction are provided.
An arithmetic operation instruction is executed using the general-purpose registers and the
multiplication and division registers in the CPU.
❍ Load and store
Load and store instructions read and write to external memory. They are also used to read and
write to a peripheral circuit (I/O) on the chip.
Load and store instructions have three access lengths: byte, halfword, and word. In addition to
indirect memory addressing via general registers, indirect memory addressing via registers with
displacement and via registers with register incrementing or decrementing are provided for
some instructions.
❍ Branch
The branch group includes branch, call, interrupt, and return instructions. Some branch
instructions have delay slots while others do not. These may be optimized according to the
application. For more information about the branch instructions, see Section "3.9 Branch
Instructions".
❍ Logic operation and bit manipulation
Logic operation instructions perform the AND, OR, and EOR logic operations between generalpurpose registers or a general-purpose register and memory (and I/O). Bit manipulation
instructions directly manipulate the contents of memory (and I/O). They access memory using
general register indirect addressing.
48
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
❍ Direct addressing
Direct addressing instructions are used for access between an I/O and a general-purpose
register or between an I/O and the memory. High-speed and high-efficiency access can be
achieved since an I/O address is directly specified in an instruction instead of using register
indirect addressing. Indirect memory addressing via registers with register incrementing or
decrementing are provided for some instructions.
❍ Other types of instructions
Other types of instructions include instructions that provide flag setting, stack manipulation, sign/
zero extension, and other functions in the PS register. Also, function entry and exit instructions
that support high-level languages and register multi-load/store instructions are provided.
49
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.3
Instruction Cache
This section describes the instruction cache in detail.
■ Overview
The instruction cache is temporary storage memory. When low-speed external memory
accesses an instruction code, the instruction cache internally stores the code already accessed
once time to increase the access speed for subsequent uses.
The instruction cache data RAM enables software-based direct read access and write access
when RAM mode is set. To turn the instruction cache on and then off, be sure to use the
subroutine described in the precautions in Section "3.3.4 Setting up the Instruction Cache
before Use".
50
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.3.1
Configuration of the Instruction Cache
This section describes the configuration of the instruction cache.
■ Overview of Specifications
The following is an overview of the instruction cache specifications:
•
FR family basic instruction length: 2 bytes
•
Block layout method: 2-way set associative
•
Block: One way consists of 128 blocks.
One block consists of 16 bytes (= 4 sub blocks).
One sub block consists of 4 bytes (= 1 bus access unit)
■ Configuration of Instruction Cache
Figure 3.3-1 shows the configuration of the instruction cache.
Figure 3.3-1 Configuration of Instruction Cache
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
I3
I2
I1
I0
Cache tag
Subblock 3
Subblock 2
Subblock 1
Subblock 0
Block 0
Cache tag
Subblock 3
Subblock 2
Subblock 1
Subblock 0
Block 127
Cache tag
Subblock 3
Subblock 2
Subblock 1
Subblock 0
Block 0
Cache tag
Subblock 3
Subblock 2
Subblock 1
Subblock 0
Block 127
Way 1
128 blocks
Way 2
128 blocks
51
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Instruction Cache Tags
Figure 3.3-2 shows the configuration of the instruction cache tags.
Figure 3.3-2 Configuration of Instruction Cache Tags
Way 1
bit
31
9 8
Address tag
7
Blank
6
SBV3 SBV2
5
4
3
2
1
SBV1 SBV0 TAGV Empty LRU
0
ETLK
Way 2
bit
9 8
31
Address tag
7
Empty
6
SBV3 SBV2
5
4
3
2
SBV1 SBV0 TAGV
1
Empty
0
ETLK
The following describes the functions of the instruction cache tag bits.
[bit31 to bit9] Address tag
In the address tag, the high-order 23 bits of the memory address of an instruction cached in
a corresponding block are stored. The instruction data stored in Sub block k of Block i has
Memory Address IA, which is calculated as
IA = address-tag x 29+ i x 24 + k x 22
The address tag is used to check the matching of an instruction address requested for the
access by the CPU. Based on the result of the tag check, one of the following operations
occurs:
•
If the requested instruction data exists in the cache (hit)
The data is transferred from the cache to the CPU within the cycle.
•
If the requested instruction data does not exist in the cache (miss)
The data acquired via external access is acquired by the CPU and the cache simultaneously.
[bit7 to bit4] Sub block valid
If SBV3 to SBV0=1, the instruction data at the address indicated by the tag has been entered
in the corresponding sub block. Normally, two instructions can be stored in a sub block
(except for an immediate data transfer instruction).
[bit3] TAG valid bit
Indicates whether the address tag value is valid. If this bit is "0", the block becomes invalid
regardless of the sub block valid bit (when flushed).
[bit1] LRU (only for Way 1)
Exists only in the instruction cache tag of Way 1. Indicates whether, in a selected set, the
entry last accessed was Way 1 or Way 2. Indicates that the last accessed entry of the set
belongs to Way 1 if LRU=1 or Way 2 if LRU=0.
52
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit0] ETLK (Entry lock)
Locks into the cache all the entries in the block corresponding to the tag. The entries are
locked if ETLK=1 (there is no updating) if a cache miss occurs. However, invalid sub blocks
are updated. If, for both Ways 1 and 2, a cache miss occurs while the entries are locked, one
cycle required for the cache miss decision is lost and then external memory is accessed.
53
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.3.2
Configuration of the Control Registers
Control registers include the cache size register (ISIZE) and the instruction cache
register (ICHCR).
This section describes the functions of these registers.
■ Configuration of Cache Size Register (ISIZE)
Figure 3.3-3 shows the configuration of the cache size register (ISIZE) bits.
Figure 3.3-3 Configuration of the Control Register (ISIZE) Bits
bit
00000307H
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
0
SIZE1 SIZE0
R/W
R/W
Initial value
------10B
The following describes the functions of the cache size register (ISIZE) bits.
[bit1, bit0] SIZE1, SIZE0
These bits set the capacity of the instruction cache. Depending on the setting, the cache
size, IRAM capacity, and address map used in RAM mode vary as shown in Figure 3.3-5. If
you have changed the cache capacity, be sure to flash the cache and unlock the entries
before turning on the cache.
Table 3.3-1 Cache Size Registers
SIZE1
SIZE0
Capacity
0
0
1 Kbyte
0
1
2 Kbytes
1
0
4 Kbytes (Initial value)
1
1
Setting prohibited
■ Instruction Cache Control Register (ICHCR)
The instruction cache control register (ICHCR: I-CacHe Control Register) controls instruction
cache operation.
Writing to the ICHCR does not affect the cache operation of an instruction fetched during the
subsequent three cycles.
Figure 3.3-4 shows the configuration of the instruction cache control register.
Figure 3.3-4 Configuration of Instruction Cache Control Register (ICHCR) Bits
bit
000003E7H
54
7
RAM
R/W
6
-
5
GBLK
R/W
4
ALFL
R/W
3
EOLK
R/W
2
ELKR
R/W
1
FLSH
R/W
0
ENAB
R/W
Initial value
0-000000B
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
The following describes the functions of the instruction cache control register (ICHCR) bits.
[bit7] RAM (RAM mode)
If this bit is "1", RAM mode is set.
In RAM mode, set the ENAB bit to "0" to turn off the instruction cache.
[bit5] GBLK (Global lock)
This bit locks all the current entries to the instruction cache. If a miss occurs when GBLK=1,
a valid entry in the instruction cache is not updated. However, invalid subblocks are updated.
The instruction data fetch operation at this time is the same as when the entries are not
locked.
[bit4] ALFL (Autolock fail)
This bit (ALFL) is set to "1" if locking is attempted on an entry that is already locked. If, during
entry autolock, an entry update is attempted on an entry that is already locked, no new entry
is locked in the instruction cache regardless of what the user intends. Reference this bit for
debugging of a program or similar purpose.
Clear this bit by writing "0" to it.
[bit3] EOLK (Entry autolock)
This bit either enables or disables an autolock setting on an entry in the instruction cache. An
entry accessed if this bit (EOLK) is "1" (only if a miss occurs) is locked when the hardware
sets the entry lock bit in the instruction cache tag to "1". After this point, a locked entry is not
subject to update when an instruction cache miss occurs. However, invalid subblocks are
updated. To ensure that an entry is locked, flush the cache and set this bit.
[bit2] ELKR (Entry lock clear)
This bit specifies clearing of the entry lock bit in all the instruction cache tags. In the cycle
following the one in which this bit (ELKR) is set to "1", the entry lock bit in all the cache tags
is cleared to "0". However, the content of this bit is held only for one clock cycle and the bit is
cleared to "0" in the second and later clock cycles.
[bit1] FLSH (Flash)
This bit specifies flushing of the instruction cache. Set this bit (FLSH) to "1" to flush the
instruction cache. However, the content of this bit is held only for one clock cycle and the bit
is cleared to "0" in the second and later clock cycles.
[bit0] ENAB (Enable)
This bit either enables or disables the instruction cache. If this bit (ENAB) is "0", the
instruction cache is disabled and an instruction access from the CPU becomes external
directly without going through the instruction cache. In the disabled state, the contents of the
instruction cache are maintained.
55
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Figure 3.3-5 Address Map of RAM
Address
00010000H
00010200H
00010400H
00010600H
00010800H
00010FFFH
00014000H
00014200H
00014400H
00014600H
00014800H
00014FFFH
00018000H
00018200H
00018400H
00018 600H
00018 800H
00018 FFFH
0001C000H
0001C200H
0001C400H
0001C600H
0001C800H
0001CFFFH
Cache off
RAM off
Cache
4 Kbytes
RAM off
Cache off
RAM on
TAG1
Cache
2 Kbytes
RAM off
Cache
2 Kbytes
RAM on
Cache
1 Kbyte
RAM off
TAG1
<TAG1>
<TAG1>
<TAG1>
TAG2
TAG2
TAG2
<TAG2>
<TAG2>
<TAG2>
$RAM1
$RAM1
$RAM1
TAG2
<TAG2>
<TAG2>
<TAG2>
<TAG2>
<TAG2>
IRAM1
<IRAM1>
IRAM2
<IRAM2>
<$RAM1>
<$RAM1>
$RAM2
IRAM1
IRAM1
<IRAM1>
<$RAM1>
<$RAM2>
<$RAM2>
IRAM2
IRAM2
<IRAM2>
<$RAM2>
<IRAM1>
<$RAM1>
IRAM2
$RAM2
IRAM2
<IRAM2>
<- Entry at 01x address
<- Mirror of 01x
CacheRAM
00018000H
00018004 H
00018008 H
0001800CH
00018010 H
00018014 H
...
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
Instruction
at
at
at
at
at
at
<$RAM2>
000 address(SBV0)
004 address(SBV1)
008 address(SBV2)
00C address(SBV3)
010 address(SBV0)
014 address(SBV1)
...
Figure 3.3-6 Memory Allocation by Cache Size
56
$RAM1
IRAM1
$RAM1...Cache RAM(way1) IRAM1...I-bus RAM(way1)
$RAM2...Cache RAM(way2) IRAM1...I-bus RAM(way2)
<- Entry at 00x address
<- Mirror of 00x
Address
000H
200H
400H
600H
000H
200H
400H
600H
IRAM1
$RAM2
$RAM2
Cache
RAM on
TAG1
<TAG1>
<TAG1>
<TAG1>
<TAG1>
<TAG1>
TAG1...TAG RAM(way1)
TAG2...TAG RAM(way2)
< >...Mirror area
RAM on/off...RAM bit=I/O
TAG RAM
00010000H
00010004H
00010008 H
0001000CH
00010010H
00010014H
...
Cache
4 Kbytes
RAM on
TAG1
Cache
4 Kbytes
Cache
2 Kbytes
Cache
1 Kbyte
$RAM1
$RAM1
IRAM1
IRAM1
$RAM2
$RAM2
$RAM1
$RAM2
IRAM2
IRAM2
Cache off
IRAM1
IRAM2
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Figure 3.3-7 Cache Area
Address
00000000H
ROMA=0
(No ROM)
ROMA=1
(ROM)
Direct area
Direct area
00010000H
00020000H
00030000H
00040000H
IRAM
00100000H
Cache area
IRAM
(Even in a D-bus RAM area cache
areas are cached through the IA bus.)
Internal ROM
Cache area
Each chip-select area can be
set as a non-cacheable area.
FFFFFFFFH
57
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.3.3
Instruction Cache Statuses and Settings
This section describes the state of the instruction cache in each operating modes and
how to set up the instruction cache.
■ Instruction Cache Status in Each Operating Mode
Table 3.3-2 shows the state of the instruction cache in each operating mode.
The disable and flush states are encountered if a bit manipulation or similar instruction has
changed only the related bit.
Table 3.3-2 Status of Instruction Cache in Each Operating Mode
Just after reset
Disable
Contents undefined
Previous state maintained
Not rewritable while disabled
Previous state maintained
Address tag
Contents undefined
Previous state maintained
Not rewritable while disabled
Previous state maintained
Subblock
valid bit
Contents undefined
Previous state maintained
Not rewritable while disabled
Previous state maintained
LRU
Contents undefined
Previous state maintained
Not rewritable while disabled
Previous state maintained
Entry lock
bit
Contents undefined
Previous state maintained
Not rewritable while disabled
Entry lock cleared
TAG
valid bit
Contents undefined
Previous state maintained
Flashable while disabled
All entries invalid
Normal mode
Previous state maintained
Flashable while disabled
Previous state maintained
Global lock
Unlocked
Previous state maintained
Rewritable while disabled
Previous state maintained
Autolock fail
No fail
Previous state maintained
Rewritable while disabled
Previous state maintained
Entry autolock
Unlocked
Previous state maintained
Rewritable while disabled
Previous state maintained
Entry lock
clear
No clearing
Previous state maintained
Rewritable while disabled
Previous state maintained
Enable
Disabled
Disabled
Previous state maintained
Flash
Not flushed
Previous state maintained
Rewritable while disabled
Flashed in the cycle
following memory access
Returned to "0" thereafter
Cache memory
Tag
RAM
Control
register
58
Flash
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Updating Entries in the Instruction Cache
Entries in the instruction cache are updated as shown in Table 3.3-3.
Table 3.3-3 Updating of Entries in the Instruction Cache
Unlock
Hit
Miss
Lock
Not updated
Not updated
Loads the memory and updates the
contents of entries in the instruction cache.
Not updated for a tag miss.
Updated for subblock invalid.
■ Areas Cacheable by the Instruction Cache
•
The instruction cache can cache only the internal F-bus space (RAM 8K bytes) and external
bus space.
•
Even if the contents of external memory are updated for DMA transfer, coherence to cached
instructions is not maintained. In this case, maintain cache coherence by flushing the cache.
•
Each chip select area can be set as a non-cacheable area. Setting a non-cacheable area,
however, carries a penalty of one more cycle than when with the instruction cache turned off.
59
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.3.4
Setting up the Instruction Cache before Use
This section describes how to set up the instruction cache before it is used.
■ Setup Procedure
Before using the instruction cache, set it up as follows:
❍ Initialization
Before the instruction cache is used, it must be cleared.
Set the FLSH and ELKR bits of the register to "1" to delete past data.
ldi
#0x000003E7, r0
// I-Cache control register address
ldi
#0B00000110, r1
// FLSH bit (Bit 1)
// ELKR bit (Bit 2)
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
This initializes the instruction cache.
❍ Enabling the instruction cache (ON)
To enable the instruction cache, set the ENAB bit to "1".
ldi
#0x000003E7, r0
// I-Cache control register address
ldi
#0B00000001, r1
// ENAB bit (Bit 0)
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
Any subsequent instruction access is loaded into the instruction cache.
The instruction cache can be enabled at the same time it is initialized.
60
ldi
#0x000003E7, r0
// I-Cache control register address
ldi
#0B00000111, r1
// ENAB bit (Bit 0)
// FLSH bit (Bit 1)
// ELKR bit (Bit 2)
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
❍ Disabling the instruction cache (OFF)
To disable the instruction cache, set the ENAB bit to "0".
ldi
#0x000003E7, r0
// I-Cache control register address
ldi
#0B00000000, r1
// ENAB bit (Bit 0)
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
In this state maintained (which is the same as after reset), the instruction cache virtually does
not exist and thus does nothing.
It may be a good idea to turn off the instruction cache if overhead seems to be a problem.
❍ Locking the complete contents of the cache
Lock the instruction cache so that all the instructions it contains are removed, leaving nothing in
it.
Set the GBLK bit of the register to "1". Also set the ENAB bit to "1", since otherwise the instruction
cache is turned off and no locked instructions in the instruction cache are used.
ldi
#0x000003E7, r0
// I-Cache control register address
ldi
#0B00100001, r1
// ENAB bit (Bit 0)
// GBLK bit (Bit 5)
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
61
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
❍ Locking a specific instruction to the instruction cache
To lock a specific group of instructions (subroutines, etc.) to the instruction cache, set the EOLK
bit to "1" before executing the instructions. A locked instruction is accessed as if it is in highspeed internal ROM.
ldi
#0x000003E7, r0
// I-Cache control register address
ldi
#0B00001001, r1
// ENAB bit (Bit 0)
// EOLK bit (Bit 3)
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
Depending on the number of memory waits, this bit becomes valid with the next or a later
instruction following the stb instruction.
When locking of the group of instructions is completed, set the EOLK bit to "0".
ldi
#0x000003E7, r0
// I-Cache control register address
ldi
#0B00000001, r1
// ENAB bit (Bit 0)
// EOLK bit (Bit 3)
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
❍ Clearing an instruction cache lock
Clear the lock information for an instruction locked with the EOLK bit described above.
ldi
#0x000003E7, r0
// I-Cache control register address
ldi
#0B00000000, r1
// Cache disable
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
ldi
#0B00000101, r1
// ELKR bit (Bit 2)
stb
r1, @r0
// Write to the register
Only the lock information is cleared. Locked instructions are replaced sequentially with new
instructions depending on the state maintained of the LRU bit.
62
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.4
Dedicated Registers
Use the dedicated registers for specific purposes. A program counter (PC), program
status (PS), table base register (TBR), return pointer (RP), system stack pointer (SSP),
user stack pointer (USP), and multiply and divide registers (MDH/MDL) are provided.
■ List of Dedicated Registers
A register consists of 32 bits.
Figure 3.4-1 shows the dedicated registers.
Figure 3.4-1 Dedicated Registers
bit31
Program counter
PC
Program status
PS
Table base register
TBR
Return pointer
RP
System stack pointer
SSP
User stack pointer
USP
Multiply and divide registers
MDH
MDL
-
bit0
ILM
-
SCR
CCR
■ Program Counter (PC)
This section describes the functions of the program counter (PC: Program Counter).
The program counter (PC) consists of 32 bits. Figure 3.4-2 shows the configuration of program
counter (PC) bit.
Figure 3.4-2 Configuration of Program Counter Bit
bit31
PC
bit0
[Initial value]
XXXXXXXXH
The program counter indicates the address of the instruction being executed.
If the PC is updated when an instruction is executed, bit0 is set to "0". Bit0 can be set to "1" only
if an odd-number address is specified as the branch address.
If bit0 is set to "1", however, bit0 is invalid and an instruction must be placed at the address that
is a multiple of "2".
The initial value upon reset is undefined.
63
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Table Base Register (TBR)
This section describes the functions of the table base register (TBR: Table Base Register).
The table base register (TBR) consists of 32 bits. Figure 3.4-3 shows the configuration of table
base register (TBR) bit.
Figure 3.4-3 Configuration of Table Base Register Bit
bit31
bit0
TBR
[Initial value]
000FFC00H
The table base register holds the first address of the vector table to be used during EIT
processing.
The initial value upon reset is 000FFC00H.
■ Return Pointer (RP)
This section describes the functions of the return pointer (RP: Return Pointer).
The return pointer (RP) consists of 32 bits. Figure 3.4-4 shows the configuration of return pointer
(RP) bit.
Figure 3.4-4 Configuration of Return Pointer Bit
bit31
bit0
RP
[Initial value]
XXXXXXXXH
The return pointer holds the return address from a subroutine.
When the CALL instruction is executed, the value of the PC is transferred to the RP.
When the RET instruction is executed, the contents of the RP are transferred to the PC.
The initial value upon reset is undefined.
■ System Stack Pointer (SSP)
This section describes the functions of the system stack pointer (SSP: System Stack Pointer).
The system stack pointer (SSP) consists of 32 bits. Figure 3.4-5 shows the configuration of system
stack pointer (SSP) bit.
Figure 3.4-5 Configuration of System Stack Pointer Bit
bit31
SSP
bit0
[Initial value]
00000000H
The SSP is the system stack pointer.
This register is used as an R15 general-purpose register if the S flag of the condition code
register (CCR) is "0".
The SSP can also be specified explicitly.
This register is also used as a stack pointer that specifies a stack on which the contents of the
PS and PC are to be saved if an EIT occurs.
The initial value upon reset is 00000000H.
64
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ User Stack Pointer (USP)
This section describes the functions of the user stack pointer (USP: User Stack Pointer).
The user stack pointer (USP) consists of 32 bits. Figure 3.4-6 shows the configuration of user stack
pointer (USP) bit.
Figure 3.4-6 Configuration of User Stack Pointer Bit
bit31
bit0
USP
[Initial value]
XXXXXXXXH
The USP is the user stack pointer.
This register is used as an R15 general-purpose register if the S flag of the condition code
register (CCR) is "1".
The USP can also be specified explicitly.
The initial value upon reset is undefined.
This register cannot be used by the RETI instruction.
■ Multiply and Divide Registers (MDH/MDL)
This section describes the functions of the multiply and divide registers (MDH/MDL: Multiply &
Divide register).
The multiply and divide registers (MDH/MDL) consist of 32 bits. Figure 3.4-7 shows the
configuration of multiply and divide registers (MDH/MDL) bit.
Figure 3.4-7 Configuration of Multiply and Divide Registers Bit
bit31
bit0
MDH
MDL
MDH and MDL are the multiply and divide registers. Each register is 32 bits long.
The initial value upon reset is undefined.
❍ Functions when multiplication is executed
For a 32-bit-by-32-bit multiplication, the 64-bit-long operation result is stored in the multiply and
divide registers as follows:
•
MDH: High-order 32 bits
•
MDL: Low-order 32 bits
For a 16-bit-by-16-bit multiplication, the result is stored in one of the multiply and divide registers
as follows:
•
MDH: Undefined
•
MDL: 32-bit result
❍ Functions when division is executed
When a calculation is started, the dividend is stored in MDL.
When any of the DIV0S/DIV0U, DIV1, DIV2, DIV3, and DIV4S instructions is executed to
perform division, the result is stored in MDH and MDL as follows:
•
MDH: Remainder
•
MDL: Quotient
65
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.4.1
Program Status (PS) Register
The program status register (PS: Program Status) holds the program status. The PS
register consists of three parts: ILM, SCR, and CCR. All undefined bits are reserved.
During reading, 0 is always read. Writing is disabled.
■ Program Status (PS) Register
❍ Program Status Register (PS)
The program status (PS) register consists of the condition code register (CCR), system
condition code register (SCR), and interrupt level mask (ILM) register.
Figure 3.4-8 shows the register configuration of the program status register.
Figure 3.4-8 Register Configuration of Program Status Register
Bit location
31
20
16
10 8 7
SCR
ILM
0
CCR
❍ Condition Code Register (CCR)
Figure 3.4-9 shows the configuration of the condition code register (CCR: Condition Code Register).
Figure 3.4-9 Register Configuration of Condition Code Register
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
[Initial value]
-
-
S
I
N
Z
V
C
-00XXXXB
The following describes the functions of these bits.
[bit5] S (Stack flag)
This bit specifies the stack pointer to be used as general-purpose register R15.
Table 3.4-1 shows the settings of this bit.
Table 3.4-1 Functions of Stack Flag (S)
Value
Description
0
The system stack pointer (SSP) is used as general-purpose register R15.
When an EIT occurs, this bit is automatically set to "0".
Note that a value saved on the stack is the value before it is cleared.
1
The user stack pointer (USP) is used as general-purpose register R15.
This bit is cleared to "0" by a reset.
Set this bit to "0" when the RETI instruction is executed.
66
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit4] I (Interrupt enable flag)
This bit enables or disables a user interrupt request.
Table 3.4-2 shows the settings of this bit.
Table 3.4-2 Functions of Interrupt Enable Flag (I)
Value
Description
0
User interrupts disabled.
When the INT instruction is executed, this bit is cleared to "0".
Note that a value saved on the stack is the value before it is cleared.
1
User interrupts enabled.
The mask processing of a user interrupt request is controlled by the value
held by the ILM register.
This bit is cleared to "0" by a reset.
[bit3] N (Negative flag)
This bit indicates the sign used when the operation result is handled as an integer expressed
as the two’s complement.
Table 3.4-3 shows the settings of this bit.
Table 3.4-3 Functions of Negative Flag (N)
Value
Description
0
Indicates that the operation result is a positive value.
1
Indicates that the operation result is a negative value.
The initial state of this bit upon reset is undefined.
[bit2] Z (Zero flag)
This bit indicates whether the operation result is "0".
Table 3.4-4 shows the settings of this bit.
Table 3.4-4 Functions of Zero Flag (Z)
Value
Description
0
Indicates that the operation result is not "0".
1
Indicates that the operation result is "0".
The initial state of this bit upon reset is undefined.
[bit1] V (Overflow flag)
This bit indicates whether an overflow has occurred as a result of the operation when the
operand used in the operation is handled as an integer expressed as the two’s complement.
Table 3.4-5 shows the settings of this bit.
Table 3.4-5 Functions of Overflow Flag (V)
Value
Description
0
Indicates that no overflow has occurred as a result of the operation.
1
Indicates that an overflow has occurred as a result of the operation.
The initial state of this bit upon reset is undefined.
67
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit0] C (Carry flag)
This bit indicates whether a carry or a borrow has occurred from the highest bit in the
operation.
Table 3.4-6 shows the settings of this bit.
Table 3.4-6 Functions of Carry Flag (C)
Value
Description
0
Indicates that no carry and borrow have occurred.
1
Indicates that a carry or borrow has occurred.
The initial state of this bit upon reset is undefined.
❍ System condition code register (SCR)
Figure 3.4-10 shows the configuration of the system condition code register (SCR: System
Condition code Register).
Figure 3.4-10 Register Configuration of System Condition Code Register
bit
10
9
8
[Initial value]
D1
D0
T
XX0B
The following describes the functions of the system condition code register (SCR) bits.
[bit10, bit9] D1, D0 (Step division flag)
These bits hold the intermediate data obtained when step division is executed.
Do not change these bits while division processing is being executed.
To perform other processing while executing a step division, save and restore the value of
the PS register to ensure that the step division is restarted.
The initial state of this bit upon reset is undefined.
To set these bits, execute the DIV0S instruction with the dividend and the divisor to be
referenced.
To forcibly clear these bits, execute the DIV0U instruction.
•
Simultaneous acceptance of DIV0S/DIV0U instruction, user interrupt and NMI
Do not perform the process expecting the D0 and D1 bits in the PS register before EIT
branching in the EIT processing routine.
•
The D0 and D1 bits in the PS register may not indicate the correct value if the operation is
stopped by break or step execution immediately before the DIV0S/DIV0U instruction.
Note, however, that the correct value will be calculated after return.
68
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit8] T (Step trace trap flag)
This bit specifies whether the step trace trap is to be enabled.
Table 3.4-7 shows the settings of this bit.
Table 3.4-7 Functions of Step Trace Trap Flag (T)
Value
Description
0
The step trace trap is disabled.
1
The step trace trap is enabled.
With this setting, all the user NMI and user interrupts are prohibited.
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset.
The step trace trap function is used by an emulator. When an emulator is used, this function
cannot be used in a user program.
❍ Interrupt level mask (ILM) register
Figure 3.4-11 shows the configuration of the interrupt level mask (ILM) register.
Figure 3.4-11 Register Configuration of Interrupt Level Mask Register
bit
20
19
18
17
16
[Initial value]
ILM4
ILM3
ILM2
ILM1
ILM0
01111B
The interrupt level mask (ILM) register holds an interrupt level mask value. The value held in
ILM register is used as a level mask.
The CPU accepts only interrupt requests sent to it with an interrupt level higher than the level
indicated by the ILM.
The highest level is 0 (00000B) and the lowest level is 31 (11111B).
Values that can be set by a program have a limit. If the original value is between 16 and 31, the
new value must be between 16 and 31. If an instruction that sets a value between 0 and 15 is
executed, the specified value plus 16 is transferred.
If the original value is between 0 and 15, an arbitrary value between 0 and 31 may be set.
This register is initialized to 15 (01111B) by a reset.
69
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.5
General-Purpose Registers
Registers R0 to R15 are general-purpose registers. These registers are used as an
accumulator in an operation or a pointer in a memory access.
■ General-purpose Registers
Figure 3.5-1 shows the configuration of the general-purpose registers.
Figure 3.5-1 Configuration of General-purpose Registers
32 bits
[Initial value]
R0
XXXX XXXXH
R1
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
R12
...
R13
AC
...
R14
FP
XXXX XXXXH
R15
SP
0000 0000H
Of these 16 registers, the following are intended for special applications and therefore enhanced
instructions are provided for them:
•
R13: Virtual accumulator (AC)
•
R14: Frame pointer (FP)
•
R15: Stack pointer (SP)
The initial value upon reset is undefined for R0 through R14 and is 00000000H (SSP value) for
R15.
70
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.6
Data Structure
The FR family uses the following two data ordering methods:
• Bit ordering
• Byte ordering
■ Bit Ordering
The FR family uses the little endian method for bit ordering.
Figure 3.6-1 shows the bit configuration in bit ordering.
Figure 3.6-1 Bit Configuration in Bit Ordering
bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MSB
LSB
■ Byte Ordering
The FR family uses the big endian method for byte ordering.
Figure 3.6-2 shows the configuration of byte ordering.
Figure 3.6-2 Configuration of Byte Ordering
Memory
MSB
bit 31
23
15
7
LSB
0
10101010 11001100 11111111 00010001
bit
7
Address n
0
10101010
Address (n+1) 11001100
Address (n+2) 11111111
Address (n+3) 00010001
71
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.7
Word Alignment
Since instructions and data are accessed in byte units, the addresses at which they
are placed depend on the instruction length or the data width.
■ Program Access
A program for the FR family must be placed at an address that is a multiple of "2".
Bit0 of the program counter (PC) is set to "0" if the PC is updated when an instruction is
executed.
Bit0 can be set to "1" only if an odd-number address is specified as the branch address.
If bit0 is set to "1", however, bit0 is invalid and an instruction must be placed at the address that
is a multiple of "2".
No odd-number address exception exists.
■ Data Access
If data in the FR family is accessed, forced alignment is applied to the address based on the
width.
•
Word access:
An address must be a multiple of "4". (The lowest-order 2 bits are forcibly
set to "00".)
•
Halfword access: An address must be a multiple of "2". (The lowest-order bit is forcibly set to
"0".)
•
Byte access:
-
During word or halfword data access, some of the bits in the result of calculating an effective
address are forcibly set to "0". For example, in @(R13, Ri) addressing mode, the register before
addition is used without change in the calculation (even if the lowest-order bit is "1") and the
low-order bits are masked. A register before calculation is not masked.
[Example] LD @(R13, R2), R0
R13
00002222H
R2
00000003H
+)
72
Addition result
00002225H
Lower 2 bits forcibly masked
Address pin
00002224H
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.8
Memory Map
This section shows the memory map for the FR family.
■ Memory Map
The address space of memory is 32 bits linear.
Figure 3.8-1 shows the memory map.
Figure 3.8-1 Memory Map
0000 0000H
Byte data
0000 0100H
Halfword data
Direct addressing area
0000 0200H
Word data
0000 0400H
000F FC00H
Vector table
initial area
000F FFFFH
FFFF FFFFH
❍ Direct addressing area
The following areas in the address space are the areas for I/O. When direct addressing is used
in these areas, an operand address can be directly specified in an instruction.
The size of an address area for which an address can be directly specified varies is determined
by the data length as follows:
• Byte data (8 bits):
000H to 0FFH
• Halfword data (16 bits): 000H to 1FFH
• Word data (32 bits):
000H to 3FFH
❍Vector table initial area
The area from 000FFC00H to 000FFFFFH is the initial EIT vector table area.
You can place the vector table that will be used during EIT processing at any address by
rewriting the TBR. Initialization by a reset places the table at this address.
73
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.9
Branch Instructions
An operation with or without a delay slot can be specified for a branch instruction
used in the FR family.
■ Branch Instructions with Delay Slot
Instructions written as follows perform a branch operation with a delay slot:
74
JMP:D
@Ri
CALL:D
label12
CALL:D
@Ri
RET:D
BRA:D
label9
BNO:D
label9
BEQ:D
label9
BNE:D
label9
BC:D
label9
BNC:D
label9
BN:D
label9
BP:D
label9
BV:D
label9
BNV:D
label9
BLT:D
label9
BGE:D
label9
BLE:D
label9
BGT:D
label9
BLS:D
label9
BHI:D
label9
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.9.1
Operation of Branch Instructions with Delay Slot
In operation with a delay slot, the instruction located just after a branch instruction
(placed in a "delay slot") is executed before the instruction that branches is executed.
■ Operation of Branch Instruction with Delay Slot
Since an instruction in the delay slot is executed before the branch operation, the apparent
execution speed is one cycle. However, a NOP instruction must be placed in the delay slot if
there is no valid instruction put there.
[Example]
;
List of instructions
ADD
R1,
BRA:D
LABEL
MOV
R2,
R3,
R2
;
;
Branch instruction
R3
;
Delay slot ... Executed before branch
@R4
;
Branch destination
...
LABEL :
ST
If a conditional branch instruction is used, an instruction placed in the delay slot is executed
whether or not the condition for branching is met.
If a delay branch instruction is used, the order of execution for some instructions seems to be
reversed. However, this occurs only for updating the PC and the instructions are executed in the
specified order for other operations (register update and reference, etc.)
The following is a concrete example.
❍ JMP:D @Ri / CALL:D @Ri instruction
Ri referenced by the JMP:D @Ri / CALL:D @Ri instruction is not affected even though Ri is
updated by the instruction in the delay slot.
[Example]
LDI:32
#Label,
JMP:D
@R0
LDI:8
#0,
R0
R0
;
;
Branch to Label
;
No effect on the branch destination address
...
75
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
❍ RET:D instruction
RP referenced by the RET:D instruction is not affected even though RP is updated by the
instruction in the delay slot.
[Example]
RET:D
MOV
R8,
RP
;
Branch to address defined beforehand in RP
;
No effect on the return operation
...
❍ Bcc:D rel instruction
The flag referenced by the Bcc:D rel instruction is not affected by the instruction in the delay
slot.
[Example]
ADD
#1,
BC:D
Overflow
AND
CCR
R0
#0
;
Flag change
;
Branch to execution result of above
instruction
;
This flag update is not referenced by the
above branch instruction.
...
❍ CALL:D instruction
If RP is referenced by an instruction in the delay slot of the CALL:D instruction, the data that has
been updated by the CALL:D instruction is read.
[Example]
CALL:D
Label
MOV
RP,
...
76
R0
;
Updating RP and branching
;
Transferring RP, execution result of above
CALL:D
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Limitations on Branch Instruction with Delay Slot
❍ Instructions that can be placed in the delay slot
Only an instruction meeting the following conditions can be executed in the delay slot.
•
One-cycle instruction
•
Instruction other than a branch instruction
•
Instruction whose operation is not affected even though the order is changed
A one-cycle instruction is an instruction denoted in the Number of Cycles column in the list of
instructions as 1, a, b, c, and d.
❍ Step trace trap
A step trace trap does not occur between the execution of a branch instruction with a delay slot
and the delay slot.
❍ Interrupt/NMI
An interrupt/NMI is not accepted between the execution of a branch instruction with a delay slot
and the delay slot.
❍ Undefined instruction exception
An undefined instruction exception does not occur if there is an undefined instruction in the
delay slot. If an undefined instruction is in the delay slot, it operates as a NOP instruction.
77
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.9.2
Operation of Branch Instruction without Delay Slot
In operation without a delay slot, instructions are executed in the order in which they
are specified. An instruction immediately following a branch is never executed before
it.
■ Branch Instructions without Delay Slot
Instructions written as follows perform a branch operation without a delay slot:
JMP
@Ri
CALL
label12
CALL
@Ri
RET
BRA
label9
BNO
label9
BEQ
label9
BNE
label9
BC
label9
BNC
label9
BN
label9
BP
label9
BV
label9
BNV
label9
BLT
label9
BGE
label9
BLE
label9
BGT
label9
BLS
label9
BHI
label9
■ Operation of Branch Instruction without Delay Slot
In operation without a delay slot, instructions are executed in the order in which they are
specified. An instruction immediately following a branch is never executed before it.
[Example]
;
List of instructions
ADD
R1,
R2
BRA
LABEL
MOV
R2,
R3,
;
;
Branch instruction (without a delay slot)
R3
;
Not executed
@R4
;
Branch destination
...
LABEL :
ST
A branch instruction without a delay slot is executed in two cycles if a branch occurs and in one
cycle if no branch occurs.
Since no appropriate instruction can be placed in the delay slot, this instruction results in a more
efficient instruction code than a branch instruction with a delay slot and with NOP specified.
For both optimum execution speed and code efficiency, select an operation with a delay slot if a
valid instruction can be placed in the delay slot; otherwise, select an operation without a delay
slot.
78
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.10 EIT (Exception, Interrupt, and Trap)
EIT, a generic term for exception, interrupt, and trap, refers to suspending program
execution if an event occurs during execution and then executing another program.
■ EIT (Exception, Interrupt, and Trap)
An exception is an event that occurs related to the execution context. Execution restarts from
the instruction that caused the exception.
An interrupt is an event that occurs independently of execution context. The event is caused by
hardware.
A trap is an event that occurs related to the execution context. Some traps, such as system
calls, are specified in a program. Execution restarts from the instruction following the one that
caused the trap.
■ Features
•
Multiple interrupt is supported to the interruption.
•
It is a level mask function (15 levels are available the user) to the interruption.
•
Trap instruction (INT)
•
EIT (hardware/software) for emulator startup
■ EIT Causes
The following are causes of EIT:
•
Reset
•
User interrupt (internal resource, external interrupt)
•
NMI
•
Delayed interrupt
•
Undefined instruction exception
•
Trap instruction (INT)
•
Trap instruction (INTE)
•
Step trace trap
•
No-coprocessor trap
•
Coprocessor error trap
■ Return from EIT
Use the RETI instruction to return from EIT.
79
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.10.1 EIT Interrupt Levels
The interrupt levels are 0 to 31 and are managed with five bits.
■ EIT Interrupt Levels
Table 3.10-1 shows the allocation of the levels.
Table 3.10-1 EIT Interrupt Levels
Level
Interrupt source
Binary
Decimal
00000
...
...
00011
0
...
...
3
(Reserved for system)
...
...
(Reserved for system)
00100
4
INTE instruction
Step trace trap
00101
...
...
01110
5
...
...
14
(Reserved for system)
...
...
(Reserved for system)
01111
15
NMI (for user)
10000
10001
...
...
11110
11111
16
17
...
...
30
31
Interrupt
Interrupt
...
...
Interrupt
-
Note
If the original ILM value is between
16 and 31, a program cannot set a
value in this ILM range.
User interrupts prohibited if ILM is set
Interrupts prohibited if ICR is set
Operation is possible for levels 16 to 31.
The interrupt level does not affect an undefined instruction exception, no-coprocessor trap,
coprocessor error trap, or an INT instruction. It does not change the ILM, either.
80
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ I Flag
A flag that specifies whether an interrupt is permitted or prohibited. This flag is provided as bit4
of the PS register.
Table 3.10-2 shows the functions of I flag.
Table 3.10-2 Functions of I Flag
Value
Description
0
Interrupts prohibited
Cleared to "0" if the INT instruction is executed.
Note that a value saved on the stack is the value before it is cleared.
1
Interrupts permitted
The mask processing of an interrupt request is controlled by the value in the
ILM register.
■ Interrupt Level Mask (ILM) Register
A PS register (bit20 to bit16) that holds an interrupt level mask value.
The CPU accepts only an interrupt request sent to it with an interrupt level higher than the level
indicated by the ILM.
The highest level is 0 (00000B) and the lowest level is 31 (11111B).
Values that can be set by a program have a limit. If the original value is between 16 and 31, the
new value must be between 16 and 31. If an instruction that sets a value between 0 and 15 is
executed, the specified value plus 16 is transferred.
If the original value is between 0 and 15, any value between 0 and 31 may be set.
Note:
Use the ST ILM instruction to set this register.
■ Level Mask for Interrupt and NMI
If an NMI or interrupt request occurs, the interrupt level (Table 3.10-1) of the interrupt source is
compared with the level mask value held in the ILM. A request meeting the following condition is
masked and is not accepted:
Interrupt level of cause ≥ Level mask value
81
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.10.2 Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
The interrupt control register (ICR: Interrupt Control Register), located in the interrupt
controller, sets the level of an interrupt request. An ICR is provided for each of the
interrupt request inputs. The ICR is mapped on the I/O space and is accessed from the
CPU through a bus.
■ Configuration of Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
Figure 3.10-1 shows the configuration of the interrupt control register (ICR) bits.
Figure 3.10-1 Configuration of Interrupt Control Register Bit
Address
bit
000440H to
00046FH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
[Initial value]
-
-
-
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
---111111B
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The following describes the functions of the interrupt control register (ICR) bits.
[bit4] ICR4
This bit is always set to "1".
[bit3 to bit0] ICR3 to ICR0
These bits are the low-order 4 bits of the interrupt level of the corresponding interrupt source.
They can be read and written to.
Together with bit4, a value between 16 and 31 can be set in the ICR.
■ Mapping of Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
Table 3.10-3 shows the relationship between interrupt sources, interrupt control register, and
interrupt vectors.
Table 3.10-3 Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Control Registers, and Interrupt Vectors
Corresponding interrupt vector
Interrupt
source
Interrupt control register
Number
Hexadecimal
Decimal
IRQ00
ICR00
00000440H
10H
16
TBR + 3BCH
IRQ01
ICR01
00000441H
11H
17
TBR + 3B8H
IRQ02
ICR02
00000442H
12H
18
TBR + 3B4H
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
IRQ45
ICR45
0000046DH
3DH
61
TBR + 308H
IRQ46
ICR46
0000046EH
3EH
62
TBR + 304H
IRQ47
ICR47
0000046FH
3FH
63
TBR + 300H
TBR initial value: 00F FC00H
Note: See "CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER".
82
Address
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.10.3 System Stack Pointer (SSP)
The system stack pointer (SSP) is used to point to the stack to save and restore data
when EIT is accepted or a return operation occurs.
■ System Stack Pointer (SSP)
The system stack pointer (SSP: System Stack Pointer) consists of 32 bits.
Figure 3.10-2 shows the configuration of system stack pointer (SSP) bits.
Figure 3.10-2 Configuration of System Stack Pointer Bit
bit 31
.
.
.
.
0
[Initial value]
00000000H
SSP
Eight is subtracted from the register value during EIT processing and eight is added to the
register value during the return operation from EIT that occurs when the RETI instruction is
executed.
The system stack pointer (SSP) is initialized to 00000000H by a reset.
The SSP is also used as general-purpose register R15 if the S flag in the CCR is set to "0".
■ Interrupt Stack
The value in the PC or PS is saved to or restored from an area pointed to by the system stack
pointer (SSP). After an interrupt occurs, the PC is stored at the address indicated by the SSP
and the PS is stored at the address indicated by the SSP plus 4. This situation is shown in
Figure 3.10-3.
Figure 3.10-3 Interrupt Stack
[Example]
SSP
[Before interrupt]
8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0H
[After interrupt]
SSP
7 F F F F F F 8H
Memory
80000000H
7FFFFFFCH
7FFFFFF8H
80000000H
7FFFFFFCH
7FFFFFF8H
PS
PC
83
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.10.4 Table Base Register (TBR)
The table base register (TBR: Table Base Register) indicates the beginning address of
the vector table for EIT.
■ Table Base Register (TBR)
The table base register (TBR) consists of 32 bits.
Figure 3.10-4 shows the configuration of table base register (TBR) bits.
Figure 3.10-4 Configuration of Table Base Register Bit
bit 31
.
.
.
.
TBR
0
[Initial value]
000FFC00H
Obtain a vector address by adding to the TBR the offset value predetermined for an EIT cause.
The table base register (TBR) is initialized to 000FFC00H by a reset.
■ EIT Vector Table
A 1 Kbyte area from the address indicated in the table base register (TBR) is the vector area for
EIT.
The size for each vector is 4 bytes. The relationship between a vector number and a vector
address can be expressed as follows:
vctadr = TBR + vctofs
= TBR + (3FCH - 4 x vct)
vctadr: Vector address
vctofs: Vector offset
vct: Vector number
The low-order two bits of the addition result are always handled as "00B".
The area from 000FFC00H to 000FFFFFH is the initial area for the vector table upon reset.
Special functions are allocated to some of the vectors.
84
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Table 3.10-4 shows the vector table on the architecture.
Table 3.10-4 Vector Table (1 / 3)
Interrupt number
Offset
Default
address of
TBR
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Interrupt
level
Reset
0
00
-
3FCH
000FFFFCH
-
Mode vector
1
01
-
3F8H
000FFFF8H
-
Reserved for system
2
02
-
3F4H
000FFFF4H
-
Reserved for system
3
03
-
3F0H
000FFFF0H
-
Reserved for system
4
04
-
3ECH
000FFFECH
-
Reserved for system
5
05
-
3E8H
000FFFE8H
-
Reserved for system
6
06
-
3E4H
000FFFE4H
-
No-coprocessor trap
7
07
-
3E0H
000FFFE0H
-
Coprocessor error trap
8
08
-
3DCH
000FFFDCH
-
INTE instruction
9
09
-
3D8H
000FFFD8H
-
Reserved for system
10
0A
-
3D4H
000FFFD4H
-
Reserved for system
11
0B
-
3D0H
000FFFD0H
-
Step trace trap
12
0C
-
3CCH
000FFFCCH
-
NMI request (tool)
13
0D
-
3C8H
000FFFC8H
-
Undefined instruction exception
14
0E
-
3C4H
000FFFC4H
-
NMI request
15
0F
Fixed to
15(FH)
3C0H
000FFFC0H
-
External Interrupt 0
16
10
ICR00
3BCH
000FFFBCH
6
External Interrupt 1
17
11
ICR01
3B8H
000FFFB8H
7
External Interrupt 2
18
12
ICR02
3B4H
000FFFB4H
11
External Interrupt 3
19
13
ICR03
3B0H
000FFFB0H
12
External Interrupt 4
20
14
ICR04
3ACH
000FFFACH
-
External Interrupt 5
21
15
ICR05
3A8H
000FFFA8H
-
External Interrupt 6
22
16
ICR06
3A4H
000FFFA4H
-
External Interrupt 7
23
17
ICR07
3A0H
000FFFA0H
-
Reload Timer 0
24
18
ICR08
39CH
000FFF9CH
8
Reload Timer 1
25
19
ICR09
398H
000FFF98H
9
Reload Timer 2
26
1A
ICR10
394H
000FFF94H
10
UART0 (reception completed)
27
1B
ICR11
390H
000FFF90H
0
UART1 (reception completed)
28
1C
ICR12
38CH
000FFF8CH
1
Interrupt source
85
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Table 3.10-4 Vector Table (2 / 3)
Interrupt number
Offset
Default
address of
TBR
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Interrupt
level
UART2 (reception completed)
29
1D
ICR13
388H
000FFF88H
2
UART0 (transmission completed)
30
1E
ICR14
384H
000FFF84H
3
UART1 (transmission completed)
31
1F
ICR15
380H
000FFF80H
4
UART2 (transmission completed)
32
20
ICR16
37CH
000FFF7CH
5
DMAC0 (end, error)
33
21
ICR17
378H
000FFF78H
-
DMAC1 (end, error)
34
22
ICR18
374H
000FFF74H
-
DMAC2 (end, error)
35
23
ICR19
370H
000FFF70H
-
DMAC3 (end, error)
36
24
ICR20
36CH
000FFF6CH
-
DMAC4 (end, error)
37
25
ICR21
368H
000FFF68H
-
A/D
38
26
ICR22
364H
000FFF64H
15
PPG0
39
27
ICR23
360H
000FFF60H
13
PPG1
40
28
ICR24
35CH
000FFF5CH
14
PPG2
41
29
ICR25
358H
000FFF58H
-
PPG3
42
2A
ICR26
354H
000FFF54H
-
Reserved for system
43
2B
ICR27
350H
000FFF50H
-
U-TIMER0
44
2C
ICR28
34CH
000FFF4CH
-
U-TIMER1
45
2D
ICR29
348H
000FFF48H
-
U-TIMER2
46
2E
ICR30
344H
000FFF44H
-
Time-base timer overflow
47
2F
ICR31
340H
000FFF40H
-
I2C I/F0
48
30
ICR32
33CH
000FFF3CH
-
I2C I/F1
49
31
ICR33
338H
000FFF38H
-
Reserved for system
50
32
ICR34
334H
000FFF34H
-
Reserved for system
51
33
ICR35
330H
000FFF30H
-
16bit free run timer
52
34
ICR36
32CH
000FFF2CH
-
ICU0 (fetch)
53
35
ICR37
328H
000FFF28H
-
ICU1 (fetch)
54
36
ICR38
324H
000FFF24H
-
ICU2 (fetch)
55
37
ICR39
320H
000FFF20H
-
ICU3 (fetch)
56
38
ICR40
31CH
000FFF1CH
-
Reserved for system
57
39
ICR41
318H
000FFF18H
-
Reserved for system
58
3A
ICR42
314H
000FFF14H
-
Reserved for system
59
3B
ICR43
310H
000FFF10H
-
Interrupt source
86
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Table 3.10-4 Vector Table (3 / 3)
Interrupt number
Offset
Default
address of
TBR
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Interrupt
level
Reserved for system
60
3C
ICR44
30CH
000FFF0CH
-
Reserved for system
61
3D
ICR45
308H
000FFF08H
-
Reserved for system
62
3E
ICR46
304H
000FFF04H
-
Delayed interrupt source bit
63
3F
ICR47
300H
000FFF00H
-
Reserved for system (used in
REALOS)
64
40
-
2FCH
000FFEFCH
-
Reserved for system (used in
REALOS)
65
41
-
2F8H
000FFEF8H
-
Reserved for system
66
42
-
2F4H
000FFEF4H
-
Reserved for system
67
43
-
2F0H
000FFEF0H
-
Reserved for system
68
44
-
2ECH
000FFEECH
-
Reserved for system
69
45
-
2E8H
000FFEE8H
-
Reserved for system
70
46
-
2E4H
000FFEE4H
-
Reserved for system
71
47
-
2E0H
000FFEE0H
-
Reserved for system
72
48
-
2DCH
000FFEDCH
-
Reserved for system
73
49
-
2D8H
000FFED8H
-
Reserved for system
74
4A
-
2D4H
000FFED4H
-
Reserved for system
75
4B
-
2D0H
000FFED0H
-
Reserved for system
76
4C
-
2CCH
000FFECCH
-
Reserved for system
77
4D
-
2C8H
000FFEC8H
-
Reserved for system
78
4E
-
2C4H
000FFEC4H
-
Reserved for system
79
4F
-
2C0H
000FFEC0H
-
Used in INT instruction
80
to
255
50
to
FF
-
2BCH
to
000H
000FFEBCH
to
000FFC00H
-
Interrupt source
87
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.10.5 Multiple EIT Processing
If multiple EIT causes occur at the same time, the CPU repeats the operation of
selecting and accepting one of the EIT causes, executing the EIT sequence, and then
detecting EIT causes again. If there are no more EIT causes be accepted while the CPU
is detecting EIT causes, the CPU executes the handler instruction of the last accepted
EIT cause. As a result, the order of executing handlers for multiple EIT causes that
occur at the same time is determined according to the following two elements:
• Priority of EIT causes to be accepted
• How other causes can be masked when one cause is accepted
■ Priority of EIT Causes to Be Accepted
The priority of EIT causes to be accepted is the order of causes for which the EIT sequence is
to be executed (that is, saving the PS and PC, updating the PC, and masking other causes, if
required). The handler of a cause accepted earlier is not necessarily executed earlier.
Table 3.10-5 shows the priority of EIT causes to be accepted.
Table 3.10-5 Priority of EIT Causes to be Accepted and Masking of Other Causes
Priority of
acceptance
Cause
Masking of other causes
1
Reset
Other causes are abandoned.
2
Undefined instruction exception
Canceled
3
INT instruction
I flag=0
4
No-coprocessor trap
Coprocessor error trap
5
User interrupt
ILM=level of cause accepted
6
NMI (for users)
ILM=15
7
(INTE instruction)
ILM=4 *
8
NMI (for emulators)
ILM=4
9
Step trace trap
ILM=4
10
INTE instruction
ILM=4
-
*: The priority is "6" only if the INTE instruction and the NMI for emulators occur at the same
time. The NMI for emulators is used in the MB91301 series for breaks due to data access.
88
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
In consideration of masking other causes after an EIT cause is accepted, the handlers of EIT
causes that occur at the same time are executed in the order shown in Table 3.10-6.
Table 3.10-6 Order of Executing EIT Handlers
Order of executing
handlers
Cause
1
Reset *1
2
Undefined instruction exception
3
Step trace trap *2
4
INTE instruction *2
5
NMI (for users)
6
INT instruction
7
User interrupt
8
No-coprocessor trap, coprocessor error trap
*1: Other causes are abandoned.
*2: If the INTE instruction is executed in steps, only a step trace trap EIT occurs. An INTE
cause is ignored.
Figure 3.10-5 shows an example of multiple EIT processing.
Figure 3.10-5 Multiple EIT Processing
[Example]
Main routine
NMI handler
INT instruction
handler
Priority
(1) Executed first
(High) NMI occurring
(Low) INT instruction
executed
(2) Executed next
89
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.10.6 EIT Operations
This section describes EIT operations.
■ EIT Operations
In the following, it is assumed that the destination source PC indicates the address of the
instruction that detected an EIT cause.
In addition, "address of the next instruction" means that the instruction that detected EIT is as
follows:
•
If LDI is 32: PC + 6
•
If LDI is 20 and COPOP, COPLD, COPST, and COPSV are used: PC + 4
•
Other instructions: PC + 2
■ Operation of User Interrupt/NMI
If an interrupt request for a user interrupt or a user NMI occurs, whether the request can be
accepted is determined with the following procedure:
1) Compare the interrupt levels of requests that have occurred simultaneously and select the
request with the highest level (the smallest value). As levels to be compared, the value held
in the corresponding ICR is used for a maskable interrupt and a predetermined constant is
used for an NMI.
2) If multiple interrupt requests with the same level occur, select the interrupt request with the
smallest interrupt number.
3) Mask and do no accept an interrupt request with an interrupt level greater than or equal to
the level mask value. Go to Step 4) if the interrupt level is less than the level mask value.
4) Mask and do not accept the selected interrupt request if it is maskable and the I flag is set to
"0". Go to Step 5) if the I flag is "1". If the selected interrupt request is an NMI, go to Step 5)
regardless of the I flag value.
5) If the above conditions are met, the interrupt request is accepted at a break in the instruction
processing.
If a user interrupt or NMI request is accepted when EIT requests are detected, the CPU
operates as follows, using an interrupt number corresponding to the accepted interrupt request.
Parentheses show an address indicated by the register.
[Operation]
1) (TBR + Vector offset of accepted interrupt request) --> TMP
2) SSP-4 --> SSP
3) PS --> (SSP)
4) SSP-4 --> SSP
5) Address of next instruction --> (SSP)
6) Interrupt level of accepted request --> ILM
7) "0" --> S flag
8) TMP --> PC
90
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
A new EIT is detected before the execution of the first instruction in the handler, once the
interrupt sequence is completed.
If an acceptable EIT has occurred at this point, the CPU enters the EIT processing sequence.
An instruction such as ORCCR, STILM, MOV Ri and PS may be executed twice before and
after the interrupt handler, if it is executed to enable an interrupt while a user interrupt or NMI
source is occurring. Note, however, that this does not affect the operation as it only means that
the same value is set twice in the CPU registers.
Do not perform the process expecting the content of the PS register before EIT branching in the
EIT processing routine.
■ Operation of INT Instruction
The INT #u8 instruction operates as shown below.
A branch to the interrupt handler for the vector indicated by u8 generation.
[Operation]
1) (TBR + 3FCH-4 x u8) --> TMP
2) SSP-4 --> SSP
3) PS --> (SSP)
4) SSP-4 --> SSP
5) PC + 2 --> (SSP)
6) "0" --> I flag
7) "0" --> S flag
8) TMP --> PC
■ Operation of INTE Instruction
The INTE instruction operates as shown below.
A branch to the interrupt handler for the vector indicated by vector number #9 generation.
[Operation]
1) (TBR+3D8H) --> TMP
2) SSP-4 --> SSP
3) PS --> (SSP)
4) SSP-4 --> SSP
5) PC + 2 --> (SSP)
6) "00100B" --> ILM
7) "0" --> S flag
8) TMP --> PC
Do not use the INTE instruction in the processing routine of the INTE instruction or a step trace
trap.
During step execution, no EIT due to INTE generation.
91
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Operation of Step Trace Trap
Set the T flag in the SCR of the PS to enable the step trace function. A trap and a break then
occur every time an instruction is executed. A step trace trap is detected under the following
conditions:
[Conditions of step trace trap detection]
•
T flag =1
•
There is no delayed branch instruction.
•
A processing routine other than the INTE instruction or a step trace trap is in progress.
If the above conditions are met, a break occurs between instruction operations.
[Operation]
1) (TBR+3CCH) --> TMP
2) SSP-4 --> SSP
3) PS --> (SSP)
4) SSP-4 --> SSP
5) Address of next instruction --> (SSP)
6) "00100B" --> ILM
7) "0" --> S flag
8) TMP --> PC
Set the T flag to enable the step trace trap to prohibit a user NMI and a user interrupt. No EIT
occurs due to the INTE instruction.
A trap occurs in the FR family in the instruction following the one in which the T flag has been
set.
■ Operation of Undefined Instruction Exception
If, during instruction decode, an undefined instruction is detected, an undefined instruction
exception occurs.
An undefined instruction exception is detected under the following conditions:
•
An undefined instruction is detected during instruction decode.
•
The instruction is not located in the delay slot (it does not immediately follow the delayed
branch instruction).
If the above conditions are met, an undefined instruction exception and a break occur.
[Operation]
1) (TBR+3C4H) - -> TMP
2) SSP-4 --> SSP
3) PS --> (SSP)
4) SSP-4 --> SSP
5) PC --> (SSP)
6) "0" --> S flag
7) TMP --> PC
The PC value to be saved is the address of an instruction that detected an undefined instruction
exception.
92
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ No-coprocessor Trap
If a coprocessor instruction using a coprocessor that is not installed is executed, a nocoprocessor trap occurs.
[Operation]
1) (TBR+3E0H) --> TMP
2) SSP-4 --> SSP
3) PS --> (SSP)
4) SSP-4 --> SSP
5) Address of next instruction --> (SSP)
6) "0" --> S flag
7) TMP --> PC
■ Coprocessor Error Trap
If an error occurs while a coprocessor is being used and then a coprocessor instruction that
operates on the coprocessor is executed, a coprocessor error trap occurs.
[Operation]
1) (TBR+3DCH) --> TMP
2) SSP-4 --> SSP
3) PS --> (SSP)
4) SSP-4 --> SSP
5) Address of next instruction --> (SSP)
6) "0" --> S flag
7) TMP --> PC
■ Operation of RETI Instruction
The RETI instruction specifies return from the EIT processing routine.
[Operation]
1) (R15) --> PC
2) R15+4 --> R15
3) (R15) --> PS
4) R15+4 --> R15
The RETI instruction must be executed while the S flag is set to "0".
■ Precaution on Delay Slot
A delay slot for a branch instruction has restrictions regarding EIT.
See Section "3.9 Branch Instructions".
93
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11 Reset (Device Initialization)
This section describes a reset (that is, device initialization) of the FR family.
■ Reset (Device Initialization)
If a reset source occurs, the device stops all the programs and hardware operations and
completely initializes the state. This state is called the reset state.
When a reset source no longer exists, the device starts programs and hardware operations from
their initial state. The series of operations from the reset state to the start of operations is called
the reset sequence.
94
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.1 Reset Levels
The reset operations of the FR family device are classified into two levels, each of
which has different causes and initialization operations. This section describes these
reset levels.
■ Settings Initialization Reset (INIT)
The highest-level reset, which initializes all settings, is called a settings initialization reset (INIT).
A settings initialization reset (INIT) mainly performs the following initialization:
❍ Items initialized in a settings initialization reset (INIT)
•
Device operation mode (setting of bus mode and external bus width)
•
All internal clock settings (clock source selection, PLL control, and divide-by setting)
•
All external bus extended interface settings
•
All settings on pin statuses other than the above settings
•
All sections initialized by an operation initialization reset (RST)
For more information, see the description of each of these functions.
Note:
After power-on, be sure to apply the settings initialization reset (INIT) at the INIT pin.
■ Operation Initialization Reset (RST)
A normal-level reset that initializes the operation of a program is called an operation initialization
reset (RST).
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) occurs, an operation initialization reset (RST) also occurs.
An operation initialization reset (RST) mainly initializes the following items:
❍ Items initialized by an operation initialization reset (RST)
•
Program operation
•
CPU and internal buses
•
Register settings of peripheral circuits
•
I/O port settings
•
All CS0 area settings of external buses
•
Device operation mode (setting of bus mode and external bus width)
For more information, see the description of each of these functions.
95
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.2 Reset Sources
This section describes the reset sources and the reset levels in the FR family device.
To determine reset sources that have occurred in the past, read the RSRR (reset
source register). For more information about registers and flags described in this
section, see Section "3.12.5 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Controller" and
"3.12.6 Register of Clock Generation Controller".
■ INIT Pin Input (Settings Initialization Reset Pin)
The INIT pin, which is an external pin, is used as the settings initialization reset pin.
A settings initialization reset (INIT) request is generated while the "L" level is being input to this
pin.
Input the "H" level to this pin to clear a settings initialization reset (INIT) request.
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) is generated in response to a request from this pin, bit15
(INIT bit) of the RSRR (reset source register) is set.
Because a settings initialization reset (INIT) in response to a request from this pin has the
highest interrupt level among all reset sources, it has precedence over any other input,
operation, or state.
Immediately after power-on, be sure to apply a settings initialization reset (INIT) at the INIT pin.
To assure the oscillation stabilization wait time for the oscillation circuit immediately after poweron, input the "L" level to the INIT pin for the stabilization wait time required by the oscillation
circuit. INIT at the INIT pin initializes the oscillation stabilization wait time to the minimum value.
•
Reset source:
"L" level input to the external INIT pin
•
Source of clearing: "H" level input to the external INIT pin
•
Reset level:
•
Corresponding flag: bit15 (INIT)
Settings initialization reset (INIT)
■ Software Reset (STCR: SRST Bit Writing)
If "0" is written to bit4 (SRST bit) of the standby control register (STCR), a software reset
request occurs. A software reset request is an operation initialization reset (RST) request.
When the request is accepted and an operation initialization reset (RST) is generated, the
software reset request is cleared.
If an operation initialization reset (RST) is generated due to a software reset request, a bit11
(SRST bit) in the RSRR (reset source register) is set.
An operation initialization reset (RST) is generated due to a software reset request only after all
bus access has stopped and if bit7 (SYNCR bit) of the time base counter control register
(TBCR) has been set (synchronization reset mode). Thus, depending on the bus usage status,
a long time is required before an operation initialization reset (RST) occurs.
96
•
Reset source:
Writing "0" to bit4 (SRST) of the standby control register (STCR)
•
Source of clearing:Generation of an operation initialization reset (RST)
•
Reset level:
•
Corresponding flag:bit11(SRST)
Request of operation initialization reset (RST)
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Watchdog Reset
Writing to the watchdog timer control register (RSRR) starts the watchdog timer. Unless A5H/
5AH is written to the timebase counter clear register (CTBR) within the cycle specified in bit9
and bit8 (WT1 and WT0 bits) in the RSRR, a watchdog reset request occurs.
A watchdog reset request is a settings initialization reset (INIT) request. If, after the request is
accepted, a settings initialization reset (INIT) occurs or an operation initialization reset (RST)
occurs, the watchdog reset request is cleared.
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) is generated due to a watchdog reset request, bit13
(WDOG bit) in the reset source register (RSRR) is set.
Note that, if a settings initialization reset (INIT) is generated due to a watchdog reset request,
the oscillation stabilization wait time is not initialized.
•
Reset source:
Setting cycle of the watchdog timer elapses
•
Source of clearing: Generation of a settings initialization reset (INIT) or an operation
initialization reset (RST)
•
Reset level:
•
Corresponding flag: bit13 (WDOG)
Settings initialization reset (INIT)
97
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.3 Reset Sequence
When a reset source no longer exists, the device starts to execute the reset sequence.
A reset sequence has different operations depending on the reset level.
This section describes the operations of the reset sequence for different reset levels.
■ Setting Initialization Reset (INIT) Clear Sequence
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) request is cleared, the following operations are performed
one step at a time for the device.
1) Clear the settings initialization reset (INIT) and enter the oscillation stabilization wait state.
2) For the oscillation stabilization wait time (set with bit3 and bit2 [OS1 and OS0 bits] in the
STCR), maintain the operation initialization reset (RST) state and stop the internal clock.
3) In the operation initialization reset (RST) state, start internal clock operation.
4) Clear the operation initialization reset (RST) and enter the normal operating state.
5) Read the mode vector from address 000FFFF8H.
6) Write the mode vector to the MODR (mode register) at address 000007FDH.
7) Read the reset vector from address 000FFFFCH.
8) Write the reset vector to the program counter (PC).
9) The program starts execution from the address loaded in the program counter (PC).
■ Operation Initialization Reset (RST) Clear Sequence
If an operation initialization reset (RST) request is cleared, the following operations are
performed one step at a time for the device.
1) Clear the operation initialization reset (RST) and enter the normal operating state.
2) Read the mode vector from address 000FFFF8H
3) Write the mode vector to the MODR (mode register) at address 000007FDH
4) Read the reset vector from address 000FFFFCH.
5) Write the reset vector to the program counter (PC).
6) The program starts execution from the address loaded in the program counter (PC).
98
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.4 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
If a device returns from the state in which the original oscillation was or may have
been stopped, the device automatically enters the oscillation stabilization wait state.
This function prevents the use of oscillator output after starting before oscillation has
stabilized.
For the oscillation stabilization wait time, neither an internal nor an external clock is
supplied; only the built-in time base counter runs until the stabilization wait time set in
the standby control register (STCR) has elapsed.
This section describes the oscillation stabilization wait operation.
■ Sources of an Oscillation Stabilization Wait
The following lists sources of an oscillation stabilization wait.
❍ Clearing of a settings initialization reset (INIT)
The device enters the oscillation stabilization wait state if a settings initialization reset (INIT) is
cleared for a variety of reasons.
When the oscillation stabilization wait time has elapsed, the device enters the operation
initialization reset (RST) state.
❍ Returning from stop mode
The device enters the oscillation stabilization wait state immediately after stop mode is cleared.
However, if it is cleared by a settings initialization reset (INIT) request, the device enters the
settings initialization reset (INIT) state. Then, after the settings initialization reset (INIT) is
cleared, the device enters the oscillation stabilization wait state.
When the oscillation stabilization wait time has elapsed, the device enters the state
corresponding to the source that cleared stop mode:
•
Return due to input of a valid external interrupt request (including NMI):
The device enters the normal operating state.
•
Return due to a settings initialization reset (INIT) request:
The device enters the operation initialization reset (INIT) state.
•
Return due to an operation initialization reset (RST) request:
The device enters the operation initialization reset (RST) state.
❍ Returning from an abnormal state when PLL is selected
If, while the device is operating with PLL as the source clock, an abnormal condition* occurs in
PLL control, the device automatically enters an oscillation stabilization wait to assure the PLL
lock time.
When the oscillation stabilization wait time has elapsed, the device enters the normal operating
state.
*: The multiply-by rate is changed while PLL is working, or an incorrect bit such as a bit
equivalent to PLL operation enable bit is generated.
99
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Selecting an Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
The oscillation stabilization wait time is measured with the built-in time base counter.
If a source for an oscillation stabilization wait occurs and the device enters the oscillation
stabilization wait state, the built-in time base counter is initialized and then it starts to measure
the oscillation stabilization wait time.
Using bit3 and bit2 (OS1 and OS0 bits) of the standby control register (STCR), select and set
one of the four types of oscillation stabilization wait time.
Once selected, a setting is initialized only if a settings initialization reset (INIT) is generated due
to the external INIT pin. The oscillation stabilization wait time that has been set before a reset is
maintained if a settings initialization reset (INIT) is generated or an operation initialization reset
(RST) is generated due to a watchdog reset or hardware standby condition.
The four types of oscillation stabilization wait time settings are designed for the following four
types of use:
•
OS1, OS0=00B: No oscillation stabilization wait time (if neither PLL nor the oscillator should
stop in stop mode)
•
OS1, OS0=01B: PLL lock wait time (if an external clock will be input or the oscillator should
not stop in stop mode)
•
OS1, OS0=10B: Oscillation stabilization wait time (intermediate) (if an oscillator that stabilizes
quickly, such as a ceramic vibrator, is used)
•
OS1, OS0=11B: Oscillation stabilization wait time (long) (if an ordinary quartz oscillator will
be used)
Immediately after power-on, be sure to apply the settings initialization reset (INIT) at the INIT
pin.
To assure the oscillation stabilization wait time of the oscillation circuit immediately after poweron, maintain "L" level input to the INIT pin for the stabilization wait time required by the oscillation
circuit and the regulator (INIT generated due to the INIT pin initializes the oscillation stabilization
wait time setting to the minimum value).
100
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.5 Reset Operation Modes
Two modes for an operation initialization reset (RST) are provided: normal
(asynchronous) reset mode and synchronous reset mode. The operation initialization
reset mode is selected with bit7 (SYNCR bit) of the time base counter control register
(TBCR). This mode setting is initialized only by a settings initialization reset (INIT). A
settings initialization reset always results in an asynchronous reset.
This section describes the operation of these modes.
■ Normal Reset Operation
Normal reset operation refers to entering the operation initialization reset (RST) state
immediately after an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs.
If, in this mode, a reset (RST) request is accepted, the device immediately enters the reset
(RST) state regardless of the operating state of the internal bus.
In this mode, the result of bus access performed prior to each status transition is not
guaranteed. However, these requests can certainly be accepted.
If bit7 (SYNCR bit) of the time base counter control register (TBCR) is set to "0", normal reset
mode is selected. The initial value after a settings initialization reset (INIT) is normal reset mode.
■ Synchronous Reset Operation
Synchronous reset operation refers to entering the operation initialization reset (RST) state after
all bus access has stopped when an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs.
If, in this mode, a reset (RST) request is accepted, the device does not enter the reset (RST)
state while internal bus access is in progress.
If the above request is accepted, a sleep request is issued to the internal buses. If all the buses
stop and enter the sleep state, the device enters the operation initialization reset (RST) state.
In this mode, the result of all bus accesses is guaranteed because all bus access is stopped
prior to each status transition.
If bus access does not stop for some reason, no requests can be accepted while the bus access
is in progress. Even in this case, the settings initialization reset (INIT) is immediately valid.
Bus access may not stop in the following cases:
•
A bus release request (BRQ) continues to be input to the external extended bus interface,
bus release acknowledge (BGRNT) is valid, and a new bus access request arrives from an
internal bus.
•
A ready request (RDY) continues to be input to the external extended bus interface and bus
wait is valid. In the following cases, the device eventually enters another state but only after
a long time.
•
When self-refreshing in sleep mode has been set with the SDRAM interface activated (State
transition does not occur until the self-refresh mode setting is completed.)
101
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Reference:
The DMA controller, which stops transfer when a request is accepted, does not delay transition to
another state. If bit7 (SYNCR bit) of the time base counter control register (TBCR) is set to "1",
synchronous reset mode is selected. The initial value after a settings initialization reset (INIT) is
normal reset mode.
102
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12 Clock Generation Control
This section describes clock generation and control.
■ Clock Generation Control
The internal operating clock of the FR family device is generated as follows:
•
Selection of a source clock:
Select a clock supply source.
•
Generation of a base clock:
Divide the source clock by two or perform PLL oscillation to
generate a base clock.
•
Generation of an internal clock:Divide the base clock and generate three types of operating
clocks, which are supplied to each section.
The following section describes the generation and control of each clock. For detailed
information about the registers and flags described below, see "3.12.5 Block Diagram of Clock
Generation Controller" and "3.12.6 Register of Clock Generation Controller".
The symbol “φ”, which is shown in Table 3.12-4, Table 3.12-9, Table 3.12-13, Table 3.12-16,
Table 3.12-20, Table 3.12-21 and Table 3.12-22, indicates the basic clock that is achieved by
dividing the source clock by two or performing PLL oscillation. Therefore, the system base clock
is the clock which is generated where the above base clock is generated.
■ Source Clock
❍ Self-induced oscillation mode (X0/X1 pin input)
In this mode, an oscillator is connected to external oscillation pins and the original oscillation
generated by the built-in oscillation circuit is used as the source clock.
The source for supply of all clocks, including the external bus clock, is the MB91301 series
itself.
The main clock, generated from the X0/X1 pins, is intended to be used as a high-speed clock.
The main clock is multiplied by the built-in main PLL, each of which can be independently
controlled.
Generate an internal base clock by selecting one of the following source clocks:
•
Main clock divided by 2
•
Main clock multiplied in the main PLL
Select a source clock by setting the clock source control register (CLKR).
103
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12.1 PLL Controls
Operation (oscillation) enable and disable and the multiply-by rate setting can be
independently controlled for each of the PLL oscillation circuits corresponding to the
main source clock. Each control is set in the clock source control register (CLKR).
This section describes each control.
■ PLL Operation Enable
To enable or disable the main PLL oscillation, set bit10 (PLL1EN bit) of the clock source control
register (CLKR).
❍ PLL operation control
In self-induced oscillation mode, either the operation enable/disable bit or the multiply-by rate
setting bit is initialized to "0" after a settings initialization reset (INIT), causing the PLL oscillation
to stop. While it is stopped, PLL output cannot be selected as the source clock.
When the program operation starts, set the multiply-by rate of the PLL to be used as the clock
source, enable it, and switch the source clock after the PLL lock wait time elapses. For the PLL
lock wait time, use of a time-base timer interrupt is recommended.
While PLL output is selected as the source clock, the PLL cannot be stopped (writing to the
register is disabled). To stop a PLL upon transition to stop mode, reselect as the source clock
the main clock divided by two before stopping the PLL.
If bit0 (OSCD1 bit) of the standby control register (STCR) is set to stop oscillation in stop mode,
the corresponding PLL automatically stops when the device enters stop mode. As a result, you
do not need to set operation stop. When the device returns from stop mode later, the PLL
automatically restarts the oscillation operation. If oscillation is not set to stop in stop mode, the
PLL does not automatically stop. In this case, set operation stop before transition to stop mode
as required.
■ PLL Multiply-by Rate
Set the multiply-by rate of the main PLL in bit14 to bit12 (PLL1S2, PLL1S1, and PLL1S0 bits) of
the clock source control register (CLKR).
After a settings initialization reset (INIT), all bits are initialized to "0".
❍ PLL multiply-by rate setting in self-induced oscillation mode
To change the PLL multiply-by rate setting from the initial value in self-induced oscillation mode,
do so before or as soon as the PLL is enabled after the program has started execution. After
changing the multiply-by rate, switch the source clock after the lock wait time elapses. For the
PLL lock wait time, use of a time-base timer interrupt is recommended.
To change the PLL multiply-by rate setting during operation, switch the source clock to a clock
other than the PLL in question before making the change. After changing the multiply-by rate,
switch the source clock after the lock wait time has elapsed, as described above.
You can also change the PLL multiply-by rate setting while using a PLL. In this case, however,
the program stops running after the device automatically enters the oscillation stabilization wait
state after the multiply-by rate setting is rewritten and does not resume execution until the
specified oscillation stabilization wait time has elapsed.
The program does not stop running if the clock source is switched to a clock other than a PLL.
104
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12.2 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time and PLL Lock Wait
Time
If a clock selected as the source clock is not already stabilized, an oscillation
stabilization wait time is required (See Section "3.11.4 Oscillation Stabilization Wait
Time").
For a PLL, a lock wait time is required after operation starts until the output stabilizes
to the specified frequency.
This section describes the wait time used in various situations.
❍ Wait time after power-on
After power-on, an oscillation stabilization wait time for the main clock oscillation circuit is
required.
Since the oscillation stabilization wait time setting is initialized to the minimum value due to INIT
pin input (settings initialization reset pin), assure the oscillation stabilization wait time by using
the time during which the "L" level is sent to the INIT pin input.
In this state, since no PLL is enabled, no lock wait time needs to be considered.
❍ Wait time after setting initialization
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) is cleared, the device enters the oscillation stabilization wait
state. In this case, the specified oscillation stabilization wait is internally generated. In the first
oscillation stabilization wait state after input from the INIT pin, the setting time is initialized to the
minimum value, soon ending this state, and the device enters the operation initialization reset
(RST) state.
If, after a program starts running, a settings initialization reset (INIT) is generated for a reason
other than INIT pin input and is then cleared, the oscillation stabilization wait time specified in
the program is internally generated.
In these states, since no PLL is enabled, no lock wait time needs to be considered.
❍ Wait time after changing the PLL multiply-by rate
If you change the multiply-by rate setting of a running PLL after a program starts execution, use
the PLL output only after lock wait time elapses.
If the PLL is not selected as the source clock, the program can run even during the lock wait
time.
For the PLL lock wait time, use of a time-base timer interrupt is recommended.
❍ Wait time after returning from stop mode
If, after a program starts execution, the device enters stop mode and then stop mode is cleared,
the oscillation stabilization wait time specified in the program is internally generated. If the clock
oscillation circuit selected as the source clock is set to stop in stop mode, the oscillation
stabilization wait time of the oscillation circuit or the lock wait time of the PLL in use, whichever
is longer, is required. Set the oscillation stabilization wait time before entering stop mode.
If the clock oscillation circuit selected as the source clock is not set to stop in stop mode, the
PLL does not automatically stop. No oscillation stabilization wait time is required unless the PLL
has stopped. Setting the oscillation stabilization wait time to the minimum value before stop
mode is entered is recommended.
105
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12.3 Clock Distribution
An operating clock for each function is generated based on the base clock generated
from the source clock. A total of four internal operating clocks are provided. A divideby rate can be set independently for each of them.
This section describes these internal operating clocks.
■ CPU Clock (CLKB)
This clock is used for the CPU, internal memory, and internal buses.
It is used by the following circuits:
•
CPU
•
Built-in RAM
•
Bit search module
•
I-bus, D-bus, X-bus, and F-bus
•
DMA controller
•
DSU (development tool interface circuit)
Since 68 MHz is the upper-limit frequency for operation, do not set a combination of multiply-by
rate and divide-by rate that results in a frequency exceeding this limit.
■ Peripheral Clock (CLKP)
This clock is used for peripheral circuits and peripheral buses.
It is used by the following circuits:
•
Peripheral bus
•
Clock controller (only for the bus interface)
•
Interrupt controller
•
Peripheral I/O ports
•
I/O port bus
•
External interrupt input
•
UART
•
16-bit timer
•
A/D converter
•
I2C interface
Since 34 MHz is the upper-limit frequency for operation, do not set a combination of multiply-by
rate and divide-by rate that results in a frequency exceeding this limit.
106
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ External Bus Clock (CLKT)
This clock is used for external extended bus interfaces.
It is used by the following circuits:
•
External extended bus interface
•
External CLK output
•
Bus interface port
Since 68 MHz is the upper-limit frequency for operation, do not set a combination of multiply-by
rate and divide-by rate that results in a frequency exceeding this limit.
107
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12.4 Clock Division
A divide-by rate can be set independently for each of the internal operating clocks.
With this function, an optimum operating frequency can be set for each circuit.
■ Clock Division
Set a divide-by rate in Basic Clock Division Setting Register 0 (DIVR0) and Basic Clock Division
Setting Register 1 (DIVR1). Each of these registers has four setting bits and (Register setting
value + 1) is the divide-by rate of the clock in relation to the base clock. Even if the divide-by
rate setting is an odd number, the duty is always 50%.
If the setting value is changed, the new divide-by rate becomes valid at the leading edge of the
next clock after the setting is made.
The divide-by rate setting is not initialized if an operation initialization reset (RST) occurs and
the setting made before the reset occurs is retained. The divide-by rate setting is initialized only
if a settings initialization reset (INIT) occurs. In the initial state, all clocks other than the
peripheral clock (CLKP) have a divide-by rate of "1". Thus, be sure to set the divide-by rate
before changing the source clock to a faster clock.
An upper-limit frequency for the operation is set for each clock. If you set a combination of
source clock, PLL multiply-by rate setting, and divide-by rate setting that results in a frequency
exceeding this upper-limit frequency, operation is not guaranteed. Be extra careful of the order
in which you change settings to select the source clock and to configure the associated setting
items.
108
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12.5 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Controller
This section provides a block diagram of the clock generation controller.
■ Block Diagram
Figure 3.12-1 shows a block diagram of the clock generation controller. Refer to "3.12.6
Register of Clock Generation Controller" for the detail of registers in Figure 3.12-1.
Figure 3.12-1 Block Diagram of Clock Generation Controller
[Clock generator]
DIVR0,1 registers
CPU clock
Selector
Peripheral clock division
Selector
External bus clock division
Selector
Stop control
R-bus
CPU clock division
Peripheral clock
External bus clock
X0
X1
Oscillation
circuit
Internal interrupt
PLL
1/2
Selector
CLKR register
[Stop and sleep controller]
Internal reset
Stop status
STCR register
Status
transition
control
circuit
Sleep status
Reset
occurrence
F/F
Reset
occurrence
F/F
Internal reset (RST)
Internal reset (INIT)
[Reset source circuit]
INIT pin
RSRR register
[Watchdog controller]
Watchdog F/F
Time base counter
CTBR register
TBCR register
Interrupt enable
Counter clock
Selector
Overflow detection F/F
Time-base timer
interrupt request
109
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12.6 Register of Clock Generation Controller
This section describes the functions of registers to be used in the clock generation
controller.
■ Reset Source Register/Watchdog Timer Control Register (RSRR)
Figure 3.12-2 shows the configuration of the reset source register/watchdog timer control
register (RSRR).
Figure 3.12-2 Reset Source Register/Watchdog Timer Control Register (RSRR)
bit
Address: 00000480H
Initial value (INIT pin)
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
15
INIT
R
1
−
X
14
R
0
0
X
13
WDOG
R
0
−
X
12
R
0
X
−
11
SRST
R
0
X
−
10
R
0
−
X
9
WT1
R/W
0
0
0
8
WT0
R/W
0
0
0
−: Varies according to the source.
x: Not initialized
This register holds the source of the last reset that occurred as well as the interval setting and
startup control for the watchdog timer. If the timer is read, the reset source that has been held is
cleared after it is read. If more than one reset is generated before this register is read, reset
source flags are accumulated and the multiple flags are set.
Writing to this register starts the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the watchdog timer continues
running until a reset (RST) occurs.
The following describes the functions of the reset source register/watchdog timer control register
(RSRR) bits.
[bit15] INIT (INITialize reset occurred)
This bit indicates whether a reset (INIT) occurred due to INIT pin input.
Table 3.12-1 INIT Function
INIT
Function
0
No reset (INIT) occurred due to INIT pin input.
1
A reset (INIT) occurred due to INIT pin input.
•
This bit is initialized to "0" after it is read.
•
This bit is readable; writing to the bit has no effect on the bit value.
[bit14] (Reserved)
This bit is reserved.
110
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit13] WDOG (WatchDOG reset occurred)
This bit indicates whether a reset (INIT) occurred due to the watchdog timer.
Table 3.12-2 WDOG Function
WDOG
Function
0
No reset (INIT) occurred due to the watchdog timer.
1
A reset (INIT) occurred due to watchdog timer.
•
This bit is initialized to "0" after a reset (INIT) due to INIT pin input or just after it is read.
•
This bit is readable; writing to the bit has no effect on the bit value.
[bit12] (Reserved)
This bit is reserved.
[bit11] SRST (Software ReSeT occurred)
This bit indicates whether a reset (RST) occurred due to writing to the SRST bit of the STCR
register (a software reset).
Table 3.12-3 SRST Function
SRST
Function
0
No reset (RST) occurred due to a software reset.
1
A reset (RST) occurred due to a software reset.
•
This bit is initialized to "0" after a reset (INIT) due to INIT pin input or just after it is read.
•
This bit is readable; writing to the bit has no effect on the bit value.
[bit10] (Reserved)
This bit is reserved.
[bit9, bit8] WT1, WT0 (Watchdog interval Time select)
This bit sets the interval of the watchdog timer.
The values written to these bits determine the interval of the watchdog timer, which can be
selected from the four types shown in Table 3.12-4.
Table 3.12-4 Interval Setting of Watchdog Timer
WT1
WT0
Minimum required interval for
writing to the CTBR to suppress a
watchdog reset
Time from writing the last 5AH to
the CTBR until a watchdog reset
occurs
0
0
φ x 216 (initial value)
φ x 216 to φ x 217
0
1
φ x 218
φ x 218 to φ x 219
1
0
φ x 220
φ x 220 to φ x 221
1
1
φ x 222
φ x 222 to φ x 223
Note: φ: Frequency of the system base clock
•
These bits are initialized to "00B" after a reset (RST).
•
These bits are readable, but are writable only once after a reset (RST). Any further writing is
disabled.
111
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Standby Control Register (STCR)
Figure 3.12-3 shows the configuration of the standby control register (STCR).
Figure 3.12-3 Configuration of Standby Control Register (STCR) Bits
bit
7
6
Address: 00000481H STOP SLEEP
R/W
R/W
Initial value (INIT pin)
0
0
Initial value (INIT)
0
0
Initial value (RST)
0
0
5
HIZ
R/W
1
1
X
4
SRST
R/W
1
1
1
3
OS1
R/W
0
X
X
2
OS0
R/W
0
X
X
1
R/W
1
1
X
0
OSCD1
R/W
1
1
X
The standby control register (STCR) controls the operating mode of the device.
This register controls the transition to the two standby modes of stop and sleep, pins when in
stop mode, and the stopping of oscillation stop. It also sets the oscillation stabilization wait time
and issues software resets.
Note:
Use the following sequences after using the synchronous standby mode (TBCR:Set by time base
counter control register bit8 SYNCS bit) when putting in the standby mode.
(LDI
#value_of_standby, R0)
; value_of_standby is the writing data to STCR.
(LDI
#_STCR, R12)
; _STCR is the address (481H) of STCR.
STB
R0, @R12
; Writing in standby control register (STCR)
LDUB @R12, R0
; STCR read for synchronous standby
LDUB @R12, R0
; Dummy re-read of STCR
NOP
; five NOPs for timing adjustment
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Furthermore, set the I flag, ILM and ICR to ensure that branching into the interrupt handler which is
a return source occurs after returning to the standby mode.
The following describes the functions of the standby control register (STCR) bits.
[bit7] STOP (STOP mode)
This bit specifies entry into stop mode. If "1" is written to both bit6 (SLEEP bit) and this bit,
this bit (STOP) has precedence and the device enters stop mode.
Table 3.12-5 STOP Function
STOP
112
Function
0
Stop mode not entered (initial value)
1
Stop mode entered
•
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset (RST) and by a stop return source.
•
This bit is readable and writable.
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit6] SLEEP (SLEEP mode)
This bit specifies entry into stop mode. If "1" is written to both bit7 (STOP bit) and this bit,
bit7 (STOP) has precedence and the device enters stop mode.
Table 3.12-6 SLEEP Function
SLEEP
Function
0
Sleep mode not entered (initial value)
1
Sleep mode entered
•
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset (RST) and by a sleep return source.
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit5] HIZ (HIZ mode)
This bit controls the pin state in stop mode.
Table 3.12-7 HIZ Function
HIZ
Function
0
The pin state before stop mode entered is maintained.
1
Pin output is set to high-impedance state in stop mode (initial value).
•
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset (INIT).
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit4] SRST (Software ReSeT)
This bit specifies issuing of a software reset (RST).
Table 3.12-8 SRST Function
SRST
Function
0
A software reset is issued.
1
A software reset is not issued (initial value).
•
This bit is initialized to "1" by a reset (RST).
•
This bit is readable and writable. The read value is always "1".
113
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit3, bit2] OS1, OS0 (Oscillation Stabilization time select)
These bits set the oscillation stabilization wait time used after a reset (INIT), return from stop
mode, etc.
The values written to these bits determine the interval of the watchdog timer, which can be
selected from the four types shown in Table 3.12-9.
Table 3.12-9 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Settings
OS1
OS0
Oscillation stabilization
wait time
If the source oscillation is
17 MHz
0
0
φ x 21 (initial value)
0.238 [µs]
0
1
φ x 211
240.9 [µs]
1
0
φ x 216
7.71 [ms]
1
1
φ x 222
493 [ms]
Note: φ:Frequency of the system base clock; in this case, twice the cycle of the source
oscillation input
•
These bits are initialized to "00B" by a reset (INIT) generated due to INIT pin input.
•
These bits are readable and writable.
[bit1] (Reserved)
•
This bit is initialized to "1" by a reset (INIT).
•
Write "1" when writing.
[bit0] OSCD1 (OSCillation Disable mode for XIN1)
This bit controls stopping of main oscillation input (XIN1) in stop mode.
Table 3.12-10 OSCD1 Function
OSCD1
114
Function
0
Main oscillation does not stop in stop mode.
1
Main oscillation stops in stop mode (initial value).
•
This bit is initialized to "1" by a reset (INIT).
•
This bit is readable and writable.
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Time Base Counter Control Register (TBCR)
Figure 3.12-4 shows the configuration of the time base counter control register (TBCR) bits.
Figure 3.12-4 Configuration of Time Base Counter Control Register (TBCR) Bits
bit
7
Address: 00000482H TBIF
R/W
Initial value (INIT)
0
Initial value (RST)
0
6
TBIE
R/W
0
0
5
TBC2
R/W
X
X
4
TBC1
R/W
X
X
3
TBC0
R/W
X
X
2
R/W
X
X
1
0
SYNCR SYNCS
R/W
R/W
0
0
X
X
The time base counter control register (TBCR) controls time-base timer interrupts, among other
things.
This register enables time-base timer interrupts, selects an interrupt interval time, and sets an
optional function for the reset operation.
The following describes the functions of the time base counter control register (TBCR) bits.
[bit15] TBIF (Time-base timer Interrupt Flag)
This bit is the time-base timer interrupt flag. It indicates that the interval time (TBC2 to TBC0
bits, which are bit13 to bit11) specified by the time base counter has elapsed.
A time-base timer interrupt request is generated if this bit is set to "1" when interrupts are
enabled by bit14 (TBIE bit, TBIE=1).
Table 3.12-11 Function of Time-base timer Interrupt Flag (TBIF)
TBIF
Function
Clear source
An instruction writes "0".
Set source
The specified interval time elapses (the trailing edge of the time base
counter is detected).
•
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset (RST).
•
This bit is readable and writable, although only "0" can be written to it. Writing "1" does not
change the bit value. The value read by a read-modify-write instruction is always "1".
[bit14] TBIE (Time-base Timer Interrupt Enable)
This bit is the time-base timer interrupt request output enable bit.
It controls output of an interrupt request when the interval time of the time base counter has
elapsed. A time-base timer interrupt request is generated if the TBIF bit is set to "1" when
this bit is set to "1".
Table 3.12-12 Function of time-base timer interrupt request output enable bit (TBIE)
TBIE
Function
0
Time-base timer interrupt request output disabled (initial value)
1
Time-base timer interrupt request output enabled
•
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset (RST).
•
This bit is readable and writable.
115
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit13 to bit11] TBC2, TBC1, TBC0 (time-base timer Counting time select)
These bits set the interval time of the time base counter that is used for the time-base timer.
The values written to these bits determine the interval time, which can be selected from the
eight types shown in Table 3.12-13.
Table 3.12-13 Interval Settings
TBC2
TBC1
TBC0
Timer interval time
If the source oscillation
is 17 MHz and PLL is
multiplied by 4
0
0
0
φ x 211
30.1 [µs]
0
0
1
φ x 212
60.2 [µs]
0
1
0
φ x 213
120.5 [µs]
0
1
1
φ x 222
61.7 [ms]
1
0
0
φ x 223
123.4 [ms]
1
0
1
φ x 224
246.7 [ms]
1
1
0
φ x 225
493.4 [ms]
1
1
1
φ x 226
986.9 [ms]
Note: φ: Frequency of the system base clock
•
The initial value is undefined. Be sure to set a value before enabling an interrupt.
•
These bits are readable and writable.
[bit10] (Reserved)
This bit is reserved. The read value is undefined. Writing to this bit has no effect on
operation.
[bit9] SYNCR (SYNChronous Reset enable)
This bit is the synchronous reset enable bit.
It is used to select one of the following operations, which is to be used if an operation
initialization reset (RST) request occurs:
• Performing a normal rest for Immediate reset (RST)
• Performing a synchronous reset after stopping all bus access for operation initial reset
(RST)
Table 3.12-14 Function of synchronous reset operation enable bit (SYNCR)
SYNCR
116
Function
0
Normal reset operation (initial value)
1
Synchronous reset operation
•
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset (INIT).
•
This bit is readable and writable.
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit8] SYNCS (SYNChronous Standby enable)
This bit is the synchronous standby enable bit.
Be sure to set "1" into this bit when using the standby mode (sleep or stop mode).
Table 3.12-15 Function of synchronous standby operation enable bit (SYNCS)
SYNCS
Function
0
Normal standby operation (initial value)
1
Synchronous standby operation
•
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset (INIT).
•
This bit is readable and writable.
■ Time Base Counter Clear Register (CTBR)
Figure 3.12-5 shows the configuration of the time base counter clear register (CTBR) bits.
Figure 3.12-5 Configuration of Time Base Counter Clear Register (CTBR) Bits
bit
Address: 000483H
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
7
D7
W
X
X
6
D6
W
X
X
5
D5
W
X
X
4
D4
W
X
X
3
D3
W
X
X
2
D2
W
X
X
1
D1
W
X
X
0
D0
W
X
X
The time base counter clear register (CTBR) initializes the time base counter.
If "A5H" and "5AH" are written successively to this register, all the bits in the time base counter
are cleared to "0" as soon as "5AH" is written. There is no time limit between writing of "A5H"
and "5AH". However, if data other than "5AH" is written after "A5H" is written, "A5H" must be
written again before "5AH" is written. Otherwise, a clear operation will not occur.
The bits are automatically cleared when the CPU is not in operation in such cases as stop/sleep
mode and DMA transfer. Therefore, if the above conditions occur, the watchdog reset is delayed
automatically. However, it will not be delayed, if a request to hold an external bus (BRQ) has
been accepted. For this reason, select the sleep mode before entering a hold request (BRQ),
when intending to hold the external bus for a long period.
The value read from this register is undefined.
Note:
If the time base counter is cleared using this register, the oscillation stabilization wait interval,
watchdog timer interval, and time-base timer interval temporarily vary.
117
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Clock Source Control Register (CLKR)
Figure 3.12-6 shows the configuration of the clock source control register (CLKR) bits.
Figure 3.12-6 Configuration of Clock Source Control Register (CLKR) Bits
bit
15
14
Address: 000484H Reserved PLL1S2
R/W
R/W
Initial value (INIT)
0
0
Initial value (RST)
X
X
13
12
PLL1S1
PLL1S0
R/W
0
X
R/W
0
X
11
10
PLL1EN
Reserved
R/W
R/W
0
0
X
X
9
CLKS1
R/W
0
X
8
CLKS0
R/W
0
X
The clock source control register (CLKR) is used to select the clock source that will be used as
the base clock of the system and controls the PLL. Use this register to select one of two clock
sources. This register also enables the main PLL and each of the sub-PLLs and selects the
multiply-by rate for them.
The following describes the functions of the clock source control register (CLKR) bits.
[bit15] (Reserved)
This bit is reserved.
[bit14 to bit12] PLL1S2, PLL1S1, PLL1S0 (PLL1 ratio Select 2 to 0)
These bits are the multiply-by selection bits for the main PLL. Select one of the eight
multiply-by rates (the MB91301 series supports only four of these) shown in Table 3.12-16.
Rewriting of these bits is disabled while the main PLL is selected as the clock source.
Table 3.12-16 Main PLL Multiply-By Rate Settings
PLL1S2
PLL1S1
PLL1S0
Main PLL multiply-by rate
If the source oscillation
is 17 MHz
0
0
0
x 1 (equal)
*2
0
0
1
x 2 (multiplied by 2)
*2
0
1
0
x 3 (multiplied by 3)
φ*1=19.6[ns](51.0MHz])
0
1
1
x 4 (multiplied by 4)
φ*1=14.7[ns](68.0[MHz])
1
0
0
x 5 (multiplied by 5)
*2
1
0
1
x 6 (multiplied by 6)
Do not make a setting
1
1
0
x 7 (multiplied by 7)
Do not make a setting
1
1
1
x 8 (multiplied by 8)
Do not make a setting
*1: φ: Frequency of the system base clock
*2: Not supported by the MB91301 series (supported when the range of PLL output is 48
MHz to 68 MHz).
•
These bits are initialized to "000B" by a reset (INIT).
•
These bits are readable and writable.
Note:
The upper-limit frequency for operation is 68 MHz. Do not make a setting exceeding this frequency.
118
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit11] (Reserved)
This bit is reserved.
[bit10] PLL1EN (PLL1 ENable)
This bit is the enable bit of the main PLL.
Rewriting of this bit is disabled while the main PLL is selected as the clock source.
Selection of the main PLL as the clock source is disabled while this bit is set to "0" (because
of the setting of bit9 and bit8, which are the CLKS1 and CLK0 bits).
Table 3.12-17 Function of the main PLL operation enable bit (PLL1EN)
PLL1EN
Function
0
Main PLL stopped (initial value)
1
Main PLL enabled
•
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset (INIT).
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit9, bit8] CLKS1, CLKS0 (CLocK source Select)
These bits set the clock source that will be used by the MB91301 series.
The values written to these bits determine the clock source, which can be selected from the
two types shown in Table 3.12-18.
Table 3.12-18 Clock Source Settings
CLKS1
CLKS0
Clock source setting
0
0
Source oscillation input from X0/X1 divided by 2 (initial value)
0
1
Source oscillation input from X0/X1 divided by 2
1
0
Main PLL
1
1
Do not make a setting
Table 3.12-19 shows the combinations of the CLKS1 and CLKS0 bits that cannot be changed
and those that can.
Table 3.12-19 Combinations of CLKS1 and CLKS0 Bits that Can and Cannot Be Changed
Cannot be changed
Can be changed
"00B" --> "11B"
"00B" --> "01B" or "10B"
"01B" --> "10B"
"01B" --> "11B" or "00B"
"10B" --> "01B" or "11B"
"10B" --> "00B"
"11B" --> "00B" or "10B"
"11B" --> "01B"
•
These bits are initialized to "00B" by a reset (INIT).
•
These bits are readable and writable.
119
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Base Clock Division Setting Register 0 (DIVR0)
Figure 3.12-7 shows the configuration of the Base Clock Division Setting Register 0 (DIVR0)
bits.
Figure 3.12-7 Configuration of Base Clock Division Setting Register 0 (DIVR0) Bits
bit
Address: 000486H
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
15
B3
R/W
0
X
14
B2
R/W
0
X
13
B1
R/W
0
X
12
B0
R/W
0
X
11
P3
R/W
0
X
10
P2
R/W
0
X
9
P1
R/W
1
X
8
P0
R/W
1
X
Base Clock Division Setting Register 0 (DIVR0) controls the divide-by rate of an internal clock in
relation to the base clock. This register sets the divide-by rates of the CPU clock, the clocks of
an internal bus (CLKB) and a peripheral circuit, and the peripheral bus clock (CLKP).
An upper-limit frequency for the operation is set for each clock. If you set a combination of
source clock, PLL multiply-by rate setting, and divide-by rate setting that results in a frequency
exceeding this upper-limit frequency, operation is not guaranteed. Be extra careful of the order
in which you change settings to select the source clock and to configure the associated setting
items.
If the setting in this register is changed, the new divide-by rate takes effect for the clock rate
following the one in which the setting was made.
120
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit15 to bit12] B3, B2, B1, B0 (clkB divide select 3 to 0)
These bits are the clock divide-by rate setting bits of the CPU clock (CLKB). Set the clock
divide-by rate of the CPU, internal memory, and internal bus clock (CLKB). The values
written to these bits determine the divide-by rate (clock frequency) of the CPU and internal
bus clock in relation to the base clock, which can be selected from the 16 types shown in
Table 3.12-20.
Note:
The upper-limit frequency for operation is 68 MHz. Do not set a divide-by rate that results in a
frequency exceeding this limit.
Table 3.12-20 Clock Divide-By Rate (CPU Clock) Settings
B3
B2
B1
B0
Clock divide-by rate
Clock frequency: if the source oscillation is
17 [MHz] and the PLL is multiplied by 4
0
0
0
0
φ
68 [MHz] (initial value)
0
0
0
1
φ x 2 (divided by 2)
34 [MHz]
0
0
1
0
φ x 3 (divided by 3)
22.7 [MHz]
0
0
1
1
φ x 4 (divided by 4)
17 [MHz]
0
1
0
0
φ x 5 (divided by 5)
13.6 [MHz]
0
1
0
1
φ x 6 (divided by 6)
11.3 [MHz]
0
1
1
0
φ x 7 (divided by 7)
9.71 [MHz]
0
1
1
1
φ x 8 (divided by 8)
8.5 [MHz]
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
φ x 16 (divided by 16)
4.25 [MHz]
Note: φ: Frequency of the system base clock
•
These bits are initialized to "0000B" by a reset (INIT).
•
These bits are readable and writable.
121
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit11 to bit8] P3, P2, P1, P0 (clkP divide select 3 to 0)
These bits are the clock divide-by rate setting bits of the peripheral clock (CLKP). Set the
clock divide-by rate of the peripheral circuit and the peripheral bus clock (CLKP). The values
written to these bits determine the divide-by rate (clock frequency) of the peripheral circuit
and the peripheral bus clock in relation to the base clock, which can be selected from the 16
types shown in Table 3.12-21.
Table 3.12-21 Clock Divide-by Rate (Peripheral Clock) Settings
P3
P2
P1
P0
Clock divide-by rate
Clock frequency: if the source oscillation
is 17 [MHz] and the PLL is multiplied by 4
0
0
0
0
φ
68 [MHz]
0
0
0
1
φ x 2 (divided by 2)
34 [MHz]
0
0
1
0
φ x 3 (divided by 3)
22.7 [MHz]
0
0
1
1
φ x 4 (divided by 4)
17 [MHz] (initial value)
0
1
0
0
φ x 5 (divided by 5)
13.6 [MHz]
0
1
0
1
φ x 6 (divided by 6)
11.3[MHz]
0
1
1
0
φ x 7 (divided by 7)
9.71 [MHz]
0
1
1
1
φ x 8 (divided by 8)
8.5 [MHz]
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
φ x 16 (divided by 16)
4.25 [MHz]
Note: φ: Frequency of the system base clock
•
These bits are initialized to "0011B" by a reset (INIT).
•
These bits are readable and writable.
Note:
The upper-limit frequency for operation is 34 MHz. Do not set a divide-by rate that results in a
frequency exceeding this limit.
122
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Base Clock Division Setting Register 1 (DIVR1)
Figure 3.12-8 shows the configuration of the Base Clock Division Setting Register 1 (DIVR1)
bits.
Figure 3.12-8 Configuration of Base Clock Division Setting Register 1 (DIVR1) Bits
bit
Address: 00000487H
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
15
T3
R/W
0
X
14
T2
R/W
0
X
13
T1
R/W
0
X
12
T0
R/W
0
X
11
R/W
0
X
10
R/W
0
X
9
R/W
0
X
8
R/W
0
X
Base Clock Division Setting Register 1 (DIVR1) controls the divide-by rate of an internal clock in
relation to the base clock. This register sets the divide-by rates of the external extended bus
interface clock (CLKT). An upper-limit frequency for operation is set for each clock. If you set a
combination of source clock, PLL multiply-by rate setting, and divide-by rate setting that results
in a frequency exceeding this upper-limit frequency, operation is not guaranteed. Be extra
careful of the order in which you change settings to select the source clock and to configure the
associated setting items.
If the setting in this register is changed, the new divide-by rate takes effect for the clock rate
following the one in which the setting was made.
[bit7 to bit4] T3, T2, T1, T0 (clkT divide select 3 to 0)
These bits are the clock divide-by rate setting bits of the external bus clock (CLKT). Set the
clock divide-by rate of the external extended bus interface clock (CLKT). The values written
to these bits determine the divide-by rate (clock frequency) of the external extended bus
interface clock in relation to the base clock, which can be selected from the 16 types shown
in Table 3.12-22.
Table 3.12-22 Clock Divide-By Rate (External Bus Clock) Settings
T3
T2
T1
T0
Clock divide-by rate
Clock frequency: if the source oscillation is
17[MHz] and the PLL is multiplied by 4
0
0
0
0
φ
68 [MHz] (initial value)
0
0
0
1
φ x 2 (divided by 2)
34 [MHz]
0
0
1
0
φ x 3 (divided by 3)
22.7 [MHz]
0
0
1
1
φ x 4 (divided by 4)
17 [MHz]
0
1
0
0
φ x 5 (divided by 5)
13.6 [MHz]
0
1
0
1
φ x 6 (divided by 6)
11.3 [MHz]
0
1
1
0
φ x 7 (divided by 7)
9.71 [MHz]
0
1
1
1
φ x 8 (divided by 8)
8.5 [MHz]
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
φ x 16 (divided by 16)
4.25 [MHz]
Note: φ: Frequency of the system base clock
• These bits are readable and writable.
[bit3 to bit0] (Reserved)
These bits are reserved.
123
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Note:
The upper-limit frequency for operation is 68 MHz. Do not set a divide-by rate that results in a
frequency exceeding this limit.
124
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12.7 Peripheral Circuits of Clock Controller
This section describes the peripheral circuit functions of the clock controller.
■ Time Base Counter
The clock controller has a 26-bit time base counter that runs on the system base clock.
The time base counter is used to measure the oscillation stabilization wait time in addition to
having the uses listed below (For more information about the oscillation stabilization wait time,
see Section "3.11.4 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time").
•
Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer, which is used to detect a system runaway, measures time using the bit
output of the time base counter.
•
Time-base timer
The time-base timer generates an interval interrupt using output from the time base counter.
The following describes these functions.
❍ Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer detects a runaway using output from the time base counter. If a program
runaway results in a watchdog reset no longer being postponed for a specified interval, a
settings initialization reset (INIT) request is generated as a watchdog reset.
[Startup and interval setting of the watchdog timer]
The watchdog timer is started when the reset source register and the watchdog timer control
register (RSRR) are written to for the first time after a reset (RST). At this time, the interval
time of the watchdog timer is set in bit9 and bit8 (WT1 and WT0 bits). Only the time defined
in this first write is valid as the interval time setting. Any further writing is ignored.
[Postponing a watchdog reset]
Once the watchdog timer is started, the program must write "A5H" and "5AH" in this order to
the time base counter clear register (CTBR). This operation initializes the watchdog reset
generation flag.
[Generation of a watchdog reset]
The watchdog reset generation flag is set at the trailing edge of the time base counter output
of the specified interval. If the flag has already been set when a trailing edge is detected a
second time, a settings initialization reset (INIT) request is generated as a watchdog reset.
[Stopping the watchdog timer]
The watchdog timer, once started, cannot be stopped until an operation initialization reset
(RST) occurs.
In the following states, when an operation initialization reset (RST) occurs, the watchdog
timer is stopped and remains inoperative until a program starts it.
•
Operation initialization reset (RST) state
•
Settings initialization reset (INIT) state
•
Oscillation stabilization wait reset (RST) state
125
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[Suspending the watchdog timer (automatic postponement)]
If program operation stops on the CPU, the watchdog reset generation flag is initialized and
generation of a watchdog reset is postponed. Stopping of program operation specifically
refers to the following statuses:
•
Sleep state
•
Stop state
•
Oscillation stabilization wait RUN state
•
During fetching instructions to the D-bus of D-bus RAM, etc.
•
During breaking an emulator debugger and a monitor debugger in use
•
Period of execution from INTE Instruction to RETI Instruction
•
Step Trace Trap (the break by each I instruction caused by T Flag = 1 in the PS Register)
•
During Data Access operation of cache memory at Instruction cache control register
(ISIZE, ICHCR) or RAM Mode
If the time base counter is cleared, the watchdog reset generation flag is initialized at the same
time, postponing generation of a watchdog reset.
If system falls into the condition mentioned above because of system runaway, the watchdog
reset cannot be executed. In that case, execute initialization reset (INIT) from external INIT pin.
■ Time-base Timer
The time-base timer generates an interval using output from the time base counter. This timer is
appropriate for measurements that require a relatively long time (for example, a maximum interval
of {base clock x 227} cycles such as for the PLL lock wait time or a sub clock.
If the trailing edge of the time base counter output for the specified interval is detected, a timebase timer interrupt request is generated.
[Startup and interval settings of the time-base timer]
For the time-base timer, the interval time is set in bit13 to bit11 (TBC2, TBC1, and TBC0
bits) of the time base counter control register (TBCR). The trailing edge of the time base
counter output for the specified interval is always detected. Thus, after setting the interval
time, clear bit15 (TBIF bit) and then set bit14 (TBIE bit) to "1" to enable output of an interrupt
request.
Before changing the interval time, set bit14 (TBIE bit) to "0" to disable interrupt request
output.
Since the time base counter always counts regardless of these settings, before enabling
interrupts, clear the time base counter to obtain an accurate interval interrupt time.
Otherwise, an interrupt request may be generated immediately after an interrupt is enabled.
[Clearing of the time base counter due to a program]
If "A5H" and "5AH" are written in this order to the time base counter clear register (CTBR), all
bits of the time base counter are cleared to "0" immediately after "5AH" is written. There is no
time limit between writing of "A5H" and "5AH". However, if data other than "5AH" is written
after "A5H" is written, "A5H" must be written again before "5AH" is written. Otherwise, no
clear operation occurs.
If the time base counter is cleared, the watchdog reset generation flag is initialized at the
same time, postponing generation of a watchdog reset.
126
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[Clearing of the time base counter due to the device state]
All bits of the time base counter are cleared to "0" at the same time if the device enters one
of the following states:
•
Stop state
•
Settings initialization reset (INIT) state
Especially in the stop state, an interval interrupt of the time-base timer may unintentionally be
generated because the time base counter is used to measure the oscillation stabilization wait
time. Before setting stop mode, therefore, disable time-base timer interrupts to prevent the timebase timer from being used.
In any other state, time-base timer interrupts are automatically disabled because an operation
initialization reset (RST) occurs.
127
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12.8 Smooth Startup and Stop of Clock
This section explains the method to control the internal voltage effect and voltage
surge.
■ Smooth Startup and Stop of Clock
Connect the bypass capacitor of about 5.0µF to the C pin to control the internal voltage effect or
voltage surge so that the change of the internal voltage is controlled drastically. Also, switch all
clocks (CPU, internal bus clock (CLKB), external bus clock (CLKT), peripheral circuit, and
peripheral bus clock (CLKP)) gradually instead of switching to a desired frequency from the low
frequency suddenly.
If returning to the operation in the low frequency, change it gradually and start and shut down
the clock as follows.
When changing the operation from high frequency to low frequency, perform the same
procedure.
❍ Start up
1) Enable the PLL operation. (Set the PLL1EN bit of the clock source control register (CLKR) to
"1".)
2) Oscillation stabilization wait time
3) Divide the CLKB, CLKT, and CLKP by 16. (Set the DIVR0 and DIVR1 registers.)
4) Set the multiply-by rate of the PLL and switch the X0 to PLL side. (Set the clock source
control register (CLKR).)
5) Reduce the divide-by rate of the CLKB, CLKT, and CLKP by degrees. Insert the wait loop
between the division steps.
❍ Shut down
1) Divide the CLKB, CLKT, and CLKP gradually (number of steps depends on the frequency
setting) up to the maximum division coefficient and insert the wait loop between the division
steps. (Set the DIVR0 and DIVR1 registers.)
2) Change from the PLL to the source oscillation of the X0/X1. (Set the clock source control
register (CLKR).)
3) Disable the PLL. (Set the PLL1EN bit of the clock source control register (CLKR) to "0".)
128
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Program Example of Smooth Startup and Stop of Clock
❍ Procedure of startup
#macro wait_loop loop_number
#local _wait64_loop
ldi #loop_number,r0
_wait64_loop:
add
#-1,r0
bne
_wait64_loop
#endm
smooth_up_start3:
ldi
#_DIVR0,r1
// Division register for CLKB and CLKP
ldi
#_DIVR1,r2
// Division register for CLKT
ldi
#_CLKR,r3
// CLKR register
ldi
#0xff,r4
ldi
#0x11,r5
ldi
#0x33,r6
ldi
#0x77,r7
ldi
#0x01,r8
ldi
#0x34,r12
ldi
#0x36,r13
nop
nop
nop
stb
r12,@r3
// PLL → X0 PLL operation enable
//Divide CLKB, CLKT, and CLKP by 16.
stb
r4,@r1
// Divide CLKB and CLKP by 16
stb
r4,@r2
// Divide CLKT by 16
wait_loop 4
stb
r13,@r3
//Switch X0 to PLL side.
wait_loop 4
//Reduce the divide-by rate of CLKB and CLKP gradually.
stb
r7,@r1
// Divide CLKB and CLKP by 16 → 8
wait_loop 8
stb
r6,@r1
// Divide CLKB and CLKP by 8 → 4
wait_loop 8
stb
r5,@r1
// Divide CLKB and CLKP by 4 → 2
wait_loop 16
stb
r8,@r1
// Divide CLKB by 2 → no division, divide CLKP by 2 → 2
wait_loop 16
//Reduce the divide-by rate of CLKT gradually.
stb
r7,@r2
// Divide CLKT by 16 → 8
wait_loop 8
stb
r6,@r2
// Divide CLKT by 8 → 4
wait_loop 8
stb
r5,@r2
// Divide CLKT by 4 → 2
wait_loop 16
stb
r8,@r2
// No CLKT division
wait_loop 16
129
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
❍ Procedure of shut down
#macro wait_loop loop_number
#local _wait64_loop
ldi
#loop_number,r0
_wait64_loop:
add
#-1,r0
bne _wait64_loop
#endm
smooth_down_start3:
ldi
#_DIVR0,r1
// Division register for CLKB and CLKP
ldi
#_DIVR1,r2
// Division register for CLKT
ldi
#_CLKR,r3
// CLKR register
ldi
#0x11,r5
ldi
#0x3f,r6
ldi
#0xff,r8
ldi
#0x04,r9
ldi
#0x33,r10
ldi
#0xff,r12
ldi
#0x00,r13
ldi
#0x1f,r14
nop
nop
nop
//Increase the divide-by rate of CLKT gradually.
stb
r14,@r2
// No CLKT division → 2
wait_loop 16
stb
r6,@r2
// Divide CLKT by 2 → 4
wait_loop 8
stb
r8,@r2
// Divide CLKT by 4 → 16
wait_loop 4
//Increase the divide-by rate of CLKB and CLKP gradually.
stb
r5,@r1
// No CLKB division → by 2, divide CLKP by 2 → 2
wait_loop 16
stb
r10,@r1
// Divide CLKB and CLKP by 2 → 4
wait_loop 8
stb
r12,@r1
//Divide CLKB and CLKP by 4 → 16
wait_loop 4
//Reduce the multiply-by rate of the PLL gradually.
stb
stb
nop
nop
nop
ret
130
r9,@r3
r13,@r3
// Change from the PLL to the source oscillation of the X0/X1.
// PLL off
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.13 Device State Control
This section describes the states of the FR family and their control. It also describes
low-power mode.
■ Device States
The FR family has the operating states listed below.
For more information about these states, see Section "3.13.1
Transitions".
•
RUN state (normal operation)
•
Sleep state
•
Stop state
•
Oscillation stabilization wait RUN state
•
Oscillation stabilization wait reset (RST) state
•
Operation initialization reset (RST) state
•
Settings initialization reset (INIT) state
Device States and State
■ Low-power Modes
The following two low-power modes are provided.
For more information, see Section "3.13.2 Low-power Modes".
•
Sleep mode
•
Stop mode
131
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ State of Device and Each Transition
The following shows the device state transitions of the MB91301 series.
1 INIT pin = 0(INT)
2 INIT pin = 1(INIT release)
3 Oscillation stabilization wait end
4 RESET (RST) release
5 Software reset (RST)
6 Sleep (write instruction)
7 Stop (write instruction)
8 Interrupt
9 External interrupt without clock
10 Watchdog reset (INIT)
Priority order of transition
Power-on
High
Oscillation stabilization wait end
1
Low
Initialize setting
(INIT)
2
Reset for
oscillation
stabilization wait
1
Stop
9
1
RUN for
oscillation
stabilization wait
7
Reset for
initializing operation
(RST)
Sleep
1
8
RUN
6
132
1
4
5
1
1
3
3
Setting initialize reset (INT)
10
Operation initialize reset (RST)
Interrupt request
Stop
Sleep
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.13.1 Device States and State Transitions
This section describes device operating states and the transition between operating
states.
■ RUN State (Normal Operation)
In the RUN state, a program is being executed. All internal clocks are supplied and all circuits
are enabled.
For the 16-bit peripheral bus, however, only the bus clock is stopped, when it is not being
accessed.
In this state, a state transition request is accepted. If synchronous reset mode is selected,
however, state transition operations different from normal reset mode are used for some
requests. For more information, see "Synchronous Reset Operation" in Section "3.11.5 Reset
Operation Modes".
■ Sleep State
In the sleep state, a program is stopped. Program operation causes a transition to this state.
Only execution of the program on the CPU is stopped; peripheral circuits are enabled. The
instruction cache is stopped and the built-in memory modules and the internal and external
buses are stopped unless the DMA controller issues a request.
•
If a valid interrupt request occurs, the state is cleared and the RUN state (normal operation)
is entered.
•
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the settings initialization reset (INIT)
state is entered.
•
If an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs, the operation initialization reset
(RST) state is entered.
■ Stop State
In the stop state, the device is stopped. Program operation causes a transition to this state.
All internal circuits are stopped. All internal clocks are stopped and the oscillation circuit and
PLL can be stopped if set to do so. Be sure to set PLL1EN=0 before entering the stop state.
In addition, the external pins (except some) can be set to high impedance via settings.
•
If a specific valid interrupt request (no clock required) occurs, the oscillation stabilization wait
RUN state is entered.
•
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the settings initialization reset (INIT)
state is entered.
•
If an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs, the oscillation stabilization wait reset
(RST) state is entered.
133
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Oscillation Stabilization Wait RUN State
In the oscillation stabilization wait RUN state, the device is stopped. This state occurs after a
return from the stop state.
All internal circuits except the clock generation controller (time base counter and device state
controller) are stopped. All internal clocks are stopped, but the oscillation circuit and the PLL
that has been enabled are running.
•
High impedance control of external pins in the stop or other state is cleared.
•
If the specified oscillation stabilization wait time elapses, the RUN state (normal operation) is
entered.
•
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the settings initialization reset (INIT)
state is entered.
•
If an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs, the oscillation stabilization wait reset
(RST) state is entered.
■ Oscillation Stabilization Wait Reset (RST) Status
In the oscillation stabilization wait reset (RST) state, the device is stopped. This state occurs
after a return from the stop state or the settings initialization reset (INIT) state. All internal
circuits except the clock generation controller (time base counter and device state controller) are
stopped. All internal clocks are stopped, but the oscillation circuit and the PLL that has been
enabled are running.
•
High impedance control of external pins in the stop state, etc., is cleared.
•
An operation initialization reset (RST) is output to the internal circuits.
•
If the specified oscillation stabilization wait time elapses, the oscillation stabilization wait
reset (RST) state is entered.
•
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the settings initialization reset (INIT)
state is entered.
■ Operation Initialization Reset (RST) State
In the operation initialization reset (RST) state, a program is initialized. This state occurs if an
operation initialization reset (RST) request is accepted or the oscillation stabilization wait reset
(RST) state is ended.
Execution of a program on the CPU is stopped and the program counter is initialized. Most
peripheral circuits are initialized. All internal clocks are stopped, but the oscillation circuit and
the PLL that has been enabled are running.
134
•
An operation initialization reset (RST) is output to the internal circuits.
•
If an operation initialization reset (RST) no longer exists, the RUN state (normal operation) is
entered and the operation initialization reset sequence is executed. After a return from the
settings initialization reset (INIT), the settings initialization reset sequence is executed.
•
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the settings initialization reset (INIT)
state is entered.
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) State
In the settings initialization reset (INIT) state, all settings are initialized. This state occurs if a
settings initialization reset (INIT) is accepted.
Execution of a program on the CPU is stopped and the program counter is initialized. All
peripheral circuits are initialized. The oscillation circuit runs, but the PLL stops running. All
internal clocks are stopped while the "L" level is input to the external INIT pin; otherwise, they
run.
•
A settings initialization reset (INIT) and an operation initialization reset (RST) are output to
the internal circuits.
•
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) no longer exists, the state is cleared and the oscillation
stabilization wait reset (RST) state is entered. Then, the operation initialization reset (RST)
state is entered and the settings initialization reset sequence is executed.
■ Priority of State Transition Requests
In any state, state transition requests conform to the priority listed below. However, some
requests that occur only in a specific state are valid only in that state.
[Highest]
Settings initialization reset (INIT) request
End of oscillation stabilization wait time (occurs only in the oscillation
stabilization wait reset state and the oscillation stabilization wait RUN state)
Operation initialization reset (RST) request
Valid interrupt request (occurs only in the RUN, sleep, and stop states)
Stop mode request (writing to a register) (occurs only in the RUN state)
[Lowest]
Sleep mode request (writing to a register) (occurs only in the RUN state)
135
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.13.2 Low-power Modes
This section describes the low-power modes, some MB91301 series states, and how to
use the low-power modes.
■ Low-power Modes
The FR family has the following low-power modes:
•
Sleep mode:The device enters the sleep state due to writing to a register.
•
Stop mode: The device enters the stop state due to writing to a register.
These modes are described below.
■ Sleep Mode
If "1" is set for bit6 (SLEEP bit) of the standby control register (STCR), sleep mode is initiated
and the device enters the sleep state. The sleep state is maintained until a source for return
from the sleep state is generated.
If "1" is set for both bit7 (STOP bit) and bit6 of the standby control register (STCR), bit7 (STOP
bit) has precedence and the device enters the stop state.
For more information about the sleep state, see "Sleep State" in Section "3.13.1 Device States
and State Transitions".
[Sleep mode transition]
Use the following sequences after using the synchronous standby mode (TBCR:Set by time
base counter control register bit8 SYNCS bit) when putting in the sleep mode.
/* Write to STCR */
ldi
#_STCR, r0
; STCR register (481H)
ldi
#Val_of_Stby, r1
; “Val_of_Stby” is the data to be written to STCR.
stb
r1, @r0
; Write to STCR.
/* Write to CTBR */
ldi
#_CTBR, r2
; CTBR register (483H)
ldi
#0xA5, r1
; Clear command (1)
stb
r1, @r2
; Write A5 to CTBR.
ldi
#0x5A, r1
; Clear command (2)
stb
r1, @r2
; Write 5A to CTBR.
/* Clear the time base counter at this point */
ldub
@r0, r1
; Read from STCR.
/* Start moving to synchronous standby mode */
ldub
nop
nop
nop
nop
nop
136
@r0, r1
; Dummy read from STCR.
; NOP for timing adjustment x 5
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
❍ Circuits that stop in the sleep state
•
Program execution on the CPU
•
Bit search module (enabled if DMA transfer occurs)
•
Various built-in memory (enabled if DMA transfer occurs)
•
Internal types of and external buses (enabled if DMA transfer occurs. A bus request is
enabled.)
❍ Circuits that do not stop in the sleep state
•
Oscillation circuit
•
PLL that has been enabled
•
Clock generation controller
•
Interrupt controller
•
Peripheral circuit
•
DMA controller
❍ Sources of return from the sleep state
•
Generation of a valid interrupt request
If the ICR register is not set to "11111B" and an interrupt request occurs, sleep mode is
cleared and the RUN state (normal operation) is entered. If the ICR register is set to
"11111B" and an interrupt request occurs, sleep mode is not cleared.
•
Generation of a settings initialization reset (INIT) request
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the settings initialization reset (INIT)
state is unconditionally entered.
•
Generation of an operation initialization reset (RST)
If an operation initialization reset (RST) occurs, the operation initialization reset (RST) state
is unconditionally entered.
For information about the priority of sources, see "Priority of State Transition Requests" in
Section "3.13.1 Device States and State Transitions".
❍ Synchronous standby operations
If "1" is set for bit8 (SYNCS bit) of the time base counter control register (TBCR), synchronous
standby operation is enabled. In this case, simply writing to the SLEEP bit does not cause a
transition to the sleep state. Instead, writing to the SLEEP bit and then reading the STCR
register causes a transition to the sleep state.
Always use the sequences described in "■ Sleep Mode" in "3.13.2 Low-power Modes” when
using the sleep mode.
137
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Stop Mode
If "1" is set for bit7 (STOP bit) of the standby control register (STCR), stop mode is initiated and
the device enters the stop state. The stop state is maintained until a source for return from the
stop state occurs.
If "1" is set for both bit6 (SLEEP bit) and bit7 bit of the standby control register (STCR), bit7
(STOP bit) has precedence and the device enters the stop state.
For more information about the stop state, see "Stop State" in Section "3.13.1 Device States
and State Transitions".
[Stop mode transition]
Use the following sequences after using the synchronous standby mode (TBCR:Set by time
base counter control register bit8 SYNCS bit) when putting in the stop mode.
(LDI #value_of_standby, R0)
(LDI #_STCR, R12)
STB
R0, @R12
LDUB @R12, R0
LDUB @R12, R0
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
; value_of_standby is the writing data to STCR.
; _STCR is the address (481H) of STCR.
; Writing in standby control register (STCR)
; STCR read for synchronous standby
; Dummy re-read of STCR
; five NOPs for timing adjustment
Furthermore, set the I flag, ILM and ICR to ensure that branching into the interrupt handler
which is a return source occurs after returning to the standby mode.
❍ Circuits that stop in the stop state
•
Oscillation circuits set to stop
If "1" is set for bit0 (OSCD1 bit) of the standby control register (STCR), the main clock
oscillation circuit in the stop state is stopped.
•
PLL connected to the oscillation circuit that is either disabled or set to stop
If "1" is set for bit0 (OSCD1 bit) of the standby control register (STCR) and "1" is set for bit10
(PLL1EN bit) of the clock source control register (CLKR), the main clock PLL in the stop
state is stopped.
•
All internal circuits except those, described below, that do not stop in the stop state
❍ Circuits that do not stop in the stop state
•
Oscillation circuits that are set not to stop
•
•
PLL connected to the oscillation circuit that is enabled and is not set to stop
•
138
If "0" is set for bit0 (OSCD1 bit) of the standby control register (STCR), the main clock
oscillation circuit in the stop state is not stopped.
If "0" is set for bit0 (OSCD1 bit) of the standby control register (STCR) and "1" is set for
bit10 (PLL1EN bit) of the clock source control register (CLKR), the main clock PLL in the
stop state is not stopped.
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
❍ High impedance control of a pin in the stop state
•
If "1" is set for bit5 (HIZ bit) of the standby control register (STCR), the output of a pin in the
stop state is set to the high impedance state. For information about pins subject to this
control, see the appendix, "STATUS OF PINS IN THE CPU STATES".
•
If "0" is set for bit5 (HIZ bit) of the standby control register (STCR), the output of a pin in the
stop state maintains the value before transition to the stop state. For more information, see
the appendix, "STATUS OF PINS IN THE CPU STATES".
❍ Sources of return from the stop state
•
Generation of a specific valid interrupt request (no clock required)
The external interrupt input pins (INT0 to INT7 pins) are enabled. If the ICR register is not set
to "11111B" and an interrupt request occurs, stop mode is cleared and the RUN state
(normal operation) is entered. If the ICR register is set to "11111B" and an interrupt request
occurs, stop mode is not cleared.
•
Generation of a settings initialization reset (INIT) request
If a settings initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the settings initialization reset (INIT) is
unconditionally entered.
For information about the priority of sources, see "Priority of State Transition Requests" in
Section "3.13.1 Device States and State Transitions".
❍ Selecting a clock source in stop mode
In self-induced oscillation mode, select the main clock divided by 2 as the source clock before
setting stop mode. For more information, see Section "3.12 Clock Generation Control" especially
Section "3.12.1 PLL Controls".
The same limitations as in the normal operation apply to the setting of a divide-by rate.
❍ Normal and synchronous standby operations
If "1" is set for bit8 (SYNCS bit) of the time base counter control register (TBCR), synchronous
standby operation is enabled. In this case, simply writing to the SLEEP bit does not cause a
transition to the sleep state. Instead, writing to the SLEEP bit and then reading the STCR
register causes a transition to the sleep state.
Always use the sequences described in "■ Sleep Mode" in "3.13.2 Low-power Modes” when
using the sleep mode.
139
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.14 Operating Modes
Two operating modes are provided: bus mode and access mode. This section
describes these modes.
■ Operating Modes
Bus mode
Access mode
External-ROM
External-bus
32-bit bus width
16-bit bus width
8-bit bus width
❍ Bus mode
Bus mode refers to a mode in which the operations of internal ROM and the external access
function are controlled. A bus mode is specified using the setting pins (MD2, MD1, and MD0)
and the ROMA bit in the mode data.
❍ Access mode
An access mode refers to a mode that controls the external data bus width. An access mode is
specified using the WTH1 and WTH0 bits in the mode register and the DBW1 and DBW0 bits in
ACR0 to ACR7 (Area Configuration Register0 to 7).
■ Bus Modes
The FR family has the following three modes: bus mode 0 (single chip mode), bus mode 1
(internal-ROM/external-bus mode), and bus mode 2 (external-ROM/external-bus mode). The
bus mode 2 (external-ROM/external-bus mode) can only be set for MB91V301A.
All bus modes can be set for MB91302A.
For more information, see Section "3.1 Memory Space".
❍ Bus mode 0 (single chip mode)
The internal I/O, D-busRAM, F-busRAM, and F-busROM are valid, while access to any other
areas is invalid under this mode.
The external pins serve as peripherals or general-purpose ports. The pin does not work as a
bus pin.
❍ Bus Mode 1 (internal-ROM/external-bus mode)
In this mode, the internal I/O, D-busRAM, F-busRAM, and F-busROM are valid. Access to an
area that enables external access is handled as access to an external space. Some external
pins serve as bus pins.
❍ Bus Mode 2 (external-ROM/external-bus mode)
In this mode, the internal I/O, and D-busRAM are valid. All accesses are handled as access to
an external space. Some external pins serve as bus pins.
140
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Mode Settings
For the FR family, set the operating mode using the mode pins (MD2, MD1, and MD0) and the
mode register (MODR).
❍ Mode pins
Use the three mode pins (MD2, MD1, and MD0) to specify mode vector fetch and to set a test
mode.
Table 3.14-1 Mode Settings
Mode pin
Mode name
Reset vector
access area
Remarks
MD2
MD1
MD0
0
0
0
Internal ROM
mode vector
Internal
Single chip mode
0
0
1
External ROM
mode vector
External
Set the bus width using the
mode register.
Note that any setting other than those listed in the table is not allowed.
❍ Mode register (MODR)
The mode register (MODR: MODe Register) determines the operating mode.
Figure 3.14-1 shows the configuration of the mode register (MODR).
Figure 3.14-1 Configuration of the Mode Register (MODR)
Operation mode setting bit
Address
0007FDH
bit
23
-
22
-
21
-
20
-
19
-
18
17
16
ROMA WTH1 WTH0
W
W
W
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
The data to be written to the mode register using a mode vector fetch (see "3.11.3 Reset
Sequence") is called "mode data".
Once this data is written in the mode register (MODR), the operation is performed according to the
operation mode specified by this register. The mode register (MODR) is set by all reset factors.
In addition, the data cannot be written from a user program.
•
Details of mode data
Figure 3.14-2 details the mode data to be set in the mode vector.
Figure 3.14-2 Details of mode data
Operation mode setting bit
Address
0007FDH
bit
31
-
30
-
29
-
28
-
27
-
26
25
24
ROMA WTH1 WTH0
W
W
W
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
The following explains the functions of the bits in the mode register (MODR).
[bit31 to bit27] (Reserved)
These bits are reserved. Be sure to set them to "00000B". If you set the other value of
"00000B", the operation is not guaranteed.
141
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit26] ROMA (Internal ROM enable bit)
This bit sets whether to making built-in F-bus RAM and F-bus ROM region effective.
Table 3.14-2 Function of internal ROM enable
ROMA
Function
Remark
0
External ROM mode
Built-in F-bus region (40000H to 100000H) becomes
an external region.
1
Internal ROM mode
Built-in F-bus region (40000H to 100000H) becomes
access prohibited.*
*: EVA product has the built-in 8K bytes RAM. So the EVA product can be set. For details, see
"■ Memory Map" in "3.1 Memory Space".
[bit25, bit24] WTH1, WTH0 (Bus width setting bit)
These bits specify the bus width to be used in external bus mode.
In external bus mode, this value is set in the DBW1 and DBW0 bits in ACR0H (the CS0
area).
Table 3.14-3 shows the settings for the initial bus width.
Table 3.14-3 Settings of the Initial Bus Width
WTH1
WTH0
Bus width
Remarks
0
0
8 bits
External bus mode
0
1
16 bits
External bus mode
1
0
32 bits
External bus mode
1
1
Single chip mode
Note:
The mode data for setting mode vector should be set at 000FFFF8H as byte data. FR family's byte
endian uses big endian. Please set to the upper byte of bit31 to bit24.
Figure 3.14-3 Note on Mode Data
bit 31
False
000FFFF8H
24 23
XXXXXXXX
bit 31
True
000FFFF8H
000FFFFCH
142
XXXXXXXX
24 23
Mode Data
16 15
XXXXXXXX
16 15
XXXXXXXX
87
XXXXXXXX
Reset Vector
0
Mode Data
87
0
XXXXXXXX
CHAPTER 4
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
The external bus interface controller controls the interfaces with the internal bus for
chips and with external memory and I/O devices.
This chapter explains each function of the external bus interface and its operation.
4.1 Overview of the External Bus Interface
4.2 External Bus Interface Registers
4.3 Setting Example of the Chip Select Area
4.4 Endian and Bus Access
4.5 Operation of the Ordinary Bus Interface
4.6 Burst Access Operation
4.7 Address/data Multiplex Interface
4.8 Prefetch Operation
4.9 SDRAM/FCRAM Interface Operation
4.10 DMA Access Operation
4.11 Bus Arbitration
4.12 Procedure for Setting a Register
4.13 Notes on Using the External Bus Interface
143
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.1
Overview of the External Bus Interface
This section explains the features, block diagram, I/O pins, and registers of the
external bus interface.
■ Features
The external bus interface has the following features:
❍ Addresses of up to 32 bits (4 Gbytes space) can be output.
❍ Various kinds of external memory (8-bit/16-bit/32-bit modules) can be directly connected
and multiple access timings can be mixed and controlled.
•
Asynchronous SRAM and asynchronous ROM/FLASH memory (multiple write strobe method
or byte enable method)
•
Page mode ROM/FLASH memory (Page sizes 2, 4, and 8 can be used)
•
Burst mode ROM/FLASH memory
•
SDRAM (FCRAM modules are also supported, including two- and four-bank types with CAS
latency 1 to 8)
•
Address/data multiplex bus (8-bit/16-bit width only)
•
Synchronous memory (such as ASIC built-in memory) (Synchronous SRAM cannot be
directly connected)
❍ Eight independent banks (chip select areas) can be set, and chip select corresponding to
each bank can be output.
•
The size of each area can be set in multiples of 64K bytes (64K bytes to 2G bytes for each
chip select area).
•
An area can be set at any location in the logical address space (Boundaries may be limited
depending on the size of the area.)
❍ In each chip select area, the following functions can be set independently:
144
•
Enabling and disabling of the chip select area (Disabled areas cannot be accessed)
•
Setting of the access timing type to support various kinds of memory (SDRAM can be
connected to the CS6 and CS7 areas only.)
•
Detailed access timing setting (individual setting of the access type such as the wait cycle)
•
Setting of the data bus width (8-bit/16-bit/32-bit)
•
Setting of the order of bytes (big endian or little endian) (Only big endian can be set for the
CS0 area)
•
Setting of write disable (read-only area)
•
Enabling and disabling of fetches from the built-in cache
•
Enabling and disabling of the prefetch function
•
Maximum burst length setting (1, 2, 4, 8)
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ A different detailed timing can be set for each access timing type.
•
For the same type of access timing, a different setting can be made in each chip select area.
•
Auto-wait can be set to up to 15 cycles (asynchronous SRAM, ROM, Flash, and I/O area).
•
The bus cycle can be extended by external RDY input (asynchronous SRAM, ROM, Flash,
and I/O area).
•
The first access wait and page wait can be set (burst, page mode, and ROM/FLASH area).
•
Various kinds of idle/recovery cycles and setting delays can be inserted.
•
Capable of setting timing values such as the CAS latency and RAS-CAS delay (SDRAM
area)
•
Capable of controlling the distributed/centralized auto-refresh, self-refresh, and other refresh
timings (SDRAM area)
❍ Fly-by transfer by DMA can be performed.
•
Transfer between memory (including SDRAM) and I/O can be performed in a single access
operation.
•
The memory wait cycle can be synchronized with the I/O wait cycle in fly-by transfer.
•
The hold time can be secured by only extending transfer source access.
•
Idle/recovery cycles specific to fly-by transfer can be set.
❍ External bus arbitration using BRQ and BGRNT can be performed.
❍ Pins that are not used by the external interface can be used as general-purpose I/O ports
through settings.
145
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Block Diagram
Figure 4.1-1 Block Diagram of the External Bus Interface
Internal address bus
32
Internal data bus
32
External data bus
MUX
write buffer
switch
read buffer
switch
DATA BLOCK
ADDRESS BLOCK
+1 or +2
External address bus
address buffer
ASR
CS0 to CS7
ASZ
comparator
SDRAM control
RCR
underflow
SRAS,SCAS,
SWE,MCLKE,
DQMUU,DQMUL,
DQMLU,DQMLL
refresh counter
External terminal controller
block control
registers
&
control
146
RD
WR0,WR1,
WR2,WR3,
AS,BAA
BRQ
BGRNT
RDY
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ I/O Pins
The I/O pins are external bus interface pins (Some pins have other uses).
The following lists the I/O pins for each interface:
❍ Ordinary bus interface
•
A31 to A00, D31 to D00 (AD15 to AD00)
•
CS0, CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS5, CS6, CS7
•
AS, SYSCLK, MCLK
•
RD
•
WR, WR0(UUBX), WR1(ULBX), WR2(ULBX), WR3(LLBX)
•
RDY, BRQ, BGRNT
❍ Memory interface
•
MCLK, MCLKE
•
LBA(=AS), BAA (for burst ROM/FLASH)
•
SRAS, SCAS, SWE (=WR) (for SDRAM)
•
DQMUU,DQMUL,DQMLU,DQMLL (for SDRAM (=WR0, WR1, WR2, WR3))
❍ DMA interface
•
IOWR, IORD
•
DACK0, DACK1
•
DREQ0, DREQ1
•
DEOP0, DEOP1
147
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Register List
Figure 4.1-2 shows the registers used by the external bus interface:
Figure 4.1-2 List of External Bus Interface Registers
bit
31
24 23
ASR0
ASR1
ASR2
ASR3
ASR4
ASR5
ASR6
ASR7
AWR0
AWR2
AWR4
AWR6
MCRA
Reserved
IOWR0
Reserved
CSER
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Note:
148
MCRB
Reserved
IOWR1
Reserved
CHER
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MODR)
16 15
8 7
0
ACR0
ACR1
ACR2
ACR3
ACR4
ACR5
ACR6
ACR7
AWR1
AWR3
AWR5
AWR7
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
TCR
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved indicates a reserved register. Be sure to set "0".
MODR cannot be accessed from user programs.
Area Select Registers 0 to 7 (ASR0 to ASR7)
Area Configuration Registers 0 to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7)
Area Wait Registers (AWR0 to AWR7)
Memory Setting Register
(For mode without SDRAM/FCRAM auto pre-charge) (MCRA)
Memory Setting Register
(For mode with FCRAM auto pre-charge) (MCRB)
DMAC I/O Wait Register (IOWR0, IOWR1)
Chip Select Area Enable Register (CSER)
Cache Enable Register (CHER)
Pin/Timing Control Register (TCR)
Refresh Control Register (RCR)
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2
External Bus Interface Registers
This section explains the registers used in the external bus interface.
■ Register Types
The following registers are used by the external bus interface:
•
Area select registers (ASR0 to ASR7)
•
Area configuration registers (ACR0 to ACR7)
•
Area wait registers (AWR0 to AWR7)
•
Memory configuration register (MCRA for SDRAM/FCRAM auto-precharge OFF mode)
•
Memory configuration register (MCRB for FCRAM auto-precharge ON mode)
•
I/O wait registers for DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1)
•
Chip select enable register (CSER)
•
Cache enable register (CHER)
•
Pin/timing control register (TCR)
•
Refresh control register (RCR)
149
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.1
Area Select Registers 0 to 7(ASR0 to ASR7)
This section explains the configuration and functions of area select registers 0 to 7
(ASR0 to ASR7).
■ Configuration of Area Select Registers 0 to 7 (ASR0 to ASR7)
The area select registers (ASR0 to ASR7: Area Select Registers 0 to 7) specify the start
address of each chip select area of CS0 to CS7.
Figure 4.2-1 shows the configuration of area select registers 0 to 7 (ASR0 to ASR7: Area Select
Register).
Figure 4.2-1 Configuration of the Area Select Registers (ASR0 to ASR7)
Initial value
ASR0
bit 15
Address 000640H A31
14
13
A30
A29
ASR1
bit 15
Address 000644H A31
14
13
A30
A29
ASR2
bit 15
Address 000648H A31
14
13
A30
A29
ASR3
bit 15
Address 00064CH A31
14
13
A30
A29
ASR4
bit 15
Address 000650H A31
14
13
A30
A29
14
13
A30
A29
14
13
A30
A29
14
13
A30
A29
ASR5
bit 15
Address 000654H A31
ASR6
bit 15
Address 000658H A31
ASR7
bit 15
Address 00065CH A31
150
12
...
...
...
2
1
0
A18
A17
A16
12
...
...
...
2
1
0
A18
A17
A16
12
...
...
...
2
1
0
A18
A17
A16
12
...
...
...
2
1
0
A18
A17
A16
12
...
...
...
2
1
0
A18
A17
A16
12
...
...
...
2
1
0
A18
A17
A16
12
...
...
...
2
1
0
A18
A17
A16
12
...
...
...
2
1
0
A18
A17
A16
INIT
0000H
RST
0000H
Access
XXXXH
XXXXH
R/W
XXXXH
XXXXH
R/W
XXXXH
XXXXH
R/W
XXXXH
XXXXH
R/W
XXXXH
XXXXH
R/W
XXXXH
XXXXH
R/W
XXXXH
XXXXH
R/W
R/W
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Functions of Bits in the Area Select Registers (ASR0 to ASR7)
The area select registers (ASR0 to ASR7) specify the start address of each chip select area
(CS0 to CS7).
The start address can be set in the high-order 16 bits (bits A31 to A16). Each chip select area
starts with the address set in this register and covers the range set by the four bits ASZ3 to
ASZ0 of the ACR0 to ACR7 registers.
The boundary of each chip select area obeys the setting of the four bits ASZ3 to ASZ0 of the
ACR0 to ACR7 registers. For example, if an area of 1 Mbyte is set by the four bits ASZ3 to
ASZ0, the low-order four bits of the ASR0 to ASR7 registers are ignored and only bits A31 to
A20 are valid.
The ASR0 register is initialized to 0000H by INIT and RST. ASR1 to ASR7 are not initialized by
INIT and RST, and are therefore undefined. After starting chip operation, be sure to set the
corresponding ASR register before enabling each chip select area with the CSER register.
151
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.2
Area Configuration Registers 0 to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7)
This section explains the configuration and functions of area configuration registers 0
to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7).
■ Configuration of Area Configuration Registers 0 to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7)
The area configuration registers 0 to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7: FArea Configuration Register 0 to 7) set
the function of each chip select area.
Figure 4.2-2 shows the configuration of area configuration registers 0 to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7).
Figure 4.2-2 Configuration of Area Configuration Registers 0 to 7 (ACR0 to ACR7)
ACR0H
bit
Address 000642H
Initial value
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
INIT
RST
ASZ3 ASZ2 ASZ1 ASZ0 DBW1 DBW0 BST1 BST0 1111XX00B 1111XX00B
ACR0L
bit
Address 000643H
7
6
5
SREN PFEN WREN
ACR1H
bit
Address 000646H
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ASZ3 ASZ2 ASZ1 ASZ0 DBW1 DBW0 BST1 BST0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR1L
bit
Address 000647H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SREN PFEN WREN LEND TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR2H
bit
Address 00064AH
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ASZ3 ASZ2 ASZ1 ASZ0 DBW1 DBW0 BST1 BST0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR2L
bit
Address 00064BH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SREN PFEN WREN LEND TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR3H
bit
Address 00064EH
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ASZ3 ASZ2 ASZ1 ASZ0 DBW1 DBW0 BST1 BST0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR3L
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address 00064FH SREN PFEN WREN LEND TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR4H
bit
Address 000652H
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ASZ3 ASZ2 ASZ1 ASZ0 DBW1 DBW0 BST1 BST0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR4L
bit
Address 000653H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SREN PFEN WREN LEND TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR5H
bit
Address 000656H
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ASZ3 ASZ2 ASZ1 ASZ0 DBW1 DBW0 BST1 BST0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR5L
bit
Address 000657H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SREN PFEN WREN LEND TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
4
0
3
2
1
0
TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0
00000000B
00000000B
Access
R/W
R/W
(Continued)
152
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
(Continued)
ACR6H
bit
Address 00065AH
Initial value
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
INIT
RST
ASZ3 ASZ2 ASZ1 ASZ0 DBW1 DBW0 BST1 BST0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
Access
R/W
ACR6L
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address 00065BH SREN PFEN WREN LEND TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR7H
bit
Address 00065EH
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ASZ3 ASZ2 ASZ1 ASZ0 DBW1 DBW0 BST1 BST0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
ACR7L
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address 00065FH SREN PFEN WREN LEND TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0 XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
Note:
Please set ASR and ACR by word access at the same time.
Please set ACR after setting ASR if ASR and ACR are accessed by halfword.
The following explains the function of each bit:
[bit15 to bit12] ASZ3 to ASZ0 (Area Size Bits 3 to 0)
These bits set the area size. Table 4.2-1 shows their settings.
Table 4.2-1 Area Size Settings
ASZ3
ASZ2
ASZ1
ASZ0
Size of each chip select area
0
0
0
0
64 Kbytes (00010000H byte, ASR A[31:16] bits are valid)
0
0
0
1
128 Kbytes (00020000H byte, ASR A[31:17] bits are valid)
0
0
1
0
256 Kbytes (00040000H byte, ASR A[31:18] bits are valid)
0
0
1
1
512 Kbytes (00080000H byte, ASR A[31:19] bits are valid)
0
1
0
0
1 Mbyte (00100000H byte, ASR A[31:20] bits are valid)
0
1
0
1
2 Mbytes (00200000H byte, ASR A[31:21] bits are valid)
0
1
1
0
4 Mbytes (00400000H byte, ASR A[31:22] bits are valid)
0
1
1
1
8 Mbytes (00800000H byte, ASR A[31:23] bits are valid)
1
0
0
0
16 Mbytes (01000000H byte, ASR A[31:24] bits are valid)
1
0
0
1
32 Mbytes (02000000H byte, ASR A[31:25] bits are valid)
1
0
1
0
64 Mbytes (04000000H byte, ASR A[31:26] bits are valid)
1
0
1
1
128 Mbytes (08000000H byte, ASR A[31:27] bits are valid)
1
1
0
0
256 Mbytes (10000000H byte, ASR A[31:28] bits are valid)
1
1
0
1
512 Mbytes (20000000H byte, ASR A[31:29] bits are valid)
1
1
1
0
1024 Mbytes (40000000H byte, ASR A[31:30] bits are valid)
1
1
1
1
2048 Mbytes (80000000H byte, ASR A[31] bit is valid)
153
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
ASZ3 to ASZ0 are used to set the size of each area by modifying the number of comparison of
bits to ASR. Thus, an ASR contains bits that are not compared. Bits ASZ3 to ASZ0 of ACR0 are
initialized to 1111B (0FH) by RST. Despite this setting, however, the CS0 area just after RST is
executed is specially set from 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH (setting of entire area). The entirearea setting is reset after the first write to ACR0 and an appropriate size is set as indicated in
Table 4.2-1.
If SDRAM/FCRAM is connected to an area set by ASR6 and ASR7, set it 128M bytes (1011H)
or less.
[bit11, bit10] DBW1, DBW0 (Data Bus Width 1, 0)
These bits set the data bus width of each chip select area as indicated in Table 4.2-2:
Table 4.2-2 Setting of the Data Bus Width of Each Chip Select Area
DBW1
DBW0
Data bus width
0
0
8 bits (byte access)
0
1
16 bits (halfword access)
1
0
32 bits (word access)
1
1
Reserved Setting disabled
The same values as those of the WTH bits of the mode vector are written automatically to bits
DBW1, DBW0 of ACR0 during the reset sequence.
Use the same data bus width setting for all the SDRAM/FCRAM-connected areas, using these
bits.
[bit9, bit8] BST1, BST0 (Burst Size 1, 0)
These bits set the maximum burst length of each chip select area as indicated in Table 4.2-3.
Table 4.2-3 Setting of the Maximum Burst Length of Each Chip Select
BST1
BST0
Maximum burst length
0
0
1 (single access)
0
1
2 bursts (address boundary: 1 bit)
1
0
4 bursts (address boundary: 2 bits)
1
1
8 bursts (address boundary: 3 bits)
In areas for which a burst length other than the single access is set, continuous burst access is
performed within the address boundary determined by the burst length only when prefetch
access is performed or data having a size exceeding the bus width is read.
The maximum burst length for the area with a bus length of 32 bits is 4 bursts. It is
recommended to select 2 bursts or shorter.
Setting of 2 bursts or less as the maximum burst length in the bus width 16-bit area is
recommended.
RDY input is ignored in areas for which any burst length other than the single access is set.
Use the same burst length for all the SDRAM/FCRAM-connected areas, using these bits.
154
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit7] SREN (ShaRed Enable)
This bit sets enabling or disabling of sharing of each chip select area by BRQ/BGRNT as
indicated in the following table.
Table 4.2-4 Enabling or disabling of sharing of each chip select area by BRQ/BGRNT
SREN
Sharing enable/disable
0
Disable sharing by BRQ/BGRNT(CSn cannot be high impedance)
1
Enable sharing by BRQ/BGRNT(CSn can be high impedance)
In areas where sharing is enabled, chip select output (CSn) is set to high impedance while the
bus is open (during BGRNT= "L" output). In areas where sharing is disabled, chip select output
(CSn) is not set to high impedance even though the bus is open (during BGRNT= "L" output).
Access strobe output (AS, BAA, RD, WR0, WR1, WR2, WR3, WR, MCLK, MCLKE) is set to
high impedance only if sharing of all areas enabled by CSER is enabled.
[bit6] PFEN (PreFetch Enable)
This bit sets enabling and disabling of prefetching of each chip select area as indicated in the
following table.
Table 4.2-5 Enabling and disabling of prefetching of each chip select area
PFEN
Prefetch enable/disable
0
Disable prefetch
1
Enable prefetch
When reading from an area for which prefetching is enabled, the subsequent address is read in
advance and stored in the built-in prefetch buffer. When the stored address is accessed from
the internal bus, the lookahead data in the prefetch buffer is returned without performing
external access.
For more information, see Section "4.8 Prefetch Operation".
[bit5] WREN (WRite Enable)
This bit sets enabling and disabling of writing to each chip select area.
Table 4.2-6 Enabling and disabling of writing to each chip select area
WREN
Write enable/disable
0
Disable write
1
Enable write
If an area for which write operations are disabled is accessed for a write operation from the
internal bus, the access is ignored and no external access at all is performed. Set the WREN bit
of areas for which write operations are required, such as data areas, to "1".
155
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit4] LEND (Little ENDian select)
This bit sets the order of bytes of each chip select area as indicated in the following table.
Table 4.2-7 Setting of byte ordering to each chip select area
LEND
Order of bytes
0
Big endian
1
Little endian
Be sure to set the LEND bit of ACR0 to "0". CS0 supports only the big endian method.
[bit3 to bit0] TYP3 to TYP0 (TYPe select)
These bits set the access type of each chip select area as indicated in Table 4.2-8.
Table 4.2-8 Access Type Settings for Each Chip Select Area
TYP3
TYP2
TYP1
TYP0
Access type
0
0
x
x
Normal access (asynchronous SRAM, I/O, and single/
page/burst-ROM/FLASH)
0
1
x
x
Address data multiplex access (8/16-bit bus width only)
0
x
x
0
Disable WAIT insertion by the RDY pin.
0
x
x
1
Enable WAIT insertion by the RDY pin (disabled during
bursts).
0
x
0
x
Use the WR0 to WR3 pins as write strobes (WRn is
always H).
0
x
1
x
Use the WRn pin as the write strobe. *1
1
0
0
0
Memory type A: SDRAM/FCRAM *2 (The auto precharge
is not used)
1
0
0
1
Memory type B: FCRAM *2 (The auto precharge is used)
1
0
1
0
Setting disabled
1
0
1
1
Setting disabled
1
1
0
0
Setting disabled
1
1
0
1
Setting disabled
1
1
1
0
Setting disabled
1
1
1
1
Mask area setting (The access type is the same as that
of the overlapping area) *3
*1: If this setting is made, WR0 to WR3 can be used as the enable of each bit.
*2: Only the ACR6 and ACR7 registers are valid. The ACR0, ACR1, ACR2, ACR3, ACR4,
and ACR5 registers are disabled.
*3: See the "CS area mask setting function" (next bullet).
Set the access type as the combination of all bits.
For details of the operations of each access type, see the explanation of operation in the
section on and after "4.5 Operation of the Ordinary Bus Interface".
156
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ CS area mask setting function
If you want to set an area some of whose operation settings are changed for a certain CS area
(referred to as the base setting area), you can set TYPE3 to TYPE0 of ARC in another CS area
to "1111B" so that the area can function as a mask setting area.
If you do not use the mask setting function, disable any overlapping area settings for multiple
CS areas.
Access operations to the mask setting area are as follows:
•
CSn corresponding to a mask setting area is not asserted.
•
CSn corresponding to a base setting area is asserted.
•
For the following ACR settings, the settings on the mask setting area side are valid:
•
•
bit11, bit10 (DBW1, DBW0): Bus width setting
•
bit9, bit8 (BST1, BST0):
Burst length setting
•
bit7 (SREN):
Sharing-enable setting
•
bit6 (PFEN):
Prefetch-enable setting
•
bit5 (WREN):
Write-enable setting (For this setting only, only a setting that
is the same as that of the base setting area is allowed)
•
bit4 (LEND):
Little endian setting
For the following ACR setting, the setting on the base setting area side is valid:
•
bit3 to bit0 (TYPE3 to TYPE0): Access type setting
•
For the AWR settings, the settings on the mask setting area side are valid.
•
For the CHER settings, the settings on the mask setting area side are valid.
A mask setting area can be set for only part of another CS area (base setting area). You cannot
set a mask setting area for an area without a base setting area. In addition, the mask setting
area must not be duplicated. Use care when setting ASR and bits ASZ3 to ASZ0 of ACR.
The following restrictions apply when using these bits:
•
A write-enable setting cannot be implemented by a mask.
•
Write-enable settings in the base CS area and the mask setting area must be identical.
•
If write operations to a mask setting area are disabled, the area is not masked and operates
as a base CS area.
•
If write operations to the base CS area are disabled but are enabled to the mask setting
area, the area has no base, resulting in malfunctions.
157
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.3
Area Wait Register (AWR0 to AWR7)
This section explains the configuration and functions of the area wait registers
(AWR0 to AWR7).
■ Configuration of the Area Wait Registers (AWR0 to AWR7)
The area wait registers (AWR0 to AWR7: Area Wait Register 0 to 7) specify various kinds of
waits for each chip select area.
Figure 4.2-3 shows the configuration of the area wait registers (AWR0 to AWR7).
Figure 4.2-3 Configuration of the Area Wait Registers (AWR0 to AWR7)
AWR0H
bit
Address 000660H
31
W15
30
W14
29
W13
28
W12
27
W11
26
W10
25
W09
24
W08
Initial value
INIT
RST
01111111B 01111111B
AWR0L
bit
Address 000661H
23
W07
22
W06
21
W05
20
W04
19
W03
18
W02
17
W01
16
W00
11111111B
AWR1H
bit
Address 000662H
15
W15
14
W14
13
W13
12
W12
11
W11
10
W10
9
W09
8
W08
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR1L
bit
Address 000663H
7
W07
6
W06
5
W05
4
W04
3
W03
2
W02
1
W01
0
W00
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR2H
bit
Address 000664H
31
W15
30
W14
29
W13
28
W12
27
W11
26
W10
25
W09
24
W08
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR2L
bit
Address 000665H
23
W07
22
W06
21
W05
20
W04
19
W03
18
W02
17
W01
16
W00
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR3H
bit
Address 000666H
15
W15
14
W14
13
W13
12
W12
11
W11
10
W10
9
W09
8
W08
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR3L
bit
Address 000667H
7
W07
6
W06
5
W05
4
W04
3
W03
2
W02
1
W01
0
W00
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR4H
bit
Address 000668H
31
W15
30
W14
29
W13
28
W12
27
W11
26
W10
25
W09
24
W08
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR4L
bit
Address 000669H
23
W07
22
W06
21
W05
20
W04
19
W03
18
W02
17
W01
16
W00
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR5H
bit
Address 00066AH
15
W15
14
W14
13
W13
12
W12
11
W11
10
W10
9
W09
8
W08
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR5L
bit
Address 00066BH
7
W07
6
W06
5
W05
4
W04
3
W03
2
W02
1
W01
0
W00
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
11111011B
Access
R/W
R/W
(Continued)
158
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
(Continued)
AWR6H
bit
Address 00066CH
31
W15
30
W14
29
W13
28
W12
27
W11
26
W10
25
W09
24
W08
Initial value
INIT
RST
Access
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB R/W
AWR6L
bit
Address 00066DH
23
W07
22
W06
21
W05
20
W04
19
W03
18
W02
17
W01
16
W00
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR7H
bit
Address 00066EH
15
W15
14
W14
13
W13
12
W12
11
W11
10
W10
9
W09
8
W08
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
AWR7L
bit
Address 00066FH
7
W07
6
W06
5
W05
4
W04
3
W03
2
W02
1
W01
0
W00
XXXXXXXXB XXXXXXXXB
R/W
The function of each bit changes according to the access type (TYP3 to TYP0 bits) setting of
the ACR0 to ACR7 registers.
❍ Normal access and address/data multiplex access
A chip select area determined by either of the following settings becomes the area for normal
access or a address/data multiplex access operation.
Table 4.2-9 Setting of access type (Typ3 to Typ0 bits)
TYP3
TYP2
TYP1
TYP0
Access type
0
0
x
x
Normal access (asynchronous SRAM, I/O,
and single/page/burst-ROM/FLASH)
0
1
x
x
Address data multiplex access (8/16-bit bus
width only)
The following lists the functions of each AWR0 to AWR7 bit for a normal access or address/data
multiplex access area. Since the initial values of registers other than AWR0 are undefined, set
them to their initial values before enabling each area with the CSER register.
The following explains the functions of the bits in the area wait registers (AWR0 to AWR7).
159
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit15 to bit12] W15 to W12 (First Access Wait Cycle)
These bits set the number of auto-wait cycles to be inserted into the first access cycle of
each cycle. Except for the burst access cycles, only this wait setting is used.
The initial value of the CS0 area is set to 7 waits. The initial value of any other area is
undefined.
Table 4.2-10 lists the settings for the number of auto-wait cycles during first access.
Table 4.2-10 Settings for the Number of Auto-Wait Cycles (During First Access)
W15
W14
W13
W12
First access wait cycle
0
0
0
0
Auto-wait cycle 0
0
0
0
1
Auto-wait cycle 1
...
1
1
...
1
1
Auto-wait cycle 15
[bit11 to bit8] W11 to W08 (Inpage Access Wait Cycle)
These bits set the number of auto-wait cycles to be inserted into the inpage access cycle
during burst access. They are valid only for burst cycles.
Table 4.2-11 lists the settings for the number of auto-wait cycles during burst access.
Table 4.2-11 Settings for the Number of Auto-Wait Cycles (During Burst Access)
W11
W10
W09
W08
Inpage access wait cycle
0
0
0
0
Auto-wait cycle 0
0
0
0
1
Auto-wait cycle 1
...
1
1
...
1
1
Auto-wait cycle 15
If the same value is set for the first access wait cycle and inpage access wait cycle, the access
time for the address in each access cycle is not the same. This is because the inpage access
cycle contains an address output delay.
160
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit7, bit6] W07, W06 (Read -> Write Idle Cycle)
The read -> write idle cycle is set to prevent collision of read data and write data on the data
bus when a write cycle follows a read cycle. During an idle cycle, all chip select signals are
negated and the data terminals maintain the high impedance state. If a write cycle follows a
read cycle or an access operation to another chip select area occurs after a read cycle, the
specified idle cycle is inserted. Table 4.2-12 lists the settings for idle cycles.
Table 4.2-12 Settings of the Idle Cycle
W07
W06
Read -> write idle cycles
0
0
0 cycle
0
1
1 cycle
1
0
2 cycles
1
1
3 cycles
[bit5, bit4] W05, W04 (Write Recovery Cycle)
The write recovery cycle is set if a device that limits the access period after write access is to
be controlled. During a write recovery cycle, all chip select signals are negated and the data
pins maintain the high impedance state. If the write recovery cycle is set to "1" or more, a
write recovery cycle is always inserted after write access.
Table 4.2-13 lists the settings for the number of write recovery cycles.
Table 4.2-13 Settings for the Number of Write Recovery Cycles
W05
W04
Write recovery cycles
0
0
0 cycle
0
1
1 cycle
1
0
2 cycles
1
1
3 cycles
161
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit3] W03 (WR0 to WR3, WRn Output Timing Selection)
The WR0 to WR3, WRn output timing setting selects whether to use write strobe output as an
asynchronous strobe or synchronous write enable. The asynchronous strobe setting corresponds
to normal memory/ I/O. The synchronous enable setting corresponds to clock-synchronized
memory/ I/O (such as the memory in an ASIC).
Table 4.2-14 Setting of WR0 to WR3, WRn output timing
W03
WR0 to WR3, WRn output timing selection
0
MCLK synchronous write enable output (valid from AS="L")
1
Asynchronous write strobe output (normal operation)
If synchronous write enable (W03 bit of AWR is "0") is used, operations are as follows:
•
The timing of synchronous write enable output assumes that the output is captured by the
rising edge of MCLK output of an external memory access clock. This timing is different from
the asynchronous strobe output timing.
•
The WR0 to WR3 and WRn terminal output asserts synchronous write enable output at the
timing at which AS pin output is asserted. For a write to an external bus, the synchronous
write enable output is "L". For a read from an external bus, the synchronous write enable
output is "H".
•
Write data is output from the external data output pin in the clock cycle following the cycle in
which synchronous write enable output is asserted.
•
Read strobe output (RD) functions as an asynchronous read strobe regardless of the setting
of the WR0 to WR3 and WRn output timing. Use it as is for controlling the data I/O direction.
If synchronous write enable output is used, the following restrictions apply:
•
•
•
162
Do not make the following additional wait settings:
-
CSn -> RD/WRn setup (Always set "0" for the W01 bit of AWR)
-
First wait cycle setting (Always set "0000B" for the W15 to W12 bits of AWR)
Do not make the following access type settings (TYPE3 to TYPE0 bits in the ACR register
(bit3 to bit0))
-
Address/data multiplex bus setting (Always set "0" for the TYPE2 bit of ACR)
-
Setting to use WR0 to WR3 as a strobe (Always set "0" for the TYPE1 bit of ACR)
-
RDY input enable setting (Always set "0" for the TYPE0 bit of ACR)
For synchronous write enable output, always set 1("00B" for bits BST1, BST0 of ACR) as the
burst length.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit2] W02 (Address -> CSn Delay)
The address -> CSn delay setting is made when a certain type of setup is required for the
address when CSn falls or CSn edges are needed for successive accesses to the same chip
select area.
Set the address and set the delay from AS output to CS0 to CS7 output.
Table 4.2-15 Setting of address -> CSn delay
W02
Address -> CSn delay
0
Delay
1
No delay
If no delay is selected by setting "0", assertion of CS0 to CS7 starts at the same timing that AS
is asserted. If, at this point, successive accesses are made to the same chip select area,
assertion of CS0 to CS7 without change between two access operations may continue.
If delay is specified by selecting "1", assertion of CS0 to CS7 starts when the external clock
memory MCLK output rises. If, at this point, successive accesses are made to the same chip
select area, CS0 to CS7 are negated at a timing between two access operations. If CSn delay is
selected, one setup cycle is inserted before asserting the read/write strobe after assertion of the
delayed CSn (operation is the same as the CSn ->RD/WRn setup setting of W01).
The address -> CSn delay setting works for DACKX signal (basic mode) output to the same
area in the same way. DACKX output in basic mode has the same waveforms as those of CSn
output to the same area.
[bit1] W01 (CSn -> RD/WRn Setup Extension Cycle)
The CSn -> RD/WRn setup extension cycle is set to extend the period before the read/write
strobe is asserted after CSn is asserted. At least one setup extension cycle is inserted
before the read/write strobe is asserted after CSn is asserted.
Table 4.2-16 Function of CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay cycle
W01
CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay cycle
0
0 cycle
1
1 cycle
If 0 cycle is selected by setting "0", RD/WR0 to WR3/WR are output at the earliest when
external clock MCLK output rises just after CSn is asserted. WR0 to WR3/WR may be delayed
one cycle or more depending on the internal bus state.
If 1 cycle is selected by setting "1", RD/WR0 to WR3/WR are always output 1 cycle or more
later.
When successive accesses are made within the same chip select area without negating CSn, a
setup extension cycle is not inserted. If a setup extension cycle for determining the address is
required, set the W02 bit and insert the address -> CSn delay. Since CSn is negated for each
access operation, the setup extension cycle is enabled.
If the CSn delay set by W02 is inserted, this setup cycle is always enabled regardless of the
setting of the W01 bit.
163
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit0] W00 (RD/WRn -> CSn Hold Extension Cycle)
The RD/WRn -> CSn hold extension cycle is set to extend the period before negating CSn
after the read/write strobe is negated. One hold extension cycle is inserted before CSn is
negated after the read/write strobe is negated.
Table 4.2-17 Function of RD/WRn -> CSn hold extension cycle
W00
RD/WRn -> CSn hold extension cycle
0
0 cycle
1
1 cycle
If 0 cycle is selected by setting "0", CS0 to CS7 are negated after the hold delay after it starts on
the rising edge of external memory clock MCLK output after RD/WR0 to WR3/WR are negated.
If 1 cycle is selected by setting "1", CS0 to CS7 are negated one cycle later.
When making successive accesses within the same chip select area without negating CSn, the
hold extension cycle is not inserted. If a hold extension cycle for determining the address is
required, set the W02 bit and insert the address -> CSn delay. Since CSn is negated for each
access operation, this hold extension cycle is enabled.
❍ Memory type A(SDRAM/FCRAM) and Memory type B(FCRAM)
The chip select areas for which the access type (TYP3 to TYP0 bits) in the ACR6 and ACR7
registers has been set as in Table 4.2-18 serve for SDRAM/FCRAM access.
Table 4.2-18 lists the access type settings (TYP3 to TYP0 bits).
Table 4.2-18 Access Type Settings (TYP3 to TYP0 Bits)
TYP3 TYP2 TYP1 TYP0
1
0
0
0
Access type
Memory type A: SDRAM/FCRAM (Auto-precharge is not used.)
The following explains those functions of individual bits in AWR6 and AWR7 which apply to
SDRAM access areas. As the initial value is undefined, set the access type before each area is
enabled by the chip select area enable register (CSER).
For all the areas connected to SDRAM/FCRAM, use the same settings for this type of registers.
The following summarizes the functions of individual bits in the area wait registers (AWR6 and
AWR7).
[bit15] W15: Reserved bit
Be sure to set this bit to "0".
[bit14 to bit12] W14 to W12 (RAS-CAS delay Cycle): RAS-CAS delay cycles
Set these bits to the number of cycles from RAS output to CAS output.
Table 4.2-19 lists the settings for the number of cycles from RAS output to CAS output.
Table 4.2-19 Setting the Number of Cycles from RAS Output to CAS Output
W14
W13
W12
RAS-CAS delay cycle
0
0
0
1 cycle
0
0
0
2 cycles
...
1
1
...
1
8 cycles
For all the areas connected to SDRAM/FCRAM, set these bits to the same RAS-CAS delay
cycle.
164
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit11] W11: Reserved bit
Be sure to set this bit to "0".
[bit10 to bit8] W10 to W08 (CAS latency Cycle): CAS latency
Set these bits to the CAS latency.
Table 4.2-20 lists the settings for the CAS latency.
Table 4.2-20 CAS Latency Setting
W10
W09
W08
CAS latency
0
0
0
1 cycle
0
0
0
2 cycles
...
1
1
...
1
8 cycles
For all the areas connected to SDRAM/FCRAM, set these bits to the same CAS latency.
[bit7, bit6] W07, W06 (Read - >Write Cycle): Read-to-write cycle
Set these bits to the minimum number of cycles from the last read data input cycle to the
write command issuance. Set the minimum number of cycles taken until issuance.
Table 4.2-21 lists the settings for the read-to-write cycle.
Table 4.2-21 Read-to-write Cycle
W07
W06
Read-to-write cycle
0
0
1 cycle
0
1
2 cycles
1
0
3 cycles
1
1
4 cycles
For all the areas connected to SDRAM/FCRAM, set these bits to the same read-to-write cycle.
The number of read-to-write idle cycles is one smaller than the number of cycles set by this bit.
[bit5, bit4] W05, W04 (Write Recovery Cycle): Write recovery cycle
Set these bits to the minimum number of cycles from the last write data output to the next
read command issuance.
Table 4.2-22 lists the settings for the write recovery cycle.
Table 4.2-22 Write Recovery Cycle
W05
W04
Write recovery cycle
0
0
Prohibited
0
1
2 cycles
1
0
3 cycles
1
1
4 cycles
For all the areas connected to SDRAM/FCRAM, set these bits to the same write recovery cycle.
165
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit3, bit2] W03, W02 (RAS Active time): RAS active time
Set these bits to the minimum number of cycles for RAS active time.
Table 4.2-23 lists the settings for RAS active time.
Table 4.2-23 RAS Active Time
W03
W02
RAS active time
0
0
1 cycle
0
1
2 cycles
1
0
5 cycles
1
1
6 cycles
For all the areas connected to SDRAM/FCRAM, set these bits to the same RAS active time.
[bit1, bit0] W01, W00 (RAS precharge cycle): RAS precharge cycles
Set these bits to the number of RAS precharge cycles.
Table 4.2-24 lists the settings for the RAS precharge cycle.
Table 4.2-24 RAS Precharge Cycle
W03
W02
RAS precharge cycle
0
0
1 cycle
0
1
2 cycles
1
0
3 cycles
1
1
4 cycles
For all the areas connected to SDRAM/FCRAM, set these bits to the same RAS precharge
cycle.
166
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.4
Memory Setting Register
(MCRA for SDRAM/FCRAM auto-precharge OFF mode)
This section describes the configuration and the function of memory setting register
(MCRA for SDRAM/FCRAM auto-precharge OFF mode).
■ Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRA for SDRAM/FCRAM Auto-precharge OFF Mode)
Memory setting register (MCRA for SDRAM/FCRAM auto-precharge OFF mode)
The memory setting register (MCRA: Memory Setting Register for extend type-A for SDRAM/
FCRAM auto-precharge OFF mode) is used to make various settings for SDRAM/FCRAM
connected to the chip select area.
Figure 4.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the memory setting register (MCRA for SDRAM/
FCRAM auto-precharge OFF mode).
Figure 4.2-4 Configuration of the Memory Setting Register (MCRA for SDRAM/FCRAM Auto-precharge OFF Mode)
bit
Address 000670H
31
Reserved
R/W
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PSZ2 PSZ1 PSZ0 WBST BANK ABS1 ABS0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB (INIT)
XXXXXXXXB (RST)
The register serves as the area for making various settings for SDRAM/FCRAM connected to
the chip select area for which the access type (TYP3 to TYP0 bits) in the ACR6 and ACR7
registers has been set as in Table 4.2-25.
Table 4.2-25 lists the access type settings (TYP3 to TYP0 bits).
Table 4.2-25 Access Type Settings (TYP3 to TYP0 Bits)
TYP3
TYP2
TYP1
TYP0
Access type
1
0
0
0
Memory type A:SDRAM/FCRAM (not used auto precharge)
MCRB shares register hardware with MCRA. Updating the MCRA therefore updates the MCRB
accordingly.
The following summarizes the functions of individual bits in the memory setting register (MCRA
for SDRAM/FCRAM auto-precharge OFF mode).
[bit31] (Reserved)
Be sure to set this bit to "0".
[bit30 to bit28] PSZ2 to PSZ0 (Page SiZe): Page size
Set these bits to the page size of SDRAM to be connected.
Table 4.2-26 lists the settings for the page size of SDRAM connected.
Table 4.2-26 Settings for the Page Size of SDRAM
PSZ2
PSZ1
PSZ0
Page size of SDRAM
0
0
0
8-bit column address:A0 to A7(256 memory words)
0
0
1
9-bit column address:A0 to A8(512 memory words)
0
1
0
10-bit column address:A0 to A9(1024 memory words)
0
1
1
11-bit column address:A0 to A9, A11(2048 memory words)
1
X
X
Prohibited
167
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit27] WBST (Write BurST enable): Write burst setting
Set this bit to select whether to burst-write for write access.
Table 4.2-27 lists the settings for burst write.
Table 4.2-27 Settings for Burst Write
WBST
Settings for burst write
0
Single write
1
Burst write
For connecting FCRAM, be sure to set the bit to "1".
FCRAM supports neither burst read nor single write mode.
[bit26] BANK (BANK type select): Bank number setting
Set this bit to the number of banks of SDRAM to be connected.
Table 4.2-28 lists the settings for bank number.
Table 4.2-28 Settings for Bank Number
BANK
Settings for bank number
0
2 banks
1
4 banks
[bit25, bit24] ABS1, ABS0 (Active Bank Select): Setting of active bank number
Set these bits to the maximum number of banks to be made active simultaneously.
Table 4.2-29 lists the settings for the number of active banks.
Table 4.2-29 Settings for the Number of Active Banks
168
ABS1
ABS0
Number of active banks
0
0
1 bank
0
1
2 banks
1
0
3 banks
1
1
4 banks
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.5
Memory Setting Register
(MCRB for FCRAM auto-precharge ON mode)
This section describes the memory setting register (MCRB for FCRAM auto-precharge
ON mode).
■ Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRB for FCRAM Auto-precharge ON Mode)
Settings for Memory configuration register (MCRB: Memory Configuration Register for extend
type-B for FCRAM auto-precharge ON mode) is used to make various settings for FCRAM
connected to the chip select area.
Figure 4.2-5 shows the bit configuration of the memory setting register (MCRB for FCRAM autoprecharge ON mode).
Figure 4.2-5 Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRB for FCRAM Auto-precharge ON Mode)
bit
Address 000671H
23
Reserved
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Initial value
Access
PSZ2 PSZ1 PSZ0 WBST BANK ABS1 ABS0 XXXXXXXXB (INIT)
R/W
XXXXXXXXB (RST)
The register serves as the area for making various settings for FCRAM connected to the chip
select area for which the access type (TYP3 to TYP0 bits) in the ACR6 and ACR7 registers has
been set as in Table 4.2-30.
Table 4.2-30 lists the access type settings (TYP3 to TYP0 bits).
Table 4.2-30 Access Type Settings (TYP3 to TYP0 Bits)
TYP3
TYP2
TYP1
TYP0
1
0
0
1
Access type
Memory type B: FCRAM (used auto precharge)
MCRB shares register hardware with MCRA. Updating the MCRB therefore updates the MCRA
accordingly.
The functions are the same as MCRA. Note, however, that the function of the WBST bit is not
available to this TYP setting.
(FCRAM supports neither burst read nor single write mode.)
169
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.6
I/O Wait Registers for DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1)
This section explains the configuration and functions of the I/O wait registers for
DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1).
■ Configuration of the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1)
The I/O wait registers for DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1: I/O Wait Register for DMAC0, DMAC1) set
various kinds of waits during DMA fly-by access.
Figure 4.2-6 shows the configuration of the I/O wait registers for DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1).
Figure 4.2-6 Configuration of the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1)
IOWR0
Address
IOWR1
Address
bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Initial value
Access
RYE0 HLD0 WR01 WR00 IW03 IW02 IW01 IW00 XXXXXXXXB (INIT)
R/W
XXXXXXXXB (RST)
bit 23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
000679H
RYE1 HLD1 WR11 WR10 IW13 IW12 IW11 IW10 XXXXXXXXB (INIT)
R/W
XXXXXXXXB (RST)
000678H
■ Functions of Bits in the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC (IOWR0, IOWR1)
The following explains the functions of the bits in the I/O wait registers for DMAC.
[bit31, bit23] RYE0, RYE1 (RDY enable 0, RDY enable 1)
These bits set the wait control, using RDY, of channels 0 and 1 during DMAC fly-by access.
Table 4.2-31 RDY function setting
RYEn
RDY function setting
0
Disable RDY input for I/O access.
1
Enable RDY input for I/O access.
When "1" is set, wait insertion by the RDY pin can be performed during fly-by transfer on the
relevant channel. IOWR and IORD are extended until the RDY pin is enabled. Also, RD/WR0 to
WR3/WR on the memory side are extended synchronously. If the chip select area of the fly-by
transfer destination is set to RDY-enabled in the ACR register, wait insertion by the RDY pin can
be performed regardless of the RYEn bit of IOWR. When the chip select area of the fly-by
transfer destination is set to RDY-disabled in the ACR register, wait insertion by the RDY pin
can only be performed during fly-by access if the area is set to RDY-enabled by the RYEn bit on
the IOWR side.
[bit30, bit22] HLD0, HLD1 (Hold Wait Control)
These bits control the hold cycle of the read strobe signal on the transfer source access side
during DMA fly-by access.
Table 4.2-32 Hold wait setting
HLDn
170
Hold wait setting
0
Do not insert a hold extension cycle.
1
Insert a hold extension cycle to extend the read cycle by one cycle.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
If "0" is set, the read strobe signal (RD for memory -> I/O and IORD for I/O -> memory) and the
write strobe signal (IOWR for memory -> I/O and WR0 to WR3 and WR for I/O -> memory) on
the transfer source access side are output at the same timing.
If "1" is set, the read strobe signal is output one cycle longer than the write strobe signal to
secure a hold time for data at the transfer source access side when sending it to the transfer
destination.
[bit29, bit28, bit21, bit20] WR01/WR00, WR11/WR10 (I/O Idle Wait) :
Setting the number of I/O Idle Cycles
These bits set the number of idle cycles for continuous access during DMA fly-by access.
Table 4.2-33 lists the settings for the number of I/O idle cycles.
Table 4.2-33 Settings for the Number of I/O Idle Cycles
WRn1
WRn0
Setting of the number of I/O idle cycles
0
0
0 cycle
0
1
1 cycle
1
0
2 cycles
1
1
3 cycles
If one or more cycles is set as the number of idle cycles, cycles equal to the number specified
are inserted after I/O access during DMA fly-by access. During the idle cycles, all CSn and
strobe output is negated and the data pin is set to the high impedance state.
[bit27 to bit24, bit19 to bit16, bit11 to bit8] IW03 to IW00,IW13 to IW10 (I/O Access Wait) :
Setting the number of I/O Access Wait Cycles
These bits set the number of auto-wait cycles for I/O access during DMA fly-by access.
Table 4.2-34 lists the settings for the number of I/O wait cycles.
Table 4.2-34 Settings for the Number of I/O Wait Cycles
IWn3
IWn2
IWn1
IWn0
Number of I/O wait cycles
0
0
0
0
0 cycle
0
0
0
1
1 cycle
...
1
1
...
1
1
15 cycles
Because data is synchronized between the transfer source and transfer destination, the I/O side
setting of the IWnn bits and the wait setting for the fly-by transfer destination (such as memory),
whichever is larger, is used as the number of wait cycles to be inserted. Consequently, more
wait cycles than specified by the IWnn bits may be inserted.
171
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.7
Chip Select Enable Register (CSER)
The chip select enable register (CSER) set up the access permit of each chip select
area.
■ Configuration of the Chip Select Enable Register (CSER)
The chip select enable register (CSER: Chip Select Enable register) enables and disables each
chip select area.
Figure 4.2-7 shows the configuration of the chip select enable register (CSER).
Figure 4.2-7 Configuration of the Chip Select Enable Register (CSER)
bit 31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Initial value
Address 000680H CSE7 CSE6 CSE5 CSE4 CSE3 CSE2 CSE1 CSE0 11111111B (INIT)
000681H
11111111B (RST)
Access
R/W
■ Functions of Bits in the Chip Select Enable Register (CSER)
The following explains the functions of the bits in the chip select enable register (CSER).
[bit31 to bit24] CSE7 to CSE0 (Chip Select Enable 0 to Chip Select Enable 7)
These bits are the chip select enable bits for CS0 to CS7.
The initial value is 00000001B, which enables only the CS0 area.
When "1" is written, a chip select area operates according to the settings of ASR0 to ASR7,
ACR0 to ACR7, and AWR0 to AWR7.
Before setting this register, be sure to make all settings required for the corresponding chip
select areas. However, make sure to execute the power-on sequence by the PON bit in the
refresh control register (RCR) after enabling the chip select areas using the chip select area
enable register (CSER).
The power-on sequence is invalid to SDRAM/FCRAM connected to the area which has not
been enabled by the chip select area enable register (CSER).
Table 4.2-35 shows the function of chip select enable 0 to 7.
Table 4.2-35 Function of chip select enable 0 to 7
172
CSE7 to CSE0
Area control
0
Disable
1
Enable
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
Table 4.2-36 lists the corresponding CSn for the chip select enable bits.
Table 4.2-36 CSn Corresponding to the Chip Select Enable Bits
CSE bit
Corresponding CSn
bit24: CSE0
CS0
bit25: CSE1
CS1
bit26: CSE2
CS2
bit27: CSE3
CS3
bit28: CSE4
CS4
bit29: CSE5
CS5
bit30: CSE6
CS6
bit31: CSE7
CS7
173
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.8
Cache Enable Register (CHER)
This section explains the configuration and functions of the cache enable register
(CHER).
■ Configuration of the Cache Enable Register (CHER)
The cache enable register (CHER: CacHe Enable Register) controls the transfer of data read
from each chip select area.
Figure 4.2-8 shows the configuration of the cache enable register (CHER).
Figure 4.2-8 Configuration of the Cache Enable Register (CHER)
Address
bit 23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Initial value
000681H CHE7 CHE6 CHE5 CHE4 CHE3 CHE2 CHE1 CHE0 11111111B (INIT)
11111111B (RST)
Access
R/W
■ Functions of Bits in the Cache Enable Register (CHER)
The following explains the functions of the bits in the cache enable register (CHER).
[bit23 to bit17] CHE7 to CHE0 (Cache Enable 7 to Cache Enable 0)
These bits enable and disable each chip select area for transfers to the built-in cache.
Table 4.2-37 Cache area setting
174
CHEn
Cache area setting
0
Not a cache area (data read from the applicable area is not saved in the cache)
1
Cache area (data read from the applicable area is saved in the cache)
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.9
Pin/Timing Control Register (TCR)
This section explains the configuration and functions of the pin/timing control register
and its function.
■ Configuration of the Pin/Timing Control Register (TCR)
The pin/timing control register (TCR: Terminal and Timiting Control Register) controls the
functions related to the general external bus interface controller, such as the setting of common
pin functions and timing control.
Figure 4.2-9 shows the configuration of the pin/timing control register (TCR).
Figure 4.2-9 Configuration of the Pin/Timing Control Register (TCR)
Address bit
7
000683H
BREN
6
PSUS
5
4
3
PCLR Reserved OHT1
2
OHT0
1
RDW1
0
RDW0
Initial value
00000000B (INIT)
0000XXXXB (RST)
Access
R/W
■ Functions of Bits in the Pin/Timing Control Register (TCR)
The following explains the functions of the bits in the pin/timing control register (TCR).
[bit7] BREN (BRQ Enable)
This bit enables BRQ pin input and external bus sharing.
Table 4.2-38 BRQ input enable setting
BREN
BRQ input enable setting
0
No bus sharing by BRQ/BGRNT. BRQ input is disabled.
1
Bus sharing by BRQ/BGRNT. BRQ input is enabled.
In the initial state ("0"), BRQ input is ignored. When "1" is set, the bus is made open (control
with high impedance) and BGRNT is activated ("L" level is output) when the bus is ready to be
made open after the BRQ input becomes "H" level.
[bit6] PSUS (Prefetch suspend)
This bit controls temporary stopping of prefetch to all areas.
Table 4.2-39 Function of prefetch control
PSUS
Prefetch control
0
Enable prefetch
1
Suspend prefetch
If "1" is set, no new prefetch operation is performed before "0" is written. Since during this time
the contents of the prefetch buffer are not deleted unless a prefetch buffer occurs, clear the
prefetch buffer using the PCLR bit function (bit5) before restarting prefetch.
175
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit5] PCLR (Prefetch buffer clear)
This bit completely clears the prefetch buffer.
Table 4.2-40 Function of prefetch buffer control
PCLR
Prefetch buffer control
0
Normal state
1
Clear the prefetch buffer.
If "1" is written, the prefetch buffer is cleared completely. When clearing is completed, the bit
value automatically returns to "0". Interrupt (set to "1") the prefetch by the PSUS bit and then
clear the buffer (It is also possible to write 11B to both the PSUS and PCLR bits).
[bit4 to bit2] (Reserved)
These bits are reserved. Be sure to set it to "0".
[bit1, bit0] RDW1, RDW0 (Reduce Wait cycle)
These bits instruct all chip select areas and fly-by I/O channels to reduce only the number of
auto-wait cycles in the auto-access cycle wait settings uniformly while the AWR register
settings are retained unchanged. The settings for idle cycles, recovery cycles, setup, and
hold cycles are not affected. They do not function in the SDRAM control areas either. Table
4.2-41 lists the settings for the wait cycle reduction for combinations of these bits.
Table 4.2-41 Settings for Wait Cycle Reduction
RDW1
RDW0
Wait cycle reduction
0
0
Normal wait (AWR0 to AWR7 settings)
0
1
1/2 (1-bit shift to the right) of the AWR0 to AWR7 settings
1
0
1/4 (2-bit shift to the right) of the AWR0 to AWR7 settings
1
1
1/8 (3-bit shift to the right) of the AWR0 to AWR7 settings
The purpose of this function is to prevent an excessive access cycle wait during operation on a
low-speed clock (for example, when the base clock is switched to low speed or the frequency
division ratio setting of the external bus clock is large).
To reset the wait cycle in these cases, each of the AWRs must usually be rewritten one at a
time. However, when the RDW1/RDW0 bit function is used, the access cycle wait is reduced for
all of the AWRs in a single operation while all of the other high-speed clock settings in each
register are retained.
Before returning the clock to high speed, be sure to reset the RDW1/RDW0 bits to "00B".
176
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.2.10 Refresh Control Register (RCR)
This section describes the bit configuration and functions of the refresh control
register (RCR).
■ Structure of the Refresh Control Register (RCR)
The refresh control register (RCR) is used to make various refresh control settings for SDRAM.
The setting of this register is meaningless as long as SDRAM control is not set for any area, in
that case the register value must not be updated from the initial state.
When read by a read-modify-write instruction, the SELF, RRLD, and PON bits always return to
"0".
Figure 4.2-10 shows the bit configuration of the refresh control register (RCR).
Figure 4.2-10 Structure of the Refresh Control Register (RCR)
RCRH
bit 31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Initial value
Address 000684H
SELF RRLD RFINT5 RFINT4 RFINT3 RFINT2 RFINT1 RFINT0 00XXXXXXB (INIT)
00XXXXXXB (RST)
RCRL
bit 23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Address 000685H
BRST RFC2 RFC1 RFC0 PON TRC2 TRC1 TRC0 XXXX0XXXB (INIT)
XXXX0XXXB (RST)
Access
R/W
R/W
177
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Bit Functions of the Refresh Control Register (RCR)
The following summarizes the functions of individual bits in the refresh control register (RCR).
[bit31] SELF (SELF refresh assert): Self-refresh control
This bit is used to control the self-refresh mode for memory that supports the self-refresh
mode.
Table 4.2-42 lists the settings for self-refresh control.
Table 4.2-42 Settings for Self-refresh Control
SELF
Self-refresh control
0
Auto-refresh or power-down
1
Transition to self-refresh mode
Setting the bit to "1" performs a self-refresh after issuing the SELF command. Writing "0"
terminates the self-refresh mode.
To hold the contents of SDRAM when putting the LSI into stop mode, use this bit to enter the
self-refresh mode before entering the stop mode. At this time, centralized refreshing is
performed before transition to the self-refresh mode. External access requests generated before
it is completed are put on hold. The mode transits to the stop mode.
The device is released from the self-refresh mode either when "0" is written to this bit or access
to SDRAM occurs. At this time, centralized refreshing is performed immediately after the
release. If external access such as SDRAM access is attempted, therefore, the external access
request is kept on hold and the CPU stops operation for a while. An attempt to put the LSI into
the stop mode when it cannot enter the self-refresh mode causes it to directly enter the power
save mode, resulting in corruption of data in SDRAM.
When read by a Read-modify-Write instruction, the SELF, RRLD, and PON bits always return to
"0".
[bit30] RRLD (Refresh counter ReLoaD): Refresh counter start control
This bit is used to start and reload the fresh counter.
Table 4.2-43 shows the function of refresh counter startup control.
Table 4.2-43 Function of Refresh Counter Startup Control
RRLD
Refresh counter startup control
0
Disable (no operation)
1
Execute auto-refreshing once and reload the RFINT value.
The refresh counter is inactive in the initial state.
If this bit is set to "1" in this state, all the SDRAM areas currently enabled in the CSER are autorefreshed either once in distributed refresh mode or the RFC-specified number of times in
centralized refresh mode. After that, the values in the RFINT5 to RFINT0 bits are reloaded.
From then on, the refresh counter starts being decremented. Whenever the counter causes an
underflow from "000000B", repeatedly, the values in the RFINT5 to RFINT0 bits are reloaded
while at the same time auto-refreshing is performed once.
The bit returns to "0" upon completion of reloading.
To stop auto-refreshing, write "000000B" to the RFINT5 to RFINT0 bits.
When read by a Read-modify-Write instruction, the bit always returns "0".
178
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit29 to bit24] RFINT5 to RFINT0 (ReFresh INTerval): Auto-refresh interval
Set these bits to the interval for automatic refreshing.
The auto-refresh interval can be obtained for distributed refresh mode {(REFINT5 to
REFINT0 value) x 32 x (external bus clock cycle)} or for centralized refresh mode {(REFINT5
to REFINT0 value) x 32 x (RFC specified number of times) x (external bus clock cycle)}
Calculate the design value in consideration of the maximum RAS active time.
To stop the auto refresh function, write "000000B" to the RFINT5 to REFINT0 bits.
The refresh counter keeps on being decremented even while the auto-refresh command is
being issued.
[bit23] BRST (BuRST refresh select): Burst refresh control
This bit is used to control the operation mode for auto-refreshing.
Table 4.2-44 shows the function of burst refresh control.
Table 4.2-44 Function of Burst Refresh Control
BRST
Burst refresh control
0
Distributed refresh (Auto-refresh is activated at intervals.)
1
Burst refresh (Auto-refresh is activated repeatedly at one time.)
When distributed refreshing is set, the auto-refresh command is issued once at every refresh
interval.
When burst refreshing is set, the auto-refresh command is issued continuously for the number
of times set in the refresh counter at every refresh interval.
[bit22 to bit20] RFC2, RFC1, RFC0 (ReFresh Count): Refresh count
Set these bits to the number of times a refresh must be performed to refresh all SDRAM.
Table 4.2-45 shows the number of times to refresh.
Table 4.2-45 Number of Times to Refresh
RFC2
RFC1
RFC0
Number of times to refresh
0
0
0
256
0
0
1
512
0
1
0
1024
0
1
1
2048
1
0
0
4096
1
0
1
8192
1
1
0
Setting prohibited
1
1
1
Refresh prohibited
The number of times to refresh specified here is the number of times centralized refreshing is
performed before and after transition to the self-refresh mode. When burst refreshing has been
selected with the BRST bit, the number of times to refresh is also the number of times the
refresh command is issued at every refresh interval.
179
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
[bit19] PON (Power ON): Power-on control
This bit is used to control the SDRAM (FCRAM) power-on sequence.
Table 4.2-46 shows the function of power-on control.
Table 4.2-46 Function of Power-on Control
PON
Power-on control
0
Disabled (no-operation)
1
Start power-on sequence
Writing "1" to the PON bit starts the SDRAM power-on sequence.
Before starting the power-on sequence, be sure to set the relevant registers such as AWR,
MCRA(B), and CSER.
This bit returns to "0" as soon as the power-on sequence is started.
When enabling the PON bit, set RFINT and enable RRLD to activate the refresh counter.
Refreshing is not performed only with the PON bit.
Do not enable this bit along with the SELF bit.
When read by a Read-modify-Write instruction, the bit always returns "0".
[bit18 to bit16] TRC2, TRC1, TRC0 (Time of Refresh Cycle): Refresh cycle (tRC)
These bits set the refresh cycle (tRC).
Table 4.2-47 lists the settings for the refresh cycle (tRC).
Table 4.2-47 Settings for the Refresh Cycle (tRC)
180
TRC2
TRC1
TRC0
Refresh cycle (tRC)
0
0
0
4
0
0
1
5
0
1
0
6
0
1
1
7
1
0
0
8
1
0
1
9
1
1
0
10
1
1
1
11
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.3
Setting Example of the Chip Select Area
In the external bus interface, a total of eight chip select areas can be set.
This section presents an example of setting the chip select area.
■ Example of Setting the Chip Select Area
The address space of each area can be placed, in units of a minimum of 64K bytes, anywhere
in the 4 Gbytes space using ASR0 to ASR7 (Area Select Registers) and ACR0 to ACR7 (Area
Configuration Registers). When bus access is made to an area specified by these registers, the
corresponding chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) are activated ("L" output) during the access
cycle.
❍ Example of setting ASRs and ASZ3 to ASZ0
•
ASR1=0003H ACR1 ASZ3 to ASZ0=0000B: Chip select area 1 is assigned to 00030000H to
0003FFFFH.
•
ASR2=0FFCH ACR2 ASZ3 to ASZ0=0010B: Chip select area 2 is assigned to 0FFC0000H to
0FFFFFFFH.
•
ASR3=0011H ACR3 ASZ3 to ASZ0=0100B: Chip select area 3 is assigned to 00100000H to
001FFFFFH.
Since at this point 1M bytes is set for bits ASZ3 to ASZ0 of the ACR, the unit for boundaries 1
Mbyte and bit19 to bit16 of ASR3 are ignored. Before there is any writing to ACR0 after a reset,
00000000H to FFFFFFFFH is assigned to chip select area 0.
Set the chip select areas so that there is no overlap.
Figure 4.3-1 shows an example of setting the chip select area.
Figure 4.3-1 Example of Setting the Chip Select Area
(Initial value)
00000000H
(Example)
00000000H
00030000H
Area 1
64 Kbytes
Area 3
1 Mbytes
Area 2
256 Kbytes
0003FFFFH
00100000H
Area 0
001FFFFFH
0FFC0000H
0FFFFFFFH
FFFFFFFFH
FFFFFFFFH
181
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.4
Endian and Bus Access
There is a one-to-one correspondence between the WR0 to WR3 control signal and the
byte location regardless of the data bus width. The following summarizes the location
of bytes on the data bus of the FR family used according to the specified data bus
width and the corresponding control signal for each bus mode.
■ Relationship between Data Bus Width and Control Signal
This section summarizes the location of bytes on the data bus used according to the specified
data bus width and the corresponding control signal for each bus mode.
❍ Ordinary bus interface
Figure 4.4-1 Data Bus Width and Control Signal on the Ordinary Bus Interface
a) 32-bit bus width
Data bus Control signal
D31
D0
b) 16-bit bus width
c) 8-bit bus width
Data bus
Data bus
Control signal
Control signal
WR0
(UUB)
WR0
(UUB)
WR1
(ULB)
WR1
(ULB)
-
-
WR0
(UUB)
WR2
(LUB)
-
-
-
-
WR3
(LLB)
-
-
-
-
(D15 to D0 are not used)
(D23 to D0 are not used)
❍ Time division I/O interface
Figure 4.4-2 Data Bus Width and Control Signal in the Time Division I/O Interface
b) 8-bit bus width
a) 16-bit bus width
Data bus
D31
Output
address
Control signal
Data bus Output
address
A7 to A0
Control signal
A15 to A8
WR0
WR0
A7 to A0
WR1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D16
(D15 to D0 are not used)
182
(D23 to D0 are not used)
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ SDRAM (FCRAM) Interface
Figure 4.4-3 Data Bus Width of the SDRAM (FCRAM) Interface and Its Control Signals
a)32-bit bus width
Data bus
b)16-bit bus width
c)8-bit bus width
Control signal Data bus Control signal Data bus Control signal
D31
DQMUU
DQMUU
DQMUL
DQMUL
-
-
DQMUU
DQMLU
-
-
-
-
DQMLL
-
-
-
-
D0
(D15 to D0 are not used.)
(D23 to D0 are not used.)
183
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.4.1
Big Endian Bus Access
With the exception of the CS0 area of the FR family, either the big endian method or
the little endian method can be selected for each chip select area. If "0" is set for the
LEND bit of the ACR register, the area is treated as big endian. The FR family is
normally big endian and performs external bus access.
■ Data Format
The relationship between the internal register and the external data bus is as follows:
❍ Word access (when LD/ST instruction executed)
Figure 4.4-4 Relationship between Internal Register and External Data Bus for Word Access
Internal register External register
D31
D31
AA
AA
BB
BB
CC
CC
D23
D23
D15
D15
D7
D7
DD
DD
D0
D0
❍ Halfword access (LDUH/STH instruction executed)
Figure 4.4-5 Relationship between the Internal Register and External Data Bus for Halfword Access
a) Output address low-order
digits "00B"
b) Output address low-order
digits "10B"
Internal register External bus
Internal register External bus
D31
D31
D31
D31
D23
D23
D23
D15
D15
AA
D23
BB
D15
AA
D7
D7
184
D0
AA
BB
BB
D7
BB
D0
D15
AA
D0
D7
D0
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ Byte access (LDUB/STB instruction executed)
Figure 4.4-6 Relationship between Internal Register and External Data Bus for Byte Access
a) Output address
low-order digits "00B"
Internal
register
b) Output address
c) Output address
d) Output address
low-order digits "01B"
low-order digits "10B"
low-order digits "11B"
External
bus
Internal
register
External
bus
D31 D31
D31
Internal
register
External
bus
Internal
register
External
bus
D31 D31
D31 D31
D31
D23 D23
D23 D23
D23
D15 D15
D15
AA
D23
D23 D23
AA
D15
D15 D15
D15 D15
AA
D7
D7
D7
AA
D7
D7
AA
D0
D0
D7
D7
AA
D0
D0
D7
AA
D0
D0
D0
AA
D0
■ Data Bus Width
❍ 32-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-7 Relationship between Internal Register and External Bus Having 32-bit Bus Width
Internal register
D31
D23
D15
D07
AA
Read/Write
External bus
AA
D31
D23
BB
BB
CC
CC
DD
DD D07
D15
❍ 16-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-8 Relationship between Internal Register and External Bus Having 16-Bit Bus Width
Internal register
External bus
Output address low-order digits
"00B" "10B"
D31
AA
D23
D15
BB
read/write
AA
CC
BB
DD
D31
D23
CC
D07 DD
185
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ 8-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-9 Relationship between Internal Register and External Bus Having 8-bit Bus Width
Internal register
External bus
Output address low-order digits
"00B" "01B" "10B" "11B"
read/write
D31
AA BB CC
DD D31
AA
D23
BB
D15
CC
D07 DD
186
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ External Bus Access
Figure 4.4-10, Figure 4.4-11 and Figure 4.4-12 show external bus access (32-bit/16-bit/8-bit bus
width) separately for word, halfword, and byte access. The following items are included in
Figure 4.4-10, Figure 4.4-11 and Figure 4.4-12:
•
Access byte location
•
Program address and output address
•
Bus access count
PA1/PA0
:
Lower 2 bits of address specified by program
Output A1/A0
:
Lower 2 bits of output address
:
The top byte location of output address
+
:
The data byte location to access
(1) to (4)
:
Bus access count
The FR family does not detect misalignment errors.
Therefore, for word access, the lower two bits of the output address are always "00B" regardless
of whether "00B", "01B", "10B", or "11B" is specified as the lower 2 bits by the program. For
halfword access, the lower 2 bits of the output address are "00B" if the lower two bits specified
by the program are "00B" or "01B", and are "10B" if "10B" or "11B".
❍ 32-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-10 External Bus Access for 32-bit Bus Width
(A) Word Access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
→(1) Output A1/A0=00B
→(1) Output A1/A0=00B
→(1) Output A1/A0=00B
→(1) Output A1/A0=00B
MSB
LSB
(1)
(1)
(1)
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
(1)
11
00
01
10
00
11
01
10
11
32bits
(B) Halfword Access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
→(1) Output A1/A0=00B
→(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
→(1) Output A1/A0=10B
→(1) Output A1/A0=10B
(1)
(1)
(1)
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
(1)
11
00
01
10
00
11
01
10
11
(C) Byte Access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
→(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
→(1) Output A1/A0=01B
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
→(1) Output A1/A0=10B
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
→(1) Output A1/A0=11B
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
187
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ 16-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-11 External Bus Access for 16-bit Bus Width
(A) Word access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(2) Output A1/A0=10B
(2) Output A1/A0=10B
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(2) Output A1/A0=10B
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(2) Output A1/A0=10B
LSB
MSB
(1)
00
01
(1)
00
01
(1)
00
01
(1)
00
01
(2)
10
11
(2)
10
11
(2)
10
11
(2)
10
11
16bits
(B) Halfword access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1)
00
01
10
11
(1)
00
01
10
11
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1)
00
01
10
11
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1)
00
01
10
11
(C) Byte access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1)
188
00
01
10
11
(1)
00
01
10
11
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1)
00
01
10
11
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(1)
00
01
10
11
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ 8-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-12 External Bus Access for 8-bit Bus Width
(A) Word access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(2) Output A1/A0=01B
(3) Output A1/A0=10B
(4) Output A1/A0=11B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(2) Output A1/A0=01B
(3) Output A1/A0=10B
(4) Output A1/A0=11B
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
(1) Output
(2) Output
(3) Output
(4) Output
A1/A0=00B
A1/A0=01B
A1/A0=10B
A1/A0=11B
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(2) Output A1/A0=01B
(3) Output A1/A0=10B
(4) Output A1/A0=11B
MSB LSB
(1)
00
(1)
00
(1)
00
(1)
00
(2)
01
(2)
01
(2)
01
(2)
01
(3)
10
(3)
10
(3)
10
(3)
10
(4)
11
(4)
11
(4)
11
(4)
11
8bit
(B) Halfword access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(2) Output A1/A0=01B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(2) Output A1/A0=01B
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
(1) Output A1/A0=10B
(2) Output A1/A0=11B
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
(1) Output A1/A0=10B
(2) Output A1/A0=11B
(1)
00
(1)
00
00
00
(2)
01
(2)
01
01
01
10
10
(1)
10
(1)
10
11
11
(2)
11
(2)
11
(C) Byte access
(a) PA1/PA0=00B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
(b) PA1/PA0=01B
(1) Output A1/A0=00B
00
00
00
00
01
01
01
10
10
(1)
01
(1)
10
10
11
11
(c) PA1/PA0=10B
(1) Output A1/A0=10B
(1)
11
(d) PA1/PA0=11B
(1) Output A1/A0=11B
(1)
11
189
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Example of Connection with External Devices
Figure 4.4-13 shows an example of connecting the FR family to external devices.
Figure 4.4-13 Example of Connecting the FR Family to External Devices
MB91301 series
D07
D31
D23
D15
to
to
to
to
D24
D16
D08
D00
WR3
WR0
WR1
WR2
00
01
10
11
D31 D24 D23 D16 D15 D08 D07
32-bit device
(low-order 2 bits of
the address 00 to 11)
190
* For 16-/8-bit devices, use the data bus on
the MSB side of MB91301
. series
0
D00
D15
1
D08 D07 D00
16-bit device *
(low-order 1 bit of
the address 0/1)
0
D07
D00
8-bit device *
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.4.2
Little Endian Bus Access
On the FR family, each chip can switch between the big endian and little endian
methods independently from others, except the CS0 area. When the LEND bit in the
area configuration register (ACR) is set to "1", the corresponding area is handled in
the little endian method.
Little endian bus access on the FR family is implemented by using the bus access
operation used for the big endian method. Basically, the order of output addresses and
control signal output are the same as for the big endian method and the byte locations
on the data bus are swapped in accordance with the bus width.
Note that, when a connection is made, the big endian area and the little endian area
must be kept physically separate.
■ Differences between Little Endian and Big Endian
The following explains the differences between little endian and big endian.
•
The order of addresses that are output is the same for little endian and big endian.
•
Word access
The byte data on the MSB side for big endian address A1 and A0 "00B" becomes byte data on
the LSB side when the little endian method is used.
For a word access, the locations of all four bytes in the word are reversed:
•
Halfword access
The byte data on the MSB side for the big endian address "A0" becomes byte data on the LSB
side when the little endian method is used.
For halfword access, the byte locations of two bytes in the halfword are reversed.
•
Byte access
There is no difference between little endian and big endian.
•
The data bus/control signal used for 32/16/8-bit bus width is the same for little endian and big
endian.
■ Restrictions on the Little Endian Area
•
If prefetch is enabled for a little endian area, always use word access to access the area. If
data written to the prefetch buffer is accessed with any length other than word length, the
correct endian conversion is not performed and the wrong data will be read. The reason is
hardware restrictions related to the endian conversion mechanism.
•
Do not place any instruction code in a little endian area.
191
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Data Format
The relationship between the internal register and external data bus is as follows:
❍ Word access (when executing the LD/ST instructions)
Figure 4.4-14 Relationship between the Internal Register and External Data Bus for Word Access
Internal register
D31
AA
D23
BB
D15
CC
D7
DD
D0
External bus
D31
DD
D23
CC
D15
BB
D7
AA
D0
❍ Halfword access (when executing the LDUH/STH instructions)
Figure 4.4-15 Relationship between Internal Register and External Data Bus for Halfword Access
a) Output address low-order digits "00B"
Internal register External bus
D31
Internal register External bus
D31
D31
D31
D23
D23
D23
D15
D15
D15
D7
D7
BB
D23
b) Output address low-order digits "10B"
AA
D15
AA
D7
BB
D0
D0
AA
BB
BB
AA
D7
D0
D0
❍ Byte access (when executing the LDUB/STB instructions)
Figure 4.4-16 Relationship between Internal Register and External Data Bus for Byte Access
a) Output address
b) Output address
c) Output address
low-order digits "01B"
low-order digits "10B"
low-order digits "00B"
Internal
External
Internal
External
Internal
External
register
bus
register
bus
register
bus
D31 D31
D31 D31
D31
D31
AA
D23
D23 D23
D23 D23
D23
AA
D15
D15 D15
D15 D15
D15
AA
D7
D7
D7
D7 D7
D7
AA
AA
AA
D0
D0
D0
D0 D0
D0
192
d) Output address
low-order digits "11B"
Internal
External
register
bus
D31
D31
D23
D23
D15
D15
D7
D7
AA
D0
AA
D0
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Data Bus Width
The following shows the relationships between the internal register and external data bus for
each data bus width.
❍ 32-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-17 Relationship between Internal Register and External Bus Data for 32-bit Bus Width
Internal register
D31
D23
D15
D07
AA
External bus
Read/Write
DD
BB
CC
CC
BB
DD
AA
D31
D23
D15
D07
❍ 16-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-18 Relationship between Internal Register and External Bus Data for 16-bit Bus Width
Internal register
External bus
Output address low-order digits
"00B" "10B"
D31
D31
AA
read/write
DD BB
D23 BB
D23
CC AA
D15 CC
D07 DD
❍ 8-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-19 Relationship between the Internal Register and External Data Bus in the 8-bit Bus Width
Internal register
Output address low-order digits
External bus
"00B" "01B" "10B" "11B"
D31
D23
AA
read/write
DD
CC
BB
AA
D31
BB
D15
CC
D07
DD
193
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Examples of Connection with External Devices
The following shows examples of connecting the FR family to external devices for each bus
width.
❍ 32-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-20 Example of Connecting the FR Family to External Devices (32-bit Bus Width)
MB91301 series
D31
to
D24
D23
to
D16
D15
to
D08
WR1
WR0
00
01
D07
to
D00
WR2
10
WR3
11
11
10
01
00
D31 D24 D23 D16 D15 D08 D07 D00
D31 D24 D23 D16 D15 D08 D07 D00
big endian area
little endian area
❍ 16-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-21 Example of Connecting the FR Family to External Devices (16-bit Bus Width)
MB91301 series
D23
D31
to
to
D24
D16
WR0
WR1
0
1
D15 D08 D07 D00
big endian area
194
0
1
D15 D08 D07 D00
little endian area
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ 8-bit bus width
Figure 4.4-22 Example of Connecting the FR Family to External Devices (8-bit Bus Width)
MB91301 series
D31
to
D24
WR0
D07 D00
big endian area
D07 D00
little endian area
195
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.4.3
Comparison of Big Endian and Little Endian External
Access
This section shows a comparison of big endian and little endian external access in
word access, halfword access, and byte access for each bus width.
When data bus is connected according to examples of connecting to external devices
as shown in Sections "4.4.1 Big Endian Bus Access" and "4.4.2 Little Endian Bus
Access", all accesses become big endian for the internal register as follows.
The following figures describe big endian area and little endian area separately.
■ Word Access
Big endian mode
Internal
register
External
terminal
Little endian mode
Control
terminal
Internal
register
address: Lower 2-bit: "0"
D31
32-bit bus
width
External
terminal
address : "0"
D31
D31
D31
AA
DD
WR0
AA
AA
WR0
BB
BB
WR1
BB
CC
WR1
CC
CC
WR2
CC
BB
WR2
DD
WR3
DD
AA
DD
D00
D00
D00
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0" "2"
D31
D31
AA
AA CC
BB
BB DD
(1)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0" "2"
Control
terminal
D31
WR0
AA
WR1
BB
D16
(1)
CC AA
WR1
(1)
Control
terminal
AA BB CC DD
(2)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0" "1" "2" "3"
D31
D31
AA
D00
(2)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0" "1" "2" "3"
WR0
D31
AA
DD CC BB AA
D24
D24
BB
BB
CC
CC
DD
DD
196
WR0
DD
DD
D00
DD BB
CC
D00
8-bit bus
width
D31
Control
terminal
D16
D16
CC
D31
WR3
D00
(1)
16-bit bus
width
Control
terminal
(1) (2) (3) (4)
D00
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Control
terminal
WR0
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Halfword Access
Big endian mode
Internal
register
External
terminal
Little endian mode
Control
terminal
Internal
register
address : "0"
D31
D31
D31
AA
WR0
BB
WR0
BB
WR1
AA
WR1
AA
AA
BB
BB
D00
D00
D00
(1)
(1)
32-bit bus
width
Internal
register
External
terminal
Control
terminal
Internal
register
address : "2"
D31
DD
D31
CC
WR2
DD
WR3
D00
Control
terminal
D31
CC
DD
D00
(1)
External
terminal
address : "2"
D31
CC
D00
Control
terminal
address : "0"
D31
D00
External
terminal
DD
WR2
CC
WR3
D00
(1)
197
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
Big endian mode
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0"
D31
D31
Little endian mode
Control
terminal
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0"
D31
AA
WR0
BB
WR1
D31
WR0
A
WR1
AA
AA
BB
BB
D00
D00
(1)
(1)
16-bit bus
width
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "2"
D31
D31
Control
terminal
CC
WR0
DD
WR1
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "2"
D31
D31
D16
Control
terminal
CC
WR0
DD
WR1
D16
CC
CC
DD
DD
D00
D00
(1)
(1)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0" "1"
D31
D31
AA BB
D24
Control
terminal
WR0
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0" "1"
D31
D31
BB AA
D24
AA
Control
terminal
WR0
AA
BB
D00
BB
D00
D00
(1)
8-bit bus
width
D00
(2)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "2" "3"
D31
D31
CC DD
D24
(1)
Control
terminal
WR0
(2)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "2" "3"
D31
D31
DD CC
D24
CC
CC
DD
DD
D00
D00
(1)
198
B
D16
D16
D00
Control
terminal
(2)
D00
(1)
(2)
Control
terminal
WR0
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Byte Access
Big endian mode
Internal
register
External
terminal
Little endian mode
Internal
register
Control
terminal
address : "0"
D31
D31
D31
AA
WR0
D00
D00
D00
(1)
(1)
Internal
register
External
terminal
Control
terminal
Internal
register
address : "1"
D31
BB
External
terminal
D31
BB
WR1
D00
D00
D00
(1)
(1)
Internal
register
External
terminal
Internal
register
Control
terminal
D31
D31
CC
CC
D00
(1)
(1)
Internal
register
External
terminal
Control
terminal
Internal
register
address : "3"
D31
DD
(1)
Control
terminal
D31
DD
DD
WR3
D00
D00
External
terminal
address : "3"
D31
DD
D00
WR2
CC
D00
D00
D31
Control
terminal
D31
WR2
CC
D00
External
terminal
address : "2"
address : "2"
D31
WR1
BB
BB
32-bit bus
width
Control
terminal
address : "1"
D31
D00
WR0
AA
AA
D00
D31
Control
terminal
address : "0"
D31
AA
External
terminal
WR3
D00
(1)
199
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
Big endian mode
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0"
D31
D31
AA
Little endian mode
Control
terminal
WR0
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0"
D31
D31
AA
D16
WR0
D16
AA
AA
D00
D00
(1)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "1"
D31
D31
BB
(1)
Control
terminal
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "1"
D31
D31
BB
WR1
D16
Control
terminal
WR1
D16
BB
BB
D00
D00
(1)
16-bit bus
width
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "2"
D31
D31
CC
(1)
Control
terminal
WR0
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "2"
D31
D31
CC
D16
Control
terminal
WR0
D16
CC
CC
D00
D00
(1)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "3"
D31
D31
DD
(1)
Control
terminal
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "3"
D31
D31
DD
WR1
D16
D16
DD
DD
D00
D00
(1)
200
Control
terminal
(1)
Control
terminal
WR1
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
Big endian mode
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0"
D31
D31
AA
Little endian mode
Control
terminal
WR0
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "0"
D31
D31
AA
D24
Control
terminal
WR0
D24
AA
AA
D00
D00
(1)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "1"
D31
D31
BB
(1)
Control
terminal
WR0
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "1"
D31
D31
BB
D24
Control
terminal
WR0
D24
BB
BB
D00
D00
(1)
8-bit bus
width
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "2"
D31
D31
CC
(1)
Control
terminal
WR0
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "2"
D31
D31
CC
D24
Control
terminal
WR0
D24
CC
CC
D00
D00
(1)
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "3"
D31
D31
DD
(1)
Control
terminal
WR0
Internal
External
register
terminal
address: "3"
D31
D31
DD
D24
Control
terminal
WR0
D24
DD
DD
D00
D00
(1)
(1)
201
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5
Operation of the Ordinary Bus Interface
This section explains operation of the ordinary bus interface.
■ Ordinary Bus Interface
For the ordinary bus interface, two clock cycles are the basic bus cycles for both read access
and write access.
The following operational phases of the ordinary bus interface are explained below with the use
of a timing chart.
202
•
Basic timing (for successive accesses)
•
WRn + byte control type
•
Read -> write
•
Write -> write
•
Auto-wait cycle
•
External wait cycle
•
Synchronous write enable output
•
CSn delay setting
•
CSn -> RD/WRn setup, RD/WRn -> CSn hold setting
•
DMA fly-by transfer (I/O -> memory)
•
DMA fly-by transfer (memory -> I/O)
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.1
Basic Timing
This section shows the basic timing for successive accesses.
■ Basic Timing (For Successive Accesses)
Figure 4.5-1 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0 = 0000B, AWR = 0008H).
Figure 4.5-1 Basic Timing (For Successive Accesses)
MCLK
A31 to A00
#2
#1
AS
CSn
RD
READ
D31 to D00
#1
#2
WRn
WRITE
D31 to D00
#1
#2
•
AS is asserted for one cycle in the bus access start cycle.
•
A31 to A00 continues to output the address of the location of the start byte in word/halfword/
byte access from the bus access start cycle to the bus access end cycle.
•
If the W02 bit of the AWR0 to AWR7 registers is "0", CS0 to CS7 are asserted at the same
timing as AS. For successive accesses, CS0 to CS7 are not negated. If the W00 bit of the
AWR register is "0", CS0 to CS7 are negated after the bus cycle ends. If the W00 bit is "1",
CS0 to CS7 are negated one cycle after bus access ends.
•
RD and WR0 to WR3 are asserted from the 2nd cycle of the bus access. Negation occurs
after the wait cycle of bits W15 to W12 of the AWR register is inserted. The timing of
asserting RD and WR0 to WR3 can be delayed by one cycle by setting the W01 bit of the
AWR register to "1".
•
If a setting is made so that WR0 to WR3 is used like TYP3 to TYP0=0x0xB, WRn is always
"H".
•
For read access, D31 to D00 is read when MCLK rises in the cycle in which the wait cycle
ended after RD was asserted.
•
For write access, data output to D31 to D00 starts at the timing at which WR0 to WR3 are
asserted.
203
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.2
Operation of WRn + Byte Control Type
This section shows the operation timing for the WRn + byte control type.
■ Operation Timing of the WRn + Byte Control Type
Figure 4.5-2 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0 = 0010B, AWR = 0008H).
Figure 4.5-2 Timing Chart for the WRn + Byte Control Type
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
WR0,WR1
READ
WR2,WR3
D31 to D00
WR
WR0,WR1
WRITE
WR2,WR3
D31 to D00
204
•
Operation of AS, CS, RD, A31 to A00, and D31 to D00 is the same as that described in
"4.5.1 Basic Timing".
•
WR is asserted from the 2nd cycle of the bus access. Negation occurs after the wait cycle of
bits W15 to W12 of the AWR register is inserted. The timing of asserting RD and WR0 to
WR3 can be delayed by one cycle by setting the W01 bit of the AWR register to "1".
(Operation is the same as that for WR0 to WR3 described in "4.5.1 Basic Timing".)
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
•
WR0 to WR3 indicate the byte location expressed with negative logic when they are used for
access as the byte enable signal. Assertion continues from the bus access start cycle to the
bus access end cycle and changes at the same timing as the address timing. The byte
location for access is indicated for both read access and write access.
•
For write access, data output to D31 to D00 starts at the timing at which WR0 is asserted. If
the areas defined by TYP3 to TYP0=0x0xB (WR0 to WR3 used) and TYP3 to TYP0=0x1xB
(WRn + byte control) are mixed, be sure to make the following setting for all areas that will
be used. (For details, see "4.13 Notes on Using the External Bus Interface".)
•
Set at least one read -> write idle cycle.
•
Set at least one write recovery cycle.
205
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.3
Read -> Write Operation
This section shows the operating timing for read -> write.
■ Operation Timing of Read -> Write
Figure 4.5-3 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0048H).
Figure 4.5-3 Timing Chart for Read -> Write
Read
Idle
Write
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
WRn
D31 to D00
206
•
Setting of the W07/W06 bits of the AWR register enables 0 to 3 idle cycles to be inserted.
•
Settings in the CS area on the read side are enabled.
•
This idle cycle is inserted if the next access after a read access is write access or access to
another area.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.4
Write -> Write Operation
This section shows the operation timing for write -> write.
■ Write -> Write Operation
Figure 4.5-4 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0018H).
Figure 4.5-4 Timing Chart for the Write -> Write Operation
Read
Write recovery
Write
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
WRn
D31 to D00
•
Setting of the W05/W04 bits of the AWR register enables 0 to 3 write recovery cycles to be inserted.
•
After all of the write cycles, recovery cycles are generated.
•
Write recovery cycles are also generated if write access is divided into phases for access
with a bus width wider than that specified.
207
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.5
Auto-Wait Cycle
This section shows the operation timing for the auto-wait cycle.
■ Auto-Wait Cycle Timing
Figure 4.5-5 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=2008H).
Figure 4.5-5 Timing Chart for the Auto-Wait Cycle
Basic cycle
Wait cycle
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
READ
D31 to D00
WRn
WRITE
D31 to D00
208
•
Setting of the W15 to W12 bits (first wait cycles) of the AWR register enables 0 to 15 autowait cycles to be set.
•
In Figure 4.5-5, two auto-wait cycles are inserted, making a total of four cycles for access. If
auto-wait is set, the minimum number of bus cycles is 2 cycles + (first wait cycles). For a
write operation, the minimum number of bus cycles may be still longer depending on the
internal state.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.6
External Wait Cycle
This section shows the operation timing for the external wait cycle.
■ External Wait Cycle Timing
Figure 4.5-6 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0=0001B, AWR=2008H).
Figure 4.5-6 Timing Chart for the External Wait Cycle
Basic cycle
2 auto-wait cycles Wait cycle by RDY
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
READ
D31 to D00
WRn
WRITE
D31 to D00
Release
RDY
Wait
•
Setting "1" for the TYP0 bit of the ACR register and enabling the external RDY input pin
enables external wait cycles to be inserted.
•
In Figure 4.5-6, the oblique-lined portion of the RDY pin is invalid because the wait based on
the automatic wait cycle remains in effect.
The value at the RDY input pin is evaluated from the last automatic wait cycle on.
Once a wait cycle is completed, the value at the RDY input pin remains invalid until the next
access cycle is started.
209
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.7
Synchronous Write Enable Output
This section shows the operation timing for synchronous write enable output.
■ Operation Timing for Synchronous Write Enable Output
Figure 4.5-7 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0000H).
Figure 4.5-7 Timing Chart for Synchronous Write Enable Output
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
Read
D31 to D00
WRn
Write
D31 to D00
If synchronous write enable output is enabled (If the W03 bit of the AWR is "1"), operation is as
follows.
210
•
WR0 to WR3 and WR pin output asserts synchronous write enable output at the timing at
which AS pin output is asserted. For a write to an external bus, the synchronous write enable
output is "L". For a read from an external bus, the synchronous write enable output is "H".
•
Write data is output from the external data output pin in the clock cycle following the cycle in
which synchronous write enable output is asserted.
•
Read strobe output (RD) functions as an asynchronous read strobe regardless of the setting
of WR0 to WR3 and WR output timing. Use it as is for controlling the data I/O.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
•
If synchronous write enable output is used, the following restrictions apply:
Do not set the following additional wait because the timing for synchronous write enable
output becomes meaningless:
- CS -> RD/WRn setup (Always write "0" to the W01 bit of AWR)
- First wait cycle setting (Always write "0000B" to bits W15 to W12 of AWR)
Do not set the following access types (TYP3 to TYP0 bits (bit3 to bit0) in the ACR register)
because the timing for synchronous write enable output becomes meaningless:
- Multiplex bus setting (Always write "0" to the TYP2 bit of ACR)
- RDY input enable setting (Always write "0" to the TYP0 bit of ACR)
Always set the burst length to "1" (BST1, BST0 bits = 0) for the synchronous write enable
output.
211
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.8
CSn Delay Setting
This section shows the operation timing for the CSn delay setting.
■ Operation Timing for the CSn Delay Setting
Figure 4.5-8 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=000CH).
Figure 4.5-8 Operation Timing Chart for the CSn Delay Setting
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
READ
D31 to D00
WRn
WRITE
D31 to D00
If the W02 bit is "1", assertion starts in the cycle following the cycle in which AS is asserted. For
successive accesses, a negation period is inserted.
212
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.9
CSn -> RD/WRn Setup and RD/WRn -> CSn Hold Setting
This section shows the operation timing for the CSn -> RD/WRn setup and RD/WRn ->
CSn hold settings.
■ Operation Timing for the CSn -> RD/WRn Setup and RD/WRn -> CSn Hold Settings
Figure 4.5-9 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B AWR=000BH).
Figure 4.5-9 Timing Chart for the CSn -> RD/WRn Setup and RD/WRn -> CSn Hold Settings
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
CS->RD/WR
Delay
RD/WR->CS
Delay
RD
READ
D31 to D00
WRn
WRITE
D31 to D00
•
Setting "1" for the W01 bit of the AWR register enables the CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay to
be set. Set this bit to extend the period between chip select assertion and read/write strobe.
•
Setting "1" for the W00 bit of the AWR register enables the RD/WRn -> CSn hold delay to be
set. Set this bit to extend the period between read/write strobe negation and chip select
negation.
•
The CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay (W01 bit) and RD/WRn -> CSn hold delay (W00 bit) can
be set independently.
•
When making successive accesses within the same chip select area without negating the
chip select, neither a CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay nor an RD/WRn -> CSn hold delay is
inserted.
•
If a setup cycle for determining the address or a hold cycle for determining the address is
needed, set "1" for the address -> CSn delay setting (W02 bit of the AWR register).
213
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.10 DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> Memory)
This section shows the operation timing for DMA fly-by transfer (I/O -> memory).
■ Operation Timing for DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> Memory)
Figure 4.5-10 shows the operation timing for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0008H, IOWR=51H).
This timing chart shows a case in which a wait is not set on the memory side.
Figure 4.5-10 Timing Chart for DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> Memory)
Basic cycle
I/O wait I/O hold I/O idle
cycle
wait
cycle
Basic cycle
I/O wait I/O hold
cycle
wait
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
WRn
D31 to D00
IORD
214
•
Setting "1" for the HLD bit of the IOWR0 to IOWR3 registers enables the I/O read cycle to be
extended by one cycle.
•
Setting bits IW3 to IW0 of the IOWR0 to IOWR3 registers enables 0 to 15 wait cycles to be
inserted.
•
If wait is also set on the memory side (AWR15 to AWR12 is not "0"), the larger value is used
as the wait cycle after comparison with the I/O wait (IW3 to IW0 bits).
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.5.11 DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory -> I/O)
This section shows the operation timing for DMA fly-by transfer (memory -> I/O).
■ Operation Timing for DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory -> I/O)
Figure 4.5-11 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0008H,
IOWR=51H). This timing chart shows a case in which a wait is not set on the memory side.
Figure 4.5-11 Timing Chart for DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory -> I/O)
Basic cycle
I/O wait I/O hold I/O idle
cycle
wait
cycle
Basic cycle
I/O wait I/O hold
cycle
wait
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
D31 to D00
IOWR
•
Setting "1" for the HLD bit of the IOWR0, IOWR1 registers enables the I/O read cycle to be
extended by one cycle.
•
Setting the WR1, WR0 bits of the IOWR0, IOWR1 registers enables 0 to 3 write recovery
cycles to be inserted.
•
If the write recovery cycle is set to "1" or more, a write recovery cycle is always inserted after
write access.
•
Setting bits IW3 to IW0 of the IOWR0,IOWR1 registers enables 0 to 15 wait cycles to be
inserted.
•
If wait is also set on the memory side (AWR15 to AWR12 is not "0"), the larger value is used
as the wait cycle after comparison with the I/O wait (IW3 to IW0 bits).
215
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.6
Burst Access Operation
In the external bus interface, the operation that transfers successive data items in one
access sequence is called burst access. The normal access cycle (that is, not burst
access) is called single access. One access sequence starts with an assertion of AS
and CSn and ends with negation of CSn. Multiple data items two or more units of data
of the unit set for the area.
This section explains burst access operation.
■ Burst Access Operation
Figure 4.6-1 shows the operation timing chart for (first wait cycle=1, inpage access wait cycle=1,
TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=1108H).
Figure 4.6-1 Timing Chart for Burst Access
First
cycle
wait
Inpage
access
wait
Inpage
access
wait
Inpage
access
wait
MCLK
A31 to A00
AS (LBA)
CSn
RD
WRn
WR
WRn
BAA
D31 to D00
216
•
In the external bus interface, the operation that transfers successive data items in one
access sequence is called burst access. The normal access cycle (that is, not burst access)
is called single access. One access sequence starts with an assertion of AS and CSn and
ends with negation of CSn. Multiple data items two or more units of data of the unit set for
the area.
•
In addition to more efficient use of access cycles when a sizable amount of data of
asynchronous memory such as page mode ROM and burst flash memory is read, burst
cycles can also be used for reading from normal asynchronous memory.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
•
The access sequence when burst cycles are used can be divided into the following two
types:
- First access cycle
The first access cycle is the start cycle for the burst access and operates in the same way as
the normal single access cycle.
- Page access cycle
The page access cycle is a cycle following the first access cycle in which both CSn and RD
(read strobe) are asserted. Wait cycles that are different from those set for a single cycle can
be set. The page access cycle is repeated while access remains in the address boundary
determined by the burst length setting. When access within the address boundary ends,
burst access terminates and CSn is negated.
•
Setting of the W15 to W12 bits of the AWR register enable the first 0 to 15 wait cycles to be
inserted. At this point, the minimum number of the first access cycles is the wait cycles + 2
cycles (three cycles in the timing chart shown in Figure 4.6-1).
•
Setting of the W11 to W08 bits of the AWR register enables 0 to 15 page wait cycles to be
inserted. At this point, the page access cycles can be obtained from the page wait cycles + 1
cycle (Two cycles in the timing chart shown in Figure 4.6-1).
•
Setting of the BST bits of the ACR register enables the burst length to be set as "1", "2", "4", or
"8". If the burst length is set to "1", single access mode is set and only the first cycle is
repeated. However, if the data bus width is set to 32 bits (the BST bits of the ACR register are
"10B"), set the burst length to "4" or less (A malfunction occurs if the burst length is set to "8").
•
If burst access is enabled, burst access is used when prefetch access or transfer with a
larger size than the specified data bus width is performed. For example, if word access to an
area whose data bus width is set to 8 bits and burst length to "4" is performed, access of 4
bursts is performed once instead of repeating byte access four times.
•
Since RDY input is ignored in areas for which burst access is set, do not set TYP3 to
TYP0=0xx1B.
•
The LBA and BAA signals are designed for burst FLASH memory. LBA indicates the start of
access and BAA indicates the address increment.
•
A31 to A00 is updated after the wait cycles that were set during burst access.
•
For fly-by transfer, burst access operation cannot be performed.
217
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.7
Address/data Multiplex Interface
This section explains the following three cases of operation of the address/data
multiplex interface:
• Without external wait
• With external wait
• CSn -> RD/WRn setup
■ Without External Wait
Figure 4.7-1 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0100B, AWR=0008H).
Figure 4.7-1 Timing Chart for the Address/Data Multiplex Interface (without External Wait)
MCLK
A31 to A00
address [31:0]
AS
CSn
RD
READ
D31 to D16
address[15:0]
data[15:0]
WR
WRITE
D31 to D16
218
address[15:0]
data[15:0]
•
Making a setting such as TYP3 to TYP0=01xxB in the ACR register enables the address/
data multiplex interface to be set.
•
If the address/data multiplex interface is set, set 8 bits or 16 bits for the data bus width
(DBW1, DBW0 bits). The 32 bit width is not supported.
•
In the address/data multiplex interface, the total of 3 cycles of 2 address output cycles + 1
data cycle becomes the basic number of access cycles.
•
In the address output cycles, AS is asserted as the output address latch signal.
However, when CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay (AWR1) is set to "0", the multiplex address
output cycle becomes only 1 cycle as shown in Figure 4.7-1, and address cannot be directly
latched at the rising edge of AS. Therefore, the address is fetched at the rising edge of
MCLK for the cycle which "L" is asserted to AS.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
•
As with a normal interface, the address indicating the start of access is output to A31 to A0
during the time division bus cycle. Use this address if you want to use an address more than
8/16 bits in the address/data multiplex interface.
•
As with the normal interface, auto-wait (AWR15 to AWR12), read -> write idle cycle (AWR7,
AWR6), write recovery (AWR5, AWR4), address -> CSn delay (AWR2), CSn -> RD/WRn
setup delay (AWR1), and RD/WRn -> CSn hold delay (AWR0) can be set.
•
In areas for which the address/data multiplex interface is set, set 1(DBW1, DBW0=00B) as
the burst length.
■ With External Wait
Figure 4.7-2 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0101B, AWR=1008H).
Figure 4.7-2 Timing Chart for the Address/Data Multiplex Interface (with External Wait)
MCLK
address [31:0]
A31 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
READ
D31 to D16
data[15:0]
address[15:0]
WR
WRITE
D31 to D16
address[15:0]
data[15:0]
Release
RDY
External wait
Making a setting such as TYP3 to TYP0=01x1B in the ACR register enables RDY input in the
address/data multiplex interface.
219
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ CSn -> RD/WRn Setup
Figure 4.7-3 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0101B, AWR=100BH).
Figure 4.7-3 Timing Chart for the Address/Data Multiplex Interface (CSn -> RD/WRn Setup)
MCLK
A31 to A00
address[31:0]
AS
CSn
RD
READ
D31 to D16
address[15:0]
data[15:0]
WR
WRITE
D31 to D16
address[15:0]
data[15:0]
Setting "1" for the CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay (AWR1) enables the multiplex address output
cycle to be extended by one cycle as shown in Figure 4.7-3, allowing the address to be latched
directly to the rising edge of AS. Use this setting if you want to use AS as an ALE (Address
Latch Enable) strobe without using MCLK.
220
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.8
Prefetch Operation
This section explains the prefetch operation.
■ Prefetch Operation
The external bus interface controller contains a prefetch buffer consisting of 16 x 8 bits.
If the PSUS bit of the TCR register is "0" and read access to an area to which the PFEN bit of
the ACR register is set to "1" occurs, the subsequent address is prefetched and then stored in
the prefetch buffer.
If the stored address is accessed from the internal bus, the lookahead data in the prefetch buffer
is returned without external access being performed. This can reduce the wait time for
successive accesses to the external bus areas.
❍ Basic conditions for starting external access using prefetch
External bus access using prefetch occurs when the following conditions are met:
•
The PSUS bit of the TCR register is "0".
•
Neither sleep mode nor stop mode is set.
•
Read access by the external bus to a chip select area for which prefetch is enabled has
been performed. DMA access and read access by a read-modify-write instruction, however,
are excluded.
•
No external bus access request (external bus area access to an area for which prefetch is
not enabled or DMA transfer with an external bus area) other than the prefetch access has
occurred.
•
The part of the prefetch buffer for the next operation of capturing the prefetch access is
completely empty.
While the above conditions are met, the prefetch access will continue. If external bus area
access to an area for which prefetch is not enabled occurs after prefetch access, prefetch
access to the area for which prefetch is enabled will continue as long as the prefetch buffer
clear conditions are not met.
For an access that mixes multiple prefetch-enabled areas and multiple prefetch-disabled areas,
the prefetch buffer always holds data of the prefetch-enabled area accessed last. Since, in this
case, access to prefetch-disabled areas does not affect the prefetch buffer state at all, data in
the prefetch buffer is not wasted even if prefetch-disabled data access and prefetch-enabled
instruction fetch are mixed.
❍ Optional clear for temporary stopping of a prefetch access
Setting "1" for the PSUS bit of the TCR register temporarily stops a prefetch. The prefetch can
be restarted by setting the PSUS bit to "0". At this point, the contents of the buffer are retained if
no error occurs or a buffer clear such as occurs when the PCLR bit is set does not occur.
Setting "1" for the PCLR bit of the TCR register completely clears the prefetch buffer. Clear the
buffer by setting the PSUS bit when prefetch is interrupted.
Prefetch is temporarily stopped for the minimum unit (64 Kbytes) of the boundary=chip select
area where the high-order 16 bits of an address change. If the boundary is crossed, first a buffer
read error occurs and then prefetch starts in a new area.
Prefetch is temporarily stopped in SDRAM/FCRAM-connected areas, when the bank address is
crossed. If a new bank address is accessed, first a buffer read error occurs, and then prefetch
221
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
starts at the new bank address. In SDRAM/FCRAM-connected areas, prefetch is also
temporarily stopped, even if the page address is undated when write access to a prefetched
area causes a page error or when access is made to another SDRAM/FCRAM area in which
prefetch is not enabled.
❍ Unit for one prefetch access operation
The unit for one prefetch access operation is determined by the DBW bits (bus width) and BST
bits (burst length).
Prefetch access always occurs with the full size of the bus width specified by the DBW bits and
access for the count of the burst length set by the BST bits in one access operation is
performed. That is, if any value other than "00B" is set for the BST bits, the prefetch always
occurs in page mode/burst mode. Keep in mind whether ROM/RAM is conformable and enough
access time is applicable. (Set an appropriate value bits W15 to W08 bits of the AWR register).
During burst access, successive accesses occur only within the address boundary that is
determined by the burst length. Thus, if the boundary is crossed, for example, 4 bytes of free
space are available in the buffer, these 4 bytes cannot be accessed in one operation (If the
prefetch buffer starts at xxxxxx0EH, 4 bytes of free space are available in the buffer, and two
bursts are set even though the bus width is 16 bits, only 2 bytes, xxxxxx0EH and xxxxxx0FH,
can be captured in the next prefetch access).
The following provides two examples:
•
Area whose bus width is set to 16 bits and whose burst length is set to "2"
The amount of data read into the buffer in one prefetch operation is 4 bytes. In this case,
prefetch access is delayed until 4 bytes of free space are available in the prefetch buffer.
•
Area whose bus width is set to 8 bits and whose burst length is set to "8"
The amount of data read into the buffer in one prefetch operation is 8 bytes. In this case,
prefetch access is delayed until 8 bytes of free space are available in the prefetch buffer.
❍ Burst length setting and prefetch efficiency
If requests for external bus access, other than prefetch access, to or errors in the prefetch buffer
occur during one operation of prefetch access as explained in the previous bullet, "Unit of one
prefetch access operation", these access requests must wait until access to the prefetch buffer
that is being executed is completed.
Thus, if the burst length is too long, the efficiency and reaction of bus access other than prefetch
may be degraded. If, on the other hand, the burst length is set to "1", many read cycles may be
wasted even if burst/page access memory is connected because single access is always
performed.
If settings are made so that the amount of data read in one prefetch access operation is large,
prefetch access can be started only after free space in the prefetch buffer for this amount is
available. Thus, access to the prefetch buffer is infrequent, and the external bus tends to be
idle. For example, if the bus width is set to 16 bits and the burst length is set to "8", the amount
of data read into the buffer in one prefetch operation is 16 bytes. Thus, a new prefetch access
can be started only after the prefetch buffer is completely empty.
Adjust the optimum burst length to suit use and the environment after taking the above into
consideration. Generally, when connecting asynchronous memory to which burst/page access
cannot be applied, it is best to set the burst length to "1" (single access). Conversely, when
memory whose burst/page access cycle is short is connected, it is better to set the burst length
to any value other than "1" (single access). In this case, it is best to make the setting so that 8
bytes (half of the buffer) are read in one read operation according to the bus width. However,
the optimum condition varies with the frequency of external access and varies with the
frequency divide-by rate setting of the external access clock.
222
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ Reading from the prefetch buffer
Data stored in the prefetch buffer is read in response to access from the internal bus if an
address matches, and no external access is performed. In reading from the buffer, addresses
can be hit (up to 16 bytes) if they are in the forward direction but not continuous, so that a
second read from the external bus is avoided, if possible, even for a short forward branch.
If the address currently being accessed for prefetch matches during access from the internal
bus, a wait signal is returned internally before data is captured after prefetch access is
completed. In this case, no buffer error occurs.
If an address in the prefetch buffer matches when a read is performed for DMA transfer, data in
the prefetch buffer is not used, and instead, external data is read by the external bus. In this
case, a buffer error occurs. The prefetch is not continued and no prefetch access is performed
until a new external access operation to a prefetch-enabled area occurs.
❍ Clearing/updating the prefetch buffer
If either of the following conditions is met, the prefetch buffer is completely cleared:
•
If "1" is written to the PCLR bit of the TCR register
•
If a buffer read error occurs. A buffer read error is if any of the following events occurs:
•
-
When no address is found in the buffer that matches in an to read from a prefetchenabled area. In this case, the external bus is accessed again. Data read in this case is
not stored in the buffer, but the prefetch access is started from the subsequent address to
store addresses in the buffer.
-
In an access to read from a prefetch-enabled area with a read-modify-write instruction. In
this case, the external bus is accessed again. Data read in this case is not stored in the
buffer. Also, no prefetch access is performed (This is because data is written to the next
address).
-
In an access to read from a prefetch-enabled area for DMA transfer. In this case, the
external bus is accessed again. Data read in this case is not stored in the buffer. Also, no
prefetch access is performed.
If a buffer write hit occurs. A buffer write hit is as follows:
-
When the address of just 1 byte that matches is found in the buffer in an access to write
to a prefetch-enabled area. In this case, the external bus is accessed again, but no
prefetch access is performed before a new read access occurs.
Only part of the prefetch buffer is cleared when the following condition is met:
•
If a buffer read hit occurs
In this case, only the part of the buffer before the hit address is cleared.
❍ Restrictions on prefetch-enabled areas
If prefetch to a little endian area is enabled, be sure to access the area using word access. If
data read into the prefetch buffer is accessed with any length other than word length, the correct
endian conversion is not performed and thus the wrong data will be read. This is due to
hardware restrictions related to the endian conversion mechanism.
223
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.9
SDRAM/FCRAM Interface Operation
This section describes the operations of the SDRAM/FCRAM interface.
■ SDRAM/FCRAM Interface
The CS6 and CS7 areas can be used as SDRAM/FCRAM space by setting the TYP3 to TYP0
bits in the area configuration register (ACR) to "100XB".
This section provides timing charts to describe the following operations of the SDRAM/FCRAM
interface.
224
•
Burst read/write (Settings: Page hit, CAS latency "2")
•
Single read/write (Settings: Page hit, CAS latency "3", auto-precharge OFF)
•
Single read (Settings: Page miss, CAS latency "3", auto-precharge OFF)
•
Single read/write (Settings: CAS latency "1", TYP 1001B, auto-precharge ON)
•
Auto-refresh
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Burst Read/Write Operation Timing
Figure 4.9-1 shows the operation timings assuming that page hits and CAS latency "2" are set.
Figure 4.9-1 Burst Read/Write Timing Chart
MCLK
A
#1
D
#1
SRAS,SCAS,
SWE
#1
#2
#3
#1
#4
#2
#3
#4
READ
WRITE
Write
recovery
Cas Latency
Read cycle
Write cycle
•
All of the A13 to A00 pins may not be used depending on the SDRAM capacity. See Section
"4.9.5 Memory Connection Example".
•
The MCLK is a clock signal input to SDRAM. Signals such as addresses, data, and
commands are input to SDRAM at the rise of the MCLK.
•
Set the W05 and W04 bits in the area wait register (AWR) to the write recovery cycle
according to the SDRAM/FCRAM standards.
•
Set the W10 to W08 bits in the area wait register (AWR) to the CAS latency according to the
SDRAM/FCRAM standards.
•
Set the burst length using the BST bit in the area configuration register (ACR).
■ Single Read/Write Operation Timing
Figure 4.9-2 shows the operation timings assuming that page hits, CAS latency "3", and no autoprecharge are set.
Figure 4.9-2 Single Read/Write Timing Chart
MCLK
A
#1
#1
D
#1
SRAS,SCAS,
SWE
READ
#1
Read
Cas Latency
Read cycle
Write
WRITE
Idle cycle
Write cycle
Set the W07 and W06 bits in the area wait register (AWR) to the read-to-write idle cycle
according to the SDRAM/FCRAM standards.
225
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Single Read Operation Timing
Figure 4.9-3 shows the operation timings assuming that page misses, CAS latency "3", and no
auto-precharge are set.
Figure 4.9-3 Single Read Timing Chart
MCLK
A
BA
Row
#1
D
#1
SRAS,SCAS,
SWE
PRE
ACT
READ
RAS precharge cycle
RAS → CAS delay
(tRP)
(tRCD)
Cas Latency
•
When a page miss occurs, a read operation is performed after the PRE charge and ACTV
commands are issued.
•
Set the W01 and W00 bits in the area wait register (AWR) to the RAS precharge cycle (tRP)
according to the SDRAM/FCRAM standards.
•
Set the W14 to W12 bits in the area wait register (AWR) to the RAS-to-CAS delay (tRCD)
according to the SDRAM/FCRAM standards.
■ Single Read/Write Operation Timing
Figure 4.9-4 shows the operation timings assuming that CAS latency "1", TYP = 1001B, and
auto-precharge are set.
Figure 4.9-4 Single Read/Write Timing Chart
MCLK
A
Row
D
Row
Col
#1
SRAS,SCAS,
SWE
ACTV
WRITA
ACTV
CL+BL-1
226
Col
READA
Row
Col
#2
#3
ACTV
WRITA
CL+BL-1
•
Setting TYP to "1001B" causes a read/write command with auto-precharge to be issued.
Since the cycle from READA/WRITA issuance to ACTV issuance is fixed at CL + BL - 1,
however, TYP can be set to "1001B" only when FCRAM is connected.
•
This timing is effective, for example, for recurring page misses as it eliminates the cycle for
issuing the PRE command.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Auto-refresh Operation Timing
Figure 4.9-5 shows auto-refresh operation timings.
Figure 4.9-5 Auto-refresh Timing Chart
MCLK
A
D
SRAS,SCAS,
SWE
REF
ACTV
tRC
Refresh cycle
•
The refresh command is issued every "refresh control register's (RCR's) RFINT5 to RFINT0
value x 32" cycles and access is restarted upon completion of each refresh.
•
Set the TRC bit in the refresh control register (RCR) according to the SDRAM/FCRAM
standards.
•
Satisfy the maximum RAS active time as well.
227
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.9.1
Self Refresh
This section describes self-refreshing.
■ Self Refresh
Writing "1" to the SELF bit in the refresh control register (RCR) causes the SDRAM/FCRAM
interface to initiate the self-refresh transition sequence.
After executing auto-refreshing the number of times set in the RFC2 to RFC0 bits, the SDRAM/
FCRAM interface issues the SELF command to SDRAM/FCRAM to enter the self-refresh mode.
The device is released from the self-refresh mode either when "0" is written to the SELF bit or
read/write access to SDRAM/FCRAM occurs.
The SDRAM/FCRAM interface issues the SELFX command to execute auto-refreshing the
number of times set in the RFC2 to RFC0 bits upon detection of writing "0" to the SELF bit or
access to SDRAM/FCRAM in the self-refresh mode.
Even when access to SDRAM/FCRAM by DMA transfer occurs after setting the self-refresh
mode and putting the chip into sleep mode, the self-refresh mode is canceled.
❍ Self-refresh mode transition procedure
1) Set SELF bit to "1".
2) Issue the REF command the number of times set in the RFC2 to RFC0 bits.
3) Issue SELF command
❍ Self-refresh mode reset procedure
1) Set the SELF bit to "0" or access to SDRAM/FCRAM.
2) Issue SELFX command
3) Issue the REF command the number of times set in the RFC2 to RFC0 bits.
4) Transition to the normal access state
228
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.9.2
Power-on Sequence
This section describes the power-on sequence.
■ Power-on Sequence
Setting the PON bit in the refresh control register (RCR) to "1" initiates the power-on sequence.
Take the following steps to set the PON bit to "1" for transition to the power-on sequence.
1) Reserve the clock stabilization wait time specified in the SDRAM/FCRAM manual.
2) Set ACR, AWR, MCRA(B).
3) Set the CSER to enable the area to which SDRAM/FCRAM has been connected.
4) Set the PON bit to "1" while setting the RCR value.
Taking the above steps causes the SDRAM/FCRAM interface to execute the following power-on
sequence.
5) Execute the PALL command.
6) Execute the REF command eight times.
7) The mode register is set according to the BST bit in the ACR, CL (CAS Latency) bit in the
AWR, and the WBST bit in the MCRA.
8) Transition to the normal access state
229
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.9.3
Connecting SDRAM/FCRAM to Many Areas
This section shows the connecting SDRAM/FCRAM to many areas.
■ Connecting SDRAM/FCRAM to Many Areas
SDRAM/FCRAM can be set for CS6 and CS7 areas. When connecting SDRAM/FCRAM to 2
areas, connect the same type of modules.
More precisely, connect the modules common in the following register settings.
•
Area configuration register (ACR): Set all of the DBW1 to DBW0, BST1 to BST0, and TYP3
to TYP0 bits to the same.
•
Area wait register (AWR):
Set all the bits to the same.
•
Memory setting register (MCR):
All the settings are the same as the registers are common.
•
Refresh control register (RCR):
All the settings are the same as the registers are common.
To enable the two areas at a time, execute the power-on sequence, auto-refresh, and selfrefresh at the same time.
230
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.9.4
Address Multiplexing Format
This section describes the address multiplexing format.
■ Address Multiplexing Format
SDRAM/FCRAM access addresses correspond to row, bank, and column addresses differently
depending on the settings of the ASZ3 to ASZ0, DBW1 and DBW0, PSZ2 to PSZ0, and BANK
bits.
Addresses are arranged in the order of Column, BANK, and Row addresses, starting from the
least significant bit.
Set each bit as shown below.
•
ASZ3 to ASZ0 bits:
Set these bits to the total amount of SDRAM/FCRAM connected to
the corresponding area. For using two modules in parallel, set the
total amount. Affects the number of row addresses.
•
DBW1 and DBW0 bits: Set these bits to the data bus width. (Set the bits to "16 bits" for
connecting a pair of eight-bit modules in parallel.) Column
addresses are shifted according to the data bus width setting. 8 bits:
Do not shift. 16 bits: Shift one bit. 32 bits: Shift two bits.
•
PSZ2 to PSZ0 bits:
Set these bits to the number of column addresses used for SDRAM/
FCRAM.
•
BANK bit:
Set this bit to the number of SDRAM/FCRAM bank addresses.
Figure 4.9-6 shows examples of combinations of access addresses and Row/BANK/Column
addresses.
Figure 4.9-6 Examples of Combinations of access Addresses and Row/BANK/Column Addresses
4M bytes (set ASZ to "0110 B" ), 8-bit bus width (set DBW to "00B")
256 column (set PSZ to "000 B" ), 2 banks (set BANK to "0" )
Access address bit
2221
31
9 8 7
ROW
External address pin
A14
A12 A11 A10 A9
A8
BA
A7
A6
A5
A4
0
COLUMN
A3
A2
A1
A0
16M bytes (set ASZ to "1000 B" ), 16-bit bus width (set DBW to "01B" )
512 column (set PSZ to "001B" ), 4 banks (set BANK to "1" )
Access address bit
31
24 23
12 1110 9
External address pin
A15 A14
A11 A10 A9
1 0
BA
ROW
A8
A7
A6
COLUMN
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
64M bytes (set ASZ to "1010 B" ), 32-bit bus width (set DBW to "10 B" )
512 column (set PSZ to "001B" ), 4 banks (set BANK to "1" )
Access address bit
31
26 25
13 121110
BA
ROW
External address pin
A15 A14
A12 A11 A10 A9
A8
A7
A6
2 1 0
COLUMN
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
231
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.9.5
Memory Connection Example
This section shows the memory connection example.
■ Memory Connection Example
The SDRAM/FCRAM interface is connected to SDRAM/FCRAM as shown in Table 4.9-1 in
principle.
Table 4.9-1 SDRAM/FCRAM Interface to SDRAM/FCRAM Connection Table
SDRAM/
FCRAM
interface
pin
232
SDRAM/
FCRAM pin
Remarks
MCLK
CLK
MCLKE
CKE
SRAS (AS)
RAS
SCAS (BAA)
CAS
SWE (WR)
WE
CS6 or CS7
CS
Only the CS6/CS7 area can be set as SDRAM/FCRAM
space.
A00 to A09
A00 to A09
Addresses do not have to be shifted depending on the bus
width.
A10/AP
A10/AP
A10 for row address output; otherwise AP
A11 to A13
A11 to A13
Connected to the address used for SDRAM/FCRAM.
A14
BA0
BA for 2 bank product
A15
BA1
The pin is not used for a two-bank module.
D31 to D00
DQ
The connection changes depending on the endian method
and data bus width.
For detailed connection, see Section "4.4 Endian and Bus
Access".
DQMUU,
DQMUL,
DQMLU,
DQMLL
DQM
The connection changes depending on the endian method
and data bus width.
For detailed connection, see Section "4.4 Endian and Bus
Access".
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ Using 8-bit SDRAM/FCRAM (Big endian)
Total data bus width of 32 bits: Use four SDRAM/FCRAM modules.
Total data bus width of 16 bits: Use two SDRAM/FCRAM modules.
Figure 4.9-7 shows how to use 64-Mbit SDRAM (one bank address and 12 row addresses).
Figure 4.9-7 Using 64-Mbit SDRAM
CS6
or
CS7
This LSI
A14
A11-A00
DQMLU
DQMUU
SRAS SCAS SWE MCLKE
DQMUL
DQMLL MCLK
DQ31-DQ0
[31-24]
CS
BA IA11-IA0
RAS CAS
WE CKE
CLK
DQM
DQ7-DQ0
SDRAM(No.1)
[23-16]
CS
BA IA11-IA0
RAS
CAS
CLK
WE CKE DQM
DQ7-DQ0
SDRAM(No.2)
[15-8]
CS
BA IA11-IA0
RAS
CAS
WE
CLK
CKE DQM
DQ7-DQ0
SDRAM(No.3)
[7-0]
CS
BA IA11-IA0
RAS CAS
WE
CKE
DQM
CLK
DQ7-DQ0
SDRAM(No.4)
When SDRAM modules are used with a total data width of 16 bits, SDRAMs No. 3 and No. 4
are not required and DQ15 to DQ0 must be left open.
233
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ Using 16-bit SDRAM/FCRAM
Total data width of 32 bits: Use two or four SDRAM modules.
Total data width of 16 bits: Use one or two SDRAM modules.
Figure 4.9-8 shows how to use 64-Mbit SDRAM (two bank addresses and 12 row addresses).
Figure 4.9-8 Using 64-Mbit SDRAM
This LSI
CS7 CS6
A15 A14 A11-A00
DQMLU
DQMUU
DQMUL
DQMLL MCLK
SRAS SCAS SWE MCLKE
DQ31-DQ0
[31-16]
CS
BA1BA0 IA11-IA0
WE CKE DQMU DQML
RAS CAS
CLK
DQ15-DQ0
SDRAM(No.1)
[15-0]
CS
BA1BA0 IA11-IA0
WE CKE DQMUDQML
RAS CAS
CLK
DQ15-DQ0
SDRAM(No.2)
[31-16]
CS
BA1BA0 IA11-IA0
RAS CAS
WE
CKE DQMU DQML
CLK
DQ15-DQ0
SDRAM(No.3)
[15-0]
CS
BA1BA0 IA11-IA0
RAS CAS
WE
CKE DQMUDQML
CLK
DQ15-DQ0
SDRAM(No.4)
When using one SDRAM module with a data width of 16 bits, SDRAMs No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4
are not required and DQ15 to DQ0 must be left open.
When two SDRAM modules are used with a data width of 16 bits, SDRAMs No. 2 and No. 4 are
not required.
When two SDRAM modules are used with a data width of 32 bits, SDRAMs No. 3 and No. 4 are
not required.
234
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
❍ Using 32-bit SDRAM
When the data width is 32 bits: Use one or two SDRAM modules.
Figure 4.9-9 shows 64-Mbit SDRAM (one bank address and 12 row addresses).
Figure 4.9-9 Using 64-Mbit
This LSI
CS7 CS6
A14 A11-A00
DQMLU
DQMUU
SRAS SCAS SWE MCLKE
DQMUL
DQMLL MCLK
DQ31-DQ0
[31-0]
CS
BA IA11-IA0
RAS CAS
WE CKE DQM3 DQM2DQM1 DQM0
CLK
DQ31-DQ0
SDRAM(No.1)
[31-0]
CS
BA IA11-IA0
RAS CAS
WE
CKE DQM3 DQM2DQM1 DQM0
CLK
DQ31-DQ0
SDRAM(No.2)
SDRAM No. 2 is not required when the device is used with only one SDRAM module.
235
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10 DMA Access Operation
This section explains DMA access operation.
■ DMA Access Operation
This section explains the following nine DMA operations:
236
•
DMA fly-by transfer (I/O -> memory)
•
DMA fly-by transfer (memory -> I/O)
•
DMA fly-by transfer (I/O -> SDRAM/FCRAM)
•
DMA fly-by transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM -> I/O)
•
2-cycle transfer (internal RAM -> external I/O, RAM)
•
2-cycle transfer (external -> I/O)
•
2-cycle transfer (I/O -> external)
•
2-cycle transfer (I/O -> SDRAM/FCRAM)
•
2-cycle transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM -> I/O)
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.1 DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> Memory)
This section explains DMA fly-by transfer (I/O -> memory).
■ DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> Memory)
Figure 4.10-1 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0008H,
IOWR=41H).
Figure 4.10-1 shows a case when a wait is not set on the memory side.
Figure 4.10-1 Timing Chart for DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> Memory)
Basic cycle
I/O wait
cycle
I/O hold
wait
MCLK
A31 to A00
memory address
AS
CSn
WRn
D31 to D00
DACKn
FR30
compatible
mode
DEOPn
Basic
mode
DACKn
DEOPn
IORD
DREQn
Sense timing in
demand mode
•
Setting "1" for the W01 bit of the AWR register enables the CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay to
be set. Set this bit to extend the period between assertion of chip select and the read/write
strobe.
•
Setting "1" for the W00 bit of the AWR register enables the RD/WRn -> CSn hold delay to be
set. Set this bit to extend the period between negation of the read/write strobe and negation
of chip select.
237
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
•
The CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay (W01 bit) and RD/WRn -> CSn hold delay (W00 bit) can
be set independently.
•
When successive accesses are made within the same chip select area without negating the
chip select, neither CSn -> RD/WRn setup delay nor RD/WRn -> CSn hold delay is inserted.
•
If a setup cycle for determining the address or a hold cycle for determining the address is
needed, set "1" for the address -> CSn delay setting (W02 bit of the AWR register).
Reference:
For I/O on the data output side, a read strobe of three bus cycles extended by the I/O wait cycle
and I/O hold wait cycle is generated. For memory on the receiving side, a write strobe of two bus
cycles extended by the I/O wait cycle is generated. The I/O hold wait cycle does not affect the write
strobe. However, the address and CS signal are retained until the fly-by bus access cycles end.
238
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.2 DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory -> I/O)
This section explains DMA fly-by transfer (memory -> I/O).
■ DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory -> I/O)
Figure 4.10-2 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0008H,
IOWR=41H).
Figure 4.10-2 shows a case in which a wait is not set on the memory side.
Figure 4.10-2 Timing Chart for DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory -> I/O)
Basic cycle
I/O wait
cycle
I/O hold
wait
MCLK
A31 to A00
memory address
AS
CSn
RD
D31 to D00
FR30
compatible
mode
Basic
mode
DACKn
DEOPn
DACKn
DEOPn
IORD
DREQn
Sense timing in
demand mode
•
Setting "1" for the HLD bit of the IOWR0 to IOWR3 registers extends the I/O read cycle by
one cycle.
•
Setting bits WR1, WR0 bits of the IOWR0 to IOWR3 registers enables 0 to 3 write recovery
cycles to be inserted.
•
If the write recovery cycle is set to "1" or more, a write recovery cycle is always inserted after
write access.
•
Setting bits IW3 to IW0 of the IOWR0 to IOWR3 registers enables 0 to 15 wait cycles to be
inserted.
239
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
•
If wait is also set on the memory side (AWR15 to AWR12 is not "0"), the larger value is used
as the wait cycle after comparison with the I/O wait (IW3 to IW0 bits).
Reference:
For memory on the data output side, a read strobe of three bus cycles extended by the I/O wait
cycle and I/O hold wait cycle is generated. For I/O on the receiving side, a write strobe of two bus
cycles extended by the I/O wait cycle is generated. The I/O hold wait cycle does not affect the write
strobe. However, the address and CS signal are retained until the fly-by bus access cycles end.
Always perform fly-by transfers using the same data bus width.
240
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.3 DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> SDRAM/FCRAM)
This section describes the operation of DMA fly-by transfer (I/O device to SDRAM/
FCRAM).
■ DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O -> SDRAM/FCRAM)
Figure 4.10-3 shows an operation timing chart assuming TYP3 to TYP0 set to 1000B, AWR set
to 0051H, and IOWR set to 41H.
Figure 4.10-3 Timing Chart for DMA Fly-by Transfer (I/O to SDRAM/FCRAM)
Basic cycle
I/O wait
cycle
I/O hold
wait
MCLK
A31 to A00
memory
address
AS
CSn
SRAS
SCAS
WRn(SWE)
D31 to D00
FR30
compatible
mode
DACKn
DEOPn
DACKn
Basic
mode
DEOPn
IORD
DREQn
241
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
242
•
For the I/O device on the data output side, a read strobe of three bus cycles extended by the
I/O wait cycle and I/O hold wait cycle is generated.
•
For SDRAM/FCRAM on the receiving side, a WRIT command is issued at the timing that
allows writing after the I/O wait cycle. The I/O wait cycle may be longer depending on the
SDRAM/FCRAM bank active state and SDRAM/FCRAM wait setting.
•
The I/O hold wait cycle does not affect the write strobe. Note, however, that the CS signal is
retained until the fly-by bus access cycles end.
•
For fly-by transfer from an I/O device to SDRAM/FCRAM, be sure to set the HLD bit in the
DMAC I/O wait register (IOWR) to "1" to enable the I/O hold wait cycle.
•
Fly-by transfer must always be performed between data buses having the same bus width.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.4 DMA Fly-By Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM -> I/O)
This section describes the operation of DMA fly-by transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM device to
I/O).
■ DMA Fly-By Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM -> I/O)
Figure 4.10-4 shows an operation timing chart assuming TYP3 to TYP0 set to 1000B, AWR set
to 0051H, and IOWR set to 42H.
❍ At SDRAM page hit (Shortest)
Figure 4.10-4 Timing Chart for DMA Fly-by Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM to I/O) with Page Hits (Shortest)
SDRAM
basic cycle
I/O hold wait
I/O basic cycle
I/O wait cycle
MCLK
A31 to A00
column
address
CSn
SRAS
SCAS
WRn(SWE)
MCLKE
D31 to D00
DACKn
Basic
mode
DEOPn
Data setup
IOWR
DREQn
243
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
If SDRAM access is shorter than I/O access, the SDRAM access is extended by the I/O access
(base access plus I/O wait).
Figure 4.10-5 shows an operation timing chart assuming TYP3 to TYP0 set to 1000B, AWR set
to 0051H, and IOWR set to 42H.
❍ At SDRAM page misses
Figure 4.10-5 Timing Chart for DMA Fly-by Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM to I/O) with Page Misses
I/O hold wait
SDRAM basic cycle
I/O basic cycle
I/O wait
MCLK
A31 to A00
Bank
address
Row
address
Column
address
CSn
SRAS
SCAS
WRn(SWE)
MCLKE
D31 to D00
DACKn
Basic
mode
DEOPn
IOWR
DREQn
244
•
If SDRAM access is extended, for example, by precharging when a page miss occurs in
reference to SDRAM, the SDRAM access exceeds the set I/O access, so that the I/O access
is extended to be longer than the SDRAM access. When the I/O device requires data setup,
therefore, the I/O wait cycle must be set such that I/O access is longer than the maximum
SDRAM access cycle. For the above settings, set the number of I/O wait cycles to at least "4".
•
For SDRAM/FCRAM on the data output side, a READ command is issued at the timing that
satisfies the I/O wait cycle. If the I/O hold cycle has been set, then, a DESL command is
issued to insert the I/O hold cycle in the cycle immediately followed by the end of the bus
access cycles.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
•
For the I/O device on the receiving side, a write strobe of two bus cycles extended by the I/O
wait cycle is generated. The I/O hold wait cycle does not affect the write strobe. However,
the CS signal is retained until the fly-by bus access cycles end.
•
Fly-by transfer must always be performed between data buses having the same bus width.
•
When the I/O wait cycle is used to reserve data setup time, the I/O wait value must be set
according to the page miss condition. A page hit therefore generates a penalty. If this penalty
generated at a page hit causes a problem, prepare an external circuit as illustrated in Figure
4.10-6 to use an external wait cycle based on the CAS signal, thereby extending I/O access
to reserve data setup time.
Figure 4.10-6 Sample Circuit Solving a Fly-by Penalty Using External Wait Cycles Based on the CAS
Signal (CL = 2)
This LSI
SDRAM
CLK
CKE
RAS
CAS
MCLK
MCLKE
SRAS
SCAS
SWE
DQMUU
DQMUL
A11 to A00
A14
A15
WE
DQMU
DQML
IA11 to IA0
BA0
BA1
D31 to D16
DQ15 to DQ0
CS6
CS
I/O
D
Q
FF
CK
RDY
IORD
IOWR
DACK
DREQ
Notes:
• For CL = 3, provide two stages of MCLK-based FF to cause a delay of another cycle.
• If any device requires an external wait cycle, add a logic gate to the RDY signal as required.
245
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
Figure 4.10-7 Timing Chart for Fly-by Penalty Solution Using External Wait Cycles Based on the CAS
Signal (CL = 2)
SDRAM basic access
I/O basic cycle
I/O hold
wait
External RDY wait
MCLK
A31 to A00
Bank
Address
Row
Address
Column
Address
CSn
SRAS
SCAS
WRn(SWE)
MCLKE
D31 to D00
DACKn
Basic mode
DEOPn
IOWR
DREQn
RDY
The rise of the IOWR signal can be delayed one cycle by extending SDRAM read access one
cycle when the signal resulting from OR (negative-logic AND) operation of the CAS signal and
the chip select signal for the SDRAM area subject to transfer is input to external RDY pin at the
timing based on the MCLK.
As the external wait signal is generated based on the CAS signal fall timing in this case, the
data setup time from the SDRAM data output to the I/O device can be reserved for one cycle,
regardless of a page hit or miss in SDRAM.
Set the external wait using the RYE0 and RYE1 bits in the DMAC I/O wait register such that the
RDY function of the DMA fly-by access channel to be used is enabled.
When the CAS latency is "3", SDRAM data output is delayed one cycle. Add one stage of flip
flop by the MCLK to input the signal delayed one cycle from the above diagram to the RDY pin.
246
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.5 2-Cycle Transfer (Internal RAM -> External I/O, RAM)
This section explains 2-cycle transfer (internal RAM -> external I/O, RAM) operation.
The timing is the same as for external I/O, RAM -> internal RAM.
■ 2-Cycle Transfer (Internal RAM -> External I/O, RAM)
Figure 4.10-8 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0008H,
IOWR=00H).
Figure 4.10-8 shows a case in which a wait is not set on the I/O side.
Figure 4.10-8 Timing Chart for 2-cycle Transfer (Internal RAM -> External I/O, RAM)
MCLK
A31 to A00
I/O address
AS
CSn (I/O side)
WRn
D31 to D00
FR30
compatible
mode
Basic
mode
DACKn
DEOPn
DACKn
DEOPn
DREQn
•
The bus is accessed in the same way as an interface when DMAC transfer is not performed.
•
DACKn/DEOPn is not output in the internal RAM access cycles.
247
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.6 2-Cycle Transfer (External -> I/O)
This section explains 2-cycle transfer (external -> I/O) operation.
■ 2-Cycle Transfer (External -> I/O)
Figure 4.10-9 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0008H,
IOWR=00H).
Figure 4.10-9 shows a case in which a wait is not set for memory and I/O.
Figure 4.10-9 Timing Chart for 2-Cycle Transfer (External -> I/O)
MCLK
A31 to A00
memory address
idle
I/O address
AS
CSn
RD
CSn
WRn
D31 to D00
FR30
compatible
mode
Basic
mode
DACKn
DEOPn
DACKn
DEOPn
DREQn
248
•
The bus is accessed in the same way as an interface when the DMAC transfer is not
performed.
•
In basic mode, DACKn/DEOPn is output in both transfer source bus access and transfer
destination bus access.
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.7 2-Cycle Transfer (I/O -> External)
This section explains 2-cycle transfer (I/O -> external) operation.
■ 2-Cycle Transfer (I/O -> External)
Figure 4.10-10 shows the operation timing chart for (TYP3 to TYP0=0000B, AWR=0008H,
IOWR=00H).
Figure 4.10-10 shows a case in which a wait is not set for memory and I/O.
Figure 4.10-10 Timing Chart for 2-Cycle Transfer (I/O -> External)
MCLK
A31 to A00
I/O address
idle
memory address
AS
CSn
WRn
CSn
RD
D31 to D00
FR30
compatible
mode
Basic
mode
DACKn
DEOPn
DACKn
DEOPn
DREQn
•
The bus is accessed in the same way as an interface when the DMAC transfer is not
performed.
•
In basic mode, DACKn/DEOPn is output both in the transfer source bus access and transfer
destination bus access.
249
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.8 2-Cycle Transfer (I/O -> SDRAM/FCRAM)
This section describes the operation of 2-cycle transfer (I/O device to SDRAM/FCRAM).
■ 2-Cycle Transfer (I/O -> SDRAM/FCRAM)
Figure 4.10-11 shows an operation timing chart assuming TYP3 to TYP0 set to 1000B, AWR set
to 0051H, and IOWR set to 00H.
Figure 4.10-11 Timing Chart for 2-cycle Transfer (I/O to SDRAM/FCRAM)
MC LK
A31 to A00
AS
CS n
SRAS
SCAS
WR n(SWE)
CSn
RD
D31 to D00
FR30
compatible
mode
DA CKn
DEOPn
DACKn
Basic mode
DEOPn
DREQn
250
I/O
address
idle
memor y
address
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.10.9 2-Cycle Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM -> I/O)
This section describes the operation of 2-cycle transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM to I/O device).
■ 2-Cycle Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM -> I/O)
Figure 4.10-12 shows a timing chart for 2-cycle transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM to I/O).
Figure 4.10-12 Timing Chart for 2-cycle Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM to I/O)
MCLK
A31 to A00
memory
address
I/O address
AS
CSn
RD
CSn
SRAS
SCAS
WRn(SWE)
D31 to D00
FR30
compatible
mode
DACKn
DEOPn
DACKn
Basic
mode
DEOPn
DREQn
•
Bus access is the same as that of the interface for non-DMA transfer.
•
In base mode, DACKn/DEOPn is output at both of transfer source bus access and transfer
destination bus access.
251
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.11 Bus Arbitration
This section shows timing charts for releasing the bus right and for acquiring the bus
right.
■ Releasing the Bus Right
Figure 4.11-1 shows the timing chart for releasing the bus right.
Figure 4.11-1 Timing Chart for Releasing the Bus Right
MCLK
A23 to A00
AS
CSn
RD
Read
D31 to D16
BRQ
BGRNT
1 cycle
252
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
■ Acquiring the Bus Right
Figure 4.11-2 shows the timing chart for acquiring the bus right.
Figure 4.11-2 Timing Chart for Acquiring the Bus Right
MCLK
A23 to A00
AS
CSn
WR
Read
D31 to D16
BRQ
BGRNT
1 cycle
•
Setting "1" for the BREN bit of the TRC register enables bus arbitration by BRQ/BGRNT to
be performed.
•
When the bus right is released, the pin is set to high impedance and then BGRNT is
asserted one cycle later.
•
When the bus right is acquired, BGRNT is negated and then each pin is activated one cycle
later.
•
CSn is set to high impedance only if the SREN bit in the ACR0 to ACR7 registers is set.
•
If all areas enabled by the CSER register are shared (the SREN bit of the ACR register is "1"),
AS, BAA, RD, WR, and WR0 to WR3 are set to high impedance.
253
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.12 Procedure for Setting a Register
This section explains the procedure for setting a register.
■ Procedure for Setting a Register
Using the following procedures to make external bus interface settings:
1. Before rewriting the contents of a register, be sure to set the CSER register so that the
corresponding area is not used (0). If you change the settings while "1" is set, access before
and after the change cannot be guaranteed.
2. Use the following procedure to change a register:
1) Set "0" for the CSER bit corresponding to the applicable area.
2) Set both ASR and ACR at the same time using word access.
Set ACR after setting ASR if ASR and ACR are accessed by halfword.
3) Set AWR.
4) Set the CHER bit corresponding to the applicable area.
5) Set the CSER bit corresponding to the applicable area.
3. The CS0 area is enabled after a reset is released. If the area is used as a program area, the
register contents need to be rewritten while the CSER bit is "1". In this case, make the
settings described in 2) to 4) above in the initial state with a low-speed internal clock. Then,
switch the clock to a high-speed clock.
4. Use the following procedure to change the register value in an area for which prefetch:
1) Set "0" for the bit of CSER corresponding to the applicable area.
2) Set "1" for both the PSUS bit and PCLR bit of the TCR register.
3) Set both ASR and ACR at the same time using word access.
Set ACR after setting ASR if ASR and ACR are accessed by halfword.
4) Set AWR.
5) Set the CHER bit corresponding to the applicable area.
6) Set "0" for both the PSUS bit and PCLR bit of the TCR register.
7) Set "1" for the bit of CSER corresponding to the applicable area.
254
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
4.13 Notes on Using the External Bus Interface
This section explains some notes when using the external bus interface.
■ Notes for Use
If settings are made so that the area (TYP3 to TYP0=0x0xB) where WR0 to WR3 are used as a
write strobe and the area (TYP3 to TYP0=0x1xB) where WR is used as a write strobe are
mixed, be sure to make the following setting in all areas that will be used:
•
Set at least one read -> write idle cycle (other than setting AWR W07, W06=00B).
•
Set at least one write recovery cycle (other than setting AWR W05, W04=00B).
However, if WR0 to WR3 are disabled (ROM only is connected) in the area (TYP3 to
TYP0=0x0xB) where WR0 to WR3 are used as a write strobe, the above restriction does not
apply. Also, the above restriction does not apply if both the address -> RD/WRn setup cycle
(W01=1) and RD/WRn -> address hold cycle (W00=1) are set in the area (TYP3 to
TYP0=0x1xB) where WE is used as a write strobe.
255
CHAPTER 4 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
256
CHAPTER 5
I/O PORT
This chapter describes the I/O ports and the configuration and functions of registers.
5.1 Overview of the I/O Port
5.2 I/O Port Registers
257
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
5.1
Overview of the I/O Port
This section provides an overview of the I/O port.
■ Basic Block Diagram of the I/O Port
The MB91301 series interface can be used as an I/O port if settings are made so that the
external bus interface or peripherals corresponding to pins do not use the pins as input/output
pins.
Figure 5.1-1 shows the basic configuration of the I/O port.
Figure 5.1-1 Port Block with Pull-up
Internal Bus
PDR read
Periphral input
0
1
Peripheral output
PDR
1
approx.
Pin
0
PFR
DDR
PCR
PCR=0: No pull-up resistor
PCR=1:With pull-up resistor
PDR :Port Data Register
DDR :Data Direction Register
PFR :Port Function Register
PCR :Pull-up Resistor Control Register
Note:
For port output, the pull-up resistor register is invalid regardless of the setting.
The I/O port consists of PDRs (Port Data Registers), DDRs (Data Direction Registers),
PFRs (Port Function Registers) and PCR (Pull-up Resistance Control Registers).
258
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
■ I/O Port Modes
The I/O port has the following three modes:
❍ Port input mode (PFR=0 & DDR=0)
•
PDR read: Reads the level of the corresponding external pin.
•
PDR write: Writes a setting value to the PDR.
❍ Port output mode (PFR=0 & DDR=1)
•
PDR read: Reads the value of the PDR.
•
PDR write: Outputs the value of the PDR to the corresponding external pin.
❍ Peripheral output mode (PFR=1 & DDR=x)
•
PDR read: Reads the value of the corresponding peripheral output.
•
PDR write: Writes a setting value to the PDR.
Notes:
Use byte access to access to the port.
• When a port from port 0 to port A is used as an external bus pin, the external bus function has
priority. Thus, if the DDR register is rewritten while the port is functioning as an external bus pin,
no input/output switching occurs. The DDR register value is enabled when the pin is switched to
a general-purpose pin by changing the PFR register.
• During stop mode (HIZ = 0), the setting of pull-up resistor control register has priority.
• During stop mode (HIZ = 1), the setting of pull-up resistor control register is disable in the
hardware standby state.
• If port pin is used as the external bus terminal, using pull-up resistor is prohibited. Do not write
"1" to the corresponding bit of pull-up resistor control register (PCR).
259
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
5.2
I/O Port Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the I/O port registers.
■ Configuration of the Port Data Registers (PDR)
Shown below is the configuration of the port data registers (PDR).
Figure 5.2-1 Configuration of the Port Data Registers (PDR)
260
PDR0
bit
7
Address: 000000H
P07
6
P06
5
P05
4
P04
3
P03
2
P02
1
P01
0
P00
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDR1
bit
7
Address: 000001H
P17
6
P16
5
P15
4
P14
3
P13
2
P12
1
P11
0
P10
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDR2
bit
7
Address: 000002H
P27
6
P26
5
P25
4
P24
3
P23
2
P22
1
P21
0
P20
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDR6
bit
7
Address: 000006H
P67
6
P66
5
P65
4
P64
3
P63
2
P62
1
P61
0
P60
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDR8
bit
7
Address: 000008H
P87
6
P86
5
P85
4
P84
3
P83
2
P82
1
P81
0
P80
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDR9
bit
Address: 000009H
6
P96
5
P95
4
P94
3
P93
2
P92
1
P91
0
P90
Initial value
-XXXXXXXB
PDRA
bit
7
Address: 00000AH
PA7
6
PA6
5
PA5
4
PA4
3
PA3
2
PA2
1
PA1
0
PA0
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDRB
bit
7
Address: 00000BH
PB7
6
PB6
5
PB5
4
PB4
3
PB3
2
PB2
1
PB1
0
PB0
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDRG
bit
7
Address: 000010H
PG7
6
PG6
5
PG5
4
PG4
3
PG3
2
PG2
1
PG1
0
PG0
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB R/W
7
-
PDRH
bit
Address: 000011H
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
PH2
1
PH1
0
PH0
PDRJ
bit
Address: 000013H
7
PJ7
6
PJ6
5
PJ5
4
PJ4
3
PJ3
2
PJ2
1
PJ1
0
PJ0
Initial value
-----XXXB
Access
R/W
Access
R/W
Initial value Access
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
•
PDR0 to PDR2, PDR6, PDR8 to PDRB, PDRG, PDRH and PDRJ are the input/output data
registers for the I/O port.
•
Input/output is controlled by the corresponding DDR0 to DDR2, DDR6, DDR8 to DDRB, DDRG,
DDRH and DDRJ, and PFR6, PFR8, PFR9, PFRA1, PFRB1, PFRB2, PFRA2, PFRG, PFRH
and PFRJ.
•
There are not any PFR (Port Function Register) for P00 to P07, P10 to P17, P20 to P27.
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
■ Configuration of the Data Direction Registers (DDR)
Figure 5.2-2 shows the configuration of the data direction registers (DDR).
Figure 5.2-2 Configuration of the Data Direction Registers (DDR)
DDR0
bit
7
Address: 000600H
P07
6
P06
5
P05
4
P04
3
P03
2
P02
1
P01
0
P00
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
DDR1
bit
7
Address: 000601H
P17
6
P16
5
P15
4
P14
3
P13
2
P12
1
P11
0
P10
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
DDR2
bit
7
Address: 000602H
P27
6
P26
5
P25
4
P24
3
P23
2
P22
1
P21
0
P20
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
DDR6
bit
7
Address: 000606H
P67
6
P66
5
P65
4
P64
3
P63
2
P62
1
P61
0
P60
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
DDR8
bit
7
Address: 000608H
P87
6
P86
5
P85
4
P84
3
P83
2
P82
1
P81
0
P80
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
DDR9
bit
Address: 000609H
6
P96
5
P95
4
P94
3
P93
2
P92
1
P91
0
P90
Initial value
-0000000B
Access
R/W
DDRA
bit
7
Address: 00060AH
PA7
6
PA6
5
PA5
4
PA4
3
PA3
2
PA2
1
PA1
0
PA0
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
DDRB
bit
7
Address: 00060BH
PB7
6
PB6
5
PB5
4
PB4
3
PB3
2
PB2
1
PB1
0
PB0
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
DDRG
bit
7
Address: 000400H
PG7
6
PG6
5
PG5
4
PG4
3
PG3
2
PG2
1
PG1
0
PG0
Initial value
000 00000B
Access
R/W
7
-
DDRH
bit
Address: 000401H
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
PH2
1
PH1
0
PH0
Initial value
-----000B
Access
R/W
DDRJ
bit
Address: 000403H
7
PJ7
6
PJ6
5
PJ5
4
PJ4
3
PJ3
2
PJ2
1
PJ1
0
PJ0
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
DDR0 to DDR2, DDR6, DDR8 to DDRB, DDRG, DDRH and DDRJ control the input/output
direction of the corresponding I/O port at the bit level.
•
•
If PFR=0
-
DDR=0: Port input
-
DDR=1: Port output
If PFR=1
-
DDR=0: Peripheral input
-
DDR=1: Peripheral output
261
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
■ Configuration of the Pull-up Resistor Control Registers (PCR)
The configuration of the pull-up resistor control registers (PCR) is shown in Figure 5.2-3:
Figure 5.2-3 Configuration of the Pull-up Resistor Control Registers (PCR)
PCR0
bit
7
Address: 000620H
P07
6
P06
5
P05
4
P04
3
P03
2
P02
1
P01
0
P00
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
PCR1
bit
7
Address: 000621H
P17
6
P16
5
P15
4
P14
3
P13
2
P12
1
P11
0
P10
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
PCR2
bit
7
Address: 000622H
P27
6
P26
5
P25
4
P24
3
P23
2
P22
1
P21
0
P20
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
PCR6
bit
7
Address: 000626H
P67
6
P66
5
P65
4
P64
3
P63
2
P62
1
P61
0
P60
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
PCR8
bit
7
Address: 000628H
P87
6
P86
5
P85
4
P84
3
P83
2
P82
1
P81
0
P80
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
PCR9
bit
Address: 000629H
6
P96
5
P95
4
P94
3
-
2
-
1
P91
0
-
Initial value
-000--0-B
Access
R/W
PCRA
bit
7
Address: 00062AH
PA7
6
PA6
5
PA5
4
PA4
3
PA3
2
PA2
1
PA1
0
PA0
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
PCRB
bit
7
Address: 00062BH
PB7
6
PB6
5
PB5
4
PB4
3
PB3
2
PB2
1
PB1
0
PB0
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
PH2
1
PH1
0
PH0
Initial value
-----000B
Access
R/W
PCRH
bit
Address: 000423H
7
-
7
-
PCR0 to PCR2, PCR6, PCR8 to PCRB, and PCRH control the pull-up resistor of the corresponding
I/O port.
262
•
PCR=0: No pull-up resistance
•
PCR=1: Pull-up resistance
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
■ Configuration of the Port Function Registers (PFR)
The configuration of the port function registers (PFR) is shown in Figure 5.2-4:
Figure 5.2-4 Configuration of the Port Function Registers (PFR)
PFR6
bit
7
Address: 000616H
AE23
6
AE22
5
AE21
4
AE20
3
AE19
2
AE18
1
AE17
0
AE16
Initial value
11111111B
Access
R/W
4
-
3
-
2
BRQE
1
-
0
-
Initial value
111--0--B
Access
R/W
3
-
2
1
0
MCKE MCKEE SYSE
Initial value
-0000111B
Access
R/W
PFRA1
bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address: 00061AH CS7XE CS6XE CS5XE CS4XE CS3XE CS2XE CS1XE CS0XE
Initial value
11111111B
Access
R/W
PFRB1
bit
7
Address: 00061BH
DES1
0
AK00
Initial value
00000000B
Access
R/W
1
0
AKH1 AKH0
Initial value
000---00B
Access
R/W
PFR8
bit
7
6
5
Address: 000618H WR3XE WR2XE WR1XE
PFR9
bit
Address: 000619H
7
-
6
5
4
WRXE BAAE ASXE
4
AK10
3
DES0
2
AK02
PFRB2
bit
7
6
5
Address: 00061CH DRDE DWRE PPE1
4
-
3
-
2
-
PFRA2
bit
Address: 00061EH
5
PPE2
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
-
Initial value
--0------B
Access
R/W
PFRG
bit
7
6
Address: 000410H
SCE2 SOE2
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
-
Initial value
00------B
Access
R/W
PFRH
bit
Address: 000411H
7
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
PPE3
0
-
Initial value
------0- B
Access
R/W
PFRJ
bit
Address: 000413H
7
-
2
1
SCE0 SOE0
0
-
Initial value
-000-00-B
Access
R/W
PFR61
bit
Address: 000417H
7
-
Initial value
----0000B
Access
R/W
7
-
6
AK12
6
-
6
-
5
AK11
6
5
4
PPE0 SCE1 SOE1
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
1
AK01
3
2
1
0
TEST1 TEST0 I2CE1 I2CE0
PFR6, PFR8, PFR9, PFRA1, PFRB1, PFRB2, PFRA2, PFRG, PFRH and PFRJ control the output
of the corresponding external bus interface and peripherals at the bit level.
Be sure to set "0" for Empty bit of PFR.
263
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
■ Function of the Port Function Registers (PFR)
The following table summarizes the initial values and functions of the PFR registers.
Table 5.2-1 Functions of the Port Function Registers (PFR) (1 / 5)
Register name
Bit name
Bit value
Function
0
General-purpose port (P60)
1
Address output
0
General-purpose port (P61)
1
Address output
0
General-purpose port (P62)
1
Address output
0
General-purpose port (P63)
1
Address output
0
General-purpose port (P64)
1
Address output
0
General-purpose port (P65)
1
Address output
0
General-purpose port (P66)
1
Address output
0
General-purpose port (P67)
1
Address output
0
General-purpose port (P82, P81)
1
Enable at setting BREN of BRQ, BGRNT and TCR
register = 1.
0
General-purpose port (P85)
1
WR1/ULBX/DQMUL
0
General-purpose port (P86)
1
WR2/LUBX/DQMLU
0
General-purpose port (P87)
1
WR3/LUBX/DQMLL
0
General-purpose port (P90)
1
Set "1" at using SYSCLK.
0
General-purpose port (P91)
1
MCLKE
AE16
1
AE17
1
AE18
1
AE19
PFR6
000616H
1
AE20
1
AE21
1
AE22
1
AE23
1
BRQE
PFR8
000618H
WR1XE
1
WR3XE
1
SYSE
1
MCKEE
264
0
1
WR2XE
PFR9
000619H
Initial
value
1
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
Table 5.2-1 Functions of the Port Function Registers (PFR) (2 / 5)
Register name
Bit name
Bit value
Function
0
General-purpose port (P92)
1
Set "1" at using memory clock and MCLK
0
General-purpose port (P94)
1
Set "1" at using AS/LBA/SRAS and general/burst memory
0
General-purpose port (P95)
1
Set "1" at using BAA/SCAS and burst memory
0
General-purpose port (P96)
1
Set "1" at using WRn/SWR and general/burst
memory
0
General-purpose port (PA0)
1
CS0 output, Enable at setting CSE0 bit of CSER
register to "1".
0
General-purpose port (PA1)
1
CS1 output, Enable at setting CSE1 bit of CSER
register to "1".
0
General-purpose port (PA2)
1
CS2 output, Enable at setting CSE2 bit of CSER
register to "1".
0
General-purpose port (PA3)
1
CS3 output, Enable at setting CSE3 bit of CSER
register to "1".
0
General-purpose port (PA4)
1
CS4 output, Enable at setting CSE4 bit of CSER
register to "1".
0
General-purpose port (PA5)
1
CS5 output, Enable at setting CSE5 bit of CSER
register to "1".
0
General-purpose port (PA6)
1
CS6 output, Enable at setting CSE6 bit of CSER
register to "1".
0
General-purpose port (PA7)
1
CS7 output, Enable at setting CSE7 bit of CSER
register to "1".
MCKE
1
ASXE
PFR9
000619H
0
BAAE
0
WRXE
CS0XE
CS1XE
CS2XE
CS3XE
PFRA
00061AH
Initial
value
CS4XE
CS5XE
CS6XE
CS7XE
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
265
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
Table 5.2-1 Functions of the Port Function Registers (PFR) (3 / 5)
Register name
Bit name
AK02,
AK01,
AK00
DES0,
PB2
(DDRB)
PFRB1
00061BH
AK12,
AK11,
AK10
DES1,
PB5
(DDRB)
266
Bit value
Function
0,0,0
General-purpose port (PB0, PB1, PB2)
0,0,1
DACK0, DEOP0 output (FR30-compatible for fly-by
transfer)
0,1,0
DACK0, DEOP0 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer RD timing)
0,1,1
DACK0, DEOP0 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer WRn timing)
1,0,0
DACK0, DEOP0 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer WE timing)
1,0,1
DACK0, DEOP0 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer WRn/RD timing)
1,1,0
DACK0, DEOP0 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer WE, RD timing)
1,1,1
DACK0, DEOP0 output (chip select timing)
0,0
General-purpose port input (PB2)
0,1
General-purpose port output (PB2)
1,0
DMAC: DSTP0 input (setting prohibited)
1,1
DMAC: DEOP0 output
Initial
value
000
00
0,0,0
General-purpose port (PB3, PB4, PB5)
0,0,1
DACK1, DEOP1 output (FR30-compatible for fly-by
transfer)
0,1,0
DACK1, DEOP1 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer RD timing)
0,1,1
DACK1, DEOP1 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer WRn timing)
1,0,0
DACK1, DEOP1 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer WE timing)
1,0,1
DACK1, DEOP1 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer WRn/RD timing)
1,1,0
DACK1, DEOP1 output (FR30-compatible for twocycle transfer WE, RD timing)
1,1,1
DACK1, DEOP1 output (chip select timing)
000
0,0
General-purpose port input (PB5)
0,1
General-purpose port output (PB5)
1,0
DMAC: DSTP1 input (setting prohibited)
1,1
DMAC: DEOP1 output
00
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
Table 5.2-1 Functions of the Port Function Registers (PFR) (4 / 5)
Register name
Bit name
Bit value
Function
0
DACK0 output active L
1
DACK0 output active H
0
DACK1 output active L
1
DACK1 output active H
0
General-purpose port (PB5)/DEOP1 output
1
PPG1 output
0
General-purpose port (PB6)
1
IOWR output
0
General-purpose port (PB7)
1
IORD output
0
General-purpose port (PA5)/CS5 output
1
PPG2 output
0
General-purpose port (PG6)
1
SOT2 output
0
General-purpose port (PG7)
1
SCK2 output
0
General-purpose port (PH1)
1
PPG3 output
0
General-purpose port (PJ1)
1
SOT0 output
0
General-purpose port (PJ2)
1
SCK0 output
0
General-purpose port (PJ4)
1
SOT1 output
0
General-purpose port (PJ5)
1
SCK1 output
0
General-purpose port (PJ6)
1
PPG0 output
0
General-purpose port (P65, P64)/address output
(A21, A20)
AKH0
0
AKH1
PFRB2
00061CH
0
PPE1
0
DWRE
0
DRDE
PFRA2
00061EH
0
0
PPE2
SOE2
PFRG
000410H
0
SCE2
PFRH
000411H
0
PPE3
0
SOE0
0
SCE0
PFRJ
000413H
0
SOE1
0
SCE1
0
PPE0
PFR61
000617H
I2CE0
Initial
value
0
1
0
2
I C I/F, SCL0, SDA0 I/O
267
CHAPTER 5 I/O PORT
Table 5.2-1 Functions of the Port Function Registers (PFR) (5 / 5)
Register name
Bit name
I2CE1
PFR61
000617H
Bit value
0
Function
Initial
value
General-purpose port (P67, P66)/address output
(A23, A22)
1
I C I/F, SCL1, SDA1 I/O
0
Be sure to set "0".
1
Test function. Setting disabled.
0
Be sure to set "0".
1
Test function. Setting disabled.
TEST0
0
TEST1
268
0
2
0
•
For enabled PPG1 output, set PPE1 bit = 1 and DES1 bit = 0.
•
For enabled PPG2 output, set PPE2 bit = 1 and CS5XE bit = 0.
•
For enabled SDA0 and SCL0 output, set I2CE0 bit = 1.
•
For enabled SDA1 and SCL1 output, set I2CE1 bit = 1.
•
For enabled general port (P67), set I2CE1 bit = 0 and AE23 bit of the PFR6 register = 0.
•
For enabled general port (P66), set I2CE1 bit = 0 and AE22 bit of the PFR6 register = 0.
•
For enabled general port (P65), set I2CE0 bit = 0 and AE21 bit of the PFR6 register = 0.
•
For enabled general port (P64), set I2CE0 bit = 0 and AE20 bit of the PFR6 register = 0.
•
For enabled address output (A23), set I2CE1 bit = 0 and AE23 bit of the PFR6 register = 1.
•
For enabled address output (A22), set I2CE1 bit = 0 and AE22 bit of the PFR6 register = 1.
•
For enabled address output (A21), set I2CE0 bit = 0 and AE21 bit of the PFR6 register = 1.
•
For enabled address output (A20), set I2CE0 bit = 0 and AE20 bit of the PFR6 register = 1.
CHAPTER 6
16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
This chapter describes the 16-bit reload timer, the configuration and functions of
registers, and 16-bit reload timer operation.
6.1 Overview of the 16-bit Reload Timer
6.2 16-bit Reload Timer Registers
6.3 16-bit Reload Timer Operation
6.4 Operating States of the Counter
6.5 Precautions on Using the 16-bit Reload Timer
269
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
6.1
Overview of the 16-bit Reload Timer
The 16-bit reload timer consists of a 16-bit down counter, a 16-bit reload register, a
prescaler for creating an internal count clock, and a control register.
■ Overview of the 16-bit Reload Timer
The 16-bit reload timer consists of a 16-bit down counter, a 16-bit reload register, a prescaler for
creating an internal count clock, and a control register.
The input clock can be selected from three internal clocks (machine clock divided by 2, 8, and
32) and an external clock.
Channels 0 and 1 supports the activation of DMA transfers resulting from interrupts.
The MB91301 series has three built-in channels, for the 16-bit reload timer.
■ Block Diagram
Figure 6.1-1 is a block diagram of the 16-bit reload timer.
Figure 6.1-1 Block Diagram of the 16-bit Reload Timer
16
16-bit reload register(TMRLR)
7
Reload
16
16-bit timer register (TMR) UF
RELD
OUT
CTL.
R-bus
Count enable
UF
Re-trigger
Clock selector
3
CSL1
CNTE
CSL0
TRG
23 25
Prescaler
clear
3
MOD0
MOD1
CLKP input
3
IRQ
IN CTL.
EXCK
21
270
INTE
MOD2
External
trigger select
External trigger import (TI)
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
6.2
16-bit Reload Timer Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the registers used by the 16bit reload timer.
■ 16-bit Reload Timer Registers
Figure 6.2-1 16-bit Reload Timer Registers
bit
15
-
14
-
13
-
12
-
11
CSL1
10
CSL0
bit
7
MOD0
6
-
5
-
4
RELD
3
INTE
2
UF
bit 15
9
8
MOD2 MOD1 Control status register (TMCSR)
1
CNTE
0
TRG
0
16-bit timer register (TMR)
bit 15
0
16-bit reload register (TMRLR)
271
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
6.2.1
Control Status Register (TMCSR)
The control status register (TMCSR) controls the operating modes and interrupts of
the 16-bit timer.
■ Bit Configuration of the Control Status Register (TMCSR)
Figure 6.2-2 Bit Configuration of the Control Status Register (TMCSR)
bit
15
14
13
12
Address: 00004EH Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
000056H
(R/W)
(R/W)
00005EH
bit
7
MOD0
R/W
6
5
Reserved Reserved
R
R/W
4
RELD
R/W
11
CSL1
R/W
10
CSL0
R/W
9
MOD2
R/W
8
MOD1
R/W
3
INTE
R/W
2
UF
R/W
1
CNTE
R/W
0
TRG
R/W
Initial value
--XX0000B
00000000B
Rewrite bits other than the UF, CNTE, and TRG bits only when CNTE=0.
The control status register (TMCSR) supports simultaneous writing.
When write to bit5, bit12, and bit13, be sure to write "0".
■ Bit Functions of the Control Status Register (TMCSR)
The following describes the bit functions of the control status register (TMCSR).
[bit15] (Reserved)
This bit is unused.
[bit14] (Reserved)
This bit is unused.
[bit13] (Reserved)
Be sure to write "0" at write.
[bit12] (Reserved)
Be sure to write "0" at write.
[bit11, bit10] CSL1, CSL0 (Count source SeLect)
These bits are the count source select bits. Count sources can be selected from the internal
clock or the external event. Table 6.2-1 shows the count sources that can be selected using
these bits. Countable edges used when external event count mode are set using the MOD1
and MOD0 bits
272
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
Table 6.2-1 Count Sources Set Using the CSL Bits
CSL1
CSL0
Clock source (φ: Machine clock)
0
0
Internal clock φ/21 (ch.0 to ch.2)
0
1
Internal clock φ/23 (ch.0 to ch.2)
1
0
Internal clock φ/25 (ch.0 to ch.2)
1
1
External clock (event) (ch.0 to ch.2)
Note:
The minimum pulse width required for an external clock is 2T (T: Peripheral clock machine cycle).
[bit9, bit8, bit7] MOD2, MOD1, MOD0 (MODe): Setting of operation mode
These bits set the operating modes.
These functions are switched by the count source ("internal clock" or "external event").
• Internal clock: setting reload trigger
• External event: setting count enable edge
The MOD2 bit has to be set to "0".
[Reload trigger setting at selecting internal clock]
When internal clock (CSL1, CSL0 = 00B, 01B, 10B) are selected as count source, the contents
of reload register are loaded after inputted enable edge by setting MOD2,MOD1, and MOD0
bits, and count function keep operating. Table 6.2-2 describes the settings of the MOD2,
MOD1, and MOD0 bits.
Table 6.2-2 MOD2,MOD1, and MOD0 Bits Setting Method (in Internal Clock Mode)
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
Valid edge
0
0
0
Software trigger
0
0
1
External trigger (rising edge)
0
1
0
External trigger (falling edge)
0
1
1
External trigger (both edges)
1
x
x
Setting prohibited
Note: x in this table represents any value.
[Valid edge setting at selecting external event]
When external clock event (CSL1, CSL0 = 11B) are selected as count source, the event is
counted after inputted enable edge by setting MOD2 to MOD0 bits. Table 6.2-3 describes
the settings of the MOD2, MOD1, and MOD0 bits.
273
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
Table 6.2-3 MOD2,MOD1, and MOD0 Bits Setting Method (in Selecting Event Count Mode)
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
Valid edge or level
0
0
-
0
1
External event (Rising edge)
1
0
External event (Falling edge)
1
1
External event (Both edges)
x
Note: x in this table represents any value.
Reload of external event is generated by underflow and software trigger.
[bit6] (Reserved)
This bit is unused.
The read value is always "0".
[bit5] (Reserved)
Be sure to write "0" at writing.
[bit4] RELD: Reload enable
This bit is the reload enable bit. If it is set to "1", reload mode is entered. As soon as the
counter value underflows from 0000H to FFFFH, the contents of the reload register are
loaded into the counter and the count operation is continued.
If this bit is set to "0", the count operation is stopped when the counter value underflows from
0000H to FFFFH.
[bit3] INTE: Interrupt request enable
This bit is the interrupt request enable bit. If the INTE bit is set to "1", an interrupt request is
generated when the UF bit is set to "1". If it is set to "0", no interrupt request is generated.
[bit2] UF: Timer interrupt request
This bit is the timer interrupt request flag. This bit is set to "1" when the counter value
underflows from 0000H to FFFFH. Write "0" to this bit to clear it.
Writing "1" to this bit is meaningless. When this bit is read by a read-modify-write instruction,
"1" is always read.
[bit1] CNTE: Count enable bit of timer
This bit is the count enable bit of the timer. Write "1" to this bit to enter the start trigger wait
state. Write "0" to this bit to stop the count operation.
[bit0] TRG: Software trigger
This bit is the software trigger bit. Write "1" to this bit to generate a software trigger, load the
contents of the reload register into the counter, and start the count operation.
Writing "0" to this bit is meaningless. The read value is always "0".
The trigger input to this register is valid only if CNTE=1. No operation occurs if CNTE=0.
274
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
6.2.2
16-bit Timer Register (TMR:TMR2 to TMR0)
The 16-bit timer register (TMR:TMR2 to TMR0) is a register to which the count value of
the 16-bit timer can be read. The initial value is undefined.
Be sure to read this register using a 16-bit data transfer instruction.
■ Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Timer Register (TMR:TMR2 to TMR0)
Figure 6.2-3 shows the bit configuration of the 16-bit timer register (TMR:TMR2 to TMR0).
Figure 6.2-3 Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Timer Register (TMR:TMR2 to TMR0)
bit15
Address: 00004AH
000052H
00005AH
bit0 Initial value
XXXXH
R
R
R
R
...
R
R
R
R
X
X
X
X
...
X
X
X
X
275
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
6.2.3
16-bit Reload Register (TMRLR:TMRLR2 to TMRLR0)
The 16-bit reload register (TMRLR:TMRLR2 to TMRLR0) holds the initial value of a
counter. The initial value is undefined.
Be sure to read this register using a 16-bit data transfer instruction.
■ Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Reload Register (TMRLR:TMRLR2 to TMRLR0)
Figure 6.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the 16-bit reload register (TMRLR:TMRLR2 to
TMRLR0).
Figure 6.2-4 Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Reload Register (TMRLR:TMRLR2 to TMRLR0)
bit15
Address: 000048H
000050H
000058H
276
bit0 Initial value
XXXXH
W
W
W
W
...
W
W
W
W
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
6.3
16-bit Reload Timer Operation
This section describes the following operations of the 16-bit reload timer:
• Internal clock operation
• Underflow operation
■ Internal Clock Operation
If the timer operates with a divide-by clock of the internal clock, one of the clocks created by
dividing the machine clock by 2, 8, or 32 can be selected as the clock source.
To start the count operation as soon as counting is enabled, write "1" to the CNTE and TRG bits
of the control status register. Trigger input occurring due to the TRG bit is always valid
regardless of the operating mode while the timer is running (CNTE=1).
Figure 6.3-1 shows the startup and operations of the counter.
Time as long as T (T: peripheral clock machine cycle) is required after the counter start trigger is
input and before the data of the reload register is actually loaded into the counter.
Figure 6.3-1 Startup and Operations of the Counter
Count clock
Reload data
Counter
-1
-1
-1
Data load
CNTE (register)
TRG (register)
T
277
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
■ Underflow Operation
An underflow is an event in which the counter value changes from 0000H to FFFFH. Thus, an
underflow occurs at the count of [Reload register setting value + 1].
If the RELD bit of the control status register (TMCSR) is set to "1" when an underflow occurs,
the contents of the 16-bit reload register (TMRLR) are loaded and the count operation is
continued. If the RELD bit is set to "0", the counter stops at FFFFH.
An underflow sets the UF bit of the control status register (TMCSR) and, if the INTE bit is set to
"1", generates an interrupt request.
Figure 6.3-2 shows the timing chart of the underflow operation.
Figure 6.3-2 Timing Chart of the Underflow Operation
[RELD=1]
Count clock
Counter
0000H
Reload data
Data load
Underflow set
[RELD=0]
Count clock
Counter
Underflow set
278
0000H
FFFFH
-1
-1
-1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
6.4
Operating States of the Counter
The counter state is determined by the CNTE bit of the control status register (TMCSR)
and the WAIT signal, which is an internal signal. The states that can be set including
the stop state, when CNTE=0 and WAIT=1 (STOP state); the startup trigger wait state,
when CNTE=1 and WAIT=1 (WAIT status); and the operation state, when CNTE=1 and
WAIT=0 (RUN state).
■ Operating States of the Counter
Figure 6.4-1 shows the state transitions.
Figure 6.4-1 Status Transitions of Counter
State transition due to hardware
Reset
STOP CNTE=0, WAIT=1
State transition due to register access
Counter: Holds the value
when it stops;
undefined just
after reset
CNTE=1
TRG=0
WAIT
CNTE=1
TRG=1
CNTE=1, WAIT=1
Counter: Holds the value
when it stops;
undefined just
after reset and
until data is
loaded
RUN
CNTE=1, WAIT=0
Counter: Running
RELD UF
TRG=1
TRG=1
LOAD CNTE=1, WAIT=0
Loads contents of reload
register into counter.
RELD UF
Load completed
279
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
6.5
Precautions on Using the 16-bit Reload Timer
This section contains precautions on using the 16-bit reload timer.
■ Precautions on Using the 16-bit Reload Timer
❍ Internal prescaler
The internal prescaler is enabled if a trigger (software or external trigger) is applied while bit1
(timer enable: CNTE) of the control status register (TMCSR) is set to "1".
❍ Timing of setting and clearing the interrupt request flag
If the device attempts to set and clear the interrupt request flag at the same time, the flag is set
and the clear operation becomes ineffective.
❍ 16-bit reload register (TMRLR)
If the device attempts to write to the 16-bit reload register and reload the data into the 16-bit
reload register at the same time, old data is loaded into the counter. New data is loaded into the
counter only in the next reload timing.
❍ 16-bit timer register (TMR)
If the device attempts to load and count the 16-bit timer register at the same time, the load
(reload) operation takes precedence.
280
CHAPTER 7
PPG TIMER
This chapter describes the PPG timer, register configurations and functions, and PPG
timer operation. The chapter also provides a block diagram of the PPG timer.
7.1 Overview of PPG Timer
7.2 Block Diagram of PPG Timer
7.3 Registers of PPG Timer
7.4 PPG Operation
7.5 One-shot Operation
7.6 PPG Timer Interrupt Source and Timing Chart
7.7 Activating Multiple Channels by Using the General Control Register
7.8 Notes on Use of the PPG Timer
281
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.1
Overview of PPG Timer
The PPG timer can generate PWM wave forms with great precision and efficiency.
The MB91301 series has four built-in channels for the PPG timers.
■ Features of PPG Timer
•
•
•
16-bit down counter
•
16-bit data register with cycle setting buffer
•
16-bit compare register with duty setting buffer
•
Pin controller
One of the following can be selected for the 16-bit down counter clock:
•
Internal clock: φ
•
Internal clock: φ/4
•
Internal clock: φ/16
•
Internal clock: φ/64
•
The counter value can be initialized to FFFFH by using reset and counter borrows.
•
Each channel has a PPG output.
•
Register
•
•
282
Each channel consists of the following elements:
•
Cycle set register: reload data register with buffer
•
Duty set register: compare register with buffer
•
Transfer from buffers is performed by using counter borrows.
Pin control overview
•
When a duty ratio match occurs, the counter value is set to "1". (Preferred)
•
When a counter borrow occurs, the counter value is reset to "0".
•
By using output value fix mode, all-low (or all-high) can be output easily.
•
In addition, the polarity can be specified.
An interrupt request can be generated by the following sources. Interrupt requests can be
used to start DMA transfer.
•
Start of PPG timer
•
Counter borrow (cycle match)
•
Duty cycle match
•
Counter borrow (cycle match) or duty ratio match
•
Software or other interval timers can be used to specify that multiple channels are activated
at the same time. In addition, restart during operation can be specified.
•
Detected request level can be selected from "rising edge", "falling edge" and "both edges".
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.2
Block Diagram of PPG Timer
Figure 7.2-1 shows the block diagram of an entire PPG timer. Figure 7.2-2 shows the
block diagram of one channel of the PPG timer.
■ Block Diagram of the Entire PPG Timer
Figure 7.2-1 Block Diagram of the Entire PPG Timer
16-bit reload timer ch.0
TRG input
PPG timer ch.0
PPG0
16-bit reload timer ch.1
TRG input
PPG timer ch.1
PPG1
TRG input
PPG timer ch.2
PPG2
TRG input
PPG timer ch.3
PPG3
General control
register 2
External TRG0 to TRG3
4
4
General control
register 1
(Source selection)
283
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
■ Block Diagram of One Channel of the PPG Timer
Figure 7.2-2 Block Diagram of One Channel of the PPG Timer
PCRS
PDUT
Prescaler
1/1
1/4
CK
Load
CMP
1/16
1/64
16-bit down counter
Start
Borrow
PPG mask
Peripheral clock
S
Q
PPG output
R
Reverse bit
Enable
TRG input
Edge detection
Software trigger
284
Interrupt
selection
IRQ
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.3
Registers of PPG Timer
Figure 7.3-1 lists the registers of the PPG timer.
■ Register List of PPG Timer
Figure 7.3-1 Register List of PPG Timer
bit 15
0
GCN10
General control register 10
GCN20
PTMR0
PPG Timer register (ch.0)
PCSR0
PPG Cycle set register (ch.0)
PDUT0
PPG Duty set register (ch.0)
PCNH0
PCNL0
Control status register (ch.0)
PTMR1
PPG Timer register (ch.1)
PCSR1
PPG Cycle set register (ch.1)
PDUT1
PPG Duty set register (ch.1)
PCNH1
PCNL1
Control status register (ch.1)
PTMR2
PPG Timer register (ch.2)
PCSR2
PPG Cycle set register (ch.2)
PDUT2
PPG Duty set register (ch.2)
PCNH2
PCNH3
General control register 20
PCNL2
Control status register (ch.2)
PTMR3
PPG Timer register (ch.3)
PCSR3
PPG Cycle set register (ch.3)
PDUT3
PPG Duty set register (ch.3)
PCNL3
Control status register (ch.3)
285
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.3.1
Control Status Registers
(PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0, PCNL:PCNL3 to PCNL0)
The control status register (PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0, PCNL:PCNL3 to PCNL0) controls
the PPG timer and indicates the status of the timer. Note that some bits cannot be
rewritten while the PPG timer is operating.
■ Control Status Registers (PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0, PCNL:PCNL3 to PCNL0)
The bit configuration of the control status registers (PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0, PCNL:PCNL3 to
PCNL0) is shown in Figure 7.3-2.
Figure 7.3-2 Bit Configuration of the Control Status Register
(PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0, PCNL:PCNL3 to PCNL0)
PCNH
bit 15
14
13
12
11
Address: ch.0 000126H CNTE STGR MDSE RTRG CKS1
ch.1 00012EH R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ch.2 000136H
❍
❍
×
×
×
ch.3 00013EH
10
9
CKS0 PGMS
R/W
R/W
×
❍
8
-
Initial value
00000000B
←Rewriting during operation
PCNL
bit
7
Address: ch.0 000127H EGS1
ch.1 00012FH R/W
ch.2 000137H
×
ch.3 00013FH
6
EGS0
R/W
×
5
IREN
R/W
❍
4
IRQF
R/W
❍
3
IRS1
R/W
×
2
IRS0
R/W
×
1
-
0
000000X0B
OSEL
R/W
×
←Rewriting during operation
■ Bit Function of Control Status Registers (PCNH, PCNL)
The bit function of the control status registers (PCNH, PCNL) is shown below.
[bit15] CNTE: Timer enable bit
This bit enables operation of the 16-bit down counter.
Table 7.3-1 Timer enable setting
CNTE
Function
0
Stopped (initial value)
1
Enabled
[bit14] STGR: Software trigger bit
When this bit is written to "1", a software trigger is activated. Whenever this bit is read, a
value of "0" is returned.
286
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
[bit13] MDSE: Mode selection bit
This bit determines whether the PPG operation in which pulses are generated continuously
or the one-shot operation in which only single pulses are generated is used.
Table 7.3-2 Mode selection setting
MDSE
Function
0
PPG operation (initial value)
1
One-shot operation
[bit12] RTRG: Restart enable bit
This bit determines whether restart through a software trigger or trigger input is allowed.
Table 7.3-3 Restart enable setting
RTRG
Function
0
Restart disabled (initial value)
1
Restart enabled
[bit11, bit10] CKS1, CKS0: Counter clock selection bit
These bits select the counter clock of the 16-bit down counter.
Table 7.3-4 Counter clock selection setting
CKS1
CKS0
Cycle
0
0
φ (initial value)
0
1
φ/4
1
0
φ/16
1
1
φ/64
φ: Peripheral machine clock
[bit9] PGMS: PPG output mask selection bit
When this bit is written to "1", the PPG output can be masked to "0" or "1" regardless of the
mode setting, cycle setting, or duty ratio setting.
PPG output when PGMS is set to "1" is shown below.
Table 7.3-5 PPG Output when PGMS is Set to "1"
Polarity
PPG output
Normal polarity
"L" output
Reverse polarity
"H" output
For output of all-"H" for normal polarity (or all-"L" for reverse polarity), write the same value to
the cycle set register and the duty set register to obtain the reverse output of these mask
values.
287
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
[bit8] (Reserved)
This bit is unused bit.
[bit7, bit6] EGS1, EGS0: Trigger input edge selection bit
This bit selects the valid edge for the activation source selected by the general control
register 1.
When the software trigger bit is set to "1", a software trigger is enabled regardless of the
mode selected.
Table 7.3-6 Setting of trigger input edge selection
EGS1
EGS0
Edge selection
0
0
Disabled (initial value)
0
1
Rising edge
1
0
Falling edge
1
1
Both edges
[bit5] IREN: Interrupt request enable bit
This bit specifies whether to enable interrupt requests.
Table 7.3-7 Interrupt request setting
IREN
Function
0
Disabled (initial value)
1
Enabled
[bit4] IRQF: Interrupt request flag
When bit5 (IREN) is set to "Enabled", and the interrupt source specified by bit3 and bit2
(IRS1 and IRS0) occurs, this bit is set and an interrupt request is issued to the CPU. In
addition, when activation of DMA transfer is specified, DMA transfer is started.
This bit is cleared when a value of "0" is written or the clear signal is received from the
DMAC.
The value of this bit does not change even if there is an attempt to set it to "1" via a write
operation.
When this bit is read by read-modify-write instructions, "1" is returned regardless of the bit
value.
[bit3, bit2] IRS1, IRS0: Interrupt source selection bit
These bits select the interrupt source that sets bit4 (IRQF).
Table 7.3-8 Setting of Interrupt Source Selection
288
IRS1
IRS0
Interrupt source
0
0
Software trigger or trigger input (initial value)
0
1
Counter borrow (cycle match)
1
0
Duty match
1
1
Counter borrow (cycle match) or duty match
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
[bit1] (Reserved)
This bit is unused bit.
[bit0] OSEL: PPG output polarity specification bit
This bit specifies the polarity of the PPG output.
It becomes because of the combination with this bit and the PGMS bit of bit9 as shown in
Table 7.3-9.
Table 7.3-9 PPG Output Polarity Specification Combination
PMGS
OSEL
PPG output
0
0
Normal polarity (initial value)
0
1
Reverse polarity
1
0
Fixed to "L" level
1
1
Fixed to "H" level
Table 7.3-10 PPG Output Polarity Specification
Polarity
After reset
Normal polarity
"L" output
Reverse polarity
"H" output
Duty match
Counter borrow
289
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.3.2
PPG Cycle Set Register (PCSR:PCSR3 to PCSR0)
The PCSR:PCSR3 to PCSR0 is a buffer register for setting cycles. It has a buffer.
Transfers from the buffer are performed through counter borrows.
■ Bit Configuration of PPG Cycle Set Register (PCSR:PCSR3 to PCSR0)
The bit configuration of the PCSR:PCSR3 to PCSR0 is shown below.
Figure 7.3-3 Bit Configuration of the PPG Cycle Set Register (PCSR:PCSR3 to PCSR0)
bit 15
Address: ch.0 000122H
ch.1 00012AH W
ch.2 000132H
ch.3 00013AH
0
XXXXH
W
W
W
W
W
W
After initializing or rewriting the PCSR, write to the duty set register.
This register must be accessed in 16-bit data or 32-bit data.
290
Initial value
W
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.3.3
PPG Duty Set Register (PDUT:PDUT3 to PDUT0)
The PDUT:PDUT3 to PDUT0 is a buffer register for setting duties. It has a buffer.
Transfers from the buffer are performed through counter borrows.
■ Bit Configuration of PPG Duty Set Register (PDUT:PDUT3 to PDUT0)
The bit configuration of the PDUT:PDUT3 to PDUT0 is shown below.
Figure 7.3-4 Bit Configuration of PPG Duty Set Register (PDUT:PDUT3 to PDUT0)
bit 15
Address: ch.0 000124H
ch.1 00012CH W
ch.2 000134H
ch.3 00013CH
0
Initial value
XXXXH
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
If the same value is written to the PCSR and PDUT, all-"H" is output for normal polarity and all"L" is output for reverse polarity.
Do not set values so that the condition PCSR < PDUT would be met. Otherwise, the PPG
output becomes undefined.
This register must be accessed in 16-bit data or 32-bit data.
291
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.3.4
PPG Timer Register (PTMR:PTMR3 to PTMR0)
The PTMR:PTMR3 to PTMR0 can be used to read the 16-bit down counter.
■ Bit Configuration of PPG Timer Register (PTMR:PTMR3 to PTMR0)
The bit configuration of the PTMR (PTMR:PTMR3 to PTMR0) is shown below.
Figure 7.3-5 Bit Configuration of PPG Timer Register (PTMR:PTMR3 to PTMR0)
bit 15
Address: ch.0 000120H
ch.1 000128H R
ch.2 000130H
ch.3 000138H
0
FFFFH
R
R
R
This register must be accessed in 16-bit data.
292
Initial value
R
R
R
R
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.3.5
General Control Register 10 (GCN10)
The GCN10 selects the source of the PPG timer trigger input.
■ Bit Configuration of General Control Register 10 (GCN10)
The bit configuration of the GCN10 is shown below.
Figure 7.3-6 Bit Configuration of General Control Register 10 (GCN10)
bit
15
14
Address: 000118H
bit
13
12
11
TSEL[33:30]
10
9
8
TSEL[23:20]
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
1
R/W
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
000119H
TSEL[13:10]
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
←Attribute
←Initial value
TSEL[03:00]
R/W
1
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
←Attribute
←Initial value
R/W
0
■ Details of General Control Register 10 (GCN10)
[bit15 to bit12] TSEL33 to TSEL30: ch.3 trigger input selection bit
These bits are ch.3 trigger input select bits.
Table 7.3-11 Ch.3 Trigger Input Selection
TSEL33 to TSEL30
Function
0
0
0
0
EN0 bit of GCN2
0
0
0
1
EN1 bit of GCN2
0
0
1
0
EN2 bit of GCN2
0
0
1
1
EN3 bit of GCN2 (initial value)
0
1
0
0
16-bit reload timer ch.0
0
1
0
1
16-bit reload timer ch.1
0
1
1
X
Setting prohibited
1
0
0
0
External TRG0
1
0
0
1
External TRG1
1
0
1
0
External TRG2
1
0
1
1
External TRG3
1
1
X
X
Setting prohibited
293
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
[bit11 to bit8] TSEL23 to TSEL20: ch.2 trigger input selection bit
These bits are ch.2 trigger input select bits.
Table 7.3-12 Ch.2 Trigger Input Selection
TSEL23 to TSEL20
Function
0
0
0
0
EN0 bit of GCN2
0
0
0
1
EN1 bit of GCN2
0
0
1
0
EN2 bit of GCN2 (initial value)
0
0
1
1
EN3 bit of GCN2
0
1
0
0
16-bit reload timer ch.0
0
1
0
1
16-bit reload timer ch.1
0
1
1
X
Setting prohibited
1
0
0
0
External TRG0
1
0
0
1
External TRG1
1
0
1
0
External TRG2
1
0
1
1
External TRG3
1
1
X
X
Setting prohibited
[bit7 to bit4] TSEL13 to TSEL10: ch.1 trigger input selection bit
These bits are ch.1 trigger input select bits.
Table 7.3-13 Ch.1 Trigger Input Selection
TSEL13 to TSEL10
294
Function
0
0
0
0
EN0 bit of GCN2
0
0
0
1
EN1 bit of GCN2 (initial value)
0
0
1
0
EN2 bit of GCN2
0
0
1
1
EN3 bit of GCN2
0
1
0
0
16-bit reload timer ch.0
0
1
0
1
16-bit reload timer ch.1
0
1
1
X
Setting prohibited
1
0
0
0
External TRG0
1
0
0
1
External TRG1
1
0
1
0
External TRG2
1
0
1
1
External TRG3
1
1
X
X
Setting prohibited
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
[bit3 to bit0] TSEL03 to TSEL00: ch.0 trigger input selection bit
These bits are ch.0 trigger input select bits.
Table 7.3-14 Ch.0 Trigger Input Selection
TSEL03 to SEL00
ch.0 trigger input
0
0
0
0
EN0 bit of GCN2 (initial value)
0
0
0
1
EN1 bit of GCN2
0
0
1
0
EN2 bit of GCN2
0
0
1
1
EN3 bit of GCN2
0
1
0
0
16-bit reload timer ch.0
0
1
0
1
16-bit reload timer ch.1
0
1
1
X
Setting prohibited
1
0
0
0
External TRG0
1
0
0
1
External TRG1
1
0
1
0
External TRG2
1
0
1
1
External TRG3
1
1
X
X
Setting prohibited
295
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.3.6
General Control Register 20 (GCN20)
The GCN20 activates a start trigger through software.
■ Bit Configuration of General Control Register 20 (GCN20)
The bit configuration of the GCN20 is shown below.
Figure 7.3-7 Bit Configuration of General Control Register 20 (GCN20)
bit
Address: 00011BH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
EN3
EN2
EN1
EN0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
←Attribute
←Initial value
When one of the EN-bits of this register is selected by the GCN10, the register value is passed
to the trigger input of the PPG timer.
The PPG timers of multiple channels can be activated at the same time by generating the edge
selected by the EGS1 and EGS0 bits of the control status register (PCNH, PCNL) via software.
Bit7 to bit4 of this register must be set to "0".
Bit7 to bit0 of address 00011AH must be set to "0".
296
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.4
PPG Operation
The PPG operation allows continuous pulses to be output after a start trigger is
detected. The cycle and duty ratio of the output pulses can be controlled by changing
the values of the PCSR and PDUT, respectively.
After data is written to PCSR, be sure to write to PDUT.
■ PPG Operation
❍ When restart is inhibited
Figure 7.4-1 shows a timing chart of the PPG operation when trigger restart is inhibited.
Figure 7.4-1 Timing Chart of PPG Operation (Trigger Restart Prohibited)
Rising edge detected
Trigger ignored
Start
trigger
m
n
o
PPG
A
B
A=T (n+1) ms
B=T (m+1) ms
T: Counter clock cycle
m: PCSR value
n: PDUT value
297
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
❍ When restart is enabled
Figure 7.4-2 shows the timing chart of the PPG operation when trigger restart is enabled.
Figure 7.4-2 Timing Chart of PPG Operation (Trigger Restart Enabled)
Rising edge detected
Restarted by trigger
Start
trigger
m
n
o
PPG
A
B
A=T (n+1) ms
B=T (m+1) ms
298
T: Counter clock cycle
m: PCSR value
n: PDUT value
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.5
One-shot Operation
The one-shot operation allows output of a single pulse of any width through a trigger.
If restart is enabled, the counter value is reloaded when the edge is detected during
operation.
■ One-shot Operation
❍ When restart is inhibited
Figure 7.5-1 shows the timing chart of a one-shot operation when a trigger restart is inhibited.
Figure 7.5-1 Timing Chart of a One-shot Operation (Trigger Restart Prohibited)
Rising edge detected
Trigger ignored
Start
trigger
m
n
o
PPG
A
B
A=T (n+1) ms
B=T (m+1) ms
T: Counter clock cycle
m: PCSR value
n: PDUT value
299
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
❍ When restart is enabled
Figure 7.5-2 shows the timing chart of a one-shot operation when a trigger restart is enabled.
Figure 7.5-2 Timing Chart of One-shot Operation (Trigger Restart Enabled)
Rising edge detected
Restarted by trigger
Start
trigger
m
n
o
PPG
A
B
A=T (n+1) ms
B=T (m+1) ms
300
T: Counter clock cycle
m: PCSR value
n: PDUT value
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.6
PPG Timer Interrupt Source and Timing Chart
This section describes interrupt sources and provides the related timing charts.
■ Interrupt Sources and Timing Chart (PPG Output: Normal Polarity)
Figure 7.6-1 shows the PPG timer interrupt sources and a timing chart.
A maximum time of 2.5 T (T: counter clock cycle) is required from when a start trigger is activated
to when the counter value is loaded.
Figure 7.6-1 PPG Timer Interrupt Sources and Timing Chart
Start trigger
Maximum of 2.5 T
Load
Clock
Count value
X
0003
0002
0001
0000
0003
PPG
Interrupt
Valid edge
Duty match
Counter borrow
■ Examples for Setting PPG Output to all-"L" or all-"H"
Figure 7.6-2 shows how to set the PPG output to all-"L".
Figure 7.6-2 Example of Setting PPG Output to all-"L"
PPG
Decrease the
duty ratio in
stages.
Set the PGMS (mask bit) to "1" by issuing a borrow interrupt.
Setting the PGMS (mask bit) to "0" with borrow interrupt
allows to output a PPG waveform without whisker.
301
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
Figure 7.6-3 shows an example of setting PPG output to all-"H".
Figure 7.6-3 Example of Setting PPG Output to all-"H"
PPG
Increase duty
ratio in stages.
302
Write the same value as that set in cycle set register by
compare match interrupt.
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.7
Activating Multiple Channels by Using the General Control
Register
You can activate multiple channels at the same time by selecting the start trigger with
the GCN10.
This section shows an example of how GCN20 is set to activate channels via software.
■ Activating Multiple Channels with the GCN
[Setting procedure]
1) Set the cycle in the PCSR.
2) Set the duty ratio in the PDUT.
Note:
The setting must follow the order of PCSR followed by PDUT.
3) Specify the trigger input source for the channel to be activated with GCN10.
In this case, the initial setting is kept because GCN20 is used.
(ch.0 --> EN0, ch.1 --> EN1, ch.2 --> EN2, ch.3 --> EN3)
4) Set the control status register for the channel to be activated.
- CNTE: 1 -->
Enables timer operation.
- STGR: 0 -->
Since the channel is activated by GCN20, this bit is not set.
- MDSE: 0 -->
Selects PPG operation.
- RTRG: 0 -->
Inhibits restart.
- CSK1, CSK0:00 --> Sets the counter clock to φ.
- PGMS: 0 -->
Does not mask PPG output.
- Bits 8:0 -->
Any value can be set because these bits are unused.
- EGS1, EGS0:01 --> Activates channel at a rising edge
- IREN: 1 -->
Enables interrupt request.
- IRQF: 0 -->
Clears interrupt source.
- IRS1, IRS0:01 -->
Issues interrupt request when counter borrow occurs.
- PPE0 to PPE3: 1 --> Enables PPG output. (setting of port function register)
- OSEL: 0 -->
Sets normal polarity.
5) Activate a start trigger by writing data to GCN20.
To activate ch.0 and ch.1 at the same time with the above settings, set the EN0 and EN1 bits of
GCN20 to "1". A rising edge is generated and pulses are output from PPG0 and PPG1.
303
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
■ When the 16-bit Reload Timer is Used for Activation
Specify the 16-bit reload timer as a source in GCN10 (see 3) above). Start the 16-bit reload
timer instead of writing data to GCN20 in 5) above.
In addition, set the control status register as follows:
•
RTRG: 1 --> Enables restart.
•
EGS1, EGS0:11 --> Enables activation by both edges
By setting 16-bit reload timer output to toggle mode, the PPG timer can be restarted at fixed
intervals.
304
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
7.8
Notes on Use of the PPG Timer
This section gives notes on using the PPG timer.
■ Precautions when Using
•
If the interrupt request flag set timing and clear timing are simultaneous, the flag setting
operation overrides the flag clearing operation.
•
The values in bit11 and bit10 in the PPG control register (the CKS1 and CKS0 count lock
select bits) are reflected as soon as they are written. Stop the PPG timer counting when
updating their setting.
•
The PPG down counter (PPGC: 16-bit down counter) prefers loading to counting if they are
wanted simultaneously.
305
CHAPTER 7 PPG TIMER
306
CHAPTER 8
U-TIMER
This chapter describes the U-TIMER, the configuration and functions of registers, and
U-TIMER operation.
8.1 Overview of the U-TIMER
8.2 U-TIMER Registers
8.3 U-TIMER Operation
307
CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER
8.1
Overview of the U-TIMER
This section provides an overview and a block diagram of the U-TIMER (16-bit timer for
UART baud rate generation).
■ Overview of the U-TIMER
The U-TIMER is a 16-bit timer used to generate the baud rate for the UART. Use a combination
of a chip operating frequency and a reload value of the U-TIMER to specify a baud rate.
The U-TIMER, which generates an interrupt upon a counter underflow, can be used as an
interval timer.
The MB91301 series has three built-in U-TIMER channels. When used as an interval timer, two
sets of U-TIMERs can be cascaded to count a maximum interval of 232 x φ. Only the combinations
of Channels 0 and 1 and Channels 0 and 2 can be connected in cascade fashion.
■ Block Diagram
Figure 8.1-1 shows the block diagram of U-TIMER.
Figure 8.1-1 Block Diagram of the U-TIMER
0
15
UTIMR (reload register)
load
15
0
UTIM (timer)
clock
underflow
control
MUX
(Peripheral Clock)
CLKP
Only channel 0
underflow U-TIMER 1
308
f.f.
to UART
CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER
8.2
U-TIMER Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the registers used by the UTIMER.
■ U-TIMER Registers
Figure 8.2-1 shows the registers used by the U-TIMER.
Figure 8.2-1 U-TIMER Registers
bit
15
8 7
UTIM
0
UTIMR
UTIMC
■ U-TIMER (UTIM:UTIM2 to UTIM0)
Figure 8.2-2 shows the bit configuration of the U-TIMER (UTIM:UTIM2 to UTIM0).
Figure 8.2-2 Bit Configuration of the U-TIMER (UTIM:UTIM2 to UTIM0)
bit
ch.0 Address: 000064H
ch.1 Address: 00006CH
ch.2 Address: 000074H
15
14
2
1
0
b15
b14
b2
b1
b0
R
0
Access
Initial value
UTIM indicates the timer value. Use a 16-bit transfer instruction to access this register.
■ Reload Register (UTIMR:UTIMR2 to UTIMR0)
Figure 8.2-3 shows the bit configuration of the reload register (UTIMR:UTIMR2 to UTIMR0).
Figure 8.2-3 Bit Configuration of the Reload Register (UTIMR:UTIMR2 to UTIMR0)
bit
ch.0 Address: 000064H
ch.1 Address: 00006CH
ch.2 Address: 000074H
15
14
2
1
0
b15
b14
b2
b1
b0
W
0
Access
Initial value
UTIMR is a register that stores the value to be reloaded into UTIM if UTIM underflows.
Use a 16-bit transfer instruction to access this register.
Note:
When U-TIMER is used as a baud rate in UART mode 2 (CLK synchronous mode), setting "0" to
UTIMR is prohibited.
309
CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER
■ U-TIMER Control Register (UTIMC:UTIMC2 to UTIMC0)
Figure 8.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the U-TIMER control register (UTIMC:UTIMC2 to
UTIMC0).
Figure 8.2-4 Bit Configuration of the U-TIMER Control Register (UTIMC:UTIMC2 to UTIMC0)
bit
7
ch.0 Address: 000067H UCC1
ch.1 Address: 00006FH
R/W
ch.2 Address: 000077H
0
6
5
4
-
-
UTIE
-
-
R/W
0
3
2
UNDR CLKS
R/W
0
1
0
UTST
UTCR
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W Access
1
Initial value
UTIMC controls the operation of the U-TIMER.
Access with byte transfer instruction.
■ Bit Details of U-TIMER Control Register (UTIMC)
The following describes the functions of the U-TIMER control register (UTIMC) bits.
[bit7] UCC1 (U-timer Count Control 1): Control for counting method
This bit controls the U-TIMER counting method.
Table 8.2-1 Counting Method Control
UCC1
Operation
0
Normal operation α=2n+2 [initial value]
1
+1 mode α=2n+3
n is the setting value of UTIMR.
α is the cycle of the output clock for UART.
The U-TIMER can set a normal cycle, 2(n+1) as well as an odd-numbered division for the
UART.
Set UCC1 to "1" to generate a cycle of 2n+3.
Examples:
1. UTIMR=5, UCC1=0 --> Generation cycle =2n+2= 12 cycles
2. UTIMR=25, UCC1=1 --> Generation cycle =2n+3= 53 cycles
3. UTIMR=60, UCC1=0 --> Generation cycle =2n+2=122 cycles
Set UCC1, UCC0 to use the U-TIMER as the interval timer.
[bit6, bit5] (Reserved)
These bits are reserved.
[bit4] UTIE (U-TIMER Interrupt Enable): Interrupt enable by underflow
This bit is the interrupt enable bit for a U-TIMER underflow.
Table 8.2-2 Interrupt enable by underflow
UTIE
310
Operation
0
Interrupt disabled
1
Interrupt enabled
[initial value]
CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER
[bit3] UNDR (UNDeR flow flag): Indicates generating underflow
This bit indicates that an underflow has occurred.
If the UNDR bit is set while the UTIE bit of bit4 is set to "1", an underflow interrupt occurs.
The UNDR bit is cleared upon a reset or if "0" is written to it.
For a read by a read-modify-write instruction, "1" is always read.
Writing "1" to the UNDR has no effect.
[bit2] CLKS (clock select): Cascade specification
This bit is the cascade specification bit for ch.0 and ch.1 of the U-TIMER.
Table 8.2-3 Cascade specification
CLKS
Operation
0
Uses a peripheral clock (φ) as the clock source. [initial value]
1
Uses an underflow signal of Channel 0 as the U-TIMER source clock timing. *
*: f.f. shown in the block diagram
CLKS is valid only for ch.1 and ch.2. This bit must always be set to "0" for Channel 0.
φ (Peripheral clock = CLKP) has a different cycle depending on the gear setting.
[bit1] UTST (U-TIMER STart): Operation enable
This bit is the U-TIMER operation enable bit.
Table 8.2-4 Operation Enable
UTST
Operation
0
Stopped. Writing "0" during operation stops running of the U-TIMER. [initial
value]
1
Operated. Writing "1" during operation does not stop the U-TIMER.
[bit0] UTCR (U-TIMER CleaR)
Writing "0" to UTCR clears the U-TIMER to 0000H (also clears the f.f. to "0").
The read value is always "1".
311
CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER
■ Precautions on the U-TIMER Control Register (UTIMC)
312
•
In the stop state, assert the start bit UTST (started) to automatically reload data.
•
In the stop state, assert both the clear bit UTCR and the start bit UTST at the same time to
clear the counter to "0" and generate an underflow in the count-down immediately after the
counter is cleared.
•
During operation, the clear bit UTCR is asserted to clear the counter to "0". As a result, a
short, whisker-like pulse may be output in the output waveform, possibly causing the UART
or U-TIMER on the master side in cascade mode to malfunction. While the output clock is
being used, do not clear it using the clear bit.
•
In cascade mode, setting the slave-side UTIMR (reload register) to "0" or "1" causes the
count to be performed incorrectly.
•
In the timer stop state, assert both bit1 (U-TIMER start bit: UTST) and bit0 (U-TIMER clear
bit: UTCR) of the U-TIMER control register at the same time to set bit3 (underflow flag:
UNDR) of this register when the counter is loaded after it has been cleared. At this timing,
the internal baud rate clock is set to "H" level.
•
If the device attempts to set and clear the interrupt request flag at the same time, the flag is
set and the clear operation becomes ineffective.
•
If you select not to use ch.0 in cascade mode or use this module only as the timer function,
always write "0" to bit2 (Reference clock selection bit: CLKS). Additionally, change the setting
of the CLKS bit when this module has stopped.
•
If the device attempts to write to and reload the data into the U-TIMER reload register at the
same time, old data is loaded into the counter. New data is loaded into the counter only in
the next reload timing.
•
If the device attempts to clear and load U-TIMER at the same time, the timer clear operation
takes precedence.
CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER
8.3
U-TIMER Operation
This section describes calculation of a baud rate for the U-TIMER and the timing in
cascade mode.
■ Calculation of Baud Rate
The UART uses the underflow flip-flop (f.f. in the block diagram) of the corresponding U-TIMER
(from U-TIMER0 to UART0 or from U-TIMER1 to UART1 or from U-TIMER2 to UART2) as the
clock source for baud rates.
❍ Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) mode
The UART uses the U-TIMER output divided by 16.
[If UCC1=0]
bps =
φ
(2n+2) × 16
n : UTIMR (reload value)
φ : Peripheral machine clock frequency
[If UCC1=1]
bps =
φ
(Varies depending on the gear)
(2n+3) × 16
Maximum bps 34 MHz 531250 bps, 68 MHz 1062500 bps
❍ CLK synchronous mode
[If UCC1=0]
bps =
φ
(2n+2)
n: UTIMR (reload value)
φ: Peripheral machine clock frequency
[If UCC1=1]
bps =
φ
(Varies depending on the gear)
(2n+3)
Maximum bps 34 MHz 8500000 bps, 68 MHz 17000000 bps
Note:
When U-TIMER is used as a baud rate in UART mode 2 (CLK synchronous mode), setting "0" to
UTIMR is prohibited.
313
CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER
■ Cascade Mode
Channels 0 and 1 of the U-TIMER can be used in cascade mode.
Figure 8.3-1 shows a sample timing chart for when UTIMR ch.0 is set to "0100H" and UTIMR
ch.1 is set to "0002H".
Figure 8.3-1 Timing Chart for Cascade Mode
UTIM ch.1
01 00 02 01 00 02 01 00 02 01 00 02 01 00 02 01 00 02 01 00
f.f. ch.1
UTIM ch.0
f.f. ch.0
314
0002H
0001H
0000H
0100H
CHAPTER 9
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI
CONTROLLER
This chapter describes the overview, the configuration and functions of registers, and
operation of the external interrupt and NMI controller.
9.1 Overview of the External Interrupt and NMI Controller
9.2 External Interrupt and NMI Controller Registers
9.3 Operation of the External Interrupt and NMI Controller
315
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
9.1
Overview of the External Interrupt and NMI Controller
The external interrupt controller is a block that controls external interrupt requests
input to NMI and INT0 to INT7.
"H" level, "L" level, rising edge, or falling edge can be selected as the level of a
request to be detected (except for NMI).
■ Block Diagram of the External Interrupt and NMI Controller
Figure 9.1-1 shows a block diagram of the external interrupt and NMI controller.
Figure 9.1-1 Block Diagram of the External Interrupt and NMI Controller
R-bus
8
Interrupt
request
9
Interrupt enable register
Gate
Source F/F
Edge detection circuit
9
INT0 to INT7
NMI
8
8
316
Interrupt source register
Request level setting register
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
9.2
External Interrupt and NMI Controller Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the registers used by the
external interrupt and NMI controller.
■ External Interrupt and NMI Controller Registers
Figure 9.2-1 shows the registers used by the external interrupt and NMI controller.
Figure 9.2-1 External Interrupt and NMI Controller Registers
bit
7
EN7
6
EN6
5
EN5
4
EN4
3
EN3
2
EN2
1
EN1
0
EN0
15
ER7
14
ER6
13
ER5
12
ER4
11
ER3
10
ER2
9
ER1
8
ER0
bit
15
LB7
14
LA7
13
LB6
12
LA6
11
LB5
10
LA5
9
LB4
8
LA4
bit
7
LB3
6
LA3
5
LB2
4
LA2
3
LB1
2
LA1
1
LB0
0
LA0
bit
External interrupt enable register
(ENIR)
External interrupt Request
Register (EIRR)
External interrupt request level
setting register (ELVR)
317
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
9.2.1
Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR)
This section describes the bit configuration and function of the interrupt enable
register (ENIR).
■ Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR: ENable Interrupt Request Register)
Figure 9.2-2 shows the bit configuration of the interrupt enable register (ENIR)
Figure 9.2-2 Bit Configuration of the Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR)
bit
Address: 000041H
7
EN7
R/W
6
EN6
R/W
5
EN5
R/W
4
EN4
R/W
3
EN3
R/W
2
EN2
R/W
1
EN1
R/W
0
EN0
R/W
Initial value
00000000B
The interrupt enable register (ENIR) performs mask control for external interrupt request output.
Output for an interrupt request is enabled based on the bit in this register to which "1" has been
written (INT0 enable is controlled by EN0), after which the interrupt request is output to the
interrupt controller. The pin corresponding to the bit to which "0" is written holds the interrupt
source but does not generate a request to the interrupt controller.
Note:
No mask bit exists for NMI.
318
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
9.2.2
External Interrupt Request Register (EIRR)
This section describes the bit configuration and functions of the external interrupt
Request Register EIRR.
■ External Interrupt Request Register (EIRR: External Interrupt Request Register)
Figure 9.2-3 shows the bit configuration of the external interrupt Request Register (EIRR).
Figure 9.2-3 Bit Configuration of the External Interrupt Request Register (EIRR)
bit
Address: 000040H
15
ER7
R/W
14
ER6
R/W
13
ER5
R/W
12
ER4
R/W
11
ER3
R/W
10
ER2
R/W
9
ER1
R/W
8
ER0
R/W
Initial value
00000000B
The EIRR register, when it is read, indicates that a corresponding external interrupt request
exists. When it is written to, the contents of the flip-flop (NMI flag) that indicates this request are
cleared. If "1" is read from the EIRR register, an external interrupt request exists at the pin
corresponding to this bit.
Write "0" to this register to clear the request flip-flop of the corresponding bit.
Writing "1" to this register has no effect.
For a read by a read-modify-write instruction, "1" is read.
Note:
The NMI flag cannot be read or written to by a user.
For information about the NMI flag, see "NMI" in Section "9.3 Operation of the External Interrupt
and NMI Controller".
When the INT0 to INT7 pins input the "H" level in the stop state, their respective ER0 to ER7 bits
are set to "1".
319
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
9.2.3
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register (ELVR)
This section describes the bit configuration and functions of the external interrupt
request level setting register (ELVR).
■ External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register (ELVR: External Level Register)
Figure 9.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the external interrupt request level setting register
(ELVR).
Figure 9.2-4 Bit Configuration of the External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register (ELVR)
bit
15
LB7
R/W
14
LA7
R/W
13
LB6
R/W
12
LA6
R/W
11
LB5
R/W
10
LA5
R/W
9
LB4
R/W
8
LA4
R/W
Initial value
00000000B
bit
7
LB3
R/W
6
LA3
R/W
5
LB2
R/W
4
LA2
R/W
3
LB1
R/W
2
LA1
R/W
1
LB0
R/W
0
LA0
R/W
Initial value
00000000B
Address: 000042H
Address: 000043H
The external interrupt request level setting register (ELVR) selects how a request is detected.
Two bits are assigned to each of INT0 to INT7, which results in the settings shown in Table 9.21. Even though the bits of the EIRR are cleared while the request input is a level, the pertinent
bits are set again as long as the input is an active level.
Table 9.2-1 Settings of the LBn and LAn Bits
LBn
LAn
Operation
0
0
"L" level indicates the existence of a request.
0
1
"H" level indicates the existence of a request.
1
0
A rising edge indicates the existence of a request.
1
1
A falling edge indicates the existence of a request.
Note:
A falling edge is always detected at NMI (except in the stop state).
In the stop state, the "L" level is detected.
INT should be set "H" level at stop.
320
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
9.3
Operation of the External Interrupt and NMI Controller
After a request level and an enable register are specified, if a request specified in the
external interrupt request level setting register (ELVR) is input to the corresponding
pin, this module generates an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller.
■ Operation of an External Interrupt
For simultaneous interrupt requests, the interrupt controller determines the interrupt request with
the highest priority and generates an interrupt for it.
Figure 9.3-1 shows external interrupt operation.
Figure 9.3-1 External Interrupt Operation
External interrupt
ELVR
Resource
request
Interrupt controller
ENIR
IL
ICR y y
EIRR
CPU
CMP
ICR x x
CMP
ILM
Source
■ Return from Standby
To use an external interrupt to return from the stop state, use an "H" level request as the input
request regardless of setting the external interrupt request level setting register (ELVR).
Note:
Cut off the pull-up for the INT0 to INT7 pin in the stop state.
■ Operating Procedure for an External Interrupt
Set up a register located inside the external interrupt block as follows:
1) Set the general-purpose I/O port served dual use as the pin for the external interrupt input to
input port.
2) Disable the target bit in the enable register.
3) Set the target bit in the request level setting register.
4) Clear the target bit in the interrupt register.
5) Enable the target bit in the enable register.
Simultaneous writing of 16-bit data is supported for steps 4) and 5).
Before setting a register in this module, you must disable the enable register. In addition, before
enabling the enable register, you must clear the interrupt Request Register. This procedure is
required to prevent an interrupt source from occurring by mistake while a register is being set or
an interrupt is enabled.
321
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
■ External Interrupt Request Level
If the request level is an edge request, a pulse width of at least three machine cycles (peripheral
clock machine cycles) is required to detect an edge.
If the request input level is a level setting, the pulse width must be at least 3 machine cycles.
Also, as long as the interrupt input pin retains the active level, the interrupt request is
continuously made to the interrupt controller, even if the source register is cleared.
If the request input level is a level setting and request input arrives from outside and is then
cancelled, the request to the interrupt controller remains active because a source holding circuit
exists internally.
The interrupt Request Register must be cleared to cancel a request to the interrupt controller.
Figure 9.3-2 shows clearing of the source holding circuit when a level is set. Figure 9.3-3 shows
an interrupt source and an interrupt request to the interrupt controller when interrupts are
enabled.
Figure 9.3-2 Clearing the Source Holding Circuit when a Level is Set
Interrupt input
Source F/F
(Source holding circuit)
Level detection
Enable gate
Interrupt controller
Holds a source while it is not cleared
Figure 9.3-3 Interrupt Source and Interrupt Request to Interrupt Controller when Interrupts are Enabled
"H" level
Interrupt input
Interrupt request to
interrupt controller
Becomes inactive when source F/F is cleared
■ NMI
An NMI has the highest level among the user interrupts and usually cannot be masked.
However, as an exception, if an NMI is activated before it is set in ILM, the CPU dose not accept
the NMI but only detects the NMI source. The NMI source is then held until ILM is set to the
level that allows the NMI to be accepted. For this reason, before using an NMI, be sure to set
ILM to 16 or more after a reset.
As the internal source flag of NMI cannot be accessed by the CPU, the NMI pin must be
maintained at the level "H" after a reset.
An NMI is accepted under the following conditions:
•
Normal:
falling edge
•
STOP mode: "L" level
An NMI can be used to clear stop mode. Inputting the "L" level in the stop state clears the stop
state and causes the oscillation stabilization wait time to start. To perform NMI processing after
clearing the stop state, maintain the NMI pin at the "L" level and return it to the "H" level in the
NMI processing routine.
The NMI request detector has an NMI flag that is set for an NMI request and is cleared only if an
interrupt for the NMI itself is accepted or a reset occurs. Note that this bit is not readable or
writable.
322
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
Figure 9.3-4 shows the NMI request detector.
Figure 9.3-4 NMI Request Detector
(NMI flag)
NMI request
(Stop clearing)
0
Q SX
R
Falling edge
detection
NMI
1
STOP
clear (RST, interrupt acknowledge)
■ Notes on Returning from STOP State Using External Interrupt
In a STOP state, the first external interrupt signal to be input to the INT pin is input without being
synchronized, enabling return from the STOP state. However, there is a period in which no
other external interrupt signals can be recognized (period of b + c + d shown in Figure 9.3-5)
between when the STOP state is released and when the oscillation stabilization wait time
passes. This is because an external input signal is synchronized with the internal clock after the
STOP state is released; therefore, that interrupt source cannot be retained until the clock
stabilizes.
When inputting an external interrupt signal after the STOP state is released, wait until the
oscillation stabilization wait time elapses.
Figure 9.3-5 Sequence of Return Operation from STOP State Using External Interrupt
INT1
INT0
Internal STOP
"H"
Regulator
"L"
Internal operation
(RUN)
Command run (RUN)
X0
Internal clock
Clearing the interrupt flag
INTR0
INTE0
"1": enable (set before moving to the STOP mode)
INTR1
INTE1
"1": enable (set before moving to the STOP mode)
(a)STOP (b)Regulator stabilization wait time
(d)Oscillation stabilization wait time (e)RUN
(c)Oscillator oscillation time
323
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
■ Return Operation from STOP State
The following operation is performed on the current circuit when an external interrupt is used to
return from the STOP state.
● Procedure prior to STOP state transition
Setting a path for an external interrupt
It is necessary to set a path for inputting an external interrupt in order to release the STOP
state before the device enters the STOP state. The PFR register (Port Function Register) is
used to perform this procedure. In a normal state (state other than the STOP state), an
interrupt input path is already allocated. Therefore, the above procedure should be ignored.
However, the input path is controlled by the value of the PFR register in the STOP state.
Name of pin used to release STOP state
Register and bit to be set
INT7/SCK2/PG7
Set bit 7 in PDRG to “0”.
INT6/SDT2/PG6
Set bit 6 in PDRG to “0”.
INT5/SIN2/PG5
Set bit 5 in PDRG to “0”.
INT4/ATG/PG4/FRCK
Set bit 4 in PDRG to “0”.
INT3/PG3/ICU3
Set bit 3 in PDRG to “0”.
INT2/PG2/ICU2
Set bit 2 in PDRG to “0”.
INT1/PG1/ICU1
Set bit 1 in PDRG to “0”.
INT0/PG0/ICU0
Set bit 0 in PDRG to “0”.
• Inputting an external interrupt
When returning from a STOP state, an external interrupt signal is ready to transmit an input
signal without synchronization. As soon as this interrupt signal becomes valid, the internal
STOP signal immediately starts to fall. At the same time, the external interrupt circuit is
switched to synchronize another level interrupt input.
● Regulator stabilization wait time
Once the internal STOP signal falls, the STOP regulator is switched to the RUN regulator. A
stabilization wait time is secured for the internal output voltage because the operation becomes
unstable when the internal operation starts before the output voltage of the RUN Regulator
stabilizes. The clock is stopped during this period.
● Oscillator’s oscillation time
The clock starts oscillating once the regulator stabilization wait time has passed. The oscillation
time varies depending of the oscillator used.
● Oscillation stabilization wait time
The oscillation stabilization wait time is taken within the device after the time. The oscillation
stabilization wait time is specified by the OS1 and OS0 bits in the standby control register. Once
the oscillation stabilization wait time has passed, an internal clock is supplied, an instruction
operation can be started by an external interrupt and any external interrupt source other than
the source for returning from the STOP state can be accepted.
324
CHAPTER 10
DELAYED INTERUPT MODULE
This chapter describes the functions and operation of the delayed interrupt module.
10.1 Overview of the Delayed Interrupt Module
10.2 Delayed Interrupt Module Registers
10.3 Operation of the Delayed Interrupt Module
325
CHAPTER 10 DELAYED INTERUPT MODULE
10.1 Overview of the Delayed Interrupt Module
The delayed interrupt module generates an interrupt for switching tasks. Use this
module to allow a software program to generate an interrupt request for the CPU or to
clear an interrupt request.
■ Block Diagram of the Delayed Interrupt Module
Figure 10.1-1 shows a block diagram of the delayed interrupt module.
Figure 10.1-1 Block Diagram of the Delayed Interrupt Module
R-bus
Interrupt request
326
DLYI
CHAPTER 10 DELAYED INTERUPT MODULE
10.2 Delayed Interrupt Module Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the registers used by the
delayed interrupt module.
■ Delayed Interrupt Module Registers
The delayed interrupt module includes the delayed interrupt control register (DICR).
Figure 10.2-1 shows the configuration of the delayed interrupt control register (DICR).
Figure 10.2-1 Configuration of the Delayed Interrupt Control Register (DICR)
bit
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
DLYI
Delayed interrupt control register
(DICR)
■ Delayed Interrupt Control Register (DICR)
The delayed interrupt control register (DICR: Delayed Interrupt Control Register) controls
delayed interrupts.
Figure 10.2-2 shows the bit configuration of the delayed interrupt control register (DICR).
Figure 10.2-2 Bit Configuration of the Delayed Interrupt Control Register (DICR)
bit
Address: 000044H
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
DLYI
R/W
Initial value
-------0B
The following describes the bit functions of the delayed interrupt control register (DICR) bits.
[bit0] DLYI
This bit controls the generation and clearing of the pertinent interrupt source.
Table 10.2-1 shows the function for the generation and clearing of the pertinent interrupt source.
Table 10.2-1 Functions for Generation and Clearing the Pertinent Interrupt Source
DLYI
Description
0
A delayed interrupt source is cleared or no request exists. [initial value]
1
A delayed interrupt source is generated.
327
CHAPTER 10 DELAYED INTERUPT MODULE
10.3 Operation of the Delayed Interrupt Module
A delayed interrupt refers to an interrupt generated for switching tasks. Use this
function to allow a software program to generate an interrupt request for the CPU or to
clear an interrupt request.
■ Interrupt Number
A delayed interrupt is assigned to the interrupt source corresponding to the largest interrupt
number.
On the MB91301 series, a delayed interrupt is assigned to interrupt number 63 (3FH).
■ DLYI Bit of DICR
Write "1" to this bit to generate a delayed interrupt source. Write "0" to it to clear a delayed
interrupt source.
This bit is the same as the interrupt source flag for a normal interrupt. Therefore, clear this bit
and switch tasks in the interrupt routine.
328
CHAPTER 11
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
This chapter describes the overview of the interrupt controller, the configuration and
functions of registers, and interrupt controller operation. It also presents an example
of using the hold request cancellation request function.
11.1 Overview of the Interrupt Controller
11.2 Interrupt Controller Registers
11.3 Interrupt Controller Operation
11.4 Example of Using the Hold Request Cancellation Request Function
(HRCR)
329
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
11.1 Overview of the Interrupt Controller
The interrupt controller controls interrupt acceptance and arbitration processing.
■ Hardware Configuration of the Interrupt Controller
The interrupt controller consists of the following components:
•
Interrupt control registers (ICR) register
•
Interrupt priority decision circuit
•
Interrupt level and interrupt number (vector) generator
•
HOLD request cancellation request generator
■ Major Functions of the Interrupt Controller
The interrupt controller has the following major functions:
330
•
Detecting NMI requests and interrupt requests
•
Deciding priority (using a level or number)
•
Passing to the CPU an interrupt level based on the decision result to provide information
about the interrupt source
•
Passing to the CPU an interrupt number based on the decision result to provide information
about the interrupt source
•
Instruction for return from stop mode due to the occurrence of an interrupt with an NMI/
interrupt level other than 11111B (to CPU)
•
Generating a HOLD request cancellation request for the bus master
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
■ Block Diagram
Figure 11.1-1 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller.
Figure 11.1-1 Block Diagram of the Interrupt Controller
UNMI
WAKEUP (LEVEL
11111B : "1")
Priority decision
5
LEVEL4 to LEVEL0
NMI
processing
LEVEL
and
VECTOR
generation
LEVEL decision
RI00
ICR00
.
.
.
.
.
.
RI47
(DLYIRQ)
ICR47
VECTOR
decision
6
HLDREQ
cancellation
request
MHALTI
VCT5 to VCT0
R-bus
331
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
11.2 Interrupt Controller Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the registers used by the
interrupt controller.
■ Interrupt Controller Registers
Figure 11.2-1 shows the registers of the interrupt controller.
Figure 11.2-1 Interrupt Controller Registers
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
bit
000440H
000441H
000442H
000443H
000444H
000445H
000446H
000447H
000448H
000449H
00044AH
00044BH
00044CH
00044DH
00044EH
00044FH
000450H
000451H
000452H
000453H
000454H
000455H
000456H
000457H
000458H
000459H
00045AH
00045BH
00045CH
00045DH
00045EH
00045FH
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR00
ICR01
ICR02
ICR03
ICR04
ICR05
ICR06
ICR07
ICR08
ICR09
ICR10
ICR11
ICR12
ICR13
ICR14
ICR15
ICR16
ICR17
ICR18
ICR19
ICR20
ICR21
ICR22
ICR23
ICR24
ICR25
ICR26
ICR27
ICR28
ICR29
ICR30
ICR31
(Continued)
332
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
(Continued)
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
Address:
bit
000460H
000461H
000462H
000463H
000464H
000465H
000466H
000467H
000468H
000469H
00046AH
00046BH
00046CH
00046DH
00046EH
00046FH
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
ICR4
3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
ICR3
2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
ICR2
1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
ICR1
0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR0
ICR32
ICR33
ICR34
ICR35
ICR36
ICR37
ICR38
ICR39
ICR40
ICR41
ICR42
ICR43
ICR44
ICR45
ICR46
ICR47
Address:
000045H
MHALTI
-
-
LVL4
LVL3
LVL2
LVL1
LVL0
HRCL
333
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
11.2.1 Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
An interrupt control register is provided for each of the interrupt input and sets the
interrupt level of the corresponding interrupt request.
■ Bit Configuration of Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
Figure 11.2-2 shows the bit configuration of the interrupt control register (ICR: Interrupt Control
Register).
Figure 11.2-2 Bit Configuration of the Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
bit
Address 000440H
to
00046FH
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
ICR4
R
3
ICR3
R/W
2
ICR2
R/W
1
ICR1
R/W
0
ICR0
R/W
Initial value
---11111B
■ Detailed Bit of Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
The following describes the bit functions of the interrupt control register (ICR).
[bit4 to bit0] ICR4 to ICR0 interrupt level setting
These bits, which are the interrupt level setting bits, specify the interrupt level of the
corresponding interrupt request.
If an interrupt request has an interrupt level specified in this register that exceeds the level
mask value specified in the interrupt level mask register (ILM) of the CPU, it is masked by
the CPU.
These bits are initialized to 11111B by a reset.
Table 11.2-1 shows the correspondence between possible interrupt level setting bits and
interrupt levels.
334
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Table 11.2-1 Correspondence between Possible Interrupt Level Setting Bits and Interrupt
Levels
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
Interrupt level
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
14
0
1
1
1
1
15
NMI
1
0
0
0
0
16
Maximum level that can be set
1
0
0
0
1
17
1
0
0
1
0
18
1
0
0
1
1
19
1
0
1
0
0
20
1
0
1
0
1
21
1
0
1
1
0
22
1
0
1
1
1
23
1
1
0
0
0
24
1
1
0
0
1
25
1
1
0
1
0
26
1
1
0
1
1
27
1
1
1
0
0
28
1
1
1
0
1
29
1
1
1
1
0
30
1
1
1
1
1
31
Reserved for system
(High)
(Low)
Interrupt disabled
Note: The ICR4 bit is always "1". "0" cannot be written to it.
335
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
11.2.2 Hold Request Cancellation Request Level Setting
Register (HRCL)
The hold request cancellation request level setting register (HRCL) is a level setting
register used to generate a hold request cancellation request.
■ Bit Configuration of Hold Request Cancellation Request Level Setting Register (HRCL)
Figure 11.2-3 shows the bit configuration of the hold request cancellation request level setting
register (HRCL).
Figure 11.2-3 Bit Configuration of the Hold Request Cancellation Request Level Setting Register (HRCL)
bit
7
Address: 000045H MHALTI
R/W
6
-
5
-
4
LVL4
R
3
LVL3
R/W
2
LVL2
R/W
1
LVL1
R/W
0
LVL0
R/W
Initial value
0--11111B
■ Detailed Bit of Hold Request Cancellation Request Level Setting Register (HRCL)
The following describes the bit functions of the hold request cancellation request level setting
register (HRCL).
[bit7] MHALTI: DMA transfer disable by NMI request
This bit is the DMA transfer disable bit controlled by an NMI request. An NMI request sets
this bit to "1". Write "0" to this bit to clear it. At the end of an NMI routine, clear this bit the
same way it would be cleared in a normal interrupt routine.
[bit4 to bit0] LVL4 to LVL0: Interrupt level setting
These bits set the interrupt level used to issue a hold request cancellation request to the bus
master.
If an interrupt request with a higher level than the level specified in the HRCL register occurs,
issue a hold request cancellation request to the bus master.
The LVL4 bit is always "1". "0" cannot be written to it.
336
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
11.3 Interrupt Controller Operation
This section describes the following items regarding operation of the interrupt
controller:
• Priority decision
• NMI
• Hold request cancellation request
• Return from standby mode (stop/sleep)
■ Priority Decision
The interrupt controller selects the interrupt source with the highest priority from among those
that exist simultaneously and outputs the interrupt level and the interrupt number of this source
to the CPU.
The following shows the priority decision criteria for interrupt sources:
•
NMI
•
Source that meets the following conditions:
-
Source with a value other than 31 as the interrupt level (31 means interrupts disabled)
-
Source with the smallest value for the interrupt level
-
Source with the smallest interrupt number that satisfies the both conditions above
If no interrupt source is selected according to the above decision criteria, 31 (11111B) is output
as the interrupt level. The interrupt number at this time is undefined.
Table 11.3-1 shows the relationship between interrupt sources, interrupt numbers and interrupt
levels.
Table 11.3-1 Relationship between Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Numbers, and Interrupt Levels (1 / 4)
Interrupt number
Offset
Default
address of
TBR
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Interrupt
level
Reset
0
00
−
3FCH
000FFFFCH
−
Mode vector
1
01
−
3F8H
000FFFF8H
−
Reserved for system
2
02
−
3F4H
000FFFF4H
−
Reserved for system
3
03
−
3F0H
000FFFF0H
−
Reserved for system
4
04
−
3ECH
000FFFECH
−
Reserved for system
5
05
−
3E8H
000FFFE8H
−
Reserved for system
6
06
−
3E4H
000FFFE4H
−
No-coprocessor trap
7
07
−
3E0H
000FFFE0H
−
Coprocessor error trap
8
08
−
3DCH
000FFFDCH
−
INTE instruction
9
09
−
3D8H
000FFFD8H
−
Instruction break exception
10
0A
−
3D4H
000FFFD4H
−
Interrupt source
337
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Table 11.3-1 Relationship between Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Numbers, and Interrupt Levels (2 / 4)
Interrupt number
Offset
Default
address of
TBR
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Interrupt
level
Operand break trap
11
0B
−
3D0H
000FFFD0H
−
Step trace trap
12
0C
−
3CCH
000FFFCCH
−
NMI request (tool)
13
0D
−
3C8H
000FFFC8H
−
Undefined instruction exception
14
0E
−
3C4H
000FFFC4H
−
NMI request
15
0F
Fixed to
15(FH)
3C0H
000FFFC0H
−
External Interrupt 0
16
10
ICR00
3BCH
000FFFBCH
6
External Interrupt 1
17
11
ICR01
3B8H
000FFFB8H
7
External Interrupt 2
18
12
ICR02
3B4H
000FFFB4H
11
External Interrupt 3
19
13
ICR03
3B0H
000FFFB0H
12
External Interrupt 4
20
14
ICR04
3ACH
000FFFACH
−
External Interrupt 5
21
15
ICR05
3A8H
000FFFA8H
−
External Interrupt 6
22
16
ICR06
3A4H
000FFFA4H
−
External Interrupt 7
23
17
ICR07
3A0H
000FFFA0H
−
Reload Timer 0
24
18
ICR08
39CH
000FFF9CH
8
Reload Timer 1
25
19
ICR09
398H
000FFF98H
9
Reload Timer 2
26
1A
ICR10
394H
000FFF94H
10
UART0 (reception completed)
27
1B
ICR11
390H
000FFF90H
0
UART1 (reception completed)
28
1C
ICR12
38CH
000FFF8CH
1
UART2 (reception completed)
29
1D
ICR13
388H
000FFF88H
2
UART0 (transmission completed)
30
1E
ICR14
384H
000FFF84H
3
UART1 (transmission completed)
31
1F
ICR15
380H
000FFF80H
4
UART2 (transmission completed)
32
20
ICR16
37CH
000FFF7CH
5
DMAC0 (end, error)
33
21
ICR17
378H
000FFF78H
−
DMAC1 (end, error)
34
22
ICR18
374H
000FFF74H
−
DMAC2 (end, error)
35
23
ICR19
370H
000FFF70H
−
DMAC3 (end, error)
36
24
ICR20
36CH
000FFF6CH
−
DMAC4 (end, error)
37
25
ICR21
368H
000FFF68H
−
A/D
38
26
ICR22
364H
000FFF64H
15
PPG0
39
27
ICR23
360H
000FFF60H
13
PPG1
40
28
ICR24
35CH
000FFF5CH
14
Interrupt source
338
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Table 11.3-1 Relationship between Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Numbers, and Interrupt Levels (3 / 4)
Interrupt number
Offset
Default
address of
TBR
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Interrupt
level
PPG2
41
29
ICR25
358H
000FFF58H
−
PPG3
42
2A
ICR26
354H
000FFF54H
−
Reserved for system
43
2B
ICR27
350H
000FFF50H
−
U-TIMER0
44
2C
ICR28
34CH
000FFF4CH
−
U-TIMER1
45
2D
ICR29
348H
000FFF48H
−
U-TIMER2
46
2E
ICR30
344H
000FFF44H
−
Time-base timer overflow
47
2F
ICR31
340H
000FFF40H
−
I2C I/F0
48
30
ICR32
33CH
000FFF3CH
−
I2C I/F1
49
31
ICR33
338H
000FFF38H
−
Reserved for system
50
32
ICR34
334H
000FFF34H
−
Reserved for system
51
33
ICR35
330H
000FFF30H
−
16-bit free run timer
52
34
ICR36
32CH
000FFF2CH
−
ICU0 (fetch)
53
35
ICR37
328H
000FFF28H
−
ICU1 (fetch)
54
36
ICR38
324H
000FFF24H
−
ICU2 (fetch)
55
37
ICR39
320H
000FFF20H
−
ICU3 (fetch)
56
38
ICR40
31CH
000FFF1CH
−
Reserved for system
57
39
ICR41
318H
000FFF18H
−
Reserved for system
58
3A
ICR42
314H
000FFF14H
−
Reserved for system
59
3B
ICR43
310H
000FFF10H
−
Reserved for system
60
3C
ICR44
30CH
000FFF0CH
−
Reserved for system
61
3D
ICR45
308H
000FFF08H
−
Reserved for system
62
3E
ICR46
304H
000FFF04H
−
Delayed interrupt source bit
63
3F
ICR47
300H
000FFF00H
−
Reserved for system
(used in REALOS)
64
40
−
2FCH
000FFEFCH
−
Reserved for system
(used in REALOS)
65
41
−
2F8H
000FFEF8H
−
Reserved for system
66
42
−
2F4H
000FFEF4H
−
Reserved for system
67
43
−
2F0H
000FFEF0H
−
Reserved for system
68
44
−
2ECH
000FFEECH
−
Reserved for system
69
45
−
2E8H
000FFEE8H
−
Reserved for system
70
46
−
2E4H
000FFEE4H
−
Interrupt source
339
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Table 11.3-1 Relationship between Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Numbers, and Interrupt Levels (4 / 4)
Interrupt number
Offset
Default
address of
TBR
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Interrupt
level
Reserved for system
71
47
−
2E0H
000FFEE0H
−
Reserved for system
72
48
−
2DCH
000FFEDCH
−
Reserved for system
73
49
−
2D8H
000FFED8H
−
Reserved for system
74
4A
−
2D4H
000FFED4H
−
Reserved for system
75
4B
−
2D0H
000FFED0H
−
Reserved for system
76
4C
−
2CCH
000FFECCH
−
Reserved for system
77
4D
−
2C8H
000FFEC8H
−
Reserved for system
78
4E
−
2C4H
000FFEC4H
−
Reserved for system
79
4F
−
2C0H
000FFEC0H
−
80 to 255
50 to FF
−
2BCH
to
000H
000FFEBCH
to
000FFC00H
−
Interrupt source
Used in INT instruction
■ NMI
An NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) has the highest priority among the interrupt sources handled
by the interrupt controller. Thus, an NMI is always selected if it occurs at the same time as other
interrupt sources.
•
•
If an NMI occurs, the following information is reported to the CPU:
-
Interrupt level:15 (01111B)
-
Interrupt number:15 (0001111B)
Detecting an NMI
The external interrupt and NMI module sets and detects an NMI. This module only generates
an interrupt level, interrupt number, and MHALTI in response to an NMI request.
•
Preventing a DMA transfer occurring due to an NMI
If an NMI request occurs, the MHALTI bit of the HRCL register is set to "1" to prevent DMA
transfer. To clear the state preventing DMA transfer, clear the MHALTI bit to "0" at the end of
the NMI routine.
340
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
■ Hold Request Cancellation Request (HRCR: Hold Request Cancel Request)
For an interrupt with a higher priority to be processed during CPU hold, the device that has
generated the hold request must cancel the request. Set the interrupt level in the HRCL register
to be used as the criterion of generating a cancellation request.
❍ Generation criteria
If an interrupt source with a higher interrupt level than the level specified in the HRCL register
occurs, a hold request cancellation request is generated.
•
If the interrupt level of the HRCL register is greater than the interrupt level after a priority
decision, a cancellation request occurs.
•
If the interrupt level of the HRCL register is equal to or less than the interrupt level after a
priority decision, no cancellation request occurs.
Because the cancellation request remains valid, no DMA transfer occurs unless the interrupt
source that has caused the cancellation request is cleared. Be sure to clear the corresponding
interrupt source.
If an NMI is used, the cancellation request is valid because the MHALTI bit of the HRCL register
is set to "1".
❍ Possible levels
Values that can be set in the HRCL register range from "10000B" to "11111B", which is the same
range as for the ICR.
If this register is set to "11111B", a cancellation request is issued for all the interrupt levels. If
this register is set to "10000B", a cancellation request is issued only for an NMI.
Table 11.3-2 shows the settings of interrupt levels at which a hold request cancellation request
occurs.
Table 11.3-2 Settings of Interrupt Levels at which Hold Request Cancellation Request
Occurs
HRCL register
Interrupt levels at which a cancellation request occurs
16
NMI only
17
NMI, Interrupt level 16
18
NMI, Interrupt levels 16 and 17
…
…
31
NMI, Interrupt levels 16 to 30 [initial value]
After a reset, since DMA transfer is not allowed at any interrupt level, no DMA transfer is
performed if an interrupt has occurred. Be sure to set the HRCL register to the necessary value.
341
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
■ Return from Standby Mode (Sleep/Stop)
This module implements a function that causes a return from stop mode if an interrupt request
occurs. If at least one interrupt request that includes NMI occurs (with an interrupt level other
than "11111B") from the peripheral, a return request from stop mode is generated for the clock
controller.
Since the priority decision unit restarts operation when a clock is supplied after returning from
stop, the CPU executes instructions until the result of the priority decision unit is obtained.
The same operation occurs after a return from the sleep state.
Registers in the interrupt controller can be accessed even in the sleep state.
Notes:
• The device returns from stop mode if an NMI request is issued. However, set an NMI so that
valid input can be detected in the stop state.
• Provide an interrupt level of "11111B" in the corresponding peripheral control register for an
interrupt source that you do not want to cause return from stop or sleep.
342
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
11.4 Example of Using the Hold Request Cancellation Request
Function (HRCR)
To allow the CPU to perform high-priority processing during DMA transfer, cancel a
hold request for DMA and clear the hold state. In this example, an interrupt is used to
cancel a hold request to the DMA, allowing the CPU to perform priority operations.
■ Control Registers
❍ HRCL (hold request cancellation request level setting register):
If an interrupt with a higher interrupt level than the level in the HRCL register occurs, a hold
request cancellation request is generated for DMA. This register sets the level to be used as the
criterion for this purpose.
❍ ICR:
This register sets a level higher than the level in the HRCL register for the ICR corresponding to
the interrupt source that will be used.
■ Hardware Configuration
The flow of signals is as follows.
Figure 11.4-1 Flow of Signals
This module
IRQ
Bus access request
MHALTI
I-UNIT
DHREQ
DMA
B-UNIT
CPU
(ICR)
(HRCL)
DHACK
DHREQ: D-bus hold request
DHACK: D-bus hold acknowledge
IRQ: Interrupt request
MHALTI: Hold request
cancellation request
343
CHAPTER 11 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
■ Hold Request Cancellation Request Sequence
Figure 11.4-2 shows the timing chart of a hold request cancellation request.
Figure 11.4-2 Timing Chart of a Hold Request Cancellation Request
Bus hold
RUN
Bus hold
Interrupt processing
(DMA transfer)
(2)
CPU
(1)
Bus access request
DHREQ
DHACK
IRQ
LEVEL
MHALTI
Example of Interrupt Routine [HRCL<ICR (LEVEL)]
(1) Interrupt source clear
to
(2) RETI
If an interrupt request occurs, the interrupt level changes. If the interrupt level is higher than the
level in the HRCL register, MHALTI is started for DMA. This causes DMA to cancel an access
request and the CPU to return from the hold state to perform the interrupt processing.
Figure 11.4-3 shows the timing chart for multiple interrupts.
Figure 11.4-3 Timing Chart for Multiple Interrupts
RUN
Bus hold
Interrupt
processing II
Interrupt I
CPU
Bus access request
(3)
(4)
Interrupt
processing I
(1)
Bus hold
(DMA transfer)
(2)
DHREQ
DHACK
IRQ1
IRQ2
LEVEL
MHALTI
Example of Interrupt Routine "Interrupt Level HRCL < ICR interrupt I) < ICR (interrupt II)"
(1), (3) Interrupt source clear
to
(2), (4) RETI
In the above example, while interrupt routine I is being executed, an interrupt with a higher
priority occurs. While the interrupt with a higher level than the level in the HRCL register
occurs, DHREQ is low.
Note:
Be especially careful about the relationship between interrupt levels specified in the HRCL register
and ICR.
344
CHAPTER 12
A/D CONVERTER
This chapter describes the overview A/D converter, the configuration and functions of
registers, and A/D converter operation.
12.1 Overview of the A/D Converter
12.2 A/D Converter Registers
12.3 A/D Converter Operation
12.4 Precautions on the Using A/D Converter
345
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
12.1 Overview of the A/D Converter
The A/D converter is a module that converts an analog input voltage to a digital value
in the successive approximation conversion method.
■ Features
The A/D converter, which converts an analog voltage input to an analog input pin (input voltage)
to a digital value, has the following features:
•
Peripheral clock (CLKP): 140 clock cycles
•
Minimum conversion time: 4.1 µs per channel (for a 34 MHz = CLKP machine clock)
•
Built-in sample and hold circuit
•
Resolution: 10 bits
•
A program can select one of four analog input channels:
•
346
-
Single-shot conversion mode: Converts one channel.
-
Scan conversion mode:
Continuously converts multiple channels. Up to four
channels can be programmed.
Selectable the following 3 operating modes;
-
Single conversion mode:
Converts a specified channel.
-
Continuous conversion mode:Repetitiously converts a specified channel.
-
Stop conversion mode:
Converts one channel, pauses, and stands by until the next
activation occurs (conversion start can be synchronized).
•
DMA transfer can be started due to an interrupt.
•
To start conversion, select software, an external trigger (falling edge), or the reload timer
(rising edge).
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
■ Block Diagram
Figure 12.1-1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.
Figure 12.1-1 Block Diagram of the A/D Converter
AVcc AVRH AVss AVR
Internal voltage generator
AN0
Sample and hold circuit
Sequential comparison
register
AN1
Data register(ADCR)
AN3
Upper
8-bit COPY
R-bus
AN2
Data register(ADCR0 to ADCR3:8 bits)
Channel decoder
Timing generation circuit
Clock(CLKP)
A/D control register(ADCS)
Prescaler
ATG (External pin trigger)
Reload timer ch.2 (Internal connection)
347
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
12.2 A/D Converter Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the registers used by the A/D
converter.
■ A/D Converter Registers
Figure 12.2-1 shows the registers of the A/D converter.
Figure 12.2-1 A/D Converter Registers
bit
15
BUSY
14
INT
13
INTE
12
CRF
11
STS1
10
STS0
9
STRT
bit
7
MD1
6
MD0
5
ANS2
4
ANS1
3
ANS0
2
ANE2
1
ANE1
bit
15
-
14
-
13
-
12
-
11
-
10
-
9
D9
8
D8
bit
7
D7
6
D6
5
D5
4
D4
3
D3
2
D2
1
D1
0
D0
bit
7
D7
6
D6
5
D5
4
D4
3
D3
2
D2
1
D1
0
D0
Address: 00007AH
Address: 000078H
Address: 00007CH
00007DH
00007EH
00007FH
348
8
Control status register
(ADCS)
0
ANE0
Data register
(ADCR)
Conversion result register
(ADCR0 to ADCR3)
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
12.2.1 Control Status Register (ADCS)
The control status register (ADCS) controls the A/D converter and displays its status.
■ Bit Configuration of Control Status Register (ADCS)
Figure 12.2-2 shows the bit configuration of the control status register (ADCS).
Figure 12.2-2 Bit Configuration of the Control Status Register (ADCS)
bit
15
BUSY
R/W
14
INT
R/W
13
INTE
R/W
12
CRF
R
11
STS1
R/W
10
STS0
R/W
9
STRT
R/W
8
R/W
Initial value
00000000B
bit
7
MD1
R/W
6
MD0
R/W
5
ANS2
R/W
4
ANS1
R/W
3
ANS0
R/W
2
ANE2
R/W
1
ANE1
R/W
0
ANE0
R/W
Initial value
00000000B
Address: 00007AH
Note:
Do not rewrite the control status register (ADCS) while the A/D conversion is in progress, except for
STRT bit and BUSY bit.
■ Detailed Bit of Control Status Register (ADCS)
The following describes the bit functions of the control status register (ADCS).
[bit15] BUSY (BUSY flag and stop)
This bit has the following different functions during reading and writing:
•
Reading:
This bit indicates whether the A/D converter is operating. It is set when A/D conversion starts
and cleared when it ends.
•
Writing:
Write "0" to this bit during A/D operation to forcibly terminate operation. Use this bit for
forcible termination in continuous mode and stop mode.
"1" cannot be written to the bit that indicates whether the A/D converter is operating. For a read
by a RMW instruction, "1" is read. In single-shot mode, this bit is cleared when A/D conversion
ends. In continuous mode and stop mode, this bit is not cleared until "0" is written to terminate
operation.
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset.
Do not forcibly terminate operation and start software at the same time (BUSY=0, STRT=1).
[bit14] INT (INTerrupt): Data display
It is set when conversion data is written to the ADCR. (It is when a conversion ends single
conversion mode or when conversion of all channels ends in scan conversion mode.)
If this bit is set while INTE (bit13) is set to "1", an interrupt request occurs. If start of DMA
transfer has been selected, DMA is started. Writing "1" to this bit is meaningless.
This bit is cleared if "0" is written to it or a clear signal from DMAC is received.
349
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
Note:
Clear this bit by writing "0" to it while the A/D is stopped. This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset.
For a read by a read-modify-write instruction, "1" is read.
[bit13] INTE (INTerrupt Enable): Specifying interrupt by conversion termination
This bit specifies enabling or disabling of interrupts when conversion is completed.
Table 12.2-1 shows specifying interrupt by the conversion termination.
Table 12.2-1 Function of Specifying Interrupt by Conversion Termination
INTE
Function
0
Interrupt disabled (initial value)
1
Interrupt enabled
To start DMA transfer occurring due to an interrupt, set this bit. This bit is initialized to "0" by a
reset.
[bit12] CRF (Convert Run Flag): A/D converting status
This bit shows A/D converting status.
This bit is read only.
Table 12.2-2 shows the function of A/D converting.
Table 12.2-2 Function of A/D Converting
CRF
Function
0
Stop (initial value)
1
Now converting
Note:
Do not change analog input value during A/D converting.
[bit11, bit10] STS1, STS0 (STart Source select)
These bits are initialized to "00B" by a reset. Set these bits to select the source of starting
A/D conversion. Table 12.2-3 shows the possible settings.
Table 12.2-3 Settings of A/D Conversion Start Causes
STS1
STS0
Functions
0
0
Started due to software
0
1
Started due to an external pin trigger or software
1
0
Started due to a reload timer or software
1
1
Started due to an external pin trigger, reload timer, or software
In a mode with multiple start sources, the first detected source starts the A/D conversion.
350
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
Notes:
Since start sources change at the same time that rewriting occurs, be careful when this bit is
rewritten during the A/D conversion operation.
• An external pin trigger is detected at a falling edge. If this bit is rewritten to select starting due to
an external trigger while the external trigger input level is set to "L", the A/D converter may be
started.
• While a timer is selected, a rising edge of the reload timer channel 2 is selected. If this bit is
rewritten to select starting due to a timer while the reload timer output level is set to "H", the A/D
converter may be started.
[bit9] STRT (STaRT)
Write "1" to this bit to start the A/D converter. If the system is restarted, write to this bit again.
In stop mode, restart is disabled because of the nature of the function.
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset.
Do not forcibly terminate operation and start a software program at the same time (BUSY=0,
STRT=1).
For a read by a read-modify-write instruction, "0" is read.
Wait for at least 10ms until external capacitor is charged at power on, after reset, or after
returning from stop mode.
[bit8] Test bit
This bit is used for testing. For a write, write "0".
[bit7, bit6] MD1,MD0 (A/D converter MoDe set)
These bits select the operating mode.
Table 12.2-4 shows the settings for the operating modes.
Table 12.2-4 Operating Mode Settings
MD1
MD0
Function
0
0
Restart enabled both in single-shot mode and during operation
0
1
Restart disabled both in single-shot mode and during operation
1
0
Restart disabled both in continuous mode and during operation
1
1
Restart disabled both in stop mode and during operation
•
Single-shot mode: Performs A/D conversion from the channels specified by ANS2 to ANS0
to the channels specified by ANE2 to ANE0. Stops when one conversion
session is completed.
•
Continuous mode: Repeatedly performs A/D conversion from the channels specified by
ANS2 to ANS0 to the channels specified by ANE2 to ANE0. However,
when the interrupt is enabled (INTE = 1), a conversion for all setting
channel of ANS2 to ANS0 is completed and, temporarily stops until the
interrupt is cleared. Clearing the interrupt restarts the conversion.
•
Stop mode:
Performs A/D conversion from each of the channels specified by ANS2 to
ANS0 to each of the channels specified by ANE2 to ANE0 and then
temporarily stops. The conversion is restarted when a start source
occurs.
351
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
Note:
When the A/D conversion mode selection bits (MD1 and MD0) are set to "00B", restart during A/D
conversion is enabled. In this modes, software start (STS1 and STS0 = "00B") can only be set.
Restart in the following procedures.
(1) Clear the INTE bit to "0".
(2) Write the STRT bit to "1" and the INTE bit to "0" at the same time.
When the A/D conversion mode selection bits (MD1 and MD0) are set to "01B", restart during A/D
conversion is disabled. When restarting and ending of A/D conversion occurred simultaneously,
restart operation is not executed, A/D conversion is terminated, and "300H" is stored in the data
register (ADCR1/ADCR0). Therefore, perform restart operation not to generate restarting and
ending of A/D conversion simultaneously.
Notes:
• If A/D conversion is started in continuous or stop mode, the conversion operation continues until
it is stopped due to the BUSY bit.
• Write "0" to the BUSY bit to stop A/D conversion.
• The restart disabled status in each of the single, continuous, and stop modes applies to all the
start operation caused by a timer, external trigger, and software.
[bit5, bit4, bit3] ANS2, ANS1, ANS0 (ANalog Start channel set):Setting of A/D conversion
start channel
These bits set the channel where A/D conversion will start.
When the A/D converter is started, A/D conversion starts at the channel selected in these
bits.
Table 12.2-5 shows the settings for the A/D conversion start channels.
Table 12.2-5 Settings for A/D Conversion Start Channels
ANS2
ANS1
ANS0
Start channel
0
0
0
AN0
0
0
1
AN1
0
1
0
AN2
0
1
1
AN3
1
X
X
Setting disabled
•
During reading: A conversion channel is read from these bits during A/D conversion.
The initial value of register is read in the stop state.
•
During reset:
These bits are initialized to "000B" by a reset.
Note:
Write "0" when the ANS2 bit is written.
352
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
[bit2, bit1, bit0] ANE2, ANE1, ANE0 (ANalog End channel set) Setting of A/D conversion
end channel
These bits set an A/D conversion end channel.
Table 12.2-6 shows the settings for the A/D conversion end channels.
Table 12.2-6 Settings for A/D Conversion End Channels
ANE2
ANE1
ANE0
End channel
0
0
0
AN0
0
0
1
AN1
0
1
0
AN2
0
1
1
AN3
1
x
x
Setting disabled
•
Set the same channel as specified by ANS2 to ANS0 to perform one-channel conversion
(single-shot conversion).
•
If continuous or stop mode is set, A/D conversion returns to the start channel specified by
ANS2 to ANS0 when the conversion for the channel specified by these bits is completed.
•
Define channels ANS and ANE so that the ANS is equal to or less than the ANE.
•
These bits are initialized to "000B" by a reset.
Notes:
• Write "0" when the ANE2 bit is written.
• After setting the start channel to the A/D conversion start channel selection bit (ANS2, ANS1,
ANS0), please set neither the A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1, MD0) nor the A/D
conversion end channel selection bit (ANE2, ANE1, ANE0) by the read-modify-write type
instruction.
The last conversion channel is read from the ANS2, ANS1, ANS0 bits until the A/D conversion
operating starts. Therefore, when the MD1, MD0 bits and ANE2, ANE1, ANE0 bits are set by the
read-modify-write type instruction after setting the start channel to the ANS2, ANS1, ANS0 bits,
the value of ANE2, ANE1, ANE0 bits may be re-written.
■ Setting Example
If the channel settings are ANS=1-channel and ANE=3-channel in single-shot mode:
The operation is performed for input channel (convert channels) to the A/D converter in the
order of 1-channel, 2-channel, and 3-channel.
353
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
12.2.2 Data Register (ADCR)
The data register (ADCR) stores the A/D conversion result. A digital value is stored as
the current result of conversion.
■ Data Register (ADCR)
Figure 12.2-3 shows the bit configuration of the data register (ADCR).
Figure 12.2-3 Bit Configuration of the Data Register (ADCR)
bit
15
R
14
R
13
R
12
R
11
R
10
R
9
D9
R
8
D8
R
Initial value
000000XXB
bit
7
D7
R
6
D6
R
5
D5
R
4
D4
R
3
D3
R
2
D2
R
1
D1
R
0
D0
R
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
Address: 000078H
The data register (ADCR), which is a current conversion storage register, stores a digital value
that results from conversion.
The value in the data register (ADCR) is updated every time a conversion session is completed.
Normally, this register stores the last conversion value.
This register is set to an undefined value by a reset. "0" is read from the high-order bits 15 to 10
bits during reading.
354
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
12.2.3 Conversion result register (ADCR0 to ADCR3)
The conversion result registers (ADCR0 to ADCR3) store the results of A/D
conversion. The register stores the digital value resulting from conversion of the
corresponding channel.
■ Conversion Result Register (ADCR0 to ADCR3)
Figure 12.2-4 shows the bit configurations of the conversion result registers (ADCR0 to ADCR3).
Figure 12.2-4 Bit Configuration of the Conversion Result Register (ADCR0 to ADCR3)
bit
Address: 00007CH
00007DH
00007EH
00007FH
7
D7
6
D6
5
D5
4
D4
3
D3
2
D2
1
D1
0
D0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
The conversion result registers (ADCR0 to ADCR3) are conversion storage registers that store
the digital values resulting from conversion of their respective channels. The conversion result is
stored in the upper eight bits in the conversion result register (ADCR).
The values in the conversion result registers (ADCR0 to ADCR3) are updated upon completion
of each conversion session conversion of their respective channels. The register usually
contains the final value converted.
355
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
12.3 A/D Converter Operation
The A/D converter operates using the successive approximation conversion method
and has a 10-bit resolution.
Upon completion of each conversion, this A/D converter stores the upper eight bits in
the 8-bit conversion result register (ADCR0 to ADCR3) for the corresponding channel.
To read a conversion result, read the corresponding conversion result register
(ADCR0 to ADCR3).
The A/D converter has three modes: single-shot conversion mode, continuous
conversion mode, and stop conversion mode. This section describes the operation of
these modes.
■ Single-shot Conversion Mode
This mode sequentially converts the analog input specified by the ANS and ANE bits and stops
operation after performing conversion up to the end channel specified by the ANE bit.
The one-channel conversion operation occurs when the start and end channels are the same
(ANS=ANE).
Example:
If ANS=000B, ANE=011B:
Beginning --> AN0 --> AN1 --> AN2 --> AN3 --> End
If ANS=010B, ANE=010B:
Beginning --> AN2 --> End
Note:
When the A/D conversion mode selection bits (MD1 and MD0) are set to "00B", restart during A/D
conversion is enabled. In this mode, software start (STS1 and STS0 = 00B) can only be set.
Restart in the following procedures.
(1) Clear the INTE bit to "0".
(2) Write the STRT bit to "1" and the INTE bit to "0" at the same time.
When the A/D conversion mode selection bits (MD1 and MD0) are set to "01B", restart during A/D
conversion is disabled. When restarting and ending of A/D conversion occurred simultaneously,
restart operation is not executed, A/D conversion is terminated, and "300H" is stored in the data
register (ADCR1/ADCR0). Therefore, perform restart operation not to generate restarting and
ending of A/D conversion simultaneously.
356
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
■ Continuous Conversion Mode
This mode sequentially converts the analog input defined by the ANS and ANE bits, returns to
the analog input of ANS after performing the conversion up to the end channel defined by the
ANE bit, and continues the A/D conversion operation.
The one-channel conversion operation is continued if the start and end channels are the same
(ANS=ANE).
Example:
If ANS=000B, ANE=011B:
Beginning --> AN0 --> AN1 --> AN2 --> AN3 --> AN0 -->-->-->--> Repeated
If ANS=010B, ANE=010B:
Beginning --> AN2 --> AN2 --> AN2 -->-->-->--> Repeated
Continuous conversion mode continues to repeatedly perform conversion until "0" is written to
the BUSY bit. Write "0" to the BUSY bit to forcibly terminate operation. Be careful when you
forcibly terminate the operation because the conversion in progress is stopped before it is
completed. If operation is forcibly terminated, the conversion register holds the previous data
that has been converted.
When interrupts are enabled (INTE=1), the A/D converter is suspended until the interrupt is
cleared after conversion of all the channels selected from among ANS2 to ANS0 is completed
once. Clearing the interrupt resumes the conversion.
■ Stop Conversion Mode
This mode sequentially converts the analog input specified by the ANS and ANE bits and
temporarily stops operation each time conversion has been performed for one channel. To clear
the temporary stop, start A/D conversion again.
This mode returns to the analog input of ANS after performing conversion up to the end channel
specified by the ANE bit and then continues the A/D conversion operation.
The one-channel conversion operation is performed if the start and end channels are the same
(ANS=ANE).
Example:
ANS=000B, ANE=011B
Beginning -->AN0 --> Stop --> Start --> AN1 --> Stop --> Start --> AN2 --> Stop -->
Start --> AN3 --> Stop --> Start -->AN0 -->-->-->--> Repeated
If ANS=010B, ANE=010B:
Beginning --> AN2 --> Stop --> Start --> AN2 --> Stop --> Start --> AN2
-->-->-->--> Repeated
Only start sources specified by STS1 and STS0 are used at this time.
Use this mode to synchronize the beginning of conversion.
357
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
12.4 Precautions on the Using A/D Converter
This section contains precautions on using the A/D converter.
■ Precautions on Using the A/D Converter
To start the A/D converter using an external trigger or an internal timer, set the A/D start source
bits (STS1 and STS0) of the ADCS register. At this time, the input value of an external trigger
or an internal timer must be set to inactive. If it is set to active, a malfunction occurs.
If STS1 and STS0 are set, set ATG=1 input and reload timer (channel 1)=0 output.
A correct conversion result will not be obtained if the external impedance exceeds the specified
value, since then the analog input value cannot be sampled within the specified sampling time.
❍ Restart of the A/D conversion
When the A/D conversion mode selection bits (MD1 and MD0) are set to "00B", restart during
A/D conversion is enabled. In this mode, software start (STS1 and STS0 = 00B) can only be
set. Restart in the following procedures.
(1) Clear the INTE bit to "0".
(2) Write the STRT bit to "1" and the INTE bit to "0" at the same time.
When the A/D conversion mode selection bits (MD1 and MD0) are set to "01B", restart during
A/D conversion is disabled. When restarting and ending of A/D conversion occurred
simultaneously, restart operation is not executed, A/D conversion is terminated, and "300H"
is stored in the data register (ADCR1/ADCR0). Therefore, perform restart operation not to
generate restarting and ending of A/D conversion simultaneously.
358
CHAPTER 13
UART
This chapter describes the overview of the UART, the configuration and functions of
registers, and UART operation.
13.1 Overview of the UART
13.2 UART Registers
13.3 UART Operation
13.4 Example of Using the UART
13.5 Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload Values
359
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.1 Overview of the UART
The UART is a serial I/O port used to perform asynchronous (start-stop
synchronization) communication and CLK synchronous communication.
The MB91301 series has three UART channels.
■ Features of the UART
The UART has the following features:
360
•
Full-duplex double buffer
•
Either asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) or CLK synchronous communication can be
selected.
•
Multiprocessor mode is supported.
•
Fully programmable baud rate: An arbitrary baud rate can be set using a built-in timer.
(See "CHAPTER 8 U-TIMER".)
•
An external clock can be used to set a baud rate.
•
Error detection functions (parity, framing, overrun)
•
The transfer signal is an NRZ code.
•
DMA transfer is started as the result of an interrupt.
CHAPTER 13 UART
■ Block Diagram
Figure 13.1-1 shows a block diagram of the UART.
Figure 13.1-1 Block Diagram of the UART
Control signal
Receive interrupt
(to CPU)
From U-TIMER
External clock
SCK
SCK (clock)
Send clock
Clock
selection
circuit
Receive clock
SI (receive data)
Send interrupt
(to CPU)
Receive control
circuit
Send control
circuit
Start bit detection
circuit
Send start
circuit
Receive bit
counter
Send bit
counter
Receive parity
counter
Send parity
counter
SO (send data)
Receive status
decision circuit
Receive shifter
Receiving
completed
SIDR
Send shifter
Sending
starts
SODR
DMA receive error
occurrence signal
(to DMAC)
R-bus
MD1
MD0
SMR
register
CS0
SCKE
SCR
register
PEN
P
SBL
CL
A/D
REC
RXE
TXE
SSR
register
PE
ORE
FRE
RDRF
TDRE
BDS
RIE
TIE
Control signal
361
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.2 UART Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the registers used by the
UART.
■ UART Registers
Figure 13.2-1 shows the configuration of the UART registers and Figure 13.2-2 lists the UART
registers.
Figure 13.2-1 Configuration of UART Registers
bit15
bit8 bit7
bit0
SCR
SMR
(R/W)
SSR
SIDR(R)/SODR(W)
8 bits
8 bits
(R/W, R, W)
Figure 13.2-2 UART Registers
bit
7
D7
6
D6
5
D5
bit
7
PE
6
ORE
5
FRE
7
MD1
6
MD0
5
-
4
-
7
PEN
6
P
5
SBL
4
CL
bit
bit
362
4
D4
3
D3
2
D2
1
D1
0
D0
2
BDS
1
RIE
0
TIE
Serial status register (SSR)
3
CS0
2
-
1
SCKE
0
-
Serial mode register (SMR)
3
A/D
2
REC
1
RXE
0
TXE
Serial control register (SCR)
4
3
RDRF TDRE
Serial input register
Serial output register
(SIDR /SODR)
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.2.1 Serial Mode Register (SMR)
The serial mode register (SMR) specifies the UART operating mode.
Set an operating mode while operation is stopped. Do not write to this register while
operation is in progress.
■ Bit Configuration of Serial Mode Register (SMR)
Figure 13.2-3 shows the bit configuration of the serial mode register (SMR).
Figure 13.2-3 Bit Configuration of the Serial Mode Register (SMR)
bit
7
Address: 000063H (ch.0) MD1
00006BH (ch.1) R/W
000073H (ch.2)
6
MD0
R/W
5
-
4
-
3
CS0
W
2
-
1
SCKE
R/W
0
-
Initial value
00--0-0-B
■ Detailed Bit of Serial Mode Register (SMR)
The following describes each bit function of the serial mode register (SMR).
[bit7, bit6] MD1, MD0 (MoDe select): Setting of operating mode
These bits select a UART operating mode.
Table 13.2-1 shows the settings for the operating modes.
Table 13.2-1 Settings for Operating Modes
Mode
MD1
MD0
Operating mode
0
0
0
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) normal mode
[initial value]
1
0
1
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)
multiprocessor mode
2
1
0
CLK synchronous mode
−
1
1
Setting disabled
Note:
In Mode 1, which is CLK asynchronous mode (multiprocessor), more than one slave CPV can be
connected to one host CPU. Since this resource cannot identify the data format of received data,
however, only the master in multiprocessor mode is supported. Because the parity check function
cannot be used, set PEN of the SCR register to "0".
[bit5, bit4] (Reserved)
These bits are unused. Always write "1" to these bits.
363
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit3] CS0 (Clock Select): Selection of operating clock
This bit selects the UART operating clock.
Table 13.2-2 shows the selection of the operating clock.
Table 13.2-2 Function for Selection of Operation Clock
CS0
Function
0
Built-in timer (U-TIMER) [initial value]
1
External clock
[bit2] (Reserved)
This bit is unused. Always write "0" to this bit.
[bit1] SCKE (SCLK Enable): Setting of SCK pin
This bit specifies whether the SCK pin is used as a clock input pin or a clock output pin when
communication is performed in CLK synchronous mode (Mode 2).
Set this bit to "0" in CLK asynchronous mode or external clock mode.
Table 13.2-3 shows the setting of the SCK pin.
Table 13.2-3 Function for Setting of the SCK Pin
SCKE
Function
0
SCK pin serves as clock input pin. [initial value]
1
SCK pin serves as clock output pin.
Note:
When using the SCK pin as a clock input pin, set the CS0 bit to "1" to select external clock mode.
[bit0] (Reserved)
This bit is unused.
364
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.2.2 Serial Control Register (SCR)
The serial control register (SCR) controls the transfer protocol that is used for serial
communication.
This section describes the configuration and functions of the serial control register
(SCR).
■ Bit Configuration of Serial Control Register (SCR)
Figure 13.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the serial control register (SCR).
Figure 13.2-4 Bit Configuration of the Serial Control Register (SCR)
bit
7
Address: 000062H (ch.0) PEN
00006AH (ch.1) R/W
000072H (ch.2)
6
P
R/W
5
SBL
R/W
4
CL
R/W
3
A/D
R/W
2
REC
W
1
RXE
R/W
0
TXE
R/W
Initial value
00000100B
■ Detailed Bit of Serial Control Register (SCR)
The following describes each bit function of the serial control register (SCR).
[bit7] PEN (Parity Enable): Setting of parity
This bit specifies whether data communication is performed to add parity in serial communication.
Table 13.2-4 shows the setting of the parity.
Table 13.2-4 Function for Setting of Parity
PEN
Function
0
No parity
1
Parity
[initial value]
Note:
Parity can be added only in normal mode (Mode 0) of asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)
communication mode. No parity can be added in multiprocessor mode (Mode 1) or CLK
synchronous communication mode (Mode 2).
[bit6] P (Parity): Specifying of even/odd parity
This bit specifies that even or odd parity be added to perform data communication.
Table 13.2-5 shows specifying of even/odd parity.
Table 13.2-5 Function for Specifying of Even/Odd Parity
P
Function
0
Even parity
1
Odd parity
[initial value]
365
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit5] SBL (Stop Bit Length): Specifying of stop bit length
This bit specifies the stop bit length, which marks the end of a frame in asynchronous (startstop synchronization) communication.
Table 13.2-6 shows specifying of the stop bit length.
Table 13.2-6 Function for specifying of Stop Bit Length
SBL
Function
0
1 stop bit
1
2 stop bits
[initial value]
[bit4] CL (Character Length): Specifying of data length of one frame
This bit specifies the data length of one frame that is sent or received.
Table 13.2-7 shows specifying of the data length of one frame.
Table 13.2-7 Function for Specifying of Data Length of One Frame
CL
Function
0
7-bit data [initial value]
1
8-bit data
Note:
7-bit data can be handled only in normal mode (Mode 0) of asynchronous (start-stop
synchronization) communication mode. Use 8-bit data in multiprocessor mode (Mode 1) or CLK
synchronous communication mode (Mode 2).
[bit3] A/D (Address/Data): Specifying of data format of frame
This bit specifies the data format of a frame that is sent or received in multiprocessor mode
(Mode 1) of asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) communication mode.
Table 13.2-8 shows specifying of the data format of frame.
Table 13.2-8 Function for Specifying of Data Format of Frame
A/D
Function
0
Data frame
[initial value]
1
Address frame
[bit2] REC (Receiver Error Clear): Clearing of error flag
Write "0" to this bit to clear the error flags (PE, ORE, and FRE) in the SSR register.
Writing "1" to this bit has no effect. "1" is always read from this bit.
366
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit1] RXE (Receiver Enable): Controlling of receive operation
This bit controls the UART receive operation.
Table 13.2-9 shows controlling of the receive operation.
Table 13.2-9 Function for Controlling of Recive Operation
RXE
Function
0
Disables receive operation.
1
Enables receive operation.
[initial value]
Note:
If a receive operation is disabled while it is in progress (while data is being input to the receive shift
register), reception of the frame is completed. The receive operation is stopped when the received
data is stored in the receive data buffer serial input data register (SIDR).
[bit0] TXE (Transmitter Enable): Controlling of send operation
This bit controls the UART send operation.
Table 13.2-10 shows controlling of the send operation.
Table 13.2-10 Function for Controlling of Send Operation
TXE
Function
0
Disables send operation.
1
Enables send operation.
[initial value]
Note:
If a send operation is disabled while it is in progress (while data is being output from the
transmission register), sending is stopped when no more send data is stored in the send data
buffer serial output data register (SODR).
367
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.2.3 Serial Input Data Register (SIDR)/Serial Output Data
Register (SODR)
These registers are data buffer registers for receiving and sending.
■ Serial Input Data Register (SIDR)/Serial Output Data Register (SODR)
Figure 13.2-5 shows the bit configurations of the serial input data register (SIDR) and the serial
output data register (SODR).
Figure 13.2-5 Bit Configurations of the Serial Input Data Register (SIDR) and the Serial Output Data
Register (SODR)
SIDR
bit
Address: 000061H (ch.0)
000069H (ch.1)
000071H (ch.2)
7
D7
6
D6
5
D5
4
D4
3
D3
2
D2
1
D1
0
D0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
7
D7
6
D6
5
D5
4
D4
3
D3
2
D2
1
D1
0
D0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
SODR
bit
Address: 000061H (ch.0)
000069H (ch.1)
000071H (ch.2)
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
If the data length is 7 bits, bit7 (D7) of SIDR and SODR is invalid data. Write to the SODR
register only while the TDRE bit of the SSR register is set to "1".
Note:
Writing to the register with this address means writing to the SODR register. Reading from the
register with this address means reading from the SIDR register.
368
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.2.4 Serial Status Register (SSR)
The serial status register (SSR) consists of flags that indicate the operation state of
the UART.
This section describes the configuration and functions of the serial status register
(SSR).
■ Bit Configuration of Serial Status Register (SSR)
Figure 13.2-6 shows the bit configuration of the serial status register (SSR)
Figure 13.2-6 Bit Configuration of the Serial Status Register (SSR)
bit
Address: 000060H (ch.0)
000068H (ch.1)
000070H (ch.2)
7
PE
R
6
ORE
R
5
FRE
R
4
3
RDRF TDRE
R
R
2
BDS
R/W
1
RIE
R/W
0
TIE
R/W
Initial value
00001000B
■ Detailed Bit of Serial Status Register (SSR)
The following describes each bit function of the serial status register (SSR).
[bit7] PE (Parity Error): Presence or absence of parity error
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, is set when a parity error occurs during receiving.
Table 13.2-11 shows the presence or absence of the parity error.
Table 13.2-11 Presence or Absence of Parity Error
PE
Function
0
No parity error has occurred.
1
A parity error has occurred.
[initial value]
To clear the flag when it has been set, write "0" to the REC bit (bit10) of the SCR register.
If the PE bit is set, the SIDR data becomes invalid.
[bit6] ORE (Over Run Error): Presence or absence of overrun error
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, is set when an overrun error occurs during
reception.
Table 13.2-12 shows the presence or absence of the overrun error.
Table 13.2-12 Presence or Absence of Overrun Error
ORE
Function
0
No overrun error has occurred.
1
An overrun error has occurred.
[initial value]
To clear the flag when it has been set, write "0" to the REC bit of the SCR register.
If the ORE bit is set, the SIDR data becomes invalid.
369
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit5] FRE (FRaming Error): Presence or absence of framing error
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, is set when a framing error occurs during
reception.
Table 13.2-13 shows the presence or absence of the framing error.
Table 13.2-13 Presence or Absence of Framing Error
FRE
Function
0
No framing error has occurred.
1
A framing error has occurred.
[initial value]
To clear the flag when it has been set, write "0" to the REC bit of the SCR register.
If the FRE bit is set, the SIDR data becomes invalid.
Note:
Switch the internal and external baud rate clocks using bit3 of the serial mode register only while
the UART is stopped, since the switching takes effect immediately after writing.
Bit3 of the serial mode register is write-only.
[bit4] RDRF (Receiver Data Register Full): Presence or absence of receive data
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, indicates that the SIDR register has receive data.
Table 13.2-14 shows the presence or absence of receive data.
Table 13.2-14 Presence or Absence of Receive Data
RDRF
Function
0
No receive data exists.
1
Receive data exists.
[initial value]
This bit is set when receive data is loaded into the SIDR register. It is automatically cleared
when the data is read from the SIDR register.
[bit3] TDRE (Transmitter Data Register Empty): Writing of send data
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, indicates whether send data can be written to
SODR.
Table 13.2-15 shows the function for writing of the send data.
Table 13.2-15 Function for Writing of Send Data
TDRE
Function
0
Disables writing of send data.
1
Enables writing of send data.
[initial value]
This bit is cleared when send data is written to the SODR register. It is set again when the
written data is loaded into the send shifter and begins to be transferred, indicating that the next
send data can be written.
370
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit2] BDS (Bit Direction Select): Transfer direction selection
This bit is transfer direction selection bit.
Table 13.2-16 shows the transfer direction selection.
Table 13.2-16 Transfer Direction Selection
BDS
Function
0
Transfer starting from the least significant bit. (LSB) [initial value]
1
Transfer starting from the most significant bit. (MSB)
Note:
When the serial data register is read or written to data, the high-order and low-order sides are
exchanged with each other. If you update this bit after writing data to the SDR register, therefore,
the data is made invalid.
If "1" is written to the BDS bit and transmit data is written to the serial output data register (SODR)
at the same time after halfword access to the serial status register (SSR), the BDS bit setting for
transmit data is ignored.
To switch between the MSB/LSB transfer directions, set the BDS bit before writing data to the
SODR.
[bit1] RIE (Receiver Interrupt Enable): Receive interrupt
This bit controls a reception interrupt.
Table 13.2-17 shows the function for controlling the receive interrupt.
Table 13.2-17 Function for Controlling Receive Interrupt
RIE
Function
0
Disables receive interrupts.
1
Enables receive interrupts.
[initial value]
Note:
Receive interrupt sources include errors due to PE, ORE, and FRE as well as normal receive due
to RDRF.
[bit0] TIE (Transmitter Interrupt Enable): Control send interrupt
This bit controls send interrupts.
Table 13.2-18 shows the function for controlling the send interrupt.
Table 13.2-18 Function for Controlling Send Interrupt
TIE
Function
0
Disables send interrupts.
1
Enables send interrupts.
[initial value]
371
CHAPTER 13 UART
Note:
Send interrupt sources include send requests due to TDRE.
372
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.3 UART Operation
The UART has two operating modes: asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) mode
and CLK synchronous mode.
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) mode consists of normal and
multiprocessor modes.
This section describes the operation of these operating modes.
■ UART Operating Modes
The UART has the operating modes shown in Table 13.3-1. Set a value in the SMR and SCR
registers to switch mode.
Table 13.3-1 UART Operating Modes
Mode
Parity
Data length
Operating mode
Yes/No
7
Yes/No
8
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)
normal mode
1
No
8+1
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)
multiprocessor mode
2
No
8
CLK synchronous mode
0
Stop bit length
1 bit
or
2 bits
No
Note:
The stop bit length in asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) mode can be specified only for a
send operation. The stop bit length is always one bit for a receive operation. Since operation is
possible only in the above modes, do not make any other setting.
■ Selecting a Clock for the UART
❍ Internal timer
If you select the U-TIMER by setting CS0 to "0", the baud rate is determined according to the
reload value set for the U-TIMER. At this time, you can calculate the baud rate as follows:
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization): φ/(16 x β)
CLK synchronous:
φ/β
φ: Peripheral machine clock frequency (CLKP)
β: Cycle specified for the U-TIMER (2n+2 or 2n+3, or n is the reload value.)
In asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) mode, data can be transferred in the range from
-1% to +1% of the specified baud rate.
❍ External clock
If you select an external clock by setting CS0 to "1", the baud rate is as follows (the frequency of
the external clock is assumed to be f):
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization): f/16
CLK synchronous:
f
However, the maximum value for f is 3.125 MHz.
373
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.3.1 Asynchronous (Start-stop Synchronization) Mode
When the UART is used in operating mode 0 (normal mode) or operating mode 1
(multiprocessor mode), the asynchronous transfer method is used.
■ Transfer Data Format
UART handles only data in the NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format.
Figure 13.3-1 shows the data format.
Figure 13.3-1 Transfer Data Format (Modes 0 and 1)
SI,SO
0
1
Start LSB
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
MSB Stop
A/D Stop
(Mode 0)
(Mode 1)
Data that has been transferred is 01001101B.
As shown in Figure 13.3-1, the transfer of data always starts with the start bit ("L" level data),
transfers the data bit length specified in LSB first, and ends with a stop bit ("H" level data). If an
external clock is selected, always input a clock.
The data length can be set to 7 bits or 8 bits in normal mode (Mode 0), but must be set to 8 bits
in multiprocessor mode (Mode 1). In multiprocessor mode, no parity can be added; instead, the A/
D bit is always added.
■ Receive Operation
If the RXE bit (bit1) of the SCR register is set to "1", a receive operation is always in progress.
If a start bit appears on the receive line, one-frame data is received according to the data format
specified in the SCR register. If an error occurs after reception of one frame is completed, the
error flag is set and then the RDRF flag (bit4 of the SSR register) is set. If, at this time, the RIE
bit (bit1) of the same SSR register is set to "1", a receive interrupt is generated for the CPU.
Check the flags of the SSR register and read the SIDR register if normal reception has occurred
or perform the necessary processing if an error has occurred.
The RDRF flag is cleared when the SIDR register is read.
■ Send Operation
If the TDRE flag (bit3) of the SSR register is set to "1", send data is written to the SODR
register. If, at this time, the TXE bit (bit0) of the SCR register is set to "1", transmission occurs.
The TDRE flag is set again when the data set in the SODR register is loaded into the send shift
register and begins to be transferred, indicating that the next send data can be set. If, at this
time, the TIE bit (bit0) of the same SSR register is set to "1", a send interrupt requesting that the
send data be set in the SODR register is generated for the CPU.
The TDRE flag is cleared if data is set in the SODR register.
374
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.3.2 CLK Synchronous Mode
If the UART is used in operating mode 2, the clock synchronous transfer method is
used.
■ Transfer Data Format
The UART handles only data in the NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format.
Figure 13.3-2 shows the relationship between send and receive clocks and data.
Figure 13.3-2 Transfer Data Format (Mode 2)
Writing to SODR
Mark
SCK
RXE, TXE
SI, SO
1 0
LSB
1
1
0
0
1
0
MSB
(Mode 2)
Data that has been transferred is 01001101B.
When the internal clock (U-TIMER) has been selected, a data receive synchronous clock is
automatically generated as soon as data is sent. While an external clock has been selected, you
must check that data exists in the send data buffer SODR register of the send side UART
(TDRE flag is "0") and then supply an accurate clock for one byte. Before sending starts and
after it ends, be sure to set the mark level.
The data length is 8 bits only, and no parity can be added. Only overrun errors are detected
because there is no start or stop bit.
375
CHAPTER 13 UART
■ Initialization
The following shows the setting values of the control registers required to use CLK synchronous
mode.
•
•
•
SMR register
•
MD1, MD0:"10B"
•
CS:
Specifies the clock input.
•
SCKE:
Set to "1" for an internal timer and to "0" for an external clock.
•
SOE:
Set to "1" for send and to "0" for receive.
SCR register
•
PEN:
"0"
•
P,SBL,A/D: These bits are meaningless.
•
CL:
"1"
•
REC:
"0" (to initialize the register)
•
RXE, TXE: At least one of the bits must be set to "1".
SSR register
•
RIE: Set to "1" to enable interrupts and to "0" to disables interrupts.
•
TIE: "0"
■ Start of Communication
Write to the SODR register to start communication.
If only reception is performed, dummy send data must be written to the SODR register.
■ End of Communication
Check for the end of communication by making sure that the RDRF flag of the SSR register has
changed to "1". Use the ORE bit of the SSR register to check that communication has been
performed correctly.
376
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.3.3 Occurrence of Interrupts and Timing for Setting Flags
The UART has five flags and two interrupt sources.
The five flags are PE, ORE, FRE, RDRF, and TDRE. PE means parity error, ORE means
overrun error, and FRE means framing error. These flags are set when an error occurs
during reception and are then cleared when "0" is written to REC of the SCR register.
RDRF is set when receive data is loaded into the SIDR register and then cleared when
data is read from the SIDR register. Mode 1 does not provide a parity detection
function. Mode 2 does not provide a parity detection function and a framing error
detection function. TDRE is set when the SODR register is empty, and writing to it is
enabled and then cleared when data is written to the SODR register.
■ Occurrence of Interrupts and Timing for Setting Flags
There are two interrupt sources, one for receiving and the other for sending. During receiving,
an interrupt is requested due to PE, ORE, FRE, or RDRF. During sending, an interrupt is
requested due to TDRE. The following shows the timing for setting the interrupt flags in each of
these modes.
❍ Receive operation in Mode 0
The PE, ORE, FRE, and RDRF flags are set when the last stop bit is detected after a receive
transfer is completed, causing an interrupt request to be generated for the CPU. The SIDR data
is invalid while PE, ORE, and FRE are active.
Figure 13.3-3 shows the timing for setting ORE, FRE, and RDRF in Mode 0.
Figure 13.3-3 Timing for Setting ORE, FRE, and RDRF (Mode 0)
Data
D6
D7
Stop
PE,ORE,FRE
RDRF
Receive interrupt
377
CHAPTER 13 UART
❍ Receive operation in Mode 1
The ORE, FRE, and RDRF flags are set when the last stop bit is detected after a receive
transfer is completed, causing an interrupt request to be generated for the CPU. The data
indicating an address or the data in last 9th bit is invalid because the length of data that can be
received is 8 bits. The SIDR data is invalid while ORE and FRE are active.
Figure 13.3-4 shows the timing for setting ORE, FRE, and RDRF in Mode 1.
Figure 13.3-4 Timing for Setting ORE, FRE, and RDRF (Mode 1)
Data
D7
Address/data
Stop
ORE,FRE
RDRF
Receive interrupt
❍ Reception operation in Mode 2
The ORE and RDRF flags are set when the last data (D7) is set after the reception transfer is
completed, generating an interrupt request to the CPU. The SIDR data is invalid while ORE is
active.
Figure 13.3-5 shows the timing of setting ORE and RDRF in Mode 2.
Figure 13.3-5 Timing of Setting ORE and RDRF (Mode 2)
Data
ORE
RDRF
Receive interrupt
378
D5
D6
D7
CHAPTER 13 UART
❍ Send operation in modes 0, 1, and 2
TDRE is cleared when data is written to the SODR register. This bit is set when data is
transferred to the internal shift register and the next data can be written, causing an interrupt
request to be generated for the CPU. If "0" is written to TXE of the SCR register (as well as RXE
in mode 2) during a send operation, TDRE of the SSR register is set to "1", disabling the UART
send operation after the transmission shifter stops. The device sends data written to the SODR
register before transmission stops after "0" is written to the TXE of the SCR register (as well as
RXE in mode 2) during the send operation.
Figure 13.3-6 shows the timing for setting TDRE in modes 0 and 1. Figure 13.3-7 shows the
timing for setting TDRE in mode 2.
Figure 13.3-6 Timing for Setting TDRE (Modes 0 and 1)
Writing to SODR
TDRE
Interrupt request to CPU
SO interrupt
SO output
ST D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 SP SP ST D0 D1 D2 D3
A/D
ST: Start bit, D0 to D7: Data bits
SP: Stop bit, A/D: Address/data multiplexer
Figure 13.3-7 Timing for Setting TDRE (Mode 2)
Writing to SODR
TDRE
Interrupt request to CPU
SO interrupt
SO output
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
D0 to D7: Data bits
■ Precautions on Usage
Writing to the serial output data register (SODR) starts communication.
Even for reception only, be sure to write false transmit data to the serial output data register
(SODR).
Set a communication mode when operation has stopped. Data sent and received while a mode
is set is not guaranteed.
379
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.4 Example of Using the UART
This section provides an example of using the UART. Mode 1 is used if more than one
slave CPU is connected to a single host CPU.
■ Example of Using the UART
Figure 13.4-1 shows an example of constructing a system using mode 1. This resource supports
only a communication interface on the host.
Figure 13.4-1 Example of Constructing a System Using Mode 1
SO
SI
Host CPU
SO SI
SO SI
Slave CPU #0
Slave CPU #1
Communication starts when the host CPU transfers address data. Address data is data used
when A/D of the SCR register is set to "1". This data is used to select a destination slave CPU,
enabling communication with the host CPU. Normal data is data used when A/D of the SCR
register is set to "0". Figure 13.4-2 shows the flowchart.
In this mode, set the PEN bit of the SCR register to "0", since the parity check function cannot
be used.
380
CHAPTER 13 UART
Figure 13.4-2 Communication Flowchart in Mode 1
(Host CPU)
START
Set transfer mode to "1".
Set data used to select
slave CPUs in D0 to
D7, set "1" in A/D, and
transfer one byte.
Set "0" in A/D.
Enable receive operation.
Communicate with a slave CPU.
Communication
completed?
NO
YES
Communicate with
other slave
CPUs?
NO
YES
Disable the receive operation.
END
381
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.5 Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload Values
This section provides an example of setting baud rates and U-TIMER reload values.
■ Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload Values
Table 13.5-1 shows setting values to be used in asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)
mode. Table 13.5-2 shows setting values to be used in CLK synchronous mode.
A frequency in the tables represents a peripheral machine clock frequency. UCC1 is a value to
be set in the UCC1 bit of the UTIMC register of the U-TIMER. A dash (-) in the tables means
that the baud rate cannot be used because the error exceeds plus minus 1%.
Table 13.5-1 Setting Values in Asynchronous (Start-Stop Synchronization) Mode
Baud rate
(bps)
ms
34MHz
20MHz
17MHz
10MHz
1200
833.33
884(UCC1=1)
520(UCC1=0)
441(UCC1=1)
259(UCC1=1)
2400
416.67
441(UCC1=1)
259(UCC1=1)
220(UCC1=0)
129(UCC1=0)
4800
208.33
220(UCC1=1)
129(UCC1=0)
109(UCC1=0)
64(UCC1=0)
9600
104.17
109(UCC1=1)
64(UCC1=0)
54(UCC1=1)
31(UCC1=1)
19200
52.08
54(UCC1=1)
31(UCC1=1)
26(UCC1=1)
−
38400
26.04
26(UCC1=1)
−
−
−
57600
17.36
17(UCC1=1)
−
−
−
10400
96.15
101(UCC1=0)
59(UCC1=0)
50(UCC1=0)
29(UCC1=0)
31250
32.00
33(UCC1=0)
19(UCC1=0)
16(UCC1=0)
9(UCC1=0)
62500
16.00
16(UCC1=0)
9(UCC1=0)
7(UCC1=1)
4(UCC1=0)
Table 13.5-2 Setting Values in CLK Synchronous Mode
Baud rate
(bps)
ms
34MHz
20MHz
17MHz
10MHz
250K
4.00
67(UCC1=0)
39(UCC1=0)
33(UCC1=0)
19(UCC1=0)
500K
2.00
33(UCC1=0)
19(UCC1=0)
16(UCC1=1)
9(UCC1=0)
1M
1.00
16(UCC1=0)
9(UCC1=0)
7(UCC1=0) *
4(UCC1=0)
*: An error exceeding plus minus 1% occurs.
382
CHAPTER 14
DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
This chapter describes the overview of the DMA controller (DMAC), the configuration
and functions of registers, and DMAC operation.
14.1 Overview of the DMA Controller (DMAC)
14.2 DMA Controller (DMAC) Registers
14.3 DMA Controller (DMAC) Operation
14.4 Operation Flowcharts
14.5 Data Bus
14.6 DMA External Interface
383
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.1 Overview of the DMA Controller (DMAC)
The DMA controller (DMAC) is a module that implements DMA (Direct Memory Access)
transfer on FR family devices. When this module is used to control DMA transfer,
various kinds of data can be transferred at high speed by bypassing the CPU,
enhancing system performance.
■ Hardware Configuration
The DMA controller (DMAC) consists mainly of the following blocks:
•
Five independent DMA channels
•
5-channel independent access control circuit
•
32-bit address registers (reload specifiable, two registers for each channel)
•
16-bit transfer count register (reload specifiable, one register for each channel)
•
4-bit block count register (one register for each channel)
•
External transfer request input pins: DREQ0, DREQ1 (for ch.0, ch.1 only)
•
External transfer request acceptance output pins: DACK0, DACK1 (for ch.0, ch.1 only)
•
DMA end output pins: DEOP0, DEOP1 (for ch.0, ch.1 only)
•
Fly-by transfer (memory → I/O and I/O → memory) (for ch.0, ch.1 only)
•
2-cycle transfer
■ Main Functions
The followings are the main functions related to data transfer by the DMA controller (DMAC):
Data can be transferred independently over multiple channels (5 channels)
❍ Priority (ch.0>ch.1>ch.2>ch.3>ch.4)
❍ The order can be rotated between ch.0 and ch.1.
❍ DMAC start sources
•
External dedicated pin input (edge detection/level detection for ch.0, ch.1 only)
•
Built-in peripheral requests (shared interrupt requests, including external interrupts)
•
Software request (register write)
❍ Transfer mode
•
Demand transfer, burst transfer, step transfer, and block transfer
•
Addressing mode: 32-bit full addressing (increment/decrement/fixed)
The address increment/decrement range is from -255 to +255.
384
•
Data types: Byte, halfword, and word length
•
Single shot/reload selectable
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Block Diagram
Figure 14.1-1 is a block diagram of the DMA controller (DMAC).
Figure 14.1-1 Block Diagram of the DMA Controller (DMAC)
Counter
Selector
Write back
Buffer
DMA transfer request to
the bus controller
DTC 2-stage register DTCR
DMA activation
source
selection circuit
& request
acceptance
control
Peripheral activation request/stop input
External pin activation request/stop input
Counter
DSS[2:0]
BLK register
DDNO
Bus control unit
State
transition
circuit
Selector
Counter buffer
IRQ[4:0]
Peripheral interrupt clear
MCLREQ
DDNO bit
DMASA 2-stage register
SADM,SASZ[7:0] SADR
DMADA 2-stage register
DADM,DASZ[7:0] DADR
Write back
Selector
address
Counter buffer
Access
To interrupt controller
TYPE.MOD,WS
DMA control
Address counter
To bus
controller
ERIR,EDIR
Bus control unit
Write
Read/write
control
Selector
Read
Priority circuit
Selector
X-bus
Buffer
Write back
385
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.2 DMA Controller (DMAC) Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of the registers used by the
DMA controller (DMAC).
■ DMA Controller (DMAC) Registers
Figure 14.2-1 shows the registers of the DMA controller (DMAC).
Figure 14.2-1 DMA Controller (DMAC) Registers
bit 31
ch.0
386
24
23
16
15
8
7
0
Control/status register A
(DMACA0)
ch.0
Control/status register B
(DMACB0)
ch.1
Control/status register A
(DMACA1)
ch.1
Control/status register B
(DMACB1)
ch.2
Control/status register A
(DMACA2)
ch.2
Control/status register B
(DMACB2)
ch.3
Control/status register A
(DMACA3)
ch.3
Control/status register B
(DMACB3)
ch.4
Control/status register A
(DMACA4)
ch.4
Control/status register B
(DMACB4)
DMAC all-channel control register
(DMACR)
ch.0
Transfer source address setting register
(DMASA0)
ch.0
Transfer destination address setting register (DMADA0)
ch.1
Transfer source address setting register
ch.1
Transfer destination address setting register (DMADA1)
ch.2
Transfer source address setting register
ch.2
Transfer destination address setting register (DMADA2)
ch.3
Transfer source address setting register
ch.3
Transfer destination address setting register (DMADA3)
ch.4
Transfer source address setting register
ch.4
Transfer destination address setting register (DMADA4)
(DMASA1)
(DMASA2)
(DMASA3)
(DMASA4)
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Notes on Setting Registers
When the DMA controller (DMAC) is set, some bits need to be set while DMA is stopped. If they
are set while DMA is in progress (during transfer), correct operation cannot be guaranteed.
An asterisk following a bit when its function is described later indicates that the operation of the
bit is affected if it is set during DMAC transfer. Rewrite this bit while DMAC transfer is stopped
(start is disabled or temporarily stopped).
If the bit is set while DMA transfer start is disabled (when DMAE of DMACR=0, or DENB of
DMACA=0), the setting takes effect when start is enabled.
If the bit is set while DMA transfer is temporarily stopped (DMAH[3:0] of DMACR not equal to
"0000B" or PAUS of DMACA=1), the setting takes effect when temporary stopping is canceled.
387
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.2.1 Control/Status Registers A (DMACA0 to DMACA4)
Control/status registers A (DMACA0 to DMACA4) control the operation of the DMAC
channels. There is a separate register for each channel.
This section describes the configuration and functions of control/status registers A
(DMACA0 to DMACA4).
■ Bit Configuration of Control/Status Registers A (DMACA0 to DMACA4)
Figure 14.2-2 shows the bit configuration of control/status registers A (DMACA0 to DMACA4).
Figure 14.2-2 Bit Configuration of Control/Status Registers A (DMACA0 to DMACA4)
bit 31
30
29
28
Address 000200H (ch.0)
DENB PAUS STRG
000208H (ch.1)
000210H (ch.2)
000218H (ch.3) bit 15 14 13 12
000220H (ch.4)
27
26
25
24
23
IS[4:0]
11
10
22
21
20
19
DDNO[3:0]
9
8
7
6
5
18
17
16
00000000 0000XXXXB
BLK[3:0]
4
3
2
1
Initial value
0
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXB
DTC[15:0]
■ Detailed Bit of Control/Status Registers A (DMACA0 to DMACA4)
The following describes the functions of the bits of control/status registers A (DMACA0 to
DMACA4).
[bit31] DENB (Dma ENaBle): DMA operation enable bit
This bit, which corresponds to a transfer channel, is used to enable and disable DMA transfer.
The activated channel starts DMA transfer when a transfer request is generated and accepted.
All transfer requests that are generated for a deactivated channel are disabled.
When the transfer on an activated channel reaches the specified count, this bit is set to "0"
and transfer stops.
The transfer can be forced to stop by writing "0" to this bit. Be sure to stop a transfer forcibly
("0" write) only after temporarily stopping DMA using the PAUS bit (bit30 of DMACA). If the
transfer is forced to stop without first temporarily stopping DMA, DMA stops but the
transferred data cannot be guaranteed. Check whether DMA is stopped using the DSS[2:0]
bits [bit18 to bit16 of DMACB].
Table 14.2-1 shows the function of the DMA operation enable bit.
Table 14.2-1 Function of DMA Operation Enable Bit
DENB
388
Function
0
Disables operation of DMA on the corresponding channel (initial value).
1
Enables operation of DMA on the corresponding channel.
•
If a stop request is accepted during reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
•
If the operation of all channels is disabled by bit15 (DMAE bit) of the DMAC all-channel
control register (DMACR), writing "1" to this bit is disabled and the stopped state is
maintained. If the operation is disabled by the above bit while it is enabled by this bit, "0" is
written to this bit and the transfer is stopped (forced stop).
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
[bit30] PAUS (PAUSe): Temporary stop instruction
This bit temporarily stops DMA transfer on the corresponding channel. If this bit is set, DMA
transfer is not performed before this bit is cleared again (While DMA is stopped, the DSS bits
are "1XXB").
If this bit is set before starting, DMA transfer continues to be temporarily stopped.
New transfer requests that occur while this bit is set are accepted, but no transfer starts
before this bit is cleared (See "Transfer Request Acceptance and Transfer" in Section
"14.3.9 Operation from Starting to End/Stopping").
Table 14.2-2 shows the function of the temporary stop instruction.
Table 14.2-2 Function of Temporary Stop Instruction
PAUS
Function
0
Enables DMA operation of the corresponding channel (initial value)
1
Temporarily stops DMA on the corresponding channel.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit29] STRG (Software TRiGger): Transfer request
This bit generates a DMA transfer request for the corresponding channel. If "1" is written to
this bit, a transfer request is generated when write operation to the register is completed and
transfer on the corresponding channel is started.
However, if the corresponding channel is not activated, operations on this bit are disabled.
If starting by a write operation to the DMAE bit and a transfer request occurring due to this bit
are simultaneous, the transfer request is enabled and transfer is started. If writing of "1" to
the PAUS bit and a transfer request occurring due to this bit are simultaneous, the transfer
request is enabled, but DMA transfer is not started before "0" is written to the PAUS bit.
Table 14.2-3 shows the function of the transfer request.
Table 14.2-3 Function of Transfer Request
STRG
Function
0
Disabled
1
DMA starting request
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
The read value is always "0".
•
Only a write value of "1" is valid. If "0" is written, operation is not affected.
389
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
[bit28 to bit24] IS4 to IS0 (Input Select): Transfer source selection
These bits select the source of a transfer request. Note that the software transfer request by
the STRG bit function is always valid regardless of the setting of these bits. As listed in Table
14.2-4.
Table 14.2-4 Settings for Transfer Request Sources
IS
390
Function
00000B
Software starting disabled
00001B
Sending disabled
↓
↓
01101B
Sending disabled
01110B
External pin "H" level or
01111B
External pin "L" level or
10000B
UART0 (receiving complete)
10001B
UART1 (receiving complete)
10010B
UART2 (receiving complete)
10011B
UART0 (sending complete)
10100B
UART1 (sending complete)
10101B
UART2 (sending complete)
10110B
External interrupt 0
10111B
External interrupt 1
11000B
Reload timer 0
11001B
Reload timer 1
11010B
Reload timer 2
11011B
External interrupt 2
11100B
External interrupt 3
11101B
PPG0
11110B
PPG1
11111B
A/D
•
When reset: Initialized to "00000B".
•
These bits are readable and writable.
edge
edge
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Notes:
• If DMA start resulting from an interrupt from a peripheral function is set (IS=1XXXXB), disable
interrupts from the selected peripheral function with the ICR register.
• If demand transfer mode is selected, only IS[4:0]=01110B, 01111B can be set. Starting by other
sources is disabled.
• External request input is valid only for ch.0 and ch.1. External request input cannot be selected
for ch.2, ch.3 and ch.4. Whether level detection or edge detection is used is determined by the
mode setting. Level detection is selected for demand transfer. For all other cases, edge
detection is selected.
If transfer source of the external interrupt 0 to 3 is selected, the setting of CPU clock and
peripheral clock using the base clock division setting register (DIVR0) cannot be used under the
following condition.
Divide-by rate of CPU clock
Divide-by rate of peripheral clock
CLKB divide-by rate = 1
CLKP divide-by rate > 3
CLKB divide-by rate = 2
CLKP divide-by rate > 6
CLKB divide-by rate = 3
CLKP divide-by rate > 9
CLKB divide-by rate = 4
CLKP divide-by rate > 12
CLKB divide-by rate = 5
CLKP divide-by rate > 15
[bit23 to bit20] DDNO3 to DDNO0 (direct access number): Fly-by function for built-in peripherals
These bits specify the built-in peripheral of the transfer destination/source used by the
corresponding channel.
Table 14.2-5 shows the settings of the direct access number.
Table 14.2-5 Settings of the Direct Access Number
DDNO
Function
0000B
Unused
0001B
Unused
0010B
Unused
0011B
Unused
0100B
Unused
0101B
Unused
0110B
Unused
0111B
Unused
1000B
Unused
1001B
Unused
1010B
Unused
1011B
Unused
1100B
Unused
1101B
Unused
1110B
Unused
1111B
Setting disabled
391
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
•
When reset: Initialized to "0000B".
•
These bits are readable and writable.
Note:
This function is not supported by the MB91301 series. Any data written is ignored.
Normally, write "0000B".
[bit19 to bit16] BLK3 to BLK0 (BLocK size): Block size specification
These bits specify the block size for block transfer on the corresponding channel. The value
specified by these bits becomes the number of words in one transfer unit (more exactly, the
repetition count of the data width setting). If block transfer will not be performed, set "0001B"
(size 1). This register value is ignored during demand transfer. The size becomes 1.
Table 14.2-6 shows the function of the block size specification.
Table 14.2-6 Function of Block Size Specification
BLK
XXXXB
Function
Block size specification of the corresponding channel
•
When reset: Not initialized.
•
These bits are readable and writable.
•
If "0" is specified for all bits, the block size becomes 16 words.
•
During reading, the block size is always read (reload value).
[bit15 to bit0] DTC (Dma Terminal Count register) : Transfer count register
The DTC register stores the transfer count. Each register has 16-bit length.
All registers have a dedicated reload register. When the register is used for a channel that is
enabled to reload the transfer count register, the initial value is automatically written back to
the register when the transfer is completed.
Table 14.2-7 shows the function of the transfer count register.
Table 14.2-7 Function of Transfer Count Register
DTC
XXXXH
Function
Transfer count for the corresponding channel
When DMA transfer is started, data in this register is stored in the counter buffer of the DMAdedicated transfer counter and is decremented by 1 (subtraction) after each transfer unit. When
DMA transfer is completed, the contents of the counter buffer are written back to this register
and then DMA ends. Thus, the transfer count value during DMA operation cannot be read.
392
•
When reset: Not initialized.
•
These bits are readable and writable. Always access DTC using halfword length or word
length.
•
During reading, the count value is read. The reload value cannot be read.
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.2.2 Control/Status Registers B (DMACB0 to DMACB4)
Control/status registers B (DMACB0 to DMACB4) control the operation of each DMAC
channel and exist independently for each channel.
This section describes the configuration of control/status registers B (DMACB0 to
DMACB4) and their functions.
■ Bit Configuration of Control/Status Registers B (DMACB0 to DMACB4)
Figure 14.2-3 shows the bit configuration of control/status registers B (DMACB0 to DMACB4).
Figure 14.2-3 Bit Configuration of Control/Status Registers B (DMACB0 to DMACB4)
bit 31
30
29
28
27
26
Address 000204H (ch.0)
TYPE[1:0] MOD[1:0] WS[1:0]
00020CH (ch.1)
000214H (ch.2)
00021CH (ch.3) bit 15 14 13 12 11 10
000224H (ch.4)
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
SADMDADM DTCR SADR DADR ERIE EDIE
9
8
7
6
5
SASZ[7:0]
4
3
17
16
00000000 00000000B
DSS[2:0]
2
DASZ[7:0]
1
Initial value
0
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXB
■ Detailed Bit of Control/Status Registers B (DMACB0 to DMACB4)
The following describes the functions of the bits of control status registers B (DMACB0 to
DMACB4).
[bit31, bit30] TYPE (TYPE): Transfer type setting
These bits are the transfer type setting bits and set the type of operation for the corresponding
channel.
•
2-cycle transfer mode: In this mode, the transfer source address (DMASA) and transfer
destination address (DMADA) are set and transfer is performed by repeating the read
operation and write operation for the number of times specified by the transfer count. All
areas can be specified as a transfer source or transfer destination (32-bit address).
•
Fly-by transfer mode: In this mode, external <--> external transfer is performed in one cycle
by setting a memory address as the transfer destination address (DMADA). Be sure to
specify an external area for the memory address.
Table 14.2-8 shows the settings for the transfer types.
Table 14.2-8 Settings for the Transfer Types
TYPE
Function
00B
2-cycle transfer (initial value)
01B
Fly-by: Memory --> I/O transfer
10B
Fly-by: I/O --> memory transfer
11B
Setting disabled
•
When reset: Initialized to "00B".
•
These bits are readable and writable.
393
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
[bit29, bit28] MOD (MODe) : Transfer mode setting
These bits are the transfer mode setting bits and set the operating mode of the corresponding
channel.
Table 14.2-9 shows the settings for the transfer modes.
Table 14.2-9 Settings for Transfer Modes
MOD
Function
00B
Block/step transfer mode (initial value)
01B
Burst transfer mode
10B
Demand transfer mode
11B
Setting disabled
•
When reset: Initialized to "00B".
•
These bits are readable and writable.
[bit27, bit26] WS (Word Size) : Transfer data width selection
These bits are the transfer data width selection bits and are used to select the transfer data
width of the corresponding channel. Transfer operations are repeated in units of the data
width specified in this register for as many times as the specified count.
Table 14.2-10 shows the selection of the transfer data width.
Table 14.2-10 Selection of the Transfer Data Width
WS
Function
00B
Byte-width transfer
01B
Halfword-width transfer
10B
Word-width transfer
11B
Setting disabled
•
When reset: Initialized to "00B".
•
These bits are readable and writable.
(initial value)
[bit25] SADM (Source-ADdr. count-Mode select) : Transfer source address count mode
specification
This bit specifies the address processing of the transfer source address of the corresponding
channel in each transfer operation.
An address increment is added or an address decrement is subtracted after each transfer
operation according to the specified transfer source address count width (SASZ). When the
transfer is completed, the next access address is written to the corresponding address
register (DMASA).
As a result, the transfer source address register is not updated until DMA transfer is
completed.
To make the address always the same, specify "0" or "1" for this bit and make the address
count width (SASZ and DASZ) equal to "0".
394
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Table 14.2-11 shows the function of the transfer source address count mode specification.
Table 14.2-11 Function of Transfer Source Address Count Mode Specification
SADM
Function
0
Increments the transfer source address. (initial value)
1
Decrements the transfer source address.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit24] DADM (Destination-ADdr. count-Mode select): Transfer destination address count
mode specification
This bit specifies the address processing for the transfer destination address of the
corresponding channel in each transfer operation.
An address increment is added or an address decrement is subtracted after each transfer
operation according to the specified transfer destination address count width (DASZ). When
the transfer is completed, the next access address is written to the corresponding address
register (DMADA).
As a result, the transfer destination address register is not updated until the DMA transfer is
completed.
To make the address always the same, specify "0" or "1" for this bit and make the address
count width (SASZ, DASZ) equal to "0".
Table 14.2-12 shows the function of the transfer destination address count mode
specification.
Table 14.2-12 Function of Transfer Destination Address Count Mode specification
DADM
Function
0
Increments the transfer source address. (initial value)
1
Decrements the transfer source address.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit23] DTCR (DTC-reg. Reload): Transfer count register reload specification
This bit controls reloading of the transfer count register for the corresponding channel.
If reload operation is enabled by this bit, the count register value is restored to its initial value
after the transfer is completed then DMAC stops and then waiting starts for new transfer
requests (an activation request by STRG or IS setting). If this bit is "1", the DENB bit is not
cleared.
DENB=0 or DMAE=0 must be set to stop the transfer. In either case, the transfer is forcibly
stopped.
If reloading of the counter is disabled, a single shot operation occurs. In single shot
operation, operation stops after the transfer is completed even if reload is specified in the
address register. The DENB bit is also cleared in this case.
395
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Table 14.2-13 shows the function of the transfer count register reload specification.
Table 14.2-13 Function of Transfer Count Register Reload Specification
DTCR
Function
0
Disables transfer count register reloading (initial value)
1
Enables transfer count register reloading.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit22] SADR (Source-ADdr.-reg. Reload): Transfer source address register reload specification
This bit controls reloading of the transfer source address register for the corresponding
channel.
If this bit enables the reload operation, the transfer source address register value is restored
to its initial value after the transfer is completed.
If reloading of the counter is disabled, a single shot operation occurs. In single shot
operation, operation stops after the transfer is completed even if reload is specified in the
address register. The address register value also stops in this case while the initial value is
being reloaded.
If this bit disables the reload operation, the address register value when the transfer is
completed is the address to be accessed next to the final address. When address increment
is specified, the next address is an incremented address.
Table 14.2-14 shows the function of the transfer source address register reload specification.
Table 14.2-14 Function of Transfer Source Address Register Reload Specification
SADR
Function
0
Disables transfer source address register reloading. (initial value)
1
Enables transfer source address register reloading.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit21] DADR (Dest.-ADdr.-reg. Reload):
Transfer destination address register reload specification
This bit controls reloading of the transfer destination address register for the corresponding
channel.
If this bit enables reloading, the transfer destination address register value is restored to its
initial value after the transfer is completed.
The details of other functions are the same as those described for bit22 (SADR).
396
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Table 14.2-15 shows the function of the transfer destination address register reload
specification.
Table 14.2-15 Function of Transfer Destination Address Register Reload Specification
DADR
Function
0
Disables transfer destination address register reloading. (initial value)
1
Enables transfer destination address register reloading.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit20] ERIE (ERror Interrupt Enable): Error interrupt output enable
This bit controls the occurrence of an interrupt for termination after an error occurs. The
nature of the error that occurred is indicated by DSS2 to DSS0. Note that an interrupt occurs
only for specific termination causes and not for all termination causes (Refer to bits DSS2 to
DSS0, which are bit18 to bit16).
Table 14.2-16 shows the function of the error interrupt output enable.
Table 14.2-16 Function of Error Interrupt Output Enable
ERIE
Function
0
Disables error interrupt request output. (initial value)
1
Enables error interrupt request output.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit19] EDIE (EnD Interrupt Enable): End interrupt output enable
This bit controls the occurrence of an interrupt for normal termination.
Table 14.2-17 shows the function of the end interrupt output enable.
Table 14.2-17 Function of End Interrupt Output Enable
EDIE
Function
0
Disables end interrupt request output. (initial value)
1
Enables end interrupt request output.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
397
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
[bit18 to bit16] DSS2 to DSS0 (Dma Stop Status): Transfer stop source indication
These bits indicate a code (end code) of 3 bits that indicates the source of stopping or
termination of DMA transfer on the corresponding channel. For a list of end codes, see Table
14.2-18.
Table 14.2-18 End Codes
DSS
Function
Interrupt
000B
Initial value
None
X01B
Address error (underflow/overflow)
Error
X10B
Transfer stop request
Error
X11B
Normal end
End
1XXB
DMA stopped temporarily (due, for example, to
DMAH, PAUS bit, and an interrupt)
None
A transfer stop request is set only when it is requested by a peripheral device or the external pin
DSTP function is used.
The Interrupt column indicates the type of interrupt requests that can occur.
•
When reset: Initialized to "000B".
•
These bits can be cleared by writing "000B" to them.
•
These bits are readable and writable. Note that the only valid written value is "000B".
[bit15 to bit8] SASZ (Source Addr count SiZe):Transfer source address count size specification
These bits specify the increment or decrement width for the transfer source address
(DMASA) of the corresponding channel in each transfer operation. The value set by these
bits becomes the address increment/decrement width for each transfer unit. The address
increment/decrement conforms to the instruction in the transfer source address count mode
(SADM).
Table 14.2-19 shows the function of the transfer source address count size specification.
Table 14.2-19 Function of Transfer Source Address Count Size Specification
SASZ
XXH
398
Function
Specify the increment/decrement width of the transfer source address. 0 to 255
•
When reset: Not initialized
•
These bits are readable and writable.
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
[bit7 to bit0] DASZ (Des Addr count SiZe):Transfer destination address count size specification
These bits specify the increment or decrement width for the transfer destination address
(DMADA) of the corresponding channel in each transfer operation. The value set by these
bits becomes the address increment/decrement width for each transfer unit. The address
increment/decrement conforms to the instruction in the transfer destination address count
mode (DADM).
Table 14.2-20 shows the function of the transfer destination address count size specification.
Table 14.2-20 Function of Transfer Destination Address Count Size Specification
DASZ
Function
XXH
Specify the increment/decrement width of the transfer destination address. 0 to 255
•
When reset: Not initialized
•
These bits are readable and writable.
399
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.2.3 Transfer Source/Transfer Destination Address Setting
Registers (DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4)
The transfer source/transfer destination address setting registers (DMASA0 to
DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4) control the operation of the DMAC channels. There is a
separate register for each channel.
This section describes the configuration and functions of the transfer source/transfer
destination address setting registers (DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4).
■ Bit Configuration of Transfer Source/Transfer Destination Address Setting Registers
(DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4)
The transfer source/transfer destination address setting registers (DMASA0 to DMASA4/
DMADA0 to DMADA4) are a group of registers that store the transfer source/transfer destination
addresses. Each register is 32-bit length.
Figure 14.2-4 shows the bit configuration of the transfer source/transfer destination address
setting registers (DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4).
Figure 14.2-4 Bit Configuration of the Transfer Source/Transfer Destination Address Setting Registers
(DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4)
bit 31
Address 001000H (ch.0)
001008H (ch.1)
001010H (ch.2)
001018H (ch.3) bit 15
001020H (ch.4)
bit 31
Address 001004H (ch.0)
00100CH (ch.1)
001014H (ch.2)
00101CH (ch.3) bit 15
001024H (ch.4)
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXB
DMASA[31:16]
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXB
DMASA[15:0]
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Initial value
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXB
DMADA[31:16]
14
Initial value
5
4
3
2
1
DMADA[15:0]
0
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXB
■ Detailed Bit of Transfer Source/Transfer Destination Address Setting Registers
(DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4)
The following describes the functions of the bits of each transfer source/transfer destination
address setting registers (DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4).
[bit31 to bit0] DMASA (DMA Source Addr): Transfer source address setting
These bits set the transfer source address.
400
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
[bit31 to bit0] D (DMA Destination Addr): Transfer destination address setting
These bits set the transfer destination address.
If DMA transfer is activated, data in this register is stored in the counter buffer of the DMAdedicated address counter and then the address is counted according to the settings for the
transfer operation. When the DMA transfer is completed, the contents of the counter buffer
are written back to this register and then DMA ends. Thus, the address counter value during
DMA operation cannot be read.
All registers have a dedicated reload register. When the register is used for a channel that is
enabled for reloading of the transfer source/transfer destination address register, the initial
value is automatically written back to the register when the transfer is completed. Other
address registers are not affected.
•
When reset: Not initialized.
•
These bits are readable and writable. For this register, be sure to access these bits as 32bit data.
•
If these bits are read during transfer, the address before the transfer is read. If they are
read after transfer, the next access address is read. Because the reload value cannot be
read, it is not possible to read the transfer address in real time.
Note:
Do not set any of the DMAC’s registers using this register. DMA transfer is not possible for the
DMAC’s registers themselves.
401
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.2.4 DMAC All-Channel Control Register (DMACR)
The DMAC all-channel control register (DMACR) controls the operation of all five
DMAC channels. Be sure to access this register using byte length.
This section describes the configuration and functions of the DMAC all-channel
control register (DMACR).
■ Bit Configuration of DMAC All-Channel Control Register (DMACR)
Figure 14.2-5 shows the bit configuration of the DMAC all-channel control register (DMACR).
Figure 14.2-5 Bit Configuration of the DMAC All-Channel Control Register (DMACR)
bit 31
Address 000240H
DMAE
bit 15
-
30
29
28
27
26
25
-
-
PMO1
14
13
12
11
10
9
-
-
-
-
-
-
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Initial value
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0XX00000 00000000B
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DMAH[3:0]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXB
■ Detailed Bit of DMAC All-Channel Control Register (DMACR)
The following describes the bit functions of the DMAC all-channel control register (DMACR).
[bit31] DMAE (DMA Enable): DMA operation enable
This bit controls the operation of all DMA channels.
If DMA operation is disabled with this bit, transfer operations on all channels are disabled
regardless of the start/stop settings for each channel and the operating status. Any channel
carrying out transfer cancels the requests and stops transfer at a block boundary. All start
operations on each channel in a disabled state are disabled.
If this bit enables DMA operation, start/stop operations are enabled for each channels.
Simply enabling DMA operation with this bit does not activate each channel.
DMA operation can be forced to stop by writing "0" to this bit. However, be sure to force
stopping ("0" write) only after temporarily stopping DMA using the DMAH[3:0] bits [bit27 to
bit24 of DMACR]. If forced stopping is carried out without first temporarily stopping DMA,
DMA stops, but the transfer data cannot be guaranteed. Check whether DMA is stopped
using the DSS[2:0] bits [bit18 to bit16 of DMACB].
Table 14.2-21 shows the function of the DMA operation enable.
Table 14.2-21 Function of DMA Operation Enable
DMAE
402
Function
0
Disables DMA transfer on all channels. (initial value)
1
Enables DMA transfer on all channels.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
[bit28] PM01 (Priority mode ch.0,ch.1 robine): Channel priority rotation
This bit is set to alternate priority for each transfer between ch.0 and ch.1.
Table 14.2-22 shows the function of the channel Priority rotation.
Table 14.2-22 Function of Channel Priority Rotation
PM01
Function
0
Fixes the priority. (ch.0 > ch.1)(initial value)
1
Alternates the priority. (ch.1 > ch.0)
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
This bit is readable and writable.
[bit27 to bit24] DMAH (DMA Halt): DMA temporary stop
These bits control temporary stopping of all DMA channels. If these bits are set, DMA
transfer is not performed on any channel before these bits are cleared again.
When DMA transfer is activated after these bits are set, all channels remain temporarily
stopped.
Transfer requests that occur on channels for which DMA transfer is enabled (DENB=1) while
these bits are set are all enabled. The transfer can be started by clearing all these bits.
Table 14.2-23 shows the function of the DMA temporary stop.
Table 14.2-23 Function of DMA Temporary Stop
DMAH
0000B
Other than 0000B
Function
Enables the DMA operation on all channels. (initial value)
Temporarily stops DMA operation on all channels.
•
When reset: Initialized to "0".
•
These bits are readable and writable.
[bit30, bit29, and bit23 to bit0] (Reserved): Unused bits
These bits are unused.
•
A read value is undefined.
403
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.2.5 Other Functions
The MB91301 series has the DACK, DEOP, and DREQ pins, which can be used for
external transfer. These pins can also be used as general-purpose ports.
■ Function of the DACK, DEOP, and DREQ Pins
To use the DACK, DEOP, or DREQ pins for external transfer, a switch must be made from the
port function to the DMA pin function.
To make the switch, set the PFR register.
404
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3 DMA Controller (DMAC) Operation
A DMA controller (DMAC) is built into all FR family devices. The FR family DMAC is a
multi-functional DMAC that controls data transfer at high speed without the use of
CPU instructions.
This section describes the operation of the DMAC.
■ Principal Operations
•
Functions can be set for each transfer channel independently.
•
Once starting has been enabled, a channel starts transfer operation only after a specified
transfer request has been detected.
•
After a transfer request is detected, a DMA transfer request is output to the bus controller
and the bus right is acquired by the bus controller before the transfer is started.
•
The transfer is carried out as a sequence conforming to the mode settings made independently
for the channel being used.
■ Transfer Mode
Each DMA channel performs transfer according to the transfer mode set by the MOD[1:0] bits of
its DMACB register.
❍ Block/step transfer
Only a single block transfer unit is transferred in response to one transfer request. DMA then
stops requesting the bus controller for transfer until the next transfer request is received.
The block transfer unit is the specified block size (BLK[3:0] of DMACA).
❍ Burst transfer
Transfer in response to one transfer request is carried out continuously for the number of times
in the specified transfer count is reached.
The specified transfer count is the transfer count (BLK[3:0] of DMACA X DTC[15:0] of DMACA)
X block size.
❍ Demand transfer
Transfer is carried out continuously until the transfer request input (detected with a level at the
DREQ pin) from an external device or a specified transfer count is reached.
The specified transfer count in a demand transfer is the specified transfer count (DTC[15:0] of
DMACA). The block size is always "1" and the register value is ignored.
405
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Transfer Type
❍ 2-cycle transfer (normal transfer)
The DMA controller operates using a read operation and a write operation as its unit of
operation.
Data is read from an address in the transfer source register and then written to another address
in the transfer destination register.
❍ Fly-by transfer (memory --> I/O)
The DMA controller operates using a read operation as its unit of operation.
If DMA transfer is performed when fly-by transfer is set, DMA issues a fly-by transfer (read)
request to the bus controller and the bus controller lets the external interface carry out the fly-by
transfer (read).
❍ Fly-by transfer (I/O --> memory)
The DMA controller operates using a write operation as its unit of operation.
Otherwise, operation is the same as fly-by transfer (memory --> I/O) operation.
Access areas used for MB91301 series fly-by transfer must be external areas.
■ Transfer Address
The following types of addressing are available and can be set independently for each channel
transfer source and transfer destination.
The method for specifying the address setting register (DMASA/DMADA) for a 2-cycle transfer
and the method for a fly-by transfer are different.
❍ Specifying the address for a 2-cycle transfer
The value read from a register (DMASA/DMADA) in which an address has been set in advance
is used as the address for access. After receiving a transfer request, DMA stores the address
from the register in the temporary storage buffer and then starts transfer.
After each transfer (access) operation, the next access address is generated (increment/
decrement/fixed selectable) by the address counter and then written to the temporary storage
buffer. Because the contents of the temporary storage buffer are written back to the register
(DMASA/DMADA) after each block transfer unit is completed, the address register (DMASA/
DMADA) value is updated after each block transfer unit is completed, making it impossible to
determine the address in real time during transfer.
❍ Specifying the address for a fly-by transfer
In a fly-by transfer, the value read from the transfer destination address register (DMADA) is
used as the address for access. The transfer source address register (DMASA) is ignored. Be
sure to specify an external area as the address to be set.
After receiving a transfer request, DMA stores the address from the register in the temporary
storage buffer and then starts transfer.
After each transfer (access) operation, the next access address is generated (increment/
decrement/fixed selectable) by the address counter and then written to the temporary storage
buffer. Because the contents of this temporary storage buffer are written back to the register
(DMADA) after each block transfer unit is completed, the address register (DMADA) value is
updated after each block transfer unit is completed, making it impossible to determine the
address in real time during transfer.
406
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Transfer Count and Transfer End
❍ Transfer count
The transfer count register is decremented (-1) after each block transfer unit is completed.
When the transfer count register becomes "0", counting for the specified transfer ends, and the
transfer stops with the end code displayed or is reactivated *.
Like the address register, the transfer count register value is updated only after each block
transfer unit.
*: If transfer count register reloading is disabled, the transfer ends. If reloading is enabled, the
register value is initialized and then waits for transfer (DTCR of DMACB)
❍ Transfer end
Listed below are the sources for transfer end. When transfer ends, a source is indicated as the
end code (DSS[2:0] of DMACB).
•
End of the specified transfer count (DMACA:BLK[3:0] x DMACA:DTC[15:0]) => Normal end
•
A transfer stop request from a peripheral circuit or the external pin (DSTP) occurred => Error
•
An address error occurred => Error
•
A reset occurred => Reset
The transfer stop source is indicated (DSS) and the transfer end interrupt or error interrupt for
the end source is generated.
407
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.1 Setting a Transfer Request
The following three types of transfer requests are provided to activate DMA transfer:
• External transfer request pin
• Built-in peripheral request
• Software request
Software requests can always be used regardless of the settings of other requests.
■ External Transfer Request Pin
A transfer request is generated by input to the input pin prepared for a channel.
The MB91301 series supports ch.1, ch.2 (DREQ0, DREQ1).
If the input is valid at this point, the following sources are selected depending on the settings for
the transfer type and the start source:
❍ Edge detection
If the transfer type is block, step, or burst transfer, select edge detection:
•
Falling edge detection:
Set with the transfer source selection register. When IS[4:0] of
DMACA=01110B.
•
Rising edge detection:
Set with the transfer source selection register. When IS[4:0] of
DMACA=01111B.
❍ Level detection
If the transfer type is demand transfer, select level detection:
•
"H" level detection:
Set with the transfer source selection register. When IS[4:0] of
DMACA= 01110B.
•
"L" level detection:
Set with the transfer source selection register. When IS[4:0] of
DMACA= 01111B.
■ Built-in Peripheral Request
A transfer request is generated by an interrupt from the built-in peripheral circuit.
For each channel, set the peripheral’s interrupt by which a transfer request is generated (When
IS[4:0] of DMACA=1XXXXB.)
The built-in peripheral request cannot be used together with an external transfer request.
Note:
Because an interrupt request used in a transfer request seems like an interrupt request to the CPU,
disable interrupts from the interrupt controller (ICR register).
408
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Software Request
A transfer request is generated by writing to the trigger bit of a register (STRG of DMACA).
The software request is independent of the external transfer request pin and built-in peripheral
request and can always be caused.
If a software request occurs together with a start (transfer enable) request, the transfer is started
by immediate output of a DMA transfer request to the bus controller.
409
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.2 Transfer Sequence
The transfer type and the transfer mode that determine, for example, the operation
sequence after DMA transfer has started can be set independently for each channel
(Settings for TYPE[1:0] and MOD[1:0] of DMACB).
■ Selection of the Transfer Sequence
The following sequence can be selected with a register setting:
•
Burst 2-cycle transfer
•
Demand 2-cycle transfer
•
Block/step 2-cycle transfer
•
Burst fly-by transfer
•
Demand fly-by transfer
•
Block/step fly-by transfer
❍ Burst 2-cycle transfer
In a burst 2-cycle transfer, as many transfers as specified by the transfer count are performed
continuously for one transfer source. For a 2-cycle transfer, all 32-bit areas can be specified
using a transfer source/transfer destination address.
A peripheral transfer request, software transfer request, or external pin (DREQ) edge input
detection request can be selected as the transfer source.
Table 14.3-1 shows the specifiable transfer addresses (burst 2-cycle transfer).
Table 14.3-1 Specifiable Transfer Addresses (Burst 2-cycle Transfer)
Transfer source addressing
Direction
Transfer destination addressing
All 32-bit areas specifiable
→
All 32-bit areas specifiable
The following are some features of a burst transfer:
When one transfer request is received, transfer is performed continuously until the transfer
count register reaches 0.
The transfer count is the transfer count x block size (BLK[3:0] of DMACA x DTC[15:0] of
DMACA).
Another request occurring during transfer is ignored.
If the reload function of the transfer count register is enabled, the next request is accepted after
transfer ends.
If a transfer request for another channel with a higher priority is received during transfer, the
channel is switched at the boundary of the block transfer unit. Processing resumes only after the
transfer request for the other channel is cleared.
410
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Figure 14.3-1 Example of Burst Transfer for a Start on an External Pin Rising Edge,
Number of Blocks =1, and Transfer Count = 4
Transfer request ( edge)
Bus operation
CPU
Transfer count
SA
DA
SA
4
DA
3
SA
DA
SA
2
DA
CPU
0
1
Transfer end
❍ Burst fly-by transfer
A burst fly-by transfer has the same features as a 2-cycle transfer except that the transfer area
can only be external areas, and the transfer unit is read (memory --> I/O) or write (I/O -->
memory) only.
Table 14.3-2 shows the specifiable transfer addresses (burst fly-by transfer).
Table 14.3-2 Specifiable Transfer Addresses (Burst Fly-by Transfer)
Transfer source addressing
Direction
Transfer destination addressing
Specification not required (invalid)
None
External area
■ Demand Transfer 2-Cycle Transfer
A demand transfer sequence is generated only if "H" level or "L" level of an external pin is
selected as a transfer request. Select the level with IS[4:0] of DMACA.
The following are some features of a continuous transfer:
•
Each transfer operation of a transfer request is checked. While the external input level is
within the range of the specified transfer request levels, transfer is performed continuously
without the request being cleared. If the external input changes, the request is cleared and
the transfer stops at the transfer boundary. This operation is repeated for the number of
times specified by the transfer count.
•
Otherwise, operations are the same as those of a burst transfer.
Figure 14.3-2 Example of Demand Transfer for a Start with the External Pin at "H" Level,
Number of Blocks = 1, and Transfer Count = 3
Transfer request ("H" level)
Bus operation
Transfer count
CPU
SA
DA
3
SA
2
DA
CPU
SA
DA
1
0
Transfer end
411
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Table 14.3-3 shows the specifiable transfer addresses (demand transfer 2-cycle transfer).
Table 14.3-3 Specifiable Transfer Addresses (Demand Transfer 2-cycle Transfer)
Transfer source address
Direction
Transfer destination addressing
External area
→
External area
External area
→
Built-in I/O
External area
→
Built-in RAM
Built-in I/O
→
External area
Built-in RAM
→
External area
Note:
For a demand transfer, be sure to set an external area address for the transfer source or transfer
destination or both. Since DMA transfer is adjusted to the external bus timing in demand transfer
mode, access to external areas is always needed.
❍ Demand transfer fly-by transfer
A demand transfer fly-by transfer has the same features as a 2-cycle transfer except that the
transfer area can only be external areas, and the transfer unit is read (memory --> I/O) or write
(I/O --> memory) only.
Table 14.3-4 shows the specifiable transfer addresses (demand transfer fly-by transfer).
Table 14.3-4 Specifiable Transfer Addresses (Demand Transfer Fly-by Transfer)
Transfer source addressing
Direction
Transfer destination addressing
Specification not required (invalid)
None
External area
❍ Step/block transfer 2-cycle transfer
For a step/block transfer (Transfer for each transfer request is performed as many times as the
specified block count), all 32-bit areas can be specified as the transfer source/transfer
destination address.
Table 14.3-5 shows the specifiable transfer addresses (step/block transfer 2-cycle transfer).
Table 14.3-5 Specifiable Transfer Addresses (Step/Block Transfer 2-cycle Transfer)
Transfer source addressing
Direction
Transfer destination addressing
All 32-bit areas specifiable
→
All 32-bit areas specifiable
[Step transfer]
If "1" is set as the block size, a step transfer sequence is generated.
The followings are some features of a step transfer:
412
•
If a transfer request is received, the transfer request is cleared after one transfer
operation and then the transfer is stopped (The DMA transfer request to the bus controller
is canceled).
•
Another request occurring during transfer is ignored.
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
•
If a transfer request for another channel with a higher priority is received during transfer,
the channel is switched after the transfer is stopped and then restarted. Priority in a step
transfer is valid only if transfer requests occur simultaneously.
[Block transfer]
If any value other than "1" is specified as the block size, a block transfer sequence is
generated.
The following are some features of a block transfer:
The block transfer has the same features as those of a step transfer except that one transfer
unit consists of multiple transfer cycle counts (number of blocks).
Figure 14.3-3 Example of Block Transfer for a Start for an External Pin on a Rising Edge, Number of
Blocks = 2, and Transfer Count = 2
Transfer request ( edge)
Bus operation
CPU
Number of blocks
Transfer count
SA
DA
SA
2
DA
1
CPU
0
2
SA
DA
SA
2
DA
1
1
Transfer end
❍ Step/block transfer fly-by transfer
This transfer has the same features as those of a 2-cycle transfer except that the transfer area
can only be external areas, and the transfer unit is read (memory --> I/O) or write (I/O -->
memory) only.
Table 14.3-6 shows the specifiable transfer addresses (step/block transfer fly-by transfer).
Table 14.3-6 Specifiable Transfer Addresses (Step/Block Transfer Fly-by Transfer)
Transfer source addressing
Direction
Transfer destination addressing
Specification not required (invalid)
None
External area
413
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.3 General Aspects of DMA Transfer
This section describes the block size for DMA transfers and the reload operation.
■ Block Size
•
The unit and increment for transfer data is a set of (the number set in the block size
specification register x data width) data.
•
Since the amount of data transferred in one transfer cycle is determined by the value
specified as the data width, one transfer unit consists of the number of transfer cycles for the
specified block size.
•
If a transfer request with a higher priority is received during transfer or if a temporary stop
request for a transfer occurs, the transfer stops only at the transfer unit boundary, whether or
not the transfer is a block transfer. This arrangement makes it possible to protect data for
which division or temporary stopping is not desirable. However, if the block size is large,
response time decreases.
•
Transfer stops immediately only when a reset occurs, in which case the data being
transferred cannot be guaranteed.
■ Reload Operation
In this module, the following three types of reloading can be set for each channel:
❍ Transfer count register reloading
After transfer is performed the specified number of times, the initial value is set in the transfer
count register again and waiting for a start request starts.
Set this type of reloading when the entire transfer sequence is to be performed repeatedly.
If reload is not specified, the count register value remains "0" after the transfer is performed the
specified number of times and no further transfer is performed.
❍ Transfer source address register reloading
After transfer is performed the specified number of times, the initial value is set in the transfer
source address register again.
Set this type of reloading when transfer is to be repeated from a fixed area in the transfer source
address area.
If reload is not specified, the transfer source address register value after the transfer is
performed the specified number of times becomes the next address. Use this type when the
address area is not fixed.
❍ Transfer destination address register reloading
After transfer is performed the specified number of times, the initial value is set in the transfer
destination address register again.
Set this type of reloading when transfer is to be repeated to a fixed area in the transfer
destination address area.
(The processing hereafter is the same as described in "Transfer source address register
reloading" above.)
•
414
If only reloading of the transfer source/transfer destination register is enabled, restart after
transfer is performed the specified number of times is not implemented and only the values
of each address register are set.
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
❍ Special examples of operating mode and the reload operation
•
If transfer is performed in continuous transfer mode by external pin input level detection and
transfer count register reloading is used, transfer continues by reloading even though
transfer ends during continuous input. Also in this case, an end code is set.
•
If it is preferable that processing stops when data transfer ends and starts after input is
detected again, do not specify reload.
•
For a transfer in burst, block, or step transfer mode, transfer stops temporarily after reload
when data transfer ends. Transfer does not start until new transfer request input is detected.
415
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.4 Addressing Mode
Specify the transfer destination/transfer source address independently for each
transfer channel.
■ Address Register Specifications
The following two methods are provided to specify an address register. The method specified
depends on the transfer sequence.
•
In 2-cycle transfer mode, set the transfer source address in the transfer source address
setting register (DMASA) and the transfer destination address in the transfer destination
address setting register (DMADA).
•
In fly-by transfer mode, specify the memory address in the transfer destination address
setting register (DMADA). In this case, the value in the transfer source address setting
register (DMASA) is ignored.
■ Features of the Address Register
This register has the maximum 32-bit length. With 32-bit length, all space in the memory map
can be accessed.
■ Function of the Address Register
•
The address register is read in each access operation and the read value is sent to the
address bus.
•
At the same time, the address for the next access is calculated by the address counter and
the address register is updated using the calculated address.
•
For address calculation, increment or decrement is selected independently for each channel,
transfer destination, and transfer source. The address increment/decrement width is
specified by the address count size register (SASZ/DASZ of DMACB).
•
If reloading is not enabled, the address resulting from the address calculation of the last
address remains in the address register when the transfer ends.
•
If reloading is enabled, the initial value of the address is reloaded.
Notes:
• If an overflow or underflow occurs as a result of 32-bit length full address calculation, an address
error is detected and transfer on the relevant channel is stopped. Refer to the description for the
items related to the end code.
• Do not set any of the DMAC's registers as the address register.
• For demand transfer, be sure to set an address in an external area for the transfer source,
transfer destination, or both.
• Do not let the DMAC transfer data to any of the DMAC's registers.
416
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.5 Data Types
Select the data length (data width) transferred in one transfer operation from the
followings:
• Byte
• Halfword
• Word
■ Data Length (Data Width)
Since the word boundary specification is also observed in DMA transfer, different low-order bits
are ignored if an address with a different data length is specified for the transfer destination/
transfer source address.
•
Byte:
The actual access address and the addressing match.
•
Halfword: The actual access address has 2-byte length starting with "0" as the lowest-order
bit.
•
Word:
The actual access address has a 4-byte length starting with "00" as the lowestorder 2 bits.
If the lowest-order bits in the transfer source address and transfer destination address are
different, the addresses as set are output on the internal address bus. However, each transfer
target on the bus is accessed after the addresses are corrected according to the above rules.
417
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.6 Transfer Count Control
Specify the transfer count within the range of the maximum 16-bit length (1 to 65536).
■ Transfer Count Control
Set the transfer count value in the transfer count register (DTC of DMACA).
The register value is stored in the temporary storage buffer when the transfer starts and is
decremented by the transfer counter. When the counter value becomes "0", end of transfer for
the specified count is detected, and the transfer on the channel is stopped or waiting for a
restart request starts (when reload is specified).
The following are some features of the group of transfer count registers:
•
Each register has 16-bit length.
•
All registers have a dedicated reload register.
•
If transfer is activated when the register value is "0", transfer is performed 65536 times.
■ Reload Operation
418
•
The reload operation can be used only if reloading is enabled in a register that allows
reloading.
•
When transfer is activated, the initial value of the count register is saved in the reload
register.
•
If the transfer counter counts down to "0", end of transfer is reported and the initial value is
read from the reload register and written to the count register.
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.7 CPU Control
When a DMA transfer request is accepted, DMA issues a transfer request to the bus
controller.
The bus controller passes the right to use the internal bus to DMA at a break in bus
operation and DMA transfer starts.
■ DMA Transfer and Interrupts
•
During DMA transfer, interrupts are generally not accepted until the transfer ends.
•
If a DMA transfer request occurs during interrupt processing, the transfer request is accepted
and interrupt processing is stopped until the transfer is completed.
•
If, as an exception, an NMI request or an interrupt request with a higher level than the hold
suppress level set by the interrupt controller occurs, DMAC temporarily cancels the transfer
request via the bus controller at a transfer unit boundary (one block) to temporarily stop the
transfer until the interrupt request is cleared. In the meantime, the transfer request is
retained internally. After the interrupt request is cleared, DMAC reissues a transfer request to
the bus controller to acquire the right to use the bus and then restarts DMA transfer.
■ Suppressing DMA
When an interrupt source with a higher priority occurs during DMA transfer, the FR family device
interrupts the DMA transfer and branches to the relevant interrupt routine. This feature is valid
as long as there are any interrupt requests. When all interrupt sources are cleared, the
suppression feature no longer works and the DMA transfer is restarted by the interrupt
processing routine. Thus, if you want to suppress restart of DMA transfer after clearing interrupt
sources in the interrupt source processing routine at a level that interrupts DMA transfer, use
the DMA suppress function. The DMA suppress function can be activated by writing any value
other than "0" to the DMAH[3:0] bits of the DMA all-channel control register and can be stopped
by writing "0" to these bits.
This function is mainly used in the interrupt processing routines. Before the interrupt sources in
an interrupt processing routine are cleared, the DMA suppress register is incremented by "1". If
this is done, then no DMA transfer is performed. After interrupt processing, decrement the
DMAH[3:0] bits by "1" before returning. If multiple interrupts have occurred, DMA transfer
continues to be suppressed since the DMAH[3:0] bits are not "0" yet. If a single interrupt has
occurred, the DMAH[3:0] bits become "0". DMA requests are then enabled immediately.
Notes:
• Since the register has only four bits, this function cannot be used for multiple interrupts
exceeding 15 levels.
• Be sure to assign the priority of the DMA tasks at a level that is at least 15 levels higher than
other interrupt levels.
419
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.8 Hold Arbitration
When a device is operating in external bus extended mode, an external hold function
can be used. The relationship between external hold requests and DMA transfer
requests by this module when the hold function can be used is described below.
■ DMA Transfer Request during External Hold
DMA transfer is started when an external bus area is accessed, DMA transfer is temporarily
stopped. When the external hold is released, DMA transfer is restarted.
■ External Hold Request during DMA Transfer
The device is externally held. When an external bus area is accessed by DMA transfer, DMA
transfer is temporarily stopped. When the external hold is released, DMA transfer is restarted.
■ Simultaneous Occurrence of a DMA Transfer Request and an External Hold Request
The device is externally held and internal DMA transfer is started. When an external bus area is
accessed by DMA transfer, DMA transfer is temporarily stopped. When the external hold is
released, DMA transfer is restarted.
420
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.9 Operation from Starting to End/Stopping
Starting of DMA transfer is controlled independently for each channel, but before
transfer starts, the operation of all channels needs to be enabled. This section
describes operation from starting to end/stopping.
■ Operation Start
❍ Enabling operation for all channels
Before activating each DMAC channel, operation for all channels needs to be enabled in
advance with the DMA operation enable bit (DMAE of DMACR). All start settings and transfer
requests that occurred before operation is enabled are invalid.
❍ Starting transfer
The transfer operation can be started by the operation enable bit of the control register for each
channel. If a transfer request to an activated channel is accepted, the DMA transfer operation is
started in the specified mode.
❍ Starting from a temporary stop
If a temporary stop occurs before starting with channel-by-channel or all-channel control, the
temporary stopped state is maintained even though the transfer operation is started. If transfer
requests occur in the meantime, they are accepted and retained. When temporary stopping is
released, transfer is started.
■ Transfer Request Acceptance and Transfer
Sampling for transfer requests set for each channel starts after starting.
If edge detection is selected for the external pin start source and a transfer request is detected,
the request is retained within DMAC until the clear conditions are met (when the external pin
start source is selected for block, step, or burst transfer).
If level detection or peripheral interrupt start is selected for the external pin start source, DMAC
continues the transfer until all transfer requests are cleared. When they are cleared, DMAC
stops the transfer after one transfer unit (demand transfer or peripheral interrupt start).
Since peripheral interrupts are handled as level detection, use interrupt clear by DMA to handle
the interrupts.
Transfer requests are always accepted while other channel requests are being accepted and
transfer performed. The channel that will be used for transfer is determined for each transfer
unit after priority has been checked.
421
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Clearing Peripheral Interrupts by DMA
This DMA has a function that clears peripheral interrupts. This function works when peripheral
interrupt is selected as the DMA start source (when IS[4:0]=1XXXXB).
Peripheral interrupts are cleared only for the set start sources. That is, only the peripheral
functions set by IS[4:0] are cleared.
The timing for clearing an interrupt depends on the transfer mode (See Section "14.4 Operation
Flowcharts").
•
Block/step transfer: If block transfer is selected, a clear signal is generated after one block
(step) transfer.
•
Burst transfer:
If burst transfer is selected, a clear signal is generated after transfer is
performed the specified number of times.
•
Demand transfer:
Since only start requests from external pins are supported in demand
transfer, no clear signal is generated.
■ Temporary Stopping
DMA transfer is stopped temporary in the following cases:
❍ Setting of temporary stopping by writing to the control register (Set independently for
each channel or all channels simultaneously)
If temporary stopping is set using the temporary stop bit, transfer on the corresponding channel
is stopped until release of temporary stopping is set again. You can check the DSS bits for
temporary stopping.
When temporary stopping is released, the transfer is restarted.
❍ NMI/hold suppress level interrupt processing
If an NMI request or an interrupt request with a higher level than the hold suppress level occurs,
all channels on which transfer is in progress are temporarily stopped at the boundary of the
transfer unit and the bus right is opened to give priority to NMI/interrupt processing. Transfer
request accepted during NMI/interrupt processing are retained, initiating a wait for completion of
NMI processing.
Channels for which requests are retained restart transfer after NMI/interrupt processing is
completed.
422
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Operation End/Stopping
The end of DMA transfer is controlled independently for each channel. It is also possible to
disable operation for all channels at once.
❍ Transfer end
If reloading is disabled, transfer is stopped, "Normal end" is displayed as the end code, and all
transfer requests are disabled after the transfer count register becomes "0" (Clear the DENB bit
of DMACA).
If reloading is enabled, the initial value is reloaded, "Normal end" is displayed as the end code,
and a wait for transfer requests starts after the transfer count register becomes "0" (Do not clear
the DENB bit of DMACA).
❍ Disabling all channels
If the operation of all channels is disabled with the DMA operation enable bit DMAE, all DMAC
operations, including operations on active channels, are stopped. Then, even if the operation of
all channels is enabled again, no transfer is performed unless a channel is restarted. In this
case, no interrupt whatever occurs.
■ Stopping due to an Error
In addition to normal end after transfer for the number of times specified, stopping as the result
of various types of errors and the forced stopping are provided.
❍ Transfer stop requests from peripheral circuits
Depending on the peripheral circuit that outputs a transfer request, a transfer stop request is
issued when an error is detected (Example: Error when data is received at or sent from a
communication system peripheral).
The DMAC, when it receives such a transfer stop request, displays "Transfer stop request" as
the end code and stops the transfer on the corresponding channel.
Table 14.3-7 shows the stopping due to an error.
Table 14.3-7 Stopping due to an Error
IS
Function
Transfer stop request
00000B
↓
01111B
Disabled start by hardware
↓
External pin "L" level or ↓ edge
↑
None
↓
10000B
10001B
10010B
UART0*1
UART1*1
UART2*1
↑
Yes
↓
10011B
↓
11111B
UART0*2
↓
A/D
↑
None
↓
*1: A transfer stop request when a receive error is detected.
*2: A transmission is completed.
For details of the conditions under which a transfer stop request is generated, see the
specifications for each peripheral circuit.
423
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Occurrence of an Address Error
If inappropriate addressing, as shown below in parenthesis, occurs in an addressing mode, an
address error is detected (if an overflow or underflow occurs in the address counter when a 32bit address is specified).
If an address error is detected, "An address error occurred" is displayed as the end code and
transfer on the corresponding channel is stopped.
424
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.10 DMAC Interrupt Control
Independent of peripheral interrupts that become transfer requests, interrupts can also
be output for each DMAC channel.
■ DMAC Interrupt Control
The following interrupts can be output for each DMAC channel:
•
Transfer end interrupt: Occurs only when operation ends normally.
•
Error interrupt:
Transfer stop request due to a peripheral circuit (error due to a
peripheral)
•
Error interrupt:
Occurrence of address error (error due to software)
All of these interrupts are output according to the meaning of the end code.
An interrupt request can be cleared by writing "000B" to DSS2 to DSS0 (end code) of DMACS.
Be sure to clear the end code by writing "000B" before restarting.
If reloading is enabled, the transfer is automatically restarted. At this point, however, the end
code is not cleared and is retained until a new end code is written when the next transfer ends.
Since only one end source can be displayed in an end code, the result after considering the
order of priority is displayed when multiple sources occur simultaneously. The interrupt that
occurs at this point conforms to the displayed end code.
The following shows the priority for displaying end codes (in order of decreasing priority):
•
Reset
•
Clearing by writing "000B"
•
Peripheral stop request or external pin input (DSTP) stop request
•
Normal end
•
Stopping when address error detected
•
Channel selection and control
■ DMA Transfer during Sleep
•
The DMAC can also operate in sleep mode.
•
If you anticipate operations during sleep mode, note the following:
•
-
Since the CPU is stopped, DMAC registers cannot be rewritten. Make settings before
sleep mode is entered.
-
The sleep mode is released by an interrupt. Thus, if a peripheral interrupt is selected as
the DMAC start source, interrupts must be disabled by the interrupt controller.
If you do not want to release sleep mode with a DMAC end interrupt, disable these
interrupts.
425
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.11 Channel Selection and Control
Up to five channels can be simultaneously set as transfer channels. In general, an
independent function can be set for each channel.
■ Priority among Channels
Since DMA transfer is possible only on one channel at a time, priority must be set for the
channels.
Two modes, fixed and rotation, are provided as the priority settings and can be selected for
each channel group (described later).
❍ Fixed mode
The order of priority is fixed by channel number, with priority ascending from channel 0 to
channel 4:
(ch.0 > ch.1 > ch.2 > ch.3 > ch.4)
If a transfer request with a higher priority is received during a transfer, the transfer channel
becomes the channel with the higher priority when the transfer for the transfer unit (number set
in the block size specification register x data width) ends.
When higher priority transfer is completed, transfer is restarted on the previous channel.
Figure 14.3-4 Timing Example in Fixed Mode
ch.0 transfer request
ch.1 transfer request
Bus operation
Transfer ch
CPU
SA
DA
ch.1
SA
DA
ch.0
SA
DA
ch.0
SA
DA
CPU
ch.1
ch.0 transfer end
ch.1 transfer end
❍ Rotation mode (between ch.0 and ch.1 only)
When operation is enabled, the initial states have the same order that they would have in fixed
mode, but at the end of each transfer operation, the priority of the channels is reversed. Thus, if
more than one transfer request is output at the same time, the channel is switched after each
transfer unit.
This mode is effective when continuous or burst transfer is set.
426
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Figure 14.3-5 Timing Example in Rotation Mode
ch.0 transfer request
ch.1 transfer request
Bus operation
CPU
SA
Transfer ch
DA
ch.1
SA
DA
SA
ch.0
DA
SA
ch.1
DA
CPU
ch.0
ch.0 transfer end
ch.1 transfer end
■ Channel Group
The order of priority is set as shown in the following table.
Table 14.3-8 Unit for Selecting the Order of Priority
MODE
Priority
Remarks
Fixed
ch.0 > ch.1
−
Rotation
ch.0 > ch.1
↑
↓
ch.0 < ch.1
The initial state is the top row.
If transfer occurs for the top row, the priority is reversed.
427
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.3.12 Supplement on External Pin and Internal Operation
Timing
This section provides supplementary information about external pins and internal
operation timing.
■ Minimum Effective Pulse Width of the DREQ Pin Input
Only channels 0 and 1 are applicable for the MB91301 series.
In all transfer modes for burst, step, block, and demand transfers, the minimum width required is
five system clock cycles (5 cycles of external bus clock CLKT).
Note:
DACK output does not indicate acceptance of DREQ input. DREQ input is always accepted if DMA
is enabled but transfer has not started. Therefore, it is not necessary to retain DREQ input until
DACK output is asserted (except in demand transfer mode).
■ Negate Timing of the DREQ Pin Input when a Demand Transfer Request is Stopped
❍ For 2-cycle transfer
For a demand transfer, be sure to set an address in an external area for the transfer source, the
transfer destination, or both.
•
If the transfer type is external → external:
Use the DREQ negation sense timing so that it is placed prior to the write strobe negation
timing by a single cycle or more. There are following measures for achieving this:
-
Make the DREQ negation timing by a single cycle or more with the adjustment on the
external I/O side or external glue logic side.
-
Increase the wait value from the current value by a single cycle or more by using the auto
wait capability in the external bus controller provided with the FR family.
If DREQ is negated after the period, the next transfer may be executed.
•
428
If the transfer type is external → internal:
Negate before the last sense timing of the clock in the L section of the external RD pin output
when accessing the transfer source for the last DMA transfer (Section where DACK = "L"
and RD = "L"). If DREQ is negated later than this, a DMA request may be sensed, resulting
in negation until the next transfer
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Figure 14.3-6 Negate Timing Example of the DREQ Pin Input for 2-cycle External Transfer --> Internal
Transfer
External bus clock
CS0
CS1
AS
RD
WRn
DREQn
DACKn
Perform the negation process within the range indicated by the arrows. Delaying the negation
timing beyond the point indicated by the
symbol may result in one extra transfer.
•
If the transfer is internal → external:
Use the DREQ negation sense timing so that it is placed prior to the write strobe negation
timing by a single cycle or more. There are following measures for achieving this:
-
Make the DREQ negation timing by a single cycle or more with the adjustment on the
external I/O side or external glue logic side.
-
Increase the wait value from the current value by a single cycle or more by using the auto
wait capability in the external bus controller provided with the FR family.
If DREQ is negated after the period, the next transfer may be executed.
❍ For fly-by transfer
For a demand transfer, be sure to set an address in an external area for the transfer destination.
•
For fly-by (timing to read pin) transfer:
After the IOWR pin output for the last DMA transfer goes to the "H" level, negate DREQ
while the external RD pin output is at the "L" level. (section where DACK="L" & RD="L"). If
DREQ is negated later than this, the negation may continue until the next transfer.
•
For fly-by (timing to IORD pin) transfer:
After the external WR pin output for the last DMA transfer goes to the "H" level, negate
DREQ while IORD is at the "L" level. (section where DACK="L" & IORD="L"). If DREQ is
negated later than this, the negation may continue until the next transfer.
429
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
Figure 14.3-7 Negate Timing Example of the DREQ Pin Input for Fly-by (Timing to IORD Pin) Transfer
External bus clock
CS0
CS1
AS
RD
WRn
DREQn
DACKn
IORD
Perform the negation process within the range indicated by the arrows. Delaying the negation
timing beyond the point indicated by the
symbol may result in one extra transfer.
■ Timing of the DREQ Pin Input for Continuing Transfer Over the Same Channel
❍ For burst, step, block, and demand transfers
Operation in which transfer is continued over the same channel by the DREQ pin input cannot
be guaranteed. If DREQ is reasserted at the fastest timing to clear requests retained internally
after the transfer ends, at least one system clock cycle (one CLK output cycle) is provided to
detect transfer requests for other channels. If, as a result, a transfer request for another channel
with a higher priority is detected, transfer on that channel will be started.
Even if DREQ is reasserted earlier, it is ignored because the transfer has not been completed. If
no transfer requests for other channels occur, transfer over the same channel is restarted by
reasserting DREQ when the DACK pin output is asserted.
■ Timing of DACK Pin Output
The DACK output of this DMAC indicates that transfer with respect to an accepted transfer
request is being performed.
The output of DACK is basically synchronized with the address output of external bus access
timing. To use DACK output, it is necessary to enable the DACK output with a port.
430
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Timing of the DEOP Pin Output
•
The DEOP output of this DMA indicates that DMA transfer for the specified number of times
of the accepted channel has been completed.
•
DEOP output is output when access to an external area of the last transfer block starts.
Thus, if any value other than "1" is set (block transfer mode) as the block size, DEOP is
output when the last data of the last block is transferred. In this case, the acceptance of the
next DREQ is already started even during transfer (before DEOP output) if the DACK pin
output is asserted.
•
The DEOP output is synchronized with RD and WRn of external bus access timing.
However, if the transfer source/transfer destination is internal access, DEOP is not output.
To use DEOP output, it is necessary to enable the DEOP output using the port register.
■ If an External Pin Transfer Request is Re-entered during Transfer
❍ For burst, step, and block transfers
While the DACK signal is asserted within the DMAC, the next transfer request, if it is entered, is
disabled. However, since operation of the external bus control unit and operation of the DMAC
are not completely synchronous, the circuit must be initialized to create DREQ pin input using
DACK and DEOP output to enable transfer requests by using DREQ input.
❍ For a demand transfer
If reloading of the transfer count register is specified when transfer for as many transfers as
specified has been completed, another transfer request is accepted.
■ If Another Transfer Request Occurs during Block Transfer
No request is detected before the transfer of the specified blocks is completed. At the block
boundaries, transfer requests accepted at that time are evaluated and then transfer on the
channel with the highest priority is performed.
■ Transfer between External I/O and External Memory
As targets of transfer by the DMAC, external I/O and external memory are not distinguished.
Specify an external I/O as a fixed external address.
To perform fly-by transfer, set the address of external memory in the transfer destination
address register. For external I/O, use DACK output and the signal decoded by the read signal
RD or write signal WRn pin.
■ AC Characteristics of DMAC
DREQ pin input, DACK pin output, and DEOP pin output are provided as the external pins
related to the DMAC. Output timing is synchronized with external bus access (refer to the AC
standard for the DMAC).
431
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.4 Operation Flowcharts
This section contains operation flowcharts for the following transfer modes:
• Block transfer
• Burst transfer
• Demand transfer
■ Block Transfer
Figure 14.4-1 shows the operation flowchart for block transfer.
Figure 14.4-1 Operation Flowchart for Block Transfer
DMA stop
DENB=>0
DENB=1
Reload enable
Activation request
wait
Activation request
Load the initial address,
transfer count, and number
of blocks
Calculate the address for
transfer source address access
One-time access for fly-by
Calculate the address for transfer
destination address access
Number of blocks - 1
BLK=0
Transfer count - 1
Write back the address,
transfer count, and
number of blocks
Only when the peripheral
interrupt activation source
is selected
Interrupt cleared
Interrupt clear
DTC=0
DMA transfer end
DMA interrupted
Block transfer
- Can be activated by all activation sources (selection).
- Can access to all areas.
- The number of blocks can be set.
- Interrupt clear is issued when the specified number of blocks is completed.
- The DMA interrupt is issued when transfer for the number of times specified is completed.
432
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Burst Transfer
Figure 14.4-2 shows the operation flowchart for burst transfer.
Figure 14.4-2 Operation Flowchart for Burst Transfer
DMA stop
DENB=>0
DENB=1
Reload enable
Activation request
wait
Load the initial address,
transfer count, and
number of blocks
Calculate the address for
transfer source address access
One-time access for fly-by
Calculate the address for transfer
destination address access
Number of blocks - 1
BLK=0
Transfer count - 1
DTC=0
Write back the address,
transfer count, and number
of blocks
Only when the peripheral interrupt
activation source is selected
Interrupt clear
Interrupt cleared
DMA transfer end
DMA interrupted
Burst transfer
- Can be activated by all activation sources (selection).
- Can access to all areas.
- The number of blocks can be set.
- Interrupt clear and the DMA interrupt are issued when
transfer for the number of times specified is completed.
433
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Demand Transfer
Figure 14.4-3 shows the operation flowchart for demand transfer.
Figure 14.4-3 Operation Flowchart for Demand Transfer
DMA stop
DENB=>0
None
Reload enable
DENB=1
Activation request
wait
Activation request
Load the initial address,
transfer count, and
number of blocks
Calculate the address for
transfer source address access
One-time access for fly-by
Calculate the address for transfer
destination address access
Number of transfer - 1
Write back the address,
transfer count, and number
of blocks
DTC=0
Interrupt clear
DMA transfer end
Only when the peripheral interrupt
activation source is selected
Interrupt cleared
DMA interrupted
Demand transfer
- Only requests (level detection) from the external pin (DREQ) are accepted. Activation by
other sources is disabled.
- Access to an external area is required (since access to an external area becomes the
next activation source).
- The number of blocks is always "1", regardless of the settings.
- Interrupt clear and the DMA interrupt are issued when transfer for the number of times
specified is completed.
434
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.5 Data Bus
This section shows the flow of data during 2-cycle transfer and fly-by transfer.
■ Flow of Data during 2-Cycle Transfer
Figure 14.5-1 shows examples of six types of transfer during 2-cycle transfer.
Figure 14.5-1 Examples of 2-Cycle Transfer (Continued on Next Page)
CPU
Read cycle
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus Data buffer
MB91301
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus Data buffer
F-bus
RAM
DMAC
Write cycle
I-bus
External bus I/F
DMAC
CPU
MB91301
External bus I/F
External area => external area transfer
F-bus
I/O
RAM
I/O
CPU
Read cycle
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus Data buffer
MB91301
Write cycle
I-bus
D-bus
F-bus
RAM
DMAC
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
External bus I/F
DMAC
CPU
MB91301
External bus I/F
External area => internal RAM area transfer
F-bus
I/O
RAM
I/O
CPU
Read cycle
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus Data buffer
F-bus
RAM
MB91301
DMAC
Write cycle
I-bus
D-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
External bus I/F
DMAC
CPU
MB91301
External bus I/F
External area => built-in I/O area transfer
F-bus
I/O
RAM
I/O
(Continued)
435
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
(Continued)
CPU
Read cycle
I-bus
D-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
MB91301
DMAC
Write cycle
I-bus
D-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
F-bus
RAM
External bus I/F
DMAC
CPU
MB91301
External bus I/F
Built-in I/O area => internal RAM area transfer
F-bus
I/O
RAM
I/O
CPU
Read cycle
I-bus
D-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
MB91301
DMAC
Write cycle
I-bus
D-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
F-bus
RAM
External bus I/F
DMAC
CPU
MB91301
External bus I/F
Internal RAM area => external area transfer
F-bus
I/O
RAM
I/O
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
F-bus
RAM
436
DMAC
Write cycle
I-bus
CPU
CPU
Read cycle
I-bus
D-bus
MB91301
DMAC
External bus I/F
MB91301
D-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
F-bus
I/O
RAM
I/O
External bus I/F
Internal RAM area => built-in I/O area transfer
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Flow of Data during Fly-By Transfer
Figure 14.5-2 shows examples of two types of transfer during fly-by transfer.
Figure 14.5-2 Examples of Fly-By Transfer
DMAC
CPU
Read cycle
I-bus
D-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
Data buffer
memory
MB91301
External bus I/F
Fly-by transfer (memory to I/O)
I/O write by RD or DACK
I/O
F-bus
RAM
Memory read by RD or CSn
I/O
CPU
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
memory
DMAC
Read cycle
I-bus
I/O read by WR or DACK
F-bus
RAM
Memory write by WR or CSn
I/O
I/O
MB91301
External bus I/F
Fly-by transfer (I/O to memory)
437
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.6 DMA External Interface
This section provides operation timing charts for the DMA external interface.
■ DMA External Interface Pins
DMA channels 0, 1 have the following DMA-dedicated pins (DREQ, DACK, and DEOP):
•
DREQ: DMA transfer request input pin for demand transfer. A transfer is requested with an
input.
•
DACK: This pin becomes active ("L" output) when DMA accesses an external area via the
external interface.
•
DEOP: This pin becomes active ("L" output) in synchronization with the last access to
complete DMA transfer.
•
IORD: This signal becomes active when the direction I/O -> memory is selected for fly-by
transfer.
•
IOWR: This signal becomes active when the direction memory -> I/O is selected for fly-by
transfer.
Note:
Refer to "4.10 DMA Access Operation" for the operation example of DMA external interface.
438
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.6.1 Input Timing of the DREQx Pin
The DREQx pin is a DMA start request signal. If the pin is also used as a port, enable
the DREQ input using the PFR register. This section shows the input timing of the
DREQx pin.
■ Timing of Transfer other than Demand Transfer
For transfer other than demand transfer, set the DMA start source to edge detection. Although
there is no rule for rise/fall timing, use three or more clock cycles as the holding time the DREQ
signal. To make another transfer request, enter the request after the DMA transfer is completed
(make a request after DEOP is output).
If a request is made before DEOP is output, it may be ignored.
Figure 14.6-1 shows the timing chart for transfer other than demand transfer.
Figure 14.6-1 Timing Chart for Transfer other than the Demand Transfer
When a DREQx edge is requested (for 2-cycle transfer)
MCLK
DREQ
A23 to A00
#RD1
#WR1
#RD2
#WR2
RD
WR
DEOP
CPU operation
MAD transfer
3 or more cycles
CPU
The next request must be
after DEOP output
439
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
■ Timing of Demand Transfer
For demand transfer, set the DMA start source to level detection. Although there is no rule for
starting, synchronize with RD/WRn of the DMA transfer when stopping a transfer. The sense
timing is the rise of MCLK in the final external access.
Figure 14.6-2 shows the timing chart for demand transfer.
Figure 14.6-2 Timing Chart for Demand Transfer
When a DREQx level is requested (for 2-cycle transfer)
MCLK
DREQ
A23 to A00
#RD1
#WR1
#RD2
#WR2
RD
WR
CPU operation
DMA transfer
CPU
Sense point of the 3rd transfer request
Note:
In this case, because 2-cycle transfer is used and the transfer source and transfer destination are
an external area, negate from the fall of #RD2 to before the final MCLK rise of #WR2 to stop the
two DMA transfer operations.
440
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
14.6.2 FR30 Compatible Mode of DACK
FR30 compatible mode of DACK makes the DACK timing identical to the timing of DMA
used in FR30 devices. This section provides the timing charts for the DACK pin in
FR30 compatible mode for the following examples of transfer mode setting:
• 2-cycle transfer mode
• Fly-by transfer mode
■ Transfer Mode Settings
Set the transfer mode using the PFR register corresponding to the DACK pin.
When setting PFR, match the transfer mode (2-cycle transfer/fly-by transfer) of the corresponding
DMA channel.
Note:
If 2-cycle transfer is set in FR30 compatible mode, the transfer is synchronized with RD or WR/
WRn. To use WR, enable WR by setting "0X1XB" for TYPE3 to TYPE0 of the ACR register.
❍ 2-cycle transfer mode
Figure 14.6-3 shows the timing chart in 2-cycle transfer mode.
Figure 14.6-3 Timing Chart in 2-Cycle Transfer Mode
RD
DQMUU/DQMUL
WR/WRn
DACK (AKxx=111 B ) *
DACK (AKxx=001 B ) *
DACK (AKxx=010 B ) *
Same timing as the chip select
2-cycle transfer setting disabled
DACK (AKxx=011 B ) *
DACK (AKxx=100 B ) *
DACK (AKxx=101 B ) *
DACK (AKxx=110 B ) *
* : AKxx is the setting value in the PFR register that corresponds to the DMA channel.
441
CHAPTER 14 DMA CONTROLLER (DMAC)
❍ Fly-by transfer mode
Figure 14.6-4 shows the timing chart in fly-by transfer mode.
Figure 14.6-4 Timing Chart in Fly-By Transfer Mode
RD
DQMUU/DQMUL
WR/WRn
IORD
IOWR
DACK (AKxx=111 B) *
Same timing as the chip select
DACK (AKxx=001 B) *
DACK (AKxx=010 B) *
DACK (AKxx=011 B) *
DACK (AKxx=100 B) *
DACK (AKxx=101 B) *
DACK (AKxx=110 B) *
Fly-by transfer setting disabled
Fly-by transfer setting disabled
Fly-by transfer setting disabled
Fly-by transfer setting disabled
Fly-by transfer setting disabled
Memory to I/O I/O to memory
Memory to I/O
I/O to memory
* : AKxx is the setting value in the PFR register that corresponds to the DMA channel.
442
CHAPTER 15
BIT SEARCH MODULE
This chapter describes the overview of the bit search module, the configuration and
functions of registers, and bit search module operation.
15.1 Overview of the Bit Search Module
15.2 Bit Search Module Registers
15.3 Bit Search Module Operation
443
CHAPTER 15 BIT SEARCH MODULE
15.1 Overview of the Bit Search Module
The bit search module searches for "0", "1", or any points of change for data written to
the input register and then returns the detected bit locations.
■ Block Diagram of the Bit Search Module
Figure 15.1-1 is a block diagram of the bit search module.
Figure 15.1-1 Block Diagram of the Bit Search Module
D-bus
Input latch
Address
decoder
Detection mode
1 detection data coding
Bit search circuit
Detection result
444
CHAPTER 15 BIT SEARCH MODULE
15.2 Bit Search Module Registers
This section describes the registers of the bit search module.
■ Bit Search Module Registers
Figure 15.2-1 Bit Search Module Register
0 detection data register (BSD0)
1 detection data register (BSD1)
Change point detection data register (BSDC)
Detection result register (BSRR)
■ 0 Detection Data Register (BSD0)
The configuration of the 0 detection data register (BSD0) is shown in Figure 15.2-2.
Figure 15.2-2 Configuration of 0 Detection Data Register (BSD0)
bit 31
0
Initial value
XXXXH
Address 0003F0H
W
•
0 detection is performed for the written data.
•
The initial value after a reset is undefined.
•
The read value is undefined.
•
Use a 32-bit length data transfer instruction for data transfer. Do not use 8-bit or 16-bit length
data transfer instructions.
■ 1 Detection Data Register (BSD1)
The configuration of the 1 detection data register (BSD1) is shown in Figure 15.2-3.
Figure 15.2-3 Configuration of 1 Detection Data Register (BSD1)
bit 31
0
Initial value
XXXXH
Address 0003F4H
R/W
Use a 32-bit length data transfer instruction for data transfer.
Do not use 8-bit or 16-bit length data transfer instructions.
❍ Writing
1 detection is performed for the written data.
445
CHAPTER 15 BIT SEARCH MODULE
❍ Reading
•
Save data of the internal state of the bit search module is read. This register is used to save
and restore the original state when the bit search module is used by, for example, an
interrupt handler.
•
Even though data is written to the 0 detection, change point detection, or data register, data
can be saved and restored only by using the 1 detection data register.
•
The initial value after a reset is undefined.
■ Change Point Detection Data Register (BSDC)
The configuration of the change point detection data register (BSDC) is shown in Figure 15.2-4.
Figure 15.2-4 Configuration of Change Point Detection Data Register (BSDC)
bit 31
0
Address 0003F8H
Initial value
XXXXH
W
•
Point of change are detected in the written value.
•
The initial value after a reset is undefined.
•
The read value is undefined.
•
Use a 32-bit length data transfer instruction for data transfer. Do not use 8-bit or 16-bit length
data transfer instructions.
■ Detection Result Register (BSRR)
The result of 0 detection, 1 detection, or change point detection is read. Which detection result
is to be read is determined by the data register that has been written to last.
The configuration of the detection result register (BSRR) is shown in Figure 15.2-5.
Figure 15.2-5 Configuration of Detection Result Register (BSRR)
bit 31
0
XXXXH
Address 0003FCH
R
446
Initial value
CHAPTER 15 BIT SEARCH MODULE
15.3 Bit Search Module Operation
The bit search module performs the following three operations:
• 0 detection
• 1 detection
• Change point detection
■ 0 Detection
The bit search module scans data written to the 0 detection data register from the MSB to LSB
and returns the location where the first "0" is detected. The detection result can be obtained by
reading the detection result register. The relationship between the detected location and the
return value is given in Table 15.3-1.
If a "0" is not found (that is, the value is FFFFFFFFH), 32 is returned as the search result.
[Execution example]
Write data
11111111111111111111000000000000B
11111000010010011110000010101010B
10000000000000101010101010101010B
11111111111111111111111111111111B
Read value (decimal)
(FFFFF000H)
(F849E0AAH)
(8002AAAAH)
(FFFFFFFFH)
--> 20
--> 5
--> 1
--> 32
■ 1 Detection
The bit search module scans data written to the 1 detection data register from the MSB to LSB
and returns the location where the first "1" is detected. The detection result can be obtained by
reading the detection result register. The relationship between the detected location and the
return value is given in Table 15.3-1.
If a "1" is not found (that is, the value is 00000000H), 32 is returned as the search result.
[Execution example]
Write data
00100000000000000000000000000000B
00000001001000110100010101100111B
00000000000000111111111111111111B
00000000000000000000000000000001B
00000000000000000000000000000000B
Read value (decimal)
(20000000H)
(01234567H)
(0003FFFFH)
(00000001H)
(00000000H)
--> 2
--> 7
--> 14
--> 31
--> 32
447
CHAPTER 15 BIT SEARCH MODULE
■ Change Point Detection
The bit search module scans data written to the change point detection data register from bit30
to the LSB for comparison with the MSB value. The first location where a value that is different
from that of the MSB is detected is returned. The detection result can be obtained by reading
the detection result register.
The relationship between the detected location and the return value is given in Table 15.3-1. If a
change point is not detected, 32 is returned. In change point detection, "0" is never returned as
a result.
[Execution example]
Write data
Read value (decimal)
00100000000000000000000000000000B
00000001001000110100010101100111B
00000000000000111111111111111111B
00000000000000000000000000000001B
00000000000000000000000000000000B
11111111111111111111000000000000B
11111000010010011110000010101010B
10000000000000101010101010101010B
11111111111111111111111111111111B
(20000000H)
(01234567H)
(0003FFFFH)
(00000001H)
(00000000H)
(FFFFF000H)
(F849E0AAH)
(8002AAAAH)
(FFFFFFFFH)
--> 2
--> 7
--> 14
--> 31
--> 32
--> 20
--> 5
--> 1
--> 32
Table 15.3-1 Bit Locations and Return Values (Decimal)
Detected
bit
location
Return
value
Detected
bit
location
Return
value
Detected
bit
location
Return
value
Detected
bit
location
Return
value
31
0
23
8
15
16
7
24
30
1
22
9
14
17
6
25
29
2
21
10
13
18
5
26
28
3
20
11
12
19
4
27
27
4
19
12
11
20
3
28
26
5
18
13
10
21
2
29
25
6
17
14
9
22
1
30
24
7
16
15
8
23
0
31
inexistent
32
■ Save/Restore Processing
If it is necessary to save and restore the internal state of the bit search module, such as when
the bit search module is used in an interrupt handler, use the following procedure:
1) Read the 1 detection data register and save its contents (save).
2) Use the bit search module.
3) Write the data saved in 1) to the 1 detection data register (restore).
With the above operation, the value obtained when the detection result register is read the next
time corresponds to the value written to the bit search module before "1".
If the data register written to last is the 0 detection or change point detection register, the value
is restored correctly with the above procedure.
448
CHAPTER 16
I2C INTERFACE
This chapter describes the overview of the I2C interface, the configuration and
functions of registers, and I2C interface operation.
16.1 Overview of the I2C Interface
16.2 I2C Interface Registers
16.3 Block Diagram of I2C Interface
16.4 Detailed on Registers of the I2C Interface
16.5 I2C Interface Operation
16.6 Operation Flowcharts
449
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
16.1 Overview of the I2C Interface
This section explains the overview of the I2C interface.
■ Overview
The I2C interface is a serial I/O port that supports INTER IC bus.
The I2C interface serves as a master or slave device on the I2C bus and has the following
features:
450
•
Master or slave sending and receiving
•
Arbitration function
•
Clock synchronization function
•
Slave address and general call address detection function
•
Transfer direction detection function
•
Function that repeatedly generates and detects a START condition
•
Bus error detection function
•
10-bit and 7-bit slave addresses
•
Slave address reception acknowledge control in master mode
•
Composite slave addresses supported
•
Interrupt enabled for transmission or bus error
•
Standard mode (maximum of 100 kbps) and high-speed mode (maximum of 400 kbps)
available
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
16.2 I2C Interface Registers
This section describes the registers of the I2C interface.
■ I2C Interface Registers
❍ Bus control register (IBCR0/IBCR1)
bit
Address: 000094H/0000B4H
Initial value =>
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BER
BEIE
SCC
MSS
ACK
GCAA
INTE
INT
R/W
0
R/W
0
W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
❍ Bus status register (IBSR0/IBSR1)
bit
Address: 000095H/0000B5H
Initial value =>
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BB
RSC
AL
LRB
TRX
AAS
GCA
ADT
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
12
11
10
9
8
❍ 10-bit slave address register (ITBA0/ITBA1)
bit
15
-
-
-
-
-
-
TA9
TA8
Initial value =>
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
Address: 000096H/0000B6H
bit
Address: 000097H/0000B7H
Initial value =>
14
13
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TA7
TA6
TA5
TA4
TA3
TA2
TA1
TA0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
❍ 10-bit slave address mask register (ITMK0/ITMK1)
bit
Address: 000098H/0000B8H
Initial value =>
bit
Address: 000099H/0000B9H
Initial value =>
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ENTB
RAL
-
-
-
-
TM9
TM8
R/W
0
R
0
R
1
R
1
R
1
R
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TM7
TM6
TM5
TM4
TM3
TM2
TM1
TM0
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
451
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
❍ 7-bit slave address register (ISBA0/ISBA1)
bit
7
-
SA6
SA5
SA4
SA3
SA2
SA1
SA0
Initial value =>
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
Address: 00009BH/0000BBH
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
❍ 7-bit slave address mask register (ISMK0/ISMK1)
bit
Address: 00009AH/0000BAH
Initial value =>
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ENSB
SM6
SM5
SM4
SM3
SM2
SM1
SM0
R/W
0
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
❍ Data register (IDAR0/IDAR1)
bit
Address: 00009DH/0000BDH
Initial value =>
7
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
❍ Clock control register (ICCR0/ICCR1)
bit
Address: 00009EH/0000BEH
Initial value =>
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TEST
-
EN
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
CS0
W
0
R
0
R/W
0
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
5
4
3
2
1
0
❍ Clock disable register (IDBL0/IDBL1)
bit
7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DBL
Initial value =>
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W
0
Address: 00009FH/0000BFH
452
6
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
16.3 Block Diagram of I2C Interface
This section shows the block diagram of the I2C interface.
■ Block Diagram (for 1 channel)
Figure 16.3-1 Block Diagram of the I2C Interface
ICCR
I2C operation enable
EN
IDBL
DBL
CLKP
Clock enable
ICCR
Clock division 2
2345
32
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
CS0
IBSR
BB
RSC
Clock selection 2 (1/12)
Shift clock edge change timing
Bus busy
Repeat start
Last Bit
LRB
TRX
Sync Shift clock generation
Start-stop condition
detection
Send/receive
Error
First Byte
ADT
Arbitration lost detection
AL
R-bus
IBCR
SCL0/SCL1
BER
BEIE
Interrupt request
IRQ
SDA0/SDA1
INTE
INT
IBCR
SCC
MSS
End
Start
Master
ACK enable
ACK
Start-stop condition
generation
GC-ACK
GCAA enable
IDAR
IBSR
AAS
Slave
Global call
Slave address
comparison
GCA
ISMK
ENSB
ITMK
ENTB
RAL
ITBA
ITMK
ISBA
ISMK
453
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
16.4 Detailed on Registers of the I2C Interface
This section describes the detailed register of the I2C interface.
■ Bus Status Register (IBSR0/IBSR1)
bit
Address: 000095H/0000B5H
Initial value=>
7
BB
R
0
6
RSC
R
0
5
AL
R
0
4
LRB
R
0
3
TRX
R
0
2
AAS
R
0
1
GCA
R
0
0
ADT
R
0
This register is read only. All bits are cleared when the I2C stops operating (EN = 0 in ICCR).
[bit7] BB (Bus Busy)
This bit indicates the status of the I2C bus.
0
STOP condition detected
1
START condition detected (bus used)
[bit6] RSC (Repeated Start Condition)
This bit is the repeated START condition detection bit.
0
Repeated START condition not detected
1
Repeated START condition detected while bus is being used
This bit is cleared when the slave address transfer ends (ADT=0) or when the STOP condition
is detected.
[bit5] AL (Arbitration Lost)
This bit is the arbitration lost detection bit.
0
Arbitration lost not detected
1
Arbitration lost detected during master transmission
Write "0" to the INT bit or "1" to the MSS bit of the IBCR register to clear this bit.
Arbitration lost is detected if:
•
The transmission data does not match the data on the SDA line at the rising edge of SCL.
•
A repeated START condition is generated in the first bit of the data by another master.
•
The I2C interface cannot generate START or STOP condition because the SCL line is driven
to "L" by another slave device.
[bit4] LRB (Last Received Bit)
This bit is an acknowledge storage bit that stores an acknowledge from the receiving device.
0
Slave acknowledge detected
1
Slave acknowledge not detected
This bit is rewritten if an acknowledge is detected (reception 9 bits). This bit is cleared if a
START or STOP condition is detected.
454
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
[bit3] TRX (Transferring Data)
This bit indicates the transmission status during a data transfer.
0
Data transmission stopped
1
Data transmission in progress
This bit is set to "1" if:
• A START condition occurs in master mode.
• The transfer of the first byte ends when this bit is read in slave mode (transmission).
• When data is sent in master mode.
This bit is set to "0" if:
• The bus is idle (BB=0: IBCR).
• An arbitration lost occurs.
• "1" is written to the SCC bit in the master interrupt status (MSS=1, INT=1).
• The MSS bit is cleared in the master interrupt status (MSS=1, INT=1).
• No acknowledge occurred for the last transfer in slave mode.
• Data is received in slave mode.
• Data is received from a slave in master mode.
[bit2] AAS (Addressed As Slave)
This bit is the slave addressing detection bit.
0
No addressing in slave mode
1
Addressing in slave mode
This bit is cleared when a (repeated) START or STOP condition is detected.
This bit is set when a 7-bit or 10-bit slave address is detected.
[bit1] GCA (General Call Address)
This bit is the general call address (00H) detection bit.
0
No general call address received in slave mode
1
General call address received in slave mode
This bit is cleared when a (repeated) START or STOP condition is detected.
[bit0] ADT (Address Data Transfer)
This bit is the slave address reception detection bit.
0
Received data is not a slave address (or the bus is open).
1
Received data is a slave address.
This bit is set to "1" if a START condition is detected. It is cleared after the second byte if the
header section of a slave address is detected during 10-bit write access. Otherwise, it is
cleared after the first byte.
"After the first or second byte" means the followings:
455
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
• Writing "0" to the MSS bit during master interrupt: (MSS=1, INT=1: IBCR)
• Writing "1" to the SCC bit during master interrupt: (MSS=1, INT=1: IBCR)
• Clearing the INT bit
• Beginning of a transfer byte that is not used for the transfer target as master or slave
■ Bus Control Register (IBCR0/IBCR1)
bit
15
BER
R/W
Initial value=>
0
Address: 000094H/0000B4H
14
BEIE
R/W
0
13
SCC
W
0
12
MSS
R/W
0
11
ACK
R/W
0
10
GCAA
R/W
0
9
INTE
R/W
0
8
INT
R/W
0
Bits other than BER and BEIE are cleared if the I2C interface is stopped (EN=0: ICCR).
[bit15] BER (Bus Error)
This bit is the bus error interrupt request flag bit.
For a read by a read modify instruction, "1" is always read.
During writing
0
Clears the bus error interrupt request flag.
1
Irrelevant
During reading
0
Bus error not detected
1
Error condition detected
If this bit is set, the EN bit of the CCR register is cleared, stopping the I2C interface and
halting data transfer. All bits of the IBSR and IBCR registers other than BER and BEIE are
cleared.
This bit must be cleared before the I2C interface is enabled (EN=1) again.
This bit is set to "1" if:
• An illegal START or STOP condition at a specific location is detected (while a slave
address or data is being transferred).*
• The header section of a slave address is received during a 10-bit read access before a
10-bit write access with the first byte is performed. *
• A STOP condition is detected in master mode.
*: While the I2C interface is enabled during transfer, this detection flag is set after the first
[STOP] condition is received to prevent an illegal bus error report.
[bit14] BEIE (Bus Error Interrupt Enable)
This bit is the bus error interrupt enable bit.
0
Bus error interrupt disabled
1
Bus error interrupt enabled
An interrupt occurs if this bit is set to "1" and the BER bit is set to "1".
456
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
[bit13] SCC (Start Condition Continue)
This bit is the repeated [START] condition generation bit.
During writing
0
Irrelevant
1
Generates a repeated START condition in master transfer.
The read value of this bit is always "0".
If "1" is written to this bit in master mode (MSS = 1 and INT = 1) a repeated START condition is
generated, the INT bit is automatically cleared.
[bit12] MSS (Master Slave Select)
This bit is the master or slave selection bit.
0
Selects slave mode.
1
Selects master mode. Generates a START condition to enable the value of
the IDAR register to be sent as a slave address.
This bit is cleared when arbitration lost occurs during master transmission, causing slave mode
to start.
Write "0" to this bit during a master interrupt flag is set (MSS=1, INT=1) to automatically clear
the INT bit. Then, generate a [STOP] condition to end the transfer.
Note:
The MSS bit is directly reset. To detect a STOP condition, check the BB bit of the IBSR register.
Write "1" while the bus is idle (MSS=0, BB=0) to generate a START condition. The value of the
IDAR register are also sent.
While the bus is being used (BB=1, TRX=0, MSS=0), write "1" to the MSS bit to cause the I2C
interface to start transmission after waiting for the bus to be opened. If, during this time, the I2C
interface is specified as the address for a slave that is accompanied by a write access, the bus
is opened after the transfer ends. If the interface is transmitting as a slave (AAS=1, TRX=1:
IBCS) during this time, no data is sent even if the bus has been opened.
It is important to check whether the I2C interface is specified as a slave (AAS=1: IBSR), whether
data transmission is normal at the next interrupt (MSS=1: IBCR), and whether an illegal
termination has occurred (AL=1: IBSR).
Note:
When using in the following condition, transmission of general call address is prohibited since
reception as a slave cannot be performed.
• In addition to this LSI, if another LSI that becomes master mode exists on the bus, this LSI
sends general call address as a master, and arbitration lost occurs at the second byte or later.
457
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
[bit11] ACK (ACKnowledge)
This bit generates an acknowledge according to the setting of the data receive enable bit.
0
Acknowledge not generated when data is received
1
Acknowledge generated when data is received
This bit is disabled when slave address data is received in slave mode.
An acknowledge is returned if the I2C interface detects a 7-bit or 10-bit slave address when the
corresponding enable bits (ENTB: ITMK, ENSB: ISMK) are set.
Write to this bit while an interrupt flag is set (INT=1), the bus is idle (BB=0: IBSR), or the I2C
interface is stopped (EN=0: ICCR).
[bit10] GCAA (General Call Address Acknowledge)
This bit is an acknowledge enable bit used when a general call address is received.
0
Acknowledge not generated when general call address is received
1
Acknowledge generated when general call address is received
Write to this bit while an interrupt flag is set (INT=1), the bus is idle (BB=0: IBSR), or the I2C
interface is stopped (EN=0: ICCR).
[bit9] INTE (INTerrupt Enable)
This bit is the interrupt enable bit.
0
Interrupts disabled
1
Interrupts enabled
When this bit is "1", the interrupt is generated if the INT bit is "1".
[bit8] INT (INTerrupt)
This bit is the transfer end interrupt request flag bit. For a read by a read modify instruction,
"1" is always read.
During writing
458
0
Clears the transfer end interrupt request flag.
1
Irrelevant
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
During reading
0
•
•
•
Transfer not ended
Not a transfer target
Bus is open.
1
This bit is set to "1" if a one-byte transfer that includes the acknowledge bit is
completed and the following conditions are met:
• Bus master
• Slave address
• A general call address was received.
• Arbitration lost occurred.
If the interface is specified as a slave address, this bit is set at the end of
slave address reception that includes an acknowledge.
If this bit is set to "1", the SCL line is maintained at the "L" level. Write "0" to this bit to clear it
and to open the SCL line to transfer the next byte. A repeated START or STOP condition is
generated.
This bit is cleared when the SCC bit or the MSS bit is set to "1".
Note:
Contention of SCC, MSS, and INT bits
If data is simultaneously written to the SCC, MSS, and INT bits, contention occurs between the
next-byte transfer, repeated START condition generation, and STOP condition generation. If this
situation occurs, the priorities are as follows:
1. Next-byte transfer and STOP condition generation
When the INT bit is set to "0" and the MSS bit is set to "0", writing of the MSS bit has
precedence and a STOP condition is generated.
2. Next-byte transfer and START condition generation
When the INT bit is set to "0" and the SCC bit is set to "1", writing of the SCC bit has
precedence, a repeated START condition is generated, and the value of IDAR is sent.
3. Repeated START condition generation and STOP condition generation
When the SCC bit is set to "1" and the MSS bit is set to "0" at the same time, clearing of the
MSS bit has precedence. A STOP condition is generated and the I2C interface enters slave
mode.
Note:
When an instruction which generates a start condition is executed (the MSS bit is set to "1") at the
timing shown in Figure 16.4-2, arbitration lost detection (AL bit = 1) prevents an interrupt (INT bit =
1) from being generated.
• Condition 1 in which an interrupt (INT bit = 1) upon detection of "AL bit = 1" does not occur
When an instruction which generates a start condition is executed (setting the MSS bit in the
IBCR register to "1") with no start condition detected (BB bit = 0) and with the SDA or SCL pin at
the "L" level.
459
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
Figure 16.4-1 Diagram of Timing at which an Interrupt upon Detection of "AL Bit = 1"
does not Occur
"L"
SCL pin
"L"
SDA pin
1
I2C
operating enable state (EN bit = 1)
Master mode setting (MSS bit = 1)
Arbitration lost detection (AL bit = 1)
Bus busy (BB bit )
0
Interrupt (INT bit )
0
• Condition 2 in which an interrupt (INT bit = 1) upon detection of "AL bit = 1" does not occur
When an instruction which generates a start condition by enabling I2C operation (EN bit = 1) is
executed (setting the MMS bit in the IBCR register to "1") with the I2C bus occupied by another
master.
This is because, as shown in Figure 16.4-2, when the other master on the I2C bus starts
communication with I2C disabled (EN bit = 0), the I2C bus enters the occupied state with no start
condition detected (BB bit = 0).
Figure 16.4-2 Diagram of Timing at which an Interrupt upon Detection of "AL Bit = 1"
does not Occur
Start Condition
The INT bit interrupt does not
occur in the ninth clock cycle.
Stop Condition
SCL pin
SDA pin
SLAVE ADDRESS
ACK
DAT
ACK
EN bit
MSS bit
AL bit
BB bit
INT bit
460
0
0
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
Example in which an interrupt (INT bit = 1) upon detection of "AL bit = 1" occurs
When an instruction which generates a start condition is executed (setting "1" to the MSS bit) with
the bus busy detected (BB = 1) and the arbitration lost is performed, the INT bit interrupt is
generated upon detection of AL bit =1.
Figure 16.4-3 Diagram of Timing at which an Interrupt in "AL Bit = 1" Occurs
Interrupt in the ninth clock cycle
Start Condition
SCL pin
SDA pin
SLAVE ADDRESS
ACK
DAT
EN bit
MISS bit
Clearing the AL bit
by software
AL bit
BB bit
Releasing the SCL by clearing
the INT bit by software
INT bit
If a symptom as described above can occur, follow the procedure below for software processing.
1) Execute the instruction that generates a start condition (set the MSS bit to "1").
2) Use, for example, the timer function to wait for the time * for three-bit data transmission at the
I2C transfer frequency set in the ICCR register.
Example: Time for three-bit data transmission at an I2C transfer frequency of 100 kHz
{1/(100 x 103)} x 3 = 30 µs
3) Check the AL and BB bits in the IBSR register and, if the AL and BB bits are "1" and "0",
respectively, set the EN bit in the ICCR register to "0" to initialize I2C. When the AL and BB bits
are not so, perform normal processing.
461
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
A sample flow is given below.
Master mode setting
Set the MSS bit in the bus control register (IBCR) to "1".
Wait * for the time for three-bit data transmission at the I2C
transfer frequency set in the clock control register (ICCR).
NO
BB bit = 0 and AL bit = 1?
YES
Set the EN bit to "0" to initialize I2C
To normal process
*: When "arbitration lost" is detected, the MSS bit is set to "1" and then the AL bit is
set to "1" without fail after the time for three-bit data transmission at the I2C
transfer frequency.
■ Clock Control Register (ICCR0/ICCR1)
bit 15
Address: 00009EH/0000BEH TEST
W
Initial value=>
0
14
−
R
0
13
EN
R/W
0
12
CS4
R/W
1
11
CS3
R/W
1
10
CS2
R/W
1
9
CS1
R/W
1
8
CS0
R/W
1
[bit15] Test bit
This bit is used for testing.
Be sure to write "0" to it.
[bit14] (Reserved)
This bit is unused.
Be sure to write "0" to it.
[bit13] EN (Enable)
This bit is the enable bit for the I2C interface.
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
If this bit is set to "0", all bits of the IBSR and IBCR registers (except the BER and BEIE bits) are
cleared. This bit is cleared when a bus error occurs (BER = 1: IBCR).
Note:
If operation is disabled, the I2C interface immediately stops sending and receiving.
462
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
[bit12 to bit8] CS4 to CS0 (Clock Period Select 4 to 0)
These bits set the frequency of the serial clock.
These bits can be written only when operation is disabled (EN=0) or the EN bit is cleared.
The frequency of the shift clock, fsck, which is calculated as shown below.
φ
fsck=
n
12+15
φ : Machine clock (=CLKP)
N>0
Register setting
n
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
CS0
1
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
1
0
3
0
0
0
1
1
...
...
...
...
...
...
31
1
1
1
1
1
Setting disabled for CS4 to CS0=00000B
100 kbps
400 kbps
Clock frequency
CLKP [MHz]
n
fsck
n
fsck
34
27
100.3
6
390.8
25
20
98
4
396.8
17
13
99.4
3
333.3
12.5
9
101.6
2
320.5
8.5
6
97.7
1
314.8
6.25
4
99.2
1
231.5
463
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
■ 10-bit Slave Address Register (ITBA0/ITBA1)
bit
Address: 000096H/0000B6H
Initial value =>
15
R
0
bit
Address: 000097H/0000A7H
7
TA7
R/W
Initial value =>
0
14
R
0
13
R
0
12
R
0
11
R
0
10
R
0
9
TA9
R/W
0
8
TA8
R/W
0
6
TA6
R/W
0
5
TA5
R/W
0
4
TA4
R/W
0
3
TA3
R/W
0
2
TA2
R/W
0
1
TA1
R/W
0
0
TA0
R/W
0
ITBAH
ITBAL
Rewrite this register while operation is disabled (EN=0: ICCR).
[bit15 to bit10] (Reserved)
The values read from these bits are "0".
[bit9 to bit0] 10-bit slave address bits (A9 to A0)
If a 10-bit address is enabled (ENTB=1: ITMK), slave address data is received in the slave
mode and then compared with the ITBA. An acknowledge is sent to the master after the
address header of a 10-bit write access is received. If the received data of 1st and 2nd bytes
and the TA9 bit to TA0 bit value are compared and produce a match, an acknowledge signal
is sent to the master device and the AAS bit is set.
In addition, the I2C interface receives the address header of 10-bit read access after a
repeated START condition is generated.
All bits of the slave address can be masked for the ITMK register setting.
The received slave address is overwritten to the ITBA register. This register is valid when the
ASS bit of the IBSR register is set to "1".
■ 10-bit Slave Address Mask Register (ITMK0/ITMK1)
bit 15
Address: 000098H/0000B8H ENTB
R/W
Initial value =>
0
14
RAL
R
0
13
R
1
12
R
1
11
R
1
10
R
1
9
TM9
R/W
1
8
TM8
R/W
1
bit
7
Address: 000099H/0000B9H
TM7
R/W
Initial value =>
1
6
TM6
R/W
1
5
TM5
R/W
1
4
TM4
R/W
1
3
TM3
R/W
1
2
TM2
R/W
1
1
TM1
R/W
1
0
TM0
R/W
1
[bit15] ENTB (10-bit slave address enable bit)
This bit is the 10-bit slave address enable bit.
0
10-bit slave address disabled
1
10-bit slave address enabled
Write access is enabled while the I2C interface is stopped (EN=0: ICCR).
464
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
[bit14] RAL (Slave address length bit)
This bit indicates the slave address length.
0
7-bit slave address
1
10-bit slave address
If the 10-bit and 7-bit slave address enable bits are both enabled (ENTB=1 and ENSB=1), this
bit can be used to determine whether the transfer length of a 10-bit or 7-bit slave address
becomes valid. This bit is valid if the AAS bit (IBSR) is set to "1".
This bit is cleared when the interface is disabled (EN = 0: ICCR).
This bit is read only.
[bit13 to bit10] (Reserved)
These bits are unused. The values read from these bits are always "1".
[bit9 to bit0] 10-bit slave address mask bits
These bits mask the bits of the 10-bit slave address register (ITBA). Write access is enabled
while the I2C interface is disabled (EN=0: ICCR).
0
These bits not used for comparison of slave addresses
1
These bits used for comparison of slave addresses
Set these bits to enable transmission of an acknowledge to a compound 10-bit slave address.
When using this register for comparison of 10-bit slave address, set these bits to "1". The
received slave address is overwritten to ITBA. When ASS = 1(IBSR), the specified slave
address can be determined by reading the ITBA register.
Each of TM9 to TM0 bits of ITMK corresponds to one bit of the ITBA address. If the value of
each of the TM9 to TM0 bits is "1", the ITBA address becomes valid; if it is "0", the ITBA
address becomes invalid.
Example: ITBA address is 0010010111B and ITMK address is 1111111100B:
The slave address is in the space from 0010010100B to 0010010111B.
■ 7-bit Slave Address Register (ISBA0/ISBA1)
bit
Address: 00009BH/0000BBH
Initial value=>
7
R
0
6
SA6
R/W
0
5
SA5
R/W
0
4
SA4
R/W
0
3
SA3
R/W
0
2
SA2
R/W
0
1
SA1
R/W
0
0
SA0
R/W
0
Rewrite this register while operation is stopped (EN=0: ICCR).
[bit7] (Reserved)
This bit is unused.
The value read from this bit is "0".
[bit6 to bit0] Slave address bits (SA6 to SA0)
If a 7-bit slave address is enabled (ENSB = 1: ISMK) when slave address data is received in
slave mode, these bits of ISBA and the received slave address data are compared. If a slave
address match is detected, an acknowledge is sent to the master and the AAS bit is set.
465
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
The I2C interface returns an acknowledge in response to reception of the address header of
a 7-bit read access after a repeated START condition is generated.
All bits of a slave address are masked using of the ISMK. The received slave address data is
overwritten to the ISBA register. This register is enabled only when AAS (IBSR register) is
set to "1".
The I2C interface does not compare ISBA and the received slave address when a 10-bit
slave address is specified or a general call is received.
■ 7-bit Slave Address Mask Register (ISMK0/ISMK1)
bit 15
Address: 00009AH/0000BAH ENSB
R/W
Initial value=>
0
14
SM6
R/W
1
13
SM5
R/W
1
12
SM4
R/W
1
11
SM3
R/W
1
10
SM2
R/W
1
9
SM1
R/W
1
8
SM0
R/W
1
Rewrite this register while operation is stopped (EN=0: ICCR).
[bit15] ENSB (7-bit slave address enable bit)
This bit is the 7-bit slave address enable bit.
0
7-bit slave address disabled
1
7-bit slave address enabled
[bit14 to bit8] 7-bit slave address mask bits
0
These bits not used for comparison of slave addresses
1
These bits used for comparison of slave addresses
Set these bits to enable transmission of an acknowledge to a compound 7-bit slave address.
When using this register for comparison of a 7-bit slave address, set these bits to "1". The
received slave address is overwritten to ISBA. When ASS = 1 (IBSR), the specified slave
address can be determined by reading the ISBA register.
After the I2C interface is enabled, the slave address (ISBA) is rewritten by reception operation.
When ISMK is rewritten, ISMK must be set again to provide the expected operation.
Each of the SM6 to SM0 bits of ISMK corresponds to one bit of the ISBA address. If the value of
each of the SM6 to SM0 bit is "1", the ISBA address becomes valid; if it is "0", the ISBA address
becomes invalid.
Example:
466
If ISBA address is 0010111B and ISMK address is 1111100B:
The slave address is in the space from 0010100B to 0010111B.
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
■ Data Register (IDAR0/IDAR1)
bit
Address: 00009DH/0000BDH
7
D7
R/W
Initial value=>
0
6
D6
R/W
0
5
D5
R/W
0
4
D4
R/W
0
3
D3
R/W
0
2
D2
R/W
0
1
D1
R/W
0
0
D0
R/W
0
[bit7 to bit0] Data bits (D7 to D0)
Bits D7 to D0 are a data register used for serial transfer. Data is transferred from the MSB.
Since the writing side of this register has double buffers, write data is loaded into the register
for serial transfer while the bus is being used (BB=1). When the INT bit (IBCR) is cleared or
the bus is idle (BB = 0: IBSR), the transfer data is loaded into the internal transfer register.
Since, during reading, data is directly read from the register for serial transfer, receive data is
valid only while the INT bit (IBCR) is set.
■ Clock Disable Register (IDBL0/IDBL1)
bit
Address: 00009FH/0000BFH
Initial value=>
7
R
0
6
R
0
5
R
0
4
R
0
3
R
0
2
R
0
1
R
0
0
DBL
R/W
0
[bit0] Clock disable bit (DBL)
This bit specifies whether to supply or stop supply of the operating clock for the I2C interface.
This bit can be used in low-power consumption mode.
0
Supplies the clock for I2C.
1
Stops supply of the clock for I2C. The I2C line is opened.
This bit is initialized to "0" by a reset. When "1" is written to this bit, the read value except this
register (IBDL) is undefined and writing to other than this bit (this register) is invalid.
Note:
When this bit is set to "1", I2C immediately stops even if send and receive operation is in progress.
467
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
16.5 I2C Interface Operation
This section explains the operation of the I2C interface.
■ Operational Explanation
The I2C bus consists of two bidirectional bus lines used for transfer: one serial data line (SDA)
and one serial clock line (SCL). The I2C interface has two corresponding open-drain I/O pins
(SDA and SCL), enabling wired logic.
❍ START Condition
Write "1" to the MSS bit while the bus is open (BB=0, MSS=0) to place the I2C interface in
master mode and to generate a START condition.
The interface sends the value of the IDAR register as a slave address.
To generate a repeated START condition, write "1" to the SCC bit while the interrupt flag is set
in bus master mode (MSS = 1 and INT = 1: IBCR).
Write "1" to the MSS bit while the bus is being used (BB=1 and TRX=0: IBSR, MSS=0 and
INT=0: IBCR) to cause the interface to start transmission after waiting for the bus to be open. If,
during this time, the interface in slave mode is receiving a write access, it starts transmission
after the transfer is completed. Then the interface is open the bus.
If the interface is sending data, it does not start transmission even though the bus has been
released.
To use this feature, it is important to check the followings:
•
Whether the interface is specified as a slave (MSS=0: IBCR, AAS=1: IBSR).
•
Whether data byte transmission is normal (AL=1: IBSR) when the next interrupt is received.
❍ STOP Condition
Write "0" to the MSS bit in master mode (MSS=1, INT=1: IBCR) to generate a STOP condition
and to place the interface in slave mode. Writing "0" to the MSS bit in any other state is
irrelevant.
After the MSS bit is cleared, the interface tries to generate a STOP condition. However, a STOP
condition will not be generated if the SCL line is driven to L. An interrupt is generated after the
next byte is transferred.
Notes:
• It takes time from writing "0" to the MSS bit until the STOP condition is generated.
• Disabling the I2C interface (DBL=1: IDBL or EN=0: ICCR) before the "STOP" condition occurs
stops the operation immediately and generates an invalid clock on the SCL line.
• Before disabling the I2C interface (DBL=1: IDBL or EN=0: ICCR), check that the "STOP"
condition has occurred (BB=0: IBSR).
468
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
❍ Slave Address Detection
In slave mode, BB=1 is set after a START condition is generated. The receive data from the
master device is stored in the IDAR register.
When a 7-bit slave address is enabled (ISMK ENSB=1)
After 8-bit data is received, the IDAR and ISBA register values are compared. However, the
bits masked in the ISMK register are not compared.
If the comparison result is a match, the AAS bit is set to "1", an acknowledge is sent to the
master, and the value of bit0 of the receive data (bit0 of the IDAR register after reception) is
inverted and stored in the TRX bit.
When a 10-bit slave address is enabled (ITMK ENTB=1)
If the header section of a 10-bit address {11110,TA1,TA0,write} is detected, an acknowledge
is sent to the master and the value of bit0 of the receive data is inverted and stored in the
TRX bit. No interrupt occurs at this time.
Then, the next transfer data and the low-order data of the ITBA register are compared. They
are compared with the bits masked in the ISMK register. If the result is a match, the AAS bit
is set to "1" and an acknowledge is sent to the master. An interrupt occurs at this time.
If the address specification as a slave has been made and a repeated START condition is
detected, the AAS bit is set to "1" and an interrupt occurs after the header section of a 10-bit
address {11110,TA0,TA1,read} is received.
The interface has two independent registers: a 10-bit slave address register (ITBA) and a 7bit slave address register (ISBA). If both registers are enabled (ENSB=1: ISMK, ENTB=1:
ITMK), an acknowledge can be sent to both 10-bit and 7-bit addresses.
The receive slave address length in slave mode (AAS = 1) can be determined using the RAL
bit of ITMK register. In master mode, disabling both registers (ENSB = 0: ISMK, ENTB = 0:
ITMK) can prevent a slave address from being generated for the I2C interface.
All slave addresses can be masked by setting the ITMK and ISMK registers.
❍ Slave Address Mask
The slave address mask registers (ITMK/ISMK) can mask each of the bits of slave address
registers. A bit set to "1" in the mask register is compared while a bit set to "0" is not compared.
A receive slave address can be recognized by reading the ITBA register (when a 10-bit address
is received) or the ISBA register (when a 7-bit address is received) in the slave mode (ASS=1:
IBSR).
If the bit mask is cleared, the interface can be used as the bus monitor because it is always
accessed as a slave.
Note:
This feature does not become a real bus monitor because it returns an acknowledge when a slave
address is received even though no other slave device is available.
469
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
❍ Master Addressing
In master mode, BB=1 and TRX=1 are set after a START condition is generated and the IDAR
register value is sent starting with the MSB. After address data is sent and an acknowledge is
received from a slave device, bit0 of the send data (bit0 of the IDAR register after transmission)
is inverted and stored in the TRX bit. This operation is also performed for a repeated START
condition.
Two bytes are sent for a 10-bit slave address during write access. The first byte data consists of
the header section of that indicates a 10-bit sequence {11110,A9,A8,0} and the second byte
data consists of the low-order 8-bit of the slave address {A7,A6,A5,A4,A3,A2,A1,A0}.
The series of transmissions described above bytes places the 10-bit slave device in the read
access state and generates a repeated START condition as well as the header section
{11110,A9,A8,1} that will be used for read access.
Write
START condition: A6,A5,A4,A3,A2,A1,A0,0
Read
START condition: A6,A5,A4,A3,A2,A1,A0,1
Write
START condition: 11110,A9,A8,0,A7,A6,A5, A4,A3,A2,A1,A0
7-bit slave access
10-bit slave access
Read
START condition: 11110,A9,A8,0,A7,A6, A5,A4,A3,A2, A1,A0
Repeated START condition: 11110,A9,A8,1
❍ Arbitration
Arbitration occurs if, during sending in master mode, data is also sent by other master devices.
Arbitration lost is recognized if the local device’s transmission data is "1" and the level on the
SDA line is set to "L". Then, AL=1 is set.
The AL bit is also set if an unnecessary START condition is detected in the first bit of the data
and neither a START nor a STOP condition can be generated for the same reason.
If arbitration lost is detected, the MSS and TRX bits are set to "0" and the device immediately
enters slave receive mode and returns an acknowledge when it receives the device’s own slave
address.
❍ Acknowledge
The receiving device sends an acknowledge to the sending device.
The ACK bit (IBCR) sets whether an acknowledge should be sent when data is received.
If, during data transmission in slave mode (read access from other masters), an acknowledge is
not returned from the master, the TRX bit is cleared to "0" and the device enters receive mode.
This allows the master to generate a STOP condition when the slave opens the SCL line.
In master mode, read the LRB bit (IBSR) to check for an acknowledge.
❍ Bus Error
A bus error is recognized and the I2C interface is stopped if:
470
•
A violation of the basic convention on the I2C bus during data transfer (including the ACK bit)
is detected.
•
A stop condition in master mode is detected.
•
A violation of the basic convention on the I2C bus while the bus is idle is detected.
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
❍ Communication Error that Causes No Errors
If, during transmission in master mode, an illegal clock is generated on the SCL line due to
noise or for some other reason, the transmission bit counter of the I2C interface may run quickly,
causing the slave to hang while L has appeared on the SDA line in the ACK cycle.
An error (AL=1, BER=1) does not occur for such an illegal clock.
If this situation occurs, perform the following error processing:
1. A communication error can be assumed if LRB=1 when MSS=1, TRX=1, INT=1.
2. Set EN to "0" and then set EN to "1" to cause SCL to generate one clock on a pseudo basis.
This action causes the slave to release the bus. The period from the time EN is set to "0"
until EN is set to "1" must be long enough for the slave to recognize it as a clock (about as
long as the H period of a transmission clock).
3. Since the IBSR and IBCR are cleared when EN is set to "0", perform retransmission
processing from the START condition. No STOP condition is generated at this point if BSS is
set to "0". Insert an interval equal to or longer than n x 7 x tCPP between the point at which
EN is set to "1" and the point at which MSS is set to "1" (START condition).
Example:
High-speed mode: 6 x 7 x 30.3=about 1.273 µs
Standard mode: 27 x 7 x 30.3=about 5.727 µs
Note:
Since BER, if set, is not cleared even if EN is set to "0", first clear it and then resend it.
471
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
❍ Other Items
1. Addressing after arbitration lost occurs
After arbitration lost occurs, check whether or not the local device is addressed using
software.
When arbitration lost occurs, the device becomes a slave in terms of hardware. However,
after one-byte transfer is completed, both the CLK and DATA lines are set to "L" level. Thus,
if the device is not addressed, immediately open the CLK and DATA lines. If the device is
addressed, open the CLK and DATA lines after preparing for slave transmission or reception
(All of these things must be processed using software).
2. Interrupt condition when one-byte transfer is completed
An interrupt source is generated on I2C bus when one-byte transfer is completed or when an
interrupt condition is met.
Since multiple interrupt conditions must be checked by one interrupt, each of the flags must
be checked by the interrupt routine. The following lists the interrupt conditions used when
one-byte transfer is completed:
• The device is a bus master.
• The device is an addressed slave.
• A general call address is received.
• Arbitration lost occurs.
3. Arbitration lost and interrupt source
When arbitration lost is detected, an interrupt source is generated, not immediately but after
one-byte transfer is completed.
When arbitration lost is detected, the device becomes a slave in terms of hardware.
However, in slave mode, a total of nine clocks must be output before an interrupt source can
be generated. Thus, since an interrupt source is not immediately generated, no processing
can be performed after arbitration lost occurs.
472
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
16.6 Operation Flowcharts
This section provides the operation flowcharts for the I2C interface.
■ Example of Slave Address and Data Transfer
Figure 16.6-1 Example of Slave Address and Data Transfer
7-bit slave addressing
Transfer data
Start
Start
BER bit clear (set)
Interface enable EN=1
Slave address in
write access
IDAR=S. address <<1+RW
MSS=1 INT=0
IDAR = Byte data
INT=0
NO
INT=1?
INT=1?
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
BER=1?
BER=1?
NO
NO
AL=1?
YES
Restart and transfer
due to check of AAS
NO
ACK?
(LRB=0?)
Bus error
YES
Restart and transfer
due to check of AAS
AL=1?
NO
NO
YES
Preparing for
data transfer
Transfer completed
The slave does not generate
ACK, or the master cannot
receive ACK
First set EN to "0" then
perform retransmission
ACK?
(LRB=0?)
NO
YES
Transfer
of last
byte
YES
NO
Transfer completed
Generates repeated START
condition or STOP condition.
Check that a STOP condition
has been generated (BB = 0),
and set EN to "0".
Transfer completed
Transmission:
The slave does not generate ACK,
or the master cannot receive ACK.
Set EN to "0" for retransmission.
Reception:
Generate a repeated START
condition or STOP condition
without ACK
473
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
Figure 16.6-2 Example of Receive Data
Start
Slave address in read
access
Clear the ACK bit if data
is the last read data
from the slave.
INT = 0
INT=1?
NO
YES
BER=1?
YES
Restart
bus error
NO
NO
Transfer
of last
byte
YES
Transfer completed
Generates repeated
START condition or STOP
condition.
474
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
Figure 16.6-3 Interrupt Processing
START
INT=1?
Receive
interrupt from
another module
NO
YES
YES
Restart
bus error
BER=1?
NO
GCA=1?
YES
NO
Failure of transfer
Retry
YES
NO
AAS=1?
General call detected in slave mode
YES
YES
AL=1?
AL=1?
NO
NO
YES
LRB=1?
YES
Start to transfer new
data upon next
interrupt.
If required, change
ACK bit.
Retransfer
arbitration lost
ADT=1?
NO
No ACK from slave.
Generate STOP
condition or repeated
START condition.
NO
TRX=1?
TRX=1?
YES
YES
NO
NO
Read the received
data from IDAR.
If required,
change ACK bit.
Write next
send data
to IDAR.
Read the received
data from IDAR.
If required,
change ACK bit.
Write next send
data to IDAR.
Or clear MSS
Clear INT bit.
End of ISR
475
CHAPTER 16 I2C INTERFACE
476
CHAPTER 17
16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
This chapter gives an overview of the 16-bit free run timer, the configuration and
functions of its registers, and its operation.
17.1 Overview of 16-bit Free Run Timer
17.2 Registers of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
17.3 Block Diagram of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
17.4 Details on Registers of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
17.5 Operation of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
17.6 Precautions on Using the 16-bit Free Run Timer
477
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
17.1 Overview of 16-bit Free Run Timer
This section explains the overview of the 16-bit free run timer
■ Overview
The 16-bit free run timer consists of a 16-bit up counter and control status register. The count
values of this timer are used as a base timer for output compare and input capture operations.
478
•
The user can select a count operating clock of four clocks.
•
An interrupt can be generated as result of a counter overflow.
•
The counter value can be initialized by the mode setting when a match with the compare
register 0 of output compare occurs.
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
17.2 Registers of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
This section explains the registers of the 16-bit free run timer.
■ Registers of 16-bit Free Run Timer
Figure 17.2-1 Registers of Multifunctional Timer
bit15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
T10
T09
T08
bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
T07
T06
T05
T04
T03
T02
T01
T00
bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ECLK
IVF
IVFE
CLR
CLK1
CLK0
STOP MODE
Timer data register
(high-order bits)
(TCDT)
Timer data register
(low-order bits)
(TCDT)
Timer control status register
(TCCS)
479
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
17.3 Block Diagram of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
This section shows the block diagram of the 16-bit free run timer.
■ Block Diagram of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
Figure 17.3-1 Block Diagram of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
Interrupt
ECLK
IVF
IVFE
STOP
MODE
CLR
CLK1
CLK0
F-bus
Divider
φ
FRCK
Clock select
16-bit free-run timer
( TCD T)
Clock
To internal circuit(T15 to T00)
Comparator 0
480
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
17.4 Details on Registers of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
This section details the registers of the 16-bit free run timer.
■ Timer Data Register (TCDT)
TCDT
Address: 0000D4H
bit 15
T15
R/W
14
T14
R/W
13
T13
R/W
12
T12
R/W
11
T11
R/W
10
T10
R/W
9
T09
R/W
8
T08
R/W
bit 7
T07
R/W
6
T06
R/W
5
T05
R/W
4
T04
R/W
3
T03
R/W
2
T02
R/W
1
T01
R/W
0
T00
R/W
Initial value
0000H
This register allows reading the count value of the 16-bit free run timer. The counter value is
cleared to "0000H" at reset. To set a timer value, write it to this register in the stop status
(STOP = 1). Access this register in units of words. The 16-bit free run timer is initialized by
following one of the methods below.
•
Initialization by reset
•
Initialization by clearing the control status register (CLR)
•
Initialization by matching a compare clear register (ch.0 compare register) value with a timer
counter value (A mode must be set.)
481
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
■ Timer Control Status Register (TCCS)
TCCS
Address: 0000D7H
bit 7
ECLK
R/W
(0)
6
IVF
R/W
(0)
5
IVFE
R/W
(0)
4
3
STOP MODE
R/W
R/W
(0)
(0)
2
CLR
R/W
(0)
1
CLK1
R/W
(0)
0
CLK0
R/W
(0)
Initial value
[bit7]: ECLK
This bit selects the internal or external count clock source of the 16-bit free run timer.
The clock is changed immediately after writing to this bit. Change this bit while the output
compare or input capture is stopped.
ECLK
Clock selection
0
Internal clock source is selected (initial value).
1
The clock is input from external terminal (FRCK).
Note:
If an internal clock is selected, the count clock must be set by bit1 and bit0 (CLK1 and CLK0). This
count clock becomes a base clock. To input a clock signal from the FRCK, set the corresponding
DDR bit to "0".
The minimum pulse width required for the external clock is 2T (T: peripheral clock machine cycle).
When the output compare unit is used with the external clock specified, a compare match and
interrupt occur in the next clock cycle. To output a compare match and generate an interrupt,
therefore, input at least one clock cycle after the compare match.
[bit6]: IVF
This bit is an interrupt request flag of the 16-bit free run timer. This bit is set to "1" either
when the 16-bit free run timer causes an overflow or when mode setting causes a compare
match with compare register 0. If an interrupt request permission bit (bit5: IVFE) is set, an
interrupt occurs. This bit is cleared by setting it to "0". Writing "1" has no effect. The reading
result of read-modify-write instructions is always "1".
IVF
Interrupt request flag
0
No interrupt request (initial value)
1
Interrupt request
[bit5]: IVFE
This bit is an interrupt permission bit for the 16-bit free run timer. When this bit is "1" and the
interrupt flag (bit6: IVF) is set to "1", an interrupt occurs.
IVFE
482
Interrupt enable
0
Prohibits an interrupt (initial value)
1
Allows an interrupt.
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
[bit4]: STOP
This bit is used to stop the count of the 16-bit free run timer. When the bit is set to "1", the
count of the timer is stopped. When the bit is set to "0", the count of the timer is started.
STOP
Count operation
0
Allows counting (operation) (initial value)
1
Prohibits counting (stop)
Note:
When the 16-bit free run timer is stopped, output compare operation is stopped as well.
[bit3]: MODE
This bit is used to set the initialization condition of the 16-bit free run timer. When this bit is
set to "0", the counter value can be initialized by reset or with the clear bit (bit2: CLR). When
the bit is set to "1", the counter value can be initialized by reset, with the clear bit (bit2: CLR),
or by a match with the value of compare register 0 during an output compare operation.
MODE
Initialization of reset
0
Initialization by reset or the clear bit (initial value)
1
Initialization by reset, clear bit, or compare register 0
Note:
The counter value is initialized when the count value is changed.
[bit2]: CLR
This bit is used to initialize the value of the operating 16-bit free run timer to "0000H". When
this bit is set to "1", the counter is initialized to "0000H". Setting this bit to "0" has no effect.
The read value is always "0".
CLR
Meaning of flag
0
This value has no effect. (initial value)
1
The counter value is initialized to "0000H".
Note:
The counter value is initialized when the count value is changed. When initializing the counter
value while the timer is stopped, set the data register to "0000H".
483
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
[bit1, bit0]: CLK1, CLK0
These bits are used to select a count clock for the 16-bit free run timer. Immediately after
these bits are set to a new value, the clock is switched. Therefore, change these bits while
the output compare and input capture are stopped.
CLK1
CLK0
Count clock
φ=25MHz
φ=12.5MHz
φ=6.25MHz
φ=3.125MHz
0
0
φ/4
160 ns
320 ns
640 ns
1.28 µs
0
1
φ/16
640 ns
1.28 µs
2.56 µs
5.12 µs
1
0
φ/32
1.28 µs
2.56 µs
5.12 µs
10.24 µs
1
1
φ/64
2.56 µs
5.12 µs
10.24 µs
20.48 µs
φ: Machine clock
484
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
17.5 Operation of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
This section explains the operation of the 16-bit free run timer.
■ Operational Explanation
The 16-bit free run timer starts counting from the counter value "0000H" after releasing reset.
The counter value becomes the reference time of the 16-bit output compare and the 16-bit input
capture.
❍ Explanation of 16-bit Free Run Timer Operation
The counter value is cleared under the following conditions.
•
When an overflow occurs
•
When the value matches that of the compare clear register (compare register of output
compare ch.0) (A mode must be set.)
•
When the CLR bit in the TCCS register is set to "1" during operation
•
When "0000H" is written to TCDT while the timer is stopped
•
When a reset occurs
An interrupt occurs when an overflow occurs and the counter is cleared because the counter
value matches that of the compare clear register 0. (For a compare match interrupt, a mode
must be set.)
Figure 17.5-1 Clearing the Counter when an Overflow Occurs
Counter value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Interrupt
485
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
Figure 17.5-2 Clearing the Counter when the Counter Value Matches that of the Compare Clear Register
Counter value
FFFFH
Match
BFFFH
Match
7FFFH
3FFFH
Time
0000H
Reset
Compare register
BFFF H
Interrupt
❍ Timing to Clear the 16-bit Free Run Timer
The counter is cleared by reset, software, or when the counter value matches that of the
compare clear register. When clearing the counter by way of reset or software, it is cleared
immediately when a clear command is issued. However, when the counter is cleared because
of a match with the value in the compare clear register 0, clearing is performed in
synchronization with the count timing.
Figure 17.5-3 Clear Timing of the Free Run Timer
φ
Compare clear register value
N
Counter clear
0 0 0 0H
N
Counter value
❍ Count Timing of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
The 16-bit free run timer is incremented by the input clock (internal or external clock). When an
external clock is selected, the falling edge (indicated by a down arrow) of the external clock is
synchronized with the system clock, then the 16-bit free run timer counts up at the falling edge
of the internal count clock.
Figure 17.5-4 Count Timing of the 16-bit Free Run Timer
φ
External clock input
Internal count clock
Counter value
486
N
N+1
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
17.6 Precautions on Using the 16-bit Free Run Timer
This section gives notes on the 16-bit free run timer.
■ Notes
1. If the interrupt request flag set timing and clear timing are simultaneously generated, the flag
setting operation overrides the flag clearing operation.
2. When bit2 (counter initialize bit: CLR) in the control status register is set to "1", it holds the
value until the internal counter clear timing and clears itself at that timing. If the clear timing
and writing "1" are performed simultaneously, the writing takes precedence and the counter
initialization bit keeps on holding "1" until the next clear timing.
3. The counter clear operation is valid only while the internal counter is operating (with the
internal prescaler also operating). To clear the counter being stopped, set the timer count
data register to "0000H".
487
CHAPTER 17 16-BIT FREE RUN TIMER
488
CHAPTER 18
INPUT CAPTURE
This chapter explains the overview of the input capture, the configuration and
functions of its registers, and its operation.
18.1 Overview of Input Capture
18.2 Input Capture Registers
18.3 Block Diagram of Input Capture
18.4 Details on Registers of Input Capture
18.5 Operation of Input Capture
489
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE
18.1 Overview of Input Capture
This section explains the overview of the input capture.
■ Overview of Input Capture
The input capture module detects either or both of the rising and falling edges of an externally
input signal, and stores the 16-bit free run timer value set at that time in a register. The input
capture module can also generate an interrupt when an edge of the input signal is detected.
An input capture consists of an input capture data register, and a control register. An external
input pin is assigned to each input capture.
•
The user can select the effective edges (rising edge, falling edge, and both edges) of
external input signals.
•
Interrupts can be generated by detecting the effective edge of an external input signal.
Four channels for the input capture are contained.
490
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE
18.2 Input Capture Registers
This section shows the input capture registers.
■ Registers of the Input Capture
Figure 18.2-1 Registers of the Input Capture
bit15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
CP15
CP14
CP13
CP12
CP11
CP10
CP09
CP08
bit7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CP07
CP06
CP05
CP04
CP03
CP02
CP01
CP00
bit7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICP3
ICP2
ICE3
ICE2
EG31
EG30
EG21
EG20
bit7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICP1
ICP0
ICE1
ICE0
EG11
EG10
EG01
EG00
Input capture data register
(high-order bits)
(IPCP)
Input capture data register
(low-order bits)
(IPCP)
Input capture control register
(ICS23)
Input capture control register
(ICS01)
491
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE
18.3 Block Diagram of Input Capture
This section shows a block diagram of the input capture.
■ Block Diagram of the Input Capture
Figure 18.3-1 Block Diagram of the Input Capture
16-bit timer count value (T15 to T00)
R-bus
ICU0, ICU2
Input pin
Edge
detection
Capture data register
ch.0, ch.2
EG11
EG10
EG01
EG00
EG31
EG30
EG21
EG20
16-bit timer count value (T15 to T00)
Edge
detection
Capture data register
ch.1, ch.3
ICU1, ICU3
Input pin
ICP1
ICP0
ICE1
ICE0
ICP3
ICP2
ICE3
ICE2
Interrupt
Interrupt
492
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE
18.4 Details on Registers of Input Capture
This section describes the details on the registers of the input capture. The input
capture has the following two data registers:
• Input capture data registers (IPCP0 to IPCP3)
• Input capture control registers (ICS01, ICS23)
■ Input Capture Data Registers (IPCP0 to IPCP3)
IPCP0 to IPCP3
Address: 0000DAH
0000D8H
0000DEH
0000DCH
0000DBH
0000D9H
0000DFH
0000DDH
bit15
CP15
R
14
CP14
R
13
CP13
R
12
CP12
R
11
CP11
R
10
CP10
R
9
CP09
R
8
CP08
R
Initial value
xxxxxxxxB
bit7
CP07
R
6
CP06
R
5
CP05
R
4
CP04
R
3
CP03
R
2
CP02
R
1
CP01
R
0
CP00
R
Initial value
xxxxxxxxB
The input capture data registers (IPCP0 to IPCP3) are used to store the value of the 16-bits free
run timer when an effective edge of the corresponding external pin input waveform is detected.
This register is undefined at a reset. This register must be accessed in 16-bit or 32-bit data. The
user cannot write any value to this register.
■ Input Capture Control Registers (ICS01, ICS23)
ICS23
Address: 0000E1H
ICS01
Address: 0000E3H
bit7
ICP3
6
ICP2
5
ICE3
4
ICE2
3
EG31
2
EG30
1
EG21
0
EG20
Initial value
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
00000000B
bit7
ICP1
6
ICP0
5
ICE1
4
ICE0
3
EG11
2
EG10
1
EG01
0
EG00
Initial value
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
00000000B
[bit7, bit6]: ICP3, ICP2, ICP1, and ICP0
These bits are used as input-capture interrupt flags. When a effective edge of an external
input pin is detected, these bits are set to "1". When the interrupt permission bits (ICE3,
ICE2, ICE1, and ICE0) are also set, an interrupt is generated as soon as the effective edge
is detected. To clear these bits, set them to "0". Setting these bits to "1" has no effect. Read
operations with read-modify-write instructions always read "1" for these bits.
ICPn
Input capture interrupt flag
0
No effective edge is detected. (initial value)
1
An effective edge is detected.
"n" in ICPn indicates an input capture channel number.
493
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE
[bit5, bit4]: ICE3, ICE2, ICE1, and ICE0
These bits are used as input-capture interrupt permission bits. When these bits are set to "1"
and the interrupt flags (ICP3, ICP2, ICP1, and ICP0) are also set to "1", an input-capture
interrupt occurs.
ICEn
Input capture interrupt specification
0
Prohibits interrupts. (initial value)
1
Allows an interrupt.
"n" in ICEn indicates the input capture channel number.
[bit3 to bit0]: EG31, EG30, EG21, EG20, EG11, EG10, EG01, and EG00
These bits are used to select the effective edge polarity of the external input. They are also
used to enable input capture operations.
EGn1
EGn0
Edge detection polarity
0
0
No edge is detected. (stop status) (initial value)
0
1
A rising edge is detected. ↑
1
0
A falling edge is detected. ↓
1
1
Both edges are detected. ↑ & ↓
EGn1 and EGn0: n corresponds to the channel number of the input capture.
494
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE
18.5 Operation of Input Capture
This section explains the operation of the input capture.
■ Operational Explanation
When the set effective edge is detected, the 16-bit input capture can capture the 16-bit free run
timer value to the capture register to generate an interrupt.
❍ Operation of 16-bit Input Capture
Figure 18.5-1 Example of Capture Timing for the Input Capture
Counter value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
Time
0000H
Reset
IN0
IN1
IN2
Data register 0
3FFFH
Not fixed
Data register 1
Data register 2
BFFFH
Not fixed
Not fixed
BFFFH
7FFFH
Capture 0 interrupt
Capture 1 interrupt
Capture 2 interrupt
Capture 0 = rising edge
Capture 1 = falling edge
Capture 2 = both edges
An interrupt occurs again
because of an effective edge.
Clearing an interrupt by use of software
495
CHAPTER 18 INPUT CAPTURE
❍ Input Timing of 16-bit Input Capture
Figure 18.5-2 Input Timing of Input Capture
φ
Counter value
N
N+1
Input capture input
Effective edge
Capture signal
Capture register value
Interrupt
496
N+1
CHAPTER 19
PROGRAM LOADER MODE
(SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A
(IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
This chapter outlines the program loader mode and describes the settings for the
program loader and operations in that mode.
19.1 Overview of the Program Loader Mode
19.2 Setting the Program Loader
19.3 Operations in the Program Loader Mode
19.4 Example of Using the Program Loader Mode to Write to Flash Memory
497
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
19.1 Overview of the Program Loader Mode
This section gives an overview of the program loader mode.
■ Overview of the Program Loader Mode
In the program loader mode, the program loader stored in the internal ROM uses UART ch.0 to
perform serial communication with an external device, load a program from the external device
to the internal RAM (2 Kbytes), and to start the loaded program.
For serial communication, asynchronous or synchronous communication can be selected
depending on the state of the SIN0 pin of UART ch.0 upon initialization by INIT. For
asynchronous communication, however, the oscillation frequency is 17.0 MHz (quadrupled by
the PLL to 68.0 MHz as the CPU's operating clock frequency). For asynchronous
communication, be sure to use the device at an oscillation frequency of 17.0 MHz as it operates
at a baud rate of 9600 bps.)
Note that the program loader mode is supported only by the MB91302A (IPL integrated model).
■ Memory Map
The loader program stored in the internal ROM (4K bytes) is executed in the internal-ROM/
external-bus mode, resulting in a memory map as shown below. Programs can be located in the
following instruction RAM area (instruction cache set for RAM mode). To access, for example,
an external area, use the downloaded program to make the required register settings.
000FFFFFH
Internal ROM (4Kbytes)
000FF000H
Data RAM
0003FFFFH
RAM area (4Kbytes)
0003F000H
000187FFH
RAM area (2Kbytes)
00018000H
00000000H
498
Instruction RAM
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
19.2 Setting the Program Loader
This section describes how to set the program loader.
■ Setting the Program Loader
The program loader stored in internal ROM is started when the MD2, MD1, MD0, and SIN0 pins
are set as in Table 19.2-1 during initialization by INIT.
For UART ch.0 used for serial communication with external devices, asynchronous or
synchronous communication is determined depending on the state of the SIN0 pin upon
initialization by INIT. For the settings of SIN0, Figure 19.2-1 and Figure 19.2-2 show its reset
timings.
Table 19.2-1 Settings for the MD2, MD1, MD0, and SIN0 Pins upon Initialization by INIT
Pin Name
Specifications
MD2
MD1
MD0
SIN0
Asynchronous Communication
0
0
0
1
Synchronous Communication
0
0
0
0
Figure 19.2-1 Reset Timing (Asynchronous Communication)
INIT
SIN0
At least 1ms
SOT0
Figure 19.2-2 Reset Timing (Synchronous Communication)
INIT
SIN0
At least 1ms
SOT0
SCK0
499
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
19.3 Operations in the Program Loader Mode
This section describes the operations for asynchronous communication and
synchronous communication in the program loader mode.
■ Operations in the Program Loader Mode
❍ Asynchronous communication at an oscillation frequency of 17.0 MHz
Serial communication is performed in the UART ch.0 asynchronous mode (mode 0).
The baud rate is 9600 bps at a machine clock frequency of 68.0 MHz (obtained by quadrupling
an oscillation frequency of 17.0 MHz using the PLL).
The settings for serial communication are a data length of 8 bits, a stop bit length of 1 bit, no
parity, and LSB-first.
❍ Synchronous Communication
Serial communication is performed in the UART ch.0 synchronous mode (mode 2). The baud
rate can be selected freely with the clock input (SCK0) (The frequency of clock input SCK0 is
used as the baud rate as it is).
The maximum frequency of the clock input is up to 1/8 of the frequency of the peripheral
operating clock signal without exceeding 3.125 MHz.
The peripheral operating clock frequency is given by the following equation.
Peripheral operating clock frequency = machine clock frequency (obtained by quadrupling the
oscillation frequency using the PLL)/2
The settings for the serial communication are a data length of 8 bits, no parity, and LSB-first.
In either mode
•
Command data (00H)
•
Four bytes of download destination RAM address (00018000H to 000187FFH)
•
Downloaded four bytes (up to 000007FFH)
Three items of download information data are given to the FR side byte by byte, starting at the
high-order byte, and their checksum data (the lower eight bits taken from the sum of all the data
items) and entered the downloaded routine to the RAM. Then, the data to be downloaded to
internal RAM is given to the FR side byte by byte starting at the high-order byte in the same way
and checksum data is also given. Upon completion of transfer, a jump to RAM takes place and
the downloaded program is executed.
500
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
■ Commands
Listed below are the commands issued to the FR and the response signals from the FR.
FR
Command
Command
Response
Download
Reset
RAM Jump
Abnormal Command
Abnormal checksum
RESET Command
Reception
DOWN LOAD Command
Reception
(Reception)
(Reception)
(Reception)
(Reception Command & F0H) | 04H
{Reception Command (00H) & F0H} | 02H
<<<->
->
00H (PC, etc.)
18H (PC, etc.)
C0H (PC, etc.)
(Reception) (PC,etc.)
(Reception) (PC,etc.)
11H
->
(Reception) (PC,etc.)
01H
->
(Reception) (PC,etc.)
501
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
■ Operation Example
❍ Transferring 0000005BH - byte data to RAM address 00018000H
Processing order
Command Data
Download destination address
PC,etc.
FR
1
00H
->
2
00H
->
3
01H
->
4
80H
->
5
00H
->
6
00H
->
(Reception)
(Reception)
Number of download bytes
(91 bytes)
7
00H
->
8
00H
->
9
5BH
->
Checksum Data
10
DCH
->
(Reception)
Acknowledge data transmission
from the FR
11
(Reception)
<-
01H
Data Transmit
12
DATA
->
(Reception)
Checksum Data
13
*
->
(Reception)
(Reception)
*: The lower eight bits are fetched from all transmit data items added together.
❍ Program counter causing a jump to a RAM address after data transfer
Processing order
PC,etc.
FR
->
(Reception)
Command Data
1
C0H
->
2
00H
->
3
00H
(Reception)
Dummy Data
->
4
00H
->
5
00H
->
6
00H
->
7
00H
(Reception)
Dummy Data
->
8
00H
->
9
00H
->
(Reception)
Checksum Data
10
C0H
Jump to a RAM
11
*
*: The jump destination contained in the program counter is the download destination address
specified when data is transferred to RAM. Command data (C0H), dummy data (8 bytes),
and checksum data are required before a jump can take place.
❍ Issuing a reset command, for example, from a personal computer
Processing order
PC,etc.
Command Data
1
18H
->
(Reception)
FR
Reset
3
-
-
*
*: Issuing command data 18H, for example, from a personal computer, causes
immediate transition to the reset sequence.
For detailed operations, see the flowcharts for dedicated ROM embedded programs from the
next page on.
For detailed operations of the UART and the states of all of its pins, see "CHAPTER 13 UART"
or the "At initialization (INIT)" column of the "Pin State Table" in the Appendix C.
502
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
■ Flowcharts
❍ Main program flowchart
START
NO
SIN=L ?
Asynchronous
communication
YES
Synchronous
Asynchronous
communication
Synchronous
Set the gear ( CPU:13.5MHz / Peripheral:13.5MHz )
Set UART1 *
MAIN
Receive command
00H
DOWN LOAD
Received command = ?
other than 00H/C0H
(DOWN LOAD)
C0H
* About setting UART1
For asynchronous communication
Asynchronous mode(using internal timer)
Jump to RAM
Command error
Baud rate of 9600 bps ( At 17.0MHz crystal oscillator )
Data length of 8 bits
Stop bit of 1 bit
No parity
For synchronous communication
Synchronous mode(using external clock)
Data length of 8 bits
No parity
503
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
❍ Subroutine "Command reception" in Asynchronous mode
Receive command
1- byte data reception (command data)
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
1 - byte data reception (command data)
Received data = 18H ?
8 - byte data reception
(Download information data)
YES
RESET
NO
Download destination address 4 bytes
+
Number of download bytes 4 bytes
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
1- byte data reception (Download information data)
Increment the received data storage address
Count the number of reception times
Number of reception times = 8 ?
( 8 - byte data reception )
NO
YES
One - byte data reception (checksum data)
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
1-byte data reception (Checksum data ) :
The lower eight bits are fetched from command data
and download information data added together
(amounting to nine bytes). :
? (Checksum)
YES
EXIT
504
NO
Checksum error
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
❍ Subroutine "DOWN LOAD" in Asynchronous mode
1 - byte transmission
(Response to normal command reception)
DOWN LOAD
1 - byte transmission ( 01H )
Download to internal RAM
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
1 - byte data reception
Increment the received data storage address
Count the number of reception times
Number of reception times =
Number of download bytes ?
NO
YES
1- byte data reception (Checksum data)
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
1 - byte data reception ( Checksum data ) : α
The lower eight bits are fetched from all received data
items added together. :
? (Checksum)
NO
Checksum error
YES
EXIT
505
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
❍ Subroutine "Command error" in Asynchronous mode
1 - byte transmission
(Response to abnormal command reception)
Error command
Transmission data
Fetch received command data
{ (received command data) & (F0H) } | (04H)
1- byte transmission
MAIN
❍ Subroutine "Checksum error" in Asynchronous mode
1 - byte transmission
(Response to checksum error)
Checksum error
Transmission data
Fetch received command data
{ (received command data) & (F0H) } | (02H)
1 - byte transmission
MAIN
❍ Subroutine "RESET" in Asynchronous mode
1 - byte transmission
(Response to RESET command reception)
RESET
1- byte transmission (11H)
MAIN
506
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
❍ Subroutine "Command Reception" in Synchronous mode
Receive command
1- byte transmission (dummy)
00H
One - byte data reception (command data)
NO
Receive Data ?
YES
1-byte data reception (command data)
YES
Received data = 18H ?
RESET
NO
1- byte transmission (dummy)
00H
8 - byte data reception (Download information data)
Download destination address 4 bytes
+
Number of download bytes 4 bytes
NO
Receive Data ?
YES
1-byte transmission (dummy)
00H
1- byte data reception (Download information data)
Increment the received data storage address
Count the number of reception times
Number of reception times = 8 ?
( 8 - byte data reception )
NO
YES
1- byte data reception (Checksum data)
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
1- byte data reception (Checksum data) :
The lower eight bits are fetched from command data
and download information data added together
(amounting to nine bytes). :
(Checksum)
NO
Checksum error
YES
EXIT
507
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
❍ Subroutine "DOWN LOAD" in Synchronous mode
DOWN LOAD
1- byte transmission
(Response to normal command reception)
1- byte transmission ( 01H )
NO
Receive Data ?
YES
Receive dummy
DOWNLOAD
1- byte transmission (dummy)
00H
NO
Receive Data ?
Download to internal RAM
YES
1- byte data reception
Increment the received data storage address
Count the number of reception times
NO
Number of reception times =
Number of download bytes ?
YES
1- byte transmission (dummy)
00H
1- byte data reception (checksum data)
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
1- byte data reception (Checksum data ) :
Fetch the lower eight bits from all pieces of
received data added together. :
? (Checksum)
YES
EXIT
508
NO
Checksum error
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
❍ Subroutine "Command error" in Synchronous mode
1- byte transmission
(Response to abnormal command reception)
Error command
Transmission data
Fetch received command data
{ (received command data) & (F0H ) } | (04 H)
1- byte transmission
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
Receive dummy
MAIN
❍ Subroutine "Checksum error" in Synchronous mode
1 byte transmission
(Response to checksum error)
Checksum error
Transmission data
Fetch received command data
{ (received command data) & (F0H) } | (02 H)
1- byte transmission
Receive Data ?
NO
YES
Receive dummy
MAIN
509
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
❍ Subroutine "RESET" in Synchronous mode
1- byte transmission
(Response to RESET command reception)
RESET
1- byte transmission (11H)
NO
Receive Data ?
YES
Receive dummy
MAIN
510
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
19.4 Example of Using the Program Loader Mode to Write to
Flash Memory
This section describes an example of connection when flash memory connected to
CS0 is located and written by using the program loader mode.
■ Allocation of Flash Memory
Flash memory connected to CS0 must be placed at arbitrary area between 00000000H and
00FFFFFFH. Program expanded to RAM by serial programmer writes to mirror address not real
address. Since written program is executed only in external ROM, external bus mode, flash
memory can be placed without considering internal ROM area.
Figure 19.4-1 Allocation of Flash Memory
External ROM, external bus mode
Internal ROM, external bus mode
Real address
: Mode which executes written program
Mirror address
00000000H
00000000 H
Internal ROM
Internal ROM
00FFFFFF H
00FFFFFFH
10000000 H
10FFFFFF H
■ Examples of Connection for 1M Byte Flash
Flash memory must be located in an area not overlapping any internal area such as an internal
resource or RAM before the entire flash memory can be accessed. This example assumes that
one megabyte of flash memory connected to the CS0 area be accessed as "addresses
100000H to 1FFFFFH". Note that the FR family has the reset vector and mode vector fixed at
addresses 0FFFFCH and 0FFFF8H, respectively. That area must therefore be covered so that
the program written to flash memory can be executed normally. When flash memory is 1 Mbyte,
any address signal higher in order than A20 is not connected to the flash memory. It can
therefore be solved by setting the CS0 address range to 000000H to 1FFFFFH and accessing
addresses 000000H to 0FFFFFH and addresses 100000H to 1FFFFFH as a mirror area.
Figure 19.4-2 shows memory access with offset addresses added (1 Mbyte).
511
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
Figure 19.4-2 A Memory Access with Offset Addresses Added (1 Mbyte)
Same area can be accessed, whether 0FFFFCH or 1FFFFCH.
MB91302A
(IPL integrated model)
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
A18
A17
A16
A15
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
1 Mbyte
Flash
D15 to
D8
D7 to
D0
CEx
D31 to D24
D23 to D16
CS0x
Note that, when a program written to flash memory is executed, the "external-vector activated,
external-ROM/external-bus mode" is established. Therefore, the internal ROM area that the
program loader stored in does not need any care.
Figure 19.4-3 shows a memory map for each mode.
512
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
Figure 19.4-3 Memory Map for Each Mode
External ROM, external bus mode
(normal operating)
Internal ROM, external bus mode (at executing loader program)
000000H
Internal resource
Internal resource
Internal RAM
Internal
RAM
000000H
0FFFFFH
100000H
0FFFFFH
Write to
external FLASH
1FFFFFH
1FFFFFH
*: When a program is run in area A, " short address optimization " of the compiler can be
used but it cannot access internal memory or that area which overlaps any internal resource.
When a program is run in area B, " short address optimization " of the compiler cannot be
used but it can access the entire flash memory without overlapping the address of internal memory.
513
CHAPTER 19 PROGRAM LOADER MODE (SUPPORTED ONLY BY THE MB91302A (IPL INTEGRATED MODEL))
514
CHAPTER 20
REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A010 USER'S GUIDE
This chapter describes the features of the MB91302A-010 and its development
methods.
20.1 Overview
20.2 Memory Map
20.3 Specifications for REALOS/FR Embedded in MB91302A-010
20.4 Section Allocation
20.5 Startup Routine
20.6 Initial Settings for SOFTUNE Workbench and REALOS/FR
20.7 Mode Pins, Mode Vectors, and Reset Vectors
20.8 Chip Evaluation System
515
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
20.1 Overview
This section describes the overview of MB91302A-010 and introduces the manuals.
■ Overview
The MB91302A-010 is a microcontroller fabricated by embedding µITRON 3.0*1 compliant SOFTUNE
REALOS/FR*2 (here after called REALOS/FR) in the internal ROM of the MB91302A in the FR
family of Fujitsu proprietary 32-bit RISC microcontrollers.
This chapter describes the features of the MB91302A-010 and its development methods. To
develop programs for the MB91302A-010, use SOFTUNE Workbench and REALOS/FR
bundled with the development kit MB91302A-RDK01. You should therefore refer to the manuals
for related development tools in addition to this chapter.
■ Embedded REALOS/FR Version
SOFTUNE REALOS/FR Rev600001 (SOFTUNE REALOS/FR Kernel V30L08)
■ Related Manuals
FR FAMILY CONFORMING to µITRON3.0 SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE REALOS/FR USER'S
GUIDE
FR FAMILY CONFORMING to µITRON3.0 SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE REALOS/FR KERNEL
MANUAL
FR/F2MC FAMILY CONFORMING to µITRON SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE REALOS/FR/907/
896 CONFIGURATOR MANUAL
FR-V/FR/F2MC FAMILY CONFORMING to µITRON SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE REALOS
ANALYZER MANUAL
FR FAMILY ASSEMBLER MANUAL
SOFTUNE LINKAGE KIT MANUAL for V6
SOFTUNE Workbench OPERATION MANUAL for V6
SOFTUNE Workbench USER'S MANUAL
SOFTUNE Workbench COMMAND REFERENCE MANUAL for V6
*1: TRON is an abbreviation of "The Real-time Operating System Nucleus".
ITRON is an abbreviation of "Industrial TRON".
µTRON is an abbreviation of "Micro Industrial TRON".
*2: SOFTUNE is a trademark of FUJITSU LIMITED.
REALOS is a trademark of FUJITSU LIMITED.
516
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
20.2 Memory Map
This section provides memory maps of the MB91302A-010 and its evaluation chip
MB91V301A.
■ Memory Map
The following are memory maps for the MB91302A-010 and MB91V301A. The MB91302A-010
contains REALOS/FR conforming to µITRON 3.0 in the internal 4K byte ROM area located at
addresses FF000H to FFFFFH.
Figure 20.2-1 Memory Map of MB91302A-010 and MB91V301A
00000000H
MB91302A-010
MB91V301A
I/O Direct addressing
I/O Direct addressing
00000400H
I/O
I/ O
00001000H
I- RA M 4K bytes
I- RA M 4K bytes
00002000H
Access prohibited
0003E000H
Access prohibited
0003F000H
00040000H
RAM 4K bytes
R AM 16K bytes
00042000H
External data area
00060000H
000E0000H
Access prohibited
External data area
Access prohibited
000FE000H
000FF000H
00100000H
ROM 4K bytes
(embedded REALOS/FR)
RAM 8 K bytes
External data area
External data area
FFFFFFFFH
517
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
20.3 Specifications for REALOS/FR Embedded in MB91302A-010
The MB91302A-010 contains µITRON 3.0 compliant REALOS/FR in the internal 4 Kbytes
ROM.
This section describes the system calls and objects supported by REALOS/FR
embedded in internal 4 Kbytes ROM.
■ Outline of Embedded REALOS/FR
The size of the system stacks used by REALOS/FR is 64K bytes. Up to 32 cyclic handlers are
supported. Up to 64 user tasks can be registered, for which priority levels from 1 to 32 can be
assigned. Note that the alarm handler is not supported.
Table 20.3-1 Outline of Embedded REALOS/FR
System stack size
64K bytes
Alarm handler
not supported
Number of cyclic handlers
0 to 32
User task priority level
1 to 32
Number of user tasks
1 to 64
Number of semaphores
0 to 32
Number of event flags
0 to 32
Number of mailboxes
0 to 32
■ Contained System Calls
The MB91302A-010's internal ROM contains the following system calls. During actual development,
register all of the following system calls using REALOS/FR's Configurator and be careful not to
any other system call.
The evaluation chip MB91V301A on the target board is used for debugging.
For how to register system calls using REALOS/FR Configurator, refer to the SOFTUNE REALOS/
FR Configurator Manual.
Table 20.3-2 System Calls
Function
System Call
Task control
sta_tsk
ext_tsk
Synchronization with task
tslp_tsk
wup_tsk
chg_pri
sig_sem wai_sem preq_sem
Synchronization / Communication
set_flg
clr_flg
snd_msg rcv_msg
518
Time control
def_cyc
Interrupt control
ret_int
ret_tmr
wai_flg
pol_flg
prcv_msg
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
■ Objects
The MB91302A-010's internal ROM contains the following objects.
The MB91302A-010 supports event flags, semaphores, and mailboxes.
Table 20.3-3 Objects
Objects Name
Number of Definitions
Event flag
0 to 32
Semaphore
0 to 32
Mailbox
0 to 32
❍ Event flag
The MB91302A-010 supports up to 32 event flags.
The event flag definition of SOFTUNE REALOS/FR's Configurator is used to define event flags
during program development. Even though the number of event flags to be actually used is less
than 32, be sure to define 32 event flags including vacant definitions.
❍ Semaphore
The MB91302A-010 supports up to 32 semaphores.
The semaphore definition of SOFTUNE REALOS/FR's Configurator is used to define
semaphores during program development. Even though the number of semaphores to be
actually used is less than 32, be sure to define 32 semaphores including vacant definitions.
❍ Mailbox
The MB91302A-010 supports up to 32 mailboxes.
The mailbox definition of SOFTUNE REALOS/FR's Configurator is used to define semaphores
during program development. Even though the number of mailboxes to be actually used is less
than 32, be sure to define 32 semaphores including vacant definitions.
■ User Tasks
The MB91302A-010 supports up to 64 user tasks.
The task definition of SOFTUNE REALOS/FR's Configurator is used to define user tasks during
program development.
Table 20.3-4 User Tasks
Number of user tasks
1 to 64
Even though the number of user tasks to be actually used is less than 64, be sure to use the
task definition of SOFTUNE REALOS/FR's Configurator to define 64 tasks including empty
tasks. The initial state of empty user tasks which are not actually used must be DORMANT.
Even for an empty user task not to be used, write a vacant source code and compile it along
with the other tasks.
In actual programs, be careful not to issue a system call to these unused tasks.
The following is an example of empty source code concerning unused task.
void boo (void) {}
519
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
20.4 Section Allocation
This section describes section allocation.
■ Section Allocation
The MB91302A-010 has the location address of the following section fixed. When developing an
actual program, be sure to locate these sections at the following addresses. Sections are
located through the project setting linker tab of SOFTUNE Workbench. sstack, knldata1,
knldata2, DBGDAT2, mplmem, mplctl, and mpfmem are located in the RAM area; inidata,
startcode, and R_eit are located in the ROM area.
The MB91302A-010 does not support memory-pool related system calls but requires that
memory-pool related sections of mplmem, mplctl, and mpfmem be located.
Table 20.4-1 Sections at Fixed Location Addresses
Section Name
Location Address
Function / Size
Remarks
oscode
000FF000H
Real-time OS / 0xFE4
Internal ROM
sstack
10000000H
System stack / 0x10000
knldata1
10010000H
Real-time OS data / 0x1A68
Allocated to external
RAM
knldata2
10011F00H
Stack of idle tasks / 0x60
DBGDAT2
10011FB0H
Debugging data / 0x4
mplmen
10011FD0H
Data related to memory pools / 0x0
mplctl
10011FE0H
Data related to memory pools / 0x0
mpfmen
10011FF0H
Data related to memory pools / 0x0
inidata
400FE000H
Real-time OS data / 0xDCC
startcode
400FE400H
Startup Routine / 0x544
R_eit
400FFC00H
Vector entry/0x400
520
Allocated to external
ROM
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
20.5 Startup Routine
This section describes the startup routine.
■ Startup Routine
For the MB91302A-010, the startup routine init_MB91302A-010_rtos.asm is always located in
the startcode section. REALOS/FR stored in internal ROM directly references the _uinit and
_system_down labels defined in init_MB91302A-010_rtos.asm. Therefore, be sure to use
init_MB91302A-010_rtos.asm provided by Fujitsu as the startup routine and do not modify the
content. Updating the contents shifts the addresses of these labels referenced by REALOS/FR,
preventing normal operation.
The following explains the process flow of the subroutine coded in init_MB91302A010_rtos.asm. Of these, _csinit (bus setting/clock setting, etc.), _rtinit (reload timer setting), _init
(other user initialization setting), and _sysdwn (routine used the system goes down) are
subroutines called by the call instruction. These are created by the user to meet the system.
Figure 20.5-1 Flow for the Subroutine Coded in the Startup Routine
_system_entry
_csinit
Label defined in
init_MB91302A - 010_rtos.asm
referenced by REALOS/FR
_R_init
_uinit
_rtinit
_init
Real - time OS normal processing
(task activation, dispatching, etc.)
Label defined in
init_MB91302A - 010_rtos.asm
referenced by REALOS/FR
_system_down
_sysdwn
521
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
20.6 Initial Settings for SOFTUNE Workbench and REALOS/FR
SOFTUNE Workbench and REALOS/FR are used to develop programs.
This section describes initial settings for tools using practical examples.
■ Program Example
The following sample program is discussed here to explain tool initialization.
❍ User Tasks
$ Number of tasks
50
$Stack size
0x1000 (per task)
$ Initial situation
task ID1 to ID40
-> READY
task ID41 to ID50
-> DORMANT
task ID1 to ID30
-> 1
task ID31 to ID50
-> 2
$ Startup prioritized
❍ Semaphore
$ Number of semaphores
20
$Semaphore count
semaphore ID1 to ID10-> maximum value 15; Initial value 0
semaphore ID11 to ID20-> maximum value 20; Initial value 0
❍ Event flag
$ Number of flags
32
$ Initial pattern
semaphore ID1 to ID16-> 0x0000
semaphore ID17 to ID32-> 0xFFFF
❍ Mailbox
Number of boxes
10
❍ Interrupt vector
$ Use reload timer 0 for the system clock.
-> Timer handler name _timer
❍ Memory
522
$ Code ROM
0x40000000 - 0x403FFFFF (CS0 area x 16 bits)
$ Work RAM
0x10000000 - 0x10FFFFFF
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
■ REALOS/FR Configurator Setup
When you create a new project for REALOS/FR using SOFTUNE Workbench, the project
appears with a member of "project-name.rcf" (hereafter called rcf file) in the REALOS directory
of the project window. When you double-click on this rcf file to start Configurator and perform
the initial setting of REALOS/FR.
❍ System definition tab
Define the number of entries of handlers to be used by the system. When defining each number
of entries, be sure to use a fixed value shown below.
Table 20.6-1 Setup with the System Definition Tab
Item
Set value
1 Number of cyclic handlers (C)
D'32
2 Number of alarm handlers (L)
D'0
3 Exception handler entry name (E) Blank
4 Task priority level (P)
D'32
5 Setting the include file
Blank
Remarks
Be sure to set "32" even though the number of actual cyclic
handlers is less than "32".
Be sure to set "0" as it is not supported.
Be sure to set blank as it is not supported.
Be sure to set "32" even when the task priority level is
smaller than "32".
Blank
❍ Memory definition tab
Set memory to be handled by the system.
Table 20.6-2 Setup with the Memory Definition Tab
Item
1 System stack size (S)
2 Kernel code address (C)
3 Kernel code address (D)
Set value
Remarks
H'10000
Be sure to set 64K bytes.
Blank
Blank as it is set by the linker of SOFTUNE Workbench.
Blank
Blank as it is set by the linker of SOFTUNE Workbench.
❍ System call definition tab
Register the system calls to be used. Register all of the following system calls available to the
MB91302A-010. Never register any other system call.
Table 20.6-3 Setup with the System Call Definition Tab
Item
1 Registered system calls (S)
Set value
Remarks
sta_tsk
ext_tsk
chg_pri
tslp_tsk
wup_tsk
sig_sem
wai_sem
preq_sem
Be sure to register all of these system calls and never
set_flg
clr_flg
register any other system call.
wai_flg
pol_flg
snd_msg
rcv_msg
prcv_msg
ret_int
def_cyc
ret_tmr
523
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
❍ Task definition tab
Register user tasks. Start registration in order from ID number 1. Even though the number of
user tasks for the actual system is less than 64, be sure to register 64 tasks. At this time, set the
startup priority levels, stack, and initial state of unused user tasks using D'32 (minimum priority
level), H'60 (minimum stack value acceptable), and DORMANT (idle state), respectively, not to
start these empty user tasks.
Table 20.6-4 Setup with the Advanced Task Definition Window
Item
Set value
Remarks
1 Name
Free
Set freely
2 Entry (T)
Free
The user task name can be set freely.
The entry of a user task with boo(){---} in C source code is _boo.
3 Startup priority level (P)
Free
Register unused user tasks with a priority level of 32.
4 Stack (S)
Free
H'60 is used to set unused user tasks.
5 Initial situation (A)
Free
Set unused user tasks first to DORMANT.
6 Start code (C)
Free
Set freely
7 ID number (I)
D'1 to D'64
Be sure to set 1 to 64 in ascending order.
8 Extensive information (O) Free
Set freely
9 Time out (M)
Set "Use"
Use
Even for an unused user task, write a vacant source code in C source code and compile it along
with other user tasks to be used for the system. The following is an example of empty source
code concerning unused task.
void boo(void){}
This development example assumes the following with regard to user tasks.
$ Number of tasks
50
$Stack size
0x1000 (per task)
$ Initial situation
task ID1 to ID40
-> READY
task ID41 to ID50
-> DORMANT
task ID1 to ID30
-> 1
task ID31 to ID50
-> 2
$ Startup prioritized
This development example requires the following settings with the task definition tab of
Configurator.
task ID1 to ID30
Stack (S)
Initial situation (P)
Startup prioritized (A)
task ID31 to ID40 Stack (S)
Initial situation (P)
Startup prioritized (A)
task ID41 to ID50 Stack (S)
Initial situation (P)
Startup prioritized (A)
task ID51 to ID64 Stack (S)
Initial situation (P)
Startup prioritized (A)
524
-> H'1000
-> READY
-> D'1
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
H'1000
READY
D'2
H'1000
DORMANT
D'2
H'60 (minimum stack)
DORMANT (idle state)
D'2 (minimum priority level)
Define blank task
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
❍ Semaphore Definition Tab
Register the semaphores to be used by the system. Register all of ID numbers 1 through 32 in
ascending order.
Even though the number of semaphores to be actually used is less than 32, be sure to register
32 semaphores.
Table 20.6-5 Setup with the Semaphore Definition Tab
Item
Set value
Remarks
1 Name (E)
Free
Set freely
2 Initial count (C)
Free
Set freely
3 Maximum count (M)
Free
Set freely
4 ID number (D)
D'1 to 32
Be sure to set D'1 through D'32 in ascending order.
5 Extensive information (O) Free
Set freely
This development example assumes the following with regard to semaphores.
$ Number of semaphores
20
$ Semaphore count
Semaphore ID1 to ID10
-> Max. 15 / Initial value 0
SemaphoreID11 to ID20
-> Max. 20 / Initial value 0
This development example requires the following settings with the semaphore definition tab of
Configurator.
Semaphore ID1 to ID10
Initial count (C)
Maximum count (M)
->
->
D'0
D'15
Semaphore ID11 to ID20
Initial count (C)
Maximum count (M)
D'0
D'20
Semaphore ID21 to ID32
Initial count (C)
Maximum count (M)
->
->
->
->
->
D'0
D'8
Define blank task
❍ Event Flag Definition Tab
Register the event flags to be used by the system. Register all of ID numbers 1 through 32 in
ascending order.
Even though the number of event flags to be actually used is less than 32, be sure to register 32
event flags.
Table 20.6-6 Setup with the Event Flag Definition Tab
Item
Set value
Remarks
1 Name (E)
Free
Set freely
2 Initial Pattern (P)
Free
Set freely
3 ID number (D)
D'1 to 32
Be sure to set D'1 through D'32 in ascending order.
4 Extensive information (O) Free
Set freely
This development example assumes the following with regard to event flags.
$ Number of event flags
32
$ Initial Pattern
Flag ID1 to ID16
-> 0x0000
Flag ID17 to ID32
-> 0xFFFF
525
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
For this development example, the event flag definition tab of Configurator appears as shown
below.
Flag ID1 to ID16
Flag ID17 to ID32
Initial Pattern (P)
Initial Pattern (P)
->
->
H'0000
H'FFFF
❍ Mailbox definition tab
Register the mailboxes to be used by the system. Register all of ID numbers 1 through 32 in
ascending order.
Even though the number of mailboxes to be actually used is less than 32, be sure to register 32
mailboxes.
Table 20.6-7 Setup with the Mailbox Definition Tab
Item
Set value
Remarks
1 Name (E)
Free
Set freely
2 ID number (D)
D'1 to 32
Be sure to set D'1 through D'32 in ascending order.
3 Extensive information (O) Free
Set freely
❍ Variable-length memory pool and fixed-length memory pool definition tabs
REALOS/FR embedded in internal ROM of the MB91302A-010 does not support these variablelength or fixed-length memory pools. Leave these definition tabs blank without making any setting.
❍ Vector definition tab
Register interrupt handlers. To generate a system clock signal using one of internal reload
timers 0 to 2, register the interrupt handler for the reload timer to any of interrupt numbers D'24
to D'26. D'1 registers the mode vector. For the MB91302A-010, either 06000000H (external
ROM area 32-bit mode with the MB91302A-010's internal ROM enabled), 05000000H (external
ROM area 16-bit mode with the MB91302A-010's internal ROM enabled) or 04000000H (external
ROM area 8-bit mode with the MB91302A-010's internal ROM enabled) is used for the mode
vector value according to the hardware specifications of the target. For details on the mode
vector, refer to the hardware manual for the MB91302A-010.
Table 20.6-8 Setup with Vector Definition Tab
Number (M)
Entry (E)
Remarks
D'0
_system_entry
Fix reset vector name to the left
D'1
06000000H or
05000000H or
04000000H
Register one of the three mode vectors to the left, that
matches the hardware specifications of the target.
D'2 to D'23
Free
Set freely
D'24 to D'26
Timer handler
name
To generate a system clock signal using one of internal
reload timers 0 to 2, register the timer handler for the
reload timer to any of interrupt numbers D'24 to D'26.
D'27 to D'255
Free
Set freely
This sample program uses reload timer 1 to generate a system clock signal. As the timer
handler name is _timer, D'25 (interrupt number for reload timer 1) is set to _timer.
As CS0's hardware consists of x16-bit ROM, the mode vector is 05000000H. Therefore, set D'1
(mode vector) to H'0500000.
526
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
❍ Debug setting tab
The MB91302A-010 has no unique setting. (Default setting)
Note:
At the default setting, the REALOS analyzer log function is restricted.
For more information, refer to the manual for FR-V/FR/F2MC FAMILY CONFORMING TO µITRON
SPECIFICATIONS SOFTUNE REALOS ANALYZER MANUAL.
❍ Summary of Configurator setup
Table 20.6-9 lists those items under individual definition tabs of Configurator which must be set
to a fixed value each.
Table 20.6-9 List of Fixed Values in Configurator
Item
System definition
Memory definition
Item Description
Number of cyclic handlers
Number of alarm handlers
Exception handler entry name
Task priority level
Setting the include file
System stack size
Kernel code address
Kernel data address
System call definition
Task definition
Number of entries
Name
Entry
Startup priority level
Stack
Initial situation
Start code
ID number
Extensive information
Time out
Common stack
Number of entries
Semaphore definition
Event flag definition
Mailbox definition
Name
Initial count
Maximum count
ID number
Extensive information
Number of entries
Name
Initial Pattern
ID number
Extensive information
Number of entries
Name
ID number
Extensive information
Variable-length memory pool
Fixed-length memory pool
Vector definition
Debug setting
Reset vector name
Number
Entry
Fixed set value
Number of entries fixed at 32
D'0
Blank
Fixed at D'32
Blank
Fixed at 64K bytes
Blank
Blank
Refer to Table 20.6-3
Number of entries fixed at 64 (including empty tasks)
Set freely
Set freely
Set freely
Set freely
Set freely
Set freely
Be sure to set 1 to 64 in ascending order.
Set freely
Time-out allotted, fixed
Set freely
Number of entries fixed at 32 (including empty
semaphores)
Set freely
Set freely
Set freely
Be sure to set D'1 through D'32 in ascending order.
Set freely
Number of entries fixed at 32 (including empty event flags)
Set freely
Set freely
Be sure to set D'1 through D'32 in ascending order.
Set freely
Number of entries fixed at 32 (including empty mailboxes)
Set freely
Be sure to set D'1 through D'32 in ascending order.
Set freely
Not supported
Not supported
Fix reset vector name to _system_entry
Set D'1 through D'255 in ascending order.
Set freely
Fix default setting
527
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
■ Program Allocation
The following describes program location.
❍ Section
At least the following sections exist by default, including REALOS/FR.
Table 20.6-10 Section
Section name
Size
(byte)
Contents
Allocation top
address
Memory
DATA
-
Data in C source code
Allocate freely
RAM
INIT
-
Initial data in C source code
Allocate freely
RAM
oscode
FE4H
Real time OS
Fixed at 000FF000H
Internal ROM
sstack
10000H
System stack
Fixed at 10000000H
RAM
knldata1
1A68H
Data of real time OS
Fixed at 10010000H
RAM
knldata2
60H
Stack of idle tasks
Fixed at 10011F00H
RAM
DBGDAT2
4H
Debug related sections
Fixed at 10011FB0H
RAM
mplmem
0H
Memory pool related sections
Fixed at 10011FD0H
RAM
mplctl
0H
Memory pool related sections
Fixed at 10011FE0H
RAM
mpfmem
0H
Memory pool related sections
Fixed at 10011FF0H
RAM
User stack
Allocate freely
RAM
R_stk001 to 040
-
inidata
DCCH
Initial data of real time OS
Fixed at 400FE000H
ROM
startcode
544H
Start up
Fixed at 400FF400H
ROM
CODE
-
C source code
Allocate freely
ROM
@INIT
-
Initial data of C source code
Allocate freely
ROM
CONST
-
Initial data of C source code
Allocate freely
ROM
uinitcode *
-
_csinit _init _rtinit _sysdwn
Allocate freely
ROM
Interrupt vector
Fixed at 400FFC00H
ROM
R_eit
400H
* : Section name uinitcode is the section name of _csinit _init _rtinit _sysdwn.
This can be freely named with the.section pseudo-instruction.
❍ Linker Allocation Option
Given below are linker options and an address map for "Program Example" in Section "20.6
Initial Settings for SOFTUNE Workbench and REALOS/FR". For details on the options for the
linker, refer to the manual for SOFTUNE Workbench.
Stacks (10000H bytes each) of 50 user tasks are located at R_stk0001 to R_stk0032 and 14
empty tasks are allocated at 60H-byte user stack each between R_stk0033 and R_stk0040.
This example assumes that "CODE + @INIT + CONST" can be stored between 40000000H and
400FDFFFH.
528
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
Figure 20.6-1 Linker Option and Address Map
Allocation option of the linker
Address
Address map
0
MB91302A- 010
-sc oscode=0x000FF000
-sc sstack=0x10000000
FF000H Internal-4K byte ROM
10000000H
-sc knldata1=0x10010000
-sc knldata2=0x10011F00
-sc DBGDAT2=0x10011FB0
-sc mplmem=0x10011FD0
External RAM
-sc mplctl=0x10011FE0
-sc mpfmem=0x10011FF0
-sc R_stk0001+R_stk0002+,,,+R_stk0032=0x10012000
-sc R_stk0033+R_stk0034+,,,+R_stk0040=0x10044000
-sc DATA+INIT+STACK=10044540
-sc CODE+@INIT+CONST+uinitcode=0x40000000
40000000H
External ROM
-sc inidata=0x400FE000
-sc startcode=0x400FF 400
-sc R_eit=0x400FFC00
400FFC00H
Interrupt vector 1 Kbyte
FFFFFFFFH
529
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
20.7 Mode Pins, Mode Vectors, and Reset Vectors
This section describes the mode pins, mode vectors, and reset vectors of the
MB91302A-010. For more information, see Sections "3.11.3 Reset Sequence" and
"3.14 Operating Modes" as well.
■ Mode Pin
The MB91302A-010 can fetch the mode vector that determines the operation mode of the
microcontroller from address 000FFFF8H and the reset vector (startup routine's start address)
from address 000FFFFCH after initialization by a reset.
Since addresses 000FFFF8H and 000FFFFCH are located in the internal ROM containing
REALOS/FR, however, the mode and reset vectors fetched after the release by a reset are
taken from external ROM to the microcontroller. Therefore, set the mode pin on the MB91302A010 to the external vector fetch mode.
Table 20.7-1 Setting of Mode Pins
Mode pin
Setting value
MD2 to MD0
"LLH" fixed (external vector fetch mode)
■ Mode Vector
The MB91302A-010 fetches the mode vector that determines the operation mode of the
microcontroller from address 400FFFF8H after being released from a reset.(The address
actually output by the MB91302A-010 is 000FFFF8H.)
For the MB91302A-010, set the internal-ROM/external-bus mode to enable the internal ROM
containing REALOS/FR.(Mode data for internal ROM/external bus mode: 0B000001H)
The mode vector fetched after a reset is canceled has the bit for setting the internal-ROM/
external-bus mode and the bit for setting the bit width of the external CS0 area as well. Set the
bit width of this CS0 area to the bit width of ROM mounted on the target board.
The mode vector can be set with handler number D'1 by using the vector definition tab of
REALOS/FR's Configurator.
Table 20.7-2 Setting Value of Mode Vector
Target CS0's ROM bit width
Set value (hex) Setting value for the vector definition tab
8 bits
04
04000000H
16 bits
05
05000000H
32 bits
06
06000000H
■ Reset Vectors
The MB91302A-010 fetches the reset vector from address 000FFFFCH after being released
from a reset.
The reset vector is embedded in code automatically by the linker of SOFTUNE Workbench.
530
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
■ Mode Data and Reset Vector Location Addresses
The MB91302A-010 interrupt vector is sized 1 Kbyte and located in the R_eit section.
Use the linker of SOFTUNE Workbench to locate the R_eit section at addresses 400FFC00H to
400FFFFFH. At this time, both of the mode vector and reset vector are located within R_eit by
the linker.
Table 20.7-3 Mode Vector and Reset Vector Location Addresses
Vector name
Location addresses (hex)
Mode vector
400FFFF8H
Reset Vector
400FFFFCH
Note R_eit
400FFC00 to 400FFFFFH
■ Mode Data and Reset Vector Access Addresses
The MB91302A-010 allows linear access to 32-bit address space but the address signals
actually available are A23 to A00, where CS signals substitute for A31 to A24 to decode these
addresses.The whole address space is used as CS0 until each CS area is allocated by the
startup routine after initialization by a reset.
By setting addresses 400FFFF8H and 400FFFFCH as CS0, therefore, the MB91302A-010 can
fetch mode data and a reset vector located at addresses 400FFFF8H and 400FFFFCH as data
at addresses 000FFFF8H and 000FFFFCH after initialization by a reset.
Table 20.7-4 Mode Data and Reset Vector Access Addresses
After a reset is canceled
At CS area is set by register
Mode data
000FFFF8H
400FFFF8H
Reset vector
000FFFFCH
400FFFFCH
531
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
■ Fetching Mode Data and Reset Vectors after the Device is Released from a Reset
The MB91302A-010 fetches the mode data and reset vector from addresses 000FFFF8H and
000FFFFCH after being released from the reset. Depending on the next operation of the
MB91302A-010, these items of data located at addresses 400FFFF8H and 400FFFFCH in the
R_eit section are fetched when a reset is canceled.
Table 20.7-5 Sequence after a Release from a Reset
Operation
Remarks
1
Release from a Reset
The entire 32-bit address space becomes
CS0 upon initialization by a reset.
The CS0 signal is asserted upon any external access.
2
The MD2 to MD0 mode pins become "LLH"
which is fixed on the target board after a
reset is canceled.
Fetch a mode vector from external address
000FFFF8H at the timing 1).
CS0 is asserted at this time.
For the MB91302A-010, set the MD2 to MD0 mode pins
to "LLH". (External vector mode)
For the mode vector, set 04H, 05H, or 06H depending on
the CS0 bus width.
3
The lower two bits of the mode vector is
used to set the bit width of external CS0
area ROM. According to this, the reset
vector is fetched from external address
000FFFFCH.
CS0 is asserted at this time.
Set CS0 to the external ROM that stores the R_eit area
(addresses 400FFC00H to 400FFFFFH).
4
Load the reset vector fetched at 3) to the
internal PC.
5
Internal 4K byte ROM is enabled according
to the mode vector fetched at 2) after
completion of 4).
6
The program starts running.
Each CS area is according to the bus width/
area set by _csinit called from the startup
routine.
All address areas are accessed as CS0 until bus setting
by _csinit.
The startup routine must therefore be located always in
CS0.
■ An Example of Connection of External Memory
Given below is an example of connection of the MB91302A-010 to external memory. External
memory on the target must include ROM (addresses 400FE000H to 400FFFFFH are mandatory
as this area is referenced by the real-time OS) for storing code and RAM (starting at address
10000000H) for storing work data. Be sure to set ROM to CS0.
The MB91302A-010 "outputs the CS0 signal in response to access to any address after
initialization by a reset" and "has the address upper bits (A31 to A24) decoded by CS signals".
When released from the reset, therefore, the MB91302A-010 can fetch mode vector (at address
000FFFF8H) and reset vector (at address 000FFFFCH) from actual addresses 400FFFF8H and
400FFFFCH of external ROM.
532
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
Figure 20.7-1 Example of Connection to External Memory
Output the CS0 signal at access for all
addresses after initialization by reset.
Output each CS signal after CS initial
setting of _csinit called from startup
routine.
Connect CS0 to ROM
302A
CS0
ROM
Location address
40000000H~
CS
CSn
A23 to A00
A
D31 to D00
D
RD
Mode vector
address 400FFFF8H
RD
Reset vector
WR
address 400FFFFCH
RAM
Decode addresses
A31 to A24 by CS.
Decode addresses
A31 to A24 by _csinit
called from startup routine.
CS
Location address
10000000H~
A
D
RD
WR
533
CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OS EMBEDDED MB91302A-010 USER'S GUIDE
20.8 Chip Evaluation System
This section describes a sample configuration of the chip evaluation system.
■ Configuration Example :Target Board + Evaluation Chip + ICE
Target board
DSU cable
ICE
PC
USB or LAN
Evaluation chip + adapter board + header board ( + RAM board)
Name
Type
Remarks
ICE
MB2198-01
Connect with PC, USB, or LAN.
DSU cable
MB2198-10
Cable connecting the ICE with the adapter board
Evaluation chip
MB91V301A
Bundled with the development kit MB91V301A-RDK01.
Adapter board
MB2198-100
Used together with MB2198-101
Header board
MB2198-101
Used together with MB2198-100
Belongings: NQPACK144SE and HQPACK144SE
RAM board
MB2198-90
Not required if the target board has emulation memory.
In addition, the following development tools (software and the development kit) are required for
development.
534
•
FR family SOFTUNE professional pack (V6 supported) => Integrated development
environment (Workbench, compiler, etc.)
•
MB91V301A-RDK01 => Evaluation chip bundled with development software
APPENDIX
This appendix consists of the following parts: I/O map, interrupt vector, pin states in
each CPU state, notes on using a little endian area, and instruction lists. The appendix
contains detailed information that could not be included in the main text and reference
material for programming.
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
APPENDIX B INTERRUPT VECTOR
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
535
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
APPENDIX A
I/O MAP
Table A-1 shows the correspondence between the memory space area and the
peripheral resource registers.
■ I/O Map
[Reading the table]
Address
000000H
+0
PDR0[R/W]
XXXXXXXX
Register
+1
+2
PDR1[R/W]
PDR2[R/W]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
+3
PDR3[R/W]
XXXXXXXX
Block
T-unit
Port Data Register
Read/write attribute
Initial value of register after reset
Register name (column 1 of the register is at address 4n,
column 2 is at address 4n+2...)
Leftmost register address (For word-length access,
column 1 of the register becomes the MSB of the data)
Note:
The initial values of bits in a register are indicated as follows:
536
1:
Initial value "1"
0:
Initial value "0"
X:
Initial value "X"
-:
A physical register does not exist at the location.
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (1 / 11)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000000H
PDR0 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDR1 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDR2 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
−
000004H
−
−
PDR6 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
−
000008H
PDR8 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDR9 [R/W] B
-XXXXXXX
PDRA [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDRB [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
−
PDRJ [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
−
00000CH
000010H
T-unit
Port Data Register
PDRG [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDRH [R/W] B
-----XXX
000014H
to
00003CH
−
R-bus
Port Data Register
Reserved
000040H
EIRR [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
ENIR [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
ELVR [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000
Ext int
000044H
DICR [R/W]
B,H,W
-------0
HRCL [R/W]
B,H,W
0--11111
−
DLYI/I-unit
TMRLR0 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
TMR0 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
00004CH
−
TMCSR0 [R/W] B,H,W
--XX0000 00000000
000050H
TMRLR1 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
TMR1 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000054H
−
TMCSR1 [R/W] B,H,W
--XX0000 00000000
000058H
TMRLR2 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
TMR2 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
−
TMCSR2 [R/W] B,H,W
--XX0000 00000000
000048H
Reload Timer 0
Reload Timer 1
Reload Timer 2
00005CH
000060H
000064H
SSR0 [R, R/W]
B,H,W
00001000
SIDR0 [R]
SODR0 [W]
B, H,W
XXXXXXXX
UTIM0 [R] H,W
(UTIMR0 [W] H,W)
00000000 00000000
SCR0 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000100
SMR0 [R/W]
B,H,W
00--0-0-
UART0
DRCL0*4
--------
UTIMC0 [R/W]
B
0--00001
U-TIMER 0
537
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (2 / 11)
Register
Address
000068H
00006CH
000070H
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
SSR1 [R/W]
B,H,W
00001000
SIDR1 [R]
SODR1 [W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
SCR1 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000100
SMR1 [R/W]
B,H,W
00--0-0-
UART1
DRCL1*4
--------
UTIMC1 [R/W]
B
0--00001
U-TIMER 1
SCR2 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000100
SMR2 [R/W]
B,H,W
00--0-0-
UART2
DRCL2*4
--------
UTIMC2 [R/W]
B
0--00001
U-TIMER 2
UTIM1 [R] H,W
(UTIMR1 [W] H,W)
00000000 00000000
SSR2 [R/W]
B,H,W
00001000
SIDR2 [R]
SODR2 [W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000074H
UTIM2 [R] H,W
(UTIMR2 [W] H,W)
00000000 00000000
000078H
ADCR [R] B,H,W
000000XX XXXXXXXX
00007CH
ADCR0 [R]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ADCR1 [R]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000080H
to
000090H
000094H
IBCR0 [R/W]
B,W,H
00000000
IBSR0 [R]
B,W,H
00000000
ADCR3 [R]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ITBA0 [R/W] B,W,H
00000000 00000000
ISBA0 [R/W]
B,W,H
00000000
IDAR0 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
ICCR0 [R/W]
B,W,H
00011111
IDBL0 [R/W]
B,W,H
00000000
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
00009CH
−
0000A0H
0000A4H
A/D Converter
sequential
comparison
Reserved
ISMK0 [R/W]
B,W,H
01111111
ITMK0 [R/W] B,W,H
00111111 11111111
538
ADCR2 [R]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
−
000098H
0000A8H
to
0000B0H
ADCS [R, R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000
−
I2C interface 0
Reserved
Reserved
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (3 / 11)
Register
Address
0000B4H
Block
+0
+1
IBCR1 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
IBSR1 [R]
B,H,W
00000000
+2
+3
ITBA1 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000
ISMK1 [R/W]
B,H,W
00011111
ISBA1 [R,R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
IDAR1 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
ICCR1
[R/W] B,H,W
00011111
IDBL1 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
0000B8H
ITMK1 [R/W] B,H,W
00111111 11111111
0000BCH
−
0000C0H
0000C4H
Reserved
0000C8H
to
0000D0H
−
−
−
−
0000D4H
TCDT [R/W] H,W
00000000 00000000
−
TCCS [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
0000D8H
IPCP1 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
IPCP0 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0000DCH
IPCP3 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
IPCP2 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0000E0H
−
ICS23 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
0000E4H
to
000114H
000118H
I2C interface1
−
Reserved
−
GCN20 [R/W]
B
00000000
−
00011CH
000120H
PTMR0 [R] H
11111111 11111111
000124H
PDUT0 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000128H
PTMR1 [R] H
11111111 11111111
00012CH
PDUT1 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
16-bit ICU
ICS01 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
−
GCN10 [R/W] H
00110010 00010000
16-bit free run timer
PPG timer
Reserved
PCSR0 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
PPG0
PCNH0 [R/W] B
00000000
PCNL0 [R/W] B
000000X0
PCSR1 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
PPG1
PCNH1 [R/W] B
00000000
PCNL1 [R/W] B
000000X0
539
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (4 / 11)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
000130H
PTMR2 [R] H
11111111 11111111
000134H
PDUT2 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000138H
PTMR3 [R] H
11111111 11111111
00013CH
PDUT3 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
+2
+3
PCSR2 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
PPG2
PCNH2 [R/W] B
00000000
PCNL2 [R/W] B
000000X0
PCSR3 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
PPG3
PCNH3 [R/W] B
00000000
PCNL3 [R/W] B
000000X0
000140H
to
0001FCH
−
000200H
DMACA0 [R/W] B,H,W*1
00000000 0000XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000204H
DMACB0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000208H
DMACA1 [R/W] B,H,W*1
00000000 0000XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
00020CH
DMACB1 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000210H
DMACA2 [R/W] B,H,W*1
00000000 0000XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000214H
DMACB2 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000218H
DMACA3 [R/W] B,H,W*1
00000000 0000XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
00021CH
DMACB3 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000220H
DMACA4 [R/W] B,H,W*1
00000000 0000XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000224H
DMACB4 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000228H
to
00023CH
−
Reserved
000240H
DMACR [R/W] B
0XX00000 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
DMAC
000244H
to
000300H
−
Reserved
Reserved
DMAC
540
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (5 / 11)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
ISIZE [R/W]
B,H,W
------10
−
000304H
000308H
to
0003E0H
+3
−
Reserved
ICHCR [R/W]
B,H,W
0-000000
−
0003E4H
I-Cache
0003E8H
to
0003EFH
−
0003F0H
BSD0 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003F4H
BSD1 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003F8H
BSDC [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003FCH
BSRR [R] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
I-Cache
Reserved
Bit Search Module
000400H
DDRG [R/W] B
00000000
DDRH [R/W] B
-----000
000404H
to
00040CH
000410H
000424H
to
00043CH
DDRJ [R/W] B
00000000
−
PFRG [R/W] B
00------
PFRH [R/W] B
------0-
000414H
to
00041CH
000420H
−
Reserved
−
PFRJ [R/W] B
--00-00-
−
PCRG [R/W]
B*2
00000000
PCRH [R/W] B
-----000
R-bus
Port Function
Register
Reserved
−
−
R-bus
Data Direction
Register
PCRJ [R/W]
B *2
00000000
R-bus
pull-up resistor control
Register
Reserved
541
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (6 / 11)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000440H
ICR00 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR01 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR02 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR03 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000444H
ICR04 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR05 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR06 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR07 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000448H
ICR08 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR09 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR10 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR11 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
00044CH
ICR12 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR13 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR14 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR15 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000450H
ICR16 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR17 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR18 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR19 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000454H
ICR20 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR21[R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR22 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR23 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000458H
ICR24 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR25 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR26 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR27 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
00045CH
ICR28 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR29 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR30 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR31 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000460H
ICR32 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR33 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR34 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR35 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000464H
ICR36 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR37 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR38 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR39 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000468H
ICR40 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR41 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR42 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR43 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
00046CH
ICR44 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR45 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR46 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
ICR47 [R/W]
B,H,W
---11111
000470H
to
00047CH
542
−
Interrupt Controller
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (7 / 11)
Register
Address
000480H
000484H
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
RSRR [R/W]
B,H,W
10000000
(INIT)
-0-XX-00 (INIT)
XXX--X00
(RST)
STCR [R/W]
B,H,W
00110011
(INIT)
0011XX11
(INIT)
00X1XXXX
(RST)
TBCR [R/W]
B,H,W
00XXXX00
(INIT)
00XXXXXX
(RST)
CTBR [W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
(INIT)
XXXXXXXX
(RST)
WPR
--------*4
DIVR0 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000011
(INIT)
XXXXXXXX
(RST)
CLKR [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
(INIT)
XXXXXXXX
(RST)
000488H
to
0005FCH
000600H
DIVR1 [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
(INIT)
XXXXXXXX
(RST)
−
DDR0 [R/W] B
00000000
DDR1 [R/W] B
00000000
−
000604H
000608H
Clock Control unit
DDR8 [R/W] B
00000000
DDR9 [R/W] B
-0000000
00060CH
−
000610H
−
−
000614H
Reserved
DDR2 [R/W] B
00000000
−
DDR6 [R/W] B
00000000
−
DDRA [R/W] B
00000000
DDRB [R/W] B
00000000
PFR6 [R/W] B
11111111
PFR61 [R/W] B
----0000
000618H
PFR8 [R/W] B
111--0--
PFR9 [R/W] B
-0000111
PFRA1 [R/W] B
11111111
PFRB1 [R/W] B
00000000
00061CH
PFRB2 [R/W] B
000---00
−
PFRA2 [R/W] B
--0-----
−
000620H
PCR0 [R/W] B
00000000
PCR1 [R/W] B
00000000
PCR2 [R/W] B
00000000
−
PCR6 [R/W] B
00000000
−
PCRA [R/W] B
00000000
PCRB [R/W] B
00000000
−
000624H
000628H
PCR8 [R/W] B
00000000
PCR9 [R/W] B
00000000
00062CH
−
000630H
to
00063CH
−
T-unit
Data Direction
Register
T-unit
Port Function
Register
T-unit
Pull-up Resistor
Control Register
Reserved
543
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (8 / 11)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000640H
ASR0 [R/W] H,W
00000000 00000000
ACRH [R/W]
H,W
1111XX00
ACR0L [R/W]
H,W
00000000
000644H
ASR1 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
ACR1H [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ACR1L [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000648H
ASR2 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
ACR2H [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ACR2L [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
00064CH
ASR3 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
ACR3H [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ACR3L [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000650H
ASR4 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
ACR4H [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ACR4L [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000654H
ASR5 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
ACR5H [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ACR5L [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000658H
ASR6 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
ACR6H [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ACR6L [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ACR7H [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ACR7L [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
00065CH
ASR7 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000660H
AWR0H[R/W]
B,H,W
011111111
AWR0L[R/W]
B,H,W
11111111 (INIT)
11111011 (RST)
AWR1H[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR1L[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000664H
AWR2H[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR2L[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR3H[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR3L[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000668H
AWR4H[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR4L[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR5H[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR5L[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
00066CH
AWR6H[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR6L[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR7H[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
AWR7L[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000670H
MCRA [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
MCRB [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000674H
544
−
−
T-unit
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (9 / 11)
Register
Address
000678H
Block
+0
+1
IOWR0 [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
IOWR1 [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
+3
−
−
00067CH
000680H
CSER [R/W]
B,H,W
000000001
CHER [R/W]
B,H,W
11111111
000684H
RCRH [R/W]
B,H,W
00XXXXXX
RCRL [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXX0XXX
00068CH
to
0007F8H
0007FCH
+2
TCR [R/W]
B,H,W
00000000
(INIT)
0000XXXX
(RST)
−
−
−
Reserved
MODR [W] *3
XXXXXXXX
−
000800H
to
000AFCH
−
−
−
Reserved
000B00H
ESTS0 [R/W] B
X0000000
ESTS1 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
ESTS2 [R] B
1XXXXXXX
−
000B04H
ECTL0 [R/W] B
0X000000
ECTL1 [R/W] B
00000000
ECTL2 [W] B
000X0000
ECTL3 [R/W] B
00X00X11
000B08H
ECNT0 [W] B
XXXXXXXX
ECNT1 [W] B
XXXXXXXX
EUSA [W] B
XXX00000
EDTC [W] B
0000XXXX
ECTL4[R]
([R/W]) B
-0X00000
ECTL5 [R]
([R/W]) B
----000X
000B0CH
EWPT [R] H
00000000 00000000
000B10H
EDTR0 [W] B
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
T-unit
EDTR1 [W] H
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B14H
to
000B1CH
−
000B20H
EIA0 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B24H
EIA1 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B28H
EIA2 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
DSU
(only evaluation chip)
545
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (10 / 11)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
000B2CH
EIA3 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B30H
EIA4 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B34H
EIA5 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B38H
EIA6 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B3CH
EIA7 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B40H
EDTA [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B44H
EDTM [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B48H
EOA0 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B4CH
EOA1 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B50H
EPCR [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B54H
EPSR [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B58H
EIAM0 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B5CH
EIAM1 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B60H
EOAM0/EODM0 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B64H
EOAM1/EODM1 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B68H
EOD0 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B6CH
EOD1 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000B70H
to
000FFCH
−
546
+3
DSU
(only evaluation chip)
Reserved
APPENDIX A I/O MAP
Table A-1 I/O Map (11 / 11)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
001000H
DMASA0 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
001004H
DMADA0 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
001008H
DMASA1 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
00100CH
DMADA1 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
001010H
DMASA2 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
001014H
DMADA2 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
001018H
DMASA3 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
00101CH
DMADA3 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
001020H
DMASA4 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
001024H
DMADA4 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
001028H
to
001FFCH
−
+3
DMAC
Reserved
*1: The lower 16-bit (DTC15 to DTC0) of DMACA0 to DMACA4 cannot access by byte.
*2: No register in 000420H and 000423H in MB91302A and MB91V301A.
*3: This register is set by the mode vector fetch. It cannot access during the normal operation.
*4: Reserved register. Access is disabled.
547
APPENDIX B INTERRUPT VECTOR
APPENDIX B
INTERRUPT VECTOR
Table B-1 shows the interrupt vector table, which gives the interrupt source and
interrupt vector/interrupt control register allocations for the MB91301 series.
■ Interrupt Vectors
Table B-1 Interrupt Vectors (1 / 4)
Interrupt number
Interrupt source
Interrupt
level
Offset
TBR default
address
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Reset
0
00
−
3FCH
000FFFFCH
−
Mode vector
1
01
−
3F8H
000FFFF8H
−
Reserved for system
2
02
−
3F4H
000FFFF4H
−
Reserved for system
3
03
−
3F0H
000FFFF0H
−
Reserved for system
4
04
−
3ECH
000FFFECH
−
Reserved for system
5
05
−
3E8H
000FFFE8H
−
Reserved for system
6
06
−
3E4H
000FFFE4H
−
No-coprocessor trap
7
07
−
3E0H
000FFFE0H
−
Coprocessor error trap
8
08
−
3DCH
000FFFDCH
−
INTE instruction
9
09
−
3D8H
000FFFD8H
−
Reserved for system
10
0A
−
3D4H
000FFFD4H
−
Reserved for system
11
0B
−
3D0H
000FFFD0H
−
Step trace trap
12
0C
−
3CCH
000FFFCCH
−
NMI request (tool)
13
0D
−
3C8H
000FFFC8H
−
Undefined instruction exception
14
0E
−
3C4H
000FFFC4H
−
NMI request
15
0F
15(FH),
fixed
3C0H
000FFFC0H
−
External Interrupt 0
16
10
ICR00
3BCH
000FFFBCH
6
External Interrupt 1
17
11
ICR01
3B8H
000FFFB8H
7
External Interrupt 2
18
12
ICR02
3B4H
000FFFB4H
11
External Interrupt 3
19
13
ICR03
3B0H
000FFFB0H
12
External Interrupt 4
20
14
ICR04
3ACH
000FFFACH
548
APPENDIX B INTERRUPT VECTOR
Table B-1 Interrupt Vectors (2 / 4)
Interrupt number
Interrupt source
Interrupt
level
Offset
TBR default
address
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
External Interrupt 5
21
15
ICR05
3A8H
000FFFA8H
External Interrupt 6
22
16
ICR06
3A4H
000FFFA4H
−
External Interrupt 7
23
17
ICR07
3A0H
000FFFA0H
−
Reload Timer 0
24
18
ICR08
39CH
000FFF9CH
8
Reload Timer 1
25
19
ICR09
398H
000FFF98H
9
Reload Timer 2
26
1A
ICR10
394H
000FFF94H
10
UART0 (reception completed)
27
1B
ICR11
390H
000FFF90H
0
UART1 (reception completed)
28
1C
ICR12
38CH
000FFF8CH
1
UART2 (reception completed)
29
1D
ICR13
388H
000FFF88H
2
UART0
(transmission completed)
30
1E
ICR14
384H
000FFF84H
3
UART1 (transmission
completed)
31
1F
ICR15
380H
000FFF80H
4
UART2 (transmission
completed)
32
20
ICR16
37CH
000FFF7CH
5
DMAC0 (end, error)
33
21
ICR17
378H
000FFF78H
-
DMAC1 (end, error)
34
22
ICR18
374H
000FFF74H
−
DMAC2 (end, error)
35
23
ICR19
370H
000FFF70H
−
DMAC3 (end, error)
36
24
ICR20
36CH
000FFF6CH
−
DMAC4 (end, error)
37
25
ICR21
368H
000FFF68H
−
A/D
38
26
ICR22
364H
000FFF64H
15
PPG0
39
27
ICR23
360H
000FFF60H
13
PPG1
40
28
ICR24
35CH
000FFF5CH
14
PPG2
41
29
ICR25
358H
000FFF58H
−
PPG3
42
2A
ICR26
354H
000FFF54H
−
Reserved for system
43
2B
ICR27
350H
000FFF50H
−
U-TIMER0
44
2C
ICR28
34CH
000FFF4CH
−
U-TIMER1
45
2D
ICR29
348H
000FFF48H
−
U-TIMER2
46
2E
ICR30
344H
000FFF44H
−
549
APPENDIX B INTERRUPT VECTOR
Table B-1 Interrupt Vectors (3 / 4)
Interrupt number
Interrupt source
Interrupt
level
Offset
TBR default
address
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Time-base timer overflow
47
2F
ICR31
340H
000FFF40H
−
I2C I/F0
48
30
ICR32
33CH
000FFF3CH
−
I2C I/F1
49
31
ICR33
338H
000FFF38H
−
Reserved for system
50
32
ICR34
334H
000FFF34H
−
Reserved for system
51
33
ICR35
330H
000FFF30H
−
16-bit free run timer
52
34
ICR36
32CH
000FFF2CH
−
ICU0 (fetch)
53
35
ICR37
328H
000FFF28H
−
ICU1 (fetch)
54
36
ICR38
324H
000FFF24H
−
ICU2 (fetch)
55
37
ICR39
320H
000FFF20H
−
ICU3 (fetch)
56
38
ICR40
31CH
000FFF1CH
−
Reserved for system
57
39
ICR41
318H
000FFF18H
−
Reserved for system
58
3A
ICR42
314H
000FFF14H
−
Reserved for system
59
3B
ICR43
310H
000FFF10H
−
Reserved for system
60
3C
ICR44
30CH
000FFF0CH
−
Reserved for system
61
3D
ICR45
308H
000FFF08H
−
Reserved for system
62
3E
ICR46
304H
000FFF04H
−
Delayed interrupt source bit
63
3F
ICR47
300H
000FFF00H
−
Reserved for system
(used by REALOS)
64
40
−
2FCH
000FFEFCH
−
Reserved for system
(used by REALOS)
65
41
−
2F8H
000FFEF8H
−
Reserved for system
66
42
−
2F4H
000FFEF4H
−
Reserved for system
67
43
−
2F0H
000FFEF0H
−
Reserved for system
68
44
−
2ECH
000FFEECH
−
Reserved for system
69
45
−
2E8H
000FFEE8H
−
Reserved for system
70
46
−
2E4H
000FFEE4H
−
Reserved for system
71
47
−
2E0H
000FFEE0H
−
Reserved for system
72
48
−
2DCH
000FFEDCH
−
Reserved for system
73
49
−
2D8H
000FFED8H
−
550
APPENDIX B INTERRUPT VECTOR
Table B-1 Interrupt Vectors (4 / 4)
Interrupt number
Interrupt source
Interrupt
level
Offset
TBR default
address
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Reserved for system
74
4A
−
2D4H
000FFED4H
−
Reserved for system
75
4B
−
2D0H
000FFED0H
−
Reserved for system
76
4C
−
2CCH
000FFECCH
−
Reserved for system
77
4D
−
2C8H
000FFEC8H
−
Reserved for system
78
4E
−
2C4H
000FFEC4H
−
Reserved for system
79
4F
−
2C0H
000FFEC0H
−
Used in INT instruction
80
to
255
50
to
FF
−
2BCH
to
000H
000FFEBCH
to
000FFC00H
−
Notes: • The ICR is a register set in the interrupt controller that sets the interrupt level for each interrupt
request. The ICR is provided to support each interrupt request.
• The TBR is a register that indicates the first address of the EIT vector table.
The vector address can be obtained by adding the offset value defined for each TBR and EIT
source to the address.
Reference:
The 1 Kbyte area from the address indicated by the TBR is the vector area for EIT.
The size of each vector is 4 bytes and the relation between the vector number and vector address
can be represented as follows:
vctadr = TBR + vctofs
= TBR + (3FCH-4 x vct)
vctadr:
Vector address
vctofs:
Vector offset
vct:
Vector number
551
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
APPENDIX C
PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-1 to Table C-4 list the pin states in each CPU state.
■ Meaning of Terms in the Pin State Table
Terms related to the pin state have the following meanings:
•
Input ready
Means that the input function can be used.
•
Input 0 fixed
Input level is internally fixed at 0 to prevent leakage due to the input open.
•
Output Hi-Z
Means that the pin drive transistor is disabled and the pin is set to high impedance.
•
Output held
Means that the state output just before a mode is entered is output as is.
That is, if any built-in peripheral with output is active, the output is determined by the built-in
peripheral. For output as a port, the output is held.
•
Preceding state held
Means that the state output just before a mode is entered is output as is. Also means input
ready if the state is the input state.
552
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
■ Pin State Table
Table C-1 Pin States in External Bus 32-Bit Mode (1 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name Bus width Bus width value
32 bits
8 bits
Stop mode
Sleep
mode
HIZ=0
1 to 5
P13 to P17
D11 to D15
D11 to D15
P13 to P17
P : Previous
P : Previous
8 to 15
P20 to P27
D16 to D23
D16 to D23
P20 to P27
state held
F : Output
state held
F : Output
held or
Hi-Z
held or
Hi-Z
18 to 25
-
D24 to D31
D24 to D31
D24 to D31
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
HIZ=1
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
29
P80
P81
RDY
BGRNT
P80
P81
P80
P81
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
CS
shared
CS not
shared
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
P : Previous P : Previous
P : Previous
28
Bus open
(BGRNT)
state held
F : RDY
state held
F : RDY
state held
F : RDY
input
input
input
"L" output
"L" output
BRQ input
BRQ input
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
Previous
state held
P : Previous
30
P82
BRQ
P82
P82
31
P83
RD
RD
RD
32
P84
DQMUU/
DQMUU/
DQMUU/
WR0
WR0
WR0
33
P85
DQMUL/
DQMUL/
WR1
WR1
34
P86
DQMLU/
DQMLU/
WR2
WR2
35
P87
DQMLL/
DQMLL/
WR3
WR3
state held
F : BRQ in-
Output
Hi-Z/input
put invalid
36
P90
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
0 fixed
"H" output
P : Previous
P85
P86
state held
F : "H" output
F : "H" output
P87
SYSCLK
Asserted :
P : Previous
"L" output
Negated :
state held
state held
F : SYSCLK F : "H" or "L"
CLK output
37
P91
MCLKE
MCLKE
MCLKE
"H" output
MCLK
"L" output
Negated :
Asserted :
38
P92
MCLK
MCLK
CLK output
39
P93
-
P93
P93
40
P94
SRAS/LBA/
AS
P94
P94
41
P95
SCAS/BAA
P95
P95
42
P96
SWE/WR
P96
Previous
state held
P96
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
output
P : Previous
F : CLK
F : CLK
input 0
fixed
output
output
F : Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
F : Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
F : CLK
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z
Port
Port
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Previous
state held
output
F : "L" output F : "L" output
P : Previous
P : Previous
state held
state held
F : "H" output F : "H" output
Previous
state held
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
P : Previous
state held
F : SWEX
output
Output
Hi-Z/
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
output
F:
553
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-1 Pin States in External Bus 32-Bit Mode (2 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name Bus width Bus width value
32 bits
8 bits
45 to 52
P40 to P47
A00 to A07
A00 to A07
A00 to A07
55 to 62
P50 to P57
A08 to A15
A08 to A15
A08 to A15
64 to 67
P60 to P63
A16 to A19
A16 to A19
A16 to A19
68
P64
69
P65
A21/SCL0*
A21
A21
70
P66
A22/SDA1*
A22
A22
71
P67
A23/SCL1*
A23
A23
76 to 79
-
81
PG0
INT0/ICU0*
PG0
PG0
82
PG1
INT1/ICU1*
PG1
PG1
83
PG2
INT2/ICU2*
PG2
PG2
84
PG3
INT3/ICU3*
PG3
PG3
85
PG4
86
PG5
87
A20/SDA0*
A20
A20
FF output
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
PG4
INT5/SIN2
PG5
PG5
PG6
INT6/SOT2
PG6
PG6
88
PG7
INT7/SCK2
PG7
PG7
90
PJ0
SIN0
PJ0
PJ0
91
PJ1
SOT0
PJ1
PJ1
92
PJ2
SCK0
PJ2
PJ2
93
PJ3
SIN1
PJ3
PJ3
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
94
PJ4
SOT1
PJ4
PJ4
95
PJ5
SCK1
PJ5
PJ5
96
PJ6
PPG0
PJ6
PJ6
97
PJ7
TRG0
PJ7
PJ7
98
PH0
TIN0
PH0
PH0
99
PH1
TIN1/PPG3
PH1
PH1
100
PH2
TIN2/TRG3
PH2
PH2
103
PB0
DREQ0
PB0
PB0
104
PB1
DACK0
PB1
PB1
105
PB2
DEOP0
PB2
PB2
106
PB3
DREQ1
PB3
PB3
107
PB4
108
PB5
109
PB6
110
PB7
554
DACK1/
PB4
PB4
PB5
PB5
IOWR
PB6
PB6
IORD
PB7
PB7
TRG1
DEOP1/
PPG1
HIZ=0
state held
F : Address
The same as
stated left
output
PG4
FRCK*
Sleep
mode
P : Previous
AN3 to AN0 AN0 to AN3 AN0 to AN3 Input invalid
INT4/ATG/
Stop mode
Output
Hi-Z
Input
invalid
Previous
state held
Previous
state held
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
input 0
fixed
P : Previous
state held
F : Normal
state held
F : Input
P : Output
Hi-Z
F : Input
operation
ready
ready
state held
F : Normal
Previous
state held
state held
F : Normal
Previous
state held
operation
P : Previous
Input ready
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z/
P : Previous
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
CS not
shared
Input invalid
operation
Input ready
CS
shared
Previous
state held
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
HIZ=1
state held
F : Normal
operation
Previous
state held
Bus open
(BGRNT)
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-1 Pin States in External Bus 32-Bit Mode (3 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name Bus width Bus width value
32 bits
8 bits
122
PA0
CS0
CS0
CS0
123
PA1
CS1
CS1
CS1
124
PA2
CS2
CS2
CS2
125
PA3
CS3
CS3
CS3
126
PA4
CS4/TRG2
CS4
CS4
127
PA5
CS5/PPG2
CS5
CS5
128
PA6
CS6
CS6
CS6
129
PA7
CS7
CS7
CS7
D00 to D07
D00 to D07
P00 to P07
132 to 139 P00 to P07
D08 to D10
D08 to D10
P10 to P12
Sleep
mode
HIZ=0
HIZ=1
Bus open
(BGRNT)
CS
shared
CS not
shared
F : SREN=0: F : SREN=0:
"H" output
Output Hi-Z
142 to 144 P10 to P12
Stop mode
Input ready
"H" output
"H" output
P : Previous
P : Previous
state held
F : Output
state held
F : Output
held or
Hi-Z
held or
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
"H" output
SREN=1 :
"H" output
SREN=1 :
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
P : General-purpose port selected, F : Specified function selected
* : The following port's function can be used on only MB91302A and MB91V301A; SDA0, SCL0, SDA1, SCL1 of
68 to 71 pin, ICU0 to ICU3, FRCK of 81 to 85 pin.
Note : The bus width is determined after a mode vector fetch.
The bus width at initialization time is 8 bits.
555
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-2 Pin States in External Bus 16-Bit Mode (1 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified
name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name
value
Bus width Bus width
32 bits
8 bits
1 to 5
P13 to P17
D11 to D15
P13 to P17
P13 to P17
8 to 15
P20 to P27
D16 to D23
D16 to D23
P20 to P27
18 to 25
-
D24 to D31
D24 to D31
D24 to D31
Stop mode
Sleep
mode
HIZ=0
HIZ=1
Input ready
29
P80
P81
RDY
BGRNT
P80
P81
P80
P81
Output
Hi-Z
Input ready
30
P82
BRQ
P82
RD
RD
RD
32
P84
DQMUU/
WR0
DQMUU/
WR0
DQMUU/
WR0
33
P85
DQMUL/
WR1
DQMUL/
WR1
P85
34
P86
DQMLU/
WR2
P86
P86
35
P87
DQMLL/
WR3
P87
P87
36
37
P90
P91
SYSCLK
MCLKE
SYSCLK
MCLKE
state held
F : RDY
input
input
input
"L" output
"L" output
BRQ
input
BRQ
input
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
F : CLK
F : CLK
output
output
F : Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
F : Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
F : CLK
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
F : "H"
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Previous
state held
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
Previous
state held
P : Previous
Output
Hi-Z/
P92
MCLK
MCLK
P : Previous
SYSCLK
MCLKE
state held
F : "H"
F : "H" output
output
MCLK
39
P93
-
P93
P93
40
P94
SRAS/LBA/
AS
P94
P94
41
P95
SCAS/BAA
P95
P95
556
P96
SWE/WR
P96
P96
Previous
state held
Asserted :
P : Previous
P : Previous
"L" output
Negated :
state held
F : SYSCLK
state held
F : "H" or
CLK output
output
"L" output
"H" output F : "L" output F : "L" output
"L" output
Negated :
CLK output
42
input 0 fixed
"H" output
Asserted :
38
Output
Hi-Z
state held
F : RDY
input
invalid
P83
Output
Hi-Z
state held
F : RDY
state held
F : BRQ
P82
31
CS not
shared
P : Previous P : Previous
P : Previous
28
CS
shared
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
P : Previous Output Hi-Z/
state held
state held input 0 fixed
F : Output
F : Output
held or Hi-Z held or Hi-Z
Bus open
(BGRNT)
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
P : Previous
P : Previous
state held
state held
F : "H" output F : "H" output
Previous
state held
P : Previous
state held
F:"H" output
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
P : Previous
state held
F : SWEX
output
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z/input 0
fixed
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0 fixed
output
output
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-2 Pin States in External Bus 16-Bit Mode (2 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified
name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name
value
Bus width Bus width
32 bits
8 bits
45 to 52
P40 to P47
A00 to A07
A00 to A07
A00 to A07
55 to 62
P50 to P57
A08 to A15
A08 to A15
A08 to A15
64 to 67
P60 to P63
A16 to A19
A16 to A19
A16 to A19
68
P64
A20/SDA0*
A20
A20
69
P65
A21/SCL0*
A21
A21
70
P66
A22/SDA1*
A22
A22
71
P67
A23/SCL1*
A23
A23
76 to 79
-
AN0 to AN3
AN0 to AN3
AN0 to AN3
81
PG0
INT0/ICU0*
PG0
PG0
82
PG1
INT1/ICU1*
PG1
PG1
83
PG2
INT2/ICU2*
PG2
PG2
84
PG3
INT3/ICU3*
PG3
PG3
85
PG4
86
PG5
87
INT4/ATG/
FF output
Input
invalid
Output
Hi-Z
INT5/SIN2
PG5
PG5
PG6
INT6/SOT2
PG6
PG6
88
PG7
INT7/SCK2
PG7
PG7
90
PJ0
SIN0
PJ0
PJ0
91
PJ1
SOT0
PJ1
PJ1
92
PJ2
SCK0
PJ2
PJ2
93
PJ3
SIN1
PJ3
PJ3
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
PJ4
SOT1
PJ4
PJ4
95
PJ5
SCK1
PJ5
PJ5
96
PJ6
PPG0
PJ6
PJ6
97
PJ7
TRG0
PJ7
PJ7
98
PH0
TIN0
PH0
PH0
99
PH1
TIN1/PPG3
PH1
PH1
100
PH2
TIN2/TRG3
PH2
PH2
103
PB0
DREQ0
PB0
PB0
104
PB1
DACK0
PB1
PB1
105
PB2
DEOP0
PB2
PB2
106
PB3
DREQ1
PB3
PB3
DACK1/
PB4
PB4
DEOP1/PPG1
PB5
PB5
PB6
IOWR
PB6
PB6
PB7
IORD
PB7
PB7
107
PB4
108
PB5
109
110
TRG1
HIZ=0
state held
F : Address
The same as
stated left
output
PG4
94
Sleep
mode
P : Previous
PG4
FRCK*
Stop mode
Input ready
Output
Hi-Z
Previous
state held
Previous
state held
P : Previous
P : Previous
state held
F : Normal
state held
F : Input
P : Output
Hi-Z
F : Input
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
operation
ready
ready
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
state held
F : Normal
Previous
state held
state held
F : Normal
Previous
state held
operation
P : Previous
Input ready
Output
Hi-Z
Input
invalid
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
input 0 fixed
CS not
shared
Input
invalid
operation
Input ready
Output
Hi-Z/
CS
shared
Previous
state held
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
HIZ=1
Bus open
(BGRNT)
state held
F : Normal
operation
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0 fixed
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0 fixed
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0 fixed
557
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-2 Pin States in External Bus 16-Bit Mode (3 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified
name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name
value
Bus width Bus width
32 bits
8 bits
122
PA0
CS0
CS0
CS0
123
PA1
CS1
CS1
CS1
124
PA2
CS2
CS2
CS2
125
PA3
CS3
CS3
CS3
126
PA4
CS4/TRG2
CS4
CS4
127
PA5
CS5/PPG2
CS5
CS5
128
PA6
CS6
CS6
CS6
129
PA7
CS7
CS7
CS7
D00 to D07
P00 to P07
P00 to P07
132 to 139 P00 to P07
"H" output
D08 to D10
P10 to P12
P10 to P12
Sleep
mode
"H" output
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
142 to 144 P10 to P12
Stop mode
Input ready
HIZ=0
"H" output
HIZ=1
Output
Hi-Z
Bus open
(BGRNT)
CS
shared
CS not
shared
F:
SREN=0 :
F:
SREN=0 :
"H" output "H" output
SREN=1 : SREN=1 :
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
P : Previous
Output
state held
state held
Hi-Z/
F : Output
F : Output
input 0 fixed
held or Hi-Z held or Hi-Z
P : General-purpose port selected, F : Specified function selected
* : The following port's function can be used on only MB91302A and MB91V301A; SDA0, SCL0, SDA1, SCL1 of
68 to 71 pin, ICU0 to ICU3, FRCK of 81 to 85 pin.
Note : The bus width is determined after a mode vector fetch.
The bus width at initialization time is 8 bits.
558
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-3 Pin States in External Bus 8-Bit Mode (1 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified
name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name Bus width Bus width value
32 bits
8 bits
1 to 5
8 to 15
18 to 25
P13 to
P17
P20 to
P27
-
D11 to D15
P13 to P17
P13 to P17
P20 to P27
P20 to P27
D24 to D31
D24 to D31
D24 to D31
Sleep
mode
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
D16 to D23
Stop mode
Input ready
HIZ=0
HIZ=1
P : Previous
Output
Hi-Z/
state held
state held
F : Output held F : Output
or Hi-Z
held or Hi-Z
input 0
fixed
P : Previous
28
29
P80
P81
RDY
BGRNT
P80
P81
P80
P81
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Bus open
(BGRNT)
CS
shared
CS not
shared
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
P : Previous P : Previous
state held
F : RDY
state held
F : RDY
state held
F : RDY
input
input
input
"L" output
"L" output
BRQ
input
BRQ
input
Output
Hi-Z
Output Hi-Z
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
Previous
state held
P : Previous
30
P82
BRQ
P82
P82
31
P83
RD
RD
RD
32
P84
DQMUU/
WR0
DQMUU/
WR0
DQMUU/
WR0
33
P85
DQMUL/
WR1
P85
P85
P86
DQMLU/
WR2
P86
P86
P87
DQMLL/
WR3
P87
P87
34
35
state held
F : BRQ
Output
Hi-Z/
input invalid
input 0
fixed
"H" output
P : Previous
F : "H"
state held
F : "H" output
output
Asserted:
P : Previous
"L" output
state held
Negated:
F : SYSCLK
CLK output
output
36
P90
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
SYSCLK
37
P91
MCLKE
MCLKE
MCLKE
"H" output
MCLK
"L" output
Negated :
F : "L" output
Asserted :
38
P92
MCLK
MCLK
CLK
output
39
P93
-
P93
P93
40
P94
SRAS/LBA/
AS
P94
P94
41
P95
SCAS/BAA
P95
P95
Previous
state held
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
Previous state
held
P : Previous
Output
F : CLK
state held
Hi-Z/input
F : "H" or
output
0 fixed
"L" output
F : "L"
Output
Hi-Z
F : Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
"H" output
Output
Hi-Z
Previous
state held
state held
F : "H"
42
P96
SWE/WR
P96
P96
Input ready
state held
F : SWEX
output
F : CLK
output
output
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
"H" output
P : Previous
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
output
F : Output
Hi-Z
output
P : Previous
state held
F : "H" output
F : CLK
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z/input
0 fixed
Output Hi-Z
F : "H"
output
559
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-3 Pin States in External Bus 8-Bit Mode (2 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified
name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name
Bus width Bus width value
32 bits
8 bits
45 to 52
55 to 62
64 to 67
P40 to
P47
P50 to
P57
P60 to
P63
A00 to A07
A00 to A07
A00 to A07
A08 to A15
A08 to A15
A08 to A15
A16 to A19
A16 to A19
A16 to A19
P64
A20/SDA0*
A20
A20
69
P65
A21/SCL0*
A21
A21
70
P66
A22/SDA1*
A22
A22
71
P67
A23/SCL1*
A23
A23
76 to 79
-
81
PG0
INT0/ICU0*
PG0
PG0
82
PG1
INT1/ICU1*
PG1
PG1
83
PG2
INT2/ICU2*
PG2
PG2
84
PG3
INT3/ICU3*
PG3
PG3
AN0 to AN3 AN0 to AN3 AN0 to AN3
INT4/ATG/
PG4
PG4
PG5
PG5
85
PG4
86
PG5
87
PG6
INT6/SOT2
PG6
PG6
88
PG7
INT7/SCK2
PG7
PG7
90
PJ0
SIN0
PJ0
PJ0
PJ1
FRCK*
INT5/SIN2
FF output
Input
invalid
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
PJ1
SOT0
PJ1
92
PJ2
SCK0
PJ2
PJ2
93
PJ3
SIN1
PJ3
PJ3
Output Hi-Z
94
PJ4
SOT1
PJ4
PJ4
Input ready
95
PJ5
SCK1
PJ5
PJ5
96
PJ6
PPG0
PJ6
PJ6
97
PJ7
TRG0
PJ7
PJ7
98
PH0
TIN0
PH0
PH0
TIN1/PPG3
PH1
PH1
100
PH2
TIN2/TRG3
PH2
PH2
103
PB0
DREQ0
PB0
PB0
104
PB1
DACK0
PB1
PB1
105
PB2
DEOP0
PB2
PB2
106
PB3
DREQ1
PB3
PB3
107
PB4
108
PB5
109
110
560
DACK1/
PB4
PB4
DEOP1/PPG1
PB5
PB5
PB6
IOWR
PB6
PB6
PB7
IORD
PB7
PB7
TRG1
state held
F : Address
output
91
PH1
Sleep
mode
P : Previous
68
99
Stop mode
HIZ=0
Output
The same as
Hi-Z/input
stated left
0 fixed
Output Hi-Z
Previous
state held
Previous
state held
P : Previous
P : Previous
state held
F : Normal
state held
F : Input
P : Output
Hi-Z
F : Input
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
operation
ready
ready
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
Normal
operation
state held
F : Normal
Previous
state held
state held
F : Normal
Previous
state held
operation
Input ready
Output
Hi-Z
Input
invalid
P : Previous
Output
Hi-Z
CS not
shared
Input
invalid
operation
Input ready
CS
shared
Previous state
held
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
HIZ=1
Bus open
(BGRNT)
P : Previous
state held
F : Normal
operation
Previous
state held
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-3 Pin States in External Bus 8-Bit Mode (3 / 3)
At initialization (INIT)
Function
Function
Specified
name
Port
name
function
Pin no.
Initial
name
name
Bus width Bus width value
32 bits
8 bits
122
PA0
CS0
CS0
CS0
123
PA1
CS1
CS1
CS1
124
PA2
CS2
CS2
CS2
125
PA3
CS3
CS3
CS3
126
PA4
CS4/TRG2
CS4
CS4
127
PA5
CS5/PPG2
CS5
CS5
128
PA6
CS6
CS6
CS6
129
PA7
CS7
CS7
CS7
D00 to D07
P00 to P07
P00 to P07
132 to 139
142 to 144
P00 to
P07
P10 to
P12
D08 to D10
P10 to P12
P10 to P12
Stop mode
Sleep
mode
HIZ=0
HIZ=1
Bus open
(BGRNT)
CS
shared
F : SREN=0:
"H" output
"H" output
P : Previous
Output Hi-Z
Input ready
"H" output
P : Previous
state held
state held
F : Output held F : Output
or Hi-Z
held or Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z/
input 0
fixed
"H" output
SREN=1 :
Output
Hi-Z
Output
Hi-Z
CS not
shared
F : SREN=0:
"H" output
SREN=1 :
Output Hi-Z
Output Hi-Z
P : General-purpose port selected, F : Specified function selected
* : The following port's function can be used on only MB91302A and MB91V301A; SDA0, SCL0, SDA1, SCL1 of
68 to 71 pin, ICU0 to ICU3, FRCK of 81 to 85 pin.
Note : The bus width is determined after a mode vector fetch.
The bus width at initialization time is 8 bits.
561
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-4 Pin States in Single Chip Mode (1 / 2)
At initialization (INIT)
Pin no.
Specified
Port name
function name
Function
name
Initial value
Bus width
8 bits
Internal ROM
mode vector
(MD2-0=000)
Stop mode
Sleep mode
HIZ=0
1 to 5
P13 to P17
-
P13 to P17
8 to 15
P20 to P27
-
P20 to P27
Previous state
held
Previous state held
18 to 25
-
-
-
Output Hi-Z
Output Hi-Z
Previous state
held
Previous state held
28
P80
-
P80
29
P81
-
P81
30
P82
-
P82
31
P83
-
P83
32
P84
-
P84
33
P85
-
P85
34
P86
-
P86
35
P87
-
P87
36
P90
-
P90
37
P91
-
P91
38
P92
-
P92
39
P93
-
P93
40
P94
SRAS
P94
41
P95
SCAS/BAA
P95
42
P96
SWE/WR
P96
45 to 52
P40 to P47
-
P40 to P47
55 to 62
P50 to P57
-
P50 to P57
64 to 67
P60 to P63
-
P60 to P63
68
P64
SDA0*
P64
69
P65
SCL0*
P65
70
P66
SDA1*
P66
71
P67
SCL1*
P67
76 to 79
-
AN0 to AN3
AN0 to AN3
562
Output
Hi-Z/
Output Hi-Z/
Input ready
Input invalid
HIZ=1
input 0 fixed
Output Hi-Z
Output Hi-Z
Previous state
held
Previous state held
Input invalid
Input invalid
APPENDIX C PIN STATE IN EACH CPU STATE
Table C-4 Pin States in Single Chip Mode (2 / 2)
At initialization (INIT)
Pin no.
Specified
Port name
function name
Function
name
Initial value
Bus width
8 bits
Internal ROM
mode vector
(MD2-0=000)
81
PG0
INT0/ICU0*
PG0
82
PG1
INT1/ICU1*
PG1
83
PG2
INT2/ICU2*
PG2
84
PG3
INT3/ICU3*
PG3
85
PG4
INT4/ATG/FRCK*
PG4
86
PG5
INT5/SIN2
PG5
87
PG6
INT6/SOT2
PG6
88
PG7
INT7/SCK2
PG7
90
PJ0
SIN0
PJ0
PJ1
91
PJ1
SOT0
92
PJ2
SCK0
PJ2
93
PJ3
SIN1
PJ3
94
PJ4
SOT1
PJ4
95
PJ5
SCK1
PJ5
96
PJ6
PPG0
PJ6
97
PJ7
TRG0
PJ7
98
PH0
TIN0
PH0
99
PH1
TIN1/PPG3
PH1
100
PH2
TIN2/TRG3
PH2
103
PB0
-
PB0
104
PB1
-
PB1
105
PB2
-
PB2
106
PB3
-
PB3
107
PB4
TRG1
PB4
108
PB5
PPG1
PB5
109
PB6
-
PB6
110
PB7
-
PB7
122
PA0
-
PA0
123
PA1
-
PA1
124
PA2
-
PA2
125
PA3
-
PA3
126
PA4
TRG2
PA4
127
PA5
PPG2
PA5
128
PA6
-
PA6
129
PA7
-
PA7
132 to 139
P00 to P07
-
P00 to P07
142 to 144
P10 to P12
-
P10 to P12
Stop mode
Sleep mode
HIZ=0
P : Previous state
held
F : Input ready
Output Hi-Z/
Input ready
HIZ=1
P : Output Hi-Z
F : Input ready
Previous state
held
Previous state held
Output Hi-Z/
input 0 fixed
P : General-purpose port selected, F : Specified function selected
* : The following port’s function can be used on only MB91302A and MB91V301A; SDA0, SCL0, SDA1, SCL1 of
68 to 71 pin, ICU0 to ICU3, FRCK of 81 to 85 pin.
Note : The bus width is determined after a mode vector fetch.
The bus width at initialization time is 8 bits.
563
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
APPENDIX D
NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
This section provides notes on the use of a little endian area classified with the
following items:
D.1 C Compiler (fcc911)
D.2 Assembler (fasm911)
D.3 Linker (flnk911)
D.4 Debugger (sim911, eml911, mon911)
564
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
D.1
C Compiler (fcc911)
Note that when programming is done in the C language, behavior cannot be
guaranteed if the following operations are performed for a little endian area:
• Allocation of a variable with an initial value
• Structure assignment
• Operations other than string arrangement using a string manipulation function
• Specification of the -K lib option when a string manipulation function is used
• Use of the double type or long double type
• Allocation of a stack to a little endian area
■ Allocation of a Variable with an Initial Value
Allocation of a variable with an initial value to a little endian area is not allowed.
No compiler has a function that generates the initial value of a little endian area. Although it is
possible to allocate a variable to a little endian area, an initial value cannot be set.
Include processing at the beginning of a program that sets an initial value.
[Example] Setting an initial value for the variable little_data in a little endian area
extern int little_data;
void little_init(void){
little_data = Initial value;
}
void main(void)
little_init();
...
}
■ Structure Assignment
When a structure is assigned to another structure, the compiler selects the optimum transfer
method (byte, halfword, or word). Thus, if structure assignment is performed between a
structure variable allocated to an ordinary area and a structure variable allocated to a little
endian area, a correct result cannot be obtained.
It is therefore necessary to assign each member in the structure.
565
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
[Example] Assigning a structure to the structure variable little_st in a little endian area
struct tag { char c; int i; } normal_st;
extern struct tag little_st;
#define
STRMOVE(DEST,SRC) DEST.c=SRC.c;DEST.i=SRC.i;
void main(void) {
STRMOVE(little_st,normal_st);
}
Since the allocation of the members of a structure is different from compiler to compiler, the
allocation of members by one compiler will be different from the allocation by another compiler.
If the allocation method is different, it is not possible to obtain the correct result even the method
described above is used.
If the allocation of members of a structure varies, do not allocate any structure variable to a little
endian area.
■ Operations other than the String Arrangement Using a String Manipulation Function
Since string manipulation functions provided as a standard library perform their processing in
bytes, correct results cannot be obtained if processing using a string manipulation function is
performed in an area with a type other than the char type, unsigned char type, or signed char
type allocated within a little endian area.
Do not perform processing such as that described above.
[Example of incorrect coding] Transfer of word data using memcpy
int big = 0X01020304;
/* Big endian area
*/
extern int little;
/* Little endian area
*/
memcpy(&little,&big,4); /* Transfer using memcpy */
The result of the above code is shown below, and, as the result of transferring word data, is an
error.
(Big endian area)
01
02
03
04
(Little endian area)
memcpy
(Correct result)
566
01
02
03
04
04
03 02
01
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
■ Specification of the -K lib Option When Using a String Manipulation Function
If the -K lib option is specified, the compiler performs inline expansion for some of the string
manipulation functions. At this point, processing may be changed to processing using halfwords
or words as a way to select the optimum processing.
If processing is changed in this manner, processing on a little endian area will not be performed
correctly.
Do not specify the -K lib option when performing processing for a little endian area that uses a
string manipulation function.
Also, do not specify the -O4 option and -K speed option, each of which includes the -K lib
option.
■ Use of the Double Type or Long Double Type
Access to double type or long double type data is performed by accessing one high-order word
or one low-order word. Thus, when a double type or long double type variable allocated to a
little endian area is accessed, correct results cannot be obtained.
The assignment of variables of the same type allocated to a little endian area can be done, but
as a result of optimization, the assignment of variables may be replaced by the assignment of
constants.
Do not allocate double type and long double type variables to a little endian area.
[Example of incorrect coding] Transfer of data of the double type
double big = 1.0; /* Big endian area
*/
extern int little; /* Little endian area
*/
little = big;;
/* Transfer of double type data */
The result of the above code is shown below, and as the result of transferring double type data,
is an error.
(Big endian area)
3f
f0
00
00
00
00
(Little endian area)
00
00
(Correct result)
00 00
f0
3f
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
f0
3f
00
■ Allocation of a Stack to a Little Endian Area
If some or all of the stacks are allocated to a little endian area, behavior cannot be guaranteed.
567
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
D.2
Assembler (fasm911)
The following items regarding little endian areas need to be noted when the FR family
assembly language is used for programming:
• Section
• Data access
■ Section
A little endian area is primarily intended to be used for data exchange with CPUs with little
endian lines. Consequently, define a little endian area as a data section without an initial value.
If a code, stack, or data section with an initial value is specified in a little endian area, the
MB91301 series access operation cannot be guaranteed.
[Example]
/* Section definition of a correct little endian area */
.SECTION Little_Area, DATA, ALIGN=4
568
Little_Word:
.RES.W
1
Little_Half:
.RES.H
1
Little_Byte:
.RES.B
1
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
■ Data Access
When data in a little endian area is accessed, the data values can be coded without awareness
of the endian method used. However, access to data in a little endian area must be performed
using the same size as the data size.
[Example]
LDI
LDI
#0X01020304, r0
#Little_Word, r1
LDI
LDI
#0X0102, r2
#Little_Half, r3
LDI
LDI
#0X01, r4
#Little_Byte, r5
/* Access 32-bit data using the ST instruction (or the LD instruction). */
ST
r0, @r1
/* Access 16-bit data using the STH instruction (or the LDH instruction). */
STH
r2, @r3
/* Access 8-bit data using the STB instruction (or the LDB instruction). */
STB
r4, @r5
If data is accessed with the MB91301 series using a size that is different from the data size, the
data values cannot be guaranteed. For example, if two consecutive 16-bit data items are
accessed using a 32-bit access instruction, the data value cannot be guaranteed.
569
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
D.3
Linker (flnk911)
The following items related to section allocation for linking need to be noted when a
program that uses a little endian area is used:
• Restriction on section types
• Lack of error detection
■ Restriction on Section Types
Only data sections without an initial value can be allocated to a little endian area.
If a data section with an initial value, stack section, or code section is allocated to a little endian
area, program operation cannot be guaranteed because arithmetic processing, such as an
address resolution, is performed internally by the linker using the big endian method.
■ Lack of Error Detection
Since the linker does not recognize little endian areas, the linker does not issue an error
message if allocation violating the above restriction is performed. Use the linker only after
carefully studying the sections that will be allocated to little endian areas.
570
APPENDIX D NOTES ON USING A LITTLE ENDIAN AREA
D.4
Debugger (sim911, eml911, mon911)
This section provides notes on using a simulator debugger or emulator debugger/
monitor debugger.
■ Simulator Debugger
There is no memory space specification command that can indicate a little endian area.
As a result, memory management commands and instructions executed to manage memory are
handled as if they were big endian.
■ Emulator Debugger/Monitor Debugger
Note that, if a little endian area is accessed using the following commands, the data values are
not handled as normal values:
❍ The set memory, show memory, enter, examine, and set watch commands
When floating-point (single or double) data is processed, the specified value is neither set nor
displayed.
❍ The search memory command
When halfword or word data is searched, the specified value is not used in the search.
❍ Line assembly and disassembly (including the disassembly display in the source window)
Normal instruction codes can neither be set nor displayed.
Do not allocate any instruction codes to a little endian area.
❍ The call and show call commands
If a stack area is placed in a little endian area, normal operation cannot be expected.
Do not allocate a stack area to a little endian area.
571
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
APPENDIX E
INSTRUCTION LISTS
This section provides lists of the FR family instructions.
E.1 How to Read the Instruction Lists
E.2 FR Family Instruction Lists
572
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
E.1
How to Read the Instruction Lists
Before the lists are presented, the following items are explained to make the lists
easier to understand:
• How to read the instruction lists
• Addressing mode symbols
• Instruction format
■ How to Read the Instruction Lists
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
Remarks
-
ADD
*ADD
Rj, Rj
#s5, Rj
,
,
A
C
,
,
AG
A4
,
,
1
1
,
,
CCCC
CCCC
,
,
Ri + Rj --> Rj
Ri + s5 --> Ri
,
,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1. Instruction name.
•
An asterisk (*) indicates an extended instruction that is not contained in the CPU
specifications and is obtained by extension of or addition to the assembler.
2. Symbols indicating addressing modes that can be specified for the operand.
•
For the meaning of symbols, see "Addressing Mode Symbols".
3. Instruction format.
4. Instruction code in hexadecimal notation.
5. Number of machine cycles.
•
a: Memory access cycle that may be extended by the Ready function.
•
b: Memory access cycle that may be extended by the Ready function. However, the cycle
is interlocked if a direct instruction references a register intended for an LD operation,
increasing the number of execution cycles by 1.
•
c: Interlocked if the direct instruction is an instruction that reads or writes to R15, SSP, or
USP, or an instruction in instruction format A. The number of execution cycles
increases by 1 and so it becomes 2.
•
d: Interlocked if the direct instruction references MDH/MDL. The number of execution
cycles increases to 2.
However, if "ST Rs,@R15" instruction accesses to special registers (TBR, RP, USP,
SSP,MDH, MDL) immediately after DIV1 instruction, the cycle always be interlocked
and the number of execution cycles increases to 2.
•
The minimum for a, b, c, and d is 1 cycle.
573
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
6. Indicates a flag change.
Flag change
C:
-:
0:
1:
Change
No change
Clear
Set
7. Instruction operation.
574
Flag meaning
N:
Z:
V:
C:
Negative flag
Zero flag
Overflow flag
Carry flag
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Addressing Mode Symbols
Table E.1-1 Explanation of Addressing Mode Symbols (1 / 2)
Symbol
Meaning
Ri
Register direct (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
Rj
Register direct (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
R13
Register direct (R13, AC)
Ps
Register direct (program status register)
Rs
Register direct (TBR, RP, SSP, USP, MDH, MDL)
CRi
Register direct (CR0 to CR15)
CRj
Register direct (CR0 to CR15)
#i8
Unsigned 8-bit immediate (-128 to 255)
Note: -128 to -1 is handled as 128 to 255.
#i20
Unsigned 20-bit immediate (-80000H to FFFFFH)
Note: -7FFFFH to -1 is handled as 7FFFFH to FFFFFH.
#i32
Unsigned 32-bit immediate (-80000000H to FFFFFFFFH)
Note: -80000000H to -1 is handled as 80000000H to FFFFFFFFH.
#s5
Signed 5-bit immediate (-16 to 15)
#s10
Signed 10-bit immediate (-512 to 508, multiples of 4 only)
#u4
Unsigned 4-bit immediate (0 to 15)
#u5
Unsigned 5-bit immediate (0 to 31)
#u8
Unsigned 8-bit immediate (0 to 255)
#u10
Unsigned 10-bit immediate (0 to 1020, multiples of 4 only)
@dir8
Unsigned 8-bit direct address (0H to FFH)
@dir9
Unsigned 9-bit direct address (0H to 1FEH, multiple of 2 only)
@dir10
Unsigned 10-bit direct address (0H to 3FCH, multiples of 4 only)
label9
Signed 9-bit branch address (-100H to FCH, multiples of 2 only)
label12
Signed 12-bit branch address (-800H to 7FCH, multiples of 2 only)
label20
Signed 20-bit branch address (-80000H to 7FFFFH)
label32
Signed 32-bit branch address (-80000000H to 7FFFFFFFH)
@Ri
Register indirect (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
@Rj
Register indirect (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
@(R13,Rj)
Register relative indirect (Rj: R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
@(R14,disp10)
Register relative indirect (disp10: -200H to 1FCH, multiples of 4 only)
@(R14,disp9)
Register relative indirect (disp9: -100H to FEH, multiples of 2 only)
575
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
Table E.1-1 Explanation of Addressing Mode Symbols (2 / 2)
Symbol
Meaning
@(R14,disp8)
Register relative indirect (disp8: -80H to 7FH)
@(R15,udisp6)
Register relative indirect (udisp6: 0 to 60, multiples of 4 only)
@Ri+
Register indirect with post-increment (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
@R13+
Register indirect with post-increment (R13, AC)
@SP+
Stack pop
@-SP
Stack push
(reglist)
Register list
576
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Instruction Format
Table E.1-2 Instruction Format
Type
Instruction format
MSB
LSB
16 bits
A
B
OP
Rj
Ri
8
4
4
OP
i8/o8
Ri
4
8
4
C
OP
u4/m4
Ri
8
4
4
ADD, ADDN, CMP, LSL, LSR, ASR instructions only
*C’
D
OP
s5/u5
Ri
7
5
4
OP
u8/rel8/dir/
reglist
8
8
E
F
OP
SUB-OP
Ri
8
4
4
OP
rel11
5
11
577
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
E.2
FR Family Instruction Lists
The FR family instruction lists are presented in the order listed below.
■ FR Family Instruction Lists
Table E.2-1
"Add-Subtract Instructions"
Table E.2-2
"Compare Instructions"
Table E.2-3
"Logic Instructions"
Table E.2-4
"Bit Manipulation Instructions"
Table E.2-5
"Multiply Instructions"
Table E.2-6
"Shift Instructions"
Table E.2-7
"Immediate Set/16-bit/32-bit Immediate Transfer Instructions"
Table E.2-8
"Memory Load Instructions"
Table E.2-9
"Memory Store Instructions"
Table E.2-10 "Register-to-Register Transfer Instructions"
Table E.2-11 "Normal Branch (No Delay) Instructions"
Table E.2-12 "Delayed Branch Instructions"
Table E.2-13 "Other Instructions"
Table E.2-14 "20-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions"
Table E.2-15 "20-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions"
Table E.2-16 "32-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions"
Table E.2-17 "32-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions"
Table E.2-18 "Direct Addressing Instructions"
Table E.2-19 "Resource Instructions"
Table E.2-20 "Coprocessor Control Instructions"
578
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Add-Subtract Instructions
Table E.2-1 Add-Subtract Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Rj, Ri
A
A6
1
CCCC
Ri + Rj --> Ri
*ADD #s5, Ri
C’
A4
1
CCCC
Ri + s5 --> Ri
The assembler treats the
highest-order bit as the sign.
ADD
#u4, Ri
C
A4
1
CCCC
Ri + extu(i4) --> Ri
Zero extension
ADD2 #u4, Ri
C
A5
1
CCCC
Ri + extu(i4) --> Ri
Minus extension
ADDC Rj, Ri
A
A7
1
CCCC
Ri + Rj + c --> Ri
Addition with carry
ADDN Rj, Ri
A
A2
1
----
Ri + Rj --> Ri
*ADDN #s5, Ri
C’
A0
1
----
Ri + s5 --> Ri
The assembler treats the
highest-order bit as the sign.
ADDN #u4, Ri
C
A0
1
----
Ri + extu(i4) --> Ri
Zero extension
ADDN2 #u4, Ri
C
A1
1
----
Ri + extu(i4) --> Ri
Minus extension
SUB
Rj, Ri
A
AC
1
CCCC
Ri - Rj --> Ri
SUBC Rj, Ri
A
AD
1
CCCC
Ri - Rj - c --> Ri
SUBN Rj, Ri
A
AE
1
----
ADD
Operation
Remarks
Addition with carry
Ri - Rj --> Ri
■ Compare Instructions
Table E.2-2 Compare Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Rj, Ri
A
AA
1
CCCC
Ri - Rj
*CMP #s5, Ri
C’
A8
1
CCCC
Ri - s5
The assembler treats the
highest-order bit as the sign.
CMP
#u4, Ri
C
A8
1
CCCC
Ri - extu(i4)
Zero extension
CMP2 #u4, Ri
C
A9
1
CCCC
Ri - extu(i4)
Minus extension
CMP
Operation
Remarks
579
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Logic Instructions
Table E.2-3 Logic Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
AND
Rj, Ri
A
82
1
CC--
Ri
AND
Rj, @Ri*
A
84
1+2a
CC--
ANDH Rj, @Ri*
A
85
1+2a
ANDB Rj, @Ri*
A
86
OR
Rj, Ri
A
OR
Rj, @Ri*
&= Rj
RMV
Remarks
-
Word
(Ri) &= Rj
❍
Word
CC--
(Ri) &= Rj
❍
Halfword
1+2a
CC--
(Ri) &= Rj
❍
Byte
92
1
CC--
Ri
-
Word
A
94
1+2a
CC--
(Ri) | = Rj
❍
Word
ORH Rj, @Ri*
A
95
1+2a
CC--
(Ri) | = Rj
❍
Halfword
ORB Rj, @Ri*
A
96
1+2a
CC--
(Ri) | = Rj
❍
Byte
EOR
Rj, Ri
A
9A
1
CC--
Ri
-
Word
EOR
Rj, @Ri*
A
9C
1+2a
CC--
(Ri) ^ = Rj
❍
Word
EORH Rj, @Ri*
A
9D
1+2a
CC--
(Ri) ^ = Rj
❍
Halfword
EORB Rj, @Ri*
A
9E
1+2a
CC--
(Ri) ^ = Rj
❍
Byte
| = Rj
^ = Rj
*: To code these instructions in the assembler, set Rj to a general-purpose register other than R15.
580
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Bit Manipulation Instructions
Table E.2-4 Bit Manipulation Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
#u4, @Ri
C
80
1+2a
----
BANDH #u4, @Ri
C
81
1+2a
BANDL
Operation
RMV
Remarks
(Ri)&=(0xF0+u4)
❍
Low-order 4 bits are
manipulated.
----
(Ri)&=((u4<<4)+0x0F)
❍
High-order 4 bits
are manipulated.
----
(Ri)&=u8
-
BAND
#u8, @Ri*1
BORL
#u4, @Ri
C
90
1+2a
----
(Ri) | = u4
❍
Low-order 4 bits are
manipulated.
BORLH #u4, @Ri
C
91
1+2a
----
(Ri) | = (u4<<4)
❍
High-order 4 bits
are manipulated.
----
(Ri) | = u8
-
BOR
#u8, @Ri*2
BEORL #u4, @Ri
C
98
1+2a
----
(Ri) ^ = u4
❍
Low-order 4 bits are
manipulated.
BEORH #u4, @Ri
C
99
1+2a
----
(Ri) ^ = (u4<<4)
❍
High-order 4 bits
are manipulated.
----
(Ri) ^ = u8
-
BEOR #u8, @Ri*3
BTSTL #u4, @Ri
C
88
2+a
0C--
(Ri) & u4
-
Low-order 4 bits are
tested.
BTSTH #u4, @Ri
C
89
2+a
CC--
(Ri) & (u4<<4)
-
High-order 4 bits
are tested.
*1: The assembler generates BANDL if the bit is set at u8&0FH, and BANDH if the bit is set at u8&F0H.
In some cases, both BANDL and BANDH may be generated.
*2: The assembler generates BORL if the bit is set at u8&0FH, and BORH if the bit is set at u8&F0H.
In some cases, both BORL and BORH are generated.
*3: The assembler generates BEORL if the bit is set at u8&0FH, and BEORH if the bit is set at u8&F0H.
In some cases, both BEORL and BEORH are generated.
581
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Multiply Instructions
Table E.2-5 Multiply Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
Remarks
MUL
Rj,Ri
A
AF
5
CCC-
Ri × Rj --> MDH,MDL
32bits × 32bits=64bits
MULU
Rj,Ri
A
AB
5
CCC-
Ri × Rj --> MDH,MDL
No sign
MULH
Rj,Ri
A
BF
3
CC--
Ri × Rj --> MDL
16bits × 16bits=32bits
MULUH Rj,Ri
A
BB
3
CC--
Ri × Rj --> MDL
No sign
DIV0S
Ri
E
97-4
1
----
Step operation
DIV0U
Ri
E
97-5
1
----
32bits/32bits=32bits
DIV1
Ri
E
97-6
d
-C-C
DIV2
Ri
E
97-7
1
-C-C
DIV3
E
9F-6
1
----
DIV4S
E
9F-7
1
----
DIV
Ri*1
36
-C-C
MDL / Ri --> MDL,
MDL % Ri --> MDH
DIVU
Ri*2
33
-C-C
MDL / Ri --> MDL,
MDL % Ri --> MDH
*1: DIV0S, DIV1 x 32, DIV2, DIV3, or DIV4S is generated. The instruction code length becomes 72 bytes.
*2: DIV0U or DIV1 x 32 is generated. The instruction code length becomes 66 bytes.
582
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Shift Instructions
Table E.2-6 Shift Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
LSL Rj, Ri
A
B6
1
CC-C
Ri << Rj --> Ri
LSL #u5, Ri (u5:0 to 31)
C'
B4
1
CC-C
Ri << u5 --> Ri
LSL #u4, Ri
C
B4
1
CC-C
Ri << u4 --> Ri
LSL2 #u4, Ri
C
B5
1
CC-C
Ri <<(u4+16) --> Ri
LSR Rj, Ri
A
B2
1
CC-C
Ri >> Rj --> Ri
LSR #u5, Ri (u5:0 to 31)
C'
B0
1
CC-C
Ri >> u5 --> Ri
LSR #u4, Ri
C
B0
1
CC-C
Ri >> u4 --> Ri
LSR2 #u4, Ri
C
B1
1
CC-C
Ri >>(u4+16) --> Ri
ASR Rj, Ri
A
BA
1
CC-C
Ri >> Rj --> Ri
ASR #u5, Ri (u5:0 to 31)
C'
B8
1
CC-C
Ri >> u5 --> Ri
ASR #u4, Ri
C
B8
1
CC-C
Ri >> u4 --> Ri
ASR2 #u4, Ri
C
B9
1
CC-C
Ri >>(u4+16) --> Ri
Remarks
Logical shift
Logical shift
Arithmetic shift
■ Immediate Set/16-bit/32-bit Immediate Transfer Instructions
Table E.2-7 Immediate Set/16-bit/32-bit Immediate Transfer Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
LDI:32 #i32, Ri
E
9F-8
3
----
i32 --> Ri
LDI:20 #i20, Ri
C
9B
2
----
i20 --> Ri
High-order 12 bits
are zero-extended.
LDI:8
B
C0
1
----
i8 --> Ri
High-order 24 bits
are zeroextended.
#i8, Ri
*LDI # {i8 | i20 | i32} ,Ri*
Operation
Remarks
{i8 | i20 | i32} --> Ri
*: If the immediate data is represented as absolute values, the assembler selects automatically from i8, i20,
and i32.
If immediate data contains a relative value or external reference symbol, i32 is selected.
583
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Memory Load Instructions
Table E.2-8 Memory Load Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
Remarks
LD
@Rj, Ri
A
04
b
----
(Rj) --> Ri
LD
@(R13,Rj), Ri
A
00
b
----
(R13+Rj) --> Ri
LD
@(R14,disp10), Ri
B
20
b
----
(R14+disp10) --> Ri
LD
@(R15,udisp6), Ri
C
03
b
----
(R15+udisp6) --> Ri
LD
@R15+, Ri
E
07-0
b
----
(R15) --> Ri,R15+=4
LD
@R15+, Rs
E
07-8
b
----
(R15) --> Rs, R15+=4
LD
@R15+, PS
E
07-9
1+a+b
CCCC
(R15) --> PS, R15+=4
LDUH @Rj, Ri
A
05
b
----
(Rj) -->Ri
Zero extension
LDUH @(R13,Rj), Ri
A
01
b
----
(R13+Rj) -->Ri
Zero extension
LDUH @(R14,disp9), Ri
B
40
b
----
(R14+disp9) -->Ri
Zero extension
LDUB @Rj, Ri
A
06
b
----
(Rj) -->Ri
Zero extension
LDUB @(R13,Rj), Ri
A
02
b
----
(R13+Rj) -->Ri
Zero extension
LDUB @(R14,disp8), Ri
B
60
b
----
(R14+disp8) -->Ri
Zero extension
Rs: Special register*
*: Special register Rs: TBR, RP, USP, SSP, MDH, and MDL
Note:
In the o8 and o4 fields of the hardware specifications, the assembler calculates values and sets
them as shown below:
disp10/4 --> o8, disp9/2 --> o8, disp8 --> o8; disp10, disp9, and disp8 have a sign.
udisp6/4 --> o4; udisp6 has no sign.
584
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Memory Store Instructions
Table E.2-9 Memory Store Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
Remarks
ST
Ri, @Rj
A
14
a
----
Ri --> (Rj)
Word
ST
Ri, @(R13,Rj)
A
10
a
----
Ri --> (R13+Rj)
Word
ST
Ri, @(R14,disp10)
B
30
a
----
Ri --> (R14+disp10)
Word
ST
Ri, @(R15,udisp6)
C
13
a
----
Ri --> (R15+udisp6)
ST
Ri, @-R15
E
17-0
a
----
R15-=4,Ri --> (R15)
ST
Rs, @-R15
E
17-8
a
----
R15-=4, Rs --> (R15)
ST
PS, @-R15
E
17-9
a
----
R15-=4, PS --> (R15)
Rs: Special register*
STH
Ri, @Rj
A
15
a
----
Ri --> (Rj)
Halfword
STH
Ri, @(R13,Rj)
A
11
a
----
Ri --> (R13+Rj)
Halfword
STH
Ri, @(R14,disp9)
B
50
a
----
Ri --> (R14+disp9)
Halfword
STB
Ri, @Rj
A
16
a
----
Ri --> (Rj)
Byte
STB
Ri, @(R13,Rj)
A
12
a
----
Ri --> (R13+Rj)
Byte
STB
Ri, @(R14,disp8)
B
70
a
----
Ri --> (R14+disp8)
Byte
*: Special register Rs: TBR, RP, USP, SSP, MDH, and MDL
Note:
In the o8 and o4 fields of the hardware specifications, the assembler calculates values and sets
them as shown below:
disp10/4 --> o8, disp9/2 --> o8, disp8 --> o8; disp10, disp9, and disp8 have a sign.
udisp6/4 --> o4; udisp6 has no sign.
■ Register-to-Register Transfer Instructions
Table E.2-10 Register-to-Register Transfer Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
Remarks
MOV Rj, Ri
A
8B
1
----
Rj --> Ri
Transfer between generalpurpose registers
MOV Rs, Ri
A
B7
1
----
Rs --> Ri
Rs: Special register *
MOV Ri, Rs
E
B3
1
----
Ri --> Rs
Rs: Special register *
MOV PS, Ri
E
17-1
1
----
PS --> Ri
MOV Ri, PS
E
07-1
c
CCCC
Ri --> PS
*: Special register Rs: TBR, RP, USP, SSP, MDH, and MDL
585
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Normal Branch (No Delay) Instructions
Table E.2-11 Normal Branch (No Delay) Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
E
97-0
2
----
Ri --> PC
CALL label12
F
D0
2
----
PC+2-->RP ,
PC+2+(label12-PC-2)-->PC
CALL @Ri
E
97-1
2
----
PC+2-->RP ,Ri-->PC
RET
E
97-2
2
----
RP --> PC
D
AC
3+3a
----
SSP-=4,PS --> (SSP),
SSP-=4,PC+2 --> (SSP),
0--> I flag,0 --> S flag,
(TBR+0x3FC-u8x4) --> PC
INTE
E
9F-3
3+3a
----
SSP-=4,PS --> (SSP),
SSP-=4,PC+2 --> (SSP),
0 --> S flag,
(TBR+0x3D8) -->PC
RETI
E
97-3
2+2A
CCCC
JMP
INT
@Ri
#u8
Operation
(R15) --> PC,R15-=4,
(R15) --> PS,R15-=4
BRA
label9
D
E0
2
----
PC+2+(label9-PC-2) -->PC
BNO
label9
D
E1
1
----
No branch
BEQ
label9
D
E2
2/1
----
if(Z==1) then
PC+2+(label9-PC-2) -->PC
BNE
label9
D
E3
2/1
----
s/Z==0
BC
label9
D
E4
2/1
----
s/C==1
BNC
label9
D
E5
2/1
----
s/C==0
BN
label9
D
E6
2/1
----
s/N==1
BP
label9
D
E7
2/1
----
s/N==0
BV
label9
D
E8
2/1
----
s/V==1
BNV
label9
D
E9
2/1
----
s/V==0
BLT
label9
D
EA
2/1
----
s/V xor N==1
BGE
label9
D
EB
2/1
----
s/V xor N==0
BLE
label9
D
EC
2/1
----
s/(V xor N) or Z==1
BGT
label9
D
ED
2/1
----
s/(V xor N) or Z==0
BLS
label9
D
EE
2/1
----
s/C or Z==1
BHI
label9
D
EF
2/1
----
s/C or Z==0
586
Remarks
Return
For emulator
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
Notes:
• "2/1" under CYCLE indicates 2 when branching occurs and 1 when branching does not occur.
• In the rel11 and rel8 fields of the hardware specifications, the assembler calculates values and
sets them as shown below:
(label12-PC-2)/2 --> rel11, (label9-PC-2)/2 --> rel8; label12 and label9 have a sign.
• To execute the RETI instruction, the S flag must be 0.
587
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Delayed Branch Instructions
Table E.2-12 Delayed Branch Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
E
9F-0
1
----
Ri --> PC
CALL:D label12
F
D8
1
----
PC+4 --> RP ,
PC+2+(label12-PC-2) --> PC
CALL:D @Ri
E
9F-1
1
----
PC+4 --> RP ,Ri --> PC
RET:D
E
9F-2
1
----
RP --> PC
JMP:D
@Ri
Operation
BRA:D
label9
D
F0
1
----
PC+2+(label9-PC-2) -->PC
BNO:D
label9
D
F1
1
----
No branch
BEQ:D
label9
D
F2
1
----
if(Z==1) then
PC+2+(label9-PC-2) -->PC
BNE:D
label9
D
F3
1
----
s/Z==0
BC:D
label9
D
F4
1
----
s/C==1
BNC:D
label9
D
F5
1
----
s/C==0
BN:D
label9
D
F6
1
----
s/N==1
BP:D
label9
D
F7
1
----
s/N==0
BV:D
label9
D
F8
1
----
s/V==1
BNV:D
label9
D
F9
1
----
s/V==0
BLT:D
label9
D
FA
1
----
s/V xor N==1
BGE:D
label9
D
FB
1
----
s/V xor N==0
BLE:D
label9
D
FC
1
----
s/(V xor N) or Z==1
BGT:D
label9
D
FD
1
----
s/(V xor N) or Z==0
BLS:D
label9
D
FE
1
----
s/C or Z==1
BHI:D
label9
D
FF
1
----
s/C or Z==0
Remarks
Return
Notes:
• In the rel11 and rel8 fields of the hardware specifications, the assembler calculates values and
sets them as shown below:
(label12-PC-2)/2 --> rel11, (label9-PC-2)/2 --> rel8; label12 and label9 have a sign.
• A delayed branch always occurs after the next instruction (delay slot) is executed.
• Instructions that can be placed in the delay slot are all 1-cycle, a-, b-, c-, and d-cycle
instructions.
Multicycle instructions cannot be placed in the delay slot.
588
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Other Instructions
Table E.2-13 Other Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
NOP
E
9F-A
1
----
ANDCCR #u8
D
83
c
ORCCR
#u8
D
93
STILM
#u8
D
ADDSP #s10
Operation
RMV
Remarks
No change
-
CCCC
CCR and u8 --> CCR
-
c
CCCC
CCR or u8 --> CCR
-
87
1
----
i8 --> ILM
-
ILM immediate set
D
A3
1
----
R15 += s10
-
ADD SP instruction
EXTSB Ri
E
97-8
1
----
Sign extension 8 --> 32bit
-
EXTUB Ri
E
97-9
1
----
Zero extension 8 --> 32bit
-
EXTSH Ri
E
97-A
1
----
Sign extension 16 --> 32bit
-
EXTUH Ri
E
97-B
1
----
Zero extension 16 --> 32bit
-
LDM0
(reglist)
D
8C
----
(R15) --> reglist,
R15 increment
-
Load multi R0-R7
LDM1
(reglist)
D
8D
----
(R15) --> reglist,
R15 increment
-
Load multi R8-R15
LDM
(reglist)*2
----
(R15) --> reglist,
R15 increment
-
Load multi R0-R15
STM0
(reglist)
D
8E
----
R15 decrement,
reglist --> (R15)
-
Store multi R0-R7
STM1
(reglist)
D
8F
----
R15 decrement,
reglist --> (R15)
-
Store multi R8-R15
STM
(reglist)*3
----
R15 decrement,
reglist --> (R15)
-
Store multi R0-R15
*1
ENTER #u10*4
D
0F
1+a
----
R14 --> (R15 - 4),
R15 - 4 --> R14,
R15 - u10 --> R15
-
Entry processing of a function
LEAVE
E
9F-9
b
----
R14 + 4 --> R15,
(R15 - 4) --> R14
-
Exit processing of a function
A
8A
2a
----
Ri --> TEMP
(Rj) --> Ri
TEMP --> (Rj)
❍
For semaphore management
Byte data
XCHB
@Rj, Ri*5
*1: For s10, the assembler calculates s10/4 and then changes to s8 to set a value. s10 has a sign.
*2: If any of R0 to R7 is specified in reglist, LDM0 is generated. If any of R8 to R15 is generated, LDM1 is generated. In
some cases, both LDM0 and LDM1 are generated.
*3: If any of R0 to R7 is specified in reglist, STM0 is generated. If any of R8 to R15 is generated, STM1 is generated. In
some cases, both STM0 and STM1 are generated.
*4: For u10, the assembler calculates u10/4 and then changes to u8 to set a value. u10 has a sign.
*5: To code this instruction in the assembler, set Ri to a general-purpose register other than R15.
589
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
Notes:
• The number of execution cycles of LDM0(reglist) and LDM1(reglist) can be calculated as a*(n1)+b+1 cycles if the number of specified registers is n.
• The number of execution cycles of STM0(reglist) and STM1(reglist) can be calculated as a*n+1
cycles if the number of specified registers is n.
590
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ 20-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions
Table E.2-14 20-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions
Mnemonic
Operation
Remarks
*CALL20 label20,Ri
Address of the next instruction --> RP,
label20 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 1)
*BRA20
label20,Ri
label20 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 2)
*BEQ20
label20,Ri
if(Z==1) then label20 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 3)
*BNE20
label20,Ri
s/Z==0
*BC20
label20,Ri
s/C==1
*BNC20
label20,Ri
s/C==0
*BN20
label20,Ri
s/N==1
*BP20
label20,Ri
s/N==0
*BV20
label20,Ri
s/V==1
*BNV20
label20,Ri
s/V==0
*BLT20
label20,Ri
s/V xor N==1
*BGE20
label20,Ri
s/V xor N==0
*BLE20
label20,Ri
s/(V xor N) or Z==1
*BGT20
label20,Ri
s/(V xor N) or Z==0
*BLS20
label20,Ri
s/C or Z==1
*BHI20
label20,Ri
s/C or Z==0
[Reference 1] CALL20
1) If label20-PC-2 is between -800H and +7FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
CALL label12
2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction
as shown below:
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
CALL @Ri
[Reference 2] BRA20
1) If label20-PC-2 is between -100H and +FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
BRA label9
2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction
as shown below:
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
JMP @Ri
[Reference 3] Bcc20
1) If label20-PC-2 is between -100H and +FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
Bcc label9
2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction
as shown below:
Bxcc false
xcc is the opposite condition of cc.
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
JMP @Ri
false:
591
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ 20-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions
Table E.2-15 20-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions
Mnemonic
Operation
Remarks
*CALL20:D label20,Ri
Address of the next instruction + 2 --> RP,
label20 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 1)
*BRA20:D
label20,Ri
label20 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 2)
*BEQ20:D
label20,Ri
if(Z==1) then label20 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 3)
*BNE20:D
label20,Ri
s/Z==0
*BC20:D
label20,Ri
s/C==1
*BNC20:D
label20,Ri
s/C==0
*BN20:D
label20,Ri
s/N==1
*BP20:D
label20,Ri
s/N==0
*BV20:D
label20,Ri
s/V==1
*BNV20:D
label20,Ri
s/V==0
*BLT20:D
label20,Ri
s/V xor N==1
*BGE20:D
label20,Ri
s/V xor N==0
*BLE20:D
label20,Ri
s/(V xor N) or Z==1
*BGT20:D
label20,Ri
s/(V xor N) or Z==0
*BLS20:D
label20,Ri
s/C or Z==1
*BHI20:D
label20,Ri
s/C or Z==0
[Reference 1] CALL20:D
1) If label20-PC-2 is between -800H and +7FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
CALL:D label12
2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction as
shown below:
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
CALL:D @Ri
[Reference 2] BRA20
1) If label20-PC-2 is between -100H and +FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
BRA :D label9
2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction as
shown below:
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
JMP:D @Ri
[Reference 3] Bcc20:D
1) If label20-PC-2 is between -100H and +FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
Bcc:D label9
2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction as
shown below:
Bxcc false
xcc is the opposite condition of cc.
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
JMP:D @Ri
false:
592
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ 32-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions
Table E.2-16 32-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions
Mnemonic
Operation
Remarks
*CALL32 label32,Ri
Address of the next instruction --> RP,
label32 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 1)
*BRA32
label32,Ri
label32 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 2)
*BEQ32
label32,Ri
if(Z==1) then label32 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 3)
*BNE32
label32,Ri
s/Z==0
*BC32
label32,Ri
s/C==1
*BNC32
label32,Ri
s/C==0
*BN32
label32,Ri
s/N==1
*BP32
label32,Ri
s/N==0
*BV32
label32,Ri
s/V==1
*BNV32
label32,Ri
s/V==0
*BLT32
label32,Ri
s/V xor N==1
*BGE32
label32,Ri
s/V xor N==0
*BLE32
label32,Ri
s/(V xor N) or Z==1
*BGT32
label32,Ri
s/(V xor N) or Z==0
*BLS32
label32,Ri
s/C or Z==1
*BHI32
label32,Ri
s/C or Z==0
[Reference 1] CALL32
1) If label32-PC-2 is between -800H and +7FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
CALL label12
2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction
as shown below:
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
CALL @Ri
[Reference 2] BRA32
1) If label32-PC-2 is between -100H and +FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
BRA label9
2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction
as shown below:
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
JMP @Ri
[Reference 3] Bcc32
1) If label32-PC-2 is between -100H and +FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
Bcc label9
2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction
as shown below:
Bxcc false
xcc is the opposite condition of cc.
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
JMP @Ri
false:
593
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ 32-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions
Table E.2-17 32-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions
Mnemonic
Operation
Remarks
*CALL32:D label32,Ri
Address of the next instruction + 2 --> RP,
label32 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 1)
*BRA32:D
label32,Ri
label32 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 2)
*BEQ32:D
label32,Ri
if(Z==1) then label32 --> PC
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 3)
*BNE32:D
label32,Ri
s/Z==0
*BC32:D
label32,Ri
s/C==1
*BNC32:D
label32,Ri
s/C==0
*BN32:D
label32,Ri
s/N==1
*BP32:D
label32,Ri
s/N==0
*BV32:D
label32,Ri
s/V==1
*BNV32:D
label32,Ri
s/V==0
*BLT32:D
label32,Ri
s/V xor N==1
*BGE32:D
label32,Ri
s/V xor N==0
*BLE32:D
label32,Ri
s/(V xor N) or Z==1
*BGT32:D
label32,Ri
s/(V xor N) or Z==0
*BLS32:D
label32,Ri
s/C or Z==1
*BHI32:D
label32,Ri
s/C or Z==0
[Reference 1] CALL32:D
1) If label32-PC-2 is between -800H and +7FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
CALL:D label12
2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction as
shown below:
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
CALL:D @Ri
[Reference 2] BRA32:D
1) If label32-PC-2 is between -100H and +FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
BRA:D label9
2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction as
shown below:
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
JMP:D @Ri
[Reference 3] Bcc32:D
1) If label32-PC-2 is between -100H and +FEH, create an instruction as shown below:
Bcc:D label9
2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range in 1) or contains an external reference symbol, create an instruction as
shown below:
Bxcc false
xcc is the opposite condition of cc.
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
JMP:D @Ri
false:
594
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Direct Addressing Instructions
Table E.2-18 Direct Addressing Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
DMOV @dir10, R13
D
08
b
----
(dir10) --> R13
Word
DMOV R13,
D
18
a
----
R13 --> (dir10)
Word
DMOV @dir10, @R13+
D
0C
2a
----
(dir10) --> (R13),R13+=4
Word
DMOV @R13+, @dir10
D
1C
2a
----
(R13) --> (dir10),R13+=4
Word
DMOV @dir10, @-R15
D
0B
2a
----
R15-=4,(R15) --> (dir10)
Word
DMOV @R15+, @dir10
D
1B
2a
----
(R15) --> (dir10),R15+=4
Word
DMOVH @dir9, R13
D
09
b
----
(dir9) --> R13
Halfword
DMOVH R13,
D
19
a
----
R13 --> (dir9)
Halfword
DMOVH @dir9, @R13+
D
0D
2a
----
(dir9) --> (R13),R13+=2
Halfword
DMOVH @R13+, @dir9
D
1D
2a
----
(R13) --> (dir9),R13+=2
Halfword
DMOVB @dir8, R13
D
0A
b
----
(dir8) --> R13
Byte
DMOVB R13,
D
1A
a
----
R13 --> (dir8)
Byte
DMOVB @dir8, @R13+
D
0E
2a
----
(dir8) --> (R13),R13++
Byte
DMOVB @R13+, @dir8
D
1E
2a
----
(R13) --> (dir8),R13++
Byte
@dir10
@dir9
@dir8
Operation
Remarks
Note:
In the dir8, dir9, and dir10 fields, the assembler calculates values and sets them as shown below:
dir8 --> dir, dir9/2 --> dir, dir10/4 --> dir; dir8, dir9, and dir10 have no sign.
■ Resource Instructions
Table E.2-19 Resource Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
Remarks
LDRES
@Ri+, #u4
C
BC
a
----
(Ri) --> u4 resource
Ri+=4
u4: Channel number
STRES
#u4, @Ri+
C
BD
a
----
u4 resource --> (Ri)
Ri+=4
u4: Channel number
Note:
These instructions cannot be used for the MB91301 series as it has no resource having a channel
number.
595
APPENDIX E INSTRUCTION LISTS
■ Coprocessor Control Instructions
Table E.2-20 Coprocessor Control Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
COPOP
#u4, #u8, CRj, CRi
E
9F-C
2+a
----
Operation instruction
COPLD
#u4, #u8, Rj, CRi
E
9F-D
1+2a
----
Rj --> CRi
COPST
#u4, #u8, CRj, Ri
E
9F-E
1+2a
----
CRj --> Ri
COPSV
#u4, #u8, CRj, Ri
E
9F-F
1+2a
----
CRj --> Ri
Remarks
No error trap
Notes:
• {CRi | CRj}:= CR0 | CR1 | CR2 | CR3 | CR4 | CR5 | CR6 | CR7 | CR8 | CR9 | CR10 | CR11 |
CR12 | CR13 |CR14 | CR15
u4:= Channel specified
u8:= Command specified
• Since the MB91301 series has no coprocessor, this instruction cannot be used.
596
INDEX
INDEX
The index follows on the next page.
This is listed in alphabetic order.
597
INDEX
Index
Numerics
A
0 Detection
0 Detection ...................................................... 447
0 Detection Data Register
0 Detection Data Register (BSD0) ..................... 445
1 Detection
1 Detection ...................................................... 447
1 Detection Data Register
1 Detection Data Register (BSD1) ..................... 445
10-bit Slave Address Mask Register
10-bit Slave Address Mask Register
(ITMK0/ITMK1)................................ 464
10-bit Slave Address Register
10-bit Slave Address Register
(ITBA0/ITBA1) .................................. 464
16-bit Free Run Timer
Block Diagram of the 16-bit Free Run Timer ...... 480
Registers of 16-bit Free Run Timer .................... 479
16-bit Input Capture
Operational Explanation.................................... 495
16-bit Reload Register
Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Reload Register
(TMRLR:TMRLR2 to TMRLR0 ) ........ 276
16-bit Reload Timer
16-bit Reload Timer Registers ........................... 271
Overview of the 16-bit Reload Timer ................. 270
Precautions on Using the 16-bit Reload Timer .... 280
When the 16-bit Reload Timer is Used for
Activation........................................... 304
16-bit Timer Register
Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Timer Register
(TMR:TMR2 to TMR0) ....................... 275
1M Byte Flash
Examples of Connection for 1M Byte Flash........ 511
2-Cycle Transfer
2-Cycle Transfer (External ->I/O) ...................... 248
2-Cycle Transfer (I/O ->External) ...................... 249
2-Cycle Transfer (I/O ->SDRAM/FCRAM)........ 250
2-Cycle Transfer (Internal RAM ->External I/O,
RAM) ................................................ 247
2-Cycle Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM ->I/O)........ 251
Demand Transfer 2-Cycle Transfer .................... 411
Flow of Data during 2-Cycle Transfer ................ 435
7-bit Slave Address Mask Register
7-bit Slave Address Mask Register
(ISMK0/ISMK1) ................................. 466
7-bit Slave Address Register
7-bit Slave Address Register (ISBA0/ISBA1) ..... 465
A/D Converter
A/D Converter (Sequential Conversion Type)......... 4
A/D Converter Registers................................... 348
Notes on Using the Internal DC-DC Regulator and
A/D Converter ...................................... 39
Precautions on Using the A/D Converter ............ 358
AC Characteristics
AC Characteristics of DMAC............................ 431
Access
Burst Access Operation .................................... 216
Byte Access..................................................... 199
Data Access....................................................... 72
External Bus Access......................................... 187
Halfword Access.............................................. 197
Program Access ................................................. 72
Word Access ................................................... 196
Access Addresses
Mode Data and Reset Vector Access
Addresses........................................... 531
ACR
Configuration of Area Configuration Registers 0 to 7
(ACR0 to ACR7) ................................ 152
ADCR
Conversion Result Register
(ADCR0 to ADCR3) ........................... 355
Data Register (ADCR) ..................................... 354
ADCS
Bit Configuration of Control Status Register
(ADCS) ............................................. 349
Detailed Bit of Control Status Register
(ADCS) ............................................. 349
Add
Add-Subtract Instructions ................................. 579
Address Error
Occurrence of an Address Error ........................ 424
Address Multiplexing Format
Address Multiplexing Format............................ 231
Address Register
Address Register Specifications ........................ 416
Features of the Address Register ....................... 416
Function of the Address Register ....................... 416
Addressing
Direct Addressing Area ...................................... 42
Addressing Mode
Addressing Mode Symbols ............................... 575
Architecture
Internal Architecture .......................................... 46
598
INDEX
Area Configuration Registers
Configuration of Area Configuration Registers 0 to 7
(ACR0 to ACR7) ................................ 152
Area Select Registers
Configuration of Area Select Registers 0 to 7
(ASR0 to ASR7) ................................. 150
Functions of Bits in the Area Select Registers
(ASR0 to ASR7) ................................. 151
Area Wait Registers
Configuration of the Area Wait Registers
(AWR0 to AWR7) .............................. 158
ASR
Configuration of Area Select Registers 0 to 7
(ASR0 to ASR7) ................................. 150
Functions of Bits in the Area Select Registers
(ASR0 to ASR7) ................................. 151
Auto-precharge OFF Mode
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRA for
SDRAM/FCRAM Auto-precharge OFF
Mode) ................................................ 167
Auto-precharge ON Mode
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRB for
FCRAM Auto-precharge ON Mode) ..... 169
Auto-refresh Operation
Auto-refresh Operation Timing ......................... 227
Auto-Wait Cycle Timing
Auto-Wait Cycle Timing .................................. 208
AWR
Configuration of the Area Wait Registers
(AWR0 to AWR7) .............................. 158
B
Base Clock Division Setting Register
Base Clock Division Setting Register 0
(DIVR0)............................................. 120
Base Clock Division Setting Register 1
(DIVR1)............................................. 123
Basic
Basic Timing (For Successive Accesses) ............ 203
Basic Block Diagram
Basic Block Diagram of the I/O Port.................. 258
Baud Rate
Calculation of Baud Rate .................................. 313
Baud Rates
Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload
Values................................................ 382
Big Endian
Differences between Little Endian and Big
Endian ............................................... 191
Bit Manipulation Instructions
Bit Manipulation Instructions ............................ 581
Bit Ordering
Bit Ordering ...................................................... 71
Bit Search Module
Bit Search Module ................................................4
Bit Search Module Registers..............................445
Block Diagram of the Bit Search Module............444
Block Diagram
Basic Block Diagram of the I/O Port ..................258
Block Diagram ............................7, 109, 146, 270,
308, 331, 347, 361, 385
Block Diagram (for 1 channel)...........................453
Block Diagram of One Channel of the PPG
Timer .................................................284
Block Diagram of the 16-bit Free Run Timer.......480
Block Diagram of the Bit Search Module............444
Block Diagram of the Delayed Interrupt
Module ...............................................326
Block Diagram of the Entire PPG Timer .............283
Block Diagram of the External Interrupt and NMI
Controller ...........................................316
Block Diagram of the Input Capture ...................492
Block Size
Block Size .......................................................414
Block Transfer
Block Transfer .................................................432
If Another Transfer Request Occurs during Block
Transfer ..............................................431
Branch
Normal Branch (No Delay) Instructions..............586
Branch Instruction
Limitations on Branch Instruction with Delay
Slot ......................................................77
Operation of Branch Instruction with Delay
Slot ......................................................75
Operation of Branch Instruction without Delay
Slot ......................................................78
Branch Instructions
Branch Instructions with Delay Slot .....................74
Branch Instructions without Delay Slot.................78
Delayed Branch Instructions ..............................588
Branch Macro Instructions
20-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions ..........592
20-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions ...........591
32-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions ..........594
32-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions ...........593
BSD0
0 Detection Data Register (BSD0)......................445
BSD1
1 Detection Data Register (BSD1)......................445
BSDC
Change Point Detection Data Register
(BSDC) ..............................................446
BSRR
Detection Result Register (BSRR)......................446
Built-in Memory
Built-in Memory...................................................3
599
INDEX
Built-in Peripheral Request
Built-in Peripheral Request ............................... 408
Burst Access
Burst Access Operation..................................... 216
Burst Read/Write Operation
Burst Read/Write Operation Timing................... 225
Burst Transfer
Burst Transfer .................................................. 433
Bus Control Register
Bus Control Register (IBCR0/IBCR1)................ 456
Bus Interface
Bus Interface........................................................ 3
Ordinary Bus Interface...................................... 202
Bus Modes
Bus Modes....................................................... 140
Bus Right
Releasing the Bus Right .................................... 252
Bus Status Register
Bus Status Register (IBSR0/IBSR1)................... 454
Bus Width
Data Bus Width........................................ 185, 193
Relationship between Data Bus Width and Control
Signal................................................. 182
Byte Access
Byte Access ..................................................... 199
Byte Ordering
Byte Ordering .................................................... 71
C
Cache Enable Register
Configuration of the Cache Enable Register
(CHER) .............................................. 174
Functions of Bits in the Cache Enable Register
(CHER) .............................................. 174
Cache Size Register
Configuration of Cache Size Register (ISIZE)....... 54
Cascade Mode
Cascade Mode.................................................. 314
Change Point Detection
Change Point Detection .................................... 448
Change Point Detection Data Register
Change Point Detection Data Register
(BSDC) .............................................. 446
Channel Group
Channel Group................................................. 427
CHER
Configuration of the Cache Enable Register
(CHER) .............................................. 174
Functions of Bits in the Cache Enable Register
(CHER) .............................................. 174
Chip Select Area
Example of Setting the Chip Select Area ............ 181
600
Chip Select Enable Register
Configuration of the Chip Select Enable Register
(CSER) .............................................. 172
Functions of Bits in the Chip Select Enable Register
(CSER) .............................................. 172
CLKB
CPU Clock (CLKB) ......................................... 106
CLKP
Peripheral Clock (CLKP).................................. 106
CLKR
Clock Source Control Register (CLKR) ............. 118
CLKT
External Bus Clock (CLKT).............................. 107
Clock
Clock Division................................................. 108
Clock Generation Control ................................. 103
CPU Clock (CLKB) ......................................... 106
External Bus Clock (CLKT).............................. 107
External Clock................................................... 32
Internal Clock Operation .................................. 277
Peripheral Clock (CLKP).................................. 106
Program Example of Smooth Startup and Stop of
Clock ................................................. 129
Selecting a Clock for the UART ........................ 373
Smooth Startup and Stop of Clock ..................... 128
Source Clock ................................................... 103
Clock Control Register
Clock Control Register (ICCR0/ICCR1) ............ 462
Clock Disable Register
Clock Disable Register (IDBL0/IDBL1) ............ 467
Clock Generation
Clock Generation Control ................................. 103
Clock Source Control Register
Clock Source Control Register (CLKR) ............. 118
Communication
End of Communication..................................... 376
Start of Communication.................................... 376
Compare Instructions
Compare Instructions ....................................... 579
Configurator
REALOS/FR Configurator Setup ...................... 523
Connection
An Example of Connection of External
Memory ............................................. 532
Example of Connection with External
Devices .............................................. 190
Examples of Connection for 1M Byte Flash ....... 511
Examples of Connection with External
Devices .............................................. 194
Continuous Conversion Mode
Continuous Conversion Mode ........................... 357
Control Status Register
Bit Configuration of Control Status Register
(ADCS) ............................................. 349
INDEX
Bit Configuration of the Control Status Register
(TMCSR) ........................................... 272
Bit Functions of the Control Status Register
(TMCSR) ........................................... 272
Detailed Bit of Control Status Register
(ADCS).............................................. 349
Control Status Registers
Bit Function of Control Status Registers
(PCNH,PCNL) ................................... 286
Control Status Registers (PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0,
PCNL:PCNL3 to PCNL0).................... 286
Control/Status Register
Bit Configuration of Control/Status Registers A
(DMACA0 to DMACA4) .................... 388
Bit Configuration of Control/Status Registers B
(DMACB0 to DMACB4)..................... 393
Detailed Bit of Control/Status Registers A
(DMACA0 to DMACA4) .................... 388
Detailed Bit of Control/Status Registers B
(DMACB0 to DMACB4)..................... 393
Conversion
A/D Converter (Sequential Conversion Type)......... 4
Conversion Result Register
Conversion Result Register
(ADCR0 to ADCR3) ........................... 355
Coprocessor Control Instructions
Coprocessor Control Instructions....................... 596
Coprocessor Error Trap
Coprocessor Error Trap ...................................... 93
coprocessor Trap
No-coprocessor Trap .......................................... 93
CPU
CPU Clock (CLKB) ......................................... 106
FR CPU .............................................................. 2
CSER
Configuration of the Chip Select Enable Register
(CSER) .............................................. 172
Functions of Bits in the Chip Select Enable Register
(CSER) .............................................. 172
CTBR
Time Base Counter Clear Register (CTBR) ........ 117
D
DACK
Function of the DACK, DEOP,and DREQ
Pins ................................................... 404
Timing of DACK Pin Output ............................ 430
Data Access
Data Access............................................... 72, 569
Data Bus Width
Data Bus Width ....................................... 185, 193
Relationship between Data Bus Width and Control
Signal ................................................ 182
Data Direction Registers
Configuration of the Data Direction Registers
(DDR) ................................................261
Data Format
Data Format .............................................184, 192
Data Length
Data Length (Data Width) .................................417
Data Register
Data Register (ADCR) ......................................354
Data Register (IDAR0/IDAR1) ..........................467
Data Width
Data Length (Data Width) .................................417
DC-DC Regulator
Notes on Using the Internal DC-DC Regulator and
A/D Converter.......................................39
DDR
Configuration of the Data Direction Registers
(DDR) ................................................261
Debugger
Emulator Debugger/Monitor Debugger...............571
Simulator Debugger ..........................................571
Dedicated Registers
List of Dedicated Registers ..................................63
Delay Slot
Branch Instructions with Delay Slot .....................74
Branch Instructions without Delay Slot.................78
Limitations on Branch Instruction with Delay
Slot ......................................................77
Operation of Branch Instruction with Delay
Slot ......................................................75
Operation of Branch Instruction without Delay
Slot ......................................................78
Precaution on Delay Slot .....................................93
Delayed Branch Instructions
Delayed Branch Instructions ..............................588
Delayed Branch Macro Instructions
20-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions ..........592
32-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions ..........594
Delayed Interrupt Control Register
Delayed Interrupt Control Register (DICR) .........327
Delayed Interrupt Module
Block Diagram of the Delayed Interrupt
Module ...............................................326
Delayed Interrupt Module Registers ...................327
Demand Transfer
Demand Transfer ..............................................434
Demand Transfer 2-Cycle Transfer.....................411
Timing of Demand Transfer ..............................440
Timing of Transfer other than Demand
Transfer ..............................................439
Demand Transfer Request
Negate Timing of the DREQ Pin Input when a
Demand Transfer Request is Stopped ....428
601
INDEX
DEOP
Function of the DACK, DEOP,and DREQ Pins... 404
Timing of the DEOP Pin Output ........................ 431
Detection
0 Detection ...................................................... 447
0 Detection Data Register (BSD0) ..................... 445
1 Detection ...................................................... 447
1 Detection Data Register (BSD1) ..................... 445
Change Point Detection .................................... 448
Lack of Error Detection .................................... 570
Detection Result Register
Detection Result Register (BSRR) ..................... 446
Device
State of Device and Each Transition................... 132
Device Initialization
Reset (Device Initialization) ................................ 94
Device States
Device States ................................................... 131
DICR
Delayed Interrupt Control Register (DICR)......... 327
DLYI Bit of DICR............................................ 328
Dimensions
Dimensions.......................................................... 8
Direct Addressing
Direct Addressing Area....................................... 42
Direct Addressing Instructions
Direct Addressing Instructions........................... 595
Division
Clock Division ................................................. 108
DIVR
Base Clock Division Setting Register 0
(DIVR0) ............................................. 120
Base Clock Division Setting Register 1
(DIVR1) ............................................. 123
DLYI
DLYI Bit of DICR............................................ 328
DMA
Clearing Peripheral Interrupts by DMA .............. 422
DMA Access Operation .................................... 236
DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O ->Memory).............. 237
DMA Fly-By Transfer
(I/O ->SDRAM/FCRAM) .................... 241
DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory ->I/O).............. 239
DMA Fly-By Transfer
(SDRAM/FCRAM ->I/O) .................... 243
DMA Transfer and Interrupts ............................ 419
DMA Transfer during Sleep .............................. 425
DMA Transfer Request during External Hold ..... 420
External Hold Request during DMA Transfer ..... 420
Operation Timing for DMA Fly-By Transfer
(I/O ->Memory) .................................. 214
Operation Timing for DMA Fly-By Transfer
(Memory ->I/O) .................................. 215
Simultaneous Occurrence of a DMA Transfer Request
and an External Hold Request............... 420
602
Suppressing DMA............................................ 419
DMA Access Operation
DMA Access Operation.................................... 236
DMA Controller
DMA Controller (DMAC) Registers .................. 386
DMAC (DMA Controller) .................................... 3
DMA External Interface
DMA External Interface Pins ............................ 438
DMA Transfer
DMA Transfer and Interrupts ............................ 419
DMA Transfer during Sleep.............................. 425
External Hold Request during DMA Transfer ..... 420
DMA Transfer Request
DMA Transfer Request during External Hold ..... 420
Simultaneous Occurrence of a DMA Transfer Request
and an External Hold Request .............. 420
DMAC
AC Characteristics of DMAC............................ 431
Configuration of the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC
(IOWR0,IOWR1) ............................... 170
DMA Controller (DMAC) Registers .................. 386
DMAC (DMA Controller) .................................... 3
Functions of Bits in the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC
(IOWR0,IOWR1) ............................... 170
DMAC All-Channel Control Register
Bit Configuration of DMAC All-Channel Control
Register (DMACR) ............................. 402
Detailed Bit of DMAC All-Channel Control Register
(DMACR) .......................................... 402
DMAC Interrupt Control
DMAC Interrupt Control .................................. 425
DMACA
Bit Configuration of Control/Status Registers A
(DMACA0 to DMACA4) .................... 388
Detailed Bit of Control/Status Registers A
(DMACA0 to DMACA4) .................... 388
DMACB
Bit Configuration of Control/Status Registers B
(DMACB0 to DMACB4)..................... 393
Detailed Bit of Control/Status Registers B
(DMACB0 to DMACB4)..................... 393
DMACR
Bit Configuration of DMAC All-Channel Control
Register (DMACR) ............................. 402
Detailed Bit of DMAC All-Channel Control Register
(DMACR) .......................................... 402
DMADA
Bit Configuration of Transfer Source/Transfer
Destination Address Setting Registers
(DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to
DMADA4) ......................................... 400
Detailed Bit of Transfer Source/Transfer Destination
Address Setting Registers (DMASA0 to
DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4) ..... 400
INDEX
DMASA
Bit Configuration of Transfer Source/Transfer
Destination Address Setting Registers
(DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to
DMADA4) ......................................... 400
Detailed Bit of Transfer Source/Transfer Destination
Address Setting Registers (DMASA0 to
DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4) ..... 400
Double Type
Use of the Double Type or Long Double Type.... 567
DREQ
Function of the DACK, DEOP,and DREQ Pins .. 404
Minimum Effective Pulse Width of the DREQ Pin
Input .................................................. 428
Negate Timing of the DREQ Pin Input when a
Demand Transfer Request is Stopped.... 428
Timing of the DREQ Pin Input for Continuing
Transfer Over the Same Channel .......... 430
E
EIRR
External Interrupt Request Register (EIRR: External
Interrupt Request Register) .................. 319
EIT
EIT (Exception,Interrupt,and Trap)...................... 79
EIT Causes........................................................ 79
EIT Interrupt Levels ........................................... 80
EIT Operations .................................................. 90
EIT Vector Table ............................................... 84
Priority of EIT Causes to Be Accepted ................. 88
Return from EIT ................................................ 79
ELVR
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register
(ELVR: External Level Register).......... 320
Embedded REALOS/FR
Embedded REALOS/FR Version....................... 516
Outline of Embedded REALOS/FR ................... 518
Emulator Debugger
Emulator Debugger/Monitor Debugger .............. 571
ENable Interrupt Request Register
Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR: ENable Interrupt
Request Register) ................................ 318
ENIR
Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR: ENable Interrupt
Request Register) ................................ 318
Entire PPG Timer
Block Diagram of the Entire PPG Timer ............ 283
Error Detection
Lack of Error Detection .................................... 570
Error Trap
Coprocessor Error Trap ...................................... 93
Evaluation Chip
Configuration Example :Target Board + Evaluation
Chip + ICE ......................................... 534
Exception
EIT (Exception,Interrupt,and Trap) ......................79
Operation of Undefined Instruction Exception.......92
External Bus Access
External Bus Access .........................................187
External Bus Clock
External Bus Clock (CLKT) ..............................107
External Clock
External Clock ...................................................32
External Clock Input after Power-on.....................39
External Devices
Example of Connection with External
Devices...............................................190
Examples of Connection with External
Devices...............................................194
External Hold
DMA Transfer Request during External Hold......420
External Hold Request
External Hold Request during DMA Transfer......420
Simultaneous Occurrence of a DMA Transfer Request
and an External Hold Request ...............420
External I/O
2-Cycle Transfer (Internal RAM ->External
I/O,RAM) ...........................................247
Transfer between External I/O and External
Memory..............................................431
External Interface
DMA External Interface Pins .............................438
External Interrupt
Operating Procedure for an External Interrupt .....321
Operation of an External Interrupt ......................321
External Interrupt and NMI Controller
Block Diagram of the External Interrupt and NMI
Controller ...........................................316
External Interrupt and NMI Controller
Registers.............................................317
External Interrupt Request Level
External Interrupt Request Level ........................322
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register
(ELVR: External Level Register) ..........320
External Interrupt Request Register
External Interrupt Request Register (EIRR: External
Interrupt Request Register) ...................319
External Level Register
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register
(ELVR: External Level Register) ..........320
External Memory
An Example of Connection of External
Memory..............................................532
Transfer between External I/O and External
Memory..............................................431
External Transfer Request
External Transfer Request Pin............................408
603
INDEX
External Wait
With External Wait........................................... 219
Without External Wait ...................................... 218
External Wait Cycle Timing
External Wait Cycle Timing .............................. 209
F
FCRAM
2-Cycle Transfer (I/O ->SDRAM/FCRAM)........ 250
2-Cycle Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM ->I/O)........ 251
Connecting SDRAM/FCRAM to Many
Areas ................................................. 230
DMA Fly-By Transfer
(I/O ->SDRAM/FCRAM) .................... 241
DMA Fly-By Transfer
(SDRAM/FCRAM ->I/O) .................... 243
SDRAM/FCRAM Interface............................... 224
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRA for
SDRAM/FCRAM Auto-precharge OFF
Mode) ................................................ 167
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRB for
FCRAM Auto-precharge ON Mode) ..... 169
Features
Features....................................... 45, 79, 144, 346
Features of PPG Timer...................................... 282
Features of the UART....................................... 360
Other Features...................................................... 5
Flag
I Flag ................................................................ 81
Flags
Occurrence of Interrupts and Timing for Setting
Flags .................................................. 377
Flash Memory
Allocation of Flash Memory.............................. 511
Flowcharts
Flowcharts....................................................... 503
Fly-By Transfer
DMA Fly-By Transfer (I/O ->Memory).............. 237
DMA Fly-By Transfer
(I/O ->SDRAM/FCRAM) .................... 241
DMA Fly-By Transfer (Memory ->I/O).............. 239
DMA Fly-By Transfer
(SDRAM/FCRAM ->I/O) .................... 243
Flow of Data during Fly-By Transfer ................. 437
Operation Timing for DMA Fly-By Transfer
(I/O ->Memory) .................................. 214
Operation Timing for DMA Fly-By Transfer
(Memory ->I/O) .................................. 215
FR
Embedded REALOS/FR Version....................... 516
FR CPU............................................................... 2
Outline of Embedded REALOS/FR.................... 518
REALOS/FR Configurator Setup....................... 523
FR Family
FR Family Instruction Lists ............................... 578
604
16-bit Free Run Timer
Operational Explanation ................................... 485
Free Run Timer
Block Diagram of the 16-bit Free Run Timer...... 480
Free Run Timer ................................................... 5
Operational Explanation ................................... 485
Registers of 16-bit Free Run Timer.................... 479
G
GCN
Activating Multiple Channels with the GCN....... 303
Bit Configuration of General Control Register 10
(GCN10) ............................................ 293
Bit Configuration of General Control Register 20
(GCN20) ............................................ 296
Details of General Control Register 10
(GCN10) ............................................ 293
General Control Register
Bit Configuration of General Control Register 10
(GCN10) ............................................ 293
Bit Configuration of General Control Register 20
(GCN20) ............................................ 296
Details of General Control Register 10
(GCN10) ............................................ 293
General-purpose Registers
General-purpose Registers .................................. 70
H
Halfword Access
Halfword Access.............................................. 197
Hardware Configuration
Hardware Configuration ........................... 343, 384
Hardware Configuration of the Interrupt
Controller........................................... 330
Hold Request Cancellation Request
Hold Request Cancellation Request (HRCR: Hold
Request Cancel Request) ..................... 341
Hold Request Cancellation Request Sequence .... 344
Hold Request Cancellation Request Level Setting
Register
Bit Configuration of Hold Request Cancellation
Request Level Setting Register
(HRCL) ............................................. 336
Detailed Bit of Hold Request Cancellation Request
Level Setting Register (HRCL) ............ 336
HRCL
Bit Configuration of Hold Request Cancellation
Request Level Setting Register
(HRCL) ............................................. 336
Detailed Bit of Hold Request Cancellation Request
Level Setting Register (HRCL) ............ 336
HRCR
Hold Request Cancellation Request (HRCR: Hold
Request Cancel Request) ..................... 341
INDEX
I
I Flag
I Flag ................................................................ 81
I/O Circuit Types
I/O Circuit Types ............................................... 26
I/O Map
I/O Map .......................................................... 536
I/O Pins
I/O Pins........................................................... 147
I/O Port
Basic Block Diagram of the I/O Port.................. 258
I/O Port Modes ................................................ 259
I/O Wait Registers
Configuration of the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC
(IOWR0,IOWR1) ............................... 170
Functions of Bits in the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC
(IOWR0,IOWR1) ............................... 170
2
I C
I2C Bus Interface ................................................. 5
2
I C Bus Interface
I2C Bus Interface ................................................. 5
I2C Interface
I2C Interface Registers...................................... 451
2
I C interface
Operational Explanation ................................... 468
IBCR
Bus Control Register (IBCR0/IBCR1) ............... 456
IBSR
Bus Status Register (IBSR0/IBSR1) .................. 454
ICCR
Clock Control Register (ICCR0/ICCR1) ............ 462
ICE
Configuration Example :Target Board + Evaluation
Chip + ICE ......................................... 534
ICHCR
Instruction Cache Control Register (ICHCR) ........ 54
ICR
Bit Configuration of Interrupt Control Register
(ICR) ................................................. 334
Configuration of Interrupt Control Register
(ICR) ................................................... 82
Detailed Bit of Interrupt Control Register
(ICR) ................................................. 334
Mapping of Interrupt Control Register (ICR) ........ 82
ICS
Input Capture Control Registers
(ICS01,ICS23) .................................... 493
IDAR
Data Register (IDAR0/IDAR1) ......................... 467
IDBL
Clock Disable Register (IDBL0/IDBL1) ............ 467
ILM
Interrupt Level Mask (ILM) Register ................... 81
Immediate Set
Immediate Set/16-bit/32-bit Immediate Transfer
Instructions .........................................583
Immediate Transfer Instructions
Immediate Set/16-bit/32-bit Immediate Transfer
Instructions .........................................583
INIT
Setting Initialization Reset (INIT) Clear
Sequence ..............................................98
Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) .......................95
Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) State.............135
INIT
INIT Pin Input (Settings Initialization Reset
Pin) ......................................................96
Initial Value
Allocation of a Variable with an Initial Value......565
Initialization
Initialization.....................................................376
Reset (Device Initialization) ................................94
Initialization Reset
INIT Pin Input (Settings Initialization Reset
Pin) ......................................................96
Operation Initialization Reset (RST).....................95
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) Clear
Sequence ..............................................98
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) State...........134
Setting Initialization Reset (INIT) Clear
Sequence ..............................................98
Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) .......................95
Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) State.............135
Input Capture
Block Diagram of the Input Capture ...................492
Overview of Input Capture ................................490
Registers of the Input Capture............................491
Input Capture Control Registers
Input Capture Control Registers
(ICS01,ICS23).....................................493
Input Capture Data Registers
Input Capture Data Registers
(IPCP0 to IPCP3) ................................493
Instruction
How to Read the Instruction Lists ......................573
Instruction Format ............................................577
Operation of INT Instruction ...............................91
Operation of INTE Instruction .............................91
Operation of RETI Instruction .............................93
Operation of Undefined Instruction Exception.......92
Instruction Cache
Areas Cacheable by the Instruction Cache.............59
Configuration of Instruction Cache.......................51
Instruction Cache..................................................3
Instruction Cache Tags........................................52
Updating Entries in the Instruction Cache .............59
Instruction Cache Control Register
Instruction Cache Control Register (ICHCR).........54
605
INDEX
Instruction Cache Status
Instruction Cache Status in Each Operating
Mode ................................................... 58
Instruction Format
Instruction Format ............................................ 577
Instruction Lists
FR Family Instruction Lists ............................... 578
How to Read the Instruction Lists ...................... 573
Instructions
20-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions .......... 592
20-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions ........... 591
32-bit Delayed Branch Macro Instructions .......... 594
32-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions ........... 593
Add-Subtract Instructions.................................. 579
Bit Manipulation Instructions ............................ 581
Compare Instructions........................................ 579
Coprocessor Control Instructions ....................... 596
Delayed Branch Instructions.............................. 588
Direct Addressing Instructions........................... 595
Immediate Set/16-bit/32-bit Immediate Transfer
Instructions ......................................... 583
Logic Instructions............................................. 580
Memory Load Instructions ................................ 584
Memory Store Instructions ................................ 585
Multiply Instructions ........................................ 582
Normal Branch (No Delay) Instructions ............. 586
Other Instructions............................................. 589
Overview of Instructions..................................... 48
Register-to-Register Transfer Instructions........... 585
Resource Instructions........................................ 595
Shift Instructions .............................................. 583
INT Instruction
Operation of INT Instruction ............................... 91
INTE Instruction
Operation of INTE Instruction ............................. 91
Interface
SDRAM/FCRAM Interface............................... 224
Internal Architecture
Internal Architecture........................................... 46
Internal Clock
Internal Clock Operation................................... 277
Internal RAM
2-Cycle Transfer (Internal RAM ->External
I/O,RAM)........................................... 247
Interrupt
Block Diagram of the Delayed Interrupt
Module............................................... 326
Block Diagram of the External Interrupt and NMI
Controller ........................................... 316
Delayed Interrupt Module Registers ................... 327
DMAC Interrupt Control................................... 425
EIT (Exception,Interrupt,and Trap) ...................... 79
EIT Interrupt Levels ........................................... 80
External Interrupt and NMI Controller
Registers ............................................ 317
606
External Interrupt Request Level ....................... 322
Interrupt Number ............................................. 328
Interrupt Sources and Timing Chart (PPG Output:
Normal Polarity) ................................. 301
Interrupt Stack ................................................... 83
Level Mask for Interrupt and NMI....................... 81
Operating Procedure for an External Interrupt..... 321
Operation of an External Interrupt ..................... 321
Interrupt Control Register
Bit Configuration of Interrupt Control Register
(ICR) ................................................. 334
Configuration of Interrupt Control Register (
ICR) .................................................... 82
Detailed Bit of Interrupt Control Register
(ICR) ................................................. 334
Mapping of Interrupt Control Register (ICR) ........ 82
Interrupt Controller
Hardware Configuration of the Interrupt
Controller........................................... 330
Interrupt Controller .............................................. 4
Interrupt Controller Registers ............................ 332
Major Functions of the Interrupt Controller ........ 330
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR: ENable Interrupt
Request Register)................................ 318
Interrupt Level Mask
Interrupt Level Mask (ILM) Register ................... 81
Interrupt Levels
EIT Interrupt Levels........................................... 80
Interrupt Vectors
Interrupt Vectors.............................................. 548
Interrupts
DMA Transfer and Interrupts ............................ 419
Occurrence of Interrupts and Timing for Setting
Flags.................................................. 377
Interval Timers
Other Interval Timers ........................................... 5
IOWR
Configuration of the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC
(IOWR0,IOWR1) ............................... 170
Functions of Bits in the I/O Wait Registers for DMAC
(IOWR0,IOWR1) ............................... 170
IPCP
Input Capture Data Registers
(IPCP0 to IPCP3)................................ 493
ISBA
7-bit Slave Address Register (ISBA0/ISBA1) ..... 465
ISIZE
Configuration of Cache Size Register (ISIZE) ...... 54
ISMK
7-bit Slave Address Mask Register
(ISMK0/ISMK1) ................................ 466
ITBA
10-bit Slave Address Register (ITBA0/ITBA1)... 464
INDEX
ITMK
10-bit Slave Address Mask Register
(ITMK0/ITMK1) ................................ 464
K
-K lib Option
Specification of the -K lib Option When Using a String
Manipulation Function ........................ 567
L
Latch Up
Preventing a Latch Up ........................................ 32
Level Mask
Level Mask for Interrupt and NMI ....................... 81
Line-up
Product Line-up ................................................... 6
Little Endian
Allocation of a Stack to a Little Endian Area ...... 567
Differences between Little Endian and Big
Endian ............................................... 191
Restrictions on the Little Endian Area ................ 191
Location Addresses
Mode Data and Reset Vector Location
Addresses........................................... 531
Logic Instructions
Logic Instructions ............................................ 580
Long Double Type
Use of the Double Type or Long Double Type.... 567
Low-power Modes
Low-power Modes ................................... 131, 136
M
MB91301 Series
Features of the MB91301 Series ............................ 2
MB91302A
Pin Layout of the MB91302A ............................. 12
MB91V301A
Pin Layout of the MB91V301A........................... 11
Unique to the Evaluation Chip MB91V301A ........ 36
MCRA
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRA for
SDRAM/FCRAM Auto-precharge OFF
Mode) ................................................ 167
MCRB
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRB for
FCRAM Auto-precharge ON Mode) ..... 169
MD
Mode Pins (MD0 to MD2) .................................. 33
MDH
Multiply and Divide Registers (MDH/MDL) ........ 65
MDL
Multiply and Divide Registers (MDH/MDL) ........ 65
Memory
Built-in Memory...................................................3
Memory Connection
Memory Connection Example............................232
Memory Load Instructions
Memory Load Instructions.................................584
Memory Map
Memory Map ...............................43, 73, 498, 517
Memory Setting Register
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRA for
SDRAM/FCRAM Auto-precharge OFF
Mode).................................................167
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRB for
FCRAM Auto-precharge ON Mode)......169
Memory Store Instructions
Memory Store Instructions ................................585
Minimum Effective Pulse Width
Minimum Effective Pulse Width of the DREQ Pin
Input...................................................428
Mode
Addressing Mode Symbols ................................575
Cascade Mode ..................................................314
Continuous Conversion Mode............................357
Fetching Mode Data and Reset Vectors after the
Device is Released from a Reset............532
Instruction Cache Status in Each Operating
Mode....................................................58
Mode Data and Reset Vector Access
Addresses ...........................................531
Mode Data and Reset Vector Location
Addresses ...........................................531
Mode Pin .........................................................530
Mode Settings ..................................................141
Operations in the Program Loader Mode.............500
Overview of the Program Loader Mode ..............498
Single-shot Conversion Mode ............................356
Sleep Mode......................................................136
Stop Conversion Mode......................................357
Stop Mode .......................................................138
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRA for
SDRAM/FCRAM Auto-precharge OFF
Mode).................................................167
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRB for
FCRAM Auto-precharge ON Mode)......169
Transfer Mode Settings .....................................441
Mode Pins
Mode Pins (MD0 to MD2)...................................33
Mode Vector
Mode Vector ....................................................530
Modes
Bus Modes .......................................................140
I/O Port Modes.................................................259
Low-power Modes....................................131, 136
Operating Modes ..............................................140
UART Operating Modes ...................................373
607
INDEX
Monitor Debugger
Emulator Debugger/Monitor Debugger .............. 571
Multiple Channels
Activating Multiple Channels with the GCN ....... 303
Multiply and Divide Registers
Multiply and Divide Registers (MDH/MDL) ........ 65
Multiply Instructions
Multiply Instructions ........................................ 582
N
NC
Treatment of NC and OPEN Pins......................... 33
Negate Timing
Negate Timing of the DREQ Pin Input when a
Demand Transfer Request is
Stopped .............................................. 428
NMI
Block Diagram of the External Interrupt and NMI
Controller ........................................... 316
External Interrupt and NMI Controller
Registers ............................................ 317
Level Mask for Interrupt and NMI ....................... 81
NMI........................................................ 322, 340
Operation of User Interrupt/NMI ......................... 90
No Delay
Normal Branch (No Delay) Instructions ............. 586
No-coprocessor Trap
No-coprocessor Trap .......................................... 93
Normal Branch
Normal Branch (No Delay) Instructions ............. 586
Normal Branch Macro Instructions
20-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions ........... 591
32-bit Normal Branch Macro Instructions ........... 593
Normal Polarity
Interrupt Sources and Timing Chart (PPG Output:
Normal Polarity) ................................. 301
Normal Reset
Normal Reset Operation.................................... 101
Notes
Notes .............................................................. 487
O
Objects
Objects............................................................ 519
One-shot Operation
One-shot Operation .......................................... 299
OPEN Pins
Treatment of NC and OPEN Pins......................... 33
Operating Modes
Operating Modes.............................................. 140
Operating States
Operating States of the Counter ......................... 279
608
Operation
Operation Timing of the WRn + Byte Control
Type .................................................. 204
Operation End
Operation End/Stopping ................................... 423
Operation Initialization Reset
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) .................... 95
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) Clear
Sequence.............................................. 98
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) State .......... 134
Operation Timing
Auto-refresh Operation Timing ......................... 227
Burst Read/Write Operation Timing .................. 225
Operation Timing for the CSn ->RD/WRn Setup and
RD/WRn ->CSn Hold Settings ............. 213
Operation Timing for DMA Fly-By Transfer
(I/O ->Memory).................................. 214
Operation Timing for DMA Fly-By Transfer
(Memory ->I/O).................................. 215
Operation Timing for Synchronous Write Enable
Output ............................................... 210
Operation Timing for the CSn Delay Setting ...... 212
Operation Timing of Read ->Write .................... 206
Single Read Operation Timing .......................... 226
Single Read/Write Operation Timing ......... 225, 226
Ordering
Bit Ordering ...................................................... 71
Byte Ordering.................................................... 71
Ordinary Bus Interface
Ordinary Bus Interface ..................................... 202
Oscillation Circuit
Quartz Oscillation Circuit ................................... 32
Oscillation Stabilization Wait
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Reset (RST)
Status................................................. 134
Oscillation Stabilization Wait RUN State ........... 134
Sources of an Oscillation Stabilization Wait ......... 99
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
Selecting an Oscillation Stabilization Wait
Time .................................................. 100
Other Instructions
Other Instructions ............................................ 589
Overview
Overview ........................................................ 450
P
PC
Program Counter (PC) ........................................ 63
PCNH
Bit Function of Control Status Registers
(PCNH,PCNL) ................................... 286
Control Status Registers (PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0,
PCNL:PCNL3 to PCNL0) ................... 286
INDEX
PCNL
Bit Function of Control Status Registers
(PCNH,PCNL) ................................... 286
Control Status Registers (PCNH:PCNH3 to PCNH0,
PCNL:PCNL3 to PCNL0).................... 286
PCR
Configuration of the Pull-up Resistor Control
Registers (PCR) .................................. 262
PCSR
Bit Configuration of PPG Cycle Set Register
(PCSR:PCSR3 to PCSR0).................... 290
PDR
Configuration of the Port Data Registers
(PDR) ................................................ 260
PDUT
Bit Configuration of PPG Duty Set Register
(PDUT:PDUT3 to PDUT0).................. 291
Peripheral Clock
Peripheral Clock (CLKP).................................. 106
Peripheral Interrupts
Clearing Peripheral Interrupts by DMA.............. 422
PFR
Configuration of the Port Function Registers
(PFR)................................................. 263
Function of the Port Function Registers (PFR) .... 264
Pin Functions
Description of Pin Functions ............................... 15
Pin Layout
Pin Layout of the MB91302A ............................. 12
Pin Layout of the MB91V301A........................... 11
Pin No. Table
Pin No. Table .................................................... 13
Pin State Table
Meaning of Terms in the Pin State Table ............ 552
Pin State Table................................................. 553
Pin/Timing Control Register
Configuration of the Pin/Timing Control Register
(TCR) ................................................ 175
Functions of Bits in the Pin/Timing Control Register
(TCR) ................................................ 175
Pins
Treatment of NC and OPEN Pins ........................ 33
PLL
PLL Multiply-by Rate ...................................... 104
PLL Operation Enable ...................................... 104
Port Data Registers
Configuration of the Port Data Registers
(PDR) ................................................ 260
Port Function Registers
Configuration of the Port Function Registers
(PFR)................................................. 263
Function of the Port Function Registers (PFR) .... 264
Power Supply
Power Supply Pins ............................................. 32
Power-on
External Clock Input after Power-on.....................39
Power-on Sequence ..........................................229
Processing after Power-on ...................................39
PPG Cycle Set Register
Bit Configuration of PPG Cycle Set Register
(PCSR:PCSR3 to PCSR0) ....................290
PPG Duty Set Register
Bit Configuration of PPG Duty Set Register
(PDUT:PDUT3 to PDUT0) ..................291
PPG Operation
PPG Operation .................................................297
PPG Output
Examples for Setting PPG Output to all-"L" or
all-"H" ................................................301
Interrupt Sources and Timing Chart (PPG Output:
Normal Polarity)..................................301
PPG Timer
Block Diagram of One Channel of the PPG
Timer .................................................284
Block Diagram of the Entire PPG Timer .............283
Features of PPG Timer ......................................282
Register List of PPG Timer................................285
PPG Timer Register
Bit Configuration of PPG Timer Register
(PTMR:PTMR3 to PTMR0) .................292
Precaution
Precaution on Delay Slot .....................................93
Precautions
Precautions on the U-TIMER Control Register
(UTIMC) ............................................312
Precautions on Usage ........................................379
Precautions on Use .............................................33
Precautions on Using the 16-bit Reload
Timer .................................................280
Precautions on Using the A/D Converter.............358
Precautions when Using ....................................305
Prefetch Operation
Prefetch Operation ............................................221
Principal Operations
Principal Operations .........................................405
Priority
Priority Among Channels ..................................426
Priority Decision ..............................................337
Priority of EIT Causes to Be Accepted..................88
Priority of State Transition Requests...................135
Product Line-up
Product Line-up....................................................6
Program Access
Program Access..................................................72
Program Allocation
Program Allocation...........................................528
Program Counter
Program Counter (PC).........................................63
609
INDEX
Program Example
Program Example............................................. 522
Program Example of Smooth Startup and Stop of
Clock ................................................. 129
Program Loader
Setting the Program Loader ............................... 499
Program Loader Mode
Operations in the Program Loader Mode ............ 500
Overview of the Program Loader Mode.............. 498
Program Status
Program Status (PS) Register............................... 66
PS
Program Status (PS) Register............................... 66
PTMR
Bit Configuration of PPG Timer Register
(PTMR:PTMR3 to PTMR0) ................. 292
Pull-up Resistor Control Registers
Configuration of the Pull-up Resistor Control
Registers (PCR) .................................. 262
Pulse Width
Minimum Effective Pulse Width of the DREQ Pin
Input .................................................. 428
Q
Quartz Oscillation
Quartz Oscillation Circuit ................................... 32
R
RAM
2-Cycle Transfer (Internal RAM ->External
I/O,RAM)........................................... 247
RCR
Bit Functions of the Refresh Control Register
(RCR) ................................................ 178
Structure of the Refresh Control Register
(RCR) ................................................ 177
REALOS
Embedded REALOS/FR Version....................... 516
Outline of Embedded REALOS/FR.................... 518
REALOS/FR Configurator Setup....................... 523
REALOS/FR Configurator
REALOS/FR Configurator Setup....................... 523
Receive Operation
Receive Operation ............................................ 374
Refresh
Self Refresh ..................................................... 228
Refresh Control Register
Bit Functions of the Refresh Control Register
(RCR) ................................................ 178
Structure of the Refresh Control Register
(RCR) ................................................ 177
Register
Interrupt Level Mask (ILM) Register ................... 81
610
Program Status (PS) Register .............................. 66
Register-to-Register Transfer Instructions
Register-to-Register Transfer Instructions .......... 585
Reload Operation
Reload Operation ..................................... 414, 418
Reload Register
Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Reload Register
(TMRLR:TMRLR2 to TMRLR0)......... 276
Reload Register
(UTIMR:UTIMR2 to UTIMR0) ........... 309
Reload Timer
16-bit Reload Timer Registers........................... 271
Overview of the 16-bit Reload Timer................. 270
Precautions on Using the 16-bit Reload
Timer................................................. 280
Reload Timer....................................................... 4
When the 16-bit Reload Timer is Used for
Activation .......................................... 304
Reload Values
Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload
Values ............................................... 382
Reset
Fetching Mode Data and Reset Vectors after the
Device is Released from a Reset ........... 532
Normal Reset Operation ................................... 101
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) .................... 95
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) State .......... 134
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Reset (RST)
Status................................................. 134
Reset (Device Initialization)................................ 94
Setting Initialization Reset (INIT) Clear
Sequence.............................................. 98
Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) ...................... 95
Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) State ............ 135
Software Reset (STCR: SRST Bit Writing) .......... 96
Synchronous Reset Operation ........................... 101
Watchdog Reset................................................. 97
Reset Vector
Mode Data and Reset Vector Access
Addresses........................................... 531
Mode Data and Reset Vector Location
Addresses........................................... 531
Reset Vectors
Fetching Mode Data and Reset Vectors after the
Device is Released from a Reset ........... 532
Reset Vectors .................................................. 530
Resource Instructions
Resource Instructions ....................................... 595
RETI Instruction
Operation of RETI Instruction............................. 93
Return Pointer
Return Pointer (RP)............................................ 64
RP
Return Pointer (RP)............................................ 64
INDEX
RSRR
Reset Source Register/Watchdog Timer Control
Register (RSRR) ................................. 110
RST
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) .................... 95
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) Clear
Sequence.............................................. 98
Operation Initialization Reset (RST) State .......... 134
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Reset (RST)
Status................................................. 134
RUN State
Oscillation Stabilization Wait RUN State ........... 134
RUN State (Normal Operation) ......................... 133
S
SCR
Bit Configuration of Serial Control Register
(SCR) ................................................ 365
Dedicated Bit of Serial Control Register
(SCR) ................................................ 365
SDRAM
2-Cycle Transfer (I/O ->SDRAM/FCRAM) ....... 250
2-Cycle Transfer (SDRAM/FCRAM ->I/O) ....... 251
Connecting SDRAM/FCRAM to Many Areas .... 230
DMA Fly-By Transfer
(I/O ->SDRAM/FCRAM) .................... 241
DMA Fly-By Transfer
(SDRAM/FCRAM ->I/O) .................... 243
SDRAM/FCRAM Interface .............................. 224
Structure of the Memory Setting Register (MCRA for
SDRAM/FCRAM Auto-precharge OFF
Mode) ................................................ 167
Section
Restriction on Section Types ............................. 570
Section............................................................ 568
Section Allocation
Section Allocation............................................ 520
Self Refresh
Self Refresh..................................................... 228
Send Operation
Send Operation ................................................ 374
Sequential Conversion
A/D Converter (Sequential Conversion Type)......... 4
Serial Control Register
Bit Configuration of Serial Control Register
(SCR) ................................................ 365
Dedicated Bit of Serial Control Register
(SCR) ................................................ 365
Serial Input Data Register
Serial Input Data Register (SIDR)/Serial Output Data
Register (SODR)................................. 368
Serial Mode Register
Bit Configuration of Serial Mode Register
(SMR)................................................ 363
Detailed Bit of Serial Mode Register (SMR) .......363
Serial Output Data Register
Serial Input Data Register (SIDR)/Serial Output Data
Register (SODR) .................................368
Serial Status Register
Bit Configuration of Serial Status Register
(SSR) .................................................369
Detailed Bit of Serial Status Register (SSR) ........369
Setting Initialization Reset
Setting Initialization Reset (INIT) Clear
Sequence ..............................................98
Settings Initialization Reset
Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) .......................95
Settings Initialization Reset (INIT) State.............135
Setup Procedure
Setup Procedure .................................................60
Shift Instructions
Shift Instructions ..............................................583
SIDR
Serial Input Data Register (SIDR)/Serial Output Data
Register (SODR) .................................368
Simulator Debugger
Simulator Debugger ..........................................571
Simultaneous Occurrence
Simultaneous Occurrence of a DMA Transfer Request
and an External Hold Request ...............420
Single Read Operation
Single Read Operation Timing...........................226
Single Read/Write Operation
Single Read/Write Operation Timing..........225, 226
Single-shot Conversion Mode
Single-shot Conversion Mode ............................356
Slave Address
Example of Slave Address and Data Transfer ......473
Sleep
DMA Transfer during Sleep ..............................425
Sleep Mode
Sleep Mode......................................................136
Sleep State
Sleep State .......................................................133
Smooth Startup
Program Example of Smooth Startup and Stop of
Clock..................................................129
Smooth Startup and Stop of Clock......................128
SMR
Bit Configuration of Serial Mode Register
(SMR) ................................................363
Detailed Bit of Serial Mode Register (SMR) .......363
SODR
Serial Input Data Register (SIDR)/Serial Output Data
Register (SODR) .................................368
Software Request
Software Request..............................................409
611
INDEX
Software Reset
Software Reset (STCR: SRST Bit Writing)........... 96
Source Clock
Source Clock ................................................... 103
Specifications
Overview of Specifications ................................. 51
SRST
Software Reset (STCR: SRST Bit Writing)........... 96
SSP
System Stack Pointer (SSP)........................... 64, 83
SSR
Bit Configuration of Serial Status Register
(SSR) ................................................. 369
Detailed Bit of Serial Status Register (SSR)........ 369
Stack
Allocation of a Stack to a Little Endian Area ...... 567
Interrupt Stack ................................................... 83
Standby Control Register
Standby Control Register (STCR) ...................... 112
Standby Mode
Return from Standby Mode (Sleep/Stop) ............ 342
Startup Routine
Startup Routine ................................................ 521
State Transition Requests
Priority of State Transition Requests .................. 135
STCR
Software Reset (STCR: SRST Bit Writing)........... 96
Standby Control Register (STCR) ...................... 112
Step Trace Trap
Operation of Step Trace Trap .............................. 92
Stop Conversion Mode
Stop Conversion Mode ..................................... 357
Stop Mode
Stop Mode ....................................................... 138
STOP state
Return Operation from STOP State .................... 324
Stop State
Stop State ........................................................ 133
Stopping
Operation End/Stopping.................................... 423
Stopping due to an Error ................................... 423
String Arrangement
Operations other than the String Arrangement Using a
String Manipulation Function ............... 566
String Manipulation Function
Operations other than the String Arrangement Using a
String Manipulation Function ............... 566
Specification of the -K lib Option When Using a String
Manipulation Function......................... 567
Structure Assignment
Structure Assignment........................................ 565
Subtract Instructions
Add-Subtract Instructions.................................. 579
612
Successive Accesses
Basic Timing (For Successive Accesses) ............ 203
Synchronous Reset
Synchronous Reset Operation ........................... 101
Synchronous Write Enable Output
Operation Timing for Synchronous Write Enable
Output ............................................... 210
System Calls
Contained System Calls .................................... 518
System Stack Pointer
System Stack Pointer (SSP) .......................... 64, 83
T
Table Base Register
Table Base Register (TBR) ........................... 64, 84
Target Board
Configuration Example :Target Board + Evaluation
Chip + ICE......................................... 534
TBCR
Time Base Counter Control Register
(TBCR).............................................. 115
TBR
Table Base Register (TBR) ........................... 64, 84
TCCS
Timer Control Status Register (TCCS) ............... 482
TCDT
Timer Data Register (TCDT) ............................ 481
TCR
Configuration of the Pin/Timing Control Register
(TCR) ................................................ 175
Functions of Bits in the Pin/Timing Control Register
(TCR) ................................................ 175
Temporary Stopping
Temporary Stopping......................................... 422
Time Base Counter
Time Base Counter .......................................... 125
Time Base Counter Clear Register
Time Base Counter Clear Register (CTBR) ........ 117
Time Base Counter Control Register
Time Base Counter Control Register
(TBCR).............................................. 115
Time-base Timer
Time-base Timer.............................................. 126
Timer Control Status Register
Timer Control Status Register (TCCS) ............... 482
Timer Data Register
Timer Data Register (TCDT) ............................ 481
Timer Register
Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Timer Register
(TMR:TMR2 to TMR0) ...................... 275
Timing Chart
Interrupt Sources and Timing Chart (PPG Output:
Normal Polarity) ................................. 301
INDEX
TMCSR
Bit Configuration of the Control Status Register
(TMCSR) ........................................... 272
Bit Functions of the Control Status Register
(TMCSR) ........................................... 272
TMR
Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Timer Register
(TMR:TMR2 to TMR0)....................... 275
TMRLR
Bit Configuration of the 16-bit Reload Register
(TMRLR:TMRLR2 to TMRLR0)......... 276
Trace
Operation of Step Trace Trap .............................. 92
Transfer
Block Transfer ................................................. 432
Burst Transfer.................................................. 433
Demand Transfer ............................................. 434
Example of Slave Address and Data Transfer ..... 473
Flow of Data during 2-Cycle Transfer ................ 435
Flow of Data during Fly-By Transfer ................. 437
If an External Pin Transfer Request is Re-entered
During Transfer .................................. 431
If Another Transfer Request Occurs during Block
Transfer ............................................. 431
Timing of the DREQ Pin Input for Continuing
Transfer Over the Same Channel .......... 430
Timing of Transfer other than Demand
Transfer ............................................. 439
Transfer between External I/O and External
Memory ............................................. 431
Transfer Address
Transfer Address.............................................. 406
Transfer Count
Transfer Count and Transfer End....................... 407
Transfer Count Control
Transfer Count Control..................................... 418
Transfer Data
Transfer Data Format ............................... 374, 375
Transfer End
Transfer Count and Transfer End....................... 407
Transfer Instructions
Immediate Set/16-bit/32-bit Immediate Transfer
Instructions......................................... 583
Register-to-Register Transfer Instructions .......... 585
Transfer Mode
Transfer Mode ................................................. 405
Transfer Mode Settings..................................... 441
Transfer Request
Transfer Request Acceptance and Transfer ......... 421
Transfer Sequence
Selection of the Transfer Sequence .................... 410
Transfer Source/Transfer Destination Address
Setting Register
Bit Configuration of Transfer Source/Transfer
Destination Address Setting Registers
(DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to
DMADA4)..........................................400
Detailed Bit of Transfer Source/Transfer Destination
Address Setting Registers (DMASA0 to
DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4)......400
Transfer Type
Transfer Type...................................................406
Transition
State of Device and Each Transition ...................132
Transition Requests
Priority of State Transition Requests...................135
Trap
Coprocessor Error Trap .......................................93
EIT (Exception,Interrupt,and Trap) ......................79
No-coprocessor Trap...........................................93
Operation of Step Trace Trap...............................92
U
UART
Example of Using the UART .............................380
Selecting a Clock for the UART.........................373
UART .................................................................4
UART Operating Modes ...................................373
UART Registers ...............................................362
Undefined Instruction
Operation of Undefined Instruction Exception.......92
Underflow Operation
Underflow Operation ........................................278
Unused Input Pins
Unused Input Pins...............................................32
User Interrupt
Operation of User Interrupt/NMI..........................90
User Stack Pointer
User Stack Pointer (USP) ....................................65
User Tasks
User Tasks .......................................................519
USP
User Stack Pointer (USP) ....................................65
UTIM
U-TIMER (UTIM:UTIM2 to UTIM0) ................309
UTIMC
Bit Details of U-TIMER Control Register
(UTIMC) ............................................310
Precautions on the U-TIMER Control Register
(UTIMC) ............................................312
U-TIMER Control Register (UTIMC:UTIMC2 to
UTIMC0)............................................310
U-TIMER
Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload
Values ................................................382
613
INDEX
Overview of the U-TIMER................................ 308
U-TIMER (UTIM:UTIM2 to UTIM0)................ 309
U-TIMER Registers.......................................... 309
U-TIMER Control Register
Bit Details of U-TIMER Control Register
(UTIMC) ............................................ 310
Precautions on the U-TIMER Control Register
(UTIMC) ............................................ 312
U-TIMER Control Register (UTIMC:UTIMC2 to
UTIMC0) ........................................... 310
UTIMR
Reload Register
(UTIMR:UTIMR2 to UTIMR0) ........... 309
V
Variable
Allocation of a Variable with an Initial Value ..... 565
Vector Table
EIT Vector Table ............................................... 84
W
Wait Cycle Timing
Auto-Wait Cycle Timing................................... 208
External Wait Cycle Timing .............................. 209
Watchdog Reset
Watchdog Reset ................................................. 97
Word Access
Word Access.................................................... 196
614
CM71-10114-4E
FUJITSU SEMICONDUCTOR • CONTROLLER MANUAL
FR60
32-BIT MICROCONTROLLER
MB91301 Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
March 2007 the fourth edition
Published
FUJITSU LIMITED
Edited
Business Promotion Dept.
Electronic Devices